SIP4 E8 2017 en PDF

Protection, control, measurement, and automation functions
SIPROTEC 4 – Devices
Catalog SIP · Edition No. 8
siemens.com/siprotec
Overview of Siemens Protection Catalogs
Documentation
Selection guide SIPROTEC

SIPROTEC 5 SIPROTEC 4 Accessories Reyrolle
for SIPROTEC and Compact
Catalog Catalog Catalog Catalogs
Reyrolle Catalog
Manuals Manuals Manuals Manuals Manuals
Overview of the Documentation
SIPROTEC 4 Catalog: Accessories Catalog:

This catalog describes the features of the device series This catalog describes the accesories for protection, power
SIPROTEC 4. quality and substation automation devices.
Selection guide for SIPROTEC and Reyrolle: Reyrolle Catalogs:

The selection guide offers an overview of the device series of The Reyrolle catalogs describes the features such as scope of
the Siemens protection devices, and a device selection table. functions, hardware and application.
SIPROTEC Compact Catalog: Manuals:

The SIPROTEC Compact catalog describes the features of the The manuals describe, among others, the operation, installati-
SIPROTEC Compact series and presents the available devices on, the technical data, of the devices.
and their application possibilities.
SIPROTEC 5 Catalogs:
The catalog describes the features of the SIPROTEC 5 system
and device-specific features such as scope of functions, hard-
ware and application.
Contents
SIPROTEC 4 1. Product Selection
1/1 to 1/6 1
2. Overview / Applications
Catalog SIP · Edition No. 8
2/1 to 2/48 2
Invalid: Catalog SIP · Edition No. 7
3. Operating Programs
3/1 to 3/8 3
4. Communication
4/1 to 4/12 4
5. Overcurrent Protection
5/1 to 5/146 5
6. Distance Protection
6/1 to 6/70 6
7. Line Differential Protection
7/1 to 7/56 7
8. Transformer Differential Protection
8/1 to 8/38 8
9. Busbar Differential Protection
9/1 to 9/18 9
10. Relays for Various Protection Applications
10/1 to 10/18 10
11. Generator Protection
11/1 to 11/96 11
12. Substation Automation
12/1 to 12/34 12
13. Appendix
13/1 to 13/26 13
The products and systems described in this catalog
are manufactured and sold according to a certified
management system (acc. to ISO 9001, ISO 14001
and BS OHSAS 18001).
Siemens SIP · Edition No. 8 1

Product Index
Type Description Page
DIGSI 4 Operating software for SIPROTEC devices 3/3
IEC 61850 System Configurator 3/5
SIGRA 4 Evaluation software for fault records 3/7

2 6MD61 IO-box 12/3
6MD63 Bay control unit 12/11
6MD66 High-voltage bay control unit 12/13
7SA522 Distance protection relay for transmission lines 6/39
7SA6 Distance protection relay for all voltage levels 6/3
7SD52/53 Multi-end differential and distance protection in one relay 7/25
7SD61 Differential protection relay for 2 line ends 7/3
7SJ61 Multifunction protection relay 5/3
7SJ64 Multifunction protection relay with synchronization 5/85
7SJ66 Multifunction protection relay with local control 5/119
7SS52 Distributed busbar and breaker failure protection 9/3
7UM61 Multifunction generator and motor protection relay 11/3
7UM62 Multifunction generator, motor and transformer protection relay 11/27
7UT6 Differential protection relay for transformers, generators, motors and busbars 8/3
7VE6 Multifunction paralleling device 11/57
7VK61 Breaker management relay 10/3
7VU683 High Speed Busbar Transfer 11/77
2 Siemens SIP · Edition No. 8

Function overview
Page
1
Relay Functions 1/2
Function overview
SIPROTEC 4 devices series
Device application Distance Line

protection differential
1 protection
7SD610
7SA522
7SA61
7SA63
7SA64
2
7SD5
Type
ANSI Functions Abbr.
Protection functions for 3-pole tripping 3-pole
Protection functions for 1-pole tripping 1-pole
3 14 Locked rotor protection I> + V< – – – – – –
21/21N Distance protection Z<, V/∠(V,I) –
24 Overexcitation protection V/f – – – – – –
25 Synchrocheck, synchronizing function Sync –
4 27 Undervoltage protection V<
27TN/59TN Stator ground fault 3rd harmonics V0<,>(3.Harm.) – – – – – –
Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection Q>/V< – –
5 32
37
Directional power supervision
Undercurrent, underpower
P<>, Q<>
I<, P< – –
38 Temperature supervision Θ> – –
40 Underexcitation protection 1/XD – – – – – –
6 46 Unbalanced-load protection I2> – – – – – –
46 Negative-sequence system overcurrent protection I2>, I2/I1> – – – – – –
47 Phase-sequence-voltage supervision LA, LB, LC
7 47
48
Overvoltage protection, negative-sequence system
Starting-time supervision
V>2
I2start – – – – – –
49 Thermal overload protection θ, I2t –
50/50N Definite time-overcurrent protection I>
8 SOFT
50Ns
Instantaneous tripping at switch onto fault
Sensitive ground-current protection INs> –
Intermittent ground fault protection Iie> – –
50EF End fault protection – – – – – –
9 50BF Circuit-breaker failure protection CBFP
51/51N Inverse time-overcurrent protection IP, INp
50L Load-jam protection I>L – – – – – –
10 51C
51V
Cold load pickup
Voltage dependent overcurrent protection t=f(I)+V<
– – – – –
–
–
–
55 Power factor cosφ 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
59 Overvoltage protection V>
11 59N
59R, 27R
Overvoltage protection, zero-sequence system
Rate-of-voltage-change protection
V0>
dV/dt – – – – – –
60FL Fuse-Failure-Monitor
64 Sensitive ground-fault protection (machine) – – – – – –
12 66 Restart inhibit I2t – – – – – –
= basic = optional (additional price) – = not available
13 1) via CFC
More functions on page 1/4
You will find the whole function overview of the SIPROTEC devices at:
www.siemens.com/protection or in the current catalog: Selection Guide for SIPROTEC and Reyrolle
14
15
1/2 Siemens SIP · Edition No. 8
Function overview
Device application Generator Transformer Busbar Bay controller Breaker Synchroniz- High Speed
and motor protection protection manage- ing Busbar
protection ment Transfer 1
7VU683
7UT612
7UT613
7UM61
7UM62
6MD61
6MD63
6MD66
7UT63
7VK61
2
7SS52
7SJ61
7SJ62
7SJ63
7SJ64
7SJ66
7VE6
– – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – 3
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – 4
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– –
1)
–
– – –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
5
– – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – 6
– – – – – – –
– – – – – –
– –
– – –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
– –
–
–
–
–
7
– – – – – – –
– – – –
– – –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
– – – –
8
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – 9
– – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – –
– –
– – –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
10
– 1) – – – – – – –
– – – – – – –
–
– – – –
–
– – –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
– –
–
–
–
–
11
– – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – 12
Table continued on next page
13
14
15
Siemens SIP · Edition No. 8 1/3
Function overview
Device application Distance Line

protection differential
1 protection
7SD610
7SA522
7SA61
7SA63
7SA64
2
7SD5
Type
ANSI Functions Abbr.
67 Directional time-overcurrent protection, phase I>,IP ∠ (V,I) 1) 1) 1) 1) –
67N Directional time-overcurrent protection for ground-faults IN>, INP ∠ (V,I)
3 67Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection for systems with resonant or INs>,
isolated neutral INsP ∠ (V,I)
–
67Ns Directional intermittent ground fault protection Iie dir> – – – – – –

68 Power-swing blocking ΔZ/Δt –
4 74TC Trip-circuit supervision TCS
78 Out-of-step protection ΔZ/Δt –
79 Automatic reclosing AR
5 81
81R
Frequency protection
Rate-of-frequency-change protection
f<, f>
df/dt – – – – – –
Vector-jump protection ∆φU> – – – – – –
85 Teleprotection
6 86
87
Lockout
Differential protection ΔI – – – –
87N Differential ground-fault protection ΔIN
Broken-wire detection for differential protection – – – –
7 FL Fault locator FL
Further Functions
Measured values
8 Switching-statistic counters
Logic editor
CFC switching sequences for control applications – – – –
Inrush-current detection
9 External trip initiation
High Speed busbar transfer function – – – – – –
Fault recording of analog and binary signals
Monitoring and supervision
10 Protection interface, serial
No. Setting groups 4 4 4 4 4 4
Changeover of setting group
11 Circuit breaker test
= basic = optional (additional price) – = not available
1) via CFC
12 You will find the whole function overview of the SIPROTEC devices at:
www.siemens.com/protection or in the current catalog: Selection Guide for SIPROTEC and Reyrolle
13
14
15
Function overview
Device application Generator Transformer Busbar Bay controller Breaker Synchroniz- High Speed
and motor protection protection manage- ing Busbar
protection ment Transfer 1
7VU683
7UT612
7UT613
7UM61
7UM62
6MD61
6MD63
6MD66
7UT63
7VK61
2
7SS52
7SJ61
7SJ62
7SJ63
7SJ64
7SJ66
7VE6
– – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – 3
– – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – 4
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – –
–
– –
–
– – –
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
5
– – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – –
– –
–
–
–
–
– –
–
–
–
–
6
– – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – 7
–
–
–
8
– – – – – – – –
1) – – – –
– 9
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
– –
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 10
4 4 4 4 4 2 2 4 4 4 1 4 4 4 4 4 4
–
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
11
12
13
14
15
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Overview / Applications
Page
SIPROTEC Device Series 2/3
Typical protection schemes 2/16

2
Protection coordination 2/37
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Overview
SIPROTEC Device Series
Solutions for today’s and future power supply systems –

for more than 100 years
SIPROTEC has established itself on the energy market for 1
decades as a powerful and complete system family of numerical
protection relays and bay controllers from Siemens.
SIPROTEC protection relays from Siemens can be consistently
used throughout all applications in medium and high voltage.
2
With SIPROTEC, you have their systems firmly and safely under
control, and have the basis to implement cost-efficient solutions
for all duties in modern, intelligent and “smart” grids. Users can
combine the units of the different SIPROTEC device series at 3
will for solving manifold duties – because SIPROTEC stands for
continuity, openness and future-proof design.
As the innovation driver and trendsetter in the field of protection
systems for more than 100 years, Siemens helps you to design 4
their grids in an intelligent, ecological, reliable and efficient way,
and to operate them economically. As a pioneer, Siemens has
decisively influenced the development of numerical protection
systems (Fig. 2/2). The first application went into operation in
Fig. 2/1 SIPROTEC Relay Family
5
Würzburg, Germany, in 1977. Consistent integration of protec-
tion and control functions for all SIPROTEC devices was the How can system operators benefit from this experience?
innovation step in the 90ies. After release of the communication • Proven and complete applications
standard IEC 61850 in the year 2004, Siemens was the first
manufacturer worldwide to put a system with this communica-
• Easy integration into your system 6
tion standard into operation. In the meantime we have delivered • Highest quality of hardware and functionality
more than 500,000 devices with IEC 61850 included. • Excellent operator friendliness of devices and tools
Many users have approved SIPROTEC protection devices for use • Easy data exchange between applications 7
in their power systems. The devices have also been certified by • Extraordinary consistency between product- and system-
independent test institutes and universities (KEMA, EPRI, LOYD, engineering
UR Laboratories). • Reduced complexity by easy operation
• Siemens as a reliable, worldwide operating partner. 8
Information about SIPROTEC 5 and SIPROTEC Compact product
families can be found in the related catalogs or at:
www.siemens.com/siprotec
9
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 2/2 SIPROTEC – Pioneer over generations

15
Overview
SIPROTEC Compact – Maximum protection-minimum space
1 Perfect protection, smallest space reliable and flexible protection

for energy distribution and industrial systems with minimum
space requirements. The devices of the SIPROTEC Compact
family offer an extensive variety of functions in a compact and
thus space-saving ¹⁄₆ x 19" housing. The devices can be used as
2 main protection in medium-voltage applications or as back-up
protection in high-voltage systems.
SIPROTEC Compact provides suitable devices for many applica-
tions in energy distribution, such as the protection of feeders,
3 lines or motors. Moreover, it also performs tasks such as system
decoupling, load shedding, load restoration, as well as voltage
and frequency protection.
4 The SIPROTEC Compact series is based on millions of operational

experience with SIPROTEC 4 and a further-developed, compact
hardware, in which many customer suggestions were integrated.
This offers maximum reliability combined with excellent func-
tionality and flexibility.
5 • Simple installation by means of pluggable current and voltage
Fig. 2/3 SIPROTEC Compact
terminal blocks
• Thresholds adjustable via software (3 stages guarantee a safe
6 and reliable recording of input signals)

• Easy adjustment of secondary current transformer values
(1 A/5 A) to primary transformers via DIGSI 4
• Quick operations at the device by means of 9 freely program-
7 mable function keys
• Clear overview with six-line display
• Easy service due to buffer battery replaceable at the front side
• Use of standard cables via USB port at the front
8 • Integration in the communication network by means of two
further communication interfaces
• Integrated switch for low-cost and redundant optical and
9 electrical Ethernet rings

• Ethernet redundancy protocols RSTP, PRP and HSR for highest
availability
• Reduction of wiring between devices by means of cross-
10 communication via Ethernet (IEC 61850 GOOSE)
• Time synchronization to the millisecond via Ethernet with Fig. 2/4 SIPROTEC Compact – rear view
SNTP for targeted fault evaluation
• Adjustable to the protection requirements by means of
11 “flexible protection functions”
• Comfortable engineering and evaluation via DIGSI 4.
12
13
14
15 Fig. 2/5 Feeder protection relay SIPROTEC with HMI

Overview
SIPROTEC 5 – the new benchmark for protection,

automation and monitoring
The SIPROTEC 5 series is based on the long field experience of 1
the SIPROTEC device series, and has been especially designed
for the new requirements of modern high-voltage systems.
For this purpose, SIPROTEC 5 is equipped with extensive func-
tionalities and device types. With the holistic and consistent
engineering tool DIGSI 5, a solution has also been provided for
2
the increasingly complex processes, from the design via the
engineering phase up to the test and operation phase.
Thanks to the high modularity of hardware and software, 3
the functionality of the device types can be tailored to the
requested application and adjusted to the ever changing
requirements throughout the entire lifecycle.
In addition to the reliable and selective protection and the 4
complete automation function, SIPROTEC 5 offers an extensive
database for operation and monitoring of modern power sup-
ply systems. Synchrophasors (PMU), power quality data and
extensive operational equipment data are part of the scope of
Fig. 2/6 SIPROTEC 5 – modular hardware
5
supply.
• Powerful protection functions guarantee the safety of the
system operator's equipment and employees
• Individually configurable devices save money on initial 6
investment as well as storage of spare parts, maintenance,
expansion and adjustment of your equipment
• Arc protection, detection of transient ground faults, and
process bus can easily be integrated and retrofitted 7
• Clear and easy-to-use of devices and software thanks to
user-friendly design
• Increase of reliability and quality of the engineering process
• High reliability due to consequent implementation of safety
8
and security
• Powerful communication components guarantee safe and
effective solutions 9
• Full compatibility between IEC 61850 Editions 1 and 2
• Integrated switch for low-cost and redundant optical and
electrical Ethernet rings
Fig. 2/7 SIPROTEC 5 – rear view
10
availability
• Efficient operating concepts by flexible engineering of
IEC 61850 Edition 2
• Comprehensive database for monitoring of modern power 11
grids
• Optimal smart automation platform for transmission grids
based on integrated synchrophasor measurement units
(PMU) and power quality functions. 12
13
14
Fig. 2/8 Application in the high-voltage system

15
Overview
SIPROTEC 4 – the proven, reliable and future-proof

protection for all applications
1 SIPROTEC 4 represents a worldwide successful and proven device
series with more than 1 million devices in field use.
Due to the homogenous system platform, the unique engineer-
2 ing program DIGSI 4 and the great field experience, the
SIPROTEC 4 device family has gained the highest appreciation
of users all over the world. Today, SIPROTEC 4 is considered
the standard for numerical protection systems in all fields of
application.
3 SIPROTEC 4 provides suitable devices for all applications from
power generation and transmission up to distribution and
industrial systems.
4 SIPROTEC 4 is a milestone in protection systems. The SIPROTEC 4
device series implements the integration of protection, control,
measuring and automation functions optimally in one device. In
many fields of application, all tasks of the secondary systems can
5 be performed with one single device. The open and future-proof
concept of SIPROTEC 4 has been ensured for the entire device Fig. 2/9 SIPROTEC 4
series with the implementation of IEC 61850.
• Proven protection functions guarantee the safety of the
6 systems operator's equipment and employees
• Comfortable engineering and evaluation via DIGSI 4
• Simple creation of automation solutions by means of the
integrated CFC
7 • Targeted and easy operation of devices and software thanks to
user-friendly design
• Powerful communication components guarantee safe and
effective solutions
8 • Maximum experience worldwide in the use of SIPROTEC 4 and
in the implementation of IEC 61850 projects
• Future-proof due to exchangeable communication interfaces
9 and integrated CFC.

• Integrated switch for low-cost and redundant optical Ethernet
rings
10 availability.
Fig. 2/10 SIPROTEC 4 rear view
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 2/11 SIPROTEC 4 in power plant application

Overview
To fulfill vital protection redundancy requirements, only those Measuring included

functions that are interdependent and directly associated with
each other are integrated into the same unit. For backup protec-
tion, one or more additional units should be provided.
For many applications, the accuracy of the protection current
transformer is sufficient for operational measuring. The addi- 1
tional measuring current transformer was required to protect
All relays can stand fully alone. Thus, the traditional protection the measuring instruments under short-circuit conditions. Due
principle of separate main and backup protection as well as the to the low thermal withstand capability of the measuring instru-
external connection to the switchyard remain unchanged. ments, they could not be connected to the protection current
transformer. Consequently, additional measuring core current
2
“One feeder, one relay” concept transformers and measuring instruments are now only necessary
Analog protection schemes have been engineered and where high accuracy is required, e.g., for revenue metering.
assembled from individual relays. Interwiring between these
Corrective rather than preventive maintenance
3
relays and scheme testing has been carried out manually in the
workshop. Numerical relays monitor their own hardware and software.
Exhaustive self-monitoring and failure diagnostic routines are
Data sharing now allows for the integration of several protection
and protection-related tasks into one single numerical relay.
not restricted to the protection relay itself but are methodically
carried through from current transformer circuits to tripping
4
Only a few external devices may be required for completion of
relay coils.
the total scheme. This has significantly lowered the costs of
engineering, assembly, panel wiring, testing and commissioning. Equipment failures and faults in the current transformer circuits
Scheme failure probability has also been lowered. are immediately reported and the protection relay is blocked. 5
Engineering has moved from schematic diagrams toward a Thus, service personnel are now able to correct the failure upon
parameter definition procedure. The powerful user-definable occurrence, resulting in a significantly upgraded availability of
logic of SIPROTEC 4 allows flexible customized design for protec- the protection system.
tion, control and measurement. 6
8
52
9
21 67N FL 79 25 SM ER FR BM
10
85
SIPROTEC Line protection
Serial link to station – or personal computer 11

kA, ER
to remote line end kV,
Hz,
MW,
FR
SM
12
21 Distance protection MVAr,
67N Directional ground-fault protection MVA BM
Load monitor
FL Distance-to-fault locator
79
25
Auto-reclosure
Synchrocheck
Fault report
13
Fault record
85 Carrier interface (teleprotection)
SM Self-monitoring Relay monitor
ER Event recording
FR
BM
Fault recording
Breaker monitor
Breaker monitor
Supervisory control
14
Fig. 2/12 Numerical relays offer increased information availability
15
Overview
Adaptive relaying
1000 Parameter
1 Numerical relays now offer reliable, convenient and comprehen-
sive matching to changing conditions. Matching may be initiated 1000
1100
.
Parameter
.
Line data D
either by the relay’s own intelligence or from other systems via 1100 Line
1200 data O/C C Phase settings
1000 .
Parameter .
contacts or serial telegrams. Modern numerical relays contain a . . B
1100 Line data
1200 O/C Phase settings
number of parameter sets that can be pretested during commis- . . 1500 O/C Earth settings
2 sioning of the scheme. One set is normally operative. Transfer to
the other sets can be controlled via binary inputs or a serial data
1000
1100
.
.
Parameter
.
Line
.
data
1200
. A
O/C
.
Phase
1500
.
.
settings
O/C
2800Earth settings
Fault recording
. . .
1200 O/C Phase settings .
link (Fig. 2/13). . 1500 O/C Earth settings
2800 Fault
3900recording
. . . Breaker failure
. .
There are a number of applications for which multiple setting 1500 O/C Earth settings
3 groups can upgrade the scheme performance, for example:
.
.
2800
2800
.
.
Fault
Fault
recording
3900recording
Breaker failure
. 3900 Breaker failure

• For use as a voltage-dependent control of overcurrent-time .
relay pickup values to overcome alternator fault current 3900 Breaker failure
decrement to below normal load current when the automatic
4 voltage regulator (AVR) is not in automatic operation
Fig. 2/13 Alternate parameter groups
• For maintaining short operation times with lower fault
currents, e.g., automatic change of settings if one supply
transformer is taken out of service
5 • For “switch-onto-fault” protection to provide shorter time
settings when energizing a circuit after maintenance so that
normal settings can be restored automatically after a time
delay
6 • For auto-reclosure programs, that is, instantaneous operation
for first trip and delayed operation after unsuccessful reclosure
• For cold load pickup problems where high starting currents
7 may cause relay operation

• For “ring open” or “ring closed” operation.
Implemented functions
8 SIPROTEC relays are available with a variety of protective

functions (please refer to Fig. 2/15). The high processing power
of modern numerical units allows further integration of non-
protective add-on functions.
9 The question as to whether separate or combined relays should

be used for protection and control cannot be unambiguously
answered. In transmission-type substations, separation into
independent hardware units is still preferred, whereas a trend Fig. 2/14 Left: switchgear with numerical relay (7SJ62) and traditional
control; right: switchgear with combined protection and
10 toward higher function integration can be observed on the
distribution level. Here, the use of combined feeder / line relays
control relay (7SJ64)
for protection, monitoring and control is becoming more com-

mon (Fig. 2/14).
11 Relays with protection functions only and relays with combined

protection and control functions are being offered. SIPROTEC 4
relays offer combined protection and control functions.
SIPROTEC 4 relays support the “one relay one feeder” principle,
12 and thus contribute to a considerable reduction in space and

wiring requirements.
With the well-proven SIPROTEC 4 family, Siemens supports both
stand-alone and combined solutions on the basis of a single
13 hardware and software platform. The user can decide within
wide limits on the configuration of the control and protection,
and the reliability of the protection functions (Fig. 2/15).
The following solutions are available within one relay family:
14 • Separate control and protection relays
• Feeder protection and remote control of the line circuit-breaker
via the serial communication link
15 • Combined relays for protection, monitoring and control.

Overview
52
Busbar
7SJ61/62/63/64 7SJ62/63/64 2) 1
Local/remote control CFC logic Metering values
Command/feedback 25 Synchronization
Set points,
I, V, Watts,
Trip circuit
supervision
74TC Lockout 86
mean values,
Min/Max-Log Vars, p.f., f V, f, P
P<>
Q<> p.f. df/dt
2
Motor 33 Communication RTD1) box Energy meter: 32 55 81R
control modules interface calculated and/or by impulses
f<> V> V<
HMI RS232/485/FO/
Ethernet
Fault
recording
Motor protection
Bearing Starting Fault
81O/U 59 27
3
temp. I< time locator Directional
IEC60870-5-103
IEC61850 38 37 48 21FL phase-sequence
47 monitoring
Profibus DP
DNP 3.0
MODBUS RTU
14 Locked
rotor
66/86
Restart
inhibit
I dir.>> I E dir.>>
I dir.> I E dir.>
Ipdir. I Epdir.
4
67 67N
I E >,
I>> I>, Ip I E >> I Ep I2 > >
50 51 50N 51N 46 49
Inrush
restraint
Interm.
earth flt. 50BF
Dir. sensitive
5
Breaker failure ground-fault detection
protection
I EE>>
I E >, High-impedance Auto- I EE> VE>
I E >>
50N
I Ep
51N
restricted ground-fault 79 reclosure
87N 67Ns
I EEp
64 6
1) RTD = resistance temperature detector 2) VT connection for 7SJ62/63/64 only
Fig. 2/15 SIPROTEC 4 relays 7SJ61 / 62 / 63, 64 implemented functions

7
Terminals: Standard relay version with screw-type terminals Mechanical Design
8
Current terminals SIPROTEC 4 relays are available in ⅓ to of 19” wide housings
Connection Wmax =12 mm with a standard height of 243 mm. Their size is compatible with
Ring cable lugs d1 = 5 mm that of other device series. Therefore, compatible exchange is
Wire size 2.7 – 4 mm2 (AWG 13 – 11)
always possible (Fig. 2/16 to Fig. 2/18). 9
Direct connection Solid conductor, flexible lead, All wires (cables) are connected at the rear side of the relay
connector sleeve with or without ring cable lugs. A special relay version with a
Wire size 2.7 – 4 mm2 (AWG 13 – 11) detached cable-connected operator panel (Fig. 2/19) is also
Voltage terminals
available. It allows, for example, the installation of the relay 10
itself in the low-voltage compartment, and of the operator panel
Connection Wmax =10 mm separately in the door of the switchgear.
Ring cable lugs d1 = 4 mm
Wire size
Direct connection
1.0 – 2.6 mm2 (AWG 17 – 13)
Solid conductor, flexible lead,
11
connector sleeve
Wire size 0.5 – 2.5 mm2 (AWG 20 – 13)
Some relays are alternatively available with plug-in voltage terminals
12
Current terminals
Screw type (see standard version)
Voltage terminals 13
2-pin or 3-pin connectors
Wire size 0.5 – 1.0 mm2
0.75 – 1.5 mm2
1.0 – 2.5 mm2
14
15
Overview
2
3

Fig. 2/16 of 19” housing
4

5 On the backlit LCD display, process and device information can

be displayed as text.
Freely assignable LEDs are used to display process or device
information. The LEDs can be labeled according to user
6 requirements. An LED reset key resets the LEDs and can be used
for LED testing.
Keys for navigation
RS232 operator interface (for DIGSI)
4 configurable function keys permit the user to execute
7
frequently used actions simply and fast.
Numerical keys
Fig. 2/17 ½ of 19” housing Fig. 2/18 ⅓ of 19” housing
Fig. 2/20 Local operation: All operator actions can be executed and
8 information displayed via an integrated user interface. Two
alternatives for this interface are available.
9
10
11

Fig. 2/19 SIPROTEC 4 combined protection, control and monitoring
relay with detached operator panel
12
13
Process and relay information can be displayed on the large
illuminated LC display either graphically in the form of a mimic
diagram or as text in various lists.
14 The keys mainly used for control of the switchgear are located
on the “control axis” directly below the display.
Two key-operated switches ensure rapid and reliable changeover
between “local“ and “remote“ control, and between “interlocked“
and “non-interlocked“ operation.
15 Fig. 2/21 Additional features of the interface with graphic display

Overview
Apart from the relay-specific protection functions, the

SIPROTEC 4 units have a multitude of additional functions that
• provide the user with information for the evaluation of faults 1
• facilitate adaptation to customer-specific application
• facilitate monitoring and control of customer installations.
Operational measured values 2

The large scope of measured and limit values permits improved
power system management as well as simplified commissioning.
The r.m.s. values are calculated from the acquired current and
voltage along with the power factor, frequency, active and
3
reactive power. The following functions are available depending
on the relay type
• Currents IL1, IL2, IL3, IN, IEE (67Ns) 4
• Voltages VL1,VL2, VL3, VL1-L2,VL2-L3, VL3-L1
• Symmetrical components I1, I2, 3I0; V1, V2, 3V0
• Power Watts, Vars, VA / P, Q, S
• Power factor p.f. (cos ϕ)
5
• Frequency
• Energy ± kWh ± kVarh, forward and reverse power flow Fig. 2/22 Operational measured values
• Mean as well as minimum and maximum current and voltage 6
values
• Operating hours counter
• Mean operating temperature of overload function
• Limit value monitoring
7
Limit values are monitored using programmable logic in the
CFC. Commands can be derived from this limit value indication.
• Zero suppression
In a certain range of very low measured values, the value is set
8
to zero to suppress interference.
Metered values (some types)

For internal metering, the unit can calculate energy metered
9
values from the measured current and voltage values. If an
external meter with a metering pulse output is available, some
SIPROTEC 4 types can obtain and process metering pulses via an
indication input. 10
The metered values can be displayed and passed on to a control
center as an accumulation with reset. A distinction is made
between forward, reverse, active and reactive energy.
11
Operational indications and fault indications with time
stamp
The SIPROTEC 4 units provide extensive data for fault analysis as
well as control. All indications listed here are stored, even if the 12
power supply is disconnected.
• Fault event log
The last eight network faults are stored in the unit. All fault
recordings are time-stamped with a resolution of 1 ms. 13
• Operational indications
All indications that are not directly associated with a fault
(e.g., operating or switching actions) are stored in the status
indication buffer. The time resolution is 1 ms (Fig. 2/22, Fig. 14
2/23). Fig. 2/23 Fault event log on graphical display of the device
15
Overview
Display editor Reliable battery monitoring
1 A display editor is available to design the display on SIPROTEC 4

units with graphic display. The predefined symbol sets can be
The battery provided is used to back up the clock, the switching
statistics, the status and fault indications, and the fault record-
expanded to suit the user. The drawing of a single-line diagram ing in the event of a power supply failure. Its function is checked
is extremely simple. Load monitoring values (analog values) by the processor at regular intervals. If the capacity of the
and any texts or symbols can be placed on the display where battery is found to be declining, an alarm is generated. Regular
2 required. replacement is therefore not necessary.
Four predefined setting groups for adapting relay settings All setting parameters are stored in the Flash EPROM and are
not lost if the power supply or battery fails. The SIPROTEC 4 unit
The settings of the relays can be adapted quickly to suit changing remains fully functional.
3 network configurations. The relays include four setting groups
that can be predefined during commissioning or even changed Commissioning support
remotely via a DIGSI 4 modem link. The setting groups can be
Special attention has been paid to commissioning. All binary
activated via binary inputs, via DIGSI 4 (local or remote), via the
4 integrated keypad or via the serial substation control interface.
inputs and output contacts can be displayed and activated
directly. This can significantly simplify the wiring check for the
Fault recording up to five or more seconds user. Test telegrams to a substation control system can be initi-
ated by the user as well.
The sampled values for phase currents, earth (ground) currents,
5 line and zero-sequence currents are registered in a fault record.
The record can be started using a binary input, on pickup or
CFC: Programming logic
With the help of the CFC (Continuous Function Chart) graphic
when a trip command occurs. Up to eight fault records may be
tool, interlocking schemes and switching sequences can be
stored. For test purposes, it is possible to start fault recording
configured simply via drag and drop of logic symbols; no special
6 via DIGSI 4. If the storage capacity is exceeded, the oldest fault
record in each case is overwritten.
knowledge of programming is required. Logical elements, such
as AND, OR, flip-flops and timer elements are available. The
For protection functions with long delay times in generator pro- user can also generate user-defined annunciations and logical
tection, the RMS value recording is available. Storage of relevant combinations of internal or external signals.
7 calculated variables (V1, VE, I1, I2, IEE, P, Q, f-fn) takes place at
increments of one cycle. The total time is 80 s. Communication interfaces
With respect to communication, particular emphasis has been
Time synchronization
placed on high levels of flexibility, data integrity and utilization
8 A battery-backed clock is a standard component and can be
synchronized via a synchronization signal (DCF77, IRIG B via
of standards commonly used in energy automation. The design
of the communication modules permits interchangeability on
satellite receiver), binary input, system interface or SCADA the one hand, and on the other hand provides openness for
(e.g., SICAM). A date and time is assigned to every indication. future standards.
9 Selectable function keys Local PC interface

Four function keys can be assigned to permit the user to perform The PC interface accessible from the front of the unit permits
frequently recurring actions very quickly and simply. quick access to all parameters and fault event data. Of particular
10 Typical applications are, for example, to display the list of

operating indications or to perform automatic functions such
advantage is the use of the DIGSI 4 operating program during
commissioning.
as “switching of circuit-breaker”.
11 Continuous self-monitoring
The hardware and software are continuously monitored. If
abnormal conditions are detected, the unit immediately signals.
In this way, a great degree of safety, reliability and availability is
12 achieved.
13
14
15
Overview
Retrofitting: Communication modules

It is possible to supply the relays directly with two communica-
tion modules for the service and substation control interfaces, 1
or to retrofit the communication modules at a later stage.
The modules are mounted on the rear side of the relay.
As a standard, the time synchronization interface is always
supplied. 2
The communication modules are available for the entire
SIPROTEC 4 relay range. Depending on the relay type, the
following protocols are available: IEC 60870-5-103,
PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET I/O, MODBUS RTU, DNP 3.0 and Ether-

3
net with IEC 61850. No external protocol converter is required.
With respect to communication, particular emphasis is placed
on the requirements in energy automation:
• Every data item is time-stamped at the source, that is, where
4

it originates.
• The communication system automatically handles the
transfer of large data blocks (e.g., fault records or parameter
data files). The user can apply these features without any
5
additional programming effort.
• For reliable execution of a command, the relevant signal is
first acknowledged in the unit involved. When the command
has been enabled and executed, a check-back indication The following interfaces can be applied: 6
is issued. The actual conditions are checked at every
command-handling step. Whenever they are not satisfactory, Service interface (optional)
controlled interruption is possible. Several protection relays can be centrally operated with
DIGSI 4, e.g., via a star coupler or RS485 bus. On connection of 7
a modem, remote control is possible. This provides advantages
in fault clearance, particularly in unmanned power stations.
(Alternatively, the external temperature monitoring box can be
connected to this interface.) 8
System interface (optional)
This is used to carry out communication with a control system
and supports, depending on the module connected, a variety
of communication protocols and interface designs.
9
Time synchronization interface
A synchronization signal (DCF 77, IRIG B via satellite receiver)
may be connected to this input if no time synchronization is 10
executed on the system interface. This offers a high-precision
Fig. 2/24 Protection relay Fig. 2/25 Communication
time tagging.
module, optical
Fig. 2/28 Rear view with wiring, terminal safety cover and serial 11
interfaces
12
Fig. 2/26 Communication Fig. 2/27 Communication 13

module RS232,RS485 module, optical ring
14
15
Overview
Safe bus architecture Substation automation system

• Fiber-optic double ring circuit via Ethernet
1 The fiber-optic double ring circuit is immune to electro- Option: Control
magnetic interference. Upon failure of a section between DIGSI SICAM center
two units, the communication system continues to operate PAS
without interruption. If a unit were to fail, there is no effect
2 on the communication with the rest of the system
(Fig. 2/29).
• RS485 bus switch
With this data transmission via copper wires, electro-
3 magnetic interference is largely eliminated by the use
of twisted-pair conductors. Upon failure of a unit, the
remaining system continues to operate without any faults
(Fig. 2/30).
4 • Star structure
The relays are connected with a fiber-optic cable with a star
structure to the control unit. The failure of one relay / con-
nection does not affect the others (Fig. 2/31).
5 Depending on the relay type, the following protocols are

available:
• IEC 61850 protocol Fig. 2/29 Ring bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and
Since 2004, the Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol is the IEC 61850
6 worldwide standard for protection and control systems used

by power supply corporations. Siemens is the first manu-
facturer to support this standard. By means of this protocol, Substation
information can also be exchanged directly between control system
7 feeder units so as to set up simple masterless systems for
feeder and system interlocking. Access to the units via the
Ethernet bus will also be possible with DIGSI.
• IEC 60870-5-103
8 IEC 60870-5-103 is an internationally standardized protocol
for efficient communication between the protection relays
and a substation control system. Specific extensions that
are published by Siemens can be used.
9 • PROFIBUS DP
For connection to a SIMATIC PLC, the PROFIBUS DP protocol
is recommended. With the PROFIBUS DP, the protection
relay can be directly connected to a SIMATIC S5 / S7. The
transferred data are fault data, measured values and control
10 commands. Fig. 2/30 PROFIBUS: Electrical RS485 bus wiring
11 Substation
control system
12
13
14
Fig. 2/31 IEC 60870-5-103: Star structure with fiber-optic cables
15
Overview
MODBUS RTU
MODBUS is also a widely utilized communication standard and is
used in numerous automation solutions. 1
DNP 3.0
DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol, version 3) is a
messaging-based communication protocol. The SIPROTEC 4 units 2
are fully Level 1 and Level 2-compliant with DNP 3.0, which is
supported by a number of protection unit manufacturers.
Control 3
In addition to the protection functions, the SIPROTEC 4 units also
support all control and monitoring functions required for operat-
ing medium-voltage or high-voltage substations. The main
application is reliable control of switching and other processes. 4
The status of primary equipment or auxiliary devices can be
obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated to the relay
via binary inputs. Fig. 2/32 Protection engineer at work
Therefore, it is possible to detect and indicate both the OPEN and 5

CLOSED positions or a faulty or intermediate breaker position. Switching authority
The switchgear can be controlled via:
The following hierarchy of switching authority is applicable:
• Integrated operator panel
• Binary inputs
LOCAL, DIGSI 4 PC program, REMOTE. The switching authority is
determined according to parameters or by DIGSI 4. If the LOCAL
6
• Substation control system mode is selected, only local switching operations are possible.
• DIGSI 4 Every switching operation and change of breaker position is
Automation
stored in the status indication memory with detailed information
and time tag.
7
With the integrated logic, the user can set specific functions for Command processing
the automation of the switchgear or substation by means of a
graphic interface (CFC). Functions are activated by means of
function keys, binary inputs or via the communication interface.
The SIPROTEC 4 protection relays offer all functions required for
command processing, including the processing of single and
8
double commands, with or without feedback, and sophisticated
monitoring. Control actions using functions, such as runtime
monitoring and automatic command termination after output
check of the external process, are also provided by the relays. 9
Typical applications are:
• Single and double commands using 1, 1 plus 1 common
or 2 trip contacts
• User-definable feeder interlocking 10
• Operating sequences combining several switching operations,
such as control of circuit-breakers, disconnectors (isolators)
and grounding switches
• Triggering of switching operations, indications or alarms by
11
logical combination of existing information (Fig. 2/32).
The positions of the circuit-breaker or switching devices are
monitored by feedback signals. These indication inputs are
logically assigned to the corresponding command outputs.
12
The unit can therefore distinguish whether the indication
changes as a consequence of a switching operation or due
to a spontaneous change of state.
13
Indication derivation
A further indication (or a command) can be derived from an
existing indication. Group indications can also be formed.
The volume of information to the system interface can thus
14
be reduced and restricted to the most important signals.
15
Overview
Typical protection schemes

Infeed
1 1. Cables and overhead lines Transformer
protection
see fig. 2/49
Radial systems
2 Notes: A
1) Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79) only with overhead lines. B I>, t I E >, t I2 >, t ARC
2) Negative sequence overcurrent protection 46 as sensitive Further 51 51N 46 79
feeders
3 backup protection against asymmetrical faults.
General notes:
7SJ80 *) 2) 1)
• The relay at the far end (D) is set with the shortest operating C I>, t I E >, t I2 >, t
time. Relays further upstream have to be time-graded against 51 51N 46
4 the next downstream relay in steps of about 0.3 s.
7SJ80 *)
• Inverse time or definite time can be selected according to the

following criteria: Load
– Definite time: I>, t I E >, t I2 >, t

5 Source impedance is large compared to the line impedance,
that is, there is small current variation between near and far
D
51 51N 46
end faults. 7SJ80 *)

– Inverse time: Load Load
6 Longer lines, where the fault current is much less at the far
end of the line than at the local end. *) Alternatives: 7SJ82, 7SJ66
– Strong or extreme inverse-time:
Lines where the line impedance is large compared to the
7 source impedance (high difference for close-in and remote
faults), or lines where coordination with fuses or reclosers is
Fig. 2/33 Radial systems
necessary. Steeper characteristics also provide higher stabil-

ity on service restoration (cold load pickup and transformer
8 inrush currents).
Ring-main circuit
9 General notes: Infeed

Transformer
• Operating time of overcurrent relays to be coordinated with protection
downstream fuses of load transformers (preferably with strong see fig. 2/52
52 52
inverse-time characteristic with about 0.2 s grading-time
10 delay)
• Thermal overload protection for the cables (option) 52 52
• Negative sequence overcurrent protection (46) as sensitive 7SJ80 *) 7SJ80 *)
protection against asymmetrical faults (option). I>, t I E >, t I2 >, t > I>, t I E >, t I2 >, t >
11 51 51N 46 49 51 51N 46 49
12
13
14 *) Alternatives:
7SJ82, 7SJ66
Fig. 2/34 Ring-main circuit
15
Overview
Switch-onto-fault protection
If switched onto a fault, instantaneous tripping can be effected.
If the internal control function is used (local, via binary input 52
1
or via serial interface), the manual closing function is available Busbar
without any additional wiring. If the control switch is connected
TRIP (high-speed dead fault clearance) (511)
to a circuit-breaker bypassing the internal control function,
manual detection using a binary input is implemented.
52 52 52
I>>, I>>>
2
Feeder earthed 50
&
Typical feeder
Manual close
(356 > m close) 7SJx, 7SAx 3
Fig. 2/35 Switch-onto-fault protection
4
Directional comparison protection (cross-coupling)
Substation A Substation B Substation C Substation D
Cross-coupling is used for selective protection of sections fed Bus 52 52 Bus 52 52 Bus 52 52 Bus
from two sources with instantaneous tripping, that is, without
the disadvantage of time coordination. The directional compari-
7SJ62/ 7SJ62/ 7SJ62/ 7SJ62/ 7SJ62/ 7SJ62/
5
son protection is suitable if the distances between the protection 63/64 63/64 63/64 63/64 63/64 63/64
stations are not significant and pilot wires are available for signal 50 50 50 50 50 50
transmission. In addition to the directional comparison protec-
tion, the directional coordinated overcurrent-time protection is 52 6
Blocking bus
used for complete selective backup protection. If operated in a
closed-circuit connection, an interruption of the transmission 50 7SJ80
line is detected. Pick-
up
52 7
Blocking signal
Non-directional
50 7SJ80 50 fault detection
Pick- Direction
up of fault (67)
8
Fig. 2/36 Directional comparison protection
Distribution feeder with reclosers

Infeed
9
General notes:
• The feeder relay operating characteristics, delay times and
auto-reclosure cycles must be carefully coordinated with
downstream reclosers, sectionalizers and fuses.
The 50 / 50N instantaneous zone is normally set to reach out to
10
the first main feeder sectionalizing point. It has to ensure fast 52 52
clearing of close-in faults and prevent blowing of fuses in this I>>, I E >>, I2 >, t 7SJ61
area (“fuse saving”). Fast auto-reclosure is initiated in this case.
Further time-delayed tripping and reclosure steps (normally
I>, t
50/51 50N/51N
I E >, t
46
7SJ80
11
two or three) have to be graded against the recloser.
• The overcurrent relay should automatically switch over to less
sensitive characteristics after long breaker interruption times
in order to enable overriding of subsequent cold load pickup
79 Auto-
reclose 12
and transformer inrush currents. Recloser Further
feeders
Sectionalizers
13
Fuses
14
Fig. 2/37 Distribution feeder with reclosers
15
Overview
3-pole multishot auto-reclosure (AR, ANSI 79)

52 Elements can Elements Performs
1 Auto-reclosure (AR) enables 3-phase auto-reclosing of a feeder
that has previously been disconnected by overcurrent protection.
be blocked are slower
than the
reclosure
of feeder
fuse
SIPROTEC 7SJ61 allows up to nine reclosing shots. The first four CLOSE
52 52 (2851)
dead times can be set individually. Reclosing can be blocked or
2 initiated by a binary input or internally. After the first trip in a
reclosing sequence, the high-set instantaneous elements (I>>>, TRIP
(511)
I>>, IE>>) can be blocked. This is used for fuse-saving applications
7SJ61*)
and other similar transient schemes using simple overcurrent 50 51
relays instead of fuses. The low-set definite-time (I>, IE>) and the
3 inverse-time (Ip, IEp) overcurrent elements remain operative during
50N 51N
AR
79
the entire sequence.
4
52 Fuse opens on
sucessful reclosure
5 Circuit-breaker opens on
unsucessful reclosure
51
6 *) Alternatives:
7SJ62/63/64/66, 7SJ80/82/85
Fig. 2/38 3-pole multishot auto-reclosure (AR, ANSI 79)

7
Parallel feeder circuit
52
Infeed
General notes:
8 • The preferred application of this circuit is in the reliable supply 52 52
of important consumers without significant infeed from the I>, t I E >, t > I2 >, t 7SJ61
load side. 7SJ80
51 51N 49 46
• The 67 / 67N directional overcurrent protection trips instan- 7SJ82
9 taneously for faults on the protected line. This saves one O H line or O H line or Protection
time-grading interval for the overcurrent relays at the infeed. cable 1 cable 2 same as
line or cable 1
• The 51 / 51N overcurrent relay functions must be time-graded 7SJ62
67 67N 51 51N
against the relays located upstream. 7SJ80
10 52
7SJ82
52
52
11 52 52
12 Load Load
Fig. 2/39 Parallel feeder circuit
13
14
15
Overview
Reverse-power monitoring at double infeed

Infeed A Infeed B
If a busbar is fed from two parallel infeeds and a fault occurs
on one of them, only the faulty infeed should be tripped selec- 1
tively in order to enable supply to the busbar to continue from
the remaining supply. Unidirectional devices that can detect
a short-circuit current or energy flow from the busbar toward
the incoming feeder should be used. Directional overcurrent
protection is usually set via the load current. However, it
52 52
2
cannot clear weak-current faults. The reverse-power protection
67 67N 67 67N
can be set much lower than the rated power, thus also detect-
ing the reverse-power flow of weak-current faults with fault
currents significantly below the load current.
32R 32R 3
7SJ64 *) 7SJ64 *)
52
4
52 52
6
Feeders *) Alternatives: 7SJ62, 7SJ80, 7SJ66, 7SJ82 Feeders
Fig. 2/40 Reverse-power monitoring at double infeed 7

Synchronization function
Note:
52 U2
Busbar
8
Also available in relays 7SA6, 7SD5, 7SA522, 7VK61. CLOSE command
General notes: 1
• When two subsystems must be interconnected, the synchroni-

zation function monitors whether the subsystems are synchro-
Transformer
Local/remote
9
3 control
nous and can be connected without risk of losing stability. 1)
25 SYN
• This synchronization function can be applied in conjunction
with the auto-reclosure function as well as with the control
function CLOSE commands (local / remote). Infeed
U1
79 AR
7SJ641)
10
Fig. 2/41 Synchronization function
11
12
13
14
15
Overview
Cables or short overhead lines with infeed from both ends

Infeed
1 Notes:
1) Auto-reclosure only with overhead lines
52
52
2) Differential protection options: 52 52
2 • Type 7SD5 or 7SD610 with direct fiber-optic connection up

to about 100 km or via a 64 kbit / s channel (optical fiber,
7SJ80 79 1)
7SD61,
7SD80 or
51N/51N 87L 49 Same
microwave) Line 7SD5
or protection
• Type 7SD52 or 7SD610 with 7XV5662 (CC-CC) cable 7SJ80 2) for parallel line,
3 with 2 and 3 pilot wires up to about 30 km

• Type 7SD80 with pilot wire and/or fibre optic protection data
51N/51N 87L 49
7SD61,
7SD80 or
if applicable
79 52
interface. 52 1) 7SD5
52
4 52 52 52 52
Load Backfeed
5 Fig. 2/42 Cables or short overhead lines with infeed from both ends
Overhead lines or longer cables with infeed from both ends

Infeed
6 Notes: 52
1) Teleprotection logic (85) for transfer trip or blocking schemes. 52

Signal transmission via pilot wire, power line carrier, digital 52 52
network or optical fiber (to be provided separately). The tele-
7 protection supplement is only necessary if fast fault clearance
on 100 % line length is required, that is, second zone tripping 21N/21N 67N
2)
2)
3)
(about 0.3 s delay) cannot be accepted for far end faults. For 85 79
7SA6 or Same
Line 7SA522 protection
further application notes on teleprotection schemes, refer to or 1) for parallel
8 the table on the following page. cable
85 79
3)
line, if
applicable
2) Directional ground-fault protection 67N with inverse-time 2) 7SA6 or
delay against high-resistance faults 21N/21N 67N
7SA522
9 3) Single or multishot auto-reclosure (79) only with overhead

lines. 52
52
52 52 52 52
10 Load Backfeed
Fig. 2/43 Overhead lines or longer cables with infeed from both ends
11 Subtransmission line
Note:
Connection to open delta winding if available. Relays 7SA6 / 522
12 and 7SJ62 can, however, also be set to calculate the zero-
sequence voltage internally.
General notes:
• Distance teleprotection is proposed as main protection and 25 79 21N/21N 67/67N
13 time-graded directional overcurrent as backup protection.
68/78 67N 51/51N
• The 67N function of 7SA6 / 522 provides additional high-
resistance ground-fault protection. It can be used in parallel 7SJ62
BF
7SJ80
with the 21 / 21N function.
14 • Recommended teleprotection schemes: PUTT on medium and 85
S
R
CH To remote
line end
long lines with phase shift carrier or other secure communica-
7SA6 or 7SA522
tion channel POTT on short lines. BLOCKING with On / Off Signal transmission equipment
carrier (all line lengths).
15 Fig. 2/44 Subtransmission line

Overview
Permissive underreach Permissive overreach Blocking Unblocking

transfer trip (PUTT) transfer trip (POTT)
Preferred Signal Dependable and secure communication channel: Reliable communication Dedicated channel with 1
application transmission • Power line carrier with frequency shift modulation. channel (only required continuous signal transfer
system HF signal coupled to 2 phases of the protected line, or during external faults) • Power line carrier with
even better, to a parallel circuit to avoid transmission of • Power line carrier with frequency shift keying.
the HF signal through the fault location.
• Microwave radio, especially digital (PCM)
amplitude modulation
(ON / OFF). The same
Continuous signal trans-
mission must be permitted. 2
• Fiber-optic cables frequency may be used
on all terminals)
Characteristic Best suited for longer lines • Excellent coverage on All line types – preferred Same as POTT
of line – where the underreach
zone provides sufficient
short lines in the presence
of fault resistance.
practice in the US 3
resistance coverage • Suitable for the protection
of multi-terminal lines
with intermediate infeed
Advantages • Simple technique • Can be applied without Same as POTT Same as POTT but: 4
• No coordination of zones underreaching zone 1 • If no signal is received
and times with the op- stage (e.g., overcompen- (no block and no uncompen-
posite end required. The sated series uncompensa- sated block) then tripping by
combination of different
relay types therefore
ted lines)
• Can be applied on extre-
the overreach zone is
released after 20 ms 5
presents no problems mely short lines (impe-
dance less than minimum
relay setting)
• Better for parallel lines
as mutual coupling is not 6
critical for the overreach
zone
• Weak infeed terminals
are no problem (Echo
and Weak Infeed logic is
included)
7
Drawbacks • Overlapping of the • Zone reach and signal Same as POTT Same as POTT
zone 1 reaches must be timing coordination with • Slow tripping – all
ensured. On parallel
lines, teed feeders and
the remote end is
necessary (current
teleprotection trips
must be delayed to wait
8
tapped lines, the reversal) for the eventual
influence of zero blocking signal
sequence coupling and • Continuous channel
intermediate infeeds
must be carefully
monitoring is not
possible
9
considered to make sure
a minimum overlapping
of the zone 1 reach is
always present.
• Not suitable for weak
10
infeed terminals
Table 2/1 Application criteria for frequently used teleprotection schemes

11
12
13
14
15
Overview
Transmission line with reactor (Fig. 2/45) Teleprotection schemes based on distance relays therefore
have operating times on the order of 25 to 30 ms with digital
1 Notes:
1) 51N only applicable with grounded reactor neutral.
PCM coded communication. With state-of-the-art two-cycle
circuit-breakers, fault clearing times well below 100 ms
(4 to 5 cycles) can normally be achieved.
2) If phase CTs at the low-voltage reactor side are not available,
the high-voltage phase CTs and the CT in the neutral can be • Dissimilar carrier schemes are recommended for main 1
2 connected to a restricted ground-fault protection using a and main 2 protection, for example, PUTT, and POTT or
Blocking / Unblocking.
high-impedance relay (SIPROTEC 7SJ80, Reyrolle 7SR23).
• Both 7SA522 and 7SA6 provide selective 1-pole and / or 3-pole
General notes: tripping and auto-reclosure.
3 • Distance relays are proposed as main 1 and main 2 protection.
Duplicated 7SA6 is recommended for series-compensated
The ground-current directional comparison protection (67N)
of the 7SA6 relay uses phase selectors based on symmetrical
lines. components. Thus, 1-pole auto-reclosure can also be executed
• Operating time of the distance relays is in the range of 15 to with high-resistance faults.
4 25 ms depending on the particular fault condition.

These tripping times are valid for faults in the underreaching
The 67N function of the 7SA522 relay can also be used as
time-delayed directional overcurrent backup.
distance zone (80 to 85 % of the line length). Remote end • The 67N functions are provided as high-impedance fault
faults must be cleared by the superimposed teleprotection protection. 67N is often used with an additional channel as
scheme. Its overall operating time depends on the signal
5 transmission time of the channel, typically 15 to 20 ms for
a separate carrier scheme. Use of a common channel with
distance protection is only possible if the mode is compatible
frequency shift audio-tone PLC or microwave channels, and (e.g., POTT with directional comparison). The 67N may be
lower than 10 ms for ON / OFF PLC or digital PCM signaling via blocked when function 21 / 21N picks up. Alternatively, it can
optical fibers. be used as time-delayed backup protection.
6
CC
7 52L
52R
TC1 TC2
8 CVT
50/50N 51/51N BF
7SJ80
9
Reactor 87R
25 59 21/21N 25 21/21N
7SR23
2)
10 79 67N 79 67N
51N
7SJ80
11 68/79 BF 68/79 87
BF, 59
BF
S Direct trip
1)
85 Trip
52L R channel
7SA6 7SA522
12 S
R
Channel
2
To remote
line end
S Channel
13 R 3
Fig. 2/45 Transmission line with reactor
14
15
Overview
Transmission line or cable

(with wide-band communication) CC
General notes: 52L 1

TC1 TC2
• Digital PCM-coded communication (with n × 64 kbit / s
channels) between line ends is becoming more and more
frequently available, either directly by optical or microwave
point-to-point links, or via a general-purpose digital com- 2
munication network.
79 87L 25 59 21/21N
In both cases, the relay-type current differential protection
7SD52 / 61 can be applied. It provides absolute phase and
zone selectivity by phase-segregated measurement, and is not
affected by power swing or parallel line zero-sequence cou-
BF 79 67N
3
pling effects. It is, furthermore, a current-only protection that
does not need a VT connection. For this reason, the adverse 7SD522 68/79 85 BF 7SA522 or
effects of CVT transients are not applicable.
This makes it particularly suitable for double and multi-circuit
7SD6 7SA6 4
lines where complex fault situations can occur. S Channel
R 1
The 7SD5 / 61 can be applied to lines up to about 120 km in
Optical fiber To remote
direct relay-to-relay connections via dedicated optical fiber
cores (see also application “Cables or short overhead lines
FO
Wire
X.21
S
R
PCM line end 5
with infeed from both ends”, page 2/21), and also to much Direct connection with dedicated
longer distances of up to about 120 km by using separate PCM fibers up to about 120 km
devices for optical fiber or microwave transmission.
The 7SD5 / 61 then uses only a small part (64 to 512 kbit / s) of
the total transmission capacity (on the order of Mbits / s).
Fig. 2/46 Redundant transmission line protection
6
• The 7SD52 / 61 protection relays can be combined with the
distance relay 7SA52 or 7SA6 to form a redundant protection
system with dissimilar measuring principles complementing
each other (Fig. 2/46). This provides the highest degree of 52L
CC
7
availability. Also, separate signal transmission ways should be TC1 TC2
used for main 1 and main 2 line protection, e.g., optical fiber
or microwave, and power line carrier (PLC).
The current comparison protection has a typical operating time
8
of 15 ms for faults on 100 % line length, including signaling
25
time.
79 87L 59 21/21N
General notes for Fig. 2/47:
67N
9
• SIPROTEC 7SD5 offers fully redundant differential and distance BF
relays accommodated in one single bay control unit, and
provides both high-speed operation of relays and excellent
fault coverage, even under complicated conditions. Precise
distance-to-fault location avoids time-consuming line patrol- 7SD5 85 68/79 10
ling, and reduces the downtime of the line to a minimum.
S Channel
• The high-speed distance relay operates fully independently R 1
from the differential relay. Backup zones provide remote
backup for upstream and downstream lines and other power Optical fiber FO
X.21
S
PCM
To remote 11
line end
Wire R
system components.
Direct connection with dedicated
fibers up to about 120 km
12
Fig. 2/47 Transmission line protection with redundant algorithm
in one device
13
14
15
Overview
Transmission line,
one-breaker-and-a-half terminal 87/BB1 7SS52
1 Notes:
BB1
7VK61 7SA522 or
1) When the line is switched off and the BF 85
7SA6
line line disconnector (isolator) is UBB1
1) 1) 2)
2 open, high through-fault currents in

the diameter may cause maloperation
52
79
25
21/21N 67N 50/50N 51/51N 59
of the distance relay due to unequal

UBB1 UL1 or
CT errors (saturation). UL1
UL2 or
Normal practice is therefore to block
3 the distance protection (21 / 21N) and
UBB2
Line 1
the directional ground-fault protection 7VK61 7SD5
(67N) under this condition via an 87L
BF
auxiliary contact of the line line discon-
4 nector (isolator). A standby overcurrent
function (50 / 51N, 51 / 51N) is released
52 79
25
instead to protect the remaining stub
between the breakers (“stub” protec- 8 /
5 tion). Line 2
2) Overvoltage protection only with Main 1 Protection of line 2

7SA6 / 52. (or transformer,
Main 2
if applicable)
6 General notes:
• The protection functions of one
52 BF
79
7VK61
diameter of a breaker-and-a-half
arrangement are shown. UBB2 25
UL2 or
7 • The currents of two CTs have each to
be summed up to get the relevant line
UL1 or UBB1 UBB2 BB2
currents as input for main 1 and 2 line 87/BB2 7SS52

protection.
8 • The location of the CTs on both sides of

the circuit-breakers is typical for substa-
Fig. 2/48 Transmission line, one-breaker-and-a-half terminal,
using 3 breaker management relays 7VK61
tions with dead-tank circuit-breakers.
Live-tank circuit-breakers may have
CTs only on one side to reduce cost. A fault between circuit-
9 breakers and CT (end fault) may then still be fed from one side
even when the circuit-breaker has opened. Consequently, final
fault clearing by cascaded tripping has to be accepted in this
case.
10 • The 7VK61 relay provides the necessary end fault protection
function and trips the circuit-breakers of the remaining infeed-
ing circuits.
11
12
13
14
15
Overview
General notes for Fig. 2/48 and Fig. 2/49:

• For the selection of the main 1 and 87/BB1 7SS52
main 2 line protection schemes, the BB1 1
comments of application examples 7SA522 or
“Transmission with reactor”, page 2/23 7SA6
BF 85
and “Transmission line or cable”, page UBB1
2/24 apply.
52
1) 1) 2)
21/21N 67N 50/50N 51/51N 59 2
• Auto-reclosure (79) and synchrocheck 25
function (25) are each assigned directly
to the circuit-breakers and controlled by UBB1 UL1 or
main 1 and 2 line protection in parallel.
In the event of a line fault, both adja-
UL2 or
UBB2 UL1 3
cent circuit-breakers have to be tripped Line 1
by the line protection. The sequence of 7VK61 7SD5
auto-reclosure of both circuit-breakers
or, alternatively, the auto-reclosure of
BF 87L
4
only one circuit-breaker and the manual 52 79
closure of the other circuit-breaker, may
25
be made selectable by a control switch.
• A coordinated scheme of control UL1 or UL2 or 5
circuits is necessary to ensure selective UBB1 UBB2
tripping interlocking and reclosing of
Line 2
the two circuit-breakers of one line (or
transformer feeder). UL2 6
• The voltages for synchrocheck have to
52 Main 1 Protection of Line 2
be selected according to the circuit- (or transformer,
breaker and disconnector (isolator) Main 2 if applicable)
position by a voltage replica circuit.
UBB2
7
General notes for Fig. 2/49:
• In this optimized application, the 7VK61 BB2
is only used for the center breaker. In
the line feeders, functions 25, 79 and 87/BB2 7SS52 8
BF are also performed by transmission
line protection 7SA522 or 7SA6. Fig. 2/49 Transmission line, breaker-and-a-half terminal,
using 1 breaker management relay 7VK61
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Overview
2. Transformers
HV infeed
1 Small transformer infeed
General notes:
52
• Ground faults on the secondary side are detected by current I>> I>, t IE > > I2 >, t
relay 51N. However, it has to be time-graded against down-
2 stream feeder protection relays. 50 51 50N 49 46
7SJ80
• The restricted ground-fault relay 87N can optionally be applied
to achieve fast clearance of ground faults in the transformer
secondary winding. 63 Optional resistor
or reactor
3 SIPROTEC 7SJ80 is of the high-impedance type and requires
class × CTs with equal transformation ratios.
RN
• Primary circuit-breaker and relay may be replaced by fuses.

I >>
4 87N
52 7SJ80 51N
IE >
5 Distribution bus
7SJ80
52
6 O/C Fuse
relay
Load Load
7 Fig. 2/50 Small transformer infeed
Large or important transformer infeed

8 General note:
HV infeed
52
• Relay 7UT612 provides numerical ratio and vector group
adaptation. Matching transformers as used with traditional
I>> I>, t IE > > I2 >, t
relays are therefore no longer applicable.
9 Notes:
50 51 51N 49 46 7SJ61 or
7SJ80
1) If an independent high-impedance-type ground-fault function
is required, the 7SJ6x or 7SJ80 can be used instead of the 87N
10 inside the 7UT612. However, class × CT cores would also be
necessary in this case (see small transformer protection). 63
1)
2) 51 and 51N may be provided in a separate 7SJ80 or 7SJ61 if
required. 51N 87N 87T
11 2) 2)
51 51N
I>, t I E >, t 7UT612
12 52
Load bus
52 52
13
Load Load
14 Fig. 2/51 Large or important transformer infeed
15
Overview
Dual infeed with single transformer

Protection line 1 Protection line 2
General notes:
• Line CTs are to be connected to separate stabilizing inputs of
same as line 2
52
21/21N or 87L + 51 + optionally 67/67N
52
1
the differential relay 87T in order to ensure stability in the
event of line through-fault currents. I>> I>, t I E >, t > I2 >
• Relay 7UT613 provides numerical ratio and vector group
adaptation. Matching transformers, as used with traditional
50 51 51N
7SJ61 or 7SJ80
49 46
2
relays, are therefore no longer applicable. 63
87N 87T
51N 7SJ80
7UT613
3
I>> I E >
7SJ80
51 51N
52
4
Load
52 52 52 bus
Load Load Load

5
Fig. 2/52 Dual infeed with single transformer
Parallel incoming transformer feeders

HV infeed 1 HV infeed 2
6
Note: 52 52
The directional functions 67 and 67N do not apply for cases I>> I>, t I E >, t > I2 >, t
where the transformers are equipped with the transformer
differential relays 87T.
50 51 51N
7SJ61 or 7SJ80
49 46
Protection
7
63 same as
infeed 1
I>, t I E >, t I> IE >
51
51N
51N
I E >, t
67 67N
7SJ62
8
7SJ80
52 52
1)
52 52 52
Load
bus 9
Load Load Load
Fig. 2/53 Parallel incoming transformer feeders

10
Parallel incoming transformer feeders with bus tie
Infeed 1 I>> I>, t I E > t > I2 >, t Infeed 2
General notes:
• Overcurrent relay 51, 51N each connected as a partial differ-
50 51 51N 49 46
Protection
11
7SJ80
ential scheme. This provides simple and fast busbar protection same as
and saves one time-grading step. 63 63 infeed 1
I>, t I E >, t IE >, t I2>, t 12

51 51N 51N 51
51N
7SJ80 7SJ80
7SJ80
52
52
52
13
52 52
Load Load 14
Fig. 2/54 Parallel incoming transformer feeders with bus tie
15
Overview
Three-winding transformer
HV Infeed
1 Notes:
1) The zero-sequence current must be blocked before entering
52
I>>, I >, t > I2 >, t

the differential relay with a delta winding in the CT connec-
50 51 49 46
tion on the transformer side with grounded starpoint. This
2 is to avoid false operation during external ground faults
(numerical relays provide this function by calculation). About
7SJ61 or 7SJ80
30 % sensitivity, however, is then lost in the event of internal

faults. Optionally, the zero-sequence current can be regained 51N 7SJ80 63 51N 7SJ80
by introducing the winding neutral current in the differential
3 relay (87T). Relay type 7UT613 provides two current inputs
1) 87T 7UT613
for this purpose. By using this feature, the ground-fault 87N 7SR232)
sensitivity can be upgraded again to its original value.
Restricted ground-fault protection (87T) is optional. It
4 provides backup protection for ground faults and increased
ground-fault sensitivity (about 10 % IN, compared to about 20
I>, t I E >, t I>, t I E >, t
51 51N 51 51N
to 30 % IN of the transformer differential relay).
Separate class × CT-cores with equal transmission ratio are 87N 7SJ61
or 7SJ80 7SJ802)
5 also required for this protection. M.V.
52 52 52 52
M.V.
2) High impedance and overcurrent in one 7SJ61.
General notes:
6 • In this example, the transformer feeds two different distribu-

tion systems with cogeneration. Restraining differential relay Load Backfeed Load Backfeed
inputs are therefore provided at each transformer side.
• If both distribution systems only consume load and no Fig. 2/55 Three-winding transformer
7 through-feed is possible from one MV system to the other,
parallel connection of the CTs of the two MV transformer
windings is admissible, which allows the use of a two-winding
differential relay (7UT612)
8 Autotransformer
52
Notes:
9 1) 87N high-impedance protection requires special class ×

current transformer cores with equal transformation ratios. 51N 50/BF 46 50/51 2) 87N 7SR23
7SJ61 or 7SJ80
2) The 7SJ80 relay can alternatively be connected in series with 1)
the 7UT613 relay to save this CT core.
10 General note:
87T 49
52
• Two different protection schemes are provided: 87T is chosen 63

as the low-impedance three-winding version (7UT613). 7UT613
87N is a 1-phase high-impedance relay (Reyrolle 7SR23) con- 52
11 nected as restricted ground-fault protection. (In this example,
1)
50/51
it is assumed that the phase ends of the transformer winding 46

are not accessible on the neutral side, that is, there exists a CT
51
only in the neutral grounding connection.). 50/BF
12 50/BF 51N
59N 1)
7RW80 7SJ80*) 7SJ80*)
*) Alternatives: 7SJ61
13
Fig. 2/56 Autotransformer
14
15
Overview
Large autotransformer bank

General notes:
• The transformer bank is connected in a breaker-and-a-half 7SV600
21 21N 68/78
7SA52/6 7SV600 1
arrangement. 50/BF 50/BF
52 52
Duplicated differential protection is proposed: EHV
• Main 1: Low-impedance differential protection 87TL (7UT613)
connected to the transformer bushing CTs.
2
• Main 2: High-impedance differential overall protection 87TL 3x 87/TH 50/BF 7SV600
(Reyrolle 7SR23). Separate class × cores and equal CT ratios are 7SR23 52
required for this type of protection.
• Backup protection is provided by distance protection relay 87/TL 49 7SA52/6 3
21
(7SA52 and 7SA6), each “looking” with an instantaneous first 7UT613 63
zone about 80 % into the transformer and with a time-delayed 52 21N
zone beyond the transformer.
• The tertiary winding is assumed to feed a small station supply
68/78 4
system with isolated neutral. 51
52
59N
7RW80
50/BF
7SJ80*)
51N
7SJ80*)
50/BF 7SV600
5
*) Alternatives: 7SJ61
Fig. 2/57 Large autotransformer bank

6
3. Motors
Small and medium-sized motors < about 1 MW 52 7
a) With effective or low-resistance grounded infeed (IE ≥ IN Motor)
I>> IE > > I2 >
General note:
• Applicable to low-voltage motors and high-voltage motors 50 51N 49 48 46 8
with low-resistance grounded infeed (IE ≥ IN Motor)
b) With high-resistance grounded infeed (IE ≤ IN Motor) 7SJ61/7SK80
Notes: 9
1) Core-balance CT.
2) Sensitive directional ground-fault protection (67N) only Fig. 2/58 Motor protection with effective or low-resistance grounded
applicable with infeed from isolated or Petersen coil grounded
system (for dimensioning of the sensitive directional ground-
infeed 10
fault protection, see also application circuit page 2/33 and
Fig. 2/66) 52
3) The 7SK80 relay can be applied for isolated and compensated
systems.
I >> > I2 > I< 11
50 49 48 46 37 51U
IE > 2)
7XR96
1)
60/1A
51N 67N
3)
12
7SJ62/7SK80
13
Fig. 2/59 Motor protection with high-resistance grounded infeed
14
15
Overview
Large HV motors > about 1 MW
1 Notes:
1) Core-balance CT.
52
I >> > I2 > U<

2) Sensitive directional ground-fault protection (67N) only
applicable with infeed from isolated or Petersen coil grounded
2 system.
50 49 48 46 27
Optional
IE > 2) I < 37
3) This function is only needed for motors where the startup 7XR96
time is longer than the safe stall time tE. According to 1) 51N 67N
60/1A
3 IEC 60079-7, the tE time is the time needed to heat up AC
windings, when carrying the starting current IA, from the Startup
super- 49T 87M
temperature reached in rated service and at maximum ambi- visor 3) 5) 7UM62
ent air temperature to the limiting temperature. A separate
speed switch is used to supervise actual starting of the motor. 3)
4 The motor circuit-breaker is tripped if the motor does not
Speed
switch
RTD´s 4)
optional
reach speed in the preset time. The speed switch is part of
the motor supply itself.
5 4) Pt100, Ni100, Ni120

5) 49T only available with external temperature detector device
(RTD-box 7XV5662) Fig. 2/60 Protection of large HV motors > about 1 MW
6 Cold load pickup

52
By means of a binary input that can be wired from a manual Trip
close contact, it is possible to switch the overcurrent pickup
7 settings to less sensitive settings for a programmable amount
of time. After the set time has expired, the pickup settings auto-
I >> t
51.1
I> t
51.2
matically return to their original setting. This can compensate for
Binary input 51.1
initial inrush when energizing a circuit without compromising 82
(1727 > c/o) Trip
8 the sensitivity of the overcurrent elements during steady-state
conditions.
Desensitized
during inrush
51.2
7SJ61 or 7SJ80
52
Busbar
9 Trip
52 52 52 52
10 M
I >> t I > t
51.1 51.2 Typical feeder
11 Binary input 51.1 (1727 > C/O = cold

load pickup of over-
(1727 > C/O)
51.2 current pickup)
7SJ61 or 7SK80
12
Fig. 2/61 Cold load pickup
13
14
15
Overview
4. Generators
LV
Generators < 500 kW (Fig. 2/62 and Fig. 2/63)
Note:
1
If a core-balance CT is provided for sensitive ground-fault
protection relay 7SJ80 with separate ground-current input can
be used.
I >, I E >, t
51/51N
I2 >
46
>
49
2
Generators, typically 1 – 3 MW
7SJ80
(Fig. 2/64)
Note: Fig. 2/62 Generator with solidly grounded neutral
3
Two VTs in V connection are also sufficient.
Generators > 1 – 3 MW
MV
4
(Fig. 2/65)
Notes:
1) Functions 81 and 59 are required only where prime mover
can assume excess speed and the voltage regulator may
Generator 2
I >, I E >, t I2 > > 5
51/51N 46 49
permit rise of output voltage above upper limit. 1)
7SJ80
2) Differential relaying options:
– Low-impedance differential protection 87.
RN
UN 6
– Restricted ground-fault protection with low-resistance 0.5 to 1 rated
grounded neutral (Fig. 2/64).
Fig. 2/63 Generator with resistance-grounded neutral 7
52
52
MV
8
1)
I >/U <
50/27
9
59 U <
1)
Field
f 1)
81 f
87 10
81 RG Field <
64R
11
51 49 46 32 59 I2 > > I >, t U < L. O. F. –P>
I >, t > I2 > P> U> 46 49 51V 40 32
I E >, t
12
IG >, t
51N 2)
51N 87N
7UM61
7UM62 13
Fig. 2/64 Protection for generators 1 – 3 MW Fig. 2/65 Protection for generators >1 – 3 MW 14
15
Overview
Generators > 5 –10 MW feeding into a system For the most sensitive setting of 2 mA, we therefore need 20 mA
with isolated neutral secondary ground current, corresponding to (60 / 1) × 20 mA =
1 (Fig. 2/66)
1.2 A primary.
If sufficient capacitive ground current is not available, an
General notes:
grounding transformer with resistive zero-sequence load can
• The setting range of the directional ground-fault protection be installed as ground-current source at the station busbar. The
2 (67N) in the 7UM6 relay is 2 –1,000 mA. Depending on the
current transformer accuracy, a certain minimum setting is
smallest standard grounding transformer TGAG 3541 has a 20 s
short-time rating of input connected to: SG = 27 kVA
required to avoid false operation on load or transient currents.
In a 5 kV system, it would deliver:
• In practice, efforts are generally made to protect about 90 % of
3 the machine winding, measured from the machine terminals.
The full ground current for a terminal fault must then be ten
√3 · SG √3 · 27,000 VA
IG 20 s = ――― = ――――――― = 9.4 A
UN 5,000 V
times the setting value, which corresponds to the fault current
of a fault at 10 % distance from the machine neutral. corresponding to a relay input current of 9.4 A × 1 / 60 A =
156 mA. This would provide a 90 % protection range with a
4 Relay ground-current input Minimum relay
setting of about 15 mA, allowing the use of 4 parallel connected
Comments: core-balance CTs. The resistance at the 500 V open-delta
connected to: setting:
winding of the grounding transformer would then have to be
Core-balance CT 60 / 1 A: designed for
5 1 single CT
2 parallel CTs
2 mA
5 mA RB = U2SEC / SG = 500 U2 / 27,000 VA = 9.26 Ω (27 kW, 20 s)
3 parallel CTs 8 mA
4 parallel CTs 12 mA For a 5 MVA machine and 600 / 5 A CTs with special calibration
for minimum residual false current, we would get a secondary
6 Three-phase CTs in residual
(Holmgreen) connection
1 A CT: 50 mA
5 A CT: 200 mA
In general not
suitable for sensi-
tive ground-fault
current of IG SEC = 9.4 A / (600 / 5) = 78 mA.
With a relay setting of 12 mA, the protection range would in
protection
⎛ 12 ⎞
2 – 3 ‰ of 1 A CTs are not this case be 100 ⎜1− ⎟ = 85 %.
Three-phase CTs in ⎝ 78 ⎠
7 residual (Holmgreen)
connection with special
secondary rated
CT current In SEC
recommended in
this case
10 – 15 mA with
factory calibration 5 A CTs
to minimum residual false
8 currents (≤ 2 mA)
9 52 3)
Earthing transformer 59N

1) UN
52
10 RB
62
I>/U<
Redundant 50/27
IG 67N IG
11 protection
U<
67N
27
27 U < 59N 87 6 I
59 U >
12 46 I2 > 81 f >
<
64R 59 U >
4) U >
O
81 f
13 32
–P
40
L. O. F.
51V
I > t, U t, U <
51V
L. O. F.
40 32
–P >
49
I2 >
46
7UM61 or 7UM62 2) 7UM62
14
Fig. 2/66 Protection for generators > 5 – 10 MW
15
Overview
Notes (Fig. 2/66):

1) The standard core-balance CT 7XR96 has a transformation
ratio of 60 / 1 A. 52
1
2) Instead of an open-delta winding at the terminal VT, Transf. fault press
Unit 63 3)
a 1-phase VT at the machine neutral could be used as zero- trans.
sequence polarizing voltage.
87T
71 Oil low
2
3) The grounding transformer is designed for a short-time rating
of 20 s. To prevent overloading, the load resistor is automati-
51N
cally switched off by a time-delayed zero-sequence voltage
relay (59N + 62) and a contactor (52). Transf. neut. OC
Unit aux.
3
4) During the startup time of the generator with the open 87T
backup
circuit-breaker, the grounding source is not available. To Unit diff.
51
ensure ground-fault protection during this time interval, an Oil low
auxiliary contact of the circuit-breaker can be used to change
over the directional ground-fault relay function (67N) to a
Transf.
fault press 3) 71
4
63
zero-sequence voltage detection function via binary input.
Overvolt. 59
Unit
aux. 5
81 51N
Overfreq. Trans.
78
Loss of
sync. 24
neut.
OC 6
40 Volt/Hz
87T
A
Stator Loss of Trans.
field
O.L.
49S 32
diff.
7
E Reverse
87G power
64R
2)
64R
Gen.
diff. 8
Field Field 46 21
grd. grd.
Neg. Sys.
seq. backup
9
Generators > 50 –100 MW in generator transformer
unit connection 59/GN
(Fig. 2/67)
1)
Gen.
neut. OV 10
Notes: 51/GN
1) 100 % stator ground-fault protection based on 20 Hz voltage

injection Fig. 2/67 Protections for generators > 50 MW
11
2) Sensitive rotor ground-fault protection based on 1– 3 Hz
voltage injection
3) Non-electrical signals can be incoupled in the protection via
binary inputs (BI) Relay
type Functions 4)
Number
of relays
required
12
4) Only used functions shown; further integrated functions 21 24 32 40 46 49
7UM62
available in each relay type; for more information, please refer 1) 2)
to part 1 of this catalog. 51GN
81
59GN
87G
59
via BI:
64R
71
64R
63
78 2
13
7UM61 or 51 51N optionally 21 59 81 via BI: 71 63 1
7UM62
7UT612 87T 51N optionally 1
2 14
7UT613 87T 1
Fig. 2/68 Assignment for functions to relay type

15
Overview
Synchronization of a generator
Bus
1 Fig. 2/69 shows a typical connection for synchronizing a genera-

tor. Paralleling device 7VE6 acquires the line and generator 52 U1
voltage, and calculates the differential voltage, frequency and
phase angle. If these values are within a permitted range, a
CLOSE command is issued after a specified circuit-breaker make 7VE6
2 time. If these variables are out of range, the paralleling device
automatically sends a command to the voltage and speed
U2
25 U f
controller. For example, if the frequency is outside the range, an
actuation command is sent to the speed controller. If the voltage
3 is outside the range, the voltage controller is activated.
G
5 Fig. 2/69 Synchronization of a generator
5. Busbars
Infeed
Busbar protection by overcurrent relays with reverse
6 interlocking
General note:
Reverse interlocking
I >, t0 I >, t
• Applicable to distribution busbars without substantial
50/50N 51/51N
(< 0.25 × IN) backfeed from the outgoing feeders. 52 7SJ80
7 t0 = 50 ms
52 52 52
8
I> I >, t I> I >, t I> I >, t
50/50N 51/51N 50/50N 51/51N 50/50N 51/51N
7SJ80 7SJ80 7SJ80
9
Fig. 2/70 Busbar protection by O / C relays with reverse interlocking
10
Distributed busbar protection 7SS52
General notes:
11 • Suitable for all types of busbar schemes.
• Preferably used for multiple busbar schemes where a discon-
nector (isolator) replica is necessary. 52 52 52 52
• The numerical busbar protection 7SS52 provides additional
12 breaker failure protection.
50BF
50
50BF
50
50BF
50
50BF
50
• Different CT transformation ratios can be adapted numerically.
51 51 51 51
• The protection system and the disconnector (isolator) replica Bay
are continuously self-monitored by the 7SS52.
13 • Feeder protection can be connected to the same CT core.
units 50N
51N
50N
51N
50N
51N
50N
51N
7SS523 FO 7SS523 FO 7SS523 FO 7SS523 FO
14
87BB 50BF
Central unit 7SS522
15 Fig. 2/71 Distributed busbar protection 7SS52

Overview
6. Power systems
Übererregungsschutz
Load shedding
In unstable power systems (e.g., isolated systems, emergency
U >, t; U >>, t U/f >, t; U/f >>, t; U/f=f(t)
59 24
1
7RW80
power supply in hospitals), it may be necessary to isolate
selected loads from the power system to prevent overload of the Motorschutz ohne
overall system. The overcurrent-time protection functions are
effective only in the case of a short-circuit.
Wiedereinschaltverriegelung
f >,t; f <, t U <, t U >, t; U >>, t 2
81 27 59
Overloading of the generator can be measured as a frequency or 7RW80
voltage drop.
(Protection functions 27 and 81 available in 7RW80, 7SJ6 and
Weiteres
Netz 3
7SJ8.)
f >,t; f <, t; U <, t U >, t; U >>, t f >,t; f <, t; U <, t U >, t; U >>, t
81 27
7RW80, 7SJ62 oder 7SJ80
59 81 27
7RW80 oder 7SJ62
59
M 4
Entkopplung Lastabwurf
Fig. 2/72 Load shedding

5
Load shedding with rate-of-frequency-change protection
50
The rate-of-frequency-change protection calculates, from the
measured frequency, the gradient or frequency change df / dt.
It is thus possible to detect and record any major active power
f
Hz
6
loss in the power system, to disconnect certain consumers fm
accordingly and to restore the system to stability. Unlike fre- t
quency protection, rate-of-frequency-change protection reacts
before the frequency threshold is undershot. To ensure effective
49
fa 7
protection settings, it is recommended to consider requirements fb
throughout the power system as a whole. The rate-of-frequency- fc
change protection function can also be used for the purposes of
system decoupling. 48 8
0 1 2 3 4 5
Rate-of-frequency-change protection can also be enabled by an t
underfrequency state.
Fig. 2/73 Load shedding with rate-of-frequency-change protection
9
Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC)
VCV
One or two binary inputs can be used for the trip circuit
supervision.
L+
10
7SJx, 7SAx, 7SDx 7SJx, 7SAx, 7SDx
or any other or any other Trip
protective TCo BI 1 protective circuit
relay relay faulty
11
CLOSE TRIP R TCo Trip contact of the relay
BI Binary input of the relay
AUX 1 AUX 1 TC Trip coil
52a
TC
52
52b Aux Circuit-breaker auxiliary
contact 12
CB R Equivalent resistor instead
of BI 2
L– Ucv Control voltage
CB Circuit-breaker
13
Fig. 2/74 Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC)
14
15
Overview
Disconnecting facility with flexible protection function

52
1 General note:
The SIPROTEC protection relay 7SJ64 disconnects the
CB 1
Connection to power utility
switchgear from the utility power system if the generator Customer switchgear with autonomous supply
Switch-
feeds energy back into the power system (protection function disconnector
2 Preverse>). This functionality is achieved by using flexible protec-
tion. Disconnection also takes place in the event of frequency 7UT612
1)
or voltage fluctuations in the utility power system (protection

functions f<, f>, U<, U>, Idir>, IEdir> / 81, 27, 59, 67, 67N). G
3 Notes:
1) The transformer is protected by differential protection and
inverse or definite-time overcurrent protection functions
for the phase currents. In the event of a fault, the circuit- 52 52
4 breaker CB1 on the utility side is tripped by a remote link.
Circuit-breaker CB2 is also tripped.
CB 2 CB 3
2) Overcurrent-time protection functions protect feeders 1 and

2 against short-circuits and overload caused by the con-
5 nected loads. Both the phase currents and the zero currents
7SJ64 f < f> U Sync. I >dir I E >dir
Preserve >
of the feeders can be protected by inverse and definite-time 32 81 81 27 59 25 67 67N
overcurrent stages. The circuit-breakers CB4 and CB5 are
tripped in the event of a fault. Busbar
6 7SJ61/ 2) 7SJ61/ 2)
7SJ80 7SJ80
52 52
7 CB 4 CB 5
8 Feeder 1 Feeder 2
Fig. 2/75 Example of a switchgear with autonomous generator supply
10
11
12
13
14
15
Overview
Protection coordination
12.0
Typical applications and functions Rush

11.0 1
10.0
Relay operating characteristics and their settings must be N
9.0
carefully coordinated in order to achieve selectivity. The aim is
basically to switch off only the faulty component and to leave
the rest of the power system in service in order to minimize
8.0
7.0 2
supply interruptions and to ensure stability. 6.0
5.0
Sensitivity
Protection should be as sensitive as possible in order to detect
4.0
3.0
3
faults at the lowest possible current level. At the same time, 2.0
however, it should remain stable under all permissible load,
1.0
overload and through-fault conditions. For more information:
http: / / www.siemens.com / systemplanning. The Siemens engi-
2 10 100
Rated transformer power (MVA)
400
4
neering programs SINCAL and SIGRADE are especially designed
for selective protection grading of protection relay systems. They
provide short-circuit calculations, international standard charac-
teristics of relays, fuses and circuit-breakers for easy protection
Time constant of inrush current
Nominal power (MVA) 0.5 … 1.0 1.0 … 10 > 10
5
grading with respect to motor starting, inrush phenomena, and
equipment damage curves. Time constant (s) 0.16 … 0.2 0.2 … 1.2 1.2 … 720
Phase-fault overcurrent relays Fig. 2/76 Peak value of inrush current

6
The pickup values of phase overcurrent relays are normally set
30 % above the maximum load current, provided that sufficient Ground-fault protection relays
short-circuit current is available. This practice is recommended
particularly for mechanical relays with reset ratios of 0.8 to
0.85. Numerical relays have high reset ratios near 0.95 and
Ground-current relays enable a much more sensitive setting,
because load currents do not have to be considered (except
7
allow, therefore, about a 10 % lower setting. Feeders with high 4-wire circuits with 1-phase load). In solidly and low-resistance
transformer and / or motor load require special consideration. grounded systems, a setting of 10 to 20 % rated load current
Transformer feeders
can generally be applied. High-resistance grounding requires
a much more sensitive setting, on the order of some amperes 8
primary. The ground-fault current of motors and generators,
The energizing of transformers causes inrush currents that may
for example, should be limited to values below 10 A in order
last for seconds, depending on their size (Fig. 2/75). Selection
to avoid iron burning. In this case, residual-current relays in
of the pickup current and assigned time delay have to be
coordinated so that the inrush current decreases below the
the start point connection of CTs cannot be used; in particular, 9
with rated CT primary currents higher than 200 A. The pickup
relay overcurrent reset value before the set operating time has
value of the zero-sequence relay would be on the order of the
elapsed. The inrush current typically contains only about a 50 %
error currents of the CTs. A special core-balance CT is therefore
fundamental frequency component. Numerical relays that filter
out harmonics and the DC component of the inrush current can
used as the ground-current sensor. The core-balance CT 7XR96
is designed for a ratio of 60 /1 A. The detection of 6 A primary
10
therefore be set to be more sensitive. The inrush current peak
would then require a relay pickup setting of 0.1 A secondary. An
values of Fig. 2/76 will be reduced to more than one half in this
even more sensitive setting is applied in isolated or Petersen coil
case. Some digital relay types have an inrush detection function
that may block the trip of the overcurrent protection resulting
from inrush currents.
grounded systems where very low ground currents occur with
1-phase-to-ground faults. Settings of 20 mA and lower may then 11
be required depending on the minimum ground-fault current.
Sensitive directional ground-fault relays (integrated into the
relays 7SJ62, 63, 64, 7SJ80, 7SK80, 7SA6) allow settings as
low as 5 mA. 12
13
14
15
Overview
Motor feeders
10,000
1 The energization of motors causes a starting current of initially

5 to 6 times the rated current (locked rotor current).
Time in
1,000
seconds 100
A typical time-current curve for an induction motor is shown in
Fig. 2/77. 10
2 In the first 100 ms, a fast-decaying asymmetrical inrush current 1
also appears. With conventional relays, it was common practice 0.1

to set the instantaneous overcurrent stage of the short-circuit
0.01
protection 20 to 30 % above the locked rotor current with a
3 short-time delay of 50 to 100 ms to override the asymmetrical
inrush period.
0.001
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Current in multiplies of full-load amps
Numerical relays are able to filter out the asymmetrical current
component very rapidly so that the setting of an additional time Motor starting current High set instantaneous O/C stage
4 delay is no longer applicable. Locked-rotor current

Overload protection characteristic
Motor thermal limit curve
Permissible locked-rotor time
The overload protection characteristic should follow the thermal
motor characteristic as closely as possible. The adaptation is Fig. 2/77 Typical motor current-time characteristics
made by setting the pickup value and the thermal time constant,
5 using the data supplied by the motor manufacturer. Further-
more, the locked-rotor protection timer has to be set according
to the characteristic motor value.
6 Time grading of overcurrent relays (51) Time 51
The selectivity of overcurrent protection is based on time grad-

ing of the relay operating characteristics. The relay closer to the 51 51
infeed (upstream relay) is time-delayed against the relay further
7 away from the infeed (downstream relay). The calculation of
necessary grading times is shown in Fig. 2/79 by an example for 0.2-0.4 seconds
definite-time overcurrent relays. Main
Feeder
The overshoot times take into account the fact that the measur-
8 ing relay continues to operate due to its inertia, even if when
Maximum feeder fault level
Current
the fault current is interrupted. This may be high for mechanical

Fig. 2/78 Coordination of inverse-time relays
relays (about 0.1 s) and negligible for numerical relays (20 ms).
9 Inverse-time relays (51)

For the time grading of inverse-time relays, in principle the same lnstantaneous overcurrent protection (50)
rules apply as for the definite-time relays. The time grading is
This is typically applied on the final supply load or on any
first calculated for the maximum fault level and then checked for
10 lower current levels (Fig. 2/78).
protection relay with sufficient circuit impedance between
itself and the next downstream protection relay. The setting at
If the same characteristic is used for all relays, or if when the transformers, for example, must be chosen about 20 to 30 %
upstream relay has a steeper characteristic (e.g., very much higher than the maximum through-fault current. The relay must
over normal inverse), then selectivity is automatically fulfilled at remain stable during energization of the transformer.
11 lower currents.
Differential relay (87)

Transformer differential relays are normally set to pickup values
12 between 20 and 30 % of the rated current. The higher value has
to be chosen when the transformer is fitted with a tap changer.
Restricted ground-fault relays and high-resistance motor / gen-
13 erator differential relays are, as a rule, set to about 10 % of the

rated current.
14
15
Overview
Calculation example
52M Operating time
The feeder configuration of Fig. 2/80 and the associated load
and short-circuit currents are given. Numerical overcurrent relays 1
7SJ80 with normal inverse-time characteristics are applied. 51M
The relay operating times, depending on the current, can be 52F 52F
derived from the diagram or calculated with the formula given in
Fig. 2/81.
51F 51F
2
The Ip / IN settings shown in Fig. 2/80 have been chosen to get 0.2-0.4
pickup values safely above maximum load current. Time grading
This current setting should be lowest for the relay farthest

Fault Fault
inception detection
Interruption of
fault current
3
downstream. The relays further upstream should each have t 51F t 52F
equal or higher current settings. Circuit-breaker
Set time delay interruption time
The time multiplier settings can now be calculated as follows:
Overshoot* 4
Station C: t OS Margin tM
• For coordination with the fuses, we consider the fault in loca- t 51M
tion F1.
The short-circuit current Iscc. max. related to 13.8 kV is 523 A.
*also called overtravel or coasting time 5
This results in 7.47 for I / Ip at the overcurrent relay in
location C. Time grading
• With this value and Tp = 0.05, an operating time of tA = 0.17 s
can be derived from Fig. 2/81.
trs = t51M – t51F = t52F + tOS + tM
Example 1 tTG =0.10 s + 0.15 s + 0.15 s = 0.40 s
6
• This setting was selected for the overcurrent relay to get a safe
grading time over the fuse on the transformer low-voltage Oil circuit-breaker t52F = 0.10 s
side. Safety margin for the setting values for the relay at sta-
tion C are therefore:
Mechanical relays
Safety margin for
tOS = 0.15 s
7
• Pickup current: Ip / IN = 0.7 measuring errors, etc. tM = 0.15 s
• Time multiplier: Tp = 0.05. Example 2 tTG = 0.08 + 0.02 + 0.10 = 0.20 s
Station B:
Vacuum circuit-breaker t52F = 0.08 s 8
Numerical relays tOS = 0.02 s
The relay in B has a primary protection function for line B-C and
Safety margin tM = 0.10 s
a backup function for the relay in C. The maximum through-fault
current of 1.395 A becomes effective for a fault in location F2.
For the relay in C, an operating time time of 0.11 s (I / Ip = 19.93)
Fig. 2/79 Time grading of overcurrent-time relays 9
is obtained.
It is assumed that no special requirements for short operating
times exist and therefore an average time grading interval of
0.3 s can be chosen. The operating time of the relay in B can A F4 B F3 C
13.8 kV/ Fuse:
F2 0.4 kV
160 A
D
Load
F1
10
then be calculated. Load
13.8 kV
625 kVA L.V. 75
• t = 0.11 + 0.3 = 0.41 s

B
51
7SJ80
51
7SJ80
51
7SJ80
5.0 % Load
11
1,395 A
• Value of I / I = ――――
p N
220 A
= 6.34 (Fig. 2/80)
Station Max. ISCC. CT Ip / IN** Iprim*** Iscc. max
• With the operating time 0.41 s and Ip / IN = 6.34,
Tp = 0.11 can be derived from Fig. 2/81.
load
A
max*
A
ratio
A
I / Ip = ――――
Iprim 12
A 300 4,500 400 / 5 1.0 400 11.25
B 170 2,690 200 / 5 1.1 220 12.23
C 50 1,395 100 / 5 0.7 70 19.93 13
D – 523 – – – –
*) ISCC. max = Maximum short-circuit current
**)
***)
Ip / IN
Iprim
= Relay current multiplier setting
= Primary setting current corresponding to Ip / IN 14
Fig. 2/80 Time grading of inverse-time relays for a radial feeder
15
Overview
The setting values for the relay at station B are:

• Pickup current: Ip / IN = 1.1 100
1 • Time multiplier Tp = 0.11
t 50
Given these settings, the operating time of the relay in B for a
40
close fault in F3 can also be checked: The short-circuit current
30
2 increases to 2,690 A in this case (Fig. 2/80). The corresponding
I / Ip value is 12.23. 20
• With this value and the set value of Tp = 0.11, an operating Tp [s]
time of 0.3 s is obtained again (Fig. 2/81).
10
3 Station A: 3.2
• Adding the time grading interval of 0.3 s, the desired operat- 5
ing itme is tA = 0.3 + 0.3 = 0.6 s. 4 1.6
4 Following the same procedure as for the relay in station B,

the following values are obtained for the relay in station A:
3
2 0.8
• Pickup current: Ip / IN = 1.0
• Time multiplier Tp = 0.17
5 • For the close-in fault at location F4, an operating time of
1
0.4
0.48 s is obtained.
0.50
0.2
The normal way 0.4
6 To prove the selectivity over the whole range of possible short-
0.3
circuit currents, it is normal practice to draw the set of operating 0.1
0.2
curves in a common diagram with double log scales. These
diagrams can be calculated manually and drawn point-by-point
7 or constructed by using templates. 0.1
0.05
Today, computer programs are also available for this purpose.

Fig. 2/82 shows the relay coordination diagram for the selected 0.05
example, as calculated by the Siemens program SIGRADE 2 4 6 8 10 20
8 (Siemens Grading Program).
[A]
p
Note:
To simplify calculations, only inverse-time characteristics have Fig. 2/81 Normal inverse-time characteristic of the 7SJ80 relay
9 been used for this example. About 0.1 s shorter operating times
could have been reached for high-current faults by additionally
applying the instantaneous zones I>> of the 7SJ80 relays.
10 Coordination of overcurrent relays with fuses and

low-voltage trip devices
The procedure is similar to the above-described grading of
overcurrent relays. A time interval of between 0.1 and 0.2 s is Normal inverse
11 usually sufficient for a safe time coordination.
t = ――――――
0.14
(I / Ip)0.02 – 1
· Tp(s)
Strong and extremely inverse characteristics are often more
suitable than normal inverse characteristics in this case.
Fig. 2/83 shows typical examples. Strong inverse characteristics may be used with expulsion-type
12 Simple distribution substations use a power fuse on the
fuses (fuse cutouts), while extremely inverse versions adapt
better to current limiting fuses.
secondary side of the supply transformers (Fig. 2/83a).
In any case, the final decision should be made by plotting the
In this case, the operating characteristic of the overcurrent relay curves in the log-log coordination diagram.
13 at the infeed has to be coordinated with the fuse curve.
Electronic trip devices of LV breakers have long-delay, short-
delay and instantaneous zones. Numerical overcurrent relays
with one inverse-time and two definite-time zones can closely
be adapted to this (Fig. 2/83b).
14
15
Overview
Setting range
IN
Bus-A Ip = 0.10 – 4.00 IN
Tp = 0.05 – 3.2 s
Ip = 1.0 IN
Tp = 0.17 s
1
/5 A I>> = 0.1 – 25 IN I>> = ∞
52 Ip = 1.0 IN
7SJ80
Tp = 0.11 s
I>> = ∞
2
Bus-B
Ip = 0.10 – 4.00 IN
Tp = 0.05 – 3.2 s
/5 A
I>> = 0.1 – 25 IN
52 7SJ80
3
Ip = 0.7 IN
Bus-C Tp = 0.05 s
I>> = ∞
/5 A Ip = 0.10 – 4.00 IN
Tp = 0.05 – 3.2 s
4
7SJ80 I>> = 0.1 – 25 IN
52
13.8/0.4 kV
5
TR 625 kVA
5.0%
fuse VDE 160

HRC fuse 160 A 6
Fig. 2/82 Overcurrent-time grading diagram
7
MV bus
Time Inverse-time relay

51
8
Other Fuse
consumers
n
9
a
LV bus
Fuse 0.2 s
10
Current
a) Maximum fault available at HV bus
Fig. 2/83 Coordination of an overcurrent relay with an MV fuse and low-voltage breaker trip device
11
Coordination of distance relays Where measured line or cable impedances are available, the pro-
tected zone setting may be extended to 90 %. The second and
12
The distance relay setting must take into account the limited
third zones have to keep a safety margin of about 15 to 20 %
relay accuracy, including transient overreach (5 %, according
to the corresponding zones of the following lines. The shortest
to IEC 60255-6), the CT error (1 % for class 5P and 3 % for class
10P) and a security margin of about 5 %. Furthermore, the line
parameters are often only calculated, not measured. This is a
following line always has to be considered (Fig. 2/84).
As a general rule, the second zone should at least reach 20 %
13
further source of errors. A setting of 80 to 85 % is therefore over the next station to ensure backup for busbar faults, and the
common practice; 80 % is used for mechanical relays, while 85 % third zone should cover the longest following line as backup for
can be used for the more accurate numerical relays. the line protection.
14
15
Overview
Grading of zone times
1 The first zone normally operates undelayed. For the grading

of the time delays of the second and third zones, the same Ope-
t
rating 3
Z3A
rules as for overcurrent relays apply (Fig. 2/79, page 2/41). For time t 2 Z2A Z2B
the quadrilateral characteristics (relays 7SA6 and 7SA5), only Z1A Z1B Z1C
t1
the reactance values (X values) have to be considered for the
2 protected zone setting. The setting of the R values should cover
the line resistance and possible arc or fault resistances. The arc
ZL A-B ZL B-C ZLC-D
A B C D
resistance can be roughly estimated as follows: Load Load Load
Z1A = 0.85 · ZLA–B

3 RARC =
2.5⋅ larc
I SSC Min
[Ω] Z2A = 0.85 · (ZLA–B + Z1B)
Z2A = 0.85 · (ZLA–B + Z2B)
larc = Arc length in mm
4 ISCC Min = Minimum short-circuit current in kA Fig. 2/84 Grading of distance zones
• Typical settings of the ratio R / X are:

– Short lines and cables (≤ 10 km): R / X =2 to 6
– Medium line lengths < 25 km: R / X =2 D
5 – Longer lines 25 to 50 km: R / X =1 X
X 3A
Shortest feeder protectable by distance relays C
The shortest feeder that can be protected by underreaching
6 distance zones without the need for signaling links depends on
the shortest settable relay reactance.
X 2A
B
X1A
VTratio
XPrim Min = XRelay Min ⋅
CTratio
7 lmin =
XPrim Min
XLine
ʹ
R1A R 2A R 3A
8 The shortest setting of the numerical Siemens relays is 0.05 Ω
for 1 A relays, corresponding to 0.01 Ω for 5 A relays. This allows A R
distance protection of distribution cables down to the range of
some 500 meters.
9 Breaker failure protection setting

Most numerical relays in this guide provide breaker failure (BF)
protection as an integral function. The initiation of the BF pro- Fig. 2/85 Operating characteristics of Siemens distance relays
tection by the internal protection functions then takes place via
10 software logic. However, the BF protection function may also be
initiated externally via binary inputs by an alternate protection. The reset time is 1 cycle for EHV relays (7SA6 / 52, 7VK61) and
In this case, the operating time of intermediate relays (BFI time) 1.5 to 2 cycles for distribution type relays (7SJ**).
may have to be considered. Finally, the tripping of the infeeding
11 breakers requires auxiliary relays, which add a small time delay
(BFI) to the overall fault clearing time. This is particularly the
Fig. 2/87 (next page) shows the time chart for a typical breaker
failure protection scheme. The stated times in parentheses apply
case with one-breaker-and-a-half or ring bus arrangements for transmission system protection and the times in square
where a separate breaker failure relay (7VK61) is used per brackets for distribution system protection.
12 breaker (Fig. 2/79, Fig. 2/80).

The decisive criterion of BF protection time coordination is the
reset time of the current detector (50BF), which must not be
exceeded under any condition during normal current interrup-
13 tion. The reset times specified in the Siemens numerical relay
manuals are valid for the worst-case condition: interruption of a
fully offset short-circuit current and low current pickup setting
(0.1 to 0.2 times rated CT current).
14
15
Overview
High-impedance differential protection;

verification of design 50BF
The following design data must be established:

1
CT data
The prerequisite for high-impedance scheme is that all CTs 50BF
used for that scheme must have the same ratio. They should
also be of low leakage flux design according to Class PX of IEC P1
A
N
D
2
60044-1 (former Class X of BS 3938) or TPS of IEC 60044-6, O
when used for high-impedance busbar protection scheme. When R
P1: primary P 2: alternate P2
used for restricted ground-fault differential protection of e.g. a
transformer winding especially in solidly grounded networks,
protection protection
3
CTs of Class 5P according to IEC 60044-1 can be used as well.
Fig. 2/86 Breaker failure protection, logic circuit
In each case the excitation characteristic and the secondary
winding resistance are to be provided by the manufacturer. The
knee-point voltage of the CT must be at least twice the relay
Fault incidence BFI =
4
pickup voltage to ensure operation on internal faults.
breaker failure
Normal interrupting time initiation time
The relay Current (intermediate
The relay can be either: Protect. Breaker inter.

detector
(50 BF)
reset time Margin
relays, if any)
BFT =
5
a) dedicated design high-impedance relay, e.g., designed as breaker failure
time time tripping time
a sensitive current relay Reyrolle 7SR23 with external series (1~) (2~) (1~) (2,5~) (auxilary relays,
resistor Rstab. If the series resistor is integrated into the relay, the [2~] [4~] [2~] [2,5~] if any)
setting values may be directly applied in volts; or
b) digital overcurrent protection relay with sensitive current 0,5~
(5~)
[8~]
0,5~
(2~)
[4~]
6
input, like 7SJ6 or 7SR1 (Argus-C). To the input of the relay BFI BF timer (F) (62BF) BFT Adjacent
a series stabilizing resistor Rstab will be then connected as a rule breaker
in order to obtain enough stabilization for the high-impedance
scheme. Typically, a non-linear resistor V (varistor) will be also
Total breaker failure interrupting time
(9~) [15~]
int. time
7
connected to protect the relay and wiring against overvoltages.
Fig. 2/87 Time coordination of BF time setting
Sensitivity of the scheme
For the relay to operate in the event of an internal fault, the
8
primary current must reach a minimum value to supply the relay
pickup current (Iset), the varistor leakage current (Ivar) and the
magnetizing currents of all parallel-connected CTs at the set
pickup voltage. A low relay voltage setting and CTs with low 9
magnetizing current therefore increase the protection sensitivity
Stability during external faults

This check is made by assuming an external fault with maximum mR m 10
through-fault current and full saturation of the CT in the faulty
feeder. The saturated CT is then substituted with its secondary
winding resistance RCT, and the appearing relay voltage VR
corresponds to the voltage drop of the in-feeding currents
(through-fault current) across RCT and Rlead. The current (volt-
UK = CT knee-point voltage
UR = RR · IR
11
age) at the relay must, under this condition, stay reliably below UK = ≥ 2 · UR
the relay pickup value.
In practice, the wiring resistances Rlead may not be equal.
Fig. 2/88 Principle connection diagram for high-impedance restricted
ground-fault protection of a winding of the transformer using
12
In this case, the worst condition with the highest relay voltage SIPROTEC digital overcurrent relay (e.g. 7SJ61)
(corresponding to the highest through-fault current) must be
sought by considering all possible external feeder faults.
Setting
Relay setting Urms C β Varistor type 13
≤ 125 450 0.25 600 A / S1 / S256
The setting is always a trade-off between sensitivity and
125 – 240 900 0.25 600 A / S1 / S1088
stability. A higher voltage setting leads not only to enhanced
through-fault stability but also to higher CT magnetizing and
varistor leakage currents, resulting consequently in a higher
14
primary pickup current.
15
Overview
Calculation example: Moreover, Rstab must have a short time rating large enough to withstand
the fault current levels before the fault is cleared. The time duration of
1 Restricted ground fault protection for the 400 kV winding of 400 MVA
power transformer with Ir, 400 kV = 577 A installed in a switchgear with
0.5 seconds can be typically considered (Pstab, 0.5s) to take into account
longer fault clearance times of back-up protection.
rated withstand short-circuit current of 40 kA.
The rms voltage developed across the stabilizing resistor is decisive for
Given:
the thermal stress of the stabilizing resistor. It is calculated according to
N = 4 CTs connected in parallel; Ipn / Isn = 800 A / 1 A – CT ratio;
formula:
2 Uk = 400 V – CT Knee-point voltage;
Im = 20 mA – CT magnetizing current at Uk;
Urms,relay = 1.3⋅ 4 Uk3 ⋅ Rstab ⋅ I k,max,int
I sn
= 1.3⋅ 4 400 3 ⋅ 1000⋅ 50 = 1738.7 V
RCT = 3 Ω – CT internal resistance; I pn
Rlead = 2 Ω – secondary wiring (lead) resistance
Relay: 7SJ612; Time overcurrent 1Phase input used with setting range The resulting short-time rating Pstab, 0.5 s equals to:
3 Iset = 0.003 A to 1.5 A in steps of 0.001 A; relay internal burden
Rrelay = 50 mΩ Pstab,0.5s =
Urms,relay 2
=
17392
= 3023 W
Stability calculation Rstab 1000
Isn 1 Check whether the voltage limitation by a varistor is required
Us ,min = Ik, max, thr — (RCT + Rlead) = 10,000 ―― (3+2) = 62.6 V
4 Ipn 800
with Ik, max, thr taken as 16 . Ir, 400 kV = 16 . 577 A = 9,232 A, rounded up to 10 kA.
The relay should normally be applied with an external varistor which should
be connected across the relay and stabilizing resistor input terminals. The
varistor limits the voltage across the terminals under maximum internal
The actual stability voltage for the scheme Us can be taken with enough fault conditions. The theoretical voltage which may occur at the terminals
safety margin as Us = 130 V (remembering that 2Us < Uk). can be determined according to following equation:
5 Fault setting calculation

For the desired primary fault sensitivity of 125 A, which is approx. 22 %
Isn
Ipn
1
Uk, max, int = Ik, max, int — (Rrelay + Rstab) = 40,000 —— (0.05+1000) = 50003 V
800
of the rated current of the protected winding Ir, 400 kV (i.e. Ip, des = 125 A) with Ik,max,int taken as the rated short-circuit current of the switchgear = 40 kA.
the following current setting can be calculated:
The resulting maximum peak voltage across the panel terminals
6 Isn Us 1 130
Iset = Ip,des — – N . Im —— = 125 —— – 4 . 0.02 —— = 0.13 A
Ipn Uk 800 400
(i.e. tie with relay and Rstab connected in series):
Stabilizing resistor calculation

( )
Û max,relay = 2 2Uk Uk,max,int = 2 2⋅ 400(50003 − 400) = 12600 V
From the Us and Iset values calculated above the value of the stabilizing Since Umax, relay > 1.5 kV the varistor is necessary.
7 resistor Rstab can be calculated:
Us 130 Exemplarily, a METROSIL of type 600A / S1 / Spec.1088 can be used
Rstab = — – Rrelay = —— – 0.05 = ≈ 1,000 Ω (β = 0.25, C = 900).
Iset 0.13 This Metrosil leakage current at voltage setting Us =130 V equals to
. 1/β
8 where the relay resistance can be neglected.

The stabilizing resistor Rstab can be chosen with a necessary minimum
Irms = 0.52 ( U————
set, rms √2
C
) = 0.91 mA
continuous power rating Pstab,cont of:
and can be neglected by the calculations, since its influence on the
U s2 1302
Pstab,cont ≥ —— = ―― = 16.9 W proposed fault-setting is negligible.
Rstab 1000
9
A higher voltage setting also requires a higher knee-point voltage CT requirements for protection relays
10 of the CTs and therefore greater size of the CTs. A sensitivity of 10
to 20 % of Ir (rated current) is typical for restricted ground-fault Instrument transformers
protection. With busbar protection, a pickup value ≥ Ir is normally Instrument transformers must comply with the applicable
applied. In networks with neutral grounding via impedance the IEC recommendations IEC 60044 and 60186 (PT),
fault setting shall be revised against the minimum ground fault
11 conditions.
ANSI / IEEE C57.13 or other comparable standards.
Voltage transformers (VT)

Non-linear resistor (varistor)
Voltage transformers (VT) in single-pole design for all primary
Voltage limitation by a varistor is needed if peak voltages near
12 or above the insulation voltage (2 kV … 3 kV) are expected. A
voltages have typical single or dual secondary windings of
100, 110 or 115 V / √3 with output ratings between 10 and
limitation to Urms = 1,500 V is then recommended. This can be 50 VA suitable from most application with digital metering and
checked for the maximum internal fault current by applying the protection equipment, and accuracies of 0.1 % to 6 % to suit the
formula shown for Umax relav. A restricted ground-fault protection particular application. Primary BIL values are selected to match
13 may sometimes not require a varistor, but a busbar protection in
general does. However, it is considered a good practice to equip
those of the associated switchgear.
with a varistor all high impedance protection installations. The Current transformers
electrical varistor characteristic of a varistor can be expressed as
Current transformers (CT) are usually of the single-ratio type
14 U = C Iβ where C and β are the varistor constants.
with wound or bar-type primaries of adequate thermal rating.
Single, double or triple secondary windings of 1 or 5 A are stan-
dard. 1 A rating should, however, be preferred, particularly in HV
and EHV stations, to reduce the burden of the connected lines.
15 Output power (rated burden in VA), accuracy and saturation
characteristics (rated symmetrical short-circuit current limiting

Overview
factor) of the cores and secondary windings must meet the The requirements for protective current transformers for
requirements of the particular application.The CT classification transient performance are specified in IEC 60044-6. In many
code of IEC is used in the following: practical cases, iron-core CTs cannot be designed to avoid satura-
tion under all circumstances because of cost and space reasons,
1
• Measuring cores
These are normally specified 0.2 % or 0.5 % accuracy (class 0.2 particularly with metal-enclosed switchgear.
or class 0.5), and an rated symmetrical short-circuit current The Siemens relays are therefore designed to tolerate CT satura-
limiting factor FS of 5 or 10.
The required output power (rated burden) should be higher
tion to a large extent. The numerical relays proposed in this 2
guide are particularly stable in this case due to their integrated
than the actually connected burden. Typical values are 2.5, 5 saturation detection function.
or 10 VA. Higher values are normally not necessary when only
electronic meters and recorders are connected.
A typical specification could be: 0.5 FS 10, 5 VA.
CT dimensioning formulae
3
Rct + Rb
• Cores for billing values metering K’ssc = Kssc · ―――― (effective)
Rct + R’b
In this case, class 0.25 FS is normally required.
• Protection cores
The size of the protection core depends mainly on the maxi-
Iscc max
with K’ssc ≥ Ktd · ――――
Ipn
(required) 4
mum short-circuit current and the total burden (internal CT
burden, plus burden of connected lines plus relay burden) The effective symmetrical short-circuit current factor K'SSC can be
Furthermore, a transient dimensioning factor has to be
considered to cover the influence of the DC component in the
calculated as shown in the table above. 5
short-circuit current. The rated transient dimensioning factor Ktd depends on the type
of relay and the primary DC time constant. For relays with a
Glossary of used abbreviations required saturation free time from ≤ 0.4 cycle, the primary (DC)
(according to IEC 60044-6, as defined)
Kssc = Rated symmetrical short-circuit current factor
time constant TP has little influence. 6
(example: CT cl. 5P20 Kssc = 20) CT design according to BS 3938 / IEC 60044-1 (2000)
K’ssc = Effective symmetrical short-circuit current factor IEC Class P can be approximately transfered into the IEC Class PX
Ktd = Transient dimensioning factor

(BS Class X) standard definition by following formula:
(Rb + Rct) · In · Kssc
7
Issc max = Maximum symmetrical short-circuit current Uk = ―――――――――
1.3
Ipn = CT rated primary current
Example:
Isn = CT rated secondary current IEC 60044: 600 / 1, 5P10, 15 VA, Rct = 4 Ω 8
Rct = Secondary winding d.c. resistance at 75 °C / 167 °F (15 + 4) · 1 · 10
(or other specified temperature) IEC PX or BS: UK = ―――――――― = 146 V
1.3
Rb = Rated resistive burden Rct = 4 Ω
R’b = Rlead + Rrelay = connected resistive burden For CT design according to ANSI / IEEE C 57.13 please refer to page 2/50 9
TP = Primary time constant (net time constant) The CT requirements mentioned in Table 2/2 are simplified
UK = Kneepoint voltage (r.m.s.) in order to allow fast CT calculations on the safe side. More
Rrelay = Relay burden
accurate dimensioning can be done by more intensive calcula-
tion with Siemens’s CTDIM (www.siemens.com / ctdim) program.
10
2·ρ·l Results of CTDIM are released by the relay manufacturer.
Rlead = ――――
A
Adaption factor for 7UT6, 7UM62 relays –
with
l = Single conductor length from CT to relay in m
(limited resolution of measurement) 11
ρ = Specific resistance = 0.0175 Ωmm2 / m (copper wires) Ipn INrelay Ipn · √3 · UnO INrelay
at 20 °C / 68 °F (or other specified temperature)
FAdap = ―― · ――― = ――――――― · ――― Request: ⅛ ≤ 8
InO Isn SNmax Isn
A = Conductor cross-section in mm2
7SD52, 53, 610, when transformer inside protected zone 12
In general, an accuracy of 1 % in the range of 1 to 2 times In-pri-CTmax 1
nominal current (class 5 P) is specified. The rated symmetrical ―――― · ―――――― ≤ 8
short-circuit current factor KSSC should normally be selected so In-pri-CTmin Transformer Ratio*
that at least the maximum short-circuit current can be transmit-
ted without saturation (DC component is not considered).
* If transformer in protection zone, else 1 13
In-pri-CT-Transf-Site ≤ 2 · In-Obj-Transf-Site AND
This results, as a rule, in rated symmetrical short-circuit current
factors of 10 or 20 depending on the rated burden of the CT in In-pri-CT-Transf-Site ≥ In-Obj-Transf-Site with
relation to the connected burden. A typical specification for pro- InO = Rated current of the protected object 14
tection cores for distribution feeders is 5P10, 10 VA or 5P20, 5 VA. UnO = Rated voltage of the protected object
INrelay = Rated current of the relay
SNmax = Maximun load of the protected object
(for transformers: winding with max. load) 15
Overview
Relay type Transient dimensioning Min. required sym. short- Min. required knee-point
factor Ktd circuit current factor K’ssc voltage Uk
1 IHigh set point
Overcurrent-time IHigh set point Uk ≥ ――――― · (Rct + R’b) · Isn
K’ssc ≥ ――――― 1.3 · Ipn
and motor protection Ipn
–
7SJ61, 62, 63, 64
2 7SJ80, 7SK80 at least: 20
20
at least: ―― · (Rct + R’b) · Isn
1.3
Line differential protection Busbar / Gen. / K’ssc ≥ UK ≥

(without distance function) Transformer Line Motor Iscc max (ext. fault) Iscc max (ext. fault)
3 7SD52x, 53x, 610 (50 / 60 Hz)
Transformer / generator
1.2 1.2
Busbar /
1.2
Gen. /
Ktd · ―――――――
Ipn
Ktd · ―――――――
1.3 · Ipn
· (Rct + R’b) · Isn
and (only for 7SS):

differential protection Transformer Line Motor and (only for 7SS):
7UT612, 7UT612 V4.0 4 4 5 Iscc max (ext. fault)
――――――― ≤ 100
4 7UT613, 633, 635, 7UT612 V4.6 3
7UM62 4
3
–
5
5
Iscc max (ext. fault)
―――――――
Ipn
≤ 100 Ipn
(measuring range)
Busbar protection for stabilizing factors k ≥ 0.5 (measuring range)
7SS52 0.5
5 Distance protection
7SA522, 7SA6, 7SD5xx
primary DC time constant Tp [ms]
≤ 30 ≤ 50 ≤ 100 ≤ 200
K’ssc ≥
Iscc max (close – in fault)
Ktd (a) · ―――――――――
UK ≥
Iscc max (close – in fault)
Ktd (a)· ――――――――― · (Rct + R’b) · Isn
(with distance function) Ktd (a) 1 2 4 4 Ipn 1.3 · Ipn
Ktd (b) 4 5 5 5 and: and:
6 Iscc max (zone 1 – end fault)

Ktd (b) · ――――――――――
Ipn
Iscc max (zone 1 – end fault)
Ktd (b) · ―――――――――― · (Rct + R’b) · Isn
1.3 · Ipn
Table 2/2 CT requirements
8 132 kV, 50 Hz
-T (G S2) -G1 -T (T LV1)) -T1

9 6,000/1 A
5P20
120 MVA
13.8 kV,
6,000/1 A
5P20
240/120/120 MVA
132/13.8/13.8 kV -T (T HV)
1,200/5 A
-T (L end 1)
1,000/5 A
-T (L end 2)
1,500/1 A
20 VA 50 Hz 20 VA 50 Hz
Rct = 18 x“d = 0.16 Rct = 18 uk 1-2 = 14 % 5P20 BS cl.X
50 VA Uk = 200 V
G 2 Rct = 0.96 Rct = 0.8
10 3~ 1)
3
1 7.5 kA
35.8 kA 34.5 kA 1 = HV
2 = LV1 17 kA
I = 60 m I = 40 m 3 = LV2 l = 100 m l = 60 m (given)
11 A = 4 mm2 A = 4 mm2
-G2
A = 4 mm2 A = 4 mm2
7UM62 7UT633 7SD52*) 7SD52
*) without
12 CB
x“d
uk 1-2
arrangement inside power station is not shown
= Generator direct axis subtransient reactance in p.u.
= Transformer impedance voltage HV side – LV side in %
distance function
Rrelay = Assumed with 0.1 , (power consumption for above relays is below 0.1 VA)
1) Current from side 3 is due to uk 2-3 and x“d of G2 in most cases negligible
13 Fig. 2/89 Example 1 – CT verification for 7UM62, 7UT6, 7SD52 (7SD53, 7SD610)
14
15
Overview
-T (G S2), 7UM62 -T (T LV1), 7UT633 -T (T HV), 7UT633 -T (L end 1), 7SD52
c · SNG
Iscc max (ext. fault) = ――――――
√3 · UNG x“d
SNT
√3 · UNT uk“
SNT
√3 · UNT uk“
Iscc max (ext. fault) = 17 kA (given) 1
1.1 · 120,000 kVA 120,000 kVA 240,000 kVA
= ――――――――― = 34,516 A = ――――――――― = 35,860 A = ――――――――― = 7,498 A
√3 · 13.8 kV · 0.16 √3 · 13.8 kV · 0.14 √3 · 132 kV · 0.14
2
Ktd = 5 (from Table 2/2) Ktd = 3 (from Table 2/2) Ktd = 3 (from Table 2/2) Ktd = 1.2 (from Table 2/2)
Iscc max (ext. fault) Iscc max (ext. fault) Iscc max (ext. fault)
3
K’ssc ≥ Ktd · ――――――― K’ssc ≥ Ktd · ――――――― K’ssc ≥ Ktd · ―――――――
Ipn Ipn Ipn
31,378 A
= 5 · ――――― = 28.8
6,000 A
35,860 A
= 3 · ――――― = 17.9
6,000 A
7,498 A
= 3 · ――――― = 18,7
1,200 A
4
Sn 20 VA Sn 20 VA Sn 50 VA
Rb = ――
I2sn
= ――― = 20 Ω
1 A2
Rb = ――
I2sn
= ――― = 20 Ω
1 A2
Rb = ―― = ――― = 2 Ω
I2sn (5 A)2 5
R’b = Rlead + Rrelay R’b = Rlead + Rrelay R’b = Rlead + Rrelay R’b = Rlead + Rrelay
2·p·l 2·p·l 2·p·l 2·p·l

Rb = ―――― + 0.1 Ω
A
Rb = ―――― + 0.1 Ω
A
Rb = ―――― + 0.1 Ω
A
Rb = ―――― + 0.1 Ω
A 6
Ω mm2 Ω mm2 Ω mm2 Ω mm2
2 · 0.0175 ――― · 60 m 2 · 0.0175 ――― · 640 m 2 · 0.0175 ――― · 100 m 2 · 0.0175 ――― · 60 m
m m m m
= ――――――――――――
4 mm2
= ――――――――――――
4 mm2
= ――――――――――――
4 mm2
= ――――――――――――
4 mm2 7
+ 0.1 Ω + 0.1 Ω + 0.1 Ω + 0.1 Ω
= 0.625 Ω = 0.450 Ω = 0.975 Ω = 0.625 Ω
Iscc max (ext. fault)

8
Rct + Rb Rct + Rb Rct + Rb UK ≥ Ktd · ――――――― · (Rct + R’b) · Isn
K’ssc = Kssc · ―――― K’ssc = Kssc · ―――― K’ssc = Kssc · ―――― 1.3 · Ipn
Rct + R’b Rct + R’b Rct + R’b
18 Ω + 20 Ω
= 20 · ――――――― = 40.8
18 Ω + 20 Ω
= 20 · ――――――― = 41.2
0.96 Ω + 2 Ω
= 20 · ――――――――― = 30.6
17,000 A
= 1.2 · ――――― · (0.8 Ω + 0.625 Ω) ·5 A
1.3 · 1,000 A 9
18 Ω + 0.625 Ω 18 Ω + 0.450 Ω 0.96 Ω + 0.975 Ω
= 111.8 V
K’ssc required = 28.8, K’ssc required = 17.9, K’ssc required = 18.7, UK required = 111.8 V,
Kssc effective = 40.8 Kssc effective = 41.2 Kssc effective = 30.6 UK effective = 200 V 10
28.8 < 40.8 17.9 < 41.2 18.7 < 30.6 111.8 V < 200 V
CT dimensioning is ok CT dimensioning is ok CT dimensioning is ok CT dimensioning is ok
Ipn · √3 · UnO INrelay

FAdap = ―――――― · ―――
FAdap = ―――――― · ―――
FAdap = ―――――― · ―――
Ipn max
――― ≤ 8
11
SNmax Isn SNmax Isn SNmax Isn Ipn min
6,000 A · √3 · 13.8 kV 1A 6,000 A · √3 · 13.8 kV 1A 1,200 A · √3 · 132 kV 5A 1,500 A

= ――――――――――― · ――
120,000 kVA 1A
= ――――――――――― · ――
240,000 kVA 1A
= ――――――――――― · ――
240,000 kVA 5A
―――― = 1.5 ≤ 8
1,000 A
ok!
12
= 1.195 = 0.598 = 1.143
⅛ ≤ 1.195 ≤ 8 ok! ⅛ ≤ 0.598 ≤ 8 ok! ⅛ ≤ 1.143 ≤ 8 ok!
Table 2/3 Example 1 (continued) – verification of the numerical differential protection

13
Attention (only for 7UT6 V4.0): When low-impedance REF is Further condition for 7SD52x, 53x, 610 relays (when used as
used, the request for the REF side (3-phase) is:
¼ ≤ FAdap ≤ 4, (for the neutral CT: ⅛ ≤ FAdap ≤ 8)
line differential protection without transformer inside protected
zone): Maximum ratio between primary currents of CTs at the
14
end of the protected line:
Ipn max
――― ≤8
Ipn min 15
Overview
Given case:
Analog static relays in general have burdens below about 1 VA.
1 Mechanical relays, however, have a much higher burden, up to

the order of 10 VA. This has to be considered when older relays
are connected to the same CT circuit.
l = 50 m
2 A = 6 mm2
In any case, the relevant relay manuals should always be
consulted for the actual burden values.
7SS52
Burden of the connection leads

3 600/1
5 P 10,
scc.max. = 30 kA The resistance of the current loop from the CT to the relay has to
15 VA, be considered:
Rct = 4
2·ρ·l
Rlead = ――――
4 Fig. 2/90 Example 2
A
l = Single conductor length from the CT to the relay in m

Specific resistance:
Iscc max 30,000 A
Ω · mm2
5 ―――
Ipn
= ―――― = 50
600 A ρ = 0.0175 ―――― (copper wires) at 20 °C / 68 °F
m
According to Table 2/2, page 2/48 Ktd = ½ A = Conductor cross-section in mm2
6 K’ssc
1
≥ ― · 50 = 25
2 CT design according to ANSI / IEEE C 57.13
15 VA Class C of this standard defines the CT by ist secondary terminal

7 Rb = ―――
1 A2
= 15 Ω
voltage at 20 times rated current, for which the ratio error shall
not exceed 10 %. Standard classes are C100, C200, C400 and
Rrelay = 0.1 Ω C800 for 5 A rated secondary current.
8 Rlead
2 · 0.0175 · 50
= ――――――― = 0.3 Ω
6
This terminal voltage can be approximately calculated from the
IEC data as follows:
R’b = Rlead + Rrelay = 0.3 Ω + 0.1 Ω = 0.4 Ω ANSI CT definition

9 Rct + Rb 4 Ω + 15 Ω Us.t.max
Kssc
= 20 · 5 A · Rb · ――
K’ssc = ―――― · Kssc = ――――― · 10 = 43.2 20
Rct + R’b 4 Ω + 0.4 Ω
with
Pb
10 Result: Rb = ――
Isn2
and INsn = 5 A, the result is
The effective K’ssc is 43.2, the required K’ssc is 25. Therefore the
Pb · Kssc
stability criterion is fulfilled. Us.t.max = ――――
5A
11 Relay burden Example:

IEC 600 / 5, 5P20, 25 VA,
The CT burdens of the numerical relays of Siemens are below
60044
0.1 VA and can therefore be neglected for a practical estimation.
Exception is the pilot-wire relay 7SD600. ANSI (25 VA · 20)
12 C57.13: Us.t.max = ―――――― = 100 V, acc. to class C100
5A
Intermediate CTs are normally no longer necessary, because the
ratio adaptation for busbar protection 7SS52 and transformer
protection is numerically performed in the relay.
13
14
15
Software for Substation Automation
Page
DIGSI 4 an operating software

for all SIPROTEC protection relays 3/3
IEC 61850 System Configurator 3/5
SIGRA 4 powerful analysis

of all protection fault records 3/7
DIGSI 4 – Description
Description
The PC operating program DIGSI 4 is the user interface to all

Siemens protection devices, up to and including SIPROTEC 4 and
SIPROTEC Compact. It has a simple and intuitive user interface.
Using DIGSI 4, the parameters for the SIPROTEC devices are set
and evaluated – it is the tailor-made program for industrial and
energy supply systems.
Functions
LSP2324-afpen.tif
• Simple protection settings
The functions actually required can simply be selected from
the numerous protection functions. This facilitates increased
clarity over the other menus.
• Setting devices with primary and secondary values
Fig. 3/3 CFC Chart
The settings can be entered and displayed as primary or secon-
dary values. You can switch between primary and secondary • Commissioning
values using the mouse click on the toolbar. Special attention was paid to commissioning. All binary inputs
and outputs can be individually tested and read. This enables
an extremely simple wiring check. For test purposes, messages
can be intentionally sent to the serial interfaces.
• IEC 61850 System Configurator
Using the IEC 61850 system configurator, which is launched
from the DIGSI manager, the IEC 61850 network structure and
the scope of the data exchange between the participants of
an IEC 61850 station can be defined. To do so, subnetworks
sc_digsi4_main_menue.tif
are added as required to the network working area. These

subnetworks are then allocated available participants and the
addressing is set. In the GOOSE working area, the data objects
between the participants are linked, for example, the pickup
indication of the V/AMZ I> function of the feeder 1, which is
transmitted to the infeed, in order to effect the reverse interlo-
cking of the V/AMZ I>> function there. For more information,
see "IEC 61850 System Configurator – Description".
Fig. 3/1 DIGSI 4: Main Menu, Selecting the Protection Functions
• Routing matrix
The DIGSI 4 matrix shows the user the entire device configu-
ration at a glance. For instance, the allocation of LEDs, binary
inputs and standard relays is displayed on one screen. The
routing can be changed with the click of a mouse.
sc_digsi4_matrix1.tif
DIGSI 4_IEC 61850.tif
Fig. 3/2 DIGSI 4: Routing Matrix
• CFC: Configure logic instead of programming it

Using CFC (Continuous Function Chart), interlockings and Fig. 3/4 IEC 61850 System Configurator
switching sequences can be configured, information linked
and derived without software expertise simply by drawing
technical processes. Logical elements such as AND, OR and
timing elements are available, as are limiting value interroga-
tions of measured values.

DIGSI 4 – Selection and Ordering Data
Description Variants Order no.

Software for project engineering Basic 7XS5400-0AA00
and operation of Siemens protection Basic version with license for 10 computers (authorization using serial
devices of the SIPROTEC 4/3/2 and number)
SIPROTEC Compact product families,
executable under the following Professional 7XS5402-0AA00
operating systems: Basic and in addition SIGRA (fault-record analysis), CFC editor (logic editor),
- Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate, display editor (editor for basic and branch control images) and DIGSI 4
Professional and Enterprise (32/64 remote (remote control) with license for 10 computers (authorization using
Bit) serial number)
- Microsoft Windows 10 Professional DIGSI 4 professional + IEC 61850 7XS5403-0AA00
and Enterprise (64 Bit) Professional and additional IEC 61850 System Configurator with license for
- Microsoft Windows Server 10 computers (authorization via serial number)
2008/2012 R2 (64 Bit)
Upgrade from DIGSI 4 basic to DIGSI 4 professional 7XS5407-0AA00
See product information for details
about the supported service packs of Upgrade from DIGSI 4 basic to DIGSI 4 professional + IEC 61850 7XS5408-0AA00
the operating systems. Upgrade from DIGSI 4 professional to DIGSI 4 professional + IEC 61850 7XS5460-0AA00
Including device templates, Comt-
SIPROTEC 4 tutorial IC1000-G220-C198-X-7100
rade Viewer, electronic help, DIGSI
cables (for all devices) and service Multimedia information and training for SIPROTEC 4, DIGSI 4, SIGRA and IEC
(update, hotline). 61850 including trial software, handbooks and catalog
Interface languages: German, DIGSI 4 Trial 7XS5401-1AA00
English, French, Spanish, Italian, Like DIGSI 4 professional + IEC 61850, but only valid for 30 days (test
Chinese, Russian, and Turkish version, no authorization necessary)
(selectable)
Delivery is on DVD-ROM DIGSI 4 scientific 7XS5402-2AA00
Like DIGSI 4 professional + IEC 61850, only for scientific equipment (univer-
sity, technical college, research institution) with license for 10 computers
(authorization using serial number)
DIGSI 4 DVD copy 7XS5490-0AA00
Contains latest DIGSI 4, IEC 61850 system configurator and SIGRA, without
license
Table 1 DIGSI 4 Selection and Ordering Data

IEC 61850 System Configurator – Description
Description IEDs from the IEC 61850 standard of Edition 1 or Edition 2 are
supported. The possible engineering therefore includes not only
The IEC 61850 system configurator is the manufacturer-inde- GOOSE communication and client/server configuration via MMS
pendent solution for the interoperable engineering of IEC 61850 reporting, but also system topology, process bus communication
products and systems. It supports all devices with IEC 61850, with SMV (sampled measured values) and IEC 60870-5-104
not just Siemens products – like SIPROTEC 5, SIPROTEC 4, addresses for the gateway to the network control center via
SIPROTEC Compact, Reyrolle, SICAM RTUs, SICAM IO/AI/P85x/ IEC 61850-80-1.
Q100 – but also devices from other Siemens divisions (such as Simple engineering thanks to customer-friendly workflows and
SITRAS PRO) or from third parties. universal display of IEC 61850 addresses as well as customer
The tool supports SCL configuration files (substation confi- description texts. Users with IEC 61850 basic or expert know-
guration language) from the IEC 61850-6 through import or ledge find the desired level of detail.
export of all formats (ICD/IID/CID/SCD/SSD/SED). Thus, IEC 61850
devices can be added and a complete IEC 61850 station is
available for substation automation technology.
Fig. 3/5 An IEC 61850 System Configurator for All Devices in the Station

IEC 61850 System Configurator – Selection and Ordering Data

IEC 61850 System Configurator Stand-alone 7XS5461-0A A00
Software for configuring stations with IEC 61850 communication For configuration independent from
Executable under 32-bit and 64-bit MS Windows 7 Ultimate, Enterprise manufacturers of a plant with IEC 61850
and Professional/MS Windows 8.1/MS Windows Server 2012 R2 64-bit/MS devices (SIPROTEC, Reyrolle and devices
Windows 10 Professional and Enterprise (64 Bit) from the competition), installation
See product information for supported service packs of the operating independent from DIGSI, with license for
systems including electronic help and service (update, hotline) 10 computers (authorization using serial
number)
Interface languages: German, English, French, Spanish, Italian, Portugue-
se, Chinese, Russian and Turkish selectable Supplied on DVD-ROM.
Table 2 SIGRA – Selection and Ordering Data

SIGRA – Description
Description
The SIGRA user program supports you in analyzing failures in

your electrical power system. It graphically analyzes data recor-
ded during the failure and calculates additional supplemental
quantities such as impedances, powers or RMS values, from the
supplied measured values, making evaluation of the fault record
easier for you.
The quantities can be shown as desired in the diagrams of the
views
• Time signals
• Phasor diagrams Fig. 3/6 SIGRA 4
• Locus diagrams • Calculation of additional values, such as positive-sequence
• Harmonics impedances, RMS values, symmetrical components and
• Fault locator phasors
• 2 measuring cursors that are synchronized in all views
and in the ”Table” view.
• High-performance panning and zoom functions
After a system incident, it is especially important to quickly and (for example, section enlargement)
completely analyze the error, so that the respective measures
• User-friendly project engineering via drag and drop
can be derived immediately from the cause analysis. This will
enable the original network status to be recovered and the down • Innovative signal routing in a clearly structured matrix
time to be reduced to an absolute minimum. • Time-saving user profiles, which can be assigned to individual
relay types or series
As well as the usual time signal display of the recorded
measured quantity, the current version is also set up to display • Addition of further fault records and synchronization of
vector, pie and bar charts to show the harmonics and data multiple fault records with a common time base
tables. From the measured values recorded in the fault records, • Simple documentation through copying of the diagrams for
SIGRA 4 calculates further values, for instance missing quantities example, into MS Office programs
in the 3-phase electrical power system, impedances, outputs, • Offline fault-location determination
symmetrical components, etc. Using two measurement cursors,
• Commenting of fault records, and commenting of individual
the fault current can be evaluated easily and conveniently. With
measuring points in diagrams and free placement of these
the aid of SIGRA however, further fault record can also be added.
comments in diagrams
The signals from another fault record (for example, from the
opposite end of the line) are added to the current signal pattern • Application of mathematical operations to signals
using drag and drop.
Hardware Requirements
SIGRA 4 facilitates the display of signals from various fault • Pentium 4 with 1 GHz processor or similar
records in one diagram as well as a fully automated synchroni-
zation of these signals on a common time base. As well as the • 1 GB RAM (2 GB recommended)
precise determination of the individual factors of the line fault, • Graphic display with resolution of 1024 × 768
the fault location is also of particular interest. (1280 × 1024 recommended)
A precise determination of the fault location saves time which • 50 MB available hard disk space
the user can use for an on-site inspection of the error. This • DVD ROM drive
function is also supported by SIGRA 4 using the ”offline fault • Keyboard and mouse
location” function. SIGRA 4 can be used for all fault records in
the COMTRADE file format. Software requirements
The functions and advantages of SIGRA 4 can often only be • MS Windows 7 Ultimate, Enterprise and Professional
optimally displayed directly on the product. For this reason, • MS Windows 8.1 Enterprise
SIGRA 4 is available as a 30-day test version. • MS Windows Server 2008 R2
Functions
• 6 diagram types:
– Time-signal representation (standard)
– Locus diagram (for example for RX)
– Vector diagram (reading of angles)
– Bar chart (for example for visualizing harmonics)
– Table (with values of several signals at the same point in
time)
– Fault-location determination (display of fault location)

SIGRA – Selection and Ordering Data

SIGRA SIGRA for DIGSI 7XS5410-0AA00
Software for graphical visualization, analysis and evaluation of fault With license for 10 computers (authori-
records zation using serial number). The DIGSI 4
Executable under 32-bit and 64-bit MS Windows 7 Ultimate, Enterprise license number is required to order.
and Professional/MS Windows 8.1 Enterprise/MS Windows Server 2008 R2 SIGRA Stand-alone 7XS5416-0AA00
See product information for supported service packs of the operating Installation without DIGSI 4 with license
systems including sample fault record, electronic help and service for 10 computers (authorization using
(update, hotline) serial number)
Interface languages: German, English, French, Spanish, Italian, Chinese, SIGRA Scientific 7XS5416-1AA00
Russian and Turkish, selectable
Installation without DIGSI 4 only for
Incl. Multimedia Tutorial on separate CD-ROM scientific equipment (university, technical
Supplied on DVD-ROM. college, research institution) with license
for 10 computers (authorization using
serial number)
SIGRA Trial 7XS5411-1AA00
Like SIGRA Stand-alone version but only
usable for 30-days (no authorization
required)
Upgrade from SIGRA Trial to SIGRA 7XS5416-2AA00
Stand-alone
Like SIGRA Stand-alone version for
customers who want to activate a trial
version with full capabilities and a license
for 10 computers
Table 3 SIGRA – Selection and Ordering Data

Communication
Page
Description 4/3
Function overview 4/3
Typical applications 4/5
Integration into substation control systems 4/7
Integration into the SICAM power automation system 4/9
Integration into the substation automation system 4/10 4

Integration into the SICAM PAS power automation system 4/11
Solution without substation control system 4/12

1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Communication
Description, function overview
Function overview
Description 1
• Remote communication with DIGSI
• Remote communication with SIPROTEC
4 units
• Remote communication with SIPROTEC
2
3 units and SIPROTEC ‘600 units
Typical applications
• SIPROTEC 4 units on an RS485 bus
3
• SIPROTEC 4 units with FO/RS485
• Mixed system SIPROTEC 4
• Configuration with active star-coupler 4
Integration into substation control
systems
Integration into the SICAM power

5
automation system
Integration into other systems

Fig. 4/1 Communication structure 6
Description
Communication interfaces on protection relays are becoming 7

increasingly important for the efficient and economical opera-
tion of substations and networks. The interfaces can be used for:
• Accessing the protection relays from a PC using the DIGSI oper-
ating program. Remote access via modem, Ethernet modem 8
is possible with a serial service port at the relay. This allows
remote access to all data of the protection relay.
• Integrating the relays into control systems with IEC 60870-
5-103 protocol, PROFIBUS DP protocol, DNP 3.0 protocol, 9
MODBUS protocol, DNP3 TCP, PROFINET and Redundancy
protocols for Ethernet (RSTP; PRP and HSR).
The standardized IEC 61850 protocol is available since Oct.
2004 and with its SIPROTEC units Siemens has provided this 10
standard as the first manufacturer worldwide.
• Peer-to-peer communication of differential relays and distance
relays to exchange real-time protection data via fiber-optic
cables, communication network, telephone networks or
analog pilot wires.
11
12
13
14
15
Communication
Description
Description
1 Remote communication with DIGSI

By using the remote communication
functions of DIGSI it is possible to access
2 relays from your office via the telephone

network. So you do not have to drive
to the substation at all and, if you need
to carry out a quick fault analysis, for
example, you can transfer the fault data
3 into your office in just a few minutes so
that you can use DIGSI to evaluate it.
Another alternative is the ability to access
4 all the units of a substation from a central

point within that station. This saves you
having to connect your PC individually to
all the relays in the station.
5 In both cases you need a few simple

communication units and a PC with DIGSI
and a remote communication component
installed. The data traffic with DIGSI uses
a secure protocol based on the IEC stand-
6 ard similar to IEC 60870-5-103 so that, Fig. 4/2 Remote relay communication
amongst other things, the relays have
unique addresses for accessing purposes.
7 A high level of data integrity is achieved through the check sum

incorporated in the telegram. Any telegrams that might become
Since Oct. 2004, a relay can be accessed remotely with DIGSI via
an Ethernet interface in the relay and with the IEC 61850 pro-
distorted during transmission are repeated. A comparison of tocol. This allows access to the relays via an Ethernet network.
parameters between relay and PC to ensure that they match also Some relays include a Web server, so an Internet browser can
improves the integrity. There are other security functions too also be used for remote access via Ethernet.
8 such as passwords and a substation modem callback function
which can also be triggered from events.
Remote communication with SIPROTEC 4 units

9 SIPROTEC 4 units are well equipped for remote communication.
A separate serial service interface for the protection engineer,
independent of the system interface, allows the units to be
easily integrated into any communication configuration. The
10 front interface then remains free for local operation. Together
with a flexibility in the choice of interface, i.e. optical with an
ST connector for multi-mode FO cables or electrical for RS232 or
RS485 hard-wired connections, it is easy to create the optimum
11 solution for any particular application.
With SIPROTEC 4 units you can also use PROFIBUS DP to provide
a central link with DIGSI via the control system interface. For
this you will need a PC with a special PROFIBUS card that must
12 be connected to the PROFIBUS system. This solution is intended
exclusively for SIPROTEC 4 units with PROFIBUS DP.
13
14
15
Communication
An extensive range of communication 1

components, such as modems, star
couplers, optoelectric converters,
prefabricated FO connection cables and
electric connection cables (see part 13 of
this catalog) allows you to create a variety
2
of different solutions: FO connections
immune to interference or cost-effective
solutions using the two-wire RS485
electric bus.
3
The following examples give some indica-
tion of what configurations are possible,
which items are needed for the purpose
and what baud rates are possible.
4
Example 1: SIPROTEC 4 units on an
RS485 bus
Remote communication is effected via
5
a private or public telephone network
with both analog or digital telephone
lines being possible. An Ethernet network
can also be used together with Ethernet Fig. 4/3 SIPROTEC 4 units on an RS485 bus (Example 1) 6
modems. The 8N1 data format and an
analog baud rate of 57.6/64 kbit/s have
become established as the standard
for serial modem links. The connection 7
between modem and units is initially
optical. An FO/RS485 converter 7XV5650
that can be installed close to the units
then converts the signals for the RS485
bus. Up to 31 relays can be connected to
8
the RS485 bus. Particularly in the case of
modems, we recommend the use of the
types of units listed in part 13.
9
Example 2: SIPROTEC 4 units with
FO/RS485
In the case of larger substations with
longer distances we recommend the use
10
of FO connection cables. The following
example shows a mixed system of optical
and electrical connections. Typically, all
relays in a cubicle can be linked together 11
via RS485 and the cubicles themselves
can be connected to the star coupler via
FO cables (see Fig. 4/4).
Fig. 4/4 Two groups of SIPROTEC 4 units on an RS485bus (Example 2) 12
13
14
15
Communication
Example 3: Mixed system – SIPROTEC 4
1 Relays from different families can be

integrated into a remote communication
system, as illustrated in Example 3 (see
Fig. 4/5). This example also shows how
relays can be integrated by means of FO
2 links and star couplers. In this case we
recommend to use the 7XV5550 active
mini star-coupler (see Fig. 4/6).
Communication will then generally be
3 at 57.6/64 kbit/s on the modem link. For
any units that cannot operate at this baud
rate the active star-coupler will convert
the rate accordingly.
4 Example 4: Configuration with active
star- coupler
With this configuration it is also possible
5 to integrate relays that can only be con-
nected via the front interface and whose
maximum baud rates are less than
19.2 kbaud (see Fig. 4/6).
6 The following points must be noted with
this type of configuration: Fig. 4/5 Mixed system, FO/RS485 with units from different families (Example 3)
• One output of the active mini star-cou-
pler is used to service several SIPROTEC
7 4 units through further star couplers or RS485 converters. On The solutions for central and/or remote communication with
that output, a mixed system containing SIPROTEC 3 and series SIPROTEC units have easy upgrade compatibility. Different ver-
‘600 relays should be avoided so that 57600 baud operation is sions of relays can be integrated into a remote communication
possible for SIPROTEC 4 relays. concept. This is supported by the substation and device manage-
8 • Several SIPROTEC 3 units and series ‘600 relays can also be ment in the DIGSI software. A substation can be retrofitted with
connected to another output of the active mini star-coupler add-on remote communication components provided it has
(via mini star-couplers or RS485 converters). The baud rate for the communication connection available. And changing of the
this output must be set less or equal to 19200 baud. telephone line from, say, analog to digital does not necessitate
9 • Relays that are not available with communication functions the replacement of all components. Also, Ethernet networks
can be used. The telephone modem is then replaced by an
according to IEC 60870-5-103 protocol (e.g. 7VE51, 7VK51,
7SV51 and older firmware versions of some relays) can also be Ethernet modem. The infrastructure in the substation remains
connected via the active star-coupler as illustrated in Fig. 4/6. unchanged.
10 In this case one output must be assigned to each relay. The

baud rate must be set according to the unit.
11
12
13
14
15
Communication
Typical applications, integration into substation control systems
7
Fig. 4/6 Mixed system with relays from different families, with active star-coupler (Example 4)
8
Integration into substation control systems An overview which communication protocols are available in
the various SIPROTEC relays can be found in the Internet at
Almost all SIPROTEC units can be integrated into substation
control systems via communication interfaces.
www. siemen.com/siprotec or in the catalog "Selection Guide for
SIPROTEC and Reyrolle" 9
The relays can be supplied as part of an integrated Siemens
system offering all substation control and protection. In addi-
tion, the relays can also be integrated into other control systems
via standard protocols. An integrated system offers type-tested
10
functions, consistent con-figuration and optimally coordinated
communication protocols. SICAM PAS and SICAM RTUs are
proven systems available from Siemens. These systems, also
offer Ethernet communication with IEC 61850.
11
For situations where you would like to integrate SIPROTEC units
into other control systems we can offer open communication
interfaces. In addition to the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol that is
available in almost all relays we can also offer other communica-
12
tion protocols for SIPROTEC 4 units like PROFIBUS DP, MODBUS,
DNP 3.0, DNP3 TCP, PROFINET and Redundancy protocols for
Ethernet (RSTP;PRP and HSR).
13
14
15
Communication
Integration into substation control systems
IEC 61850 protocol ands to one or two (redundant) masters. Switchgear can be
switched in command direction via the protocol.
1 Since Oct. 2004, the Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol is the
worldwide standard for protection and control systems used by
Time synchronization can be implemented via SNTP or IEEE1588
via the network, supporting redundant time servers. All addi-
power supply corporations, Siemens was the first manufacturer
tional services on Ethernet like the DIGSI 5 protocol, network
to support the protocol in its devices. By means of this protocol,
redundany or SNMP for network monitoring can be activated
information can also be exchanged directly between bay units
2 so as to enable the creation of simple masterless systems for bay
and system interlocking. Access to the units via the Ethernet bus
at the same time as Modbus TCP and GOOSE messages of
IEC 61850 can be sent over the network between the devices.
is also possible with DIGSI. Serial DNP3 or DNP3 TCP
3 WebMonitor DNP 3 is supported as a serial protocol via RS485 or an optical

820 nm interface, and as an Ethernet-based TCP variant via
It will also be possible to retrieve operating and fault messages
the electrical or optical Ethernet module. In conjunction with
and fault recordings via a browser. This Web monitor will also
Ethernet, the switch integrated in the module can be used such
provide a few items of unit specific information in browser
that redundant ring structures for DNP 3 can be realized. In
4 windows.
this way, for example, connection to a DNP 3 via a redundant
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol optical Ethernet ring can be established. Information about a
device, and the fault records of the device, can be routed and
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is an international standard for transferred using the DNP 3 protocol. Switching commands can
5 the transmission of protective data and fault recordings. All
messages from the unit (and also control commands) can be
be executed in the control direction.
transferred via published, Siemens-specific extensions. Redundant connection to 2 serial substation controllers can be
established via 2 modules or 1 serial double module. With Eth-
ernet, 2 Ethernet modules that can work independently of one
6 IEC 60870-5-104 protocol
The IEC 60870-5-104 substation and power system automation
another via 1 or 2 networks are to be provided for a redundant
connection. Settings values in the device cannot be read or
protocol is supported via the electrical and optical Ethernet mod- changed via the protocol.
ule. Indications (single and double), measured values, metered
7 values can be transmitted to one or two (redundant) masters.
IEC 104 file transfer is also supported and fault recordings can
For DNP 3, the network topologies can also be used for Ethernet-
based or serial communication.
be read out of the device in Comtrade format. In the command
direction, secured switching of switching objects is possible via PROFINET
the protocol. Time synchronization can be supported via the
8 T104 master or via SNTP across the network.Redundant time
PROFINET is the ethernet-based successor of Profibus DP and
is supported in the variant PROFINET I/O. The protocol which
servers are supported. All auxiliary services on Ethernet such as is used in industry together with the SIMATIC systems control
the DIGSI 5 protocol, network redundancy, or SNMP for network is realized on the optical and electrical Plus ethernet modules
monitoring can be activated concurrently with T104. Moreover, which are delivered since November 2012. All network redun-
9 GOOSE messages of IEC 61850 can be exchanged between
devices.
dancy procedures which are available for the ethernet modules,
such as RSTP, PRP or HSR, are also available for PROFINET. The
PROFIBUS DP protocol time synchronization is made via SNTP. The network monitor-
ing is possible via SNMP V2 where special MIB files exist for
10 PROFIBUS DP is the most widespread protocol in industrial auto-
mation. Via PROFIBUS DP, SIPROTEC units make their information
PROFINET. The LLDP protocol of the device also supports the
monitoring of the network topology. Single-point indications,
available to a SIMATIC controller or, in the control direction, double-point indications, measured and metered values can be
receive commands from a central SIMATIC. Measured values can transmitted cyclically in the monitoring direction via the protocol
11 also be transferred. The information is assignable to a mapping

file with DIGSI.
and can be selected by the user with DIGSI 4. Important events
are also transmitted spontaneously via confi gurable process
alarms. Switching commands can be executed by the system
Modbus RTU protocol control via the device in the controlling direction. The PROFINET
implementation is certified. The device also supports the IEC
12 This uncomplicated, serial protocol is mainly used in industry
and by power supply corporations, and is supported by a num- 61850 protocol as a server on the same ethernet module in
ber of unit vendors. SIPROTEC units behave as MODBUS slaves, addition to the PROFINET protocol. Client server connections are
making their information available to a master or receiving possible for the intercommunication between devices, e.g. for
information from it. Information is assignable to a mapping file transmitting fault records and GOOSE messages.
13 with DIGSI.
Redundancy protocols for Ethernet (RSTP; PRP and HSR)
Protocol Modbus TCP The redundancy protocols RSTP, PRP and HSR can be loaded and
The Modbus TCP communication protocol is supported by the activated easily via software on the existing optical Ethernet
14 electrical or optical Ehternet module. Modbus TCP and Modbus
RTU are very similar, with Modbus TCP using TCP/IP packets for
modules. PRP and HSR guarantee a redundant, uninterruptible
and seamless data transfer in Ethernet networks without exten-
data transfer. sive parameter settings in the switches.
Modbus TCP can be used to transmit indications (single- and
15 double-point indications), measured values, metered measure-

Communication
Integration into the SICAM power automation system
Substation control port B Port C
Alarms
IEC 61850
with
IEC 60870-5-103 PROFIBUS DP
with with
MODBUS
with
DNP 3.0
with
DNP3
with
TCP 4) PROFINET 4)
with
DIGSI
with
1
(relay Æ central unit) time stamp time stamp time stamp time stamp time stamp time stamp time stamp time stamp
Commands
(BC/central unit Æ relay)
Measured values
2
Time 1)
synchronization
Fault records Separate port Separate port Separate port Separate port 3
(sampled values) (with DIGSI)2) (with DIGSI)2) (with DIGSI)2) (with DIGSI)3)
Protection settings (with DIGSI) Separate port Separate port Separate port Separate port Separate port Separate port
(with DIGSI)3) (with DIGSI)3) (with DIGSI)3) (with DIGSI)3) (with DIGSI)3) (with DIGSI)3)
Parameter group 4
switchover
RSTP/PRP/HSR
1) There is no time synchronization via this protocol. For time

Integration into the SICAM power automation system
5
synchronization purposes it is possible to use a separate time
synchronization interface (Port A in SIPROTEC 4 relays).
SIPROTEC 4 is tailor-made for use with the power automation
2) The transmission of fault records is not part of the protocol. They can
be read out with DIGSI via the service interface Port C or the front
operating interface.
system SICAM. The SICAM family comprises the following
components: 6
• SICAM RTUs, the modern telecontrol systems with automation
3) This protocol does not support the transmission of protection
and programmable logic functions
settings. Only setting groups can be changed. For this purpose you
should use the service interface or the front operating interface
together with DIGSI.
• SICAM PAS, the substation automation system based on
computer hardware
7
4) Only 7SJ61/62/64; 7SJ80/7SK80; 7SC80 Data management and communication is one of the strong
points of the SICAM / SIPROTEC 4 system. Powerful engineering
tools make working with SICAM convenient and easy. SIPROTEC 4
units are optimally matched for use in SICAM PAS. With SICAM
8
and SIPROTEC 4 continuity exists at three crucial points:
• Data management
• Software architecture 9
• Communication
The ability to link SICAM/ SIPROTEC to other substation control,
protection and automation components is assured, thanks
to open interfaces such as IEC 60870-5-103 protocol and 10
the Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol. Other protocols like
PROFIBUS DP, DNP 3.0, MODBUS, RTU, DNP3 TCP, PROFINET and
Redundancy protocols for Ethernet (RSTP;PRP and HSR) are also
supported. 11
12
13
14
15
Communication
Integration into substation automation system
SIPROTEC 4 is tailor-made for use with

the SICAM substation automation system.
1 Over the low-cost electrical RS485 bus,
the units exchange information with
the control system. Units featuring
IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces can be
2 connected to SICAM interference free and
radially by fiber-optic link. Through this
interface, the system is open for the con-
nection of units of other manufacturers.
4
Fig. 4/7 Communication structure with substation automation system
5
10
11
12
13
14
15
Communication
Integration into the SICAM PAS power automation system
Integration into the SICAM PAS power

automation system
1
SIPROTEC 4 is tailor-made for use with
the SICAM power automation system
together with IEC 61850 protocol. Via
the 100 Mbit/s Ethernet bus, the units
are linked electrically or optically to the
2
station PC with PAS. Connection may be
simple or redundant. The interface is
standardized, thus also enabling direct
connection of units of other manufactur-
3
ers to the Ethernet bus. Units featuring an
IEC 60870-5-103 interface or other serial
protocols are connected via the Ethernet
station bus to SICAM PAS by means of 4
serial/Ethernet converters (see Fig. 4/8).
DIGSI and the Web monitor can also be
used over the same station bus.
Together with Ethernet/IEC 61850, an 5
interference-free optical solution is also
provided (see Fig. 4/9). The Ethernet
interface in the relay includes an Ethernet
switch. Thus, the installation of expensive 6
external Ethernet switches can be
avoided. The relays are linked in an
optical ring structure.
Integrated SNMP (Simple Network Fig. 4/8 Ethernet-based system with SICAM PAS with electrical Ethernet interface
7
Management Protocol) facility allows
the supervision of the network from the
station controller.
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
Communication
Integration into a substation automation system, solution without substation control system
Integration into a substation auto-

mation system of other makes
1
Thanks to the standardized interfaces,
IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3.0,
MODBUS, PROFIBUS DP, SIPROTEC units
2 can also be integrated into non-Siemens
systems or in SIMATIC S5/S7. Electrical
RS485 or optical interfaces are available.
The optimum physical data transfer
3 medium can be chosen thanks to opto-
electrical converters. Thus, the RS485 bus
allows low-cost wiring in the cubicles and
an interference-free optical connection to
the master can be established.
4
6 Fig. 4/9 Ethernet-based system with SICAM PAS with optical Ethernet interface
Solution without substation control

7 system
Ethernet-based communication with opti-

cal Ethernet interface between SIPROTEC
8 protection relays offers also many
advantages without substation control:
• Fast remote access via DIGSI 4
• High-speed setting and parameteriza-
9 tion with DIGSI 4
• Interlocking between different field
devices and exchange of binary signals
via GOOSE messages of IEC 61850
10 • Common time synchronization of all
relays from central time synchronization
server (eg. SICLOCK)
For automation of new substations (or
11 plants) and modernization of existing
substations you get future investment
security, without additional investment.
12 Fig. 4/10 Ethernet-based system with optical Ethernet interface

and migration of relays with serial protocol
13
14
15
Overcurrent Protection
Page
SIPROTEC 7SJ61 multifunction protection relay 5/3
SIPROTEC 7SJ64 multifunction protection relay

with synchronization 5/85

with local control 5/119
5
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Overcurrent Protection / 7SJ61
SIPV6_116.eps
LSP2299-afpen.eps
4
Fig. 5/1 SIPROTEC 7SJ61 multifunction protection relay with text (left) and graphic display 5
Description • Breaker failure protection
The SIPROTEC 7SJ61 relays can be used for line protection of

• Negative-sequence protection
• Auto-reclosure
6
high and medium voltage networks with earthed (grounded),
• Lockout
low-resistance grounded, isolated or compensated neutral
point. When protecting motors, the SIPROTEC 7SJ61 is suitable
for asynchronous machines of all sizes. The relay performs all
Control functions/programmable logic 7
• Commands for control of a circuit-breaker and of isolators
functions of backup protection supplementary to transformer
differential protection. • Position of switching elements is shown on the graphic display
The relay provides control of the circuit-breaker, further

switching devices and automation functions. The integrated pro-
• Control via keyboard, binary inputs, DIGSI 4 or SCADA system
• User-defined logic with CFC (e.g. interlocking)
8
grammable logic (CFC) allows the user to implement their own
Monitoring functions
functions, e. g. for the automation of switchgear (interlocking).
The user is also allowed to generate user-defined indications.
The flexible communication interfaces are open for modern
• Operational measured values I
• Circuit-breaker wear monitoring
9
communication architectures with control systems. • Slave pointer
• Time metering of operating hours
• Trip circuit supervision 10
Function overview • 8 oscillographic fault records
• Motor statistics
Protection functions
• Overcurrent protection Communication interfaces 11
(definite-time/inverse-time/user-def.) • System interface
• Sensitive ground-fault detection – IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850
– PROFIBUS DP
• Intermittent ground-fault protection
• High-impedance restricted ground fault
– DNP 3/ DNP3 TCP/MODBUS RTU 12
– PROFINET
• Inrush-current detection
• Service interface for DIGSI 4 (modem)
• Motor protection
– Undercurrent monitoring
– Starting time supervision
• Front interface for DIGSI 4
• Time synchronization via IRIG B/DCF77
13
– Restart inhibit
– Locked rotor
– Load jam protection
• Overload protection
Hardware
14
• 4 current transformers
• Temperature monitoring
• 3/8/11 binary inputs
• 4/8/6 output relays
15
Application
LSA2959-egpen.eps
7
Fig. 5/2 Function diagram
8 Application Motor protection

When protecting motors, the 7SJ61 relay is suitable for asyn-
The SIPROTEC 7SJ61 unit is a numerical protection relay that also chronous machines of all sizes.
9 performs control and monitoring functions and therefore sup-
ports the user in cost-effective power system management, and Transformer protection
ensures reliable supply of electric power to the customers. Local
The relay performs all functions of backup protection supple-
operation has been designed according to ergonomic criteria. A
mentary to transformer differential protection. The inrush
10 large, easy-to-read display was a major design aim.
suppression effectively prevents tripping by inrush currents.
Control The high-impedance restricted ground-fault protection detects
The integrated control function permits control of disconnect short-circuits and insulation faults on the transformer.
11 devices, grounding switches or circuit-breakers via the inte-

grated operator panel, binary inputs, DIGSI 4 or the control and
Backup protection
protection system (e.g. SICAM). The present status (or position) The 7SJ61can be used universally for backup protection.
of the primary equipment can be displayed, in case of devices
with graphic display. A full range of command processing func- Flexible protection functions
12 tions is provided. By configuring a connection between a standard protection logic
and any measured or derived quantity, the functional scope of
Programmable logic
the relays can be easily expanded by up to 20 protection stages
The integrated logic characteristics (CFC) allow the user to or protection functions.
13 implement their own functions for automation of switchgear
Metering values
(interlocking) or a substation via a graphic user interface. The
user can also generate user-defined indications. Extensive measured values, limit values and metered values
permit improved system management.
14 Line protection
The relay is a non-directional overcurrent relay which can be
used for line protection of high and medium-voltage networks
with earthed (grounded), low-resistance grounded, isolated or
15 compensated neutral point.

Application, construction
ANSI IEC Protection functions 1

50, 50N I>, I>>, I>>> Definite-time overcurrent protection (phase/neutral)
IE>, IE>>
Ip, IEp Inverse-time overcurrent protection (phase/neutral)
50, 51N
IEE>, IEE>>, IEEp Sensitive ground-fault protection

2
50Ns, 51Ns
– Cold load pick-up (dynamic setting change)

– IE> Intermittent ground fault 3
87N High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection
50BF Breaker failure protection
79 Auto-reclosure
4
46 I2> Phase-balance current protection (negative-sequence protection)
49 ϑ> Thermal overload protection 5

48 Starting time supervision
51M Load jam protection 6

14 Locked rotor protection
66/86 Restart inhibit

7
37 I< Undercurrent monitoring
38 Temperature monitoring via external device (RTD-box),

e.g. bearing temperature monitoring
8
Construction 9
Connection techniques and housing with many advantages
⅓-rack size (text display variants) and ½-rack size (graphic
display variants) are the available housing widths of the 7SJ61 10
relays referred to a 19" module frame system. This means that
previous models can always be replaced. The height is a uniform
244 mm for flush-mounting housings and 266 mm for surface-
mounting housing. All cables can be connected with or without 11
ring lugs.
LSP2099-afpen.eps
In the case of surface mounting on a panel, the connection

terminals are located above and below in the form of screw-type
terminals. The communication interfaces are located in a sloped 12
case at the top and bottom of the housing.
13
Fig. 5/3 Rear view with screw-type, ⅓-rack size
14
15
1 Overcurrent protection
(ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51N)
This function is based on the phase-
2 selective measurement of the three phase
currents and the ground current (four
transformers). Three definite-time over-
current protection elements (DMT) exist
3 both for the phases and for the ground.

The current threshold and the delay time
can be set within a wide range. In addi-
tion, inverse-time overcurrent protection
characteristics (IDMTL) can be activated.
4 Reset characteristics
For easier time coordination with electro- Fig. 5/4 Definite-time overcurrent Fig. 5/5 Inverse-time overcurrent
mechanical relays, reset characteristics characteristic characteristic
5 according to ANSI C37.112 and
IEC 60255-3 / BS 142 standards are
applied. Available inverse-time characteristics
When using the reset characteristic (disk Characteristics acc. to ANSI/IEEE IEC 60255-3
6 emulation), a reset process is initiated
after the fault current has disappeared. Inverse • •
This reset process corresponds to the Short inverse •
reverse movement of the Ferraris disk of Long inverse • •
7 an electromechanical relay (thus: disk
emulation).
Moderately inverse •
Very inverse • •
User-definable characteristics Extremely inverse • •
8 Instead of the predefined time char-

acteristics according to ANSI, tripping
characteristics can be defined by the user for phase and ground Flexible protection functions
units separately. Up to 20 current/ time value pairs may be
The 7SJ61 units enable the user to easily add on up to 20 protec-
programmed. They are set as pairs of numbers or graphically
9 in DIGSI 4.
tive functions. To this end, parameter definitions are used to link
a standard protection logic with any chosen characteristic quan-
Inrush restraint tity (measured or derived quantity). The standard logic consists
of the usual protection elements such as the pickup message,
The relay features second harmonic restraint. If the second
10 harmonic is detected during transformer energization, pickup
the parameter- definable delay time, the TRIP command, a block-
ing possibility, etc. The mode of operation for current quantities
of non-directional normal elements (I>, Ip) are blocked. can be three-phase or single-phase. The quantities can be oper-
ated as greater than or less than stages. All stages operate with
Cold load pickup/dynamic setting change
protection priority. Protection stages/functions attainable on the
11 For overcurrent protection functions the initiation basis of the available characteristic quantities:
thresholds and tripping times can be switched via binary
inputs or by time control. Function ANSI No.
I>, IE> 50, 50N
12 3I0>, I1>, I2>, I2/I1> 50N, 46
Binary input
13
14
15
(Sensitive) ground-fault detection (ANSI 50Ns, 51Ns/50N, 51N) • The overcurrent elements can either be blocked or operated
For high-resistance grounded networks, a sensitive input non-delayed depending on the auto-reclosure cycle
transformer is connected to a phase-balance neutral current • Dynamic setting change of the overcurrent elements can be
activated depending on the ready AR
1
transformer (also called core-balance CT).
The function can also be operated in the insensitive mode as an Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49)
additional short-circuit protection.
Intermittent ground-fault protection

For protecting cables and transformers, an overload protection
with an integrated pre-warning element for temperature and cur-
2
rent can be applied. The temperature is calculated using a thermal
Intermittent (re-striking) faults occur due to insulation weaknesses homogeneous-body model (according to IEC 60255-8), which
in cables or as a result of water penetrating cable joints. Such
faults either simply cease at some stage or develop into lasting
takes account both of the energy entering the equipment and the
energy losses. The calculated temperature is constantly adjusted 3
short-circuits. During intermittent activity, however, star-point accordingly. Thus, account is taken of the previous load and the
resistors in networks that are impedance-grounded may undergo load fluctuations.
thermal overloading. The normal ground-fault protection cannot
reliably detect and interrupt the current pulses, some of which can
be very brief.
For thermal protection of motors (especially the stator) a further
time constant can be set so that the thermal ratios can be detected 4
The selectivity required with intermittent ground faults is achieved correctly while the motor is rotating and when it is stopped. The
by summating the duration of the individual pulses and by trig- ambient temperature or the temperature of the coolant can be
detected serially via an external temperature monitoring box
gering when a (settable) summed time is reached. The response
threshold IIE> evaluates the r.m.s. value, referred to one systems (resistance-temperature detector box, also called RTD-box). The 5
period. thermal replica of the overload function is automatically adapted
to the ambient conditions. If there is no RTD-box it is assumed that
Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF) the ambient temperatures are constant.
If a faulted portion of the electrical circuit is not disconnected High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection (ANSI 87N)
6
upon issuance of a trip command, another command can be
initiated using the breaker failure protection which operates the The high-impedance measurement principle is an uncomplicated
circuit-breaker, e.g. of an upstream (higher-level) protection relay. and sensitive method for detecting ground faults, especially on
Breaker failure is detected if after a trip command, current is still
flowing in the faulted circuit. As an option it is possible to make
transformers. It can also be applied to motors, generators and
reactors when these are operated on an grounded network.
7
use of the circuit-breaker position indication. When the high-impedance measurement principle is applied,
all current transformers in the protected area are connected in
Phase-balance current protection (ANSI 46)
(Negative-sequence protection)
parallel and operated on one common resistor of relatively high
R whose voltage is measured (see Fig. 5/6). In the case of 7SJ6
8
In line protection, the two-element phase-balance current/ units, the voltage is measured by detecting the current through
negative-sequence protection permits detection on the high side the (external) resistor R at the sensitive current measurement
of high-resistance phase-to-phase faults and phase-to-ground
faults that are on the low side of a transformer (e.g. with the
input IEE. The varistor V serves to limit the voltage in the event of
an internal fault. It cuts off the high momentary voltage spikes 9
switch group Dy 5). This provides backup protection for high- occurring at transformer saturation. At the same time, this results
resistance faults beyond the transformer. in smoothing of the voltage without any noteworthy reduction
of the average value. If no faults have occurred and in the event
Settable dropout delay times of external faults, the system is at equilibrium, and the voltage 10
If the devices are used in parallel with electromechanical relays in through the resistor is approximately zero. In the event of internal
networks with intermittent faults, the long dropout times of the faults, an imbalance occurs which leads to a voltage and a current
electromechanical devices (several hundred milliseconds) can flow through the resistor R.
lead to problems in terms of time grading. Clean time grading is
only possible if the dropout time is approximately the same. This
The current trans- 11
formers must be of
is why the parameter of dropout times can be defined for certain the same type and
functions such as overcurrent protection, ground short-circuit and must at least offer
phase-balance current protection. a separate core for
the high-impedance
12
Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79)
restricted ground-
Multiple reclosures can be defined by the user and lockout will fault protection.
occur if a fault is present after the last reclosure. The following
functions are possible:
They must in
particular have the
13
• 3-pole ARC for all types of faults same transforma-
• Separate settings for phase and ground faults tion ratio and an
approximately
• Multiple ARC, one rapid auto-reclosure (RAR) and up to nine
delayed auto-reclosures (DAR) identical knee-point 14
• Starting of the ARC depends on the trip command selection (e.g. voltage. They
46, 50, 51) should also demon-
• Blocking option of the ARC via binary inputs strate only minimal
• ARC can be initiated externally or via CFC
measuring errors. Fig. 5/6 High-impedance restricted
ground-fault protection
15
Motor protection
1 Starting time supervision (ANSI 48)

Starting time supervision protects the
motor against long unwanted start-ups
that might occur when excessive load
2 torque occurs, excessive voltage drops
occur within the motor or if the rotor is
locked. Rotor temperature is calculated
from measured stator current. The tripping
3 time is calculated according to the follow-
ing equation:
for I > IMOTOR START
4 ⎛ I ⎞2
t = ⎜ A ⎟ ⋅ TA
⎝I ⎠
I = Actual current flowing
5 IMOTOR START = Pickup current to detect a

motor start
t = Tripping time Fig. 5/7
6 IA
TA
= Rated motor starting current
= Tripping time at rated motor starting current
(2 times, for warm and cold motor) The negative-sequence / phase-balance current protection detects
a phase failure or load unbalance due to network asymmetry and
The characteristic (equation) can be adapted optimally to the state
7 of the motor by applying different tripping times TA in dependence
protects the rotor from impermissible temperature rise.
of either cold or warm motor state. For differentiation of the motor Restart inhibit (ANSI 66/86)
state the thermal model of the rotor is applied.
If a motor is started up too many times in succession, the rotor can
8 If the trip time is rated according to the above formula, even a
prolonged start-up and reduced voltage (and reduced start-up
be subject to thermal overload, especially the upper edges of the
bars. The rotor temperature is calculated from the stator current.
current) will be evaluated correctly. The tripping time is inverse The reclosing lockout only permits start-up of the motor if the
(current dependent). rotor has sufficient thermal reserves for a complete start-up (see
9 A binary signal is set by a speed sensor to detect a blocked rotor.

An instantaneous tripping is effected.
Fig. 5/7).
Emergency start-up
Temperature monitoring (ANSI 38) This function disables the reclosing lockout via a binary input by
10 Up to 2 temperature monitoring boxes with a total of 12 meas-

uring sensors can be used for temperature monitoring and
storing the state of the thermal replica as long as the binary input
is active. It is also possible to reset the thermal replica to zero.
detection by the protection relay. The thermal status of motors,
generators and transformers can be monitored with this device. Undercurrent monitoring (ANSI 37)
Additionally, the temperature of the bearings of rotating machines
11 are monitored for limit value violation. The temperatures are being
With this function, a sudden drop in current, that can occur due to
a reduced motor load, is detected. This may be due to shaft break-
measured with the help of temperature detectors at various loca- age, no-load operation of pumps or fan failure.
tions of the device to be protected. This data is transmitted to the
protection relay via one or two temperature monitoring boxes (see Motor statistics
12 “Accessories”, page 5/78).
Essential information on start-up of the motor (duration, current,
Load jam protection (ANSI 51M) voltage) and general information on number of starts, total opera-
ting time, total down time, etc. are saved as statistics in the device.
Sudden high loads can cause slowing down and blocking of the
13 motor and mechanical damages. The rise of current due to a load
jam is being monitored by this function (alarm and tripping). The
Circuit-breaker wear monitoring
Methods for determining circuit-breaker contact wear or the
overload protection function is too slow and therefore not suitable
remaining service life of a circuit-breaker (CB) allow CB mainte-
under these circumstances.
nance intervals to be aligned to their actual degree of wear. The
14 benefit lies in reduced maintenance costs.
There is no mathematically exact method of calculating the wear
or the remaining service life of circuit-breakers that takes into
15 account the arc-chamber's physical conditions when the CB opens.

This is why various methods of determining CB wear have evolved

which reflect the different operator philosophies. To do justice to
these, the devices offer several methods: 1
• Σ I
• Σ Ix, with x = 1... 3
• Σ i2t
The devices additionally offer a new method for determining the
2
remaining service life:
• Two-point method
The CB manufacturers double-logarithmic switching cycle diagram 3
(see Fig. 5/8) and the breaking current at the time of contact
opening serve as the basis for this method. After CB opening, the
two-point method calculates the number of still possible switching
cycles. To this end, the two points P1 and P2 only have to be set on
the device. These are specified in the CB's technical data.
4
All of these methods are phase-selective and a limit value can be
set in order to obtain an alarm if the actual value falls below or
exceeds the limit value during determination of the remaining 5
service life.
Commissioning Fig. 5/8 CB switching cycle diagram

Commissioning could hardly be easier and is fully supported by
DIGSI 4. The status of the binary inputs can be read individually
6
and the state of the binary outputs can be set individually. The Automation / user-defined logic
operation of switching elements (circuit-breakers, disconnect
With integrated logic, the user can set, via a graphic interface
devices) can be checked using the switching functions of the bay
controller. The analog measured values are represented as wide-
(CFC), specific functions for the automation of switchgear or 7
substation. Functions are activated via function keys, binary input
ranging operational measured values.
or via communication interface.
To prevent transmission of information to the control center during
maintenance, the bay controller communications can be disabled
to prevent unnecessary data from being transmitted. During com-
Switching authority
Switching authority is determined according to parameters and
8
missioning, all indications with test marking for test purposes can communication.
be connected to a control and protection system.
If a source is set to “LOCAL”, only local switching operations are
Test operation possible. The following sequence of switching authority is laid 9
down: “LOCAL”; DIGSI PC program, “REMOTE”.
During commissioning, all indications can be passed to an auto-
matic control system for test purposes. Command processing
All the functionality of command processing is offered. This
includes the processing of single and double commands with
10
Control and automatic functions
or without feedback, sophisticated monitoring of the control
Control hardware and software, checking of the external process, control

actions using functions such as runtime monitoring and
automatic command termination after output. Here are some
11
support all control and monitoring functions that are required for typical applications:
operating medium-voltage or high-voltage substations. • Single and double commands using 1, 1 plus 1 common or
The main application is reliable control of switching and other
processes.
2 trip contacts
• User-definable bay interlocks
12
The status of primary equipment or auxiliary devices can be • Operating sequences combining several switching operations
obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated to the 7SJ61 such as control of circuit-breakers, disconnectors and ground-
via binary inputs. Therefore it is possible to detect and indicate
both the OPEN and CLOSED position or a fault or intermediate
ing switches
• Triggering of switching operations, indications or alarm by
13
circuit-breaker or auxiliary contact position. combination with existing information
The switchgear or circuit-breaker can be controlled via:
– integrated operator panel 14
– binary inputs
– substation control and protection system
– DIGSI 4
15
Functions
Functions
1 Assignment of feedback to command

The positions of the circuit-breaker or switching devices and
transformer taps are acquired by feedback. These indication inputs
2 are logically assigned to the corresponding command outputs. The

unit can therefore distinguish whether the indication change is a
consequence of switching operation or whether it is a spontane-
ous change of state.
3 Chatter disable
Chatter disable feature evaluates whether, in a configured period
of time, the number of status changes of indication input exceeds
a specified figure. If exceeded, the indication input is blocked for
4 a certain period, so that the event list will not record excessive
operations.
LSP2077f.eps
Indication filtering and delay
5 Binary indications can be filtered or delayed.

Filtering serves to suppress brief changes in potential at the indica-
tion input. The indication is passed on only if the indication voltage
is still present after a set period of time. In the event of indication
6 delay, there is a wait for a preset time. The information is passed
on only if the indication voltage is still present after this time.
Indication derivation
7 A further indication (or a command) can be derived from an exist-
ing indication. Group indications can also be formed. The volume Fig. 5/9 NXAIR panel (air-insulated)
of information to the system interface can thus be reduced and
restricted to the most important signals.
8 Measured values
Metered values
If an external meter with a metering pulse output is available, the
The r.m.s. values are calculated from the acquired current. The SIPROTEC 4 unit can obtain and process metering pulses via an
following functions are available for measured value processing: indication input.
9 • Currents IL1, IL2, IL3, IE, IEE (50Ns) The metered values can be displayed and passed on to a control
• Symmetrical components I1, I2, 3I0 center as an accumulation with reset.
• Mean as well as minimum and maximum current values
Switchgear cubicles for high/medium voltage
10 • Operating hours counter
All units are designed specifically to meet the requirements of
high/medium-voltage applications.
Limit values are monitored using programmable logic in the In general, no separate measuring instruments or additional
11 CFC. Commands can be derived from this limit value indica-
tion.
control components are necessary.
12 to zero to suppress interference.
13
14
15
Communication
Communication
In terms of communication, the units offer substantial flexibility 1

in the context of connection to industrial and power automation
standards. Communication can be extended or added on thanks
to modules for retrofitting on which the common protocols run.
Therefore, also in the future it will be possible to optimally inte-
grate units into the changing communication infrastructure, for
2
example in Ethernet networks (which will also be used increasingly
in the power supply sector in the years to come).
Serial front interface 3

There is a serial RS232 interface on the front of all the units. All of
the unit’s functions can be set on a PC by means of the DIGSI 4
protection operation program. Commissioning tools and fault
analysis are also built into the program and are available through
4
this interface. Fig. 5/10 IEC 60870-5-103: Radial fiber-optic connection
Rear-mounted interfaces1)
A number of communication modules suitable for various applica-
5
tions can be fitted in the rear of the flush-mounting housing. In
the flush-mounting housing, the modules can be easily replaced
by the user.
The interface modules support the following applications:
6
• Time synchronization interface
All units feature a permanently integrated electrical time
synchronization interface. It can be used to feed timing
telegrams in IRIG-B or DCF77 format into the units via time
7
synchronization receivers.
• System interface
Communication with a central control system takes place
through this interface. Radial or ring type station bus topolo-
8
gies can be configured depending on the chosen interface.
Furthermore, the units can exchange data through this
interface via Ethernet and IEC 61850 protocol and can also be
operated by DIGSI. 9
• Service interface Fig. 5/11 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet
The service interface was conceived for remote access to a and IEC 61850, fiber-optic ring
number of protection units via DIGSI. On all units, it can be
an electrical RS232/RS485 or an optical interface. For special from the unit and also control commands can be transferred by
10
applications, a maximum of two temperature monitoring means of published, Siemens-specific extensions to the protocol.
boxes (RTD-box) can be connected to this interface as an
alternative. Redundant solutions are also possible. Optionally it is possible to
System interface protocols (retrofittable)

read out and alter individual parameters (only possible with the
redundant module).
11
IEC 61850 protocol PROFIBUS DP protocol
The Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol is the worldwide standard
for protection and control systems used by power supply corpora-
PROFIBUS DP is the most widespread protocol in industrial automa-
tion. Via PROFIBUS DP, SIPROTEC units make their information
12
tions. Siemens was the first manufacturer to support this standard. available to a SIMATIC controller or, in the control direction, receive
By means of this protocol, information can also be exchanged commands from a central SIMATIC. Measured values can also be
directly between bay units so as to set up simple masterless
systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to the units via the
transferred.
13
Ethernet bus is also possible with DIGSI. MODBUS RTU protocol
This uncomplicated, serial protocol is mainly used in industry and
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is an international standard for the
by power supply corporations, and is supported by a number of
unit manufacturers. SIPROTEC units function as MODBUS slaves,
14
transmission of protective data and fault recordings. All messages making their information available to a master or receiving
information from it.
1) For units in panel surface-mounting housings

A time-stamped event list is available.
15
please refer to note on page 5/77.

Communication
PROFINET
1 PROFINET is the ethernet-based successor

of PROFIBUS DP and is supported in the
variant PROFINET IO. The protocol which
is used in industry together with the
SIMATIC systems control is realized on
2 the optical and electrical Plus ethernet
modules which are delivered since
November 2012. All network redundancy
procedures which are available for the
3 ethernet modules, such as RSTP, PRP or
HSR, are also available for PROFINET. The
time synchronization is made via SNTP.
The network monitoring is possible via
4 SNMP V2 where special MIB files exist

for PROFINET. The LLDP protocol of the
device also supports the monitoring of
the network topology. Single-point indica-
tions, double-point indications, measured
5 and metered values can be transmitted
cyclically in the monitoring direction
via the protocol and can be selected by
the user with DIGSI 4. Important events
6 are also transmitted spontaneously via
configurable process alarms. Switching Fig. 5/12 System solution/communication
commands can be executed by the system
control via the device in the controlling
7 direction. The PROFINET implementation

is certifi ed. The device also supports
the IEC 61850 protocol as a server on
the same ethernet module in addition
LSP3.01-0021.tif
to the PROFINET protocol. Client server
8 connections are possible for the intercom-
munication between devices, e.g. for
transmitting fault records and GOOSE
messages.
9 DNP 3.0
Power utilities use the serial DNP 3.0 (Dis-
tributed Network Protocol) for the station
10 and network control levels. SIPROTEC units
function as DNP slaves, supplying their
information to a master system or receiving Fig. 5/13 Optical Ethernet communication module
information from it. for IEC 61850 with integrated Ethernet-switch
11 DNP3 TCP System solutions for protection and station control

The ethernet-based TCP variant of the DNP3 protocol is supported Together with the SICAM power automation system, SIPROTEC 4
with the electrical and optical ethernet module. Two DNP3 TCP can be used with PROFIBUS DP. Over the low-cost electrical RS485
12 clients are supported. Redundant ring structures can be realized
for DNP3 TCP with the help of the integrated switch in the module.
bus, or interference-free via the optical double ring, the units
exchange information with the control system.
For instance, a redundant optical ethernet ring can be constructed.
Single-point indications, double-point indications, measured and Units featuring IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces can be connected to
metered values can be configured with DIGSI 4 and are transmitted SICAM in parallel via the RS485 bus or radially by fiber-optic link.
13 to the DNP3 TCP client. Switching commands can be executed in Through this interface, the system is open for the connection of
the controlling direction. Fault records of the device are stored in units of other manufacturers (see Fig. 5/10).
the binary Comtrade format and can be retrieved via the DNP3 file
Because of the standardized interfaces, SIPROTEC units can also
transfer. The time synchronization is performed via the DNP3 TCP
14 client or SNTP. The device can also be integrated into a network
monitoring system via the SNMP V2 protocol. Parallel to the DNP3
be integrated into systems of other manufacturers or in SIMATIC.
Electrical RS485 or optical interfaces are available. The optimum
physical data transfer medium can be chosen thanks to opto-
TCP protocol the IEC 61850 protocol (the device works as a server)
electrical converters. Thus, the RS485 bus allows low-cost wiring
and the GOOSE messages of the IEC 61850 are available for the
in the cubicles and an interference-free optical connection to the
15 intercommunication between devices.
master can be established.

Typical connections
For IEC 61850, an interoperable system solution is offered with

SICAM PAS. Via the 100 Mbits/s Ethernet bus, the units are linked
with PAS electrically or optically to the station PC. The interface
is standardized, thus also enabling direct connection of units of
1
other manufacturers to the Ethernet bus. With IEC 61850, how-
ever, the units can also be used in other manufacturers’ systems
(see Fig. 5/11).
2
Typical connections
Connection of current
3
and voltage transformers
Standard connection
For grounded networks, the ground current
4
is obtained from the phase currents by the
residual current circuit.
5
Fig. 5/14 Residual current circuit

7
10
11
12
Fig. 5/15 Sensitive ground current detection
13
14
15
Overview of connection types
1 Type of network Function Current connection
(Low-resistance) grounded network Overcurrent protection Residual circuit, with 3 phase-current transformers required,
hase/ground non-directional phase-balance neutral current transformer possible
(Low-resistance) grounded networks Sensitive ground-fault protection Phase-balance neutral current transformers required
2 Isolated or compensated networks Overcurrent protection Residual circuit, with 3 or 2 phase current transformers possible
phases non-directional
Isolated networks Sensitive ground-fault protection Phase-balance neutral current transformers required
3 Compensated networks Sensitive ground-fault protection Phase-balance neutral current transformers required
4 Typical applications

One or two binary inputs can be used for
5 monitoring the circuit-breaker trip coil
including its incoming cables. An alarm
signal occurs whenever the circuit is
interrupted.
6
8
Fig. 5/16 Trip circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs
10
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
General unit data Electrical tests

Measuring circuits
System frequency 50 / 60 Hz (settable)
Specification
Standards IEC 60255 1
Current transformer ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1, C37.90.2,
UL508
Rated current Inom 1 or 5 A (settable)
Insulation tests
Option: sensitive ground-fault CT
Power consumption
IEE < 1.6 A
Standards IEC 60255-5; ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0 2
at Inom = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA per phase Voltage test (100 % test) 2.5 kV (r.m.s. value), 50/60 Hz
at Inom = 5 A Approx. 0.3 VA per phase all circuits except for auxiliary
for sensitive ground-fault CT at 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA voltage and RS485/RS232 and
Overload capability
Thermal (effective) 500 A for 1 s
time synchronization
Auxiliary voltage DC 3.5 kV
3
150 A for 10 s Communication ports AC 500 V
20 A continuous and time synchronization
Dynamic (impulse current)
Overload capability if equipped with
250 x Inom (half cycle) Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak value); 1.2/50 µs; 0.5 J
all circuits, except communication 3 positive and 3 negative impulses 4
sensitive ground-fault CT ports and time synchronization, at intervals of 5 s
Thermal (effective) 300 A for 1 s class III
100 A for 10 s
EMC tests for interference immunity; type tests
15 A continuous
750 A (half cycle) Standards IEC 60255-6; IEC 60255-22 5
(product standard)
Auxiliary voltage (via integrated converter)
EN 50082-2 (generic specification)
Rated auxiliary DC 24/48 V 60/125 V 110/250 V DIN 57435 Part 303
voltage Vaux
Permissible tolerance
AC 115/230 V
DC 19-58 V 48-150 V 88-330 V
High-frequency test
IEC 60255-22-1, class III
2.5 kV (peak value); 1 MHz; τ =15 ms;
400 surges per s; test duration 2 s
6
AC 92-138 V 184-265 V and VDE 0435 Part 303, class III
Ripple voltage, peak-to-peak ≤ 12 % Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge;
IEC 60255-22-2 class IV 15 kV air gap discharge;
Power consumption
Quiescent
Energized
Approx. 3 W
Approx. 7 W
and EN 61000-4-2, class IV
Irradiation with radio-frequency
both polarities; 150 pF; Ri = 330 Ω
10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
7
Backup time during ≥ 50 ms at V ≥ DC 110 V field, non-modulated
loss/short-circuit of ≥ 20 ms at V ≥ DC 24 V IEC 60255-22-3 (Report) class III
auxiliary voltage ≥ 200 ms at AC 115 V/230 V
Binary inputs/indication inputs
field, amplitude-modulated
10 V/m, 80 to 1000 MHz;
AM 80 %; 1 kHz 8
IEC 61000-4-3; class III
Type 7SJ610 7SJ611, 7SJ612,
Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m, 900 MHz; repetition
7SJ613 7SJ614
field, pulse-modulated rate 200 Hz, on duration 50 %
Number
Voltage range
3
DC 24–250 V
8 11 IEC 61000-4-3/ENV 50204; class III
Fast transient interference/burst 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
9
Pickup threshold Modifiable by plug-in jumpers IEC 60255-22-4 and burst length = 15 ms;
Pickup threshold DC 19 V 88 V IEC 61000-4-4, class IV repetition rate 300 ms; both polarities;
Ri = 50 Ω; test duration 1 min
For rated control voltage DC 24/48/60/110/125 V
Response time/
110/220/250 V
High-energy surge voltages 10
(Surge)
drop-out time Approx. 3.5 ms IEC 61000-4-5; class III
Power consumption 1.8 mA (independent of operating voltage) Auxiliary voltage From circuit to circuit: 2 kV; 12 Ω; 9 µF
energized
Binary outputs/command outputs Binary inputs/outputs
across contacts: 1 kV; 2 Ω ;18 µF
From circuit to circuit: 2 kV; 42 Ω;
11
0.5 µF
Type 7SJ610, 7SJ611, 7SJ613
across contacts: 1 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF
7SJ612, 7SJ614
Line-conducted HF, 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz;
Number command/indication relay
Contacts per command/
4
1 NO / form A
8 6 amplitude-modulated
AM 80 %; 1 kHz 12
indication relay (2 contacts changeable to Power frequency magnetic field 30 A/m; 50 Hz, continuous
NC / form B, via jumpers) IEC 61000-4-8, class IV 300 A/m; 50 Hz, 3 s
Live status contact 1 NO / NC (jumper) / form
A/B
IEC 60255-6
Oscillatory surge withstand
0.5 mT, 50 Hz
2.5 to 3 kV (peak value), 1 to 1.5 MHz 13
Switching capacity Make 1000 W/VA capability damped wave; 50 surges per s;
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 duration 2 s, Ri = 150 to 200 Ω
Break 30 W/VA / 40 Wresistive /
Switching voltage ≤ DC 250 V

25 W at L/R ≤ 50 ms
14
Permissible current 5 A continuous, 30 A for 0.5 s making current,
2000 switching cycles
15
Technical data
EMC tests for interference immunity; type tests (cont'd) Climatic stress tests
1 Fast transient surge withstand

capability ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges per s
both polarities; duration 2 s, Ri = 80 Ω
Temperatures
Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 -25 °C to +85 °C /-13 °F to +185 °F
Radiated electromagnetic 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz; and -2, test Bd, for 16 h
interference amplitude and pulse-modulated Temporarily permissible operating -20 °C to +70 °C /-4 °F to -158 °F
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 temperature, tested for 96 h
2 Damped wave
IEC 60694 / IEC 61000-4-12
2.5 kV (peak value, polarity
alternating)
Recommended permanent
operating temperature acc. to
-5 °C to +55 °C /+25 °F to +131 °F
100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 and 50 MHz, IEC 60255-6
Ri = 200 Ω (Legibility of display may be
EMC tests for interference emission; type tests impaired above +55 °C /+131 °F)
3 Standard EN 50081-* (generic specification) – Limiting temperature during
permanent storage
-25 °C to +55 °C /-13 °F to +131 °F
Conducted interferences 150 kHz to 30 MHz – Limiting temperature during

only auxiliary voltage IEC/CISPR 22 Limit class B -25 °C to +70 °C /-13 °F to +158 °F
transport
Radio interference field strength 30 to 1000 MHz
4 IEC/CISPR 11 Limit class B
Humidity
Permissible humidity Annual average 75 % relative
Units with a detached operator
It is recommended to arrange the humidity; on 56 days a year up to
panel must be installed in a metal
units in such a way that they are 95 % relative humidity;
cubicle to maintain limit class B
not exposed to direct sunlight or condensation not permissible!
5 Mechanical stress tests
pronounced temperature changes
that could cause condensation.
Vibration, shock stress and seismic vibration Unit design
During operation Housing 7XP20

6 Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
Dimensions
Weight
See dimension drawings, part 14
Vibration Sinusoidal
1/3 19’’, surface-mounting housing 4.5 kg
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 10 to 60 Hz; ± 0.075 mm amplitude;
1/3 19’’, flush-mounting housing 4.0 kg
IEC 60068-2-6 60 to 150 Hz; 1 g acceleration
7 frequency sweep 1 octave/min
20 cycles in 3 perpendicular axes
1/2 19’’, surface-mounting housing
1/2 19’’, flush-mounting housing
7.5 kg
6.5 kg
Degree of protection
Shock Semi-sinusoidal
acc. to EN 60529
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms;
Surface-mounting housing IP 51
IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks in both directions of 3 axes
8 Seismic vibration
IEC 60255-21-3, class 1
Sinusoidal
1 to 8 Hz: ± 3.5 mm amplitude
Flush-mounting housing
Operator safety
Front: IP 51, rear: IP 20;
IP 2x with cover
IEC 60068-3-3 (horizontal axis)

Futher information can be found in the current manual at:
9 (vertical axis)
8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
(horizontal axis)
8 to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration

(vertical axis)
10 Frequency sweep 1 octave/min

1 cycle in 3 perpendicular axes
During transportation
Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
11 Vibration
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2
IEC 60068-2-6
Sinusoidal
5 to 8 Hz: ± 7.5 mm amplitude;
8 to 150 Hz; 2 g acceleration,
frequency sweep 1 octave/min
12 Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1
Semi-sinusoidal
Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms
Continuous shock Semi-sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms
13 IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks in both directions
of 3 axes
14
15
Selection and ordering data
Description Order No.

7SJ61multifunction protection relay
Housing, binary inputs (BI) and outputs (BO)

7SJ61 - -
1
Housing ⅓19”, 4 line text display, 3 BI, 4 BO, 1 live status contact 0
Housing ⅓19”, 4 line text display, 8 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status contact 1
Housing ⅓19”, 4 line text display, 11 BI, 6 BO, 1 live status contact
Housing ½19”, graphic display, 8 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status contact 7)
2 2
3
Housing ½19”, graphic display, 11 BI, 6 BO, 1 live status contact 7) 4
Measuring inputs (4 x I)
Iph =1A1), Ie =1A1) (min. = 0.05 A)
3
Position 15 only with A 1
Iph =1A1), Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.001 A)
Position 15 only with B
Iph =5A1), Ie =5A1) (min. = 0.25 A)
2
4
Iph =5A1), Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.001 A)
Position 15 only with B 6
Iph =5A1), Ie =1A1) (min. = 0.05 A)
5
Rated auxiliary voltage (power supply, indication voltage)
DC 24 to 48 V, threshold binary input DC 19 V 3)
DC 60 to 125 V 2), threshold binary input DC 19 V 3)
2
4 6
DC 110 to 250 V 2), AC 115 to 230 V4) , threshold binary input DC 88 V 3) 5
Unit version
For panel surface mounting, 2 tier terminal top/bottom
7
B
For panel flush mounting, plug-in terminal (2/3 pin connector) D
For panel flush mounting, screw-type terminal (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs) E
Region-specific default settings/function versions and language settings

8
Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, language: German, selectable A
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: English (GB), selectable B
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, language: English (US), selectable
Region FR, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: French, selectable
C
D
9
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Spanish, selectable E
Region IT, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Italian, selectable F
System interface (Port B): Refer to page 5/77 10

No system interface 0
Protocols see page 5/77
Service interface (Port C)

No interface at rear side
11
0
DIGSI 4 / modem, electrical RS232 1
DIGSI 4 / modem / RTD-box5), electrical RS485 2
DIGSI 4 / modem / RTD-box5)6), optical 820 nm wavelength, ST connector 3 12
Measuring/fault recording
Fault recording 1
Slave pointer,mean values, min /max values, fault recording 3
13
1) Rated current can be selected by means of jumpers.

2) Transition between the two auxiliary voltage ranges can be selected
5) Temperature monitoring box 7XV5662-
refer to “Accessories”.
AD10, 14
by means of jumpers. 6) When using the temperature monitoring box at an optical interface,
3) The binary input thresholds can be selected per binary input by the additional RS485 fiber-optic converter 7XV5650-0 A00 is
means of jumpers.
4) AC 230 V, starting from device version …/EE.
required.
7) starting from device version .../GG and FW-Version V4.82 15
Description Order No. Order code
1 7SJ61multifunction protection relay
Designation ANSI No. Description

7SJ61 - -
Basic version Control
2 50/51
50N/51N
50N/51N
Overcurrent protection I>, I>>, I>>>, Ip
Ground-fault protection IE>, IE>>, IE>>>, IEp
Ground-fault protection via insensitive
IEE function: IEE>, IEE>>, IEEp1)
50/50N Flexible protection functions (index quantities
3 49
derived from current): Additional time-overcurrent
protection stages I2>, I>>>>, IE>>>>
Overload protection (with 2 time constants)
46 Phase balance current protection
(negative-sequence protection)
4 50BF
37
74TC
Breaker failure protection
Undercurrent monitoring
Trip circuit supervision
4 setting groups, cold-load pickup
Inrush blocking
5 IEF
86 Lockout
Intermittent ground fault

F A
P A
50Ns/51Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection (non-directional)

87N High-impedance restricted ground fault
6 IEF 50Ns/51Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection (non-directional)
F B 2)

Intermittent ground fault P B 2)
7 Motor IEF 50Ns/51Ns

87N
Sensitive ground-fault detection (non-directional)
High-impedance restricted ground fault
48/14 Starting time supervision, locked rotor
8 51M Load jam protection, motor statistics R B 2)
Motor 50Ns/51Ns Sensitive ground-fault detection (non-directional)

9 66/86
51M
Restart inhibit
Load jam protection, motor statistics H B 2)
Motor 48/14 Starting time supervision, locked rotor

10 51M Load jam protection, motor statistics H A
ARC Without 0
79 With auto-reclosure 1
11
12
13
14 Basic version included

IEF = Intermittent ground fault
1) 50N/51N only with insensitive ground-current transformer
15 when position 7 = 1, 5, 7.
2) Sensitive ground-current transformer only when position 7 = 2, 6.


7SJ61multifunction protection relay
System interface (on rear of unit, Port B)

7SJ61 - - -
1
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, RS232 1
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, RS485 2 2
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, 820 nm fiber, ST connector 3
PROFIBUS DP Slave, RS485 9 L 0 A
PROFIBUS DP Slave, 820 nm wavelength, double ring, ST connector 1)
MODBUS, RS485
9
9
L 0 B
L 0 D
3
MODBUS, 820 nm wavelength, ST connector 2)
9 L 0 E
DNP 3.0, RS485 9 L 0 G
DNP 3.0, 820 nm wavelength, ST connector 2)
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, redundant, RS485, RJ45 connector 2)
9
9
L 0 H
L 0 P
4
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connector (EN 100) 9 L 0 R
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector (EN 100) 2) 9 L 0 S
DNP3 TCP + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, electrical, double, RJ45 connector 3)
DNP3 TCP + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, optical, double, LC connector 3)
9
9
L 2 R
L 2 S
5
PROFINET + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, electrical, double, RJ45 connector 3) 9 L 3 R
PROFINET + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, optical, double, RJ45 connector 3) 9 L 3 S
1) Not with position 9 = “B”; if 9 = “B”, please order 7SJ6 unit with RS485 port and separate fiber-optic converters. 6
For single ring, please order converter 6GK1502-3AB10, not available with position 9 = “B”.
For double ring, please order converter 6GK1502-4AB10, not available with position 9 = “B”.
The converter requires a AC 24 V power supply (e.g. power supply 7XV5810-0BA00).
2) Not available with position 9 = “B”.
3) Available with V4.9
7
Sample order 9
Position Order No. + Order code
7SJ612 5 - 5 E C 9 1 - 3 F A 1 + L 0 G
10
6 I/O’s: 11 BI/6 BO, 1 live status contact 2
7 Current transformer: 5 A 5
8 Power supply: DC 110 to 250 V, AC 115 V to AC 230 V
9 Unit version: Flush-mounting housing, screw-type terminals
5
E 11
10 Region: US, English language (US); 60 Hz, ANSI C
11 Communication: System interface: DNP 3.0, RS485 9 L 0 G
12
13
Communication: DIGSI 4, electric RS232
Measuring/fault recording: Extended measuring and fault records
1
3
12
14/15 Protection function package: Basic version F A
13
14
15
Accessories Description Order No.
1 Temperature monitoring box

AC/DC 24 to 60 V 7XV5662-2AD10
AC/DC 90 to 240 V 7XV5662-5AD10
2 Varistor / Voltage Arrester

Voltage arrester for high-impedance REF protection
125 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S 256 C53207-A401-D76-1
240 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S 1088 C53207-A401-D77-1
3 Connecting cable
Cable between PC/notebook (9-pin con.) and protection unit
(9-pin connector) (contained in DIGSI 4, but can be ordered
additionally) 7XV5100-4
4 Cable between temperature monitoring box and

SIPROTEC 4 unit
- length 5 m /16.4 ft 7XV5103-7AA05
- length 25 m / 82 ft 7XV5103-7AA25
- length 50 m /164 ft 7XV5103-7AA50
5 Manual for 7SJ61
English/German C53000-G1140-C210-x 1)
8 1) x = please inquire for latest edition (exact Order No.).
10
11
12
13
14
15
Accessories Description Order No. Size of Supplier

package
Terminal safety cover

1
LSP2289-afp.eps
Voltage/current terminal 18-pole/12-pole C73334-A1-C31-1 1 Siemens
Mounting rail Connector 2-pin
Connector 3-pin
C73334-A1-C35-1
C73334-A1-C36-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens
2
Crimp connector CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 1)
taped on reel
3
LSP2090-afp.eps
LSP2091-afp.eps
Crimp connector: Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163084-2 1 1)
taped on reel
2-pin connector 3-pin connector Crimping tool for Type III+ 0-539635-1 1 1)
1)
4
and matching female 0-539668-2 1
Crimping tool for CI2 0-734372-1 1 1)
and matching female 1-734387-1 1 1)
5
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps
Short-circuit links
for current terminals C73334-A1-C33-1 1 Siemens
for other terminals C73334-A1-C34-1 1 Siemens
Short-circuit links
for current terminals
Short-circuit links
for current terminals Mounting rail for 19" rack C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens 6
1) Your local Siemens representative can inform you on local suppliers.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14 *) For pinout of communication ports see part 14 of this catalog.

For the allocation of the terminals of the panel surface-mounting version
refer to the manual (http://www.siemens.com/siprotec).
15 Fig. 5/17 7SJ610 connection diagram

Connection diagram
7SJ611x-x B xxx-xxxx
7SJ611x-x D xxx-xxxx
1
7SJ611, E
7SJ613 E
9
LSA2820-dgpen.eps
10
11
12
13
*) For pinout of communication ports see part 14 of this catalog. 14

Fig. 5/18 7SJ611, 7SJ613 connection diagram 15

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13

15 Fig. 5/19 7SJ612, 7SJ614 connection diagram

Protection functions (continued)

• Inrush restraint
• Motor protection 1
• Under-/overvoltage protection 2
• Under-/overfrequency protection
• Rate-of-frequency-change protection
LSP2299-afpen.eps
• Power protection (e.g. reverse, factor)
3
SIPV6_116.eps
• Undervoltage controlled reactive power
protection
• Breaker failure protection
• Negative-sequence protection 4
• Phase-sequence monitoring
• Synchro-check
Fig. 5/20 Multifunction protection relay with text (left) and graphic display
• Fault locator
• Lockout
5
• Auto-reclosure
Description
Control functions/programmable logic
• Commands f. ctrl of CB and of isolators
6
The SIPROTEC 7SJ62 relays can be used for line protection of • Position of switching elements is shown on the graphic display
high and medium voltage networks with earthed (grounded), • Control via keyboard, binary inputs, DIGSI 4 or SCADA system
low-resistance grounded, isolated or compensated neutral point.
With regard to motor protection, the SIPROTEC 7SJ62 is suitable
• User-defined logic with CFC (e.g. interlocking) 7
for asynchronous machines of all sizes. The relay performs all Monitoring functions
functions of backup protection supplementary to transformer
• Operational measured values V, I, f
differential protection.
7SJ62 is featuring the "flexible protection functions". Up to
• Energy metering values Wp, Wq 8
20 protection functions can be added according to individual
requirements. Thus, for example, a rate-of-frequency-change • Slave pointer
protection or reverse power protection can be implemented. • Trip circuit supervision
• Fuse failure monitor
9
The relay provides control of the circuit-breaker, further
switching devices and automation functions. The integrated pro- • 8 oscillographic fault records
grammable logic (CFC) allows the user to implement their own • Motor statistics
functions, e. g. for the automation of switchgear (interlocking).
The user is also allowed to generate user-defined messages. Communication interfaces
10
The flexible communication interfaces are open for modern • System interface
communication architectures with control systems. – IEC 60870-5-103 / IEC 61850
– PROFIBUS DP
– DNP 3/DNP3 TCP/MODBUS RTU
11
Function overview – PROFINET
• Overcurrent protection
• Front interface for DIGSI 4 12
• Directional overcurrent protection
• Sensitive directional ground-fault detection
• Displacement voltage Hardware 13
• 4 current transformers
• Directional intermittent ground fault protection
• 3/4 voltage transformers
• 8/11 binary inputs 14
• 8/6 output relays
15
Application
LSA2958-egpen.eps
7
8 Application Synchro-check
In order to connect two components of a power system, the
The SIPROTEC 7SJ62 unit is a numerical protection relay that also relay provides a synchro-check function which verifies that
9 performs control and monitoring functions and therefore sup-
ports the user in cost-effective power system management, and
switching ON does not endanger the stability of the power
system.
ensures reliable supply of electric power to the customers. Local
operation has been designed according to ergonomic criteria. A Motor protection
10 large, easy-to-read display was a major design aim.

When protecting motors, the 7SJ62 relay is suitable for asyn-
chronous machines of all sizes.
Control
The integrated control function permits control of disconnect Transformer protection
11 devices, grounding switches or circuit-breakers via the inte-

grated operator panel, binary inputs, DIGSI 4 or the control and
protection system (e.g. SICAM). The present status (or position)
The high-impedance restricted ground-fault protection detects
with graphic display. A full range of command processing func-
12 tions is provided.
short-circuits and insulation faults on the transformer.
Backup protection
Programmable logic
The 7SJ62 can be used universally for backup protection.
The integrated logic characteristics (CFC) allow the user to
13 implement their own functions for automation of switchgear Flexible protection functions
user can also generate user-defined messages. By configuring a connection between a standard protection logic
and any measured or derived quantity, the functional scope of
14 Line protection the relays can be easily expanded by up to 20 protection stages
or protection functions.
The 7SJ62 units can be used for line protection of high and
medium-voltage networks with earthed (grounded), low- Metering values
resistance grounded, isolated or compensated neutral point.
15 Extensive measured values, limit values and metered values

Application
ANSI IEC Protection functions
50, 50N I>, I>>, I>>>, IE>, IE>>,IE>>> Definite-time overcurrent protection (phase/neutral)
Ip, IEp Inverse overcurrent protection (phase/neutral), phase function with voltage-dependent option
1
50, 51V, 51N
67, 67N Idir>, Idir>>, Ip dir Directional overcurrent protection (definite/inverse, phase/neutral),
IEdir>, IEdir>>, IEp dir Directional comparison protection
67Ns/50Ns IEE>, IEE>>, IEEp Directional / non-directional sensitive ground-fault detection 2
59N/64 VE, V0> Displacement voltage, zero-sequence voltage
– IIE> Intermittent ground fault

3
67Ns IIE dir> Directional intermittent ground fault protection
High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection
50BF
87N
4
79 Auto-reclosure
25 Synchro-check 5
V2>, phase-sequence Unbalance-voltage protection and / or phase-sequence monitoring

47
ϑ> Thermal overload protection
6
49

Restart inhibit
66/86

8
38 Temperature monitoring via external device (RTD-box), e.g. bearing temperature monitoring
27, 59 V<, V> Undervoltage / overvoltage protection 9

59R dV/dt Rate-of-voltage-change protection
32 P<>, Q<> Reverse-power, forward-power protection
27/Q Q>/V< Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection

10
55 cos φ Power factor protection
81O/U f>, f< Overfrequency / underfrequency protection

11
81R df/dt Rate-of-frequency-change protection
21FL Fault locator

12
13
14
15
Construction, protection functions
2
LSP2099-afpen.eps
3
4
Fig. 5/22 Rear view with screw-type Fig. 5/23 Definite-time overcurrent protection Fig. 5/24 Inverse-time overcurrent protection
terminals, 1/3-rack size
5
Construction Available inverse-time characteristics
Characteristics acc. to ANSI/IEEE IEC 60255-3
6 Connection techniques and housing with many advantages
Inverse • •
1/3-rack size (text display variants) and 1/2-rack size (graphic Short inverse •
display variants) are the available housing widths of the 7SJ62
Long inverse • •
relays, referred to a 19" module frame system. This means that
7 previous models can always be replaced. The height is a uniform
244 mm for flush-mounting housings and 266 mm for surface-
mounting housing. All cables can be connected with or without
Extremely inverse • •
ring lugs.
8 In the case of surface mounting on a panel, the connection Reset characteristics
terminals are located above and below in the form of screw-type
terminals. The communication interfaces are located in a sloped For easier time coordination with electromechanical relays, reset
case at the top and bottom of the housing. characteristics according to ANSI C37.112 and IEC 60255-3 /
9 BS 142 standards are applied.
When using the reset characteristic (disk emulation), a reset
Protection functions process is initiated after the fault current has disappeared. This
reset process corresponds to the reverse movement of the Fer-
10 Overcurrent protection (ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51V, 51N) raris disk of an electromechanical relay (thus: disk emulation).
This function is based on the phase-selective measurement of User-definable characteristics

the three phase currents and the ground current (four trans-
Instead of the predefined time characteristics according to ANSI,
11 formers). Three definite-time overcurrent protection elements
(DMT) exist both for the phases and for the ground. The current
tripping characteristics can be defined by the user for phase and
ground units separately. Up to 20 current/time value pairs may
threshold and the delay time can be set within a wide range.
be programmed. They are set as pairs of numbers or graphically
In addition, inverse-time overcurrent protection characteristics
in DIGSI 4.
(IDMTL) can be activated.
12 The inverse-time function provides – as an option – voltage- Inrush restraint
restraint or voltage-controlled operating modes.
harmonic is detected during transformer energization, pickup of
13 non-directional and directional normal elements are blocked.

For directional and non-directional overcurrent protection
14 functions the initiation thresholds and tripping times can be
switched via binary inputs or by time control.
15
Directional overcurrent protection (ANSI 67, 67N)

Directional phase and ground protection are separate functions.
They operate in parallel to the non-directional overcurrent 1
elements. Their pickup values and delay times can be set sepa-
rately. Definite-time and inverse-time characteristics are offered.
The tripping characteristic can be rotated about ± 180 degrees.
By means of voltage memory, directionality can be determined
2
reliably even for close-in (local) faults. If the switching device
closes onto a fault and the voltage is too low to determine direc-
tion, directionality (directional decision) is made with voltage
from the voltage memory. If no voltage exists in the memory, 3
tripping occurs according to the coordination schedule.
For ground protection, users can choose whether the direction
is to be determined via zero-sequence system or negative-
sequence system quantities (selectable). Using negative- 4
sequence variables can be advantageous in cases where the zero
Fig. 5/25 Directional characteristic of the directional overcurrent
voltage tends to be very low due to unfavorable zero-sequence protection
impedances.

5
It is used for selective protection of sections fed from two
sources with instantaneous tripping, i.e. without the disad-
vantage of time coordination. The directional comparison 6
protection is suitable if the distances between the protection
stations are not significant and pilot wires are available for
signal transmission. In addition to the directional comparison
protection, the directional coordinated overcurrent protection
is used for complete selective backup protection. If operated in
7
a closed-circuit connection, an interruption of the transmission
line is detected.
(Sensitive) directional ground-fault detection 8

(ANSI 64, 67Ns, 67N)
For isolated-neutral and compensated networks, the direction
of power flow in the zero sequence is calculated from the zero-
sequence current I0 and zero-sequence voltage V0.
9
For networks with an isolated neutral, the reactive current
component is evaluated; for compensated networks, the active
current component or residual resistive current is evaluated.
For special network conditions, e.g. high-resistance grounded
10
networks with ohmic-capacitive ground-fault current or low- Fig. 5/26 Directional determination using cosine measurements for
resistance grounded networks with ohmic-inductive current, the compensated networks
tripping characteristics can be rotated approximately
± 45 degrees. 11
Two modes of ground-fault direction detection can be imple-
(Sensitive) ground-fault detection
mented: tripping or “signalling only mode”.
(ANSI 50Ns, 51Ns / 50N, 51N)
It has the following functions:
For high-resistance grounded networks, a sensitive input
12
• TRIP via the displacement voltage VE. transformer is connected to a phase-balance neutral current
• Two instantaneous elements or one instantaneous plus one transformer (also called core-balance CT).
user-defined characteristic.
• Each element can be set in forward, reverse, or non-
The function can also be operated in the insensitive mode as an
13
directional.
• The function can also be operated in the insensitive mode as
an additional short-circuit protection. 14
15
1 Intermittent (re-striking) faults occur due to insulation weak-

nesses in cables or as a result of water penetrating cable joints.
Such faults either simply cease at some stage or develop into
lasting short-circuits. During intermittent activity, however,
star-point resistors in networks that are impedance-grounded
2 may undergo thermal overloading. The normal ground-fault pro-
tection cannot reliably detect and interrupt the current pulses,
some of which can be very brief.
The selectivity required with intermittent ground faults is
3 achieved by summating the duration of the individual pulses and
by triggering when a (settable) summed time is reached. The
response threshold IIE> evaluates the r.m.s. value, referred to
one systems period.
4 Directional intermittent ground fault protection (ANSI 67Ns)

Fig. 5/27 High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection
The directional intermittent ground fault protection has to detect
intermittent ground faults in resonant grounded cable systems
5 selectively. Intermittent ground faults in resonant grounded

cable systems are usually characterized by the following proper- High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection (ANSI 87N)
ties:
The high-impedance measurement principle is an uncomplicated
• A very short high-current ground current pulse (up to several
and sensitive method for detecting ground faults, especially on
6 hundred amperes) with a duration of under 1 ms
• They are self-extinguishing and re-ignite within one halfperiod
up to several periods, depending on the power system condi-
tions and the fault characteristic. When the high-impedance measurement principle is applied,
all current transformers in the protected area are connected in
7 • Over longer periods (many seconds to minutes), they can
develop into static faults.
parallel and operated on one common resistor of relatively high
Such intermittent ground faults are frequently caused by weak units, the voltage is measured by detecting the current through
insulation, e.g. due to decreased water resistance of old cables. the (external) resistor R at the sensitive current measurement
8 Ground fault functions based on fundamental component
measured values are primarily designed to detect static ground
input IEE. The varistor V serves to limit the voltage in the event
of an internal fault. It cuts off the high momentary voltage
faults and do not always behave correctly in case of intermittent spikes occurring at transformer saturation. At the same time,
ground faults. The function described here evaluates specifi cally this results in smoothing of the voltage without any noteworthy
9 the ground current pulses and puts them into relation with the
zero-sequence voltage to determine the direction.
reduction of the average value.
If no faults have occurred and in the event of external faults, the
Phase-balance current protection (ANSI 46) system is at equilibrium, and the voltage through the resistor is
(Negative-sequence protection) approximately zero. In the event of internal faults, an imbalance
10 In line protection, the two-element phase-balance current/
occurs which leads to a voltage and a current flow through the
resistor R.
negative-sequence protection permits detection on the high side
of high-resistance phase-to-phase faults and phase-to-ground The current transformers must be of the same type and must
faults that are on the low side of a transformer (e.g. with the at least offer a separate core for the high-impedance restricted
11 switch group Dy 5). This provides backup protection for high- ground-fault protection. They must in particular have the same
transformation ratio and an approximately identical knee-point
resistance faults beyond the transformer.
voltage. They should also demonstrate only minimal measuring
Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF) errors.
12 If a faulted portion of the electrical circuit is not disconnected
initiated using the breaker failure protection which operates
the circuit-breaker, e.g. of an upstream (higher-level) protection
13 relay. Breaker failure is detected if, after a trip command, current
is still flowing in the faulted circuit. As an option, it is possible to
make use of the circuit-breaker position indication.
14
15
Flexible protection functions

The 7SJ62 units enable the user to easily add on up to 20
protective functions. To this end, parameter definitions are used 1
to link a standard protection logic with any chosen characteristic
quantity (measured or derived quantity) (Fig. 5/28). The stand-
ard logic consists of the usual protection elements such as the
pickup message, the parameter-definable delay time, the TRIP
command, a blocking possibility, etc. The mode of operation
dv /dt
2
for current, voltage, power and power factor quantities can be
three-phase or single-phase. Almost all quantities can be oper-
protection priority. LSA4113-aen.eps
3
Protection stages/functions attainable on the basis of the avail-
Fig. 5/28 Flexible protection functions
able characteristic quantities:
Function ANSI No.

4
I>, IE> 50, 50N
• Starting of the ARC depends on the trip command selection
(e.g. 46, 50, 51, 67)
V<, V>, VE>, dV/dt 27, 59, 59R, 64
3I0>, I1>, I2>, I2/I1, 50N, 46,
• Blocking option of the ARC via binary inputs
5
3V0>, V1><, V2>< 59N, 47
P><, Q>< 32
• The directional and non-directional elements can either be
blocked or operated non-delayed depending on the auto-
cos φ (p.f.)><
f><
55
81O, 81U
reclosure cycle 6
• Dynamic setting change of the directional and non-directional
df/dt>< 81R elements can be activated depending on the ready AR
For example, the following can be implemented:

Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49)
7
• Reverse power protection (ANSI 32R) with an integrated pre-warning element for temperature and
• Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81R) current can be applied. The temperature is calculated using a
Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection

thermal homogeneous-body model (according to IEC 60255-8),
which takes account both of the energy entering the equipment
8
(ANSI 27/Q) and the energy losses. The calculated temperature is constantly
The undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection protects adjusted accordingly. Thus, account is taken of the previous load
the system for mains decoupling purposes. To prevent a voltage
collapse in energy systems, the generating side, e.g. a genera-
and the load fluctuations.
9
For thermal protection of motors (especially the stator) a
tor, must be equipped with voltage and frequency protection further time constant can be set so that the thermal ratios can
devices. An undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection is be detected correctly while the motor is rotating and when it is
required at the supply system connection point. It detects critical
power system situations and ensures that the power generation
stopped. The ambient temperature or the temperature of the
coolant can be detected serially via an external temperature
10
facility is disconnected from the mains. Furthermore, it ensures monitoring box (resistance-temperature detector box, also
that reconnection only takes place under stable power system called RTD-box). The thermal replica of the overload function
conditions. The associated criteria can be parameterized. is automatically adapted to the ambient conditions. If there is
no RTD-box it is assumed that the ambient temperatures are 11
Synchro-check (ANSI 25) constant.
In case of switching ON the circuit- breaker, the units can check
Settable dropout delay times
whether the two subnetworks are synchronized.
Voltage-, frequency- and phase-angle-differences are being If the devices are used in parallel with electromechanical relays
12
checked to determine whether synchronous conditions are in networks with intermittent faults, the long dropout times of
existent. the electromechanical devices (several hundred milliseconds)
can lead to problems in terms of time grading. Clean time
Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79) grading is only possible if the dropout time is approximately the 13
Multiple reclosures can be defined by the user and lockout will same. This is why the parameter of dropout times can be defined
occur if a fault is present after the last reclosure. The following for certain functions such as time-over-current protection,
functions are possible: ground short-circuit and phase-balance current protection.
• 3-pole ARC for all types of faults 14
• Separate settings for phase and ground faults
delayed auto-reclosures (DAR)
15
Motor protection
1 Restart inhibit (ANSI 66/86)

If a motor is started up too many times in
succession, the rotor can be subject to
thermal overload, especially the upper
2 edges of the bars. The rotor temperature

is calculated from the stator current. The
reclosing lockout only permits start-up
of the motor if the rotor has sufficient
thermal reserves for a complete start-up
3 (see Fig. 5/29).
Emergency start-up
This function disables the reclosing lockout
4 via a binary input by storing the state of
the thermal replica as long as the binary
input is active. It is also possible to reset
the thermal replica to zero.
5 Temperature monitoring (ANSI 38)

Up to two temperature monitoring boxes
Fig. 5/29
with a total of 12 measuring sensors
can be used for temperature monitoring
6 and detection by the protection relay. The thermal status of
motors, generators and transformers can be monitored with this
Load jam protection (ANSI 51M)
Sudden high loads can cause slowing down and blocking of
device. Additionally, the temperature of the bearings of rotating the motor and mechanical damages. The rise of current due
machines are monitored for limit value violation. The tempera- to a load jam is being monitored by this function (alarm and
tripping).
7 tures are being measured with the help of temperature detectors
at various locations of the device to be protected. This data is The overload protection function is too slow and therefore not
transmitted to the protection relay via one or two temperature suitable under these circumstances.
monitoring boxes (see “Accessories”, page 5/115).
8 Starting time supervision (ANSI 48/14)
Starting time supervision protects the motor against long
The negative-sequence / phase-balance current protection detects
unwanted start-ups that might occur in the event of excessive a phase failure or load unbalance due to network asymmetry and
load torque or excessive voltage drops within the motor, or if the protects the rotor from impermissible temperature rise.
9 rotor is locked. Rotor temperature is calculated from measured
stator current. The tripping time is calculated according to the Undercurrent monitoring (ANSI 37)
following equation: With this function, a sudden drop in current, which can occur
due to a reduced motor load, is detected. This may be due to
shaft breakage, no-load operation of pumps or fan failure.
10 ⎛ I ⎞2 Motor statistics
t = ⎜ A ⎟ ⋅ TA
⎝I ⎠ Essential information on start-up of the motor (duration, cur-
rent, voltage) and general information on number of starts, total
11 IMOTOR START = Pickup current to detect a motor start
operating time, total down time, etc. are saved as statistics in
the device.
t = Tripping time
Voltage protection
IA = Rated motor starting current
12 TA = Tripping time at rated motor starting current
(2 times, for warm and cold motor)
Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59)
The two-element overvoltage protection detects unwanted
network and machine overvoltage conditions. The function can
The characteristic (equation) can be adapted optimally to the operate either with phase-to-phase, phase-to-ground, positive
13 state of the motor by applying different tripping times TA in
dependence of either cold or warm motor state. For differentia-
phase-sequence or negative phase-sequence system voltage.
Three-phase and single-phase connections are possible.
tion of the motor state the thermal model of the rotor is applied.
Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27)
If the trip time is rated according to the above formula, even a
The two-element undervoltage protection provides protec-
14 prolonged start-up and reduced voltage (and reduced start-up
current) will be evaluated correctly. The tripping time is inverse
tion against dangerous voltage drops (especially for electric
machines). Applications include the isolation of generators or
(current dependent).
motors from the network to avoid undesired operating states
A binary signal is set by a speed sensor to detect a blocked rotor. and a possible loss of stability. Proper operating conditions
15 An instantaneous tripping is effected. of electrical machines are best evaluated with the positive-
sequence quantities. The protection function is active over a

wide frequency range (45 to 55, 55 to 65 Hz)1). Even when

falling below this frequency range the function continues to
work, however, with a greater tolerance band. 1
The function can operate either with phase-to-phase, phase-to-
ground or positive phase-sequence voltage and can be moni-
tored with a current criterion. Three-phase and single-phase
connections are possible. 2
Frequency protection (ANSI 81O/U)
Frequency protection can be used for overfrequency and under-
frequency protection. Electric machines and parts of the system
are protected from unwanted speed deviations. Unwanted 3
frequency changes in the network can be detected and the load
can be removed at a specified frequency setting.
Frequency protection can be used over a wide frequency range
(40 to 60, 50 to 70 Hz)1). There are four elements (selectable 4
as overfrequency or underfrequency) and each element can be
delayed separately. Blocking of the frequency protection can be
performed if using a binary input or by using an undervoltage
element. 5
Fault locator (ANSI 21FL)
The integrated fault locator calculates the fault impedance and
Fig. 5/30 CB switching cycle diagram
the distance-to-fault. The results are displayed in Ω, kilometers
(miles) and in percent of the line length. 6
Circuit-breaker wear monitoring Commissioning
Methods for determining circuit-breaker contact wear or the Commissioning could hardly be easier and is fully supported by
and the state of the binary outputs can be set individually. The
7
benefit lies in reduced maintenance costs. operation of switching elements (circuit-breakers, disconnect
There is no mathematically exact method of calculating the devices) can be checked using the switching functions of the bay
wear or the remaining service life of circuit-breakers that takes
into account the arc-chamber's physical conditions when the CB
ranging operational measured values. To prevent transmission of
8
opens. This is why various methods of determining CB wear have information to the control center during maintenance, the bay
evolved which reflect the different operator philosophies. To do controller communications can be disabled to prevent unneces-
sary data from being transmitted. During commissioning, all
justice to these, the devices offer several methods:
• Σ I
indications with test marking for test purposes can be connected 9
to a control and protection system.
• Σ Ix, with x = 1... 3
Test operation
• Σ i2t
During commissioning, all indications can be passed to an
automatic control system for test purposes.
10
• Two-point method Control and automatic functions
The CB manufacturers double-logarithmic switching cycle
diagram (see Fig. 5/30) and the breaking current at the time
Control
11
of contact opening serve as the basis for this method. After CB
support all control and monitoring functions that are required
opening, the two-point method calculates the number of still
for operating medium-voltage or high-voltage substations.
possible switching cycles. To this end, the two points P1 and P2
only have to be set on the device. These are specified in the CB's The main application is reliable control of switching and other
processes.
12
technical data.
All of these methods are phase-selective and a limit value can be The status of primary equipment or auxiliary devices can be
set in order to obtain an alarm if the actual value falls below or obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated to the
exceeds the limit value during determination of the remaining 7SJ62 via binary inputs. Therefore it is possible to detect and
indicate both the OPEN and CLOSED position or a fault or
13
service life.
intermediate circuit-breaker or auxiliary contact position.
Customized functions (ANSI 32, 51V, 55, etc.)
Additional functions, which are not time critical, can be imple-
mented via the CFC using measured values. Typical functions
– integrated operator panel
– binary inputs
14
include reverse power, voltage controlled overcurrent, phase – substation control and protection system
angle detection, and zero-sequence voltage detection. – DIGSI 4
15
1) The 45 to 55, 55 to 65 Hz range is available for fN = 50/60 Hz.

Functions
Automation / user-defined logic

1 (CFC), specific functions for the automation of switchgear or
substation. Functions are activated via function keys, binary
input or via communication interface.
2 Switching authority
communication.
3 possible. The following sequence of switching authority is laid
Command processing
4
LSP2077f.eps
hardware and software, checking of the external process,
control actions using functions such as runtime monitoring and
5 automatic command termination after output. Here are some
typical applications:
• Single and double commands using 1, 1 plus 1 common or 2
trip contacts
6 • User-definable bay interlocks
• Operating sequences combining several switching operations Fig. 5/31 NXAIR panel (air-insulated)
such as control of circuit-breakers, disconnectors and ground-
ing switches
7 • Triggering of switching operations, indications or alarm by Switchgear cubicles for high/medium voltage
combination with existing information All units are designed specifically to meet the requirements of
Assignment of feedback to command high/medium-voltage applications.
8 The positions of the circuit-breaker or switching devices and

transformer taps are acquired by feedback. These indication
In general, no separate measuring instruments (e.g., for current,
voltage, frequency, …) or additional control components are
inputs are logically assigned to the corresponding command necessary.
outputs. The unit can therefore distinguish whether the indica- Measured values
9 tion change is a consequence of switching operation or whether
it is a spontaneous change of state.
voltage along with the power factor, frequency, active and reac-
Chatter disable tive power. The following functions are available for measured
Chatter disable feature evaluates whether, in a configured value processing:
10 period of time, the number of status changes of indication input
exceeds a specified figure. If exceeded, the indication input is
• Currents IL1, IL2, IL3, IE, IEE (67Ns)
• Voltages VL1, VL2, VL3, VL1L2, VL2L3, VL3L1
blocked for a certain period, so that the event list will not record
• Symmetrical components I1, I2, 3I0; V1, V2, V0
excessive operations.
11 Indication filtering and delay
• Power Watts, Vars, VA/P, Q, S (P, Q: total and phase selective)
• Power factor (cos φ), (total and phase selective)
Binary indications can be filtered or delayed.
• Frequency
Filtering serves to suppress brief changes in potential at the
• Energy ± kWh, ± kVarh, forward and reverse power flow
12 indication input. The indication is passed on only if the indica-
tion voltage is still present after a set period of time. In the • Mean as well as minimum and maximum current and voltage
event of indication delay, there is a wait for a preset time. The values
information is passed on only if the indication voltage is still • Operating hours counter
present after this time.
13 Indication derivation
A further indication (or a command) can be derived from an Limit values are monitored using programmable logic in the
existing indication. Group indications can also be formed. The CFC. Commands can be derived from this limit value indica-
tion.
14 volume of information to the system interface can thus be
reduced and restricted to the most important signals. • Zero suppression
15
Communication
Communication

2

4
5
by the user. The interface modules support the following applica-
tions: 6
telegrams in IRIG-B or DCF77 format into the units via time 7
through this interface. Radial or ring type station bus topolo- 8
Furthermore, the units can exchange data through this inter-
face via Ethernet and IEC 61850 protocol and can also be
• Service interface
Fig. 5/33 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and
The service interface was conceived for remote access to a IEC 61850, fiber-optic ring
number of protection units via DIGSI. On all units, it can be
an electrical RS232/RS485 or an optical interface. For special
applications, a maximum of two temperature monitoring Redundant solutions are also possible. Optionally it is possible to
10
boxes (RTD-box) can be connected to this interface as an read out and alter individual parameters (only possible with the
alternative. redundant module).
System interface protocols (retrofittable) PROFIBUS DP protocol 11

IEC 61850 protocol
available to a SIMATIC controller or, in the control direction, receive
commands from a central SIMATIC. Measured values can also be 12
tions. Siemens was the first manufacturer to support this standard. transferred.
By means of this protocol, information can also be exchanged
directly between bay units so as to set up simple masterless MODBUS RTU protocol
systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to the units via the This uncomplicated, serial protocol is mainly used in industry and 13
Ethernet bus is also possible with DIGSI. by power supply corporations, and is supported by a number of
unit manufacturers. SIPROTEC units function as MODBUS slaves,
making their information available to a master or receiving infor-
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is an international standard for the mation from it. A time-stamped event list is available. 14
transmission of protective data and fault recordings. All messages
from the unit and also control commands can be transferred by
means of published, Siemens-specific extensions to the protocol.
1) For units in panel surface-mounting housings 15

Communication
PROFINET
1 PROFINET is the ethernet-based successor

of Profi bus DP and is supported in the
is used in industry together with the
2 the optical and electrical Plus ethernet
November 2012. All network redundancy
3 ethernet modules, such as RSTP, PRP or
The network monitoring is possible via
4 SNMP V2 where special MIB files exist

the network topology. Single-point indica-
5 and metered values can be transmitted
via the protocol and can be selected by
6 are also transmitted spontaneously via
confi gurable process alarms. Switching Fig. 5/34 System solution/communication
control via the device in the controlling
7 direction. The PROFINET implementation

is certified. The device also supports
the IEC 61850 protocol as a server on
the same ethernet module in addition
LSP3.01-0021.tif
to the PROFINET protocol. Client server
8 connections are possible for the intercom-
munication between devices, e.g. for
transmitting fault records and GOOSE
messages.
9 DNP 3.0 protocol
Power utilities use the serial DNP 3.0
(Distributed Network Protocol) for the sta-
10 tion and network control levels. SIPROTEC
units function as DNP slaves, supplying
their information to a master system or Fig. 5/35 Optical Ethernet communication module
receiving information from it. for IEC 61850 with integrated Ethernet-switch
11 DNP3 TCP
The ethernet-based TCP variant of the DNP3 protocol is sup- System solutions for protection and station control
ported with the electrical and optical ethernet module. Two
Together with the SICAM power automation system, SIPROTEC 4
12 DNP3 TCP clients are supported. Redundant ring structures can
be realized for DNP3 TCP with the help of the integrated switch
can be used with PROFIBUS DP. Over the low-cost electrical RS485
bus, or interference-free via the optical double ring, the units
in the module. For instance, a redundant optical ethernet ring
exchange information with the control system.
can be constructed. Single-point indications, double-point indi-
cations, measured and metered values can be configured with Units featuring IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces can be connected to
13 DIGSI 4 and are transmitted to the DNPi client. Switching com- SICAM in parallel via the RS485 bus or radially by fiber-optic link.
mands can be executed in the controlling direction. Fault records Through this interface, the system is open for the connection of
of the device are stored in the binary Comtrade format and can units of other manufacturers (see Fig. 5/32).
be retrieved via the DNP 3 file transfer. The time synchronization
14 is performed via the DNPi client or SNTP. The device can also
be integrated into a network monitoring system via the SNMP
V2 protocol. Parallel to the DNP3 TCP protocol the IEC 61850
protocol (the device works as a server) and the GOOSE messages
15 of the IEC 61850 are available for the intercommunication
between devices.

Typical connections

For IEC 61850, an interoperable system solution is offered with 1
other manufacturers to the Ethernet bus. With IEC 61850, how- 2
(see Fig. 5/33).
3
Typical connections
Connection of current and voltage transformers 4

Standard connection
For grounded networks, the ground current is obtained from the
phase currents by the residual current circuit. 5
Fig. 5/36 Residual current circuit without directional element Fig. 5/37 Sensitive ground-current detection without directional element 10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 5/38 Residual current circuit with directional element 15

Typical connections
Connection for compensated networks
1 The figure shows the connection of

two phase-to-ground voltages and the
VE voltage of the open delta winding
and a phase-balance neutral current
transformer for the ground current. This
2 connection maintains maximum precision
for directional ground-fault detection and
must be used in compensated networks.
Fig. 5/39 shows sensitive directional
3 ground-fault detection.
5 Fig. 5/39 Sensitive directional ground-fault detection with directional element for phases
Connection for isolated-neutral

6 or compensated networks only
If directional ground-fault protection is
not used, the connection can be made
with only two phase current transformers.
7 Directional phase short-circuit protection
can be achieved by using only two
primary transformers.
9
Fig. 5/40 Isolated-neutral or compensated networks
10
Connection for the synchro-check
function
11 The 3-phase system is connected as refer-

ence voltage, i. e. the outgoing voltages
as well as a single-phase voltage, in this
case a busbar voltage, that has to be
12 checked for synchronism.
13
14 Fig. 5/41 Measuring of the busbar voltage and the outgoing feeder
voltage for the synchro-check
15
Type of network Function Current connection Voltage connection 1

(Low-resistance) grounded network Overcurrent protection Residual circuit, with 3 phase-current –
phase/ground non-directional transformers required, phase-balance
neutral current transformer possible
(Low-resistance) grounded networks Sensitive ground-fault protection Phase-balance neutral current

transformers required
– 2
Isolated or compensated networks Overcurrent protection phases Residual circuit, with 3 or 2 phase –
non-directional
(Low-resistance) grounded networks Overcurrent protection

current transformers possible
Residual circuit, with 3 phase-current Phase-to-ground connection or

3
phases directional transformers possible phase-to-phase connection
Isolated or compensated networks Overcurrent protection Residual circuit, with 3 or 2 phase- Phase-to-ground connection or
phases directional current transformers possible phase-to-phase connection
4
(Low-resistance) grounded networks Overcurrent protection Residual circuit, with 3 phase-current Phase-to-ground connection required
ground directional transformers required, phase-balance
neutral current transformers possible
Isolated networks Sensitive ground-fault

protection
Residual circuit, if ground current
> 0.05 IN on secondary side, otherwise
3 times phase-to-ground connection or
phase-to-ground connection with open
5
phase-balance neutral current delta winding
Compensated networks Sensitive ground-fault protection Phase-balance neutral current

cos φ measurement transformers required
Phase-to-ground connection with open
delta winding required
6
7
Connection of circuit-breaker
Undervoltage releases
8
Undervoltage releases are used for auto-
matic tripping of high-voltage motors.
Example: 9
DC supply voltage of control system fails
and manual electric tripping is no longer
possible.
Automatic tripping takes place when 10
voltage across the coil drops below the trip
limit. In Fig. 5/42, tripping occurs due to Fig. 5/42 Undervoltage release with make contact (50, 51)
failure of DC supply voltage, by automatic
opening of the live status contact upon 11
failure of the protection unit or by short-
circuiting the trip coil in event of network
fault.
In Fig. 5/43 tripping is by failure of auxiliary 12
voltage and by interruption of tripping
circuit in the event of network failure. Upon
failure of the protection unit, the tripping
circuit is also interrupted, since contact 13
held by internal logic drops back into open
position.
14
Fig. 5/43 Undervoltage trip with locking contact (trip signal 50 is inverted) 15
1 One or two binary inputs can be used for

monitoring the circuit-breaker trip coil
interrupted.
2 Lockout (ANSI 86)
All binary outputs can be stored like LEDs
and reset using the LED reset key. The
3 lockout state is also stored in the event of
supply voltage failure. Reclosure can only
occur after the lockout state is reset.
4 Reverse-power protection for dual

supply (ANSI 32R)
If power is fed to a busbar through two
parallel infeeds, then in the event of any
5 fault on one of the infeeds it should be
selectively interrupted. This ensures a
continued supply to the busbar through

the remaining infeed. For this purpose,
6 directional devices are needed which

detect a short-circuit current or a power
flow from the busbar in the direction of
the infeed. The directional overcurrent
protection is usually set via the load
7 current. It cannot be used to deactivate
low-current faults. Reverse-power
protection can be set far below the rated
power. This ensures that it also detects
8 power feedback into the line in the event
of low-current faults with levels far below
the load current.
Reverse-power protection is performed via
9 the “flexible protection functions” of the
7SJ62.
10
Fig. 5/45 Reverse-power protection for dual supply
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
General unit data Binary outputs/command outputs

Measuring circuits
Type 7SJ621,
7SJ623,
7SJ625,
7SJ622
7SJ624
7SJ626
1
Current transformer
Command/indication relay 8 6
Rated current Inom 1 or 5 A (settable)
Contacts per command/ 1 NO / form A
Option: sensitive ground-fault CT
Power consumption
IEE < 1.6 A indication relay (Two contacts changeable to NC/form
B, via jumpers)
2
at Inom = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA per phase Live status contact 1 NO / NC (jumper) / form A/B
at Inom = 5 A Approx. 0.3 VA per phase Switching capacity
for sensitive ground-fault CT at 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA
Overload capability
Make
Break
1000 W / VA
30 W / VA / 40 W resistive /
3
25 W at L/R ≤ 50 ms
≤ DC 250 V
150 A for 10 s
20 A continuous
Switching voltage
Permissible current
5 A continuous,
30 A for 0.5 s making current, 4
Dynamic (impulse current) 250 x Inom (half cycle) 2000 switching cycles
sensitive ground-fault CT
Electrical tests
Specification
5
100 A for 10 s
Standards IEC 60255
15 A continuous
ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1, C37.90.2,
Voltage transformer
750 A (half cycle)
Insulation tests
UL508
6
Type 7SJ621, 7SJ623, 7SJ625 Standards IEC 60255-5; ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0
7SJ622, 7SJ624, 7SJ626
Voltage test (100 % test) 2.5 kV (r.m.s. value), 50/60 Hz
Number
Rated voltage Vnom
3
100 V to 225 V
4 4 all circuits except for auxiliary
voltage and RS485/RS232 and 7
Measuring range 0 V to 170 V time synchronization
Power consumption at Vnom = 100 V < 0.3 VA per phase Auxiliary voltage DC 3.5 kV
Communication ports AC 500 V
Overload capability in voltage path
(phase-neutral voltage) and time synchronization 8
Thermal (effective) 230 V continuous Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak value); 1.2/50 µs; 0.5 J
all circuits, except communication 3 positive and 3 negative impulses
Auxiliary voltage
ports and time synchronization, at intervals of 5 s
Rated auxiliary
voltage Vaux
DC 24 / 48 V 60 /125 V 110 / 250 V
AC 115 / 230 V
class III
9
Permissible tolerance DC 19-58 V 48–150 V 88–300 V
AC 92–138 V 184–265 V Standards IEC 60255-6; IEC 60255-22
(product standard)
Ripple voltage, ≤ 12 %
peak-to-peak
Power consumption
DIN 57435 Part 303 10
High-frequency test 2.5 kV (peak value); 1 MHz; τ =15 ms;
Quiescent Approx. 4 W IEC 60255-22-1, class III 400 surges per s; test duration 2 s
Energized Approx. 7 W and VDE 0435 Part 303, class III
Backup time during
loss/short circuit of
≥ 50 ms at V ≥ DC 110 V
≥ 20 ms at V ≥ DC 24 V
Electrostatic discharge
IEC 60255-22-2 class IV
8 kV contact discharge;
15 kV air gap discharge;
11
auxiliary voltage ≥ 200 ms at 115 V / AC 230 V and EN 61000-4-2, class IV both polarities; 150 pF; Ri = 330 Ω
Binary inputs/indication inputs Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
field, non-modulated
Type 7SJ621,
7SJ623,
7SJ625,
7SJ622,
7SJ624
7SJ626
IEC 60255-22-3 (Report) class III 12
Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m, 80 to 1000 MHz;
Number 8 11 field, amplitude-modulated AM 80 %; 1 kHz
Voltage range DC 24–250 V
Pickup threshold modifiable by plug-in jumpers
field, pulse-modulated
10 V/m, 900 MHz; repetition
rate 200 Hz, on duration 50 %
13
Pickup threshold DC 19 V IEC 61000-4-3/ENV 50204; class III
For rated control 24/48/60/ 110/125/ Fast transient interference/burst 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
voltage 110/125 V DC 220/250 V IEC 60255-22-4 and IEC 61000-4- burst length = 15 ms;
Response time/drop-
out time
Approx. 3.5 4, class IV repetition rate 300 ms; both polarities;
14
Power consumption 1.8 mA (independent of operating voltage)
energized
15
Technical data
EMC tests for interference immunity; type tests (cont'd) During transportation
1 High-energy surge voltages

(Surge)
Standards
Vibration
IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 5 to 8 Hz: ± 7.5 mm amplitude;
Auxiliary voltage From circuit to circuit: 2 kV; 12 Ω; 9 µF IEC 60068-2-6 8 to 150 Hz; 2 g acceleration,
across contacts: 1 kV; 2 Ω ;18 µF frequency sweep 1 octave/min
2 Binary inputs/outputs From circuit to circuit: 2 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF

across contacts: 1 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF Shock
Semi-sinusoidal
Line-conducted HF, 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms
amplitude-modulated AM 80 %; 1 kHz IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks in both directions of 3 axes
IEC 61000-4-6, class III Continuous shock Semi-sinusoidal
3 Power frequency magnetic field
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV
30 A/m; 50 Hz, continuous
300 A/m; 50 Hz, 3 s
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
IEC 60068-2-29
1000 shocks in both directions
IEC 60255-6 0.5 mT, 50 Hz of 3 axes
Oscillatory surge withstand 2.5 to 3 kV (peak value), 1 to 1.5 MHz
4 capability
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
damped wave; 50 surges per s;
duration 2 s, Ri = 150 to 200 Ω
Climatic stress tests
Temperatures
Fast transient surge withstand 4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges per s
capability ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 both polarities; duration 2 s, Ri = 80 Ω Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 -25 °C to +85 °C /-13 °F to +185 °F
Radiated electromagnetic 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz; and -2, test Bd, for 16 h
5 interference
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2
amplitude and pulse-modulated Temporarily permissible operating -20 °C to +70 °C /-4 °F to -158 °F
temperature, tested for 96 h
Damped wave 2.5 kV (peak value, polarity Recommended permanent -5 °C to +55 °C /+25 °F to +131 °F
IEC 60694 / IEC 61000-4-12 alternating) operating temperature acc. to
6 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 and 50 MHz,

Ri = 200 Ω
IEC 60255-6
(Legibility of display may be
impaired above +55 °C /+131 °F)
EMC tests for interference emission; type tests
– Limiting temperature during -25 °C to +55 °C /-13 °F to +131 °F
Standard EN 50081-* (generic specification)
permanent storage
7 Conducted interferences 150 kHz to 30 MHz

only auxiliary voltage IEC/CISPR 22 Limit class B
– Limiting temperature during
transport -25 °C to +70 °C /-13 °F to +158 °F
Radio interference field strength 30 to 1000 MHz Humidity
IEC/CISPR 11 Limit class B
8 panel must be installed in a metal
It is recommended to arrange the
units in such a way that they are
not exposed to direct sunlight or
humidity; on 56 days a year up to
95 % relative humidity;
condensation not permissible!
Mechanical stress tests
9 Vibration, shock stress and seismic vibration
Unit design
Housing 7XP20
During operation
Dimensions See dimension drawings, part 14
Weight
10 IEC 60255-21-1, class 2
IEC 60068-2-6
10 to 60 Hz; ± 0.075 mm amplitude;
60 to 150 Hz; 1 g acceleration
Surface-mounting housing
4.5 kg
4.0 kg
frequency sweep 1 octave/min Degree of protection
20 cycles in 3 perpendicular axes acc. to EN 60529
11 Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
Semi-sinusoidal
Acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms;
Operator safety
IP 2x with cover
Seismic vibration Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-3, class 1 1 to 8 Hz: ± 3.5 mm amplitude
12 IEC 60068-3-3 (horizontal axis)
(vertical axis)
(horizontal axis)
13 8 to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration
(vertical axis)
Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
1 cycle in 3 perpendicular axe
14
15

7SJ62 multifunction protection relay
Housing, inputs, outputs

7SJ62 - -
1
Housing ⅓19”, 4 line text display, 3 x U, 4 x I, 8 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status-contact 1
Housing ⅓19”, 4 line text display, 3 x U, 4 x I, 11 BI,6 BO, 1 live status-contact 2
Housing ⅓19”, 4 line text display, 4 x U, 4 x I, 8 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status-contact
Housing ⅓19”, 4 line text display, 4 x U, 4 x I, 11 BI,6 BO, 1 live status-contact
3
See next 2
4 page
Housing ½19”, graphic display, 4 x U, 4 x I,8 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status contact 7) 5
Housing ½19”, graphic display, 4 x U, 4 x I, 11 BI, 6 BO, 1 live status contact 7) 6
Measuring inputs (3 x V / 4 x V, 4 x I)
3
Iph = 1 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A)
Position 15 only with A, C, E, G 1
Iph = 1 A1), Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.001 A)
Position 15 only with B, D, F, H 2 4
Iph = 5A1),Ie = 5 A1)(min. = 0.25 A)
Position 15 only with B, D, F, H
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A)
6 5
Position 15 only with A, C, E,G 7

DC 24 to 48 V, threshold binary input DC 19 V 3) 2 6
DC 60 to 125 V 2), threshold binary input DC 19 V 3) 4
DC 110 to 250 V 2), AC 115 to 230 V4) , threshold binary input DC 176 V 3)
Unit version
6
7
For panel surfacemounting, two-tier terminal top/bottom B
For panel flushmounting, plug-in terminal (2/3 pin connector) D
For panel flushmounting, screw-type terminal (direct connection /ring-type cable lugs) E 8
Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, language: German, selectable A
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: English (GB), selectable
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, language: English (US), selectable
B
C
9
Region FR, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: French, selectable D
Region IT, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Italian, selectable
Region RU, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Russian, selectable
F 10
G
System interface (Port B): Refer to page 5/114

No system interface
0
11
No interface at rear side 0
DIGSI 4 / modem, electrical RS232 1 12
DIGSI 4 / modem / RTD-box5), electrical RS485 2
DIGSI 4 / modem / RTD-box5)6), optical 820 nm wavelength, ST connector 3
Measuring / fault recording

Fault recording 1
13
Slave pointer,mean values, min/max values, fault recording 3

5) Temperature monitoring box 7XV5662-
refer to “Accessories”.
AD10, 14
means of jumpers.
required.
7) Starting from device version .../GG and FW-Version V4.82 15
1 7SJ62 multifunction protection relay

7SJ62 - -

50/51 Overcurrent protection I>, I>>, I>>>, Ip
2 50N/51N
50N/51N
Insensitive ground-fault protection via
3 51 V
Voltage-dependent inverse-time overcurrent protection
49 Overload protection (with 2 time constants)
4 37
47
59N/64
Phase sequence
Displacement voltage
74TC Trip circuit supervision
5 86
Inrush blocking
Lockout
V, P, f 27/59 Under-/overvoltage
81O/U Under-/overfrequency
6 27/Q Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection 3)
27/47/59(N) Flexible protection (index quantities derived from
32/55/81R current and voltages): Voltage, power, p.f.,
rate-of-frequency-change protection F E
IEF V, P, f 27/59 Under-/overvoltage
7 81O/U
27/Q
Under-/overfrequency
Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection 3)
rate-of-frequency-change protection
8 Dir 67/67N
Direction determination for overcurrent,
P E
phases and ground F C

Dir V, P, f 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
9 27/59
81O/U
Under-/overvoltage
27/Q Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection 3)
10 Dir IEF 67/67N

F G
phases and ground

Intermittent ground fault P C
Dir V,P,f IEF 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
11 27/59
Intermittent ground fault protection
Under-/overvoltage
81U/O Under-/overfrequency
27/47/59(N) Flexible protection functions (quantities derived from
12 current & voltages):
32/55/81R Voltage-/power-/p.f.-/rate of freq. change-protection
Intermittent ground-fault P G
Sens.ground-f.det. 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent,

13 Dir REF
67Ns
phases and ground
Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
67Ns Directional intermittent ground fault protection 3)
87N High-impedance restricted ground fault F D 2)
14 Continued on
next page
Basic version included 1) 50N/51N only with insensitive ground-current transformer when
V, P, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection position 7 = 1, 5, 7.
15 Dir
IEF
= Directional overcurrent protection
= Intermittent ground fault
3) available beginning with FW / Parameterset-version V4.90



7SJ62 - -
1
50N/51N
50N/51N
2
51 V
3
37
47
Phase sequence 4
59N/64 Displacement voltage
74TC Trip circuit supervision, 4 setting groups, cold-load pickup
86
Inrush blocking
Lockout 5
Sens.ground-f.det. V, P, f 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
V,P,f REF 67Ns Directional intermittent ground fault protection 3)
27/59
81O/U
Under-/overvoltage
6
rate-of-frequency-change protection F F 2) 7
Sens.ground-f.det. 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
Dir IEF REF 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
Intermittent ground faults P D 2)
8
Sens.ground-f.det. 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
REF 67Ns Directional intermittent ground fault protection 3)
Sens.ground-f.det. Motor 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection

F B 2)
9
V,P,f REF 67Ns Directional intermittent ground fault protection 3)
66/86
51M
Restart inhibit
Load jam protection, motor statistics
10
27/59 Under-/overvoltage
11
rate-of-frequency-change protection H F 2)
Sens.ground-f.det. Motor 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
Dir V,P,f REF 67Ns
67Ns
Directional intermittent ground fault protection 3) 12
51M
27/59
Under-/overvoltage 13
rate-of-frequency-change protection H H 2)
14
Basic version included 1) 50N/51N only with insensitive ground-current transformer when
V, P, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection position 7 = 1, 5, 7.
Dir
IEF
3) available beginning with FW / Parameterset-version V4.90
Continued on
next page 15

7SJ62 - -

2 50N/51N
50N/51N
3 51 V
protection, stages I2>, I>>>>, IE>>>>
4 37
47
Phase sequence
5 4 setting groups, cold-load pickup
Inrush blocking
86 Lockout
Sens.ground-f.det. Motor IEF 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
Dir IEF V,P,f REF 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
6 67Ns
87N
Directional intermittent ground fault protection 4)
7 66/86
51M
27/59
Restart inhibit
Undervoltage/overvoltage
81O/U Underfrequency/overfrequency
8 27/47/59(N) Flexible protection (index quantities derived from

rate-of-frequency-change protection R H 2)
Motor V, P, f 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent,
Dir phases and ground
9 48/14
66/86
Starting time supervision, locked rotor
Restart inhibit
51M Load jam protection, motor statistics
10 27/Q Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection 3)
rate-of-frequency-change protection H G
11 Motor 48/14
66/86
Restart inhibit
51M Load jam protection, motor statistics H A
ARC, fault locator, synchro-check Without
0
79 With auto-reclosure
12 21FL
79, 21FL
With fault locator
With auto-reclosure, with fault locator
1
2
3
25 With synchro-check3)
4
25, 79,21FL With synchro-check3), auto-reclosure, fault locator
7
13
Basic version included 3) Synchro-check (no asynchronous
V, P, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection switching), one function group; available
14 Dir
IEF
only with devices 7SJ623, 7SJ624, 7SJ625 and 7SJ626.
4) with FW V4.90
1) 50N/51N only with insensitive ground-current

transformer when position 7 = 1, 5, 7.
15 2) Sensitive ground-current transformer

only when position 7 = 2, 6.



7SJ62 - - -
1
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, RS232 1
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, RS485 2 2
MODBUS, RS485
9
9
L 0 B
L 0 D 3
MODBUS, 820 nm wavelength, ST connector 2) 9 L 0 E
DNP 3.0, RS485 9 L 0 G
DNP 3.0, 820 nm wavelength, ST connector 2)
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, redundant, RS485, RJ45 connector 2)
9
9
L 0 H
L 0 P
4
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector (EN 100)2) 9 L 0 S
DNP3 TCP + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, electrical, double, RJ45 connector 3)
DNP3 TCP + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, optical, double, LC connector 3)
9
9
L 2 R
L 2 S
5
PROFINET + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, electrical, double, RJ45 connector 3) 9 L 3 R
PROFINET + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, optical, double, LC connector 3) 9 L 3 S
6
1) Not with position 9 = “B”; if 9 = “B”, please order 7SJ6 unit with RS485 port and separate fiber-optic converters.
The converter requires a AC 24 V power supply (e.g. power supply 7XV5810-0BA00). 7
2) Not available with position 9 = “B”.
3) available with V4.9
8
Sample order
Position Order No. + Order code

9
7SJ622 5 - 5 E C 9 1 - 3 F A 1 + L 0 G
6 I/O’s: 11 BI/6 BO, 1 live status contact 2 10

8 Power supply: DC 110 to 250 V, AC 115 V to AC 230 V 5
10 Region: US, English language (US); 60 Hz, ANSI
E
C
11
12 Communication: DIGSI 4, electric RS232 1
13 Measuring/fault recording: Extended measuring and fault records
14/15 Protection function package: Basic version plus directional TOC
3
F C
12
13
14
15

AC/DC 24 to 60 V 7XV5662-2AD10
AC/DC 90 to 240 V 7XV5662-5AD10
2 Varistor / Voltage Arrester

125 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S 256 C53207-A401-D76-1
240 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S 1088 C53207-A401-D77-1
3 Connecting cable

SIPROTEC 4 unit
- length 5 m / 16.4 ft 7XV5103-7AA05
- length 25 m / 82 ft 7XV5103-7AA25
- length 50 m / 164 ft 7XV5103-7AA50
5 Manual for 7SJ62
English C53000-G1140-C207-x 1)
German C53000-G1100-C207-6
8
1) x = please inquire for latest edition (exact Order No.).
9 Accessories Description Order No. Size of

package
Supplier

LSP2289-afp.eps
10 Voltage/current terminal 18-pole/12-pole

Voltage/current terminal 12-pole/8-pole
C73334-A1-C31-1
C73334-A1-C32-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens
Connector 2-pin C73334-A1-C35-1 1 Siemens
Mounting rail
11 Crimp connector CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000

taped on reel
1)
LSP2090-afp.eps
LSP2091-afp.eps
12 Crimp connector: Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163083-7 4000

taped on reel
1)
Crimping tool for Type III+ 0-539635-1 1 1)

2-pin connector 3-pin connector
13 Crimping tool for CI2

and matching female
0-734372-1
1-734387-1
1
1
1)
1)
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps
Short-circuit links
1 Siemens
14 for current terminals
for other terminals
C73334-A1-C33-1
C73334-A1-C34-1 1 Siemens
Short-circuit links Short-circuit links

Mounting rail for 19" rack C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens
for current terminals for current terminals
15 1) Your local Siemens representative can inform you on local suppliers.

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
*) For pinout of communication ports see part 14 of this catalog.

14
Fig. 5/46 7SJ621 connection diagram 15

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13


Connection diagram
1
7SJ623, E
7SJ625 7SJ625x-x D xxx-xxxx
E
9
LSA4734a-en.eps
10
11
12
13

14
Fig. 5/48 7SJ623, 7SJ625 connection diagram 15

Connection diagram
1 7SJ626x-x B xxx-xxxx
7SJ624, E
7SJ626 7SJ626x-x D xxx-xxxx
E
9
LSA4735a-en.eps
10
11
12
13

15 Fig. 5/49 7SJ624, 7SJ626 connection diagram

Function overview
Protection functions 1
(definite-time/inverse-time/user-def.)
(definite-time/inverse-time/user-def.) 2
• Sensitive dir./non-dir. ground-fault detection
• Displacement voltage
• Intermittent ground-fault protection 3
LSP2316-afpen.tif
4
• Under-/overvoltage protection
• Under-/overfrequency protection 5
Fig. 5/50 SIPROTEC 7SJ63 multifunction protection relay
Description
• Auto-reclosure
6
• Fault locator
The SIPROTEC 7SJ63 can be used as a protective control and
• Lockout
monitoring relay for distribution feeders and transmission
lines of any voltage in networks that are earthed (grounded), Control functions/programmable logic
7
low-resistance grounded, ungrounded, or of a compensated
• Flexible number of switching devices
neutral point structure. The relay is suited for networks that
• Position of switching elements is shown on the graphic display
are radial or looped, and for lines with single or multi-terminal
feeds. Regarding the time-overcurrent/directional overcurrent • Local/remote switching via key-operated switch 8
protection the characteristics can be either definite time, inverse • Control via keyboard, binary inputs, DIGSI 4 or SCADA system
time or user-defined.
• Extended user-defined logic with CFC (e.g. interlocking)
The SIPROTEC 7SJ63 is equipped with motor protection appli-
cable for asynchronous machines of all sizes. Motor protection Monitoring functions
9
comprises undercurrent monitoring, starting time supervision, • Operational measured values V, I, f,...
restart inhibit, locked rotor. • Energy metering values Wp, Wq
The relay provides easy-to-use local control and automation
functions. The number of controllable switchgear depends only
• Circuit-breaker wear monitoring 10
• Slave pointer
on the number of available inputs and outputs. The integrated
programmable logic (CFC) allows the user to implement their • Trip circuit supervision
own functions, e.g. for the automation of switchgear (interlock-
ing). The user is able to generate user-defined messages as well.
• 8 oscillographic fault records
11
Communication interfaces
– IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850
12
– PROFIBUS DP
– DNP 3 / MODBUS RTU
13
• Time synchronization via IRIG-B/DCF77
14
15
Application
7 Fig. 5/51 Function diagram
Application Line protection
8 The SIPROTEC 7SJ63 unit is a numerical protection relay that also

The 7SJ63 units can be used for line protection of high and
medium-voltage networks with earthed (grounded), low-
performs control and monitoring functions and therefore sup- resistance grounded, isolated or compensated neutral point.
ports the user in cost-effective power system management, and
9 ensures reliable supply of electric power to the customers. Local
operation has been designed according to ergonomic criteria. A
Motor protection
When protecting motors, the 7SJ63 relays are suitable for
large, easy-to-read graphic display was a major design aim.
asynchronous machines of all sizes.
Control
10 The integrated control function permits control of disconnect
Transformer protection
The 7SJ63 units perform all functions of backup protection
devices (electrically operated/motorized switches) or circuit-
supplementary to transformer differential protection. The inrush
breakers via the integrated operator panel, binary inputs, DIGSI 4
or the control and protection system (e.g. SICAM). The present
11 status (or position) of the primary equipment can be displayed. The high-impedance restricted ground-fault protection detects
7SJ63 supports substations with single and duplicate busbars. short-circuits and insulation faults on the transformer.
The number of elements that can be controlled (usually 1 to 5) is
only restricted by the number of inputs and outputs available. Backup protection
12 A full range of command processing functions is provided. The relays can be used universally for backup protection.
Programmable logic Metering values
Extensive measured values, limit values and metering values
permit improved systems management.
user can also generate user-defined messages.
14
15
Application
50, 50N I>, I>>

IE>, IE>>
Definite-time overcurrent protection (phase / neutral)
1
50, 51V, 51N Ip, IEp Inverse overcurrent protection (phase / neutral), phase function with voltage-dependent option
67, 67N Idir>, Idir>>, Ip dir Directional overcurrent protection (definite / inverse, phase / neutral),
67Ns/50Ns
IEdir>, IEdir>>, Ip dir
IEE>, IEE>>, IEEp
Directional comparison protection
Directional / non-directional sensitive ground-fault detection
2
VE, V0> Displacement voltage, zero-sequence voltage
59N/64
3

4
79 Auto-reclosure
47 V2>, phase seq. Unbalance-voltage protection and / or phase-sequence monitoring 5

49 ϑ> Thermal overload protection

6
37 I< Undercurrent monitoring 7

27, 59 V<, V> Undervoltage / overvoltage protection

8
21FL Fault locator
10
11
12
13
14
15
Construction
Construction
1 Connection techniques and housing

with many advantages
½ and -rack sizes
2 These are the available housing widths

of the 7SJ63 relays, referred to a 19"
module frame system. This means that
previous models can always be replaced.
LSP2174-afp.tif
3 The height is a uniform 244 mm for
LSP2166-afp.tif
flush-mounting housings and 266 mm
for surface-mounting housings for all
housing widths. All cables can be con-
4 nected with or without ring lugs. Plug-in

terminals are available as an option.
It is thus possible to employ prefabricated
cable harnesses. In the case of surface Fig. 5/52 Flush-mounting housing Fig. 5/53 Rear view of flush-mounting housing
with screw-type terminals with covered connection terminals
5 mounting on a panel, the connection
terminals are located above and below
andwirings
in the form of screw-type terminals. The

communication interfaces are located
in a sloped case at the top and bottom
6 of the housing. The housing can also
be supplied optionally with a detached
operator panel (refer to Fig. 5/54), or
without operator panel, in order to
7 allow optimum operation for all types of
applications.
LSP2196-afp.eps
9
10 Fig. 5/54 Housing with plug-in terminals and detached operator panel
11
12
LSP2219-afpen.eps
13
LSP2237-afp.tif
14
Fig. 5/55 Surface-mounting housing with Fig. 5/56 Communication interfaces in a
15 screw-type terminals sloped case in a surface-mounting
housing

Overcurrent protection 1
(ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51N)
selective measurement of the three phase
currents and the ground current (four 2
transformers). Two definite-time overcur-
rent protection elements (DMT) exist both
for the phases and for the ground. The
current threshold and the delay time can 3
be set within a wide range. In addition,
inverse-time overcurrent protection
Reset characteristics
4
For easier time coordination with electro-
Fig. 5/57 Definite-time overcurrent protection Fig. 5/58 Inverse-time overcurrent protection
mechanical relays, reset characteristics
according to ANSI C37.112 and
5
applied. Available inverse-time characteristics
When using the reset characteristic (disk Characteristics acc. to ANSI/IEEE IEC 60255-3
emulation), a reset process is initiated Inverse • • 6
after the fault current has disappeared.
Short inverse •
This reset process corresponds to the
reverse movement of the Ferraris disk of Long inverse • •
an electromechanical relay (thus: disk
emulation).
Moderately inverse • 7
User-definable characteristics Extremely inverse • •
Instead of the predefined time char-

acteristics according to ANSI, tripping
8
characteristics can be defined by the user for phase and ground
units separately. Up to 20 current / time value pairs may be
programmed. They are set as pairs of numbers or graphically in
DIGSI 4. 9
Inrush restraint
harmonic is detected during transformer energization, pickup of 10
non-directional and directional normal elements are blocked.
Cold load pickup / dynamic setting change

11
functions the initiation thresholds and tripping times can be
12
13
14
15
1 Directional phase and ground protection are separate functions.

They operate in parallel to the non-directional overcurrent
rately. Definite-time and inverse-time characteristic is offered.
2 By means of voltage memory, directionality can be determined
3 from the voltage memory. If no voltage exists in the memory,
4 is to be determined via zero-sequence system or negative-
sequence system quantities (selectable). Using negative-
impedances.
5 Directional comparison protection (cross-coupling)
sources with instantaneous tripping, i.e. without the disadvan-
6 tage of time coordination. The directional comparison protection
is suitable if the distances between the protection stations are
not significant and pilot wires are available for signal transmis-
sion. In addition to the directional comparison protection, the
7 directional coordinated overcurrent protection is used for com-
plete selective backup protection. If operated in a closed-circuit
connection, an interruption of the transmission line is detected.
8 (Sensitive) directional ground-fault detection

(ANSI 64, 67Ns, 67N)
9 sequence current I0 and zero-sequence voltage V0. For networks
with an isolated neutral, the reactive current component
is evaluated; for compensated networks, the active current
component or residual resistive current is evaluated. For special
network conditions, e.g. high-resistance grounded networks
10 with ohmic-capacitive ground-fault current or low-resistance
grounded networks with ohmic-inductive current, the tripping
characteristics can be rotated approximately ± 45 degrees. Fig. 5/60 Directional determination using cosine measurements for
compensated networks
11 Two modes of ground-fault direction detection can be imple-
It has the following functions: (Sensitive) ground-fault detection
(ANSI 50Ns, 51Ns / 50N, 51N)
• TRIP via the displacement voltage VE.
12 • Two instantaneous elements or one instantaneous plus one For high-resistance grounded networks, a sensitive input
transformer is connected to a phase-balance neutral current
transformer (also called core-balance CT).
directional. The function can also be operated in the insensitive mode as an
13 • The function can also be operated in the insensitive mode as additional short-circuit protection.
an additional short-circuit protection.
Intermittent (re-striking) faults occur due to insulation weak-
14 nesses in cables or as a result of water penetrating cable joints.


achieved by summating the duration of the individual pulses and
1
one systems period.
2
In line protection, the two-element phase-balance current/
3
switch group Dy 5). This provides backup protection for high-
resistance faults beyond the transformer. 4
Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)
If a faulted portion of the electrical circuit is not disconnected
delayed auto-reclosures (DAR) 5
initiated using the breaker failure protection which operates • Starting of the ARC depends on the trip command selection
the circuit-breaker, e.g. of an upstream (higher-level) protection (e.g. 46, 50, 51, 67)
relay. Breaker failure is detected if, after a trip command, current
6
High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection (ANSI 87N) blocked or operated non-delayed depending on the auto-
reclosure cycle
7
transformers. It can also be applied to motors, generators and elements can be activated depending on the ready AR
When the high-impedance measurement principle is applied,
8
all current transformers in the protected area are connected in For protecting cables and transformers, an overload protection
parallel and operated on one common resistor of relatively high with an integrated pre-warning element for temperature and
R whose voltage is measured (see Fig. 5/61). In the case of 7SJ6 current can be applied. The temperature is calculated using a
units, the voltage is measured by detecting the current through
the (external) resistor R at the sensitive current measurement
9
input IEE. The varistor V serves to limit the voltage in the event and the energy losses. The calculated temperature is constantly
of an internal fault. It cuts off the high momentary voltage adjusted accordingly. Thus, account is taken of the previous load
spikes occurring at transformer saturation. At the same time,
this results in smoothing of the voltage without any noteworthy
For thermal protection of motors (especially the stator) a further
10
time constant can be set so that the thermal ratios can be detected
If no faults have occurred and in the event of external faults, the correctly while the motor is rotating and when it is stopped. The
system is at equilibrium, and the voltage through the resistor is
approximately zero. In the event of internal faults, an imbalance
ambient temperature or the temperature of the coolant can be
detected serially via an external temperature monitoring box
11
occurs which leads to a voltage and a current flow through the (resistance-temperature detector box, also called RTD- box). The
resistor R. thermal replica of the overload function is automatically adapted
The current transformers must be of the same type and must

at least offer a separate core for the high-impedance restricted
to the ambient conditions. If there is no RTD-box it is assumed that
the ambient temperatures are constant. 12
ground-fault protection. They must in particular have the same Settable dropout delay times
errors.
If the devices are used in parallel with electromechanical relays
in networks with intermittent faults, the long dropout times of 13
the electromechanical devices (several hundred milliseconds)
Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79) can lead to problems in terms of time grading. Clean time
grading is only possible if the dropout time is approximately the
Multiple reclosures can be defined by the user and lockout will
same. This is why the parameter of dropout times can be defined
for certain functions such as time-overcurrent protection,
14
• 3-pole ARC for all types of faults
• Separate settings for phase and ground faults 15
Motor protection
Restart inhibit (ANSI 66/86)
1 If a motor is started up too many times in succes-
sion, the rotor can be subject to thermal overload,
especially the upper edges of the bars. The rotor
temperature is calculated from the stator current.
2 The reclosing lockout only permits start-up of the
motor if the rotor has sufficient thermal reserves for
a complete start-up (see Fig. 5/62).
3 Emergency start-up
This function disables the reclosing lockout via a
binary input by storing the state of the thermal
replica as long as the binary input is active. It is
also possible to reset the thermal replica to zero.
Up to two temperature monitoring boxes with a total
of 12 measuring sensors can be used for tempera-
5 ture monitoring and detection by the protection
relay. The thermal status of motors, generators and Fig. 5/62
transformers can be monitored with this device.
Additionally, the temperature of the bearings of rotating machines Voltage protection
6 are monitored for limit value violation. The temperatures are being
measured with the help of temperature detectors at various loca- Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59)
tions of the device to be protected. This data is transmitted to the The two-element overvoltage protection detects unwanted
protection relay via one or two temperature monitoring boxes (see network and machine overvoltage conditions. The function can
“Accessories”, page 5/153). operate either with phase-to-phase voltage (default) or with
the negative phase-sequence system voltage. Three-phase and
single-phase connections are possible.
unwanted start-ups that might occur in the event of excessive Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27)
8 load torque or excessive voltage drops within the motor, or if the

rotor is locked. Rotor temperature is calculated from measured
stator current. The tripping time is calculated according to the machines). Applications include the isolation of generators or
following equation: motors from the network to avoid undesired operating states
and a possible loss of stability. Proper operating conditions
9 for I > IMOTOR START
of electrical machines are best evaluated with the positive-
⎛ I ⎞2 sequence quantities. The protection function is active over a
t = ⎜ A ⎟ ⋅ TA wide frequency range (45 to 55, 55 to 65 Hz)1). Even when
⎝I ⎠
falling below this frequency range the function continues to
10 I
IMOTOR START
= Actual current flowing
= Pickup current to detect a motor start
work, however, with a greater tolerance band.
The function can operate either with the positive phase-
t = Tripping time sequence system voltage (default) or with the phase-to-phase
IA = Rated motor starting current voltages, and can be monitored with a current criterion. Three-
11 TA = Tripping time at rated motor starting current phase and single-phase connections are possible.

prolonged start-up and reduced voltage (and reduced start-up Frequency protection can be used for over-frequency and under-
12 current) will be evaluated correctly. The tripping time is inverse
(current dependent). are protected from unwanted speed deviations. Unwanted
A binary signal is set by a speed sensor to detect a blocked rotor.
can be removed at a specified frequency setting. Frequency pro-
An instantaneous tripping is effected.
tection can be used over a wide frequency range (45 to 55, 55 to
13 Phase-balance current protection (ANSI 46)
65 Hz)1). There are four elements (selectable as overfrequency
or underfrequency) and each element can be delayed separately.
The negative-sequence / phase-balance current protection detects Blocking of the frequency protection can be performed if using a
a phase failure or load unbalance due to network asymmetry and binary input or by using an undervoltage element.
14 protects the rotor from impermissible temperature rise. Fault locator (ANSI 21FL)
Undercurrent monitoring (ANSI 37) The fault locator specifies the distance to a fault location in
With this function, a sudden drop in current, which can occur kilometers or miles or the reactance of a second fault operation.
15 due to a reduced motor load, is detected. This may be due to


Circuit-breaker wear monitoring

1
benefit lies in reduced maintenance costs.
There is no mathematically exact method of calculating the
2
opens. This is why various methods of determining CB wear have
evolved which reflect the different operator philosophies. To do
• Σ I
3
• Σ Ix, with x = 1... 3
4
The CB manufacturers double-logarithmic switching cycle diagram
(see Fig. 5/63) and the breaking current at the time of contact
opening serve as the basis for this method. After CB opening, the
two-point method calculates the number of still possible switching 5
cycles. To this end, the two points P1 and P2 only have to be set on Fig. 5/63 CB switching cycle diagram
the device. These are specified in the CB's technical data.
6
exceeds the limit value during determination of the remaining – binary inputs
service life. – substation control and protection system
– DIGSI 4
Additional functions, which are not time critical, can be imple- Automation / user-defined logic
7
mented via the CFC using measured values. Typical functions With integrated logic, the user can set, via a graphic interface
include reverse power, voltage controlled overcurrent, phase (CFC), specific functions for the automation of switchgear or
angle detection, and zero-sequence voltage detection. substation. Functions are activated via function keys, binary
8
Commissioning
Commissioning could hardly be easier and is fully supported by Switching authority
DIGSI 4. The status of the binary inputs can be read individually Switching authority is determined according to parameters,
operation of switching elements (circuit-breakers, disconnect
communication or by key-operated switch (when available). 9
possible. The following sequence of switching authority is laid
information to the control center during maintenance, the bay Key-operated switch
10
controller communications can be disabled to prevent unneces- 7SJ63 units are fitted with key-operated switch function for
sary data from being transmitted. During commissioning, all local/remote changeover and changeover between interlocked
indications with test marking for test purposes can be connected
switching and test operation.
11
Command processing
Test operation All the functionality of command processing is offered. This includes
During commissioning, all indications can be passed to an the processing of single and double commands with or without
automatic control system for test purposes. feedback, sophisticated monitoring of the control hardware and
software, checking of the external process, control actions using
12
Control and automatic functions
functions such as runtime monitoring and automatic command
Control termination after output. Here are some typical applications:
support all control and monitoring functions that are required for
trip contacts
13
operating medium-voltage or high-voltage substations. • User-definable bay interlocks
The main application is reliable control of switching and other • Operating sequences combining several switching operations
processes.
such as control of circuit-breakers, disconnectors and ground- 14
ing switches
obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated to the
7SJ63 via binary inputs. Therefore it is possible to detect and
combination with existing information
indicate both the OPEN and CLOSED position or a fault or
intermediate circuit-breaker or auxiliary contact position.
15
Functions
Functions
1 Motor control
The SIPROTEC 7SJ63 with high perfor-
mance relays is well-suited for direct
2 activation of the circuit-breaker, discon-

nector and grounding switch operating
mechanisms in automated substations.
Interlocking of the individual switching
3 devices takes place with the aid of
programmable logic. Additional auxiliary
relays can be eliminated. This results in
less wiring and engineering effort.
4 Assignment of feedback to command

The positions of the circuit-breaker or
switching devices and transformer taps
5 are acquired by feedback. These indica-

tion inputs are logically assigned to the Fig. 5/64 Typical wiring for 7SJ632 motor direct control (simplified representation without fuses).
corresponding command outputs. The Binary output BO4 and BO5 are interlocked so that only one set of contacts are closed
unit can therefore distinguish whether at a time.
the indication change is a consequence
6 of switching operation or whether it is a
spontaneous change of state.
Chatter disable
7 Chatter disable feature evaluates whether,
in a configured period of time, the num-
ber of status changes of indication input
exceeds a specified figure. If exceeded,
8 the indication input is blocked for a
certain period, so that the event list will
not record excessive operations.

Binary indications can be filtered or
delayed.
Fig. 5/65 Example: Single busbar with circuit-breaker and motor-controlled three-position switch
Filtering serves to suppress brief changes
10 in potential at the indication input. The
indication is passed on only if the indica-
tion voltage is still present after a set
period of time. In the event of indication
11 delay, there is a wait for a preset time.
The information is passed on only if the
indication voltage is still present after this
time.
A further indication (or a command) can
be derived from an existing indication.
13 Group indications can also be formed.

The volume of information to the system
interface can thus be reduced and
restricted to the most important signals.
14
Fig. 5/66 Example: Circuit-breaker interlocking
15
Functions
Measured values
voltage along with the power factor, frequency, active and reac- 1
tive power. The following functions are available for measured
value processing:
• Voltages VL1, VL2, VL3, VL1L2, VL2L3, VL3L1 2
• Power factor (cos φ), (total and phase selective) 3
• Frequency
• Mean as well as minimum and maximum current and voltage
values 4
• Limit value monitoring 5
LSP2078-afp.eps
Limit values are monitored using programmable logic in the
CFC. Commands can be derived from this limit value indica-
tion.
6
Metered values
For internal metering, the unit can calculate an energy metered
7
value from the measured current and voltage values. If an
Fig. 5/67 NX PLUS panel (gas-insulated)
external meter with a metering pulse output is available, the
SIPROTEC 4 unit can obtain and process metering pulses via an
indication input. Measuring transducers
8
The metered values can be displayed and passed on to a control • Characteristic with knee
center as an accumulation with reset. A distinction is made For measuring transducers it sometimes makes sense to
between forward, reverse, active and reactive energy. extend a small range of the input value, e.g. for the frequency
that is only relevant in the range 45 to 55, 55 to 65 Hz. This
9
can be achieved by using a knee characteristic.
• Live-zero monitoring
4 – 20 mA circuits are monitored for open-circuit detection.
10
Switchgear cubicles for high/medium voltage
11
In general, no separate measuring instruments (e.g. for current,
voltage, frequency measuring transducer ...) or additional
12
13
14
15
Communication
Communication
1 In terms of communication, the units offer substantial flexibility

2 Therefore, also in the future it will be possible to optimally inte-
3 Serial front interface
4 protection operation program. Commissioning tools and fault
5 A number of communication modules suitable for various applica-
6 by the user.
The interface modules support the following applications:
7 synchronization interface. It can be used to feed timing

telegrams in IRIG-B or DCF77 format into the units via time
8 through this interface. Radial or ring type station bus topolo-
9 operated by DIGSI.
The service interface was conceived for remote access to a
number of protection units via DIGSI. On all units, it can be Fig. 5/69 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and
10 an electrical RS232/RS485 or an optical interface. For special

applications, a maximum of two temperature monitoring
IEC 61850, fiber-optic ring
boxes (RTD-box) can be connected to this interface as an

PROFIBUS DP protocol
alternative.
11 System interface protocols (retrofittable)
PROFIBUS DP is the most widespread protocol in industrial auto-
mation. Via PROFIBUS DP, SIPROTEC units make their information
IEC 61850 protocol commands from a central SIMATIC. Measured values can also be
transferred.
12 The Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol is the worldwide standard
MODBUS RTU protocol
tions. Siemens was the first manufacturer to support this standard.
By means of this protocol, information can also be exchanged This uncomplicated, serial protocol is mainly used in industry and
directly between bay units so as to set up simple masterless by power supply corporations, and is supported by a number of
13 systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to the units via the unit manufacturers. SIPROTEC units function as MODBUS slaves,
Ethernet bus is also possible with DIGSI. making their information available to a master or receiving infor-
mation from it. A time-stamped event list is available.
14 The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is an international standard for the
15 1) For units in panel surface-mounting housings

Communication
DNP 3.0 protocol

Power supply corporations use the serial
DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol) 1
for the station and network control levels.
SIPROTEC units function as DNP slaves, sup-
plying their information to a master system
or receiving information from it. 2
System solutions for protection and
station control
Together with the SICAM power automa- 3
tion system, SIPROTEC 4 can be used with
PROFIBUS DP. Over the low-cost electrical
RS485 bus, or interference-free via the
optical double ring, the units exchange
information with the control system.
4
Units featuring IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces
can be connected to SICAM in parallel via
the RS485 bus or radially by fiber-optic
link. Through this interface, the system is
5
open for the connection of units of other
manufacturers (see Fig. 5/68).
Because of the standardized interfaces,
Fig. 5/70 System solution/communication
6
SIPROTEC units can also be integrated
into systems of other manufacturers or
in SIMATIC. Electrical RS485 or optical
interfaces are available. The optimum
physical data transfer medium can be
7
chosen thanks to opto-electrical converters.
LSP3.01-0021.tif
Thus, the RS485 bus allows low-cost wiring
in the cubicles and an interference-free
optical connection to the master can be
8
established.
For IEC 61850, an interoperable system
solution is offered with SICAM PAS. Via
the 100 Mbits/s Ethernet bus, the units are
9
linked with PAS electrically or optically to
the station PC. The interface is standard-
ized, thus also enabling direct connection
of units of other manufacturers to the 10
Ethernet bus. With IEC 61850, however, the
Fig. 5/71 Optical Ethernet communication module for IEC 61850
units can also be used in other manufactur-
with integrated Ethernet-switch
ers’ systems (see Fig. 5/69).
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
Typical connections
1 Connection of current
Standard connection
2 For grounded networks, the ground current
is obtained from the phase currents by the
residual current circuit.
5 Fig. 5/72 Residual current circuit without directional element
10 Fig. 5/73 Sensitive ground-current detection without directional element
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 5/74 Residual current circuit with directional element

Typical connections

The figure shows the connection of
two phase-to-ground voltages and the 1
connection maintains maximum precision
2
Figure 5/130 shows sensitive directional
ground-fault detection. 3
Fig. 5/75 Sensitive directional ground-fault detection with directional element for phases
5
9
Fig. 5/76 Sensitive directional ground-fault detection
10
or compensated networks only
11
Directional phase short-circuit protection
can be achieved by using only two 12
13
14
15
1 Type of network Function Current connection Voltage connection

2 (Low-resistance) grounded networks Sensitive ground-fault protection Phase-balance neutral current

–
non-directional current transformers possible
3 (Low-resistance) grounded networks Overcurrent protection Residual circuit, with 3 phase-current Phase-to-ground connection or
4 phases directional

Residual circuit, with 3 phase-current

phase-to-phase connection
Phase-to-ground connection required

5 Isolated networks Sensitive ground-fault

protection
6 Compensated networks Sensitive ground-fault protection Phase-balance neutral current

7 Typical applications
8 Undervoltage releases
9 Example:
andmanual electric tripping is no longer
possible.
10 Automatic tripping takes place when
limit. In Fig. 5/78, tripping occurs due to
11 opening of the live status contact upon
circuiting the trip coil in event of a network
fault Fig. 5/78 Undervoltage release with make contact (50, 51)
12
13
14
15
In Fig. 5/79 tripping is by failure of

auxiliary voltage and by interruption of
tripping circuit in the event of network
failure.Upon failure of the protection unit,
1
the tripping circuit is also interrupted,
since contact held by internal logic drops
back into open position.
2
3
interrupted.
Lockout (ANSI 86) 4

lockout state is also stored in the event of
supply voltage failure. Reclosure can only Fig. 5/79 Undervoltage release with locking contact (trip signal 50 is inverted) 5
Fig. 5/80 Trip circuit supervision with 2 binary inputs 10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 5/81 Trip circuit supervision with 1 binary input
15
Technical data
General unit data Binary imputs / command inputs
1 Measuring circuits
Type
Number (marshallable)
7SJ631 7SJ632 7SJ633 7SJ635 7SJ636
11 24 20 37 33
Current transformer Voltage range DC 24 – 250 V
Rated current Inom 1 or 5 A (settable) Pickup threshold
2 Option: sensitive ground-fault CT

Power consumption
IEE < 1.6 A
modifiable by plug-in
jumpers
Pickup threshold DC DC 19 V DC 88 V
at Inom = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA per phase
at Inom = 5 A Approx. 0.3 VA per phase For rated control voltage
for sensitive ground-fault CT at 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA DC 24/48/60/110/ DC 110/125/220/250 V
3 Overload capability
Thermal (effective) 500 A for 1 s Power consumption
DC 125 V
0.9 mA (independent of operating voltage)
150 A for 10 s energized for BI 1…6 / 8…19 / 25…36;
20 A continuous 1.8 mA for BI 7 / 20…24 / 37
4 Dynamic (impulse current)

250 x Inom (half cycle) Binary outputs / command outputs
Type 7SJ631 7SJ632 7SJ633 7SJ635 7SJ636
Thermal (effective) 300 A for 1 s Command/indication 8 11 11 14 14
100 A for 10 s relay

15 A continuous
750 A (half cycle)
indication relay
Voltage transformer Live status contact 1 NO / NC (jumper) / form A / B
Rated voltage Vnom 100 V to 225 V Switching capacity
6 Power consumption at Vnom = 100 V

< 0.3 VA per phase
Make 1000 W / VA
Break 30 W / VA / 40 W resistive /
25 W at L/R ≤ 50 ms
(phase-neutral voltage)
Thermal (effective) 230 V continuous Switching voltage ≤ DC 250 V
Permissible current 5 A continuous,
7 Measuring transducer inputs
Type 7SJ633 7SJ636
30 A for 0.5 s making current,
Number 2 2 Power relay (for motor control)
Input current DC 0 – 20 mA
Type 7SJ631 7SJ632 7SJ635
8 Input resistance
Power consumption
10 Ω
5.8 mW at 24 mA
7SJ633
7SJ636
Auxiliary voltage (via integrated converter) Number 0 2(4) 4 (8)
Rated auxiliary voltage Vaux DC 24/48 V 60/125 V 110/250 V Number of contacts/relay 2 NO / form A
9 Permissible tolerance DC 19 – 58 V 48 – 150 V 88 – 300 V Switching capacity

Make 1000 W / VA at 48 V … 250 V / 500 W at 24 V
Ripple voltage, ≤ 12 % of rated auxiliary voltage
peak-to-peak Break 1000 W / VA at 48 V … 250 V / 500 W at 24 V
Power consumption 7SJ631 7SJ632 7SJ635 Switching voltage ≤ DC 250 V
10 Quiescent Approx. 4 W
7SJ633
5.5 W
7SJ636
7W
30 A for 0.5 s
Energized Approx. 10 W 16 W 20 W
Backup time during ≥ 50 ms at V > DC 110 V
11 loss/short-circuit of
auxiliary direct voltage
≥ 20 ms at V > DC 24 V
Rated auxiliary voltage Vaux AC 115 V 230 V

Permissible tolerance AC 92 – 132 V 184 – 265 V
12 Power consumption
7SJ631 7SJ632 7SJ635
7SJ633 7SJ636
Quiescent Approx. 3 W 5W 7W
Energized Approx. 12 W 18 W 23 W
13 Backup time during

loss/short-circuit of
≥ 200 ms
auxiliary alternating voltage
14
15
Technical data
Electrical tests Fast transient surge withstand 4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges per s
capability ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 both polarities; duration 2 s, Ri = 80 Ω
Specification
Standards IEC 60255
Radiated electromagnetic
interference
35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz;
amplitude and pulse-modulated
1
ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1, C37.90.2,
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2
UL508
Damped wave 2.5 kV (peak value, polarity
Insulation tests
Standards IEC 60255-5; ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0
IEC 60694 / IEC 61000-4-12 alternating)
100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 and 50 MHz, 2
Voltage test (100 % test) 2.5 kV (r.m.s. value), 50/60 Hz Ri = 200 Ω
all circuits except for auxiliary EMC tests for interference emission; type tests
voltage and RS485/RS232 and
Standard EN 50081-* (generic specification)
Conducted interferences 150 kHz to 30 MHz 3
and time synchronization
Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak value); 1.2/50 µs; 0.5 J
4
class III
Standards IEC 60255-6; IEC 60255-22
(product standard)
Mechanical stress tests
Vibration, shock stress and seismic vibration
5
EN 50082-2 (generic specification) During operation
DIN 57435 Part 303
High-frequency test
400 surges per s; test duration 2 s Vibration
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2
Sinusoidal
10 to 60 Hz; ± 0.075 mm amplitude;
6
and VDE 0435 Part 303, class III
Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge; frequency sweep 1 octave/min
10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
Shock
Semi-sinusoidal 7
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms;
field, non-modulated IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks in both directions of 3 axes
IEC 60255-22-3 (Report) class III
10 V/m, 80 to 1000 MHz;
AM 80 %; 1 kHz
IEC 60255-21-3, class 1
IEC 60068-3-3
(horizontal axis)
8
IEC 61000-4-3; class III 1 to 8 Hz: ± 1.5 mm amplitude
Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m, 900 MHz; repetition (vertical axis)
field, pulse-modulated rate 200 Hz, on duration 50 % 8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
IEC 61000-4-3/ENV 50204; class III
(horizontal axis)
9
IEC 60255-22-4 and IEC 61000-4- burst length = 15 ms; (vertical axis)
4, class IV repetition rate 300 ms; both polarities; Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
Ri = 50 Ω; test duration 1 min 1 cycle in 3 perpendicular axes
High-energy surge voltages During transportation 10
(Surge) Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
Auxiliary voltage From circuit to circuit: 2 kV; 12 Ω; 9 µF
Binary inputs/outputs
From circuit to circuit: 2 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF
IEC 60068-2-6 8 to 150 Hz; 2 g acceleration,
11
across contacts: 1 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF 20 cycles in 3 perpendicular axes
Line-conducted HF, 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; Shock Semi-sinusoidal
amplitude-modulated AM 80 %; 1 kHz IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms
Power frequency magnetic field 30 A/m; 50 Hz, continuous
IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks in both directions of 3 axes 12
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV 300 A/m; 50 Hz, 3 s IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms
IEC 60255-6 0.5 mT, 50 Hz IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks in both directions
capability
2.5 to 3 kV (peak value), 1 to 1.5 MHz
damped wave; 50 surges per s;
of 3 axes
13
14
15
Technical data
1 Temperatures
Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 -25 °C to +85 °C /-13 °F to +185 °F
and -2, test Bd, for 16 h
Temporarily permissible operating -20 °C to +70 °C /-4 °F to +158 °F
2 Recommended permanent
-5 °C to +55 °C /+25 °F to +131 °F
IEC 60255-6
impaired above +55 °C /+131 °F)
3 – Limiting temperature during
permanent storage
-25 °C to +55 °C /-13 °F to +131 °F
– Limiting temperature during -25 °C to +70 °C /-13 °F to +158 °F

transport
4 Humidity
It is recommended to arrange the humidity; on 56 days a year up to
units in such a way that they are 95 % relative humidity;
not exposed to direct sunlight or condensation not permissible!
5 pronounced temperature changes
Unit design
Housing 7XP20
6 Dimensions See dimension drawings, part 14 of
this catalog
Weight in kg Housing width 1/2 Housing width 1/1
Surface-mounting housing 7.5 15
7 Flush-mounting housing
Housing for detached operator
panel
6.5
8.0
13
15
Detached operator panel 2.5 2.5

8 acc. to EN 60529
Flush-mounting housing Front: IP 51, rear: IP 20;
Operator safety IP 2x with cover
9 Futher information can be found in the current manual at:

10
11
12
13
14
15

Housing, binary inputs (BI) and outputs (BO),measuring transducer

7SJ63 - -
1
Housing ½19”, 11 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status contact 1
Housing ½19”, 24 BI, 11 BO, 2 power relays (4 contacts), 1 live status contact 2
Housing ½19”, 20 BI, 11 BO, 2 measuring transducer inputs, 2 power relays (4 contacts), 1 live status contact
Housing 19”, 37 BI, 14 BO, 4 power relays (8 contacts), 1 live status contact
3
See next 2
5 page
Housing 19”, 33 BI, 14 BO, 2 measuring transducer inputs, 4 power relays (8 contacts), 1 live status contact 6
Measuring inputs (3 x V , 4 x I)
Iph = 1 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A)
3
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = 5 A1) (min. = 0.25 A)
2
4
Position 15 only with B, D, F, H 6
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A)
5
DC 24 to 48 V, threshold binary input DC 19 V 3)
DC 60 to 125 V 2), threshold binary input DC 19 V 3)
2
4 6
Unit version
For panel surface mounting, plug-in terminals, detached operator panel
For panel surface mounting, two-tier terminal top/bottom
A 7
B
For panel surface mounting, screw-type terminals, detached operator panel C
For panel flush mounting, plug-in terminal (2/3 pin connector) D
For panel flush mounting , screw-type terminals (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs) E 8
For panel flush mounting, screw-type terminal (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs)
without operator panel, panel mounting in low-voltage housing F
Surface-mounting housing, plug-in terminals, without operator panel, panel mounting
in low-voltage housing G 9
Region DE, 50Hz, IEC, language: German, selectable A
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: English (GB), selectable
Region US, 60Hz, ANSI, language: English (US), selectable
B
C
10
Region FR, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: French, selectable D
System interface (Port B): Refer to page 5/152 11


No interface at rear side 0
12
DIGSI 4/modem, electrical RS232 1
DIGSI 4/modem/RTD-box5), electrical RS485 2
DIGSI 4/modem/RTD-box5)6), optical 820 nm wavelength, ST connector 3 13
1) Rated current can be selected by means of jumpers. 5) Temperature monitoring box 7XV5662- AD10, 14
2) Transition between the two auxiliary voltage ranges can be selected refer to “Accessories”.
means of jumpers.
required.
15

7SJ63 - -

50/51 Overcurrent protection I>, I>>, Ip, reverse interlocking
2 50N/51N
50N/51N
Ground-fault protection IE>, IE>>, IEp
3 37
47 Phase sequence
4 74TC Trip circuit supervision

Inrush blocking
86 Lockout F A
V, f 27/59 Under-/overvoltage
5 IEF V, f
81O/U
27/59
Under-/overvoltage
F E
Intermittent ground fault P E

6 Dir 67/67N
47
Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
Phase sequence F C
Dir V, f 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
81O/U Under-/overfrequency F G
7 Dir IEF 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
Directional Dir 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
ground-fault 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
8 detection

F D 2)
Directional Dir IEF 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
ground-fault 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
detection 87N High-impedance restricted ground fault
9
Directional 67Ns
P D 2)
ground-fault 87N High-impedance restricted ground fault

detection

10 Directional Motor V, f 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
F B 2)
ground-fault 87N High-impedance restricted ground fault detection

11 27/59
81O/U
Under-/overvoltage
Under-/overfrequency H F 2)
12 Continued on
next page
13
14
Basic version included 1) Only with insensitive ground-current
V, f = Voltage, frequency protection transformer when position 7 = 1, 5, 7.
2) For isolated / compensated networks
15 Dir
IEF
only with sensitive ground-current
transformer when position 7 = 2, 6.



7SJ63 - -
1
50/51 Overcurrent protection I>, I>>, Ip, reverse interlocking
50N/51N
50N/51N
Ground-fault protection IE>, IE>>, IEp
Ground-fault protection via insensitive
2
37
3
47 Phase sequence
4 setting groups, cold-load pickup 4
Inrush blocking
86 Lockout
Directional Motor V, f 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
ground-fault Dir
detection
67Ns
87N
5
81O/U Under-/overfrequency H H 2) 6
Directional Motor IEF V, f 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
ground-fault Dir 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
detection 87N High-impedance restricted ground fault

48/14
7
27/59 Undervoltage/overvoltage
81O/U Underfrequency/overfrequency R H 2)
Motor
Dir
V, f 67/67N
48/14
Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
8
Motor
81O/U
48/14

H G
9
66/86 Restart inhibit H A
ARC, fault locator Without 0
79
21FL
With auto-reclosure
With fault locator
1
2
10
79, 21FL With auto-reclosure, with fault locator 3
11
12
13
14
Basic version included 1) Only with insensitive ground-current transformer when
V, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection position 7 = 1, 5, 7.
Dir = Directional overcurrent protection 2) For isolated / compensated networks only with sensitive

ground-current transformer when position 7 = 2, 6.
15

7SJ63 - - -
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, RS232 1
2 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, RS485 2
3 MODBUS, RS485
9
9
L 0 B
L 0 D
DNP 3.0, RS485 9 L 0 G
4 DNP 3.0, 820 nm wavelength, ST connector 2)

IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connector (EN 100)
9
9
L 0 H
L 0 R
5 1) Not with position 9 = “B”; if 9 = “B”, please order 7SJ6 unit with RS485 port and separate fiber-optic converters.
The converter requires a AC 24 V power supply (e.g. power supply 7XV5810-0BA00).
6 2) Not available with position 9 = “B”.
7
Sample order
8 Position Order No. + Order code
7SJ632 5 - 5 E C 9 1 - 3 F C 1 + L 0 G
9 6 I/O’s: 24 BI/11 BO, 1 live status contact 2

8 Power supply: DC 110 to 250 V, AC 115 V to AC 230 V 5
10 10 Region: US, English language (US); 60 Hz, ANSI
E
C
12 Communication: DIGSI 4, electric RS232 1
11 13 Measuring/fault recording: Extended measuring and fault records

14/15 Protection function package: Basic version plus directional TOC
3
F C
12
13
14
15
Temperature monitoring box

AC/DC 24 to 60 V 7XV5662-2AD10
1
AC/DC 90 to 240 V 7XV5662-5AD10
Varistor/VoltageArrester
Voltage arrester for high-impedance REF protection 2
125 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S 256 C53207-A401-D76-1
240 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S 1088 C53207-A401-D77-1
Connecting cable
3
Cable between temperature monitoring box and
SIPROTEC 4 unit 4
- length 5 m / 16.4 ft 7XV5103-7AA05
- length 25 m / 82 ft 7XV5103-7AA25
- length 50 m / 164 ft 7XV5103-7AA50
Manual for 7SJ63

5
English/German C53000-G1140-C147-x 1)
8
10
11
12
13
14
15

package
1 Terminal safety cover
LSP2289-afp.eps
2 Mounting rail
Connector 2-pin
Connector 3-pin
C73334-A1-C35-1
C73334-A1-C36-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens
taped on reel
3 LSP2091-afp.eps
LSP2090-afp.eps
taped on reel
4 2-pin connector 3-pin connector
Crimping tool for Type III+ 0-539635-1 1 1)
1)
and matching female 0-539668-2 1
Crimping tool for CI2 0-734372-1 1 1)
5
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps
Short-circuit links
for other terminals C73334-A1-C34-1 1 Siemens
6 Short-circuit links
Short-circuit links
Mounting rail for 19" rack C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens
10
11
12
13
14
15
Connection diagram
10
11
12
13

14

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
*) For pinout of communication ports see part 14 1) Power relays are intended to directly control motorized switches. The power relays are
14 of this catalog.
For the allocation of the terminals of the panel
interlocked so only one relay of each pair can close at a time, in order to avoid shorting
out the power supply. The power relay pairs are BO4/BO5, BO6/BO7. If used for protection
surface-mounting version refer to the manual purposes only one binary output of a pair can be used.
(http://www.siemens.com/siprotec).

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
of this catalog.
14

Connection diagram
10
11
12 *) For pinout of communication ports see

part 14 of this catalog.
For the allocation of the terminals of
the panel surface-mounting version
refer to the manual
13 (http://www.siemens.com/siprotec).
1) Power relays are intended to directly
control motorized switches. The power
relays are interlocked so only one relay
of each pair can close at a time, in order
14 to avoid shorting out the power supply.
The power relay pairs are BO4/BO5,
BO6/BO7, BO16/BO17 and BO18/BO19.
If used for protection purposes only one
binary output of a pair can be used.
15
Fig. 5/85 7SJ635 connection diagram

Connection diagram
10
11
*) For pinout of communication ports see
part 14 of this catalog. 12
refer to the manual
13
to avoid shorting out the power supply.
14
BO6/BO7, BO16/BO17 and BO18/BO19.
15

10
11
12
13
14
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ64 multifunction protection relay with synchronization
Function overview
• Sensitive dir./non-dir. ground-fault detection
• Displacement voltage
2
• High-impedance restricted ground fault 3
LSP2316-afpen.tif
4
• Under-/overvoltage protection
• Rate-of-frequency-change protection 5
Fig. 5/87 SIPROTEC 7SJ64 multifunction protection relay • Power protection (e.g. reverse, factor)
• Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection
Description
• Breaker failure protection 6
The SIPROTEC 7SJ64 can be used as a protective control and
monitoring relay for distribution feeders and transmission
lines of any voltage in networks that are earthed (grounded),
• Synchronization
• Auto-reclosure
7
low-resistance grounded, ungrounded, or of a compensated • Fault locator
neutral point structure. The relay is suited for networks that • Lockout
are radial or looped, and for lines with single or multi-terminal
feeds. The SIPROTEC 7SJ64 is equipped with a synchronization Control functions/programmable logic
8
function which provides the operation modes ‘synchronization
• Flexible number of switching devices
check’ (classical) and ‘synchronous/asynchronous switching’
(which takes the CB mechanical delay into consideration). Motor • Position of switching elements is shown on the graphic display
protection comprises undercurrent monitoring, starting time • Local/remote switching via key-operated switch 9
supervision, restart inhibit, locked rotor, load jam protection as • Control via keyboard, binary inputs, DIGSI 4 or SCADA system
well as motor statistics.
• Extended user-defined logic with CFC (e.g. interlocking)
The 7SJ64 is featuring the "flexible protection functions". Up to
20 protection functions can be added according to individual Monitoring functions 10
requirements. Thus, for example, rate-of-frequency-change • Operational measured values V, I, f, ...
protection or reverse power protection can be implemented. • Energy metering values Wp, Wq
The relay provides easy-to-use local control and automation
functions. The number of controllable switchgear depends only
• Slave pointer
11
on the number of available inputs and outputs. The integrated
• Trip circuit supervision
programmable logic (CFC) allows the user to implement their
own functions, e.g. for the automation of switchgear (interlock- • Fuse failure monitor
ing). CFC capacity is much larger compared to 7SJ63 due to • 8 oscillographic fault records 12
extended CPU power. The user is able to generate user-defined • Motor statistics
messages as well.
communication architectures with control systems. • System interface 13
– IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850
– PROFIBUS DP
– DNP 3 / DNP3 TCP / MODBUS RTU
– PROFINET 14
• Additional interface for temperature detection (RTD-box)
15
Application
Application Synchronization
In order to connect two components of a power system, the relay
8 The SIPROTEC 7SJ64 unit is a numerical protection relay that also
performs control and monitoring functions and therefore supports
provides a synchronization function which verifies that switching
ON does not endanger the stability of the power system.
the user in cost-effective power system management, and ensures
reliable supply of electric power to the customers. Local operation The synchronization function provides the operation modes ‘syn-
chro-check’ (classical) and ‘synchronous/asynchronous switching’
9 has been designed according to ergonomic criteria. A large, easy-
to-read graphic display was a major design aim. (which takes the c.-b. mechanical delay into consideration).
Control Motor protection

When protecting motors, the relays are suitable for asynchro-
10 The integrated control function permits control of disconnect
devices (electrically operated/motorized switches) or circuit- nous machines of all sizes.
breakers via the integrated operator panel, binary inputs, DIGSI 4
Transformer protection
or the control and protection system (e.g. SICAM). The present
status (or position) of the primary equipment can be displayed. The 7SJ64 units perform all functions of backup protection
11 7SJ64 supports substations with single and duplicate busbars. supplementary to transformer differential protection. The inrush
The number of elements that can be controlled (usually 1 to 5) is suppression effectively prevents tripping by inrush currents.
only restricted by the number of inputs and outputs available. A
full range of command processing functions is provided.
12 Programmable logic
short-circuits and insulation faults of the transformer.
Backup protection
The integrated logic characteristics (CFC) allow users to
The relays can be used universally for backup protection.
implement their own functions for automation of switchgear
13 (interlocking) or a substation via a graphic user interface. Due
to extended CPU power, the programmable logic capacity is
much larger compared to 7SJ63. The user can also generate By configuring a connection between a standard protection logic
user-defined messages. and any measured or derived quantity, the functional scope of
14 Line protection
The 7SJ64 units can be used for line protection of high and Metering values
medium-voltage networks with grounded, low-resistance
15 grounded, isolated or compensated neutral point. Extensive measured values, limit values and metered values

Application
50, 50N I>, I>>, I>>>

IE>, IE>>, IE>>>
Definite-time overcurrent protection (phase/neutral)
1
50, 50N I>>>>, I2> Additional definite-time overcurrent protection stages
IE>>>> (phase/neutral) via flexible protection functions
51, 51V, 51N Ip, IEp Inverse overcurrent protection (phase/neutral), phase function with voltage-dependent option
2
67Ns/50Ns IEE>, IEE>>, IEEp Sensitive ground-fault protection
– Cold load pick-up (dynamic setting change) 3

67Ns IIE dir> Directional intermittent ground fault protection 4

79M Auto-reclosure 5
25 Synchronization

6
47 V2>, phase seq. Unbalance-voltage protection and/or phase-sequence monitoring
49 ϑ> Thermal overload protection
48 Starting time supervision 7

51M Load jam protection

8
38 Temperature monitoring via external device (RTD-box), e.g. bearing temperature monitoring 9
27, 59 V<, V> Undervoltage/overvoltage protection
59R dV/dt
P<>, Q<>
Rate-of-voltage-change protection
Reverse-power, forward-power protection

10
32
35 cos φ Power factor protection 11

81O/U f>, f< Overfrequency/underfrequency protection
df/dt Rate-of-frequency-change protection

81R
21FL Fault locator

12
13
14
15
Construction
Construction

⅓, ½ and -rack sizes
2 These are the available housing widths

of the 7SJ64 relays, referred to a
LSP2299-bfpen.tif
19” module frame system. This means
that previous models can always be
LSP2174-afp.tif
3 replaced. The height is a uniform 244 mm
for flush-mounting housings and 266 mm
4 nected with or without ring lugs. Plug-in

terminals are available as an option.
cable harnesses. In the case of surface Fig. 5/89 Flush-mounting housing Fig. 5/90 Front view of 7SJ64 with
with screw-type terminals ⅓ × 19" housing
5 mounting on a panel, the connection
communication interfaces are located in
a sloped case at the top and bottom of
6 the housing. The housing can also be sup-
plied optionally with a detached operator
panel (refer to Fig. 5/91), or without
operator panel, in order to allow optimum
7 operation for all types of applications.
LSP2196-afp.eps
9
10 Fig. 5/91 Housing with plug-in terminals and detached operator panel
11
12
LSP2219-afpen.eps
13
LSP2237-afp.tif
14
15 screw-type terminals sloped case in a surface-mounting
housing

Overcurrent protection 1
(ANSI 50, 50N, 51,51V, 51N)
selective measurement of the three phase
currents and the ground current (four 2
transformers). Three definite-time over-
current protection elements (DMT) exist
both for the phases and for the ground.
The current threshold and the delay time 3
can be set in a wide range. In addition,
inverse-time overcurrent protection
The inverse-time function provides – as
an option – voltage-restraint or voltage-
4
controlled operating modes.
With the "flexible protection functions", Fig. 5/94 Definite-time overcurrent protection Fig. 5/95 Inverse-time overcurrent protection
further definite-time overcurrent stages
can be implemented in the 7SJ64 unit. 5
Reset characteristics Available inverse-time characteristics
For easier time coordination with electro-
mechanical relays, reset characteristics Inverse • • 6
according to ANSI C37.112 and Short inverse •
applied.
When using the reset characteristic (disk
Moderately inverse • 7
emulation), a reset process is initiated
after the fault current has disappeared. Extremely inverse • •
This reset process corresponds to the
reverse movement of the Ferraris disk of
Definite inverse •
8
an electromechanical relay (thus: disk
emulation).
User-definable characteristics 9
ground units separately. Up to 20 current / time value pairs may
be programmed. They are set as pairs of numbers or graphically 10
in DIGSI 4.
Inrush restraint
The relay features second harmonic restraint. If the second 11
non-directional and directional normal elements are blocked.

12
For directional and nondirectional overcurrent protection
functions the initiation thresholds and tripping times can be
13
14
15
1 Directional phase and ground protection are separate functions.

They operate in parallel to the non-directional overcurrent
rately. Definite-time and inverse-time characteristic is offered.
2 By means of voltage memory, directionality can be determined
3 from the voltage memory. If no voltage exists in the memory,
4 is to be determined via zero-sequence system or negative-
sequence system quantities (selectable).
Using negative-sequence variables can be advantageous in cases
where the zero voltage tends to be very low due to unfavorable protection
zero-sequence impedances.
5 Directional comparison protection (cross-coupling)
sources with instantaneous tripping, i.e. without the disadvan-
6 tage of time coordination. The directional comparison protection
is suitable if the distances between the protection stations are
not significant and pilot wires are available for signal transmis-
sion. In addition to the directional comparison protection, the
7 directional coordinated overcurrent protection is used for com-
plete selective backup protection. If operated in a closed-circuit
connection, an interruption of the transmission line is detected.
8 (Sensitive) directional ground-fault detection (ANSI 64,

67Ns/67N)
9 sequence current I0 and zero-sequence voltage V0. For networks
with an isolated neutral, the reactive current component is
evaluated; for compensated networks, the active current compo-
nent or residual resistive current is evaluated.
10 For special network conditions, e.g. high-resistance grounded

networks with ohmic-capacitive ground-fault current or low-
resistance grounded networks with ohmic-inductive current, the Fig. 5/97 Directional determination using cosine measurements for
tripping characteristics can be rotated approximately compensated networks
11 ± 45 degrees.
Two modes of ground-fault direction detection can be The function can also be operated in the insensitive mode, as an
implemented: tripping or “signalling only mode”. additional short-circuit protection.
It has the following functions: Intermittent ground-fault protection

12 • TRIP via the displacement voltage VE. Intermittent (re-striking) faults occur due to insulation weak-
• Two instantaneous elements or one instantaneous plus one nesses in cables or as a result of water penetrating cable joints.
user-defined characteristic. Such faults either simply cease at some stage or develop into
13 • Each element can be set in forward, reverse, or non-

directional.
may undergo thermal overloading. The normal ground-fault pro-
• The function can also be operated in the insensitive mode, as tection cannot reliably detect and interrupt the current pulses,
an additional short-circuit protection. some of which can be very brief.
14 (Sensitive) ground-fault detection (ANSI 50Ns, 51Ns/50N, 51N) The selectivity required with intermittent ground faults is
achieved by summating the duration of the individual pulses and
transformer is connected to a phase-balance neutral current
15 transformer (also called core-balance CT).
one systems period.

Directional intermittent ground fault protection (ANSI 67Ns)

intermittent ground faults in resonant grounded cable systems 1
selectively. Intermittent ground faults in resonant grounded cable
systems are usually characterized by the following properties:
hundred amperes) with a duration of under 1 ms 2
dv /dt
up to several periods, depending on the power system condi-
tions and the fault characteristic.
• Over longer periods (many seconds to minutes), they can
3
develop into static faults. LSA4113-aen.eps
Such intermittent ground faults are frequently caused by weak

insulation, e.g. due to decreased water resistance of old cables.
Ground fault functions based on fundamental component
4
measured values are primarily designed to detect static ground Flexible protection functions
faults and do not always behave correctly in case of intermittent
The 7SJ64 units enable the user to easily add on up to 20
ground faults. The function described here evaluates specifically
the ground current pulses and puts them into relation with the
protective functions. To this end, parameter definitions are used
to link a standard protection logic with any chosen characteristic
5
quantity (measured or derived quantity) (Fig. 5/98). The stan-
Phase-balance current protection (ANSI 46) dard logic consists of the usual protection elements such as the
(Negative-sequence protection) pickup message, the parameter-definable delay time, the TRIP
command, a blocking possibility, etc. The mode of operation
6
In line protection, the two-element phase-balance current/ for current, voltage, power and power factor quantities can be
negative-sequence protection permits detection on the high side three-phase or single-phase. Almost all quantities can be oper-
protection priority. 7
switch group Dy 5). This provides backup protection for high-
resistance faults beyond the transformer. Protection stages/functions attainable on the basis of the avail-
Function ANSI No. 8
If a faulted portion of the electrical circuit is not disconnected
I>, IE> 50, 50N
initiated using the breaker failure protection which operates V<, V>, VE>, dV/dt 27, 59, 59R, 64
relay. Breaker failure is detected if, after a trip command, current
3I0>, I1>, I2>, I2/I1,
3V0>, V1><, V2><
50N, 46,
59N, 47
9
is still flowing in the faulted circuit. As an option, it is possible to P><, Q>< 32
cos φ (p.f.)>< 55
Auto-reclosures (ANSI 79) f>< 81O, 81U
10
Multiple reclosures can be defined by the user and lockout will df/dt>< 81R
functions are possible:
• 3-pole ARC for all types of faults
For example, the following can be implemented: 11
• Reverse power protection (ANSI 32R)
• Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81R)
delayed auto-reclosures (DAR) Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection (ANSI 12
• Starting of the ARC depends on the trip command selection 27/Q)
(e.g. 46, 50, 51, 67)
The undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection protects
13
• The directional and non-directional elements can either be tor, must be equipped with voltage and frequency protection
blocked or operated non-delayed depending on the auto- devices. An undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection is
reclosure cycle
power system situations and ensures that the power generation 14
facility is disconnected from the mains. Furthermore, it ensures
elements can be activated depending on the ready AR
that reconnection only takes place under stable power system
• The AR CLOSE command can be given synchronous by use of conditions. The associated criteria can be parameterized.
the synchronization function. 15
Synchronization (ANSI 25)

• In case of switching ON the circuit-breaker, the units can
1 check whether the two subnetworks are synchronized (classic
synchro-check). Furthermore, the synchronizing function
may operate in the “Synchronous/asynchronous switching”
mode. The unit then distinguishes between synchronous and
2 asynchronous networks:
In synchronous networks, frequency differences between the
two subnetworks are almost non-existant. In this case, the
circuit-breaker operating time does not need to be considered.
3 Under asynchronous condition, however, this difference is

markedly larger and the time window for switching is shorter.
In this case, it is recommended to consider the operating time
of the circuit- breaker.
4 The command is automatically pre-dated by the duration of the

operating time of the circuit-breaker, thus ensuring that the
contacts of the CB close at exactly the right time. Fig. 5/99 High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection
Up to 4 sets of parameters for the synchronizing function can

5 be stored in the unit. This is an important feature when several
circuit-breakers with different operating times are to be oper-
event of internal faults, an imbalance occurs which leads to a
voltage and a current flow through the resistor R.
ated by one single relay. The current transformers must be of the same type and must
at least offer a separate core for the high-impedance restricted
6 Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49)
ground-fault protection. They must in particular have the same
with an integrated pre-warning element for temperature and voltage. They should also demonstrate only minimal measuring
current can be applied. The temperature is calculated using a errors.
7 thermal homogeneous-body model (according to IEC 60255-8),
which takes account both of the energy entering the equipment Settable dropout delay times
and the energy losses. The calculated temperature is constantly If the devices are used in parallel with electromechanical relays
adjusted accordingly. Thus, account is taken of the previous load in networks with intermittent faults, the long dropout times of
8 and the load fluctuations.
For thermal protection of motors (especially the stator), a
the electromechanical devices (several hundred milliseconds)
further time constant can be set so that the thermal ratios can grading is only possible if the dropout time is approximately the
be detected correctly while the motor is rotating and when it is same. This is why the parameter of dropout times can be defined
9 stopped. The ambient temperature or the temperature of the

for certain functions such as time-overcurrent protection,
ground short-circuit and phase-balance current protection.
monitoring box (resistance-temperature detector box, also
called RTD- box). The thermal replica of the overload function Motor protection
is automatically adapted to the ambient conditions. If there is
10 no RTD-box it is assumed that the ambient temperatures are
Restart inhibit (ANSI 66/86)
constant. If a motor is started up too many times in succession, the rotor

can be subject to thermal overload, especially the upper edges
High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection (ANSI 87N) of the bars. The rotor temperature is calculated from the stator
11 The high-impedance measurement principle is an uncomplicated
current. The reclosing lockout only permits start-up of the motor
if the rotor has sufficient thermal reserves for a complete start-
up (see Fig. 5/100).
reactors when these are operated on an grounded network. Emergency start-up
12 When the high-impedance measurement principle is applied, This function disables the reclosing lockout via a binary input
all current transformers in the protected area are connected in by storing the state of the thermal replica as long as the binary
parallel and operated on one common resistor of relatively high input is active. It is also possible to reset the thermal replica to
13 units, the voltage is measured by detecting the current through
zero.
the (external) resistor R at the sensitive current measurement Temperature monitoring (ANSI 38)
input IEE.
Up to two temperature monitoring boxes with a total of
14 The varistor V serves to limit the voltage in the event of an
internal fault. It cuts off the high momentary voltage spikes
12 measuring sensors can be used for temperature monitoring
and detection by the protection relay. The thermal status of
occurring at transformer saturation. At the same time, this motors, generators and transformers can be monitored with
results in smoothing of the voltage without any noteworthy this device. Additionally, the temperature of the bearings of
reduction of the average value. If no faults have occurred and rotating machines are monitored for limit value violation. The
15 in the event of external faults, the system is at equilibrium, and
the voltage through the resistor is approximately zero. In the
temperatures are being measured with the help of temperature

detectors at various locations of the device

to be protected. This data is transmitted
to the protection relay via one or two
temperature monitoring boxes (see “Acces-
1
sories”, page 5/197).
Starting time supervision (ANSI 48/14)

2
motor against long unwanted start-ups
that might occur in the event of excessive
load torque or excessive voltage drops
within the motor, or if the rotor is locked.
3
Rotor temperature is calculated from
measured stator current. The tripping time
is calculated according to the following
equation: 4
⎛ I ⎞2
t = ⎜ A ⎟ ⋅ TA
⎝I ⎠ 5
Fig. 5/100
IMOTOR START = Pickup current to detect a
t
motor start
= Tripping time
Motor statistics
6
Essential information on start-up of the motor (duration, cur-
IA = Rated motor starting current rent, voltage) and general information on number of starts, total
TA = Tripping time at rated motor starting current (2 times, for operating time, total down time, etc. are saved as statistics in
warm and cold motor) the device. 7
The characteristic (equation) can be adapted optimally to the
state of the motor by applying different tripping times TA in Voltage protection
Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59) 8
prolonged start-up and reduced voltage (and reduced start-up
operate either with phase-to-phase, phase-to-ground, positive
phase-sequence or negative phase-sequence voltage. Three- 9
phase and single-phase connections are possible.
A binary signal is set by a speed sensor to detect a blocked rotor.
An instantaneous tripping is effected. Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27)

The two-element undervoltage protection provides protec- 10
Sudden high loads can cause slowing down and blocking of the machines). Applications include the isolation of generators or
motor and mechanical damages. The rise of current due to a load motors from the network to avoid undesired operating states
jam is being monitored by this function (alarm and tripping). and a possible loss of stability. Proper operating conditions
of electrical machines are best evaluated with the positive-
11
The overload protection function is too slow and therefore not
suitable under these circumstances.
wide frequency range (45 to 55, 55 to 65 Hz)1). Even when
Phase-balance current protection (ANSI 46) falling below this frequency range the function continues to
work, however, with a greater tolerance band.
12
The negative-sequence / phase-balance current protection detects The function can operate either with phase-to-phase, phase-
to-ground or positive phase-sequence voltage, and can be
a phase failure or load unbalance due to network asymmetry and
protects the rotor from impermissible temperature rise. monitored with a current criterion.
13
Undercurrent monitoring (ANSI 37)
With this function, a sudden drop in current, which can occur
due to a reduced motor load, is detected. This may be due to Frequency protection can be used for over-frequency and under-
14
are protected from unwanted speed deviations. Unwanted

can be removed at a specified frequency setting. Frequency pro-
tection can be used over a wide frequency range (40 to 60, 50 to
15
Protection functions, functions
70 Hz)1). There are four elements (selectable as overfrequency

or underfrequency) and each element can be delayed separately.
1 Blocking of the frequency protection can be performed if using a
binary input or by using an undervoltage element.
2 The integrated fault locator calculates the fault impedance and

(miles) and in percent of the line length.
3 Circuit-breaker wear monitoring

4 benefit lies in reduced maintenance costs.
5 opens. This is why various methods of determining CB wear have
• Σ I
6 • Σ Ix, with x = 1... 3
• Σ I2t
Functions
The devices additionally offer a new method for determining the Control and automatic functions
7 • Two-point method
Control
The CB manufacturers double-logarithmic switching cycle support all control and monitoring functions that are required
diagram (see Fig. 5/101) and the breaking current at the time for operating medium-voltage or high-voltage substations.
8 of contact opening serve as the basis for this method. After CB
opening, the two-point method calculates the number of still The main application is reliable control of switching and other
possible switching cycles. To this end, the two points P1 and P2 processes.
only have to be set on the device. These are specified in the CB's The status of primary equipment or auxiliary devices can be
technical data. All of these methods are phase-selective and a
9 limit value can be set in order to obtain an alarm if the actual
obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated to the
7SJ64 via binary inputs. Therefore it is possible to detect and
value falls below or exceeds the limit value during determination indicate both the OPEN and CLOSED position or a fault or
of the remaining service life. intermediate circuit-breaker or auxiliary contact position.
10 Commissioning The switchgear or circuit-breaker can be controlled via:

Commissioning could hardly be easier and is fully supported by
– binary inputs
11 operation of switching elements (circuit-breakers, disconnect
– DIGSI 4

ranging operational measured values. To prevent transmission of With integrated logic, the user can set, via a graphic interface
12 information to the control center during maintenance, the bay
controller communications can be disabled to prevent unneces-
(CFC), specific functions for the automation of switchgear or
sary data from being transmitted. During commissioning, all input or via communication interface.
indications with test marking for test purposes can be connected
Switching authority
13 to a control and protection system.
Switching authority is determined according to parameters,
Test operation communication or by key-operated switch (when available).
During commissioning, all indications can be passed to an If a source is set to “LOCAL”, only local switching operations are
14 automatic control system for test purposes.
Key-operated switch
7SJ64 units are fitted with key-operated switch function for
15 1) The 40 to 60, 50 to 70 Hz range is available for fN = 50/60 Hz. local/remote changeover and changeover between interlocked
switching and test operation.
Functions
Command processing
All the functionality of command process-
ing is offered. This includes the processing 1
of single and double commands with or
without feedback, sophisticated monitor-
ing of the control hardware and software,
checking of the external process, control
actions using functions such as runtime
2
monitoring and automatic command
termination after output. Here are some
• Single and double commands using 1,
3
1 plus 1 common or 2 trip contacts
• Operating sequences combining several 4
switching operations such as control
of circuit-breakers, disconnectors and
grounding switches
• Triggering of switching operations, 5
indications or alarm by combination with
existing information Fig. 5/102 Typical wiring for 7SJ642 motor direct control (simplified representation without fuses).
Binary output BO6 and BO7 are interlocked so that only one set of contacts are closed
Motor control at a time.
6
The SIPROTEC 7SJ64 with high perfor-
mance relays is well-suited for direct
activation of the circuit-breaker, discon-
nector and grounding switch operating
mechanisms in automated substations.
7
Interlocking of the individual switching
devices takes place with the aid of
programmable logic. Additional auxiliary 8
relays can be eliminated. This results in
less wiring and engineering effort.
Assignment of feedback to command

9
The positions of the circuit-breaker or
switching devices and transformer taps
are acquired by feedback. These indica-
tion inputs are logically assigned to the
corresponding command outputs. The
Fig. 5/103 Example: Single busbar with circuit-breaker and motor-controlled three-position switch 10
unit can therefore distinguish whether
the indication change is a consequence
of switching operation or whether it is a
spontaneous change of state. 11
Chatter disable
Chatter disable feature evaluates whether,
in a configured period of time, the number
12
of status changes of indication input
exceeds a specified figure. If exceeded, the
indication input is blocked for a certain
period, so that the event list will not record 13

Binary indications can be filtered or 14
delayed.
Filtering serves to suppress brief changes
in potential at the indication input. The
Fig. 5/104 Example: Circuit-breaker interlocking 15
Functions
indication is passed on only if the indication voltage is still pres-

ent after a set period of time.
1 In the event of indication delay, there is a wait for a preset time.
The information is passed on only if the indication voltage is still
existing indication. Group indications can also be formed. The
volume of information to the system interface can thus be
3 reduced and restricted to the most important signals.
Measured values
4 voltage along with the power factor, frequency, active and reac-
tive power. The following functions are available for measured
value processing:
5 • Voltages VL1, VL2, VL3, VL1L2, VL2L3, VL3L1, Vsyn
LSP2078-afp.eps
6 • Frequency
• Mean as well as minimum and maximum current and voltage
7 values
• Mean operating temperature of overload function Fig. 5/105 NX PLUS panel (gas-insulated)
8 Limit values are monitored using programmable logic in the
CFC. Commands can be derived from this limit value indica-
tion.
9 In a certain range of very low measured values, the value is set
Metered values
10 For internal metering, the unit can calculate an energy metered
value from the measured current and voltage values. If an
external meter with a metering pulse output is available, the
SIPROTEC 4 unit can obtain and process metering pulses via an
11 indication input.
The metered values can be displayed and passed on to a control
center as an accumulation with reset. A distinction is made
between forward, reverse, active and reactive energy.
12 Switchgear cubicles for high/medium voltage
13 In general, no separate measuring instruments (e.g. for current,
voltage, frequency measuring transducer ...) or additional
14
15
Communication
Communication

2

4
5
by the user.
The interface modules support the following applications: 6
telegrams in IRIG-B or DCF77 format into the units via time 7
through this interface. Radial or ring type station bus topolo- 8
number of protection units via DIGSI. It can be an electrical Fig. 5/107 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and
RS232/RS485 interface. For special applications, a maximum
of two temperature monitoring boxes (RTD-box) can be con-
IEC 61850, fiber-optic ring
10
nected to this interface as an alternative.
• Additional interface
Up to 2 RTD-boxes can be connected via this interface. The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is an international standard for the
11
System interface protocols (retrofittable) from the unit and also control commands can be transferred by
IEC 61850 protocol
Redundant solutions are also possible. Optionally it is possible to
read out and alter individual parameters (only possible with the
12
for protection and control systems used by power supply corpora- redundant module).
PROFIBUS DP protocol
13
systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to the units via
the Ethernet bus is also possible with DIGSI. It is also possible to
retrieve operating and fault messages and fault recordings via
a browser. This Web monitor also provides a few items of unit-
specific information in browser windows.
commands from a central SIMATIC. Measured values can also be
transferred. 14
1) For units in panel surface-mounting housings 15


Communication
MODBUS RTU protocol
1 This uncomplicated, serial protocol is

mainly used in industry and by power
supply corporations, and is supported by a
number of unit manufacturers. SIPROTEC
units function as MODBUS slaves, making
2 their information available to a master
or receiving information from it. A time-
stamped event list is available.
3 PROFINET
PROFINET is the ethernet-based successor
of PROFIBUS DP and is supported in the
4 is used in industry together with the
the optical and electrical Plus ethernet
5 November 2012. All network redundancy

ethernet modules, such as RSTP, PRP or
6 The network monitoring is possible via
Fig. 5/108 System solution/communication
SNMP V2 where special MIB files exist
7 the network topology. Single-point indica-
and metered values can be transmitted
LSP3.01-0021.tif
8 via the protocol and can be selected by
are also transmitted spontaneously via
configurable process alarms. Switching
9 control via the device in the controlling
direction. The PROFINET implementation is
certified. The device also supports the IEC
61850 protocol as a server on the same
10 ethernet module in addition to the PRO-
FINET protocol. Client server connections
are possible for the intercommunication
between devices, e.g. for transmitting Fig. 5/109 Optical Ethernet communication module for IEC 61850
with integrated Ethernet-switch
11 fault records and GOOSE messages.
DNP 3.0 protocol

the binary Comtrade format and can be retrieved via the DNP3 file
Power utilities use the serial DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network transfer. The time synchronization is performed via the DNP3 TCP
12 Protocol) for the station and network control levels. SIPROTEC units
function as DNP slaves, supplying their information to a master
client or SNTP. The device can also be integrated into a network
monitoring system via the SNMP V2 protocol. Parallel to the DNP3
system or receiving information from it. TCP protocol the IEC 61850 protocol (the device works as a server)
and the GOOSE messages of the IEC 61850 are available for the
DNP3 TCP intercommunication between devices.
13 The ethernet-based TCP variant of the DNP3 protocol is supported System solutions for protection and station control
with the electrical and optical ethernet module. Two DNP3 TCP
clients are supported. Redundant ring structures can be realized Together with the SICAM power automation system, SIPROTEC 4
for DNP3 TCP with the help of the integrated switch in the module. can be used with PROFIBUS DP. Over the low-cost electrical RS485
14 For instance, a redundant optical ethernet ring can be constructed. bus, or interference-free via the optical double ring, the units
Single-point indications, double-point indications, measured and exchange information with the control system.
metered values can be confi gured with DIGSI 4 and are transmit-
Units featuring IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces can be connected to
ted to the DNPi client. Switching commands can be executed in
15 the controlling direction. Fault records of the device are stored in
SICAM in parallel via the RS485 bus or radially by fiber-optic link.

Typical connections
Through this interface, the system is open for the connection of For IEC 61850, an interoperable system solution is offered with
units of other manufacturers (see Fig. 5/106). SICAM PAS. Via the 100 Mbits/s Ethernet bus, the units are linked
1
other manufacturers to the Ethernet bus. With IEC 61850, how-
(see Fig. 5/107).
2
3
Typical connections

Standard connection
10
Fig. 5/110 Residual current circuit without directional element Fig. 5/111 Sensitive ground current detection without directional element
11
12
13
14
15
Fig. 5/112 Residual current circuit with directional element

Typical connections
1 The figure shows the connection of two

phase-to-ground voltages and the VE
voltage of the open delta winding and a
phase-ground neutral current transformer
for the ground current. This connection
2 maintains maximum precision for direc-
tional ground-fault detection and must be
used in compensated networks.

9 Fig. 5/114 Isolated-neutral or compensated networks
10
Connection for the synchronization
11 function
The 3-phase system is connected as refer-
12 case a busbar voltage, that has to be
synchronized.
13
Fig. 5/115 Measuring of the busbar voltage and the outgoing feeder voltage
for synchronization
14
15


– 2
non-directional


3
4

protection
5

6
Typical applications 7
Application examples
Synchronization function
When two subnetworks must be intercon-
8
nected, the synchronization function
monitors whether the subnetworks are
synchronous and can be connected without
risk of losing stability.
9
As shown in Fig. 5/116, load is being fed
from a generator to a busbar via a trans-
former. It is assumed that the frequency
difference of the 2 subnetworks is such
10
that the device determines asynchronous 1) Synchronization function
system conditions. 2) Auto-reclosure function
The voltages of the busbar and the feeder 11
should be the same when the contacts Fig. 5/116 Measuring of busbar and feeder voltages for synchronization
are made; to ensure this condition the
synchronism function must run in the
“synchronous/asynchronous switching” mode. In this mode, the
operating time of the CB can be set within the relay. The vector group of the transformer can be considered by setting 12
Differences between angle and frequency can then be calculated parameters. Thus no external circuits for vector group adaptation
by the relay while taking into account the operating time of the are required.
CB. From these differences, the unit derives the exact time for
issuing the CLOSE command under asynchronous conditions.
This synchronism function can be applied in conjunction with the
auto-reclosure function as well as with the control function CLOSE
13
When the contacts close, the voltages will be in phase. commands (local/remote).
14
15
1 Undervoltage releases
Example:
2 DC supply voltage of control system fails
possible.
3 Automatic tripping takes place when

voltage across the coil drops below the
trip limit. In Figure 5/172, tripping occurs
due to failure of DC supply voltage, by
automatic opening of the live status
4 contact upon failure of the protection unit
or by short-circuiting the trip coil in event
of a network fault.
5 Fig. 5/117 Undervoltage release with make contact 50, 51
In Fig. 5/118 tripping is by failure of auxil-

iary voltage and by interruption of tripping
6 circuit in the event of network failure. Upon
circuit is also interrupted, since contact
7 position.
10 Fig. 5/118 Undervoltage release with locking contact (trip signal 50 is inverted)
11
12
13
14
15

monitoring the circuit-breaker trip coil 1
interrupted.
Lockout (ANSI 86)

2
lockout state is also stored in the event of 3
Reverse-power protection for

dual supply (ANSI 32R)
4
fault on one of the infeeds it should be
5
directional devices are needed which
detect a short-circuit current or a power 6
current. It cannot be used to deactivate 7
low-current faults. Reverse-power protec-
tion can be set far below the rated power.
This ensures that it also detects power
feedback into the line in the event of low-
current faults with levels far below the
8
load current. Reverse-power protection
is performed via the “flexible protection
functions” of the 7SJ64.
9
10
Fig. 5/120 Reverse-power protection for dual supply 11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
General unit data Binary outputs/command outputs
1 Measuring circuits
Type
Number (marshallable)
7SJ640 7SJ641 7SJ642 7SJ645 7SJ647
7 15 20 33 48
Current transformer Voltage range DC 24 – 250 V
Rated current Inom 1 or 5 A (settable) Pickup threshold
2 Option: sensitive ground-fault CT

Power consumption
IEE < 1.6 A
modifiable by plug-in
jumpers
Pickup threshold DC DC 19 V DC 88 V
at Inom = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA per phase
at Inom = 5 A Approx. 0.3 VA per phase For rated control voltage
for sensitive ground-fault CT at 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA DC DC 24/48/60/110/ DC 110/125/220/250 V
3 Overload capability
Thermal (effective) 500 A for 1 s Power consumption
125 V
0.9 mA (independent of operating voltage)
150 A for 10 s energized for BI 8…19 / 21…32;
20 A continuous 1.8 mA for BI 1…7 / 20/33…48

250 x Inom (half cycle) Binary outputs/command outputs
Type 7SJ640 7SJ641 7SJ642 7SJ645 7SJ647
Thermal (effective) 300 A for 1 s Command/indication 5 13 8 11 21
100 A for 10 s relay

15 A continuous
750 A (half cycle)
indication relay
Voltage transformer Live status contact 1 NO / NC (jumper) / form A / B
Rated voltage Vnom 100 V to 225 V Switching capacity
6 Measuring range
Power consumption at Vnom = 100 V
0 V to 200 V
< 0.3 VA per phase
Make 1000 W / VA
Break 30 W / VA / 40 W resistive /
25 W at L/R ≤ 50 ms
Switching voltage ≤ DC 250 V
(phase-neutral voltage)
7 Thermal (effective) 230 V continuous
Auxiliary voltage (via integrated converter)
30 A for 0.5 s making current,
Rated auxiliary voltage Vaux DC 24 / 48 V 60 /125 V 110 / 250 V
Power relay (for motor control)
Permissible tolerance DC 19 – 58 V 48 – 150 V 88 – 300 V
Type 7SJ640 7SJ642 7SJ645 7SJ647
8 Ripple voltage,
peak-to-peak
≤ 12 % of rated auxiliary voltage
Number
7SJ641
0 2 (4) 4 (8) 4 (8)
Power consumption 7SJ640 7SJ641 7SJ645 7SJ647
7SJ642 Number of contacts/relay 2 NO / form A
Switching capacity
9 Quiescent
Energized
Approx. 5 W
Approx. 9 W
5.5 W 6.5 W
12.5 W 15 W
7.5 W
21 W
Make 1000 W / VA
at 48 V … 250 V / 500 W at 24 V
Backup time during ≥ 50 ms at V > DC 110 V
Break 1000 W / VA
loss/short-circuit of ≥ 20 ms at V > DC 24 V
at 48 V … 250 V / 500 W at 24 V
auxiliary direct voltage
10 Rated auxiliary voltage Vaux AC

Permissible tolerance AC
115 V / 230 V
92 – 32 V / 184 – 265 V
Switching voltage
Permissible current
≤ DC 250 V
5 A continuous,
30 A for 0.5 s
Power consumption 7SJ640 7SJ641 7SJ645 7SJ647
7SJ642
11 Quiescent
Energized
Approx. 7 W
Approx. 12 W
9W
19 W
12 W
23 W
16 W
33 W
Backup time during ≥ 200 ms
loss/short-circuit of
12 auxiliary alternating voltage
13
14
15
Technical data
Electrical tests Radiated electromagnetic 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz;

interference amplitude and pulse-modulated
Specification
Standards IEC 60255
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2
Damped wave 2.5 kV (peak value, polarity
1
ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1, C37.90.2,
IEC 60694 / IEC 61000-4-12 alternating)
UL508
100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 and 50 MHz,
Insulation tests Ri = 200 Ω
Standards IEC 60255-5; ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0 EMC tests for interference emission; type tests 2
Voltage test (100 % test) 2.5 kV (r.m.s. value), 50/60 Hz Standard EN 50081-* (generic specification)
all circuits except for auxiliary
Conducted interferences 150 kHz to 30 MHz
voltage and RS485/RS232 and
Radio interference field strength 30 to 1000 MHz 3
Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak value); 1.2/50 µs; 0.5 J
4
class III Mechanical stress tests
EMC tests for interference immunity; type tests Vibration, shock stress and seismic vibration
Standards IEC 60255-6; IEC 60255-22
(product standard)
During operation 5
DIN 57435 Part 303 Vibration Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 10 to 60 Hz; ± 0.075 mm amplitude;
High-frequency test
400 surges per s; test duration 2 s
6
and VDE 0435 Part 303, class III 20 cycles in 3 perpendicular axes
Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge; Shock Semi-sinusoidal
10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
IEC 60068-2-27
Acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms;
3 shocks in both directions of 3 axes 7
field, non-modulated IEC 60255-21-3, class 1 1 to 8 Hz: ± 3.5 mm amplitude
IEC 60255-22-3 (Report) class III IEC 60068-3-3 (horizontal axis)
10 V/m, 80 to 1000 MHz;
AM 80 %; 1 kHz
(vertical axis) 8
IEC 61000-4-3; class III 8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m, 900 MHz; repetition (horizontal axis)
field, pulse-modulated rate 200 Hz, on duration 50 % 8 to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration
IEC 61000-4-3/ENV 50204; class III
(vertical axis)
Frequency sweep 1 octave/min 9
1 cycle in 3 perpendicular axes
IEC 60255-22-4 and IEC 61000-4- burst length = 15 ms;
4, class IV repetition rate 300 ms; both polarities; During transportation
High-energy surge voltages
Standards
Vibration
IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
Sinusoidal 10
(Surge) IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 5 to 8 Hz: ± 7.5 mm amplitude;
IEC 61000-4-5; class III IEC 60068-2-6 8 to 150 Hz; 2 g acceleration,
Auxiliary voltage From circuit to circuit: 2 kV; 12 Ω; 9 µF frequency sweep 1 octave/min
Binary inputs/outputs
From circuit to circuit: 2 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF Shock
Semi-sinusoidal
11
across contacts: 1 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms
Line-conducted HF, 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks in both directions of 3 axes
amplitude-modulated AM 80 %; 1 kHz Continuous shock Semi-sinusoidal
Power frequency magnetic field 30 A/m; 50 Hz, continuous
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
IEC 60068-2-29
1000 shocks in both directions
12
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV 300 A/m; 50 Hz, 3 s of 3 axes
IEC 60255-6 0.5 mT, 50 Hz
capability
2.5 to 3 kV (peak value), 1 to 1.5 MHz
damped wave; 50 surges per s; 13
Fast transient surge withstand 4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges per s
capability ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 both polarities; duration 2 s, Ri = 80 Ω
14
15
Technical data
1 Temperatures
Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 -25 °C to +85 °C / -13 °F to +185 °F
Temporarily permissible operating -20 °C to +70 °C / -4 °F to +158 °F
2 Recommended permanent
-5 °C to +55 °C / +25 °F to +131 °F
IEC 60255-6
impaired above +55 °C / +131 °F)
permanent storage
-25 °C to +55 °C / -13 °F to +131 °F
– Limiting temperature during -25 °C to +70 °C / -13 °F to +158 °F

transport
4 Humidity
Permissible humidity Annual average 75 % relative humi-
It is recommended to arrange the dity; on 56 days a year up to 95 %
units in such a way that they are relative humidity; condensation not
not exposed to direct sunlight or permissible!
5 pronounced temperature changes
Unit design
Type 7SJ640 7SJ641 7SJ645
6 Housing
7SJ642
7XP20
7SJ647
Dimensions See dimension drawings, part 14 of

this catalog
7 Weight in kg Housing
width ⅓
Housing
width ½
Housing
width
Surface-mounting housing 8 11 15
Flush-mounting housing 5 6 10
Housing for detached operator
8 operator panel
Detached operator panel
–
–
8
2.5
12
2.5
acc. to EN 60529
9 Flush-mounting housing
Operator safety
IP 2x with cover

11
12
13
14
15

7SJ64 multifunction protection relay with synchronization
Housing, binary inputs and outputs

7SJ64 - -
1
Housing ⅓ 19”, 7 BI, 5 BO, 1 live status contact, text display 4 x 20 character (only for 7SJ640)
9th position only with: B, D, E 0
Housing ½ 19”, 15 BI, 13 BO (1 NO/NC or 1a/b contact), 1 live status contact, graphic display
Housing ½ 19”, 20 BI, 8 BO, 2 power relays (4 contacts), 1 live status contact, graphic display
1
2
See next page 2
Housing 19”, 33 BI, 11 BO, 4 power relays (8 contacts), 1 live status contact, graphic display 5
Housing 19”, 48 BI, 21 BO, 4 power relays (8 contacts), 1 live status contact, graphic display 7
Measuring inputs (4 x V , 4 x I) 3
Iph = 1 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A)
Position 15 only with B, D, F, H 2 4
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = 5 A1) (min. = 0.25 A)
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A)
6
5
Rated auxiliary voltage (power supply, binary inputs)

DC 24 to 48 V, threshold binary input DC 19 V 3) 2 6
DC 60 to 125 V 2), threshold binary input DC19 V 3) 4
DC 110 to 250 V 2), AC 115 to 230 V, threshold binary input DC 88 V 3) 5
Unit version
Surface-mounting housing, plug-in terminals, detached operator panel,
7
panel mounting in low-voltage housing A
Surface-mounting housing, 2-tier terminals on top/bottom B
Surface-mounting housing, screw-type terminals (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs),
detached operator panel, panel mounting in low-voltage housing C
8
Flush-mounting housing, plug-in terminals (2/3 pin connector) D
Flush-mounting housing, screw-type terminals (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs) E
Surface-mounting housing, screw-type terminals (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs),
without operator panel, panel mounting in low-voltage housingg F 9
Surface-mounting housing, plug-in terminals, without operator panel,
panel mounting in low-voltage housing G
Region-specific default settings / function versions and language settings

Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, language: German (language selectable) A
10
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: English (GB) (language selectable) B
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, language: English (US) (language selectable) C
Region FR, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: French (language selectable)
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Spanish (language selectable)
D 11
E
Region IT, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Italian (language selectable) F
Region RU, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Russian(language can be changed) G
12
13
14
by means of jumpers.
3) The binary input thresholds can be selected per binary input by
means of jumpers.
15
1 7SJ64 multifunction protection relay with synchronization

7SJ64 - - -
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, RS232 1 See
2 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, RS485 2
following
pages

3 PROFIBUS DP Slave, 820 nm wavelength, double ring, ST connector 1) 9 L 0 B
MODBUS, RS485 9 L 0 D
4 DNP 3.0, RS485 9 L 0 G

DNP 3.0, 820 nm wavelength, ST connector 2) 9 L 0 H
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, redundant, RS485, RJ45 connector 2) 9 L 0 P
5 IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connector (EN 100) 9 L 0 R
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector (EN 100) 2) 9 L 0 S
DNP3 TCP + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, electrical, double, RJ45 connector 4) 9 L 2 R
6 DNP3 TCP + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, optical, double, LC connector 4)

PROFINET + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, electrical, double, RJ45 connector 4)
9
9
L 2 S
L 3 R
PROFINET + IEC 61850, 100Mbit Eth, optical, double, LC connector 4) 9 L 3 S
7 Only Port C (service interface)

Port C and D (service and additional interface) 9 M
8 Port C (service interface)
9 PortD(additional interface)
RTD-box3), 820 nm fiber, ST connector 5) A
RTD-box3), electrical RS485 F
10 Fault recording 1
11
12
1) Not with position 9 = “B”; if 9 = “B”, please order 7SJ6 unit with 2) Not available with position 9 = “B”.
RS485 port and separate fiber-optic converters. 3) Temperature monitoring box 7XV5662- AD10,
For single ring, please order converter 6GK1502-2CB10, not availab- refer to “Accessories”.
13 le with position 9 = “B”.
For double ring, please order converter 6GK1502-3CB10, not
4) Available with V4.9
5) When using the temperature monitoring box at an optical interface,
available with position 9 = “B”.
the additional RS485 fiber-optic converter 7XV5650-0 A00 is
The converter requires a AC 24 V power supply (e.g. power supply
required.
7XV5810-0BA00).
14
15


7SJ64 - - -
1
50N/51N
50N/51N
Insensitive ground-fault protection through
2
51 V
49
3
37
47
59N/64
Phase sequence
Displacement voltage
4
86
4 setting groups, cold-load pickup, Inrush blocking
Lockout F A 5
V, P, f 27/59 Under-/overvoltage
32/55/81R current and voltages): Voltage, power, p.f., 6
rate-of-frequency-change protection F E
IEF V, P, f 27/59 Under-/overvoltage
7
32/55/81R current and voltages): Voltage, power, p.f.,rate-of-frequency-
change protection Intermittent ground fault P E
Dir 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent,
phases and ground F C 8
Dir V, P, f 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
27/47/59(N) Flexible protection (index quantities derived from 9
rate-of-frequency-change protection F G
Dir V,P,f IEF 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
27/59
Intermittent ground fault protection
Under-/overvoltage
10
81U/O Under-/overfrequency
27/47/59(N) Flexible protection functions (quantities derived from
current & voltages)
32/55/81R Voltage-/power-/p.f.-/rate of freq. change-protection
11
Intermittent ground-fault P G
Dir IEF 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground
Sens.ground-f.det. Motor 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and ground 12
Dir V,P,f REF 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
87N High-impedance restricted ground fault F D 2)
13
Continued on
Basic version included 1) Only with insensitive ground-current transformer when position
next page 14
V, P, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection 7 = 1, 5, 7.
Dir = Directional overcurrent protection 2) For isolated/compensated networks only with sensitive

ground-current transformer when position 7 = 2, 6.
3) available with V4.9 15
1 7SJ64 multifunction protection relay with synchronization

7SJ64 - - -

2 50N/51N
50N/51N
3 51 V
49
4 37
47
59N/64
Phase sequence
Displacement volt
5 86
Inrush blocking
Lockout
Dir V,P,f REF 67Ns Directional intermittent ground fault protection 3)
6 87N
27/59
Under-/overvoltage
7 32/55/81R current and voltages): Voltage, power, p.f.,
rate-of-frequency-change protection F F 2)
Sens.ground-f.det. Motor IEF 67/67N Directional sensitive ground-fault detection, phases and ground
8 87N High-impedance restricted ground fault
Intermittent ground fault P D 2)

9 Sens.ground-f.det. Motor
87N
67Ns

F B 2)

10 66/86
51M
Restart inhibit
rate-of-frequency-change protection H F 2)
12 Dir V,P,f REF 67Ns

67Ns
87N
13 51M
27/59
81O/U
Under-/overvoltage
14 rate-of-frequency-change protection
H H 2)
Basic version included 1) Only with insensitive ground-current transformer when position 7 = 1, 5, 7.
Continued on
V, P, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection 2) For isolated/compensated networks only with sensitive ground-current next page
transformer when position 7 = 2, 6.
15 Dir
IEF
= Intermittent ground fault 3) available with V4.9



7SJ64 - - -
1
50N/51N
50N/51N
2
51 V
3
37
47
Phase sequence 4
Inrush blocking 5
86 Lockout
67Ns
87N
6
51M
27/59
Undervoltage/overvoltage
7
81O/U Underfrequency/overfrequency
rate-of-frequency-change protection R H 2)
8
Motor V, P, f 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent,
Dir phases and ground
48/14
66/86
Restart inhibit 9
51M Load jam protection, motor statistics
10
rate-of-frequency-change protection H G
Motor 48/14 Starting time supervision, locked rotor
66/86
51M
Restart inhibit
Load jam protection, motor statistics H A
11
ARC, fault locator, synchronization
Without 0
79
21FL
With auto-reclosure
With fault locator
1
2
12
79, 21FL With auto-reclosure, with fault locator 3
25 With synchronization 4
25, 79,21FL With synchronization, auto-reclosure, fault locator 7
ATEX100 Certification
For protection of explosion-protected motors (increased-safety type of protection “e”)
13
Z X 9 9 2)
14
Basic version included 1) Only with insensitive ground-current transformer when position 7 = 1, 5, 7.
V, P, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection
Dir = Directional overcurrent protection
2) This variantmight be supplied with a previous firmware version.
3) available with V4.9 15

AC/DC 24 to 60 V 7XV5662-2AD10
AC/DC 90 to 240 V 7XV5662-5AD10
2 Varistor/VoltageArrester
125 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S 256 C53207-A401-D76-1
240 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S 1088 C53207-A401-D77-1
3 Connecting cable
Cable between PC / notebook (9-pin con.) and protection unit

SIPROTEC 4 unit
- length 5 m / 16.4 ft 7XV5103-7AA05
- length 25 m / 82 ft 7XV5103-7AA25
- length 50 m / 164 ft 7XV5103-7AA50
5 Manual for 7SJ64
English /German C53000-G1100-C147-x 1)
8

package
Supplier

LSP2289-afp.eps

10 Voltage/current terminal 12-pole/8-pole
Connector 2-pin
C73334-A1-C32-1
C73334-A1-C35-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens
Mounting rail
11 Crimp connector CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000

taped on reel
1)
Crimp connector CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 1)

LSP2090-afp.eps
LSP2091-afp.eps
0-827396-1 1
12 mm2
Crimp connector: Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 0-163083-7 4000 1)
taped on reel
2-pin connector 3-pin connector Crimping tool for Type III+ 0-539635-1 1 1)
1)
13 Crimping tool for CI2

and matching female
0-734372-1
1-734387-1
1
1 1)
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps
Short-circuit links
14 for other terminals C73334-A1-C34-1 1 Siemens
Short-circuit links Short-circuit links Mounting rail for 19" rack C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens
for current terminals for current terminals

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13

14

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13


Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
of this catalog.
14

Connection diagram
10
11
12 *) For pinout of communication ports see

part 14 of this catalog.
refer to the manual
13 (http://www.siemens.com/siprotec).
14 to avoid shorting out the power supply.
BO8/BO9, BO13/BO14, BO15/BO16.
15

Connection diagram
10
11
12

13
to avoid shorting out the power supply.
14
BO8/BO9, BO13/BO14, BO15/BO16.
15
Fig. 5/125 7SJ647 connection diagram part 1; continued on following page

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13

15 Fig. 5/126 7SJ647 connection diagram part 2

SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Description
Protection functions (continued)

• Motor protection 1
• Under-/overvoltage protection 2
• Power protection (e.g. reverse, factor)
• Undervoltage controlled reactive power protection
3
• Phase-sequence monitoring 4
• Synchro-check
• Fault locator
Fig. 5/127 SIPROTEC 7SJ66 multifunction protection relay

• Lockout
• Auto-reclosure
5
Control functions/programmable logic
Description • Commands f. ctrl of CB and of isolators
6
The SIPROTEC 7SJ66 unit is a numerical protection, control and • Control via keyboard, binary inputs, DIGSI 4 or SCADA system
monitoring device, designed to use in Medium Voltage and
• User-defined logic with CFC (e.g. interlocking)
Industry applications. 7
SIPROTEC 7SJ66 is featuring the "flexible protection functions". Monitoring functions
Up to 20 protection functions can be added according to individ- • Operational measured values V, I, f
ual requirements. Thus, for example, a rate-of-frequency-change • Energy metering values Wp, Wq
protection or reverse power protection can be implemented.
8
The relay provides control of the circuit-breaker, further switch- • Slave pointer
ing devices and automation functions. The integrated graphical
logic editor (CFC) allows the user to implement its own func-
tions, e. g. for the automation of switchgear (interlocking). • Fuse failure monitor 9
The communication interfaces support the easy integration into
modern communication networks. • Motor statistics
Communication (build in interfaces) 10

Function overview • System interface
IEC 60870-5-103 / IEC 61850 / Modbus RTU / DNP3
• Service interface for DIGSI 4/ RTD-Box
• Electrical and optical interface
11
• Directional overcurrent protection • RSTP, PRP (Redundancy Protocol for Ethernet)
• Sensitive directional ground-fault detection • Front USB interface for DIGSI 4
• Displacement voltage • Time synchronization via IRIG B/DCF77 12
• High-impedance restricted ground fault Hardware
• Screw-type current terminals

13
• Spring or Screw-type Voltage and Binary I/O terminals
• 4 current and 4 voltage transformers
• 16/22/36 binary inputs 14
• 7/10/23 output relays
• Graphical or 8 line text display
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Application
Busbar
1
Local/remote control CFC logic Metering values
25 Synchrocheck
Commands/Feedbacks
Set points
2 52 74TC Trip circuit supervision AND Mean value

Min/Max-Log
I, V, Watts,
Vars,p.f.,f
V, f, P

P<>, Q<> cos˳ df/dt
86 Lock out
32 55 81R
HMI Communication interface Energy meter:
RTD 1) box
calculated and/or by impulses f<, f> V> V<
3 Electrical: IEC61850
IEC60870-5-103
Modbus RTU
interface
Fault recording
Motor protection
Restart Starting Load
Fault Locator
81U/O 59 27
DNP3 inhibit I< time jam Directional

66/86 37 48 51M Phase sequence
Optical: IEC61850 FL 47
monitoring
DNP3
4 38 14
Bearing Locked Motor
I>> dir.
I> dir.
IE>> dir.
IE> dir.
temp rotor statistics Ip dir. IEp dir.
67 67N
5 I>>,
I>>>
I>,
Ip
IE>>,
IE>>>
IE>,
IEp I2> !
Breaker failure
protection
Dir. Sensitive earth-fault
InRush Intermitt.
50 51 50N 51N 46 49 50BF 51V detection
BLK ground flt
IEE>>,
IEE>
6 IE>>,
IE>>>
50N
IE>,
IEp
51N
Hight-impedance
restricted earth-fault
87N
Auto-
reclosure
79 IEEp
67Ns
VE>
64
1)
RTD = resistance temperature detector
7
8 Application Synchro-check
In order to connect two components of a power system, the
The SIPROTEC 7SJ66 unit is a numerical protection relay that also relay provides a synchro-check function which verifies that
performs control and monitoring functions and therefore sup-
9 ports the user in cost-effective power system management. The
switching ON does not endanger the stability of the power
system.
relay ensures reliable supply of electric power to the customers.
Local operation has been designed according to ergonomic Motor protection
criteria. A large, easy-to-read display was a major design aim.
10 Control
When protecting motors, the SIPROTEC 7SJ66 relay is suitable for
asynchronous machines of all sizes.
The integrated control function permits control of disconnect Transformer protection

devices, grounding switches or circuit-breakers via the inte-
11 grated operator panel, binary inputs, DIGSI 4 or the control and
protection system (e.g. SICAM). The present status (or position)
with graphic display. A full range of command processing func-
short-circuits and insulation faults on the transformer.
12 tions is provided.
Backup protection
Programmable logic
The SIPROTEC 7SJ66 can be used universally for backup protec-
tion.
(interlocking) or a substation via a graphic user interface. The Flexible protection functions
user can also generate user-defined messages.
By configuring a connection between a standard protection logic
Line protection and any measured or derived quantity, the functional scope of
14 The SIPROTEC 7SJ66 units can be used for line protection of
high and medium-voltage networks with earthed (grounded),
low-resistance grounded, isolated or compensated neutral point. Metering values
15 Extensive measured values, limit values and metered values


SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Application
50, 50N I>, I>>, I>>>, IE>, IE>>,IE>>> Definite-time overcurrent protection (phase/neutral)
Ip, IEp Inverse overcurrent protection (phase/neutral), phase function with voltage-dependent option
1
50, 51V, 51N
67Ns/50Ns IEE>, IEE>>, IEEp Directional / non-directional sensitive ground-fault detection 2

3
67Ns IIE dir> Directional intermittent ground fault protection
High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection
50BF
87N
4
79 Auto-reclosure
25 Synchro-check 5
V2>, phase-sequence Unbalance-voltage protection and / or phase-sequence monitoring

47
ϑ> Thermal overload protection
6
49

Restart inhibit
66/86

8
27, 59 V<, V> Undervoltage / overvoltage protection 9

59R dV/dt Rate-of-voltage-change protection
32 P<>, Q<> Reverse-power, forward-power protection

10
55 cos φ Power factor protection

11
81R df/dt Rate-of-frequency-change protection
21FL Fault locator

12
13
14
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
4
Fig. 5/129 SIPROTEC 7SJ66 rear view with Fig. 5/130 Definite-time overcurrent protection Fig. 5/131 Inverse-time overcurrent protection
optical Ethernet system interfaces
5
Construction Available inverse-time characteristics
6 Connection techniques and housing with many advantages
Inverse • •
1/3-rack size and 1/2-rack size are the available housing Short inverse •
widths of the SIPROTEC 7SJ66 relays, referred to a 19" module
frame system. This means that previous models can always be
7 replaced. The height is a uniform 244 mm for flush-mounting
housing. All CT-cables can be connected with or without ring
lugs.
8 Reset characteristics
For easier time coordination with electromechanical relays, reset
characteristics according to ANSI C37.112 and IEC 60255-3 /
9 Overcurrent protection (ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51V, 51N)
BS 142 standards are applied.
When using the reset characteristic (disk emulation), a reset
This function is based on the phase-selective measurement of process is initiated after the fault current has disappeared. This
the three phase currents and the ground current (four trans- reset process corresponds to the reverse movement of the Fer-
10 formers). Three definite-time overcurrent protection elements
(DMT) exist both for the phases and for the ground. The current
raris disk of an electromechanical relay (thus: disk emulation).
threshold and the delay time can be set within a wide range. User-definable characteristics
In addition, inverse-time overcurrent protection characteristics
11 (IDMTL) can be activated.
The inverse-time function provides – as an option – voltage-
ground units separately. Up to 20 current/time value pairs may
restraint or voltage-controlled operating modes.
be programmed. They are set as pairs of numbers or graphically
in DIGSI 4.
12 Inrush restraint
13 non-directional and directional normal elements are blocked.

14 functions the initiation thresholds and tripping times can be
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66

Directional phase and ground protection are separate functions.
They operate in parallel to the non-directional overcurrent 1
rately. Definite-time and inverse-time characteristics are offered.
By means of voltage memory, directionality can be determined
2
from the voltage memory. If no voltage exists in the memory, 3
is to be determined via zero-sequence system or negative-
sequence system quantities (selectable). Using negative- 4
impedances.

5
sources with instantaneous tripping, i.e. without the disad-
vantage of time coordination. The directional comparison 6
protection is suitable if the distances between the protection
stations are not significant and pilot wires are available for
signal transmission. In addition to the directional comparison
protection, the directional coordinated overcurrent protection
is used for complete selective backup protection. If operated in
7
a closed-circuit connection, an interruption of the transmission
line is detected.
(Sensitive) directional ground-fault detection 8

(ANSI 64, 67Ns, 67N)
sequence current I0 and zero-sequence voltage V0.
9
For networks with an isolated neutral, the reactive current
component is evaluated; for compensated networks, the active
current component or residual resistive current is evaluated.
For special network conditions, e.g. high-resistance grounded
10
networks with ohmic-capacitive ground-fault current or low- Fig. 5/133 Directional determination using cosine measurements for
resistance grounded networks with ohmic-inductive current, the compensated networks
tripping characteristics can be rotated approximately
± 45 degrees. 11
Two modes of ground-fault direction detection can be imple-
(Sensitive) ground-fault detection
(ANSI 50Ns, 51Ns / 50N, 51N)
It has the following functions:
12
• TRIP via the displacement voltage VE. transformer is connected to a phase-balance neutral current
• Two instantaneous elements or one instantaneous plus one transformer (also called core-balance CT).
The function can also be operated in the insensitive mode as an
13
directional.
• The function can also be operated in the insensitive mode as
an additional short-circuit protection. 14
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
1 Intermittent (re-striking) faults occur due to insulation weak-

nesses in cables or as a result of water penetrating cable joints.
3 achieved by summating the duration of the individual pulses and
one systems period.
4 Directional intermittent ground fault protection (ANSI 67Ns)

intermittent ground faults in resonant grounded cable systems
5 selectively. Intermittent ground faults in resonant grounded

cable systems are usually characterized by the following proper- High-impedance restricted ground-fault protection (ANSI 87N)
ties:
6 hundred amperes) with a duration of under 1 ms
up to several periods, depending on the power system condi
tions and the fault characteristic. When the high-impedance measurement principle is applied, all
current transformers in the protected area are connected in par-
7 • Over longer periods (many seconds to minutes), they can
develop into static faults.
allel and operated on one common resistor of relatively high R
whose voltage is measured (see Fig. 5/134). In the case of 7SJ6
Such intermittent ground faults are frequently caused by weak units, the voltage is measured by detecting the current through
insulation, e.g. due to decreased water resistance of old cables. the (external) resistor R at the sensitive current measurement
8 Ground fault functions based on fundamental component
measured values are primarily designed to detect static ground
input IEE. The varistor V serves to limit the voltage in the event
of an internal fault. It cuts off the high momentary voltage
faults and do not always behave correctly in case of intermittent spikes occurring at transformer saturation. At the same time,
ground faults. The function described here evaluates specifi cally this results in smoothing of the voltage without any noteworthy
9 the ground current pulses and puts them into relation with the
If no faults have occurred and in the event of external faults, the
Phase-balance current protection (ANSI 46) system is at equilibrium, and the voltage through the resistor is
(Negative-sequence protection) approximately zero. In the event of internal faults, an imbalance
10 In line protection, the two-element phase-balance current/
occurs which leads to a voltage and a current flow through the
resistor R.
of high-resistance phase-to-phase faults and phase-to-ground The current transformers must be of the same type and must
faults that are on the low side of a transformer (e.g. with the at least offer a separate core for the high-impedance restricted
11 switch group Dy 5). This provides backup protection for high- ground-fault protection. They must in particular have the same
resistance faults beyond the transformer.
Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF) errors.
12 If a faulted portion of the electrical circuit is not disconnected
initiated using the breaker failure protection which operates
13 relay. Breaker failure is detected if, after a trip command, current
14
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66

The SIPROTEC 7SJ66 units enable the user to easily add on up
to 20 protective functions. To this end, parameter definitions 1
are used to link a standard protection logic with any chosen
characteristic quantity (measured or derived quantity). The
standard logic consists of the usual protection elements such
as the pickup message, the parameter-definable delay time, the
TRIP command, a blocking possibility, etc. The mode of opera-
dv /dt
2
tion for current, voltage, power and power factor quantities can
be three-phase or single-phase. Almost all quantities can be
operated as greater than or less than stages. All stages operate
with protection priority. LSA4113-aen.eps
3
Protection stages/functions attainable on the basis of the avail-
Function ANSI No.

4
I>, IE> 50, 50N
• Starting of the ARC depends on the trip command selection
(e.g. 46, 50, 51, 67)
V<, V>, VE>, dV/dt 27, 59, 59R, 64
3I0>, I1>, I2>, I2/I1, 50N, 46,
5
3V0>, V1><, V2>< 59N, 47
P><, Q>< 32
blocked or operated non-delayed depending on the auto-
cos φ (p.f.)><
f><
55
81O, 81U
reclosure cycle 6
df/dt>< 81R elements can be activated depending on the ready AR
For example, the following can be implemented:

7
• Reverse power protection (ANSI 32R) with an integrated pre-warning element for temperature and
• Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81R) current can be applied. The temperature is calculated using a

8
(ANSI 27/Q) and the energy losses. The calculated temperature is constantly
The undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection protects adjusted accordingly. Thus, account is taken of the previous load
9
For thermal protection of motors (especially the stator) a
tor, must be equipped with voltage and frequency protection further time constant can be set so that the thermal ratios can
devices. An undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection is be detected correctly while the motor is rotating and when it is
power system situations and ensures that the power generation
stopped. The ambient temperature or the temperature of the
10
facility is disconnected from the mains. Furthermore, it ensures monitoring box (resistance-temperature detector box, also
that reconnection only takes place under stable power system called RTD-box). The thermal replica of the overload function
conditions. The associated criteria can be parameterized. is automatically adapted to the ambient conditions. If there is
no RTD-box it is assumed that the ambient temperatures are 11
Synchro-check (ANSI 25) constant.
In case of switching ON the circuit- breaker, the units can check
Settable dropout delay times
whether the two subnetworks are synchronized.
Voltage-, frequency- and phase-angle-differences are being If the devices are used in parallel with electromechanical relays
12
checked to determine whether synchronous conditions are in networks with intermittent faults, the long dropout times of
existent. the electromechanical devices (several hundred milliseconds)
Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79) grading is only possible if the dropout time is approximately the 13
Multiple reclosures can be defined by the user and lockout will same. This is why the parameter of dropout times can be defined
occur if a fault is present after the last reclosure. The following for certain functions such as time-over-current protection,
• 3-pole ARC for all types of faults 14
delayed auto-reclosures (DAR)
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Motor protection
1 Restart inhibit (ANSI 66/86)

If a motor is started up too many times in
succession, the rotor can be subject to
thermal overload, especially the upper
2 edges of the bars. The rotor temperature

is calculated from the stator current. The
reclosing lockout only permits start-up
of the motor if the rotor has sufficient
thermal reserves for a complete start-up
3 (see Fig. 5/136).
Emergency start-up
This function disables the reclosing lockout
4 via a binary input by storing the state of
the thermal replica as long as the binary
input is active. It is also possible to reset
the thermal replica to zero.

One temperature monitoring box with a
Fig. 5/136
total of 12 measuring sensors can be used
for temperature monitoring and detection
6 by the protection relay. The thermal status of motors, generators
and transformers can be monitored with this device. Addition-
Sudden high loads can cause slowing down and blocking of
ally, the temperature of the bearings of rotating machines are the motor and mechanical damages. The rise of current due
monitored for limit value violation. The temperatures are being to a load jam is being monitored by this function (alarm and
tripping).
7 measured with the help of temperature detectors at various
locations of the device to be protected. This data is transmitted The overload protection function is too slow and therefore not
to the protection relay via one or two temperature monitoring suitable under these circumstances.
boxes (see “Accessories”, page 5/115).
The negative-sequence / phase-balance current protection detects
unwanted start-ups that might occur in the event of excessive a phase failure or load unbalance due to network asymmetry and
load torque or excessive voltage drops within the motor, or if the protects the rotor from impermissible temperature rise.
9 rotor is locked. Rotor temperature is calculated from measured
stator current. The tripping time is calculated according to the Undercurrent monitoring (ANSI 37)
following equation: With this function, a sudden drop in current, which can occur
due to a reduced motor load, is detected. This may be due to
10 ⎛ I ⎞2 Motor statistics
t = ⎜ A ⎟ ⋅ TA
⎝I ⎠ Essential information on start-up of the motor (duration, cur-
rent, voltage) and general information on number of starts, total
11 IMOTOR START = Pickup current to detect a motor start
operating time, total down time, etc. are saved as statistics in
the device.
t = Tripping time
Voltage protection
IA = Rated motor starting current
12 TA = Tripping time at rated motor starting current
(2 times, for warm and cold motor)
The characteristic (equation) can be adapted optimally to the operate either with phase-to-phase, phase-to-ground, positive
13 state of the motor by applying different tripping times TA in
phase-sequence or negative phase-sequence system voltage.
14 prolonged start-up and reduced voltage (and reduced start-up
machines). Applications include the isolation of generators or
motors from the network to avoid undesired operating states
A binary signal is set by a speed sensor to detect a blocked rotor. and a possible loss of stability. Proper operating conditions
15 An instantaneous tripping is effected. of electrical machines are best evaluated with the positive-

SIPROTEC 7SJ66
wide frequency range (25 to 70 Hz). Even when falling below

this frequency range the function continues to work, however,
with a greater tolerance band. 1
The function can operate either with phase-to-phase, phase-to-
ground or positive phase-sequence voltage and can be moni-
tored with a current criterion. Three-phase and single-phase
connections are possible. 2
Frequency protection can be used for overfrequency and under-
are protected from unwanted speed deviations. Unwanted 3
can be removed at a specified frequency setting.
There are four elements (selectable as overfrequency or
underfrequency) and each element can be delayed separately. 4
Blocking of the frequency protection can be performed if using a
binary input or by using an undervoltage element.
5
(miles) and in percent of the line length.
Circuit-breaker wear monitoring 6
remaining service life of a circuit-breaker (CB) allow CB mainte- Commissioning
nance intervals to be aligned to their actual degree of wear. The Commissioning could hardly be easier and is fully supported by
benefit lies in reduced maintenance costs. DIGSI 4. The status of the binary inputs can be read individually
7
wear or the remaining service life of circuit-breakers that takes operation of switching elements (circuit-breakers, disconnect
into account the arc-chamber's physical conditions when the CB devices) can be checked using the switching functions of the bay
opens. This is why various methods of determining CB wear have
8
justice to these, the devices offer several methods: information to the control center during maintenance, the bay
• ΣI
• Σ Ix, with x = 1... 3 indications with test marking for test purposes can be connected 9
• Σ i 2t to a control and protection system.
The devices additionally offer a new method for determining the Test operation
10
The CB manufacturers double-logarithmic switching cycle
diagram (see Fig. 5/137) and the breaking current at the time Control and automatic functions
of contact opening serve as the basis for this method. After CB
opening, the two-point method calculates the number of still
Control
11
possible switching cycles. To this end, the two points P1 and P2
support all control and monitoring functions that are required
only have to be set on the device. These are specified in the CB's
technical data.
processes.
12
exceeds the limit value during determination of the remaining The status of primary equipment or auxiliary devices can be
service life. obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated to the

SIPROTEC 7SJ66 via binary inputs. Therefore it is possible to
detect and indicate both the OPEN and CLOSED position or a
13
Additional functions, which are not time critical, can be imple- fault or intermediate circuit-breaker or auxiliary contact position.
mented via the CFC using measured values. Typical functions The switchgear or circuit-breaker can be controlled via:
include reverse power, voltage controlled overcurrent, phase
angle detection, and zero-sequence voltage detection.
– binary inputs
14
– DIGSI 4
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Functions

1 (CFC), specific functions for the automation of switchgear or
2 Switching authority
communication.
3 possible. The following sequence of switching authority is laid
Command processing
7SJ66_breit_W11.png
4 includes the processing of single and double commands with
hardware and software, checking of the external process,
5 automatic command termination after output. Here are some
trip contacts
6 • User-definable bay interlocks
• Operating sequences combining several switching operations Fig. 5/138 SIPROTEC 7SJ663 rear view with communication ports
such as control of circuit-breakers, disconnectors and ground-
ing switches
7 • Triggering of switching operations, indications or alarm by Switchgear cubicles for high/medium voltage
combination with existing information All units are designed specifically to meet the requirements of
Assignment of feedback to command high/medium-voltage applications.
8 The positions of the circuit-breaker or switching devices and

In general, no separate measuring instruments (e.g., for current,
voltage, frequency, …) or additional control components are
inputs are logically assigned to the corresponding command necessary.
outputs. The unit can therefore distinguish whether the indica- Measured values
9 tion change is a consequence of switching operation or whether
it is a spontaneous change of state.
voltage along with the power factor, frequency, active and reac-
Chatter disable tive power. The following functions are available for measured
Chatter disable feature evaluates whether, in a configured value processing:
10 period of time, the number of status changes of indication input
• Voltages VL1, VL2, VL3, VL1L2, VL2L3, VL3L1
Binary indications can be filtered or delayed.
• Frequency
12 indication input. The indication is passed on only if the indica-
tion voltage is still present after a set period of time. In the • Mean as well as minimum and maximum current and voltage
event of indication delay, there is a wait for a preset time. The values
information is passed on only if the indication voltage is still • Operating hours counter
A further indication (or a command) can be derived from an Limit values are monitored using programmable logic in the
existing indication. Group indications can also be formed. The CFC. Commands can be derived from this limit value indica-
tion.
14 volume of information to the system interface can thus be
reduced and restricted to the most important signals. • Zero suppression
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Communication
Communication

standards.
USB interface 2
There is a USB interface on the front of the relay. All the relay
functions can be parameterized on PC by using DIGSI.
Commissioning tools and fault analysis are built into the DIGSI
program and are used through this interface. 3
Rear interfaces
4
telegrams in IRIG-B or DCF77 format into the units via time Fig. 5/139 IEC 60870-5-103: Radial electrical connection
5
through this interface. The units can exchange data through
this interface via Ethernet and IEC 61850 protocol and can also
be operated by DIGSI.
6
number of protection units via DIGSI. It also allows commu-
nication via modem. For special applications, a temperature
monitoring box (RTD box) can be connected to this interface. 7
System interface protocols
IEC 61850 protocol

8
9
systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to the units via the
Ethernet bus is also possible with DIGSI.
Fig. 5/140 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol IEC 61850, electrical and optical ring 10
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is an international standard for the
transmission of protective data and fault recordings. All messages DNP3
DNP (Distributed Network Protocol, version 3) is a messaging-
based communication protocol. SIPROTEC 7SJ66 is fully Level
11
Redundant solutions are also possible. Optionally it is possible to 1 and Level 2-compliant with DNP3, which is supported by a
read out and alter individual parameters (only possible with the number of protection units manufactures.
redundant module). 12
Modbus RTU protocol
This serial protocol is mainly used in industry and by power supply
corporations, and is supported by a number of unit manufacturers.
SIPROTEC units function as Modbus slaves, making their informa-
13
tion available to a master or receiving information from it. A
time-stamped event list is available.
14
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Selection table
Selection table for multifunctional overcurrent protection devices
1 Device 7SJ80 7SJ61 7SJ62 7SJ63 7SJ64 7SJ82 7SJ66
Multifunctional protection 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
functions
2 CTs
VTs
4
0/3
4
0
4
3/4
4
3
4
4
4
0/4
4
Binary inputs 3 - 11 3 - 11 8 - 11 11 - 37 7 - 48 11 - 23 16 - 36
incl. Life contact
3 Binary outputs 5-9 4-9 6-9 8 - 19 5 - 26 8 - 16 7 - 24
Spring-type terminals - - - - - - 9
DC 24 - 250 V DC 24 - 250 V DC 24 - 250 V DC 24 - 250 V DC 24 - 250 V DC 24 - 250 V DC 110 - 250 V
4 Auxiliary voltage
AC 115 - 230 V AC 115 - 230 V AC 115 - 230 V AC 115 - 230 V AC 115 - 230 V AC 115 - 230 V AC 115 - 230 V
UL listing 9 9 9 9 9 9 -
Surface mounting case z z z z z - -
5 Detached on-site operation

- - - z z - -
panel
Languages ge/en/es/fr/it/ ge/en/es/fr/it/ru ge/en/es/fr/it/ru ge/en/es/fr ge/en/es/fr/it/ru ge/en/pt/es/ru en/es/ru

ru/ch
6 Front USB 9 - - - - 9 9
Interfaces exchangeable 9 9 9 9 9 9 -
7 IEC 61850 z z z z z z z
IEC 60870-5-103 z z z z z z z (elec.)
Modbus RTU z z z z z z z (elec.)

8 PROFIBUS FMS - z z z z - -
PROFIBUS DP z z z z z - -
9 PROFINET I/O z z z - z - -
DNP3 serial/TCP z z z - z z z
RSTP 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 PRP 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
HSR 9 9 9 9 9 9 -
11 9 basic
- not available
z optional
12
13
14
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Typical connections
Typical connections

Standard connection
7
Fig. 5/141 Residual current circuit without directional element Fig. 5/142 Sensitive ground-current detection without directional element
10
11
12
Fig. 5/143 Residual current circuit with directional element
13
14
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Typical connections
1 The figure shows the connection of

two phase-to-ground voltages and the
2 connection maintains maximum precision

9
10
Connection for the synchro-check /
function /
/
11 The 3-phase system is connected as refer-
(any voltage)
case a busbar voltage, that has to be 7SJ66
12 checked for synchronism.
R14
VL1
R15
VL2
R5
R16
13 VL3
R17
R18 Vsync
14 Fig. 5/146 Measuring of the busbar voltage and the outgoing feeder
voltage for the synchro-check
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66


– 2
non-directional


3
4

protection
5

6
7
Undervoltage releases
8
Example: 9
possible.
Automatic tripping takes place when 10
limit. In Fig. 5/147, tripping occurs due to Fig. 5/147 Undervoltage release with make contact (50, 51)
opening of the live status contact upon 11
circuiting the trip coil in event of network
fault.
In Fig. 5/148 tripping is by failure of auxil- 12
iary voltage and by interruption of tripping
circuit in the event of network failure. Upon
circuit is also interrupted, since contact 13
position.
14
Fig. 5/148 Undervoltage trip with locking contact (trip signal 50 is inverted) 15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
1 One or two binary inputs can be used for

interrupted.
2 Lockout (ANSI 86)
3 lockout state is also stored in the event of
4 Reverse-power protection for dual

supply (ANSI 32R)
5 fault on one of the infeeds it should be

6 directional devices are needed which

detect a short-circuit current or a power
7 current. It cannot be used to deactivate
low-current faults. Reverse-power
protection can be set far below the rated
power. This ensures that it also detects
8 power feedback into the line in the event
of low-current faults with levels far below
the load current.
Reverse-power protection is performed via
9 the “flexible protection functions” of the
SIPROTEC 7SJ66.
10
Fig. 5/150 Reverse-power protection for dual supply
11
12
13
14
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Multifunction protection relay with local control

12345 6 7
7SJ66 -
8 9 101112 13141516 171819
- - 1
Housing 1/3 19”, 4 x U, 4 x I, 16 BI, 7 BO, 1 life contact 1
Housing 1/3 19”, 4 x U, 4 x I, 22 BI, 10 BO, 1 life contact
Housing 1/2 19", 4 x U, 4 x I, 36 BI, 23 BO, 1 life contact, 4 function keys
2
3
2
Measuring inputs
Iph = 1 A, IE = 1 A (min. = 0.05 A) 3
Iph = 1 A, IE = sensitive (min. = 0.001 A)
Iph = 5 A, IE = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A)
4
Iph = 5 A, IE = sensitive (min. = 0.001 A)
5
Auxiliary voltage
DC 110 to 250 V, AC 115 to 230 V, threshold binary input DC 69 V 5
DC 110 to 250 V, AC 115 to 230 V, threshold binary input DC 138V
Construction
6
6
Flush-mounting case, screw-type terminals, 8-line text display D
Flush-mounting case, spring-type terminals (direct connection), screw-type terminals for CT connec-
tion (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs), 8-line text display
Flush-mounting case, screw-type terminals, graphical display
E
J
7
Flush-mounting case, spring-type terminals (direct connection),
screw-type terminals for CT connection (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs), graphical display K
8
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: English (language can be changed) B
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Spanish (language can be changed)
Region RU, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: Russian (language can be changed)
E
G
9
System interface (Port B)
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, RS485 1) 2
9
10
Modbus, RS485 1) L 0 D
DNP3, RS485 1) 9 L 0 G
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45-connector 2) 9 L 0 R
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC-connector 2) 9 L 0 S 11
DNP3 + IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45-connector 2) 9 L 2 R
DNP3 + IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC-connector 2) 9 L 2 S

No interface
0
2
12
DIGSI 4 / Modem / RTD-Box, electrical RS485 6
Ethernet interface (DIGSI, RTD-Box, no IEC61850), RJ45-connector
Continued on next page 13
14
1) only available with position 12 = 0 or 2
2) only available with position 12 = 0 or 6
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
1 Multifunction protection relay with local control

12345 6 7
7SJ66 -
8 9 101112 13141516 171819
- -
ANSI No.
Basic version Control F A
2 50/51
50N/51N
Overcurrent protection I>, I>>, I>>>, Ip
50N/51N Insensitive ground-fault protection via
3 derived from current): Additional time-overcurrent
51 V Voltage-dependent inverse-time overcurrent protection
4 37
47 Phase sequence
5 74TC Trip circuit supervision, 4 setting groups, cold-load pickup

Inrush blocking
86 Lockout
Basic+ Basic version (see above), Intermittent earth-fault F E
V,P,f 27/59 Under-/overvoltage
6 81O/U
27Q
7 Basic + Basic version (see above) P E
V,P,f IEF 27/59 Under-/overvoltage
27Q Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection

Basic + Basic version (see above) F C
Dir 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and
9 ground
Basic + Basic version (see above) F G

Dir V,P,f 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and
ground
10 27/59
81O/U
Under-/overvoltage
11 rate-of-frequency-change protection
Basic + Basic version (see above) P G
Dir V,P,f IEF 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and
ground
12 27/59
81O/U
Under-/overvoltage
13 Basic +
Basic version (see above) P C
Dir IEF 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent, phases and
ground
14 Continued on
next page
V, P, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection 1) only with position 7 = 1 or 5 (non-sensitive ground current input)
Dir = Directional overcurrent protection
15 IEF = Intermittent ground fault

SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Multifunction protection relay with local control

12345 6 7
7SJ66 -
8 9 101112 13141516 171819
- - 1
ANSI No.
Basic + Basic version included F D
Sens.earth-f-det.
Dir REF2)
67/67N
67Ns
phases and ground
2
67Ns Directional intermittent ground fault protection
87N High-impedance restricted earth fault
P D 3
Basic + Sens.earth-f-det. Basic version included
Dir IEF REF2) 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent,
phases and ground
67Ns
67Ns
Directional intermittent ground fault protection 4
Intermittent earth-fault
F F
Basic + Dir. Sens.earth-f-det.
V,P,f REF2) 67Ns
Basic version included
5
81O/U
27Q
6
Basic + Dir. Sens.earth-f-det. Basic version included F B 7

REF2) 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
Basic + Dir. Sens.earth-f-det. Basic version included H F

8
Motor V,P,f REF2) 67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
48/14
66/86
Starting ime supervision, locked rotor
Restart inhibit
9
51M Motor load jam protection
Motor statistics
81O/U
27Q
10
Basic + Sens.earth-f-det. Basic version included

H H
11
Motor Dir V,P,f REF2) 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent,
phases and ground
67Ns
67Ns
87N
Directional intermittent ground fault protection
12
48/14 Starting ime supervision, locked rotor
51M
27/59
Motor load jam protection
Motor statistics
Under-/overvoltage
13
14
V, P, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection REF = Restricted earth fault Continued on
next page
Dir
IEF
Motor = Motor protection
2) For isolated/compensated networks, only with postition 7=2,6 (sensitive earth current input) 15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
1 SIPROTEC 7SJ66 multifunction protection relay and bay controller

12345 6 7
7SJ66 -
8 9 101112 13141516 171819
-
ANSI No. Description

Basic + Basic version included RH
2 Dir. S.EF Motor2) 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent,

phases and ground
67Ns Directional sensitive ground-fault detection
3 48/14
66/86
Restart inhibit
Motor statistics
4 81O/U
27Q
5 Basic + Basic version included HG

Motor Dir V,P,f 67/67N Direction determination for overcurrent,
phases and ground
48/14 Starting ime supervision, locked rotor
6 66/86
51M
Restart inhibit
Motor load jam protection
Motor statistics
7 27Q Undervoltage-controlled reactive power protection
8 Basic +
Motor 48/14
Basic version included
HA

Motor statistics
9 Measuring/fault recording
13
With fault recording 1

Slave pointer, average values, 3
min/max-values with fault recording
10 16
ARC, fault locator, synchro-check
without 0
79 with autoreclose 1
11 21FL
79,21FL
with fault locator
with 79 and fault locator
2
3
25 with synchro-check 3) 4
25, 79, 21FL with synchro-check 3), with auto reclose, with fault recorder 7
12
13
14
Motor = Motor protection
V, P, f = Voltage, power, frequency protection
15 Dir
IEF
2) Only with position 7 = 2, 6 (sensitive earth current input).
3) Synchrocheck (no asynchronous switching), one function group

SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Temperature monitoring box

RTD-box TR1200 (RS 485) 7XV5662-6AD10
1
RTD-box TR1200 IP (Ethernet) 7XV5662-8AD10
Varistor / Voltage Arrester

Voltage arrester for high-impedance REF protection 2
125 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S 256 C53207-A401-D76-1
240 Vrms; 600 A; 1S/S 1088 C53207-A401-D77-1
Manual for 7SJ66

English C53000-B1140-C383-x 1)
3
10
11
12
13
14
1) x = please inquire for latest edition (exact Order No.)
15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Connection diagram
1
Q1 BO1 P3
IA
Q2 P4
2 Q3 IB
BO2 P5
Q4 P6
Q5 IC BO3 R7 P7
3 Q6
BO4 R7 P8
Q7 IN/INs P9
Q8
BO5 R7 P11
4 R1 Q2 VA BO6 R7 P12
R2 Q2 VB
P10
R3 VC
K11
5 R4
BO7
R7
R7 K13
R5 V4 K12
R6
6 R7 K15
+ Life contact
F1 K16
- BI1
F2
7 F3 +
= +
BI2 (~) P1
- Power Supply
F4
+ =
- P2
F6
8 F5 - BI3
F7 + BI4 System Interface

B
F8 + BI5 RJ45
9 F9 -
Service interface
F11 + BI6 C
RJ45
F12 + BI7
10 F10 -
+
Time Synchronization
RJ45
A
K1 BI8
K2 + BI9
+ Front PC Interface
11 K3
+
BI10 USB
K4 BI11
K5 + BI12
+ BI13
12 K6
K7 + BI14
Grounding on the Rear Wall
K8 + BI15
K9 + BI16
13 K10 -
14
15 Fig. 5/151 SIPROTEC 7SJ661 connection diagram

SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Connection diagram
Q1 IA BO1 P3 1
Q2 P4
Q3 BO2 P5
IB
P6
Q4
Q5 IC
2
BO3 R7 P7
Q6
BO4 R7 P8
Q7 IN/INs P9
Q8
BO5 R7 P11
3
R1 Q2 VA BO6 R7 P12
R2 Q2 VB
P10
R3 VC
R7 K11 4
R4
BO7 R7 K13
R5 V4 K12
R6
BO8 R7 J8 5
+ BO9 R7 J9
F1
- BI1 J10
F2
F3 +
BI2
BO10
1 2
3 2
J11 6
F4 - J12
F6 +
- BI3
F5
F7 + BI4
7
F8 + BI5
F9 -
K15
F11 +
+
BI6 Life contact
R7
K16
8
F12 BI7
F10 -
K1 + BI8 = + P1
K2 + BI9
Power Supply
=
( ~)
- P2 9
K3 + BI10
K4 + BI11
+ System Interface
B
K5
K6 +
BI12
BI13
RJ45 10
K7 + BI14 Service interface
C
K8 + BI15 RJ45
K9 +
-
BI16
Time Synchronization
11
K10 A
RJ45
J1 + BI17
+ Front PC Interface
J2
J3 +
BI18
BI19 USB 12
J4 + BI20
J5 + BI21
J6 +
-
BI22 Grounding on the Rear Wall 13
J7
14
Fig. 5/152 SIPROTEC 7SJ662 connection diagram 15

SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Connection diagram
1 Q1 IA BO1 P3
Q2 P4
Q3 BO2 P5
IB
2 Q4 P6
Q5 IC BO3 R7 P7
Q6
BO4 R7 P8
3 Q7
Q8
IN/INs P9
BO5 R7 P11
R1 Q2 VA BO6 R7 P12
4 R2 Q2 VB
VC
P10
R3
BO7 K6
R4
K7
5 R5 V4 BO8 R7 K8
R6 BO9 R7 K9
+ BI1 K10
F1
6 F2 + BI2 R7 L14
F3 + BI3 Life contact R7 L15
F4 + BI4 L16
7 F5 + BI5
F6 + BI6 = + P1
+ Power Supply ( ~)
F7
+
BI7
=
- P2
8 F8
-
BI8
F9
F10 + BI9
+ System Interface
F11 BI10 B
9 F12 -
RJ45
K1 + Service interface
BI11 C
K2 - RJ45
10 K3 +
BI12 Time Synchronization
K4 - A
RJ45
H1 + BI13
11 H2 +
+
BI14 Front PC Interface
H3 BI15 USB
H4 + BI16
+
12 H5
+
BI17
BI18
Grounding on the Rear Wall
H6
H7 + BI19
H8 + BI20
13 H9 -
14 1
Continue Next Figure
2
Continue Next Figure
15 Fig. 5/153 SIPROTEC 7SJ663 connection diagram

SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Connection diagram
1
Continue from Previous Continue from Previous
Figure Figure
2
1 2
BO10 R7 K11 3
BO11 R7 K13
H10 + BI21 K12 4
H11 + BI22 R7 K14
H12 -
BO12 R7 K15
M1 +
- BI23 K16 5
M2
M3 + BO13 M6
BI24
M4 - M7 6
G1 + BI25 BO14 R7 M8
G2 + BI26 BO15 R7 M9
G3 + BI27 M10 7
G4 + BI28 BO16 R7 M11
+
G5 BI29 BO17 R7 M13 8
G6 + BI30 M12
G7 + BI31 R7 M14
G8 + BI32 BO18 R7 M15
9
G9 -
M16
G10 + BI33
G11 + BI34 BO19 L6 10
G12 - L7
+ BO20 L8
L1
BI35
R7
11
L2 - BO21 R7 L9
L3 + L10
- BI36 12
L4 BO22 R7 L11
BO23 R7 L13
L12 13
14
Fig. 5/154 SIPROTEC 7SJ663 connection diagram 15

SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Dimensions
1 29.5 172 20
150
145
Mounting Plate
2
R P J F
3 244
266
Q N K
4
A
B
5 C
D
6
Side View Rear View
7
146+2
9 Ø6
255.8 ± 0.3
245 +1
10
11 Ø5
12
5.4
13.2 105 ±0.3
131.5 ±0.3
13 7.3
Dimensional Drawing
(Front View)
14
15 Fig. 5/155 Dimensional drawing for SIPROTEC 7SJ66 (housing size 1/3)

SIPROTEC 7SJ66
Dimensions
172 20
29.5
225
Dimensions in mm 1
Mounting Plate 220
`
266
244
6
Side View Rear View
221 7
7.3 206.5
180 8
Ø6 9
10
255.8
245
11
Ø5 or M4
12
5.4
13.2
Dimensional Drawing
(Front View) 13
14
Fig. 5/156 Dimensional drawing of a SIPROTEC 7SJ66 (housing size 1/2)

15
SIPROTEC 7SJ66
10
11
12
13
14
15
Distance Protection
Page
SIPROTEC 7SA6 distance protection relay

for all voltage levels 6/3
SIPROTEC 7SA522 distance protection relay

for transmission lines 6/39
6
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Distance Protection 7SA6
SIPROTEC 7SA6 distance protection relay for all voltage levels
Function overview
• Non-switched distance protection with
6 measuring systems (21/21N)
• High resistance ground-fault protection
for single and three-pole tripping (50N, 2
51N, 67N)
• Ground-fault detection in isolated and
resonant-grounded networks
• Tele (pilot) protection (85)
3
• Fault locator (FL)
• Power-swing detection/tripping (68/68T)
• Phase overcurrent protection (50/51/67) 4
LSP2318-afp.tif
• Switch-onto-fault protection (50HS)
• STUB bus overcurrent protection
(50STUB)
• Overvoltage/undervoltage protection
5
(59/27)
• Over/underfrequency protection 81O/U)
Fig. 6/1 SIPROTEC 7SA6 distance protection relay

• Auto-reclosure (79) 6
• Synchro-check (25)
• Breaker failure protection (50BF)
Description • Thermal overload protection (49)
7
The SIPROTEC 7SA6 distance protection relay is a universal Control function
device for protection, control and automation on the basis of the • Commands for control of CBs and isolators
SIPROTEC 4 system. Its high level of flexibility makes it suitable
to be implemented at all voltage levels. With this relay you are
ideally equipped for the future: it offers security of investment
Monitoring functions 8
• Trip circuit supervision (74TC)
and also saves on operating costs.
• Self-supervision of the relay
– High-speed tripping time
– Impedance setting range allows very small settings for the
• Measured-value supervision
• Event logging/fault logging
9
protection of very short lines • Oscillographic fault recording
– Self-setting detection for power swing frequencies up to 7 Hz • Switching statistics
– Current transformer saturation detector prevents non-selective Front design
10
tripping by distance protection in the event of CT saturation.
• Easy operation with numeric keys
– Phase-segregated teleprotection for improved selectivity and • Function keys
availability
• LEDs for local alarm 11
– Digital relay-to-relay communication by means of an inte- • PC front port for convenient relay setting
grated serial protection data interface
– Adaptive auto-reclosure (ADT)
• Front interface for connecting a PC 12
• System interface for connecting to a control system via various
protocols
– IEC 61850 Ethernet
– IEC 60870-5-103 protocol 13
– PROFIBUS DP
– DNP 3
• 1 serial protection data interface for teleprotection
• Rear-side service/modem interface 14
• Time synchronization via
– IRIG-B or DCF 77 or
– system interface
15
Application
Application
1 The distance protection relay 7SA6 is non-

switched incorporating all the additional
functions for protection of overhead lines
and cables at all voltage levels from 5 to
2 765 kV.
All methods of neutral point connection
(resonant grounding, isolated, solid or
low-resistance grounding) are reliably
3 dealt with. The unit can issue single or
three-pole TRIP commands as well as
CLOSE commands. Consequently both
single-pole, three-pole and multiple auto-
4 reclosure is possible.
Teleprotection functions as well as
ground-fault protection and sensitive
ground-fault detection are included.
5 Power swings are detected reliably and
non-selective tripping is prevented. The
unit operates reliably and selectively 1) Teleprotection schemes can use conventional
even under the most difficult network signaling or serial data exchange
6 conditions.
Cost-effective power system Fig. 6/2 Function diagram

management
7 The SIPROTEC 4 units are numerical relays which also provide

control and monitoring functions and therefore support the ANSI Protection functions
user in view of a cost-effective power system management. The
21/21N Distance protection
security and reliability of power supply is increased as a result of
8 minimizing the use of hardware.

The local operation has been designed according to ergonomic
FL Fault locator
50N/51N/67N Directional ground-fault protection

criteria. Large, easy-to-read backlit displays are provided.
50/51/67 Backup overcurrent protection
The SIPROTEC 4 units have a uniform design and a degree
9 of functionality which represents a benchmark-level of 50 STUB STUB-bus overcurrent stage
performance in protection and control. If the requirements
for protection, control or interlocking change, it is possible in 68/68T Power swing detection/tripping
the majority of cases to implement such changes by means of Teleprotection for distance protection
10 parameterization using DIGSI 4 without having to change the
hardware.
85/21
Weak-infeed protection
27WI
The use of powerful microcontrollers and the application of 85/67N Teleprotection for ground-fault protection
digital measured-value conditioning and processing largely sup-
11 presses the influence of higher-frequency transients, harmonics 50HS Switch-onto-fault protection
and DC components. Breaker-failure protection
50BF
59/27 Overvoltage/undervoltage protection
12 81O/U Over/underfrequency protection
25 Synchro-check
13 79 Auto-reclosure
86 Lockout (CLOSE command interlocking)
14 49 Thermal overload protection
IEE Sensitive ground-fault detection
15
Construction
Construction
Connection techniques and housing 1

⅓, ½, ²⁄₃, and -rack sizes:
These are the available housing widths
of the 7SA6 relays, referred to a 2
19" module frame system. This means
replaced. The height is a uniform 245 mm
LSP2174-afp.tif
3
LSP2166-afp.tif
for flush-mounting housings and 266 mm
nected with or without ring lugs. Plug-in
terminals are available as an option. 4
cable harnesses. In the case of surface Fig. 6/3 Flush-mounting housing Fig. 6/4 Rear view of flush-mounting housing
mounting on a panel, the connection with screw-type terminals with covered connection terminals
and wirings 5
communication interfaces are located
in a sloped case at the top and bottom
of the housing. The housing can also
be supplied optionally with a detached
6
operator panel (refer to Fig. 6/5), in order
to allow optimum operation for all types
of applications.
7
LSP2244-afp.eps
9
Fig. 6/5 Flush-mounting housing with plug-in terminals and detached operator panel
10
11
12
LSP2219-afp.eps
13
LSP2237-afp.tif
14
screw-type terminals sloped case in a surface-mounting
housing 15
1 Distance protection (ANSI 21, 21N)

The main function of the 7SA6 is a non-
switched distance protection. By parallel
2 calculation and monitoring of all six
impedance loops, a high degree of
sensitivity and selectivity is achieved
for all types of fault. The shortest
3 tripping time is less than one cycle. All

methods of neutral-point connection
(resonant grounding, isolated, solid or
low-resistance grounding) are reliably
dealt with. Single-pole and three-pole
4 tripping is possible. Overhead lines can be
equipped with or without series capacitor
compensation.
5 Four pickup methods

The following pickup methods can be
Fig. 6/8 Impedance fault detection Z< with quadrilateral characteristic
employed alternatively:
• Overcurrent pickup I>>
6 • Voltage-dependent overcurrent pickup

V/I
• Voltage-dependent and phase angle-
dependent overcurrent pickup V / I / φ
7 • Impedance pickup Z<

Load zone
The pickup mode with quadrilateral
impedance pickup (Z<) is fitted with a
8 variable load zone. In order to guarantee
a reliable discrimination between load
operation and short-circuit (especially
on long high loaded lines), the relay is
9 equipped with a selectable load encroach-
ment characteristic. Impedances within
this load encroachment characteristic pre-
vent the distance zones from unwanted Fig. 6/9 Voltage and angle-dependent Fig. 6/10 Angle pickup for the V / I / φ fault
10 tripping.
Absolute phase-selectivity
overcurrent fault detection V / I / φ detection
The 7SA6 distance protection incorpo-

rates a well-proven, highly sophisticated
11 phase selection algorithm. The pickup of
unfaulted phases is reliably eliminated.
This phase selection algorithm achieves
single-pole tripping and correct distance
measurement in a wide application range.
12 Interference to distance measurement
caused by parallel lines can be compen-
sated by taking the ground current of the
parallel system into account.
13 This parallel line compensation can be
taken into account both for distance
measurement and for fault locating.
14
15 Fig. 6/11 Distance zones with circle characteristic

Seven distance zones

Six independant distance zones and one
separate overreach zone are available.
Each distance zone has dedicated time
1
stages, partially separate for single-phase
and three-phase faults. Ground faults
are detected by monitoring the ground
current 3I0 and the zero-sequence voltage
2
3V0. The quadrilateral tripping charac-
teristic allows use of separate settings
for the X and the R directions. Different
R settings can be employed for ground 3
and phase faults. This characteristic
offers advantages in the case of faults
with fault resistance. For applications
LSP2209-afp.tif
to medium-voltage cables with low line
angles, it may be advantageous to select
4
the distance zones with the optional circle
characteristic.
All the distance protection zones can be
set to forward, reverse or non-directional. Fig. 6/12 Power swing current and voltage wave forms 5
Optimum direction detection Tele (pilot) protection for distance protection (ANSI 85-21)
Use of voltages, which are not involved with the short-circuit
loop, and of voltage memories for determination of the fault
direction ensure that the results are always reliable.
A teleprotection function is available for fast clearance of faults
up to 100 % of the line length. The following operating modes 6
may be selected:
Elimination of interference signals • POTT
Digital filters render the unit immune to interference signals
contained in the measured values. In particular, the influence of
DC components, capacitive voltage transformers and frequency
• Directional comparison pickup
• Unblocking
7
changes is considerably reduced. A special measuring method is • PUTT acceleration with pickup
employed in order to assure protection selectivity during satura- • PUTT acceleration with Z1B
tion of the current transformers.
• Blocking 8
Measuring voltage monitoring • Pilot-wire comparison
Tripping of the distance protection is blocked automatically in
• Reverse interlocking
the event of failure of the measuring voltage, thus preventing
spurious tripping.
The measuring voltage is monitored by the integrated fuse fail-
• DUTT, direct underreaching zone transfer trip (together with
Direct Transfer Trip function).
9
ure monitor. Distance protection is blocked if either the fuse fail- The carrier send and receive signals are available as binary inputs
ure monitor or the auxiliary contact of the voltage transformer and outputs and can be freely assigned to each physical relay input
protection switch operates and in this case the EMERGENCY
definite-time overcurrent protection can be activated.
or output. At least one channel is required for each direction. 10
Common transmission channels are powerline carrier, micro-
Fault locator wave radio and fiber-optic links. A serial protection data inter-
face for direct connection to a digital communication network or
The integrated fault locator calculates the fault impedance
and the distance-to-fault. The results are displayed in ohms,
fiber-optic link is available. 11
kilometers (miles) and in percent of the line length. Parallel 7SA6 also permits the transfer of phase-selective signals. This
line compensation and load current compensation for high- feature is particularly advantageous as it ensures reliable single-
resistance faults is also available. pole tripping, if single-pole faults occur on different lines. The
transmission methods are suitable also for lines with three ends 12
Power swing detection (ANSI 68, 68T) (three-terminal lines). Phase-selective transmission is also pos-
Dynamic transient reactions, for instance short-circuits, load sible with multi-end application, if some user-specific linkages
are implemented by way of the integrated CFC logic.
fluctuations, auto-reclosures or switching operations can cause
power swings in the transmission network. During power During disturbances in the signaling channel receiver or on the
13
swings, large currents along with small voltages can cause transmission circuit, the teleprotection function can be blocked
unwanted tripping of distance protection relays. To avoid via a binary input signal without losing the zone selectivity.
uncontrolled tripping of the distance protection and to achieve
controlled tripping in the event of loss of synchronism, the
7SA6 relay is equipped with an efficient power swing detection
The control of the overreach zone Z1B (zone extension) can be
switched over to the auto-reclosure function. Transient blocking
14
function. Power swings can be detected under symmetrical load (current reversal guard) is provided for all the release and block-
conditions as well as during single-pole auto-reclosures. ing methods in order to suppress interference signals during
tripping of parallel lines.
15
Direct transfer tripping
1 Under certain conditions on the power system it is necessary to

execute remote tripping of the circuit-breaker. The 7SA6 relay is
equipped with phase-selective “external trip inputs” that can be
assigned to the received inter-trip signal for this purpose.
2 Weak-infeed protection:
echo and/or trip (ANSI 27 WI)
To prevent delayed tripping of permissive schemes during weak
or zero infeed situations, an echo function is provided. If no
3 fault detector is picked up at the weak-infeed end of the line,
the signal received here is returned as echo to allow accelerated
tripping at the strong infeed end of the line. It is also possible to
initiate phase-selective tripping at the weak-infeed end. A phase-
4 selective single-pole or three-pole trip is issued if a permissive
trip signal (POTT or Unblocking) is received and if the phase-
ground voltage drops correspondingly. As an option, the weak
infeed logic can be equipped according to a French specification.
5 Overvoltage protection, undervoltage protection (ANSI 59, 27)

A voltage rise can occur on long lines that are operating at no-
0,14
load or that are only lightly loaded. The 7SA6 contains a number t= 0,02 Tp
( I / Ip ) −1
6 of overvoltage measuring elements. Each measuring element
is of two-stage design. The following measuring elements are
available: Fig. 6/13 Normal inverse
• Phase-to-ground overvoltage
7 • Phase-to-phase overvoltage
• Zero-sequence overvoltage ground faults. The 7SA6 protection relay therefore offers protec-
The zero-sequence voltage can be connected to the 4th voltage tion functions for faults of this nature.
input or be derived from the phase voltages. The ground-fault protection can be used with three definite-time
8 • Positive-sequence overvoltage of the local end or calculated
for the remote end of the line (compounding)
stages and one inverse-time stage (IDMT).
Inverse-time characteristics according to IEC 60255-3 and
• Negative-sequence overvoltage ANSI/IEEE are provided (see “Technical data”). A 4th definite-time
stage can be applied instead of the 1st inverse-time stage.
9 Tripping by the overvoltage measuring elements can be effected
either at the local circuit-breaker or at the remote station by An additional logarithmic inverse-time characteristic is also
means of a transmitted signal. available.
The 7SA6 is fitted, in addition, with three two-stage undervolt- The direction decision is determined by the ground current
10 age measuring elements:
• Phase-to-ground undervoltage
and the zero-sequence voltage or by the negative-sequence
components V2 and I2. In addition or as an alternative, the direc-
• Phase-to-phase undervoltage tion can be determined with the ground current of an grounded
power transformer and the zero-sequence voltage. Dual
• Positive-sequence undervoltage
11 The undervoltage measuring elements can be blocked by means
polarization applications can therefore be fulfilled. Alternatively,
the direction can be determined by evaluation of zero-sequence
of a minimum current criterion and by means of binary inputs. power. Each overcurrent stage can be set in forward or reverse
direction or in both directions (non-directional).
12 Frequency protection can be used for overfrequency and
The function is equipped with special digital filter algorithms,
providing the elimination of higher harmonics. This feature is
underfrequency protection. Unwanted frequency changes in particularly important for small zero-sequence fault currents
the network can be detected and the load can be removed at a which usually have a high content of 3rd and 5th harmonic.
13 specified frequency setting. Frequency protection can be used

over a wide frequency range (45 to 55, 55 to 65 Hz). There are
four elements (selectable as overfrequency or underfrequency) Inrush stabilization and instantaneous switch-onto-fault tripping
and each element can be delayed separately. can be activated separately for each stage as well.
14 Directional ground-fault protection for high-resistance faults

(ANSI 50N, 51N, 67N)
Different operating modes can be selected. The ground-fault
protection is suitable for three-phase and, optionally, for single-
phase tripping by means of a sophisticated phase selector. It
In an grounded network it may happen that the distance may be blocked during the dead time of single-pole auto-reclose
protection´s sensitivity is not sufficient to detect high-resistance
15 cycles or during pickup of the distance protection.

Tele (pilot) protection for directional ground-fault protection Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)
(ANSI 85-67N)
The directional ground-fault protection can be combined with
The 7SA6 relay incorporates a two-stage breaker failure
protection to detect failures of tripping command execution, 1
the available signaling methods: for example, due to a defective circuit-breaker. The current
• Directional comparison detection logic is phase-selective and can therefore also be used
in single-pole tripping schemes. If the fault current is not inter-
• BLOCKING
• UNBLOCKING
rupted after a settable time delay has expired, a retrip command
or a busbar trip command will be generated. The breaker failure
2
The transient blocking function (current reversal guard) is also protection can be initiated by all integrated protection functions,
provided in order to suppress interference signals during tripping as well as by external devices via binary input signals.
of parallel lines.
STUB bus overcurrent protection (ANSI 50(N)-STUB)
3
The pilot functions for distance protection and for ground-fault
The STUB bus overcurrent protection is a separate definite-time
protection can use the same signaling channel or two separate
overcurrent stage. It can be activated via a binary input signaling
and redundant channels.
that the line isolator (disconnector) is open. 4
Backup overcurrent protection (ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51N, 67) Separate settings are available for phase and ground faults.
The 7SA6 provides a backup overcurrent protection. Two
Auto-recIosure (ANSI 79)
definite-time stages and one inverse-time stage (IDMTL) are
available, separately for phase currents and for the ground cur- The 7SA6 relay is equipped with an auto-reclosure function (AR). 5
rent. The application can be extended to a directional overcur- The function includes several operating modes:
rent protection (ANSI 67) by taking into account the decision of • 3-pole auto-reclosure for all types of faults; different dead
the available direction detection elements. Two operating modes times are available depending on the type of fault
are selectable. The function can run in parallel to the distance
protection or only during failure of the voltage in the VT second-
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults, no reclosing for multi-
6
phase faults
ary circuit (emergency operation).
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults and for 2-phase faults
The secondary voltage failure can be detected by the integrated
fuse failure monitor or via a binary input from a VT miniature
without ground, no reclosing for multi-phase faults
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase and 3-pole auto-reclosure for
7
circuit-breaker (VT m.c.b. trip).
multi-phase faults
Inverse-time characteristics according to IEC 60255-3 and ANSI/ • 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults and 2-phase faults
IEEE are provided (see “Technical data”). without ground and 3-pole auto-reclosure for multi-phase
faults
8
Instantaneous high-speed switch-onto-fault overcurrent
protection (ANSI 50HS) • Multiple-shot auto-reclosure
• Interaction with an external device for auto-reclosure via
Instantaneous tripping is required when energizing a faulty line.
In the event of large fault currents, the high-speed switch-onto-
binary inputs and outputs 9
fault overcurrent stage can initiate very fast three-pole tripping. • Control of the internal AR function by external protection
• Interaction with the internal or an external synchro-check
With smaller fault currents, instantaneous tripping after switch-
onto-fault is also possible with the overreach distance zone Z1B
or with pickup.
• Monitoring of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
In addition to the above-mentioned operating modes, several
10
The switch-onto-fault initiation can be detected via the binary other operating principles can be employed by means of the
input “manual close” or automatically via measurement. integrated programmable logic (CFC).
Ground-fault detection in systems with a star-point that is

11
not effectively grounded
In systems with an isolated or resonant grounded (grounded)
star-point, single-phase ground faults can be detected. The
following functions are integrated for this purpose:
12
• Detection of an ground fault by monitoring of the displace-
ment voltage
• Determination of the faulted phase by measurement of the 13
phase-to-ground voltage
• Determination of the ground-fault direction by highly accurate
measurement of the active and reactive power components in
the residual ground fault current. 14
• Alarm or trip output can be selected in the event of an ground-
fault in the forward direction.
• Operation measurement of the active and reactive component
in the residual ground current during an ground-fault. 15
Auto-recIosure (continued) (ANSI 79)

Negative active jQ Positive active jQ Inductive (+Q)
1 Integration of auto-reclosure in the

feeder protection allows evaluation of the
power (-P) power (+P)
line-side voltages. A number of voltage-

dependent supplementary functions are
thus available:
2 • DLC jA
jA
By means of dead-line check, reclosure P P
jB
is effected only when the line is deen-
jB
ergized (prevention of asynchronous
3 breaker closure). S1 S1
LSA_5019a en eps
LSA_5018a en eps
• ADT
The adaptive dead time is employed Capacitive (-Q)
only if auto-reclosure at the remote sta-
4 tion was successful (reduction of stress
on equipment). Fig. 6/14 Monitoring of active power Fig. 6/15 Monitoring of reactive power
• RDT direction
Reduced dead time is employed in
5 conjunction with auto-reclosure where no teleprotection
method is employed: When faults within the zone extension
Directional power protection
The 7SA6 has a function for detecting the power direction by
but external to the protected line are switched off for rapid
measuring the phase angle of the positive-sequence system's
auto-reclosure (RAR), the RDT function decides on the basis of
power. Fig. 6/15 shows an application example displaying nega-
6 measurement of the return voltage from the remote station
which has not tripped whether or not to reduce the dead time.
tive active power. An indication is issued in the case when the
measured angle φ (S1) of the positive-sequence system power is
Synchronism check (ANSI 25) within the P - Q - level sector. This sector is between angles φ A
and φ B. Via CFC the output signal of the directional monitoring
7 Where two network sections are switched in by control com-
mand or following a 3-pole auto-reclosure, it must be ensured
can be linked to the "Direct Transfer Trip (DTT)" function and
thus, as reverse power protection, initiate tripping of the CB.
that both network sections are mutually synchronous. For this
purpose a synchro-check function is provided. After verification Fig. 6/16 shows another application displaying capacitive
reactive power. In the case of overvoltage being detected due
8 of the network synchronism, the function releases the CLOSE
command. Alternatively, reclosing can be enabled for different to long lines under no-load conditions it is possible to select the
criteria, e.g. checking that the busbar or line is not carrying a lines where capacitive reactive power is measured.
voltage (dead line or dead bus).
9 Fuse failure monitoring and other supervision functions One or two binary inputs for each circuit-breaker pole can be
The 7SA6 relay provides comprehensive supervision functions used for monitoring the circuit-breaker trip coils including the
covering both hardware and software. Furthermore, the mea- connecting cables. An alarm signal is issued whenever the circuit
sured values are continuously checked for plausibility. Therefore is interrupted.
10 the current and voltage transformers are also included in this
supervision system.
Lockout (ANSI 86)
Under certain operating conditions it is advisable to block CLOSE
If any measured voltage is not present due to short-circuit or
commands after a TRIP command of the relay has been issued.
open circuit in the voltage transformer secondary circuit, the
11 distance protection would respond with an unwanted trip due to
Only a manual “RESET” command unblocks the CLOSE command.
The 7SA6 is equipped with such an interlocking logic.
this loss of voltage.
This secondary voltage interruption can be detected by means Thermal overload protection (ANSI 49)
12 of the integrated fuse failure monitor. Immediate blocking of

distance protection and switching to the backup-emergency
For thermal protection of cables and transformers an overload
protection with an early-warning stage is provided. The thermal
overcurrent protection is provided for all types of secondary replica can be generated with the maximum or mean value of
voltage failures. the respective overtemperatures in the three phases, or with the
13 Additional measurement supervision functions are
• Symmetry of voltages and currents
overtemperature corresponding to the maximum phase current.
The tripping time characteristics are exponential functions
• Broken-conductor supervision according to IEC 60255-8 and they take account of heat loss due
to the load current and the accompanying drop in temperature
• Summation of currents and voltages
14 • Phase-sequence supervision.
of the cooling medium. The previous load is therefore taken
into account in the tripping time with overload. A settable alarm
stage can output a current or temperature-dependent indication
before the tripping point is reached.
15
BCD-coded output of fault location

The fault location calculated by the unit
can be output for remote indication in 1
BCD code. The output of the fault location
is made in percent of the set line length
with 3 decimal digits.
Analog output 0 to 20 mA
2
Some measured values can be output as
analog values (0 to 20 mA). On a plug-in
module (Fig. 6/24) two analog channels 3
are made available. Up to two plug-in
modules can be installed in the 7SA6. As
an option, 2, 4 or no analog channels are
available (please refer to the selection
and ordering data). The measured values
4
available for output are listed in the
technical data.
Commissioning and fault event 5
LSP2819.tif
analyzing
Special attention has been paid to com-
missioning. All binary inputs and outputs
can be displayed and activated directly. Fig. 6/16 Web Monitor: Supported commissioning by phasor diagram
6
This can simplify the wiring check
significantly for the user. The operational
and fault events and the fault records are
clearly arranged. For applications with 7
serial protection data interface, all cur-
rents, voltages and phases are available
via communication link at each local unit,
displayed at the front of the unit with
DIGSI 4 or with WEB Monitor. A common
8
time tagging facilitates the comparison of
events and fault records.
WEB Monitor – Internet technology 9

simplifies visualization
In addition to the universal DIGSI 4
operating program, the relay contains
a WEB server that can be accessed via a
10
LSP2818.tif
telecommunication link using a browser
(e.g. Internet Explorer). The advantage of
this solution is to operate the unit with
standard software tools and at the same 11
time make use of the Intranet/Internet Fig. 6/17 Web Monitor: Display of the protection direction
infrastructure. Apart from numeric values,
graphical displays in particular provide
clear information and a high degree of operating reliability. Of
course, it is also possible to call up detailed measured value dis-
12
plays and annunciation buffers. By emulation of the integrated
unit operation on the PC it is also possible to adjust selected
settings for commissioning purposes.
13
14
15
Communication
Communication
1 With respect to communication, particular emphasis is placed on

the customer requirements in energy automation:
• Every data item is time-stamped at the source, i.e. where it
originates.
2 • Already during the process of communication, information is
assigned to the cause thereof (e.g. assignment of the indica-
tion “circuit-breaker TRIP” to the corresponding command).
3 • The communication system automatically handles the transfer

of large data blocks (e.g. fault recordings or parameter data
files). The user has access to these features without any
4 • For the safe execution of a control command the correspond-

ing data telegram is initially acknowledged by the unit which
will execute the command. After the release and execution of
Fig. 6/18 IEC 60870-5-103 star-type RS232 copper conductor
the command a feedback signal is generated. At every stage connection or fiber-optic connection
of the control command execution particular conditions are
5 checked. If these are not satisfied, command execution may be
terminated in a controlled manner.
The units offer a high degree of flexibility by supporting differ-
ent standards for connection to industrial and power automation
6 systems. By means of the communication modules, on which
the protocols run, exchange and retrofit is possible. Therefore,
the units will also in future allow for optimal adaptation to
changing communication infrastructure such as the application
7 of Ethernet networks which are already widely applied in the
power supply sector.
Local PC interface
8 The serial RS232 PC interface accessible from the front of the

unit permits quick access to all parameters and fault event data.
The use of the DIGSI 4 operating program is particularly advanta-
geous during commissioning.
9 Service/modem interface
7SA6 units are always fitted with a rear-side hardwired service
interface, optionally as RS232 or RS485. In addition to the Fig. 6/19 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and IEC 61850
10 front-side operator interface, a PC can be connected here either

directly or via a modem.
Retrofitting: Modules for every type of communication
Time synchronization interface
Communication modules for retrofitting are available for the
11 The time synchronization interface is a standard feature in all
units. The supported formats are IRIG-B and DCF77.
entire SIPROTEC 4 unit range. These ensure that, where different
communication protocols (IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103, PROFIBUS,
DNP, etc.) are required, such demands can be met. For fiber-optic
Reliable bus architecture
communication, no external converter is required for SIPROTEC 4.
12 • RS485 bus
With this data transmission via copper conductors, electro- IEC 61850 protocol
magnetic fault influences are largely eliminated by the use of
twisted-pair conductors. Upon failure of a unit, the remaining
for protection and control systems used by power supply
system continues to operate without any problem.
13 • Fiber-optic double ring circuit
corporations. Siemens was the first manufacturer to support
this standard. By means of this protocol, information can also
The fiber-optic double ring circuit is immune to electromagnetic be exchanged directly between bay units so as to set up simple
interference. Upon failure of a section between two units, masterless systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to
the communication system continues to operate without
14 disturbance. It is usually impossible to communicate with a
the units via the Ethernet but is also possible with DIGSI. It is also
possible to retrieve operating and fault records as well as fault
unit that has failed. Should a unit fail, there is no effect on the recordings via a browser. This Web monitor will also provide a
communication with the rest of the system. few items of unit-specific information in browser windows.
15
Communication
LSP2162-afpen.tif
IEC 60870-5-103 is an internationally
standardized protocol for efficient com- 1
munication with protection relays.
IEC 60870-5-103 is supported by a
LSP3.01-0021.tif
number of protection device manufactur-
ers and is used worldwide. Supplements
for control functions are defined in
2
the manufacturer-specific part of this
standard.
PROFIBUS DP
3
PROFIBUS DP is an industrial communica-
Fig. 6/20 820 nm fiber-optic communication Fig. 6/21 Fiber-optic Ethernet communication
tions standard and is supported by a
module module for IEC 61850 with
number of PLC and protection device
manufacturers.
integrated Ethernet switch 4
DNP 3.0
LSP2163-afpen.tif
DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol,
Version 3) is an internationally recognized
5
protection and bay unit communication
protocol. SIPROTEC 4 units are Level 1 and
Level 2 compatible.
6
Analog outputs 0 to 20 mA
LSP2207-afp.tif
2 or 4 analog output interfaces for trans-
mission of measured or fault location
values are available for the 7SA6. Two 7
analog output interfaces are provided
in an analog output module. Up to two Fig. 6/22 RS232/RS485 electrical Fig. 6/23 Output module 0 to 20 mA,
analog output modules can be inserted
per unit.
communication module 2 channels
8
10
11
12
13
Fig. 6/24 Communication

14
15
Communication
System solutions for protection and station control The communication possibilities are identical to those for the
line differential protection relays 7SD5 and 7SD610. The follow-
1 Together with the SICAM power automation system, SIPROTEC 4
can be used with PROFIBUS DP. Over the low-cost electrical
ing options are available:
RS485 bus, or interference-free via the optical double ring, • FO51), OMA12) module: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST connectors,
the units exchange information with the control system. Units FO cable length up to 1.5 km for link to communication
equipped with IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces can be connected networks via communication converters or for direct FO cable
2 to SICAM in parallel via the RS485 bus or connected in star by connection
fiber-optic link. Through this interface, the system is open for • FO61), OMA22) module: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST connectors,
the connection of units of other manufacturers (see Fig. 6/25). FO cable length up to 3.5 km, for direct connection via multi-
mode FO cable
3 be integrated into systems of other manufacturers or in SIMATIC. • FO171): For direct connection up to 24 km3), 1300 nm, for
mono-mode fiber 9/125 μm, LC-Duplex connector
physical data transfer medium can be chosen thanks to opto- • FO181): For direct connection up to 60 km3) 1300 nm, for
electrical converters. Thus, the RS485 bus allows low-cost wiring mono-mode fiber 9/125 μm, LC-Duplex connector
4 in the cubicles and an interference-free optical connection to the
• FO191): For direct connection up to 100 km3) 1550 nm, for
For IEC 61850, an interoperable system solution is offered with • FO301): For transmission with the IEEE C37.94 standard.
5 with PAS electrically or optically to the station PC. The interface
The link to a multiplexed communication network is made by
separate communication converters (7XV5662). These have
is standardized, thus also enabling direct connection of units
a fiber-optic interface with 820 nm and ST connectors to the
of other manufacturers to the Ethernet bus. With IEC 61850,
protection relay. The link to the communication network is
however, the units can also be used in other manufacturers’
6 systems. Units with an IEC 60870-5-103 interface are connected
with PAS via the Ethernet station bus by means of serial/Ethernet
optionally an electrical X21 or a G703.1 interface. If the connec-
tion to the multiplexor supports IEEE C37.94, a direct fibre optic
connection to the relay is possible using the FO30 module.
converters. DIGSI and the Web monitor can also be used via the
same station bus. For operation via copper wire communication (pilot wires), a
7 Serial protection data interface
modern communication converter for copper cables is available.
This operates with both the two-wire and three-wire copper con-
The tele (pilot) protection schemes can be implemented using nections which were used by conventional differential protection
digital serial communication. The 7SA6 is capable of remote systems before. The communication converter for copper cables
8 relay communication via direct links or multiplexed digital com-

munication networks. The serial protection data interface has
is designed for 5 kV insulation voltage. An additional 20 kV
isolation transformer can extend the field of applications of this
the following features: technique into ranges with higher insulation voltage require-
ments. With SIPROTEC 4 and the communication converter
• Fast phase-selective teleprotection signaling for distance
for copper cables a digital follow-up technique is available for
9 protection, optionally with POTT or PUTT schemes
• Signaling for directional ground-fault protection – directional
two-wire protection systems (typical 15 km) and all three-wire
protection systems using existing copper communication links.
comparison for high resistance faults in solidly grounded
systems Communication data:
10 • Echo-function
• Two and three-terminal line applications can be implemented
• Supported network interfaces G703.1 with 64 kBit/s;
X21/RS422 with 64 or 128 or 512 kBit/s; IEEE C37.94
without additional logic • Max. channel delay time 0.1 ms to 30 ms (in steps of 0.1 ms)
• Interclose command transfer with the auto-reclosure “Adaptive • Protocol HDLC
11 dead time” (ADT) mode • 32-bit CRC-check according to CCITT and ITU
• 28 remote signals for fast transfer of binary signals • Each protection relay possesses a unique relay address
• Flexible utilisation of the communication channels by means • Continuous communication link supervision: Individual faulty
of the programmable CFC logic data telegrams do not constitute an immediate danger, if
12 • Display of the operational measured values of the opposite they occur only sporadically. The statistical availability, per
terminal(s) with phase-angle information relative to a common minute and hour, of the serial protection data interface can be
reference vector displayed.
13 • Clock synchronization: the clock in only one of the relays

must be synchronized from an external so called “Absolute
Figure 6/26 shows four applications for the serial protection data
interface on a two-terminal line.
Master” when using the serial protection data interface. This
relay will then synchronize the clock of the other (or the two
other relays in 3 terminal applications) via the protection data
14 interface.
• 7SA522 and 7SA6 can be combined via the protection data
interface. 1) For flush-mounting housing.
2) For surface-mounting housing.
15 3) For surface-mounting housing the internal fiber-optic module
OMA1 will be delivered together with an external repeater.

Communication
10
11
12
Fig. 6/25 Communication topologies for the serial protection data interface on a two-terminal line
13
14
15
Communication
Three-terminal lines can also be protected

with a tele (pilot) protection scheme by
1 using SIPROTEC 4 distance protection
relays. The communication topology may
then be a ring or a chain topology, see
Fig. 6/27. In a ring topology a loss of one
2 data connection is tolerated by the system.
The topology is re-routed to become a
chain topology within less than 100 ms. To
reduce communication links and to save
money for communications, a chain topol-
3 ogy may be generally applied.
5 Ring topology
9
Chain topology
10
Fig. 6/26 Ring or chain communication topology
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connection
Typical connection
Connection of current 1
3 phase current transformers with neutral
point in the line direction, I4 connected as
summation current transformer (= 3I0): 2
Holmgreen circuit
3 voltage transformers, without connection
of the broken (open) delta winding on
the line side; the 3V0 voltage is derived
3
internally.
4
Fig. 6/27 Example of connection for current and voltage transformers
5
Alternative current measurement
The 3 phase current transformers are 6
connected in the usual manner. The neutral
point is in line direction. I4 is connected to
a separate neutral core-balance CT, thus
permitting a high sensitive 3I0 measure-
ment.
7
Note: Terminal Q7 of the I4 transformer
must be connected to the terminal of
the core balance CT pointing in the same 8
direction as the neutral point of the phase
current transformers (in this case in line
direction). The voltage connection is
effected in accordance with Fig. 6/28, 6/32
or 6/33.
9
Fig. 6/28 Alternative connection of current transformers for sensitive
ground-current measuring with core-balance current transformers 10
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connection
Alternative current connection
1 3 phase current transformers with neutral

point in the line direction, I4 connected to
a current transformer in the neutral point
of an grounded transformer for directional
ground-fault protection. The voltage con-
2 nection is effected in accordance with
Fig. 6/28, 6/32 or 6/33.
5 Fig. 6/29 Alternative connection of current transformers for measuring

neutral current of an grounded power transformer

summation current of the parallel line for
parallel line compensation on overhead
7 lines. The voltage connection is effected in
accordance with Fig. 6/28, 6/32 or 6/33.

the ground current of a parallel line
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connection
Alternative voltage connection

3 phase voltage transformers, V4 con-
nected to broken (open) delta winding 1
(Ven) for additional summation voltage
monitoring and ground-fault directional
protection.
The current connection is effected in
accordance with Fig. 6/28, 6/29, 6/30 and
2
6/31.
4
Fig. 6/31 Alternative connection of voltage transformers for measuring the
displacement voltage (e-n voltage) 5
Alternative voltage connection 6

nected to busbar voltage transformer for
synchro-check.
Note: Any phase-to-phase or phase-to-
7
ground voltage may be employed as the
busbar voltage. Parameterization is carried
out on the unit. The current connection is
effected in accordance with Fig. 6/28, 6/29, 8
6/30 and 6/31.
Fig. 6/32 Alternative connection of voltage transformers for measuring 10

the busbar voltage
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
General unit data Output contacts

1 NC/NO contact1)
1 Analog inputs
Rated frequency 50 or 60 Hz (selectable)
“Unit ready” contact
(live status contact)
Rated current Inom 1 or 5 A (selectable) Command/indication relay
Rated voltage Vnom 80 to 125 V (selectable) Quantity

7SA610*-*A/E/J 5 NO contacts, 3 NC/NO contact1)
2 Power consumption
With Inom = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA
7SA610*-*B/F/K
7SA6*1*-*A/E/J
5 NO contacts,
12 NO contacts, 4 NC/NO contacts1)
With Inom = 5 A Approx. 0.30 VA 7SA6*1*-*B/F/K 8 NO contacts, 4 power relays2)
For IE, sensitive with 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA 7SA6*2*-*A/E/J 19 NO contacts, 5 NC/NO contacts1)
Voltage inputs ≤ 0.10 VA 7SA6*2*-*B/F/K 26 NO contacts, 6 NC/NO contacts1)
3 Overload capacity of current
circuit (r.m.s.)
7SA6*2*-*C/G/L
NO/NC contact
11 NO contacts, 8 power relays2)
Thermal 500 A for 1 s

150 A for 10 s Switching capacity
20 A continuous Make 1000 W / VA
4 Dynamic (peak value)

Ground current
1250 A (half cycle) Break, high-speed trip outputs
Break, contacts
1000 W / VA
30 VA
Break, contacts (for resistive 40 W
Sensitive 300 A for 1 s load)
100 A for 10 s Break, contacts
15 A continuous
5 Dynamic (peak value) 750 A (half cycle)
(for τ = L/R ≤ 50 ms)
Switching voltage
25 VA
250 V
Thermal overload capacity of 230 V continuous
voltage circuit Permissible total current 30 A for 0.5 seconds
5 A continuous
Auxiliary voltage
6 Rated voltages DC 24 to 48 V
DC 60 to 125 V
Operating time, approx.
NO contact
NO/NC contact (selectable)
8 ms
8 ms
DC 110 to 250 V Fast NO contact 5 ms
and AC 115 to 230 V (50/60 Hz) High-speed NO trip outputs < 1 ms
7 Permissible tolerance
Superimposed AC voltage
-20 % to +20 %
≤ 15 %
Power relay
for direct control of disconnector
(peak-to-peak) actuator motors
Power consumption Switching capacity
Quiescent Approx. 5 W Make for 48 to 250 V 1000 W/ VA
8 Energized Approx. 12 W to 18 W, depending on
design
Break
Make
for 48 to 250 V
for 24 V
1000 W/ VA
500 W/ VA
Break for 24 V 500 W/ VA
Bridging time during failure of the
auxiliary voltage Switching voltage 250 V
9 For Vaux = 48 V and Vaux ≥ 110 V ≥ 50 ms

For Vaux = 24 V and Vaux = 60 V ≥ 20 ms
Permissible total current 30 A for 0.5 seconds
5 A continuous
Binary inputs Max. operating time 30 s
Quantity Permissible relative operating 1%
7SA610*-*A/E/J 5 time
10 7SA610*-*B/F/K
7SA6*1*-*A/E/J
7
13
LEDs
7SA6*1*-*B/F/K 20 Quantity
7SA6*2*-*A/E/J 21 RUN (green) 1
7SA6*2*-*B/F/K 29 ERROR (red) 1
11 7SA6*2*-*C/G/L
Rated voltage range
33
24 to 250 V, bipolar
LED (red),
function can be assigned
Pickup threshold DC 17 or 73 or 154 V, bipolar 7SA610 7
7SA6*1/2/3 14
Functions are freely assignable 1
12 Pickup/reset voltage thresholds DC 9 V/ DC 10 V or DC 88 V/ DC 44 V,

Ranges are settable by means of or DC 176 V/ DC 88 V bipolar
jumpers for each binary input (3 nominal ranges DC 17/73/154 V)
Maximum permissible voltage DC 300 V
Current consumption, energized Approx. 1.8 mA
13 Input impulse suppression 220 nF coupling capacitance at 220 V
with a recovery time >60 ms
14
1) Can be set via jumpers.
15 2) Each pair of power relays is mechanically
interlocked to prevent simultaneous closing.

Technical data
Unit design Electrical tests

Housing
Dimensions
7XP20
Refer to part 14 for dimension
Specifications
Standards IEC 60255 (product standards) 1
drawings IEEE Std C37.90.0/.1/.2; UL 508
Degree of protection acc. to VDE 0435
EN 60529 Further standards see “Individual
IP 51
Insulation tests
functions”
2
Front IP 51
Standards IEC 60255–5 and 60870-2-1
Rear IP 50
For the terminals IP 20 with terminal cover put on High-voltage test (routine test)
Weight
Flush-mounting 1/3 x 19" 4 kg
All circuits except for power
supply, binary inputs,
2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz 3
housing 1/2 x 19" 6 kg high-speed outputs,
2/3 x 19" 8 kg communication and time
1/1 x 19" 10 kg synchronization interfaces
Surface-mounting 1/3 x 19"
housing 1/2 x 19"
6 kg
11 kg
Auxiliary voltage, binary
inputs and high-speed outputs
DC 3.5 kV 4
1/1 x 19" 19 kg (routine test)
only isolated communication 500 V (r.m.s.), 50 Hz
interfaces and time synchroni-
zation interface (routine test) 5
Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 µs; 0.5 Ws,
All circuits except for communi- 3 positive and 3 negative impulses in
cation interfaces and time intervals of 5 s
synchronization interface,
class III
6
EMC tests for noise immunity; type tests
Standards IEC 60255-6/-22 (product standard)
EN 61000-6-2 (generic standard),
VDE 0435 part 301 7
DIN VDE 0435-110
High-frequency test 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; τ = 15 ms;
IEC 60255-22-1 class III and 400 surges per s; test duration 2 s,
VDE 0435 Section 303, class III
Ri = 200 Ω
8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air
8
IEC 60255-22-2 class IV discharge; both polarities; 150 pF;
and IEC 61000-4-2, class IV Ri = 330 Ω
Irradiation with HF field, frequency 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz: 80 % AM;
sweep 1 kHz 9
IEC 60255-22-3 (report) class III 10 V/m; 800 to 960 MHz: 80 % AM;
1 kHz
IEC 61000-4-3, class III 10 V/m; 1.4 to 2 GHz: 80 % AM; 1 kHz
Irradiation with HF field, single
frequencies
10 V/m; 80, 160, 450, 900 MHz;
80 % AM; 1 kHz; duty cycle > 10 s
10
IEC 60255-22-31, IEC 61000-4-3, 900 MHz; 50 % PM, repetition
class III frequency 200 Hz
amplitude/pulse modulated
Fast transient disturbance/bursts
IEC 60255-22-4 and
4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
burst length = 15 ms;
11
IEC 61000-4-4, class IV repetition rate 300 ms; both polari-
ties; Ri = 50 Ω; test duration 1 min
(SURGE),
IEC 61000-4-5 installation class III
Impulse: 1.2/50 µs
12
Auxiliary supply Common mode: 2 kV; 12 Ω; 9 µF
Differential mode:1 kV; 2 Ω; 18 µF
Analog measurement inputs,
binary inputs, relays output
Common mode: 2 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF
Differential mode: 1 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF 13
Line-conducted HF, amplitude- 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM;
modulated, IEC 61000-4-6, 1 kHz
class III
Power system frequency magnetic 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for 3 s;
field
14
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV; 50 Hz
IEC 60255-6 0.5 mT; 50 Hz
15
Technical data
Oscillatory surge withstand 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz Climatic stress tests

capability, IEEE Std C37.90.1 τ = 50 μs; 400 surges per second,
1 Fast transient surge withstand
test duration 2 s, Ri = 200 Ω
4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst length =
Standard
Temperatures
IEC 60255-6
capability, IEEE Std C37.90.1 15 ms Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 -25 °C to +85 °C / -13 °F to +185 °F
repetition rate 300 ms, ; both polari- and -2, test Bd
ties; test duration 1 min; Ri = 50 Ω
2 Radiated electromagnetic 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz,
interference IEEE Std C37.90.2 amplitude and pulse-modulated
Damped oscillations 2.5 kV (peak value); polarity alterna- impaired above +55 °C / +131 °F)
IEC 60694, IEC 61000-4-12 ting 100 kHz; 1 MHz; 10 and 50 MHz; Recommended permanent -5 °C to +55 °C / +23 °F to +131 °F
3 Ri = 200 Ω
EMC tests for noise emission; type test
IEC 60255-6
– Limiting temperature during -25 °C to +55 °C / -13 °F to 131 °F
Standard EN 61000-6-3 (generic standard) permanent storage
Radio noise voltage to lines, only 150 kHz to 30 MHz – Limiting temperature during -25 °C to +70 °C / -13 °F to +158 °F
4 auxiliary voltage
IEC-CISPR 22
Limit class B transport
Humidity
IEC-CISPR 22 Limit class B Permissible humidity stress: Annual average on ≤ 75 % relative
It is recommended to arrange the humidity; on 56 days per year up to
5 Harmonic currents on the
network lead at AC 230 V,
Class A limits are observed
93 % relative humidity; condensation
is not permitted.
IEC 61000-3-2
Voltage fluctuations and flicker Limits are observed that could cause condensation.
on the network incoming feeder
6 at AC 230 V, IEC 61000-3-3
Mechanical stress test

7 During operation
8 IEC 60068-2-6 60 to 150 Hz: 1 g acceleration
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms,
9 IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks on each of the 3 axes in
both directions

(vertical axis)
(horizontal axis)

(vertical axis)
1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
During transport
IEC 60068-2-6 8 to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration

IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks on each of the 3 axes in
14 Continuous shock
both directions
Semi-sinusoidal
both directions


7SA61 distance protection relay for all voltage levels
Housing, number of LEDs

7SA61 - -
1
Housing width ⅓ 19", 7 LEDs 0
Housing width ½ 19", 14 LEDs 1
Operator panel with:
– 4-line backlit display,
Housing width 19", 14 LEDs
Housing width ²⁄₃ 19", 14 LEDs
2
see pages 6/32
to 6/35 2
3
– function keys,
– numerical keys, Measuring inputs (4 x V / 4 x I)
– PC interface
Iph = 1 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A)
1
2
3
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A) 5
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.003 A) 6
Rated auxiliary voltage (power supply, binary inputs) 4

DC 24 to 48 V, binary input threshold 17 V3) 2
DC 60 to 125 V 2), binary input threshold 17 V3) 4
DC 110 to 250 V 2), AC 115 to 230 V, binary input threshold 73 V3)
Binary/ Indication/ Fast High- Power Flush- Flush- Surface-

5
5
indication command relay4) speed relay5) mounting mounting mounting
inputs outputs trip housing/ housing/ housing/
incl. output screw-type plug-in screw-type
live status
contact
terminals terminals terminals 6
For 7SA610

5
5
5
4
4
4
5
5
5

A
E
J
7
7 6 B
7 6 F
7 6
For 7SA611
K
8
13 5 12 A
13 5 12 E

13
13
13
5
4
4
12
8
8
5
5

J
M 9
N
13 4 8 5 P
20 9 4 B

20
20
9
9
4
4
F
K 10
1) Rated current can be
selected by means of For 7SA612
jumpers. 21 13 12 A
2) Transition between the
two auxiliary voltage
21
21
13
13
12
12
E
J 11
ranges can be selected by 21 12 8 5 M
means of jumpers. 21 12 8 5 P
21 12 8 5 R
3) The binary input
thresholds are selectable
in three stages by means
29
29
21
21
12
12

B
F 12
29 21 12 K
of jumpers, exception:
29 20 8 5 N
versions with power
29 20 8 5 Q
relays have some binary
inputs with only two
binary input thresholds.
29
33
33
20
12
12
8 5
8
8

S
C 13
G
4) Fast relays are identified 33 12 8 L
in the terminal connec-
tion diagram.
5) Power relay for direct
For 7SA613
21 13 12 A 14
control of disconnector 21 12 8 5 M
actuator motors. Each
pair of contacts is
mechanically interlocked
to prevent simultaneous
closure.
15

LSA2539-agpen.eps
1 7SA63 distance protection relay for all voltage levels

7SA63 - -

Housing width 19", 14 LEDs 2
2 Operator panel with:
– backlit graphic display for Measuring inputs (4 x V / 4 x I)
see pages 6/32
to 6/35
single-line diagram Iph = 1 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A) 1
– control keys, Iph = 1 A1), Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.003 A) 2
– key-operated switches,
3 – function keys,
– numerical keys,
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A)
5
6
– PC interface
4 DC 60 to 125 V 2), binary input threshold 17 V3) 4
DC 110 to 250 V 2), AC 115 to 230 V, binary input threshold 73 V3) 5
Binary/ Indication/ Fast High- Power Flush- Flush- Surface-
5 indication command relay4)

inputs outputs
speed relay5) mounting
trip housing/
mounting
housing/
mounting
housing/
incl. output screw-type plug-in screw-type
live status terminals terminals terminals
contact
6 For 7SA631
13 5 12 A
13 5 12 E
13 5 12 J
7 13
13
4
4
8
8
5
5

M
N
13 4 8 5 P
20 9 4 B
20 9 4 F
8 20 9 4 K
For 7SA632
21 13 12 A
21 13 12 E
9 21
21
13
12
12
8 5
J
M
21 12 8 5 P
21 12 8 5 R
29 21 12 B
10 29
29
21
21
12
12
F
K
29 20 8 5 N
29 20 8 5 Q
29 20 8 5 S
11 33
33
12
12
8
8

C
G
33 12 8 L
12
13
1) Rated current can be selected by means of jumpers. 4) Fast relays are identified in the terminal connection
14 2) Transition between the two auxiliary voltage ranges diagram.
can be selected by means of jumpers. 5) Power relay for direct control of disconnector actu-
3) The binary input thresholds are selectable in three ator motors. Each pair of contacts is mechanically
stages by means of jumpers, exception: versions interlocked to prevent simultaneous closure.
15 with power relays have some binary inputs with only

two binary input thresholds.

LSA2540-agpen.eps

7SA64 - -
1
Housing width 19", 14 LEDs 2
Units with detached Measuring inputs (4 x V / 4 x I)

see pages 6/32
to 6/35 2
operator panel with: Iph = 1 A1), Ie = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A) 1
– backlit graphic display Iph = 1 A1), Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.003 A) 2
– control keys,
– key-operated switches,
– function keys,
Iph = 5 A1), Ie = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A)
5
6
3
– numerical keys,
– PC interface Rated auxiliary voltage (power supply, binary inputs)
DC 60 to 125 V 2), binary input threshold 17 V3) 4 4
Binary/ Indication/ Fast High- Power Flush- Flush-

indication command relay4)
inputs outputs
speed relay5) mounting
trip housing/
mounting
housing/ 5
incl. output screw-type plug-in
live status terminals terminals
contact
For 7SA641 6
13 5 12 A
13 5 12 J
13 4 8 5 M
13
20
4
9
8 5
4
P
B 7
20 9 4 K
For 7SA642
21
21
13
13
12
12

A
J
8
21 12 8 5 M
21 12 8 5 R
29 21 12 B
29
29
21
20
12
8 5
K
N
9
29 20 8 5 S
29 12 8 C
33 12 8 L
10
11
12
13
2) Transition between the two auxiliary voltage ranges
4) Fast relays are identified in the terminal connection
diagram. 14
can be selected by means of jumpers. 5) Power relay for direct control of disconnector actu-
3) The binary input thresholds are selectable in three ator motors. Each pair of contacts is mechanically
stages by means of jumpers, exception: versions interlocked to prevent simultaneous closure.
with power relays have some binary inputs with only
two binary input thresholds.
15
1 7SA6 distance protection relay for all voltage levels
Region-specific default settings / language settings 1)

7SA6 - -
see pages
Region DE, language: German A
6/33 to 6/35
Region World, language: English (GB) B
2 Region US, language: English (US)
Region FR, French
C
D
Region World, Spanish E
Region World, Italian F
3 Region World, language: Russian G
Region World, language: Polish H
Port B
4 Empty
System interface, IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electrical RS232
0
1
System interface, IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electrical RS485 2
System interface, IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector 3
5 2 analog outputs, each 0.....20 mA

System interface, PROFIBUS DP, electrical RS485
7
9 L 0 A
System interface, PROFIBUS DP, optical 820 nm, double ring 2), ST connector 9 L 0 B
System interface, DNP 3.0, electrical RS485 9 L 0 G
6 System interface, DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector2) 9 L 0 H
System interface, IEC 61850, 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, electrical, duplicate, RJ45 plug connectors 9 L 0 R
System interface, IEC 61850, 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector3) 9 L 0 S
10 1) Definitions for region-specific default settings and functions:

Region DE: preset to f = 50 Hz and line length in km, only IEC
inverse characteristic can be selected, directional earth (ground)
fault protection: no logarithmic inverse characteristic, no direction decision
with zero-sequence power Sr; distance protection can be selected with
11 Region US:
quadrilateral or circle characteristic.
preset to f = 60 Hz and line length in miles, ANSI inverse
characteristic only, directional earth (ground) fault protection:
no logarithmic inverse characteristic, no direction decision
with zero-sequence power Sr, no U0 inverse characteristic.
12 Region World: preset to f = 50 Hz and line length in km, directional earth (ground) fault
protection: no direction decision with zero-sequence power Sr,
no U0 inverse characteristic.
Region FR: preset to f = 50 Hz and line length in km, directional earth (ground)
13 fault protection: no U0 inverse characteristic, no logarithmic inverse
characteristic, weak infeed logic selectable between French specification
and world specification.
2) Optical double ring interfaces are not available with surface mounting housings.
14 3) For surface mounting housing applications please order the relay with electrical Ethernet interface
and use a separate fiber-optic switch.
15

Port C and port D

7SA6 - -
1
see pages
Port C: DIGSI/modem, electrical RS232,
6/34 and
Port D: empty 1 6/35
Port C: DIGSI/modem, electrical RS485,
Port D: empty
2
2
Port C and Port D installed 9 M
Port C
DIGSI/modem, electrical RS232 1
3
DIGSI/modem, electrical RS485 2
Port D
Protection data interface: optical 820 nm, two ST connectors, FO cable length up to 1.5 km
For direct connection via multi-mode FO cable or communication networks 1)
4
A
For direct connection via multi-mode FO cable B
Two analog outputs, each 0...20 mA
Protection data interface: optical 1300 nm, LC-Duplex connector
K 5
FO cable length up to 24 km for direct connection via mono-mode FO cable2) G
FO cable length up to 60 km for direct connection via mono-mode FO cable2)3)
H
6
FO cable length up to 100 km for direct connection via mono-mode FO cable2)4) J
FO30 optical 820 nm, 2-ST-connector, length of optical fibre up to 1.5 km
for multimode fibre, for communication networks with IEEEC37.94 interface
or direct optical fibre connection (not available for surface-mounted housing) S 7
10
11
12
1) For suitable communication converters 7XV5662 (optical to

13
G703.1/X21/RS422 or optical to pilot wire) see "Accessories".
2) For surface-mounting housing applications an internal fiber-optic
module 820 nm will be delivered in combination with an external
repeater. 14
3) For distances less than 25 km, two optical attenuators 7XV5107-0AA00
are required to avoid optical saturation of the receiver element.
4) For distances less than 50 km, two optical attenuators 7XV5107-0AA00
are required to avoid optical saturation of the receiver element.
15
1 7SA6 distance protection relay for all voltage levels 7SA6 - -
Functions 1
Trip mode Thermal overload BCD-coded output for
protection (ANSI 49) fault location
2 3-pole
3-pole
0
1
3-pole 2
3-pole 3
3 1/3-pole
1/3-pole
1/3-pole

4
5
6
1/3-pole 7
Functions 2
4 Distance protection pickup
(ANSI 21, 21N)
Power swing detection
(ANSI 68, 68T)
Parallel line compensation
I> A
V B
5 Quadrilateral (Z<)
Quadrilateral (Z<), V / φ
C
D
Quadrilateral (Z<) F
Quadrilateral (Z<), V / φ G
V 1) J
6 Quadrilateral (Z<)
Quadrilateral (Z<), V / φ
1)
1)
K
L
Quadrilateral (Z<) 1) N
Quadrilateral (Z<), V / φ 1) P
7 Functions 3
Auto-reclosure (ANSI Synchro-check Breaker failure protection Over/undervoltage protection
79) (ANSI 25) (ANSI 50BF) V>, V< (ANSI 27, 59)
Over/underfrequency protection
(ANSI 81)
8
A
B
C
D
E
9

F
G
H
J
K
10

L
M
N
P
Q
11 R
Functions 4
Directional ground-fault Ground-fault detection Measured values
protection, grounded compensated/ isolated extended Min, max, mean
12 networks (ANSI 50N, networks
51N, 67N)
0
1
2)
13
2)
2
3
4
5
2) 6
2)
14 7
15 1) Only with position 7 of Order No. = 1 or 5.

2) Only with position 7 of Order No. = 2 or 6.


Preferential types
7SA6 - -
1
Functions 1
2
Z< (quadrilateral) V/φ
directional for grounded
Ground-fault directional
Ground-fault protection
Power swing detection
Trip mode 1 or 3-pole
Overload protection
Voltage protection
isolated networks
Trip mode, 3-pole
Measured values,
for compensated
min. max. mean

Auto-reclosure
Synchro-check
3
Pickup V
extended,
networks
Pickup I>
Basic version 4
1 AB 0

Medium voltage, cables

1 AB 1
5
1) 3 B D6
1) 1 B D7 6
Medium voltage, overhead lines
1) 3 BM6
1) 3 BM7
7
High voltage, cables
3 GH4
8
3 GH5
High voltage, overhead lines
2) 7 P R 4 9
2) 7 P R 5
10
11
12
13
14
15
1 Connecting cable (copper)

Cable between PC/notebook (9-pin connector) and protection
unit (9-pin connector) (contained in DIGSI 4, but can be
ordered additionally) 7XV5100-4
2 Voltage transformer miniature circuit-breaker

Rated current 1.6 A; thermal overload release 1.6 A;
overcurrent trip 6 A 3RV1611-1AG14
3 Manual for 7SA6

English, V4.70 and higher C53000-G1176-C156-7
German, V4.70 C53000-G1100-C156-8
10
11
12
13
14
15
Opto-electric communication converters

Optical to X21/RS422 or G703.1 7XV5662-0AA00
1
Optical to pilot wires 7XV5662-0AC00
Additional interface modules

Protection data interface FO 5, OMA1, 820 nm, multi-mode FO cable,
2
ST connector, 1.5 km C53207-A351-D651-1
Protection data interface FO 17, 1300 nm, mono-mode FO cable,
LC-Duplex connector, 24 km C53207-A322-B115-3
3
4
Optical repeaters
Serial repeater (2-channel), opt. 1300 nm, mono-mode FO cable,
LC-Duplex connector, 24 km 7XV5461-0BG00 5
LC-Duplex connector, 60 km 7XV5461-0BH00
LC-Duplex connector, 100 km 7XV5461-0BJ00
6
Accessories Description Order No. Size of

package
Supplier Fig. 9
Connector 2-pin C73334-A1-C35-1 1 Siemens 6/35
LSP2289-afp.eps
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1 1 Siemens 6/36
Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 1)

10
connector 0-827396-1 1 1)
Fig. 6/33 Mounting rail
for 19" rack CI2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0-827040-1 4000 1)
1)
0-827397-1
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163083-7
1
4000 1)
1)
11
0-163084-2 1
LSP2090-afp.eps
LSP2091-afp.eps
Crimping For type III+ 0-539635-1 1 1)
tool and matching female 0-539668-2 1)
For CI2
and matching female
0-734372-1
1-734387-1
1 1)
1)
12
Fig. 6/34 Fig. 6/35 19"-mounting rail C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens 6/34
Short-circuit
links
For current terminals
For other terminals
C73334-A1-C33-1
C73334-A1-C34-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens
6/37
6/38 13
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps
Safety cover large C73334-A1-C31-1 1 Siemens 6/4

for terminals small C73334-A1-C32-1 1 Siemens 6/4

14
Fig. 6/36 Fig. 6/37
Short-circuit link Short-circuit link
for current contacts for voltage contacts/
indications contacts
15
Connection diagram
LSA2532-agpen.eps
7
Fig. 6/38 Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14 1) Starting from unit version ..../EE.
Fig. 6/39 Serial interfaces
15
Connection diagram
LSA2532-agpen.eps
7
Note: For serial interfaces see Fig. 6/40.
Fig. 6/40 Connection diagram 8
10
11
12
13
14
15
Connection diagram
1 SA2545-agpen.eps
10
11
12
1) Starting from unit version .../EE.
13 2) High-speed trip outputs in versions 7SA6*1*-*M, 7SA*1*-*N, 7SA*1*-*P.
Time advantage of high-speed relays over fast relays: approx. 5 ms
3) Time advantage with fast relay approx. 3 ms.
4) Version with 3-pole tripping.
14 5) Version with 1/3-pole tripping.
15 Fig. 6/41 Connection diagram

Connection diagram
SA2545-agpen.eps 1
10
11
12
13
1) Version with 3-pole tripping.
2) Each pair of contacts is mechanically interlocked to prevent simultaneous closure.
3) Version with 1/3-pole tripping. 14

15
Connection diagram
2 SA2546-agpen.eps
10
11
12
13
1) 7SA613 is only available in a 2/3 x 19" flush-mounting housing. 5) Version with 3-pole tripping.
14 2) Starting from unit version .../EE

3) Time advantage with fast relay approx. 3 ms.
6) Version with 1/3-pole tripping.
4) High-speed trip outputs in versions 7SA6*2*-*M, 7SA6*2*-*P,
7SA6*2*-*R.
Time advantage of high-speed relays over fast relays: approx. 5 ms
15

Connection diagram
SA2546-agpen.eps
2
10
11
1) Starting from unit version
.../EE.
2) High-speed trip outputs
in versions 7SA6*2*-*N,
12
7SA6*2*-*Q, 7SA6*2*-*S.
3) Time advantage with fast
relay approx. 3 ms.
4) Version with 3-pole 13
tripping.
5) Version with 1/3-pole
tripping.
Time advantage of high-
speed relays over fast 14
relays: approx. 5 ms.
Note: For serial interfaces
see Fig. 6/40.
15

Connection diagram
2 SA2546-agpen.eps
10
11
12
1) Version with 3-pole
13 tripping.
2) Each pair of contacts is
mechanically interlocked
to prevent simultaneous
14 closure.
3) Version with 1/3-pole
tripping.
Note: For serial interfaces see
Fig. 6/40.
15

SIPROTEC 7SA522 distance protection relay for transmission lines
Function overview
• Non-switched distance protection with 6 measuring systems
(21/21N)
• High resistance ground (earth)-fault protection for single- and
three-pole tripping (50N/51N/67N) 2
• Tele (pilot) protection (85)
• Fault locator (FL)
• Power swing detection/tripping (68/68T) 3
• Phase-overcurrent protection (50/51/67)
• STUB bus overcurrent protection (50 STUB)
LSP2309-afpen.tif
• Switch-onto-fault protection (50HS)
• Over/undervoltage protection (59/27)
4
• Over/underfrequency protection (81O/U)
• Auto-reclosure (79)
• Synchro-check (25) 5
• Breaker failure protection (50BF)
Control functions
Fig. 6/46 SIPROTEC 7SA522 distance protection relay • Commands for control of CB and isolators 6
Description • Trip circuit supervision (74TC)
• Self-supervision of the relay 7
The SIPROTEC 7SA522 relay provides full-scheme distance • Measured-value supervision
protection and incorporates all functions usually required for the
protection of a power line. The relay is designed to provide fast • Event logging/fault logging
and selective fault clearance on transmission and subtransmis-
sion cables and overhead lines with or without series capacitor
• Oscillographic fault recording
• Switching statistics
8
compensation. The power system star point can be solid or
resistance grounded (earthed), resonant-grounded via Peterson Front design
coil or isolated. The 7SA522 is suitable for single-pole and
three-pole tripping applications with and without tele (pilot)
• User-friendly local operation with numeric keys
• LEDs for local alarm
9
protection schemes.
• PC front port for convenient relay setting
– The 7SA522 incorporates several protective functions usually
• Function keys
required for transmission line protection.
10
– High-speed tripping time
• Front interface for connecting a PC
– Suitable for cables and overhead lines with or without series
• System interface for connecting to a control system via various
capacitor compensation
– Self-setting power swing detection for power swing
protocols 11
frequencies up to 7 Hz – IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
– Digital relay-to-relay communication for two and three – PROFIBUS DP
terminal topologies – DNP 3 12
• 2 serial protection data interfaces for tele (pilot) protection
– Adaptive auto-reclosure (ADT)
• Rear-side service/modem interface
• Time synchronization via IRIG B or DCF77 or system interface
13
Hardware
• Binary inputs: 8/16/24 14

• Output relays: 16/24/32
• High-speed trip outputs: 5 (optional)
15
Application
Application
1 The 7SA522 relay provides full-scheme

distance protection and incorporates all
functions usually required for the protec-
tion of a power line. The relay is designed
2 to provide fast and selective fault clear-
ance on transmission and subtransmission
cables and overhead lines with or without
series capacitor compensation. This
3 contributes towards improved stability and
availability of your electrical power trans-
mission system. The power system star
point can be solid or impedance grounded
(earthed), resonant-grounded via Peterson
4 coil or isolated. The 7SA522 is suitable for
single and three-pole tripping applications
with and without tele (pilot) protection
schemes.
5 The effect of apparent impedances in
unfaulted fault loops is eliminated by a Fig. 6/47 Single-line diagram
sophisticated and improved method which
uses pattern recognition with symmetrical components and load
6 compensation. The correct phase selection is essential for selective ANSI Protection functions
tripping and reliable fault location. Distance protection
21/21N
During network power swings, an improved power swing block- Fault locator
FL
7 ing feature prevents the distance protection from unwanted trip-
ping and optionally provides controlled tripping in the event of 50N/51N/67N Directional earth(ground)-fault protection
loss of synchronism (out of step). This function guarantees power
transmission even under critical network operating conditions. 50/51/67 Backup overcurrent protection
8 Cost-effective power system management 50 STUB STUB-bus overcurrent stage
Power swing detection/tripping

The SIPROTEC 4 units are numerical relays which also provide 68/68T
control and monitoring functions and therefore support the Teleprotection for distance protection
85/21
user in view of a cost-effective power system management. The
9 security and reliability of power supply is increased as a result of 27WI Weak-infeed protection
minimizing the use of hardware.
85/67N Teleprotection for earth(ground)-fault protection
The local operation has been designed according to ergonomic
50HS Switch-onto-fault protection
10 criteria. Large, easy-to-read backlit displays are provided.
The SIPROTEC 4 units have a uniform design and a degree of func- 50BF Breaker-failure protection
tionality which represents a benchmark-level of performance in Overvoltage/undervoltage protection
59/27
protection and control. If the requirements for protection, control
11 and interlocking change, it is possible in the majority of the cases
to implement such changes by means of parameterization using
81O/U Over/underfrequency protection
Synchro-check
DIGSI 4 without having to change the hardware. 25
The use of powerful microcontrollers and the application of 79 Auto-reclosure
12 digital measured-value conditioning and processing largely sup-

presses the influence of higher-frequency transients, harmonics 74TC Trip circuit supervision
and DC components. 86 Lockout (CLOSE command interlocking)
Features
13 • High speed tripping time
• Suitable for cables and overhead lines with or without series
capacitor compensation
14 • Self setting power swing detection fo frequencies up to 7 Hz
• Digital relay-to-relay communication for two and three
terminal topologies
• Adaptive auto-reclosure (ADT)
15
Construction
Construction
Connection techniques and housing 1

½ and -rack sizes
These are the available housing widths
of the SIPROTEC 7SA522 relays, referred
2
to a 19" module frame system. This
means that previous models can always
be replaced. The height is a uniform
245 mm for flush-mounting housings and
3
266 mm for surface-mounting housings
LSP2310-afpen.tif
for all housing widths. All cables can be
connected with or without ring lugs. Plug-
in terminals are available as an option. 4
cable harnesses. In the case of surface
mounting on a panel, the connection
5
communication interfaces are located in a Fig. 6/48 Housing widths ½ × 19" and × 19"
sloped case at the top and bottom of the
housing. 6
8
LSP2174-afp.tif
LSP2166-afp.tif
9
10
Fig. 6/49 Rear view with screw-type terminals Fig. 6/50 Rear view with terminal covers and
and serial interfaces wiring
11
12
13
14
15
1 Distance protection (ANSI 21, 21N)

The main function of the 7SA522 is a full-scheme distance
protection. By parallel calculation and monitoring of all six
2 impedance loops, a high degree of sensitivity and selectivity is

achieved for all types of faults. The shortest tripping time is less
than one cycle. Single-pole and three-pole tripping is possible.
The distance protection is suitable for cables and overhead lines
with or without series capacitor compensation.
3 Mho and quadrilateral characteristics
The 7SA522 relay provides quadrilateral as well as mho zone
characteristics. Both characteristics can be used separately for
4 phase and ground (earth) faults. Resistance ground (earth)
faults can, for instance, be covered with the quadrilateral
characteristic and phase faults with the mho characteristic.
Load zone
5 In order to guarantee a reliable discrimination between load Fig. 6/51 Distance protection: quadrilateral characteristic
operation and short-circuit - especially on long high loaded
lines - the relay is equipped with a selectable load encroachment
6 characteristic. Impedances within this load encroachment char-

acteristic prevent the distance zones from unwanted tripping.
Absolute phase-selectivity
The 7SA522 distance protection incorporates a well-proven,
7 highly sophisticated phase selection algorithm. The pickup of
unfaulted loops is reliably eliminated to prevent the adverse
influence of currents and voltages in the fault-free loops. This
phase selection algorithm achieves single-pole tripping and
8 correct distance measurement in a wide application range.
The influence of wrong distance measurement due to parallel
9 lines can be compensated by feeding the neutral current of the
parallel line to the relay. Parallel line compensation can be used
for distance protection as well as for the fault locator.
7 distance zones
10 Six independant distance zones and one separate overreach
zone are available. Each distance zone has dedicated time
stages, partly separate for single-phase or multi-phase faults. Fig. 6/52 Distance protection: mho characteristic
Ground (earth) faults are detected by monitoring the neutral
11 current 3I0 and the zero-sequence voltage 3V0.
Elimination of interference signals
The quadrilateral tripping characteristic permits separate setting
Digital filters render the unit immune to interference signals
of the reactance X and the resistance R. The resistance section R
contained in the measured values. In particular, the influence of
can be set separately for faults with and without ground involve-
12 ment. This characteristic has therefore an optimal performance
DC components, capacitive voltage transformers and frequency
changes is considerably reduced. A special measuring method is
in case of faults with fault resistance. The distance zones can be
employed in order to assure protection selectivity during satura-
set forward, reverse or non-directional. Sound phase polariza-
tion of the current transformers.
tion and voltage memory provides a dynamically unlimited
13 directional sensitivity. Measuring voltage monitoring
Mho Tripping of the distance protection is blocked automatically in
the event of failure of the measuring voltage, thus preventing
The mho tripping characteristic provides sound phase respec-
spurious tripping.
14 tively memory polarization for all distance zones. The diagram
shows characteristic without the expansion due to polarizing. The measuring voltage is monitored by the integrated fuse fail-
During a forward fault the polarizing expands the mho circle ure monitor. Distance protection is blocked if either the fuse fail-
towards the source so that the origin is included. This mho circle ure monitor or the auxiliary contact of the voltage transformer
15 expansion guarantees safe and selective operation for all types

of faults, even for close-in faults.
protection switch operates and, in this case, the EMERGENCY
definite-time overcurrent protection can be activated.

Fault locator
The integrated fault locator calculates
the fault impedance and the distance- 1
to-fault. The result is displayed in ohms,
miles, kilometers or in percent of the
line length. Parallel line and load current
compensation is also available. 2
Power swing detection (ANSI 68, 68T)
Dynamic transient reactions, for instance
short-circuits, load fluctuations, auto- 3
reclosures or switching operations can
cause power swings in the transmission
network. During power swings, large
4
LSP2311-afp.tif
currents along with small voltages can
cause unwanted tripping of distance
protection relays. To avoid uncontrolled
tripping of the distance protection and
to achieve controlled tripping in the
event of loss of synchronism, the 7SA522 Fig. 6/53 Power swing current and voltage wave forms 5
relay is equipped with an efficient power
swing detection function. Power swings
can be detected under symmetrical load
conditions as well as during single-pole 6
auto-reclosures.
Tele (pilot) protection for distance pro-

tection (ANSI 85-21)
7
A teleprotection function is available for
fast clearance of faults up to 100 % of
the line length. The following operating
modes may be selected: 8
– PUTT, permissive underreaching zone
transfer trip
LSP2312-afp.tif
– POTT, permissive overreaching zone
transfer trip 9
– UNBLOCKING
– BLOCKING
– DUTT, direct underreaching zone trans-
fer trip (together with Direct Transfer
Fig. 6/54 Power swing circle diagram 10
Trip function)
The carrier send and receive signals are available as binary Phase-selective transmission is also possible with multi-end
inputs and outputs and can be freely assigned to each physical
relay input or output. At least one channel is required for each
applications, if some user-specific linkages are implemented
by way of the integrated CFC logic. During disturbances in the
11
direction. transmission receiver or on the transmission circuit, the tele-
protection function can be blocked by a binary input signal with-
Common transmission channels are power-line carrier,
microwave radio and fiber-optic links. A serial protection data
out losing the zone selectivity. The control of the overreach zone
Z1B (zone extension) can be switched over to the auto-reclosure
12
interface for direct connection to a digital communication function. A transient blocking function (Current reversal guard)
network or fiber-optic link is available as well. is provided in order to suppress interference signals during trip-
ping of parallel lines.
7SA522 also permits the transfer of phase-selective signals. This
feature is particularly advantageous as it ensures reliable single-
13
pole tripping, if two single-pole faults occur on different lines.
The transmission methods are suitable also for lines with three Under certain conditions on the power system it is necessary to
ends (three-terminal lines). execute remote tripping of the circuit-breaker. The 7SA522 relay
is equipped with phase-selective "external trip inputs" that can 14
be assigned to the received inter-trip signal for this purpose.
15
Weak-infeed protection: echo and/or trip (ANSI 27 WI)
1 To prevent delayed tripping of permissive schemes during weak

fault detector is picked up at the weak-infeed end of the line,
the signal received here is returned as echo to allow accelerated
tripping at the strong infeed end of the line. It is also possible
2 to initiate tripping at the weak-infeed end. A phase- selective
1-pole or 3-pole trip is issued if a permissive trip signal (POTT or
Unblocking) is received and if the phase-ground voltage drops
correspondingly. As an option, the weak infeed logic can be
3 equipped according to a French specification.
Directional ground(earth)-fault protection for high-

resistance faults (ANSI 50N, 51N, 67N)
4 In grounded (earthed) networks, it may happen that the

distance protection sensitivity is not sufficient to detect high-
resistance ground (earth) faults. The 7SA522 protection relay
therefore has protection functions for faults of this nature.
5 The ground (earth)-fault overcurrent protection can be used

with 3 definite-time stages and one inverse-time stage (IDMT).
t=
0,14
(I / I )
p
0,02
−1
Tp
A 4th definite-time stage can be applied instead of the one

inverse-time stage. Fig. 6/55 Normal inverse
6 Inverse-time characteristics according to IEC 60255-3 and ANSI/
IEEE are provided (see “Technical data”). An additional logarith-
Tele (pilot) protection for directional ground(earth)-fault
mic inverse-time characteristic is also available.
protection (ANSI 85-67N)
7 The direction decision can be determined by the neutral current

The directional ground(earth)-fault overcurrent protection can
be combined with one of the following teleprotection schemes:
components V2 and I2. In addition or as an alternative to the
directional determination with zero-sequence voltage, the star- • Directional comparison
point current of an grounded (earthed) power transformer may • BLOCKING
8 also be used for polarization. Dual polarization applications can • UNBLOCKING
therefore be fulfilled.
The transient blocking function (current reversal guard) is also
Alternatively, the direction can be determined by evaluation of provided in order to suppress interference signals during tripping
9 zero-sequence power. Each overcurrent stage can be set in for-
ward or reverse direction or for both directions (non-directional).
of parallel lines.
The pilot functions for distance protection and for ground
As an option, the 7SA522 relay can be provided with a sensitive (earth)-fault protection can use the same signaling channel or
neutral (residual) current transformer. This feature provides a two separate and redundant channels.
10 measuring range for the neutral (residual) current from 5 mA to
100 A with a nominal relay current of 1 A and from 5 mA to Backup overcurrent protection (ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51N, 67)
500 A with a nominal relay current of 5 A. Thus the ground
(earth)- fault overcurrent protection can be applied with extreme The 7SA522 provides a backup overcurrent protection. Two
sensitivity. definite-time stages and one inverse-time stage (IDMTL) are
11 The function is equipped with special digital filter algorithms,
available, separately for phase currents and for the neutral
(residual) current.
providing the elimination of higher harmonics. This feature
is particularly important for low zero-sequence fault currents The application can be extended to a directional overcurrent
protection (ANSI 67) by taking into account the decision of the
12 which usually have a high content of 3rd and 5th harmonics.
Inrush stabilization and instantaneous switch-onto-fault trip can available direction detection elements.
be activated separately for each stage as well. Two operating modes are selectable. The function can run in
Different operating modes can be selected. The ground(earth)- parallel to the distance protection or only during failure of the
13 fault protection is suitable for three-phase and, optionally, for

single-phase tripping by means of a sophisticated phase selector.
voltage in the VT secondary circuit (emergency operation).
The secondary voltage failure can be detected by the integrated
It may be blocked during the dead time of single-pole auto- fuse failure monitor or via a binary input from a VT miniature
reclose cycles or during pickup of the distance protection. circuit-breaker (VT m.c.b. trip).
14 Inverse-time characteristics according to IEC 60255-3 and ANSI/
IEEE are provided (see “Technical data”).
15
STUB bus overcurrent protection (ANSI 50(N)-STUB) Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)
The STUB bus overcurrent protection is a separate definite-time
overcurrent stage. It can be activated from a binary input signal-
The 7SA522 relay incorporates a two-stage circuit-breaker failure
protection to detect failures of tripping command execution, for 1
ling that the line isolator (disconnector) is open. example due to a defective circuit-breaker. The current detection
Settings are available for phase and ground(earth)-faults. logic is phase-segregated and can therefore also be used in
single-pole tripping schemes.
Instantaneous high-speed switch-onto-fault overcurrent
protection (ANSI 50HS) If the fault current is not interrupted after a time delay has
2
expired, a retrip command or the busbar trip command will be
Instantaneous tripping is possible when energizing a faulty line. generated. The breaker failure protection can be initiated by all
In the event of large fault currents, the high-speed switch-onto- integrated protection functions as well as by external devices via
fault overcurrent stage can initiate very fast 3-pole tripping. binary input signals. 3
With lower fault currents, instantaneous tripping after switch-
onto-fault is also possible with the overreach distance zone Z1B
or just with pickup in any zone.
The switch-onto-fault initiation can be detected via the binary
The 7SA522 relay is equipped with an auto-reclose function
(AR). The function includes several operating modes: 4
input “manual close” or automatically via measurement. • 3-pole auto-reclosure for all types of faults; different dead
times are available depending the type of fault
Overvoltage protection, undervoltage protection
(ANSI 59, 27)
phase faults
5
A voltage rise can occur on long lines that are operating at • 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults and for 2-phase faults
no-load or that are only lightly loaded. The 7SA522 contains a without ground, no reclosing for multi-phase faults
number of overvoltage measuring elements. Each measuring
element is of two-stage design. The following measuring ele-
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase and 3-pole auto-reclosing for
multi-phase faults
6
ments are available:
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults and 2-phase faults
• Phase-to-ground overvoltage without ground and 3-pole auto-reclosure for other faults
• Phase-to-phase overvoltage
• Zero-sequence overvoltage
• Multiple-shot auto-reclosure 7
• The zero-sequence voltage can be connected to the 4th voltage binary inputs and outputs
input or be derived from the phase voltages. • Control of the integrated AR function by external protection
• Positive-sequence overvoltage of the local end or calculated • Interaction with the internal or an external synchro-check 8
for the remote end of the line (compounding).
• Negative-sequence overvoltage
In addition to the above-mentioned operating modes, several
Tripping by the overvoltage measuring elements can be effected
either at the local circuit-breaker or at the remote station by
other operating principles can be employed by means of the
integrated programmable logic (CFC).
9
means of a transmitted signal.
Integration of auto-reclosure in the feeder protection allows
The 7SA522 is fitted, in addition, with three two-stage under- evaluation of the line-side voltages. A number of voltage-
voltage measuring elements: dependent supplementary functions are thus available: 10
• Phase-to-ground undervoltage • DLC
• Phase-to-phase undervoltage By means of dead-line check, reclosure is effected only when
the line is deenergized (prevention of asynchronous breaker
The undervoltage measuring elements can be blocked by means
closure). 11
• ADT
of a minimum current criterion and by means of binary inputs. The adaptive dead time is employed only if auto-reclosure
at the remote station was successful (reduction of stress on
Frequency protection can be used for over-frequency and
equipment). 12
• RDT
underfrequency protection. Unwanted frequency changes in Reduced dead time is employed in conjunction with auto-
the network can be detected and the load can be removed at a reclosure where no tele-protection method is employed:
specified frequency setting. Frequency protection can be used
over a wide frequency range (45 to 55, 55 to 65 Hz). There are When faults within the zone extension, but external to the pro-
13
four elements (selectable as overfrequency or underfrequency) tected line, are switched off for rapid auto-reclosure (RAR), the
and each element can be delayed separately. RDT function decides on the basis of measurement of the return
voltage from the remote station which has not tripped whether
or not to reduce the dead time. 14
15
Synchronism check (ANSI 25)

Negative active jQ Positive active
1 Where two network sections are switched in by control

command or following a 3-pole, it must be ensured that both
power (-P) power (+P)
network sections are mutually synchronous. For this purpose,

a synchronism-check function is provided. After verification
of the network synchronism the function releases the CLOSE
2 command. Alternatively, reclosing can be enabled for different
criteria, e.g., checking that the busbar or line is not carrying
jA
P
a voltage (dead line or dead bus).Fuse failure monitoring and
other supervision functions jB
3 The 7SA522 relay provides comprehensive monitoring functions S1
LSA_5018a en eps
covering both hardware and software. Furthermore, the mea-
sured values are continuously checked for plausibility. Therefore
the current and voltage transformers are also included in this
4 monitoring system.
Fig. 6/56 Monitoring of active power direction
open circuit in the voltage transformer secondary circuit, the
distance protection would respond with an unwanted trip due
5 to this loss of voltage. This secondary voltage interruption can
jQ Inductive (+Q)
be detected by means of the integrated fuse failure monitor.

Immediate blocking of distance protection and switching to
the backup-emergency protection is provided for all types of
6 secondary voltage failures.
jA
Additional measurement supervision functions are
P
• Symmetry of voltages and currents jB
7 • Broken-conductor supervision
• Summation of currents and voltages S1
LSA_5019a en eps
• Phase-sequence supervision
Capacitive (-Q)
8 Directional power protection

The 7SA522 has a function for detecting the power direction by
Fig. 6/57 Monitoring of reactive power
measuring the phase angle of the positive-sequence system's
power. Fig. 6/57 shows an application example displaying nega-
9 tive active power. An indication is issued in the case when the
measured angle φ (S1) of the positive-sequence system power is
One or two binary inputs for each circuit-breaker pole can be
within the P - Q - level sector. This sector is between angles φ A used for monitoring the circuit-breaker trip coils including the
and φ B. connecting cables. An alarm signal is issued whenever the circuit
10 Via CFC the output signal of the directional monitoring can be
linked to the “Direct Transfer Trip (DTT)” function and thus, as
is interrupted.
reverse power protection, initiate tripping of the CB. Lockout (ANSI 86)
Fig.6/58 shows another application displaying capacitive reactive Under certain operating conditions, it is advisable to block
11 power. In the case of overvoltage being detected due to long
lines under no-load conditions it is possible to select the lines
CLOSE commands after a TRIP command of the relay has been
issued. Only a manual “Reset” command unblocks the CLOSE
where capacitive reactive power is measured. command. The 7SA522 is equipped with such an interlocking
logic.
12
13
14
15
Commissioning and fault event

analyzing
Special attention has been paid to com- 1
missioning. All binary inputs and outputs
can be displayed and activated directly.
This can simplify the wiring check
and fault events and the fault records are
2
clearly arranged. For applications with
serial protection data interface, all cur-
rents, voltages and phases are available
via communication link at each local unit,
3
displayed at the front of the unit with
DIGSI 4 or with WEB Monitor.
A common time tagging facilitates the
comparison of events and fault records. 4
LSP2818.tif
WEB Monitor – Internet technology
In addition to the universal DIGSI 4 Fig. 6/58 Web Monitor: Display of the protection direction
5
operating program, the relay contains
(e.g. Internet Explorer). The advantage of 6
standard software tools and at the same
time make use of the Intranet/Internet
infrastructure. Apart from numeric values,
graphical displays in particular provide
7
clear information and a high degree of
operating reliability. Of course, it is also
possible to call up detailed measured
value displays and annunciation buffers. 8
By emulation of the integrated unit opera-
tion on the PC it is also possible to adjust
selected settings for commissioning
purposes. 9
10
LSP2820.tif
11
Fig. 6/59 Web monitor: Supported commissioning by phasor diagram
12
13
14
15
Communication
Communication

originates.
ing data telegram is initially acknowledged by the device
which will execute the command. After the release and execu-
tion of the command a feedback signal is generated. At every
4 stage of the control command execution particular conditions
are checked. If these are not satisfied, command execution
may be terminated in a controlled manner. Fig. 6/60 IEC 60870-5-103 star-type RS232 copper conductor
connection or fiber-optic connection
5 The units offer a high degree of flexibility by supporting different

standards for connection to industrial and power automation
systems. By means of the communication modules, on which the
protocols run, exchange and retrofit is possible. Therefore, the
units will also in future allow for optimal adaptation to changing
6 communication infrastructure such as the application of Ethernet
networks which are already widely applied in the power supply
sector.
7 Local PC interface
The serial RS232 PC interface accessible from the front of the
8 geous during commissioning.
Service / modem interface

By means of the RS 485/RS 232 interface, it is possible to
9 efficiently operate a number of protection units centrally via
DIGSI 4. Remote operation is possible on connection of a modem.
This offers the advantage of rapid fault clarification, especially
in the case of unmanned power plants. With the optical version, Fig. 6/61 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and IEC 61850
10 centralized operation can be implemented by means of a star

coupler.
entire SIPROTEC 4 unit range. These ensure that, where differ-
ent communcation protocols (IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103,
PROFIBUS, DNP, etc) are required, such demands can be met. For
Reliable bus architecture fiber-optic communication, no external converter is required for
• RS485 bus
12 With this data transmission via copper conductors, electro-
SIPROTEC 4.
magnetic fault influences are largely eliminated by the use of IEC 61850 protocol
system continues to operate without any problems.
for protection and control systems used by power supply
The fiber-optic double ring circuit is immune to electromag- this standard. By means of this protocol, information can also
netic interference. Upon failure of a section between two be exchanged directly between bay units so as to set up simple
units, the communication system continues to operate without masterless systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to
14 disturbance.
It is usually impossible to communicate with a unit that has
the units via the Ethernet but is also possible with DIGSI. It is also
possible to retrieve operating and fault records as well as fault
failed. Should the unit fail, there is no effect on the communi- recordings via a browser. This Web monitor will also provide a
cation with the rest of the system. few items of unit-specific information in browser windows.
15
Communication
LSP2162-afpen.tif
standardized protocol for efficient com- 1
LSP2164-afp.tif
munication with protection relays.
number of protection relay manufacturers
and is used worldwide. Supplements
for control functions are defined in
2
the manufacturer-specific part of this
standard.
PROFIBUS DP
3
PROFIBUS DP is an industrial com-
Fig. 6/62 820 nm fiber-optic communication Fig. 6/63 PROFIBUS fiber-optic double ring
munication standard and is supported
module
by a number of PLC and protection relay
manufacturers.
communication module
4
DNP 3.0
LSP2163-afpen.tif
5
protocol. SIPROTEC 4 units are Level 1 and
LSP3.01-0021.tif
Level 2 compatible.
6
station control
Together with the SICAM power automa-
tion system, SIPROTEC 4 can be used with 7
RS485 bus, or interference-free via the Fig. 6/64 RS232/RS485 electrical Fig. 6/65 Fiber-optic Ethernet communication
communication module module for IEC 61850 with
Units equipped with IEC 60870-5-103
interfaces can be connected to SICAM in
parallel via the RS485 bus or connected in
star by fiber-optic link. 9
Through this interface, the system is
open for the connection of units of other
manufacturers (see Fig. 6/67).
10
11
12
13
14
15
Communication
Because of the standardized interfaces, SIPROTEC units can also The communication possibilities are identical to those for the
be integrated into systems of other manufacturers or in SIMATIC. line differential protection relays 7SD5 and 7SD610. The follow-
1 Electrical RS485 or optical interfaces are available. The optimum
ing options are available:
• FO51), OMA12) module: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST connectors,
electrical converters. Thus, the RS485 bus allows low-cost wiring FO cable length up to 1.5 km for link to communication
in the cubicles and an interference-free optical connection to the networks via communication converters or for direct FO cable
2 master can be established. connection
For IEC 61850, an interoperable system solution is offered with • FO61), OMA22) module: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST connectors, FO
SICAM PAS. Via the 100 Mbits/s Ethernet bus, the units are linked cable length up to 3.5 km, for direct connection via multi-
with PAS electrically or optically to the station PC. The interface mode FO cable
3 is standardized, thus also enabling direct connection of units
• FO171): for direct connection up to 24 km3), 1300 nm, for
• FO181): for direct connection up to 60 km3), 1300 nm, for
systems. Units with an IEC 60870-5-103 interface are connected
4 with PAS via the Ethernet station bus by means of serial/Ethernet
converters. DIGSI and the Web monitor can also be used via the • FO191): for direct connection up to 100 km3), 1550 nm, for
same station bus. mono-mode fiber 9/125 μm, LC-Duplex connector
• FO301): for transmission with the IEEE C37.94 standard
Serial protection data interface
5 The tele (pilot) protection schemes can be implemented using
separate communication converters (7XV5662). These have a
digital serial communication. The 7SA522 is capable of remote fiber-optic interface with 820 nm and 2 ST connectors to the
relay communication via direct links or multiplexed digital com- protection relay. The link to the communication network is
munication networks. The serial protection data interface has
6 the following features:
optionally an electrical X21 or a G703.1 interface. If the connec-
tion to the multiplexor supports IEEE C37.94 a direct fibre optic
• Fast phase-selective teleprotection signaling for distance connection to the relay is possible using the FO30 module.
protection, optionally with POTT or PUTT schemes
For operation via copper wire communication (pilot wires), a
7 • Signaling for directional ground(earth)- fault protection –
directional comparison for high-resistance faults in solidly
modern communication converter for copper cables is available.
This operates with both the two-wire and three-wire copper con-
grounded systems. nections which were used by conventional differential protection
• Echo-function systems before. The communication converter for copper cables
8 • Two and three-terminal line applications can be implemented

without additional logic
is designed for 5 kV insulation voltage. An additional 20 kV
isolation transformer can extend the field of applications of this
technique into ranges with higher insulation voltage require-
• Interclose command transfer with the auto-reclosure “Adaptive
ments. With SIPROTEC 4 and the communication converter
dead time” (ADT) mode
for copper cables a digital follow-up technique is available for
9 • Redundant communication path switchover is possible with
the 7SA522 when 2 serial protection data interfaces are
two-wire protection systems (typical 15 km) and all three-wire
protection systems using existing copper communication links.
installed
Communication data:
• 28 remote signals for fast transfer of binary signals
10 • Flexible utilization of the communication channels by means
of the programmable CFC logic
• Supported network interfaces G703.1 with 64 kbit/s; X21/
RS422 with 64 or 128 or 512 kbit/s; IEEE C37.94
• Max. channel delay time 0.1 ms to 30 ms (in steps of 0.1 ms)
• Display of the operational measured values of the opposite
terminal(s) with phase-angle information relative to a common • Protocol HDLC
11 reference vector • 32-bit CRC-check according to CCITT and ITU
• Clock synchronization: the clock in only one of the relays • Each protection relay possesses a unique relay address
must be synchronized from an external so called “Absolute • Continuous communication link supervision: Individual faulty
Master” when using the serial protection data interface. This data telegrams do not constitute an immediate danger, if
12 relay will then synchronize the clock of the other (or the two
other relays in 3 terminal applications) via the protection data
they occur only sporadically. The statistical availability, per
minute and hour, of the serial protection data interface can be
interface. displayed.
• 7SA522 and 7SA6 can be combined via the protection data
13 interface.
Figure 6/68 shows four applications for the serial protection data
interface on a two-terminal line.
14
1) For flush-mounting housing.
15 3) For surface-mounting housing the internal fiber-optic module
(OMA1) will be delivered together with an external repeater.

Communication
10
11
12
Fig. 6/67 Communication topologies for the serial protection data interface on a two-terminal line
13
14
15
Communication
Three-terminal lines can also be protected

with a tele (pilot) protection scheme by
1 using SIPROTEC 4 distance protection
relays. The communication topology may
then be a ring or a chain topology, see
Fig. 6/69. In a ring topology a loss of one
2 data connection is tolerated by the system.
The topology is re-routed to become a
chain topology within less than 100 ms.
To reduce communication links and to
3 save money for communications, a chain
topology may be generally applied.
5 Ring topology
9
Chain topology
10
Fig. 6/68 Ring or chain communication topology
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connection
Typical connection
point in the line direction, I4 connected as
summation current transformer (= 3I0): 2
Holmgreen circuit
of the broken (open) delta winding on
3
internally.
4
Fig. 6/69 Example of connection for current and voltage transformers
5

6
The 3 phase current transformers are
7
permitting a high sensitive 3I0 measure-
ment.
Note: Terminal Q7 of the I4 transformer 8
must be connected to the terminal of
the core balance CT pointing in the same
direction as the neutral point of the phase
current transformers (in this case in line
direction). The voltage connection is
9
effected in accordance with Fig. 66/70,
6/74 or 6/75.
Fig. 6/70 Alternative connection of current transformers for sensitive ground-
current measuring with core-balance current transformers 10
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connection

of a grounded (earthed) transformer for
directional ground(earth)-fault protection.
2 The voltage connection is effected in

neutral current of a grounded (earthed) power transformer

the summation current of the parallel line
for parallel line compensation on overhead
7 lines. The voltage connection is effected in

the ground (earth) current of a parallel line
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connection

nected to broken (open) delta winding 1
monitoring and ground(earth)-fault
directional protection.
The current connection is effected in
accordance with Fig. 6/70, 6/71, 6/72 and
2
6/73.
4
Fig. 6/73 Alternative connection of voltage transformers for measuring
the displacement voltage (e-n voltage) 5
Alternative voltage connection 6

synchro-check.
Note: Any phase-to-phase or phase-to-
7
ground (earth) voltage may be employed
as the busbar voltage. Parameterization is
carried out on the unit. The current con-
nection is effected in accordance with 8
Fig. 6/70, 6/71, 6/72 and 6/73.
Fig. 6/74 Alternative connection of voltage transformers for measuring 10

the busbar voltage
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
1 Analog inputs
Quantity
Function can be assigned
8 or 16 or 24 (refer to ordering code)
Rated current Inom 1 or 5 A (selectable) Switching capacity

Make 1000 W/VA
Rated voltage 80 to 125 V (selectable) Break, high-speed trip outputs 1000 W/VA
2 Power consumption
In CT circuits with Inom = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA
Break, contacts
Break, contacts (for resistive
30 VA
40 W
In CT circuits with Inom = 5 A Approx. 0.30 VA load)
In the CT circuit for high sensitive Approx. 0.05 VA Break, contacts 25 VA
ground(earth)-fault protection (for τ = L/R ≤ 50 ms)
3 (refer to ordering code) at 1 A
In VT circuits Approx. 0.10 VA
Switching voltage 250 V
Permissible current 30 A for 0.5 s
Thermal overload capacity 5 A continuous
In CT circuits 500 A for 1 s
150 A for 10 s Operating time, approx.
4 20 A continuous
In the CT circuit for high sensitive 300 A for 1 s
NO contact
8 ms
8 ms
ground(earth)-fault protection 100 A for 10 s Fast NO contact 5 ms
(refer to ordering code) 15 A continuous High-speed NO trip outputs < 1 ms
LEDs
5 In VT circuits
Dynamic overload capacity
230 V continuous per phase
Quantity
In CT circuits 1250 A (one half cycle) RUN (green) 1
In the CT circuit for high sensitive 750 A (one half cycle) ERROR (red) 1
ground(earth)-fault protection Indication (red), 14
6 (refer to ordering code)

Auxiliary voltage
Unit design
Rated auxiliary voltage DC 24 to 48 V Housing 7XP20
DC 60 to 125 V Dimension 1/2 x 19" or 1/1 x 19"
7 DC 110 to 250 V
and AC 115 V with 50/60 Hz
Refer to ordering code, and see
dimension drawings, part 14
Permissible tolerance of the rated -20 % to +20 % Degree of protection acc. to EN 60529
auxiliary voltage
Max. superimposed AC voltage ≤ 15 %
8 (peak-to-peak)
Power consumption
Front
Rear
IP 51
IP 50
During normal operation Approx. 8 W For the terminals IP 20 with terminal cover put on
During pickup with all inputs and Approx. 18 W Weight
9 outputs activated
Bridging time during auxiliary
½ x 19" 6 kg
voltage failure x 19" 10 kg
Vaux = 48 V and Vaux ≥ 110 V ≥ 50 ms Surface-mounting housing
½x 19" 11 kg
Binary inputs
10 Quantity 8 or 16 or 24 (refer to ordering
x 19" 19 kg
Functions are freely assignable code)

Pickup/Reset voltage thresholds DC 19 V/ DC 10 V or DC 88 V/ DC 44 V
Ranges are settable by means of or DC 176 V/ DC 88 V, bipolar
11 jumpers for each binary input
Maximum permissible voltage
(3 nominal ranges DC 17/73/154 V)
DC 300 V
Input impulse suppression 220 nF coupling capacitance
12 at 220 V with a recovery time

> 60 ms.
13
14
15
Technical data
Electrical tests EMC tests for noise immunity; type tests

Specifications
Standards IEC 60255 (product standards)
Standards IEC 60255-6/-22 (product standard)
VDE 0435 part 301
1
IEEE Std C37.90.0/.1/.2; UL 508
VDE 0435 DIN VDE 0435-110
Further standards see “Individual High-frequency test 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; τ = 15 ms;
Insulation tests
functions” IEC 60255-22-1 class III and
VDE 0435 Section 303, class III
400 surges per s; test duration 2 s,
Ri = 200 Ω 2
Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air
Standards IEC 60255–5 and 60870-2-1
High-voltage test (routine test) and IEC 61000-4-2, class IV Ri = 330 Ω
All circuits except for power
2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz Irradiation with HF field, frequency 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz: 80 % AM;
sweep 1 kHz
3
high-speed outputs, IEC 60255-22-3 (report) class III 10 V/m; 800 to 960 MHz: 80 % AM;
communication and time 1 kHz
synchronization interfaces IEC 61000-4-3, class III 10 V/m; 1.4 to 2 GHz: 80 % AM; 1 kHz
Auxiliary voltage, binary
inputs and high-speed outputs
DC 3.5 kV Irradiation with HF field, single 10 V/m; 80, 160, 450, 900 MHz; 4
frequencies 80 % AM; 1 kHz; duty cycle > 10 s
(routine test) IEC 60255-22-31, IEC 61000-4-3, 900 MHz; 50 % PM, repetition
only isolated communication 500 V (r.m.s.), 50 Hz class III frequency 200 Hz
interfaces and time synchroni-
zation interface (routine test)
amplitude/pulse modulated
Fast transient disturbance/bursts 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
5
Impulse voltage test (type test) IEC 60255-22-4 and burst length = 15 ms;
All circuits except for commu- 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 µs; 0.5 Ws, IEC 61000-4-4, class IV repetition rate 300 ms;
nication interfaces and time 3 positive and 3 negative impulses in both polarities; Ri = 50 Ω;
synchronization interface,
class III
intervals of 5 s
test duration 1 min
Impulse: 1.2/50 µs
6
(SURGE),
Auxiliary supply Common mode: 2 kV; 12 Ω; 9 µF
Analog measurement inputs,

Differential mode:1 kV; 2 Ω; 18 µF
Common mode: 2 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF
7
binary inputs, relays output Differential mode: 1 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF
Line-conducted HF, amplitude- 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM;
modulated, IEC 61000-4-6, class III 1 kHz
Power system frequency magnetic 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for 3 s;
8
field
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV; 50 Hz
IEC 60255-6 0.5 mT; 50 Hz
capability, IEEE Std C37.90.1
2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz
τ = 50 μs; 400 surges per second,
9
test duration 2 s, Ri = 200 Ω
Fast transient surge withstand 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst length =
capability, IEEE Std C37.90.1 15 ms
repition rate 300 ms, ; both polarities;
test duration 1 min; Ri = 50 Ω
10
Radiated electromagnetic inter- 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz,
ference IEEE Std C37.90.2 amplitude and pulse-modulated
Damped oscillations
IEC 60694, IEC 61000-4-12
2.5 kV (peak value); polarity alterna-
ting 100 kHz; 1 MHz; 10 and 50 MHz;
11
Ri = 200 Ω
EMC tests for noise emission; type test
Standard
Radio noise voltage to lines, only
EN 61000-6-3 (generic standard)
150 kHz to 30 MHz
12
auxiliary voltage Limit class B
IEC-CISPR 22
Radio interference field strength
IEC-CISPR 22
30 to 1000 MHz
Limit class B 13
Harmonic currents on the network Class A limits are observed
lead at AC 230 V, IEC 61000-3-2
Voltage fluctuations and flicker Limits are observed
on the network incoming feeder
at AC 230 V, IEC 61000-3-3
14
15
Technical data
Mechanical stress test

During operation
Standards IEC 60255–21 and IEC 60068–2
2 IEC 60255–21–1, class 2

IEC 60068–2–6
3 IEC 60255–21–2, class 1
IEC 60068–2–27
Acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms,
3 shocks on each of the 3 axes in
both directions
IEC 60255–21–2, class 1 1 to 8 Hz: ± 3.5 mm amplitude
4 IEC 60068–3–3 (horizontal axis)
(vertical axis)
(horizontal axis)
(vertical axis)
During transport
6 Standards IEC 60255–21 and IEC 60068–2
IEC 60255–21–1, class 2 5 to 8 Hz: ± 7.5 mm amplitude;
IEC 60068–2–6 8 to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
IEC 60255–21–2, class 1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms,
IEC 60068–2–27 3 shocks on each of the 3 axes in
8 both directions
IEC 60255–21–2, class 1 Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms,
IEC 60068–2–29 1000 shocks on each of the 3 axes in
9 both directions

Standard IEC 60255-6
10 Temperatures
and -2, test Bd
11 temperature, tested for 96 h
Recommended permanent -5 °C to +55 °C / +23 °F to +131 °F
12 IEC 60255-6
permanent storage
13 transport
Humidity
Permissible humidity stress: Annual average on ≤ 75 % relative
It is recommended to arrange the humidity; on 56 days per year up to
units in such a way that they are 93 % relative humidity; condensation
14 not exposed to direct sunlight or
is not permitted.



7SA522 distance protection relay or transmission lines
Current transformer
7SA522 - -
1
Iph = 1 A1), IGnd = 1 A1) (min. = 0.05 A) 1
Iph = 1 A1), IGnd = high sensitive (min. = 0.003 A) 2
Iph = 5 A1), IGnd = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A)
Iph = 5 A1), IGnd = high sensitive (min. = 0.003 A)
5
see following
pages 2
6

DC 24 to 48 V, binary input threshold DC 17 V 3)
DC 60 to 125 V 2), binary input threshold DC 17 V 3)
2
4
3
DC 110 to 250 V 2), AC 115 V, binary input threshold DC 73 V 3) 5
DC 220 to 250 V 2), AC 115 V, binary input threshold DC 154 V 3) 6
Binary/
indication
Signal/
command
Fast
relay
High-
speed
Housing
width
Flush-
mounting
Flush-
mounting
Surface-
mounting
4
inputs outputs incl. trip referred housing/ housing/ housing/
live status output to 19” screw-type plug-in screw-type
contact terminals terminals terminals
5
8 4 12 – ½ A
8 4 12 – ½ E
8 4 12 – ½ J
16 12 12 – C 6
16 12 12 – G
16 12 12 – L

16
16
4
4
15
15
5
5

N
Q 7
16 4 15 5 S
24 20 12 – D
24
24
20
20
12
12
–
–

H
M
8
24 12 15 5 P
24 12 15 5 R
24
22
24
32
3
12
5
–
T
U
9
24 4 18 10 W
Region-specific default settings/language settings (language selectable)

Region DE, language: German A
10
Region World, language: English (GB) B
Region US, language: English (US) C
Region FR, language: French
Region World, language: Spanish
D
E
11
Region World, language: Italian F
Region World, language: Russian G
Region World, language: Polish H 12
Regulation on region-specific presettings and function versions:
Region DE: preset to f = 50 Hz and line length in km, only IEC, directional ground-(earth)
fault protection: no logarithmic inverse characteristic, no direction decision with
zero-sequence power Sr
13
Region US: preset to f = 60 Hz and line length in miles, ANSI inverse characteristic only, directional
ground-(earth) fault protection: no logarithmic inverse characteristic, no direction
decision with zero-sequence power Sr, no U0 inverse characteristic
Region World: preset to f = 50 Hz and line length in km, directional ground-(earth) fault protection:
1) Rated current can be selected by
means of jumpers. 14
no direction decision with zero-sequence Sr, no U0 inverse characteristic 2) Transition between the three
auxiliary voltage ranges can be
Region FR: preset to f = 50 Hz and line length in km, directional ground-(earth) fault protection:
selected by means of jumpers.
no U0 inverse characteristic, no logarithmic inverse characteristic, weak infeed logic
selectable between French specification and World specification. 3) The binary input thresholds can be
selected by means of jumpers.
15
Description Order No. Order Code
1 7SA522 distance protection relay for transmission lines
Port B
7SA522 - -
see
Empty 0
following
System interface, IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electrical RS232 1 pages
2 System interface, IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electrical RS485
System interface, IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector
2
3
System interface, PROFIBUS DP, electrical RS485 9 L 0 A
System interface, PROFIBUS DP, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector1) 9 L 0 B
3 System interface, DNP 3.0, electrical RS485 9 L 0 G
System interface, DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector1) 9 L 0 H
System interface, IEC 61850, 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, electrical, duplicate,RJ45 plug connectors 9 L 0 R
System interface, IEC 61850, 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector4) 9 L 0 S
4 Port C and/or Port D
Empty 0
Port C: DIGSI / modem, electrical RS232; Port D: empty 1
5 Port C: DIGSI / modem, electrical RS485; Port D: empty

Port C: DIGSI / modem, optical 820 nm, ST connector; Port D: empty
2
3
With Port D 9 M
6 Port C
Empty 0
DIGSI / modem, electrical RS232 1
DIGSI / modem, electrical RS485 2
7 DIGSI / modem, optical 820 nm, ST connector 3
Port D
8 For direct connection via multi-mode FO cable or communication networks2)

A
For direct connection via multi-mode FO cable B

FO cable length up to 24 km for direct connection via mono-mode FO cable3)
9 Protection data interface: optical 1300 nm, LC-Duplex connector
FO cable length up to 60 km for direct connection via mono-mode FO cable3) 5)
G
H
FO cable length up to 100 km for direct connection via mono-mode FO cable3) 6) J
10 FO30 optical 820 nm, 2 ST-connectors, length of optical fibre up to 1.5 km for multimode fibre,
for communication networks with IEEE C37.94 interface or direct optical fibre connection (not
available for surface-mounted housing) S
11
12
13 1) Optical double ring interfaces are not available with surface- the relay with electrical Ethernet interface and use a separate
mounting housings. Please, order the version with RS485 interface fiber-optic switch.
and a separate electrical/ optical converter. 5) For distances less than 25 km, two optical attenuators
2) Suitable communication converters 7XV5662 7XV5107-0AA00 are required to avoid optical saturation of the
14 (optical to G703.1/X21/RS422 or optical to pilot wire or optical to
ISDN) see “Accessories”.
receiver element.
6) For distances less than 50 km, two optical attenuators
3) For surface-mounting housing applications an internal fiber-optic 7XV5107-0AA00 are required to avoid optical saturation of the
module 820 nm will be delivered in combination with an external receiver element.
15 repeater.
4) For surface-mounting housing applications please order


7SA522 distance protection relay for transmission lines
Functions 1 and Port E

7SA522 - -
1
see
Trip mode 3-pole; Port E: empty 0 next
Trip mode 3-pole; BCD-coded output for fault location, Port E: empty 1 page
Trip mode 1 and 3-pole; Port E: empty
Trip mode 1 and 3-pole; BCD-coded output for fault location, Port E: empty
4 2
5
With Port E 9 N
Functions 1 3
Trip mode 3-pole 0
Trip mode 3-pole; BCD-coded output for fault location 1
Trip mode 1 and 3-pole 4
Trip mode 1 and 3-pole; BCD-coded output for fault location 5 4
Port E
Protection data interface:
FO5: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST connectors, FO cable length up to 1.5 km
for communication networks1) or direct connection via multi-mode FO cable A 5
FO6: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST connectors, FO cable length up to 3.5 km
for direct connection via multi-mode FO cable B
FO17: Optical 1300 nm, LC-Duplex connector
FO cable length up to 24 km for direct connection via mono-mode FO cable2) G 6
FO cable length up to 60 km or direct connection via mono-mode FO cable2) 3) H
FO cable length up to 100 km for direct connection via mono-mode FO cable2) 4)
FO30: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST connectors, length of optical fibre up to 1.5 km for multimode fibre,
J
7
for communication networks with IEEE C37.94 interface or direct optical fibre connection
(not available for surface-mounted housing) S
10
11
12
13
1) Suitable communication converters 7XV5662 3) For distances less than 25 km, two optical attenuators 14
(optical to G703.1/X21/ RS422 or optical to pilot wire) 7XV5107-0AA00 are required to avoid optical saturation of the
see "Accessories". receiver element.
2) For surface-mounting housing applications an internal fiber-optic 4) For distances less than 50 km, two optical attenuators
module 820 nm will be delivered in combination with an external
repeater.
7XV5107-0AA00 are required to avoid optical saturation of the
receiver element.
15
1 7SA522 distance protection relay for transmission lines
Functions 2
7SA522 - -
Distance protection characteristic Power swing detection Parallel line

(ANSI 21, 21N) (ANSI 68, 68T) compensation
2 Quadrilateral
Quadrilateral and / or MHO
C
E
Quadrilateral F
Quadrilateral and / or MHO H
3 Quadrilateral
Quadrilateral and / or MHO
1)
1)
K
M
Quadrilateral 1) N
Quadrilateral and / or MHO 1) Q
4 Functions 3
Auto-reclosure Synchro-check Breaker failure protection Over- / undervoltage
(ANSI 79) (ANSI 25) (ANSI 50BF) protection (ANSI 27, 59)
Over- / underfrequency
5 protection (ANSI 81)
A
B
C
6 D
E
F

7
G
H
J
K

8
L
M
N
P
9

Q
R
Functions 4
Direction ground(earth)-fault Measured values, extended
10 protection, grounded (earthed)
networks (ANSI 50N, 51N, 67N)
Min, max, mean
0
1
11

4
5
12
13
14
15 1) Only with position 7 of Order No. = 1 or 5.

Connecting cable (copper)

1
Voltage transformer miniature circuit-breaker 2

Manual for 7SA522

English, V4.61 and higher C53000-G1176-C155-5 3
German, V4.70 C53000-G1100-C155-8
10
11
12
13
14
15
1 Opto-electric communication converters

Optical to X21/RS422 or G703.1 7XV5662-0AA00
Optical to pilot wires 7XV5662-0AC00
2 Additional interface modules

3 Protection data interface FO 17, 1300 nm, mono-mode FO cable,
4 Protection data interface FO 19, 1550 nm, mono-mode FO cable,

Optical repeaters
5 LC-Duplex connector, 25 km 7XV5461-0BG00
6 LC-Duplex connector, 100 km 7XV5461-0BJ00

package
Supplier Fig.

LSP2289-afp.eps
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1 1 Siemens 6/78

10 Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 1)
Fig. 6/75 Mounting rail connector 0-827396-1 1 1)
for 19" rack CI2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0-827040-1 4000 1)
1)
11 0-827397-1
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163083-7
1
4000 1)
1)
0-163084-2 1
LSP2090-afp.eps
LSP2091-afp.eps
12 For CI2
and matching female
0-734372-1
1-734387-1
1 1)
1)
Fig. 6/76 Fig. 6/77

19"-mounting rail C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens 6/76
13 Short-circuit
links
For other terminals
C73334-A1-C33-1
C73334-A1-C34-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens
6/79
6/80
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps


Fig. 6/78 Fig. 6/79
15 for current contacts for voltage contacts/


Connection diagram, IEC
Fig. 6/80 Housing 1/2 x 19”, basic version 7SA522x-xA, 7SA522x-xE and 7SA522x-xJ
with 8 binary inputs and 16 binary outputs, hardware version .../FF
9
10
11
12
13
Fig. 6/81a Additional setting by jumpers: Fig. 6/81 Serial interfaces 14

Separation of common circuit of BO8 to BO12 with
jumpers X80, X81, X82. Switching of BO13, BO14,
BO15 as NO contact or NC contact with jumpers.
15
4
Fig. 6/83a
5 Additional setting by jumpers:
Separation of common circuit
of BO8 to BO12 with jumpers
X80, X81, X82. Switching
of BO13, BO14, BO15 as NO
6 contact or NC contact with
jumpers.
10
11
12
13
14 1) High-speed trip outputs in versions 7SA522x-xN, 7SA522x-xQ, 7SA522x-xS.

Note: For serial interfaces see Figure 6/82.
15 Fig. 6/82 Housing x 19”,medium version 7SA522x-xC, 7SA522x-xG, 7SA522x-xL, 7SA522x-xN, 7SA522x-xQ and
7SA522x-xS with 16 binary inputs and 24 binary outputs, hardware version .../FF

4
Fig. 6/84a
Additional setting by jumpers:
5
contact or NC contact with
jumpers.
6
10
11
12
13
1) High-speed trip outputs in
versions 7SA522x-xP,
7SA522x-xR, 7SA522x-xT.
Note: For serial interfaces 14
see Figure 6/82.
Fig. 6/83 Housing x 19”, maximum version 7SA522x-xD, 7SA522x-xH, 7SA522x-xM, 7SA522x-xP, 7SA522x-xR and
7SA522x-xT with 24 binary inputs and 32 binary outputs, hardware version .../FF 15
Connection diagram, ANSI
4
Fig. 6/85a
jumpers.
10
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 6/84 Housing ½ x 19”, basic version 7SA522x-xA, 7SA522x-xE and 7SA522x-xJ
with 8 binary inputs and 16 binary outputs, hardware version .../FF

4
Fig. 6/86a
5
contact or NC contact with
jumpers.
6
10
11
12
13
1) High-speed trip outputs in versions 7SA522x-xN, 7SA522x-xQ, 7SA522x-xS. 14

Fig. 6/85 Housing x 19”,medium version 7SA522x-xC, 7SA522x-xG, 7SA522x-xL, 7SA522x-xN, 7SA522x-xQ and
7SA522x-xS with 16 binary inputs and 24 binary outputs, hardware version .../FF 15
4
Fig. 6/87a
jumpers.
10
11
12
13
1) High-speed trip outputs
in versions 7SA522x-xP,
7SA522x-xR, 7SA522x-xT.
14 Note: For serial interfaces see
Figure 6/82.
15 Fig. 6/86 Housing x 19”, maximum version 7SA522x-xD, 7SA522x-xH and 7SA522x-xM
with 24 binary inputs and 32 binary outputs, hardware version ../FF

Line Differential Protection
Page
SIPROTEC 7SD61 differential protection relay

for two line ends 7/3
SIPROTEC 7SD52/53
multi-end differential and distance
protection in one relay 7/25
7
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Line Differential Protection / 7SD61
SIPROTEC 7SD61 differential protection relay for two line ends
Function overview
• Differential protection for universal use with power lines and
cables on all voltage levels with phase-segregated measure-
ment (87L)
• Two line ends capability 2
• Suitable for transformers in protected zones (87T)
• Restricted ground-fault protection (87N) if a transformer is
within the protection zone
• Well-suited for serial compensated lines
3
LSP2247-afpen.tif
• Two independent differential stages:
one stage for sensitive measuring for high-resistance faults
and one stage for high-current faults and fast fault clearance 4
• Breaker-failure protection (50BF)
• Phase and ground overcurrent protection with directional
element (50, 50N, 51, 51N, 67, 67N)
• Phase-selective intertripping (85) 5
• Overload protection (49)
Fig. 7/1 SIPROTEC 7SD61 differential protection relay • Over/underfrequency protection (81O/U) 6
• Auto-reclosure single/three-pole (79)
Control functions
Description
• Command and inputs for control of CB and disconnectors
(isolators)
7
The 7SD610 relay is a differential protection relay suitable for all
types of applications and incorporating all those functions
required for differential protection of lines, cables and trans-
formers. Transformers and compensation coils within the
differential protection zone are protected by means of integrated
8
functions, which were previously to be found only in transformer • 8 oscillographic fault records
differential protection. It is also well-suited for complex applica-
• CT-secondary current supervision
tions such as series and parallel compensation of lines and
cables. • Event logging / fault logging 9
It is designed to provide differential and directional back-up • Switching statistics
protection for all voltage levels and types of networks. The relay
Front design
features high speed and phase-selective short-circuit measure-
ment. The unit is thus suitable for single-phase and three-phase • User-friendly local operation 10
fault clearance. • PC front port for convenient relay setting
Digital data communication for differential current measure- • Function keys and 8 LEDs for local alarm
ment is effected via fiber-optic cables, networks or pilot wires
connections, so that the line ends can be quite far apart. The
Communication interfaces 11
serial protection interface (R2R interface) of the relay can flexibly • 1 serial protection data (R2R) interface
be adapted to the requirements of all existing communication • Front interface for PC connection
media. If the communication method is changed, flexible retro-
fitting of communication modules to the existing configuration
12
is possible. – IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Apart from the main protection function, i.e. the differential pro- – PROFIBUS DP, DNP 3 and MODBUS
tection, the 7SD610 has a full range of configurable emergency
and / or back-up protection functions such as phase and ground
• Service / modem interface (rear) 13
• Time synchronization via IRIG-B, DCF77 or system interface
overcurrent protection with directional elements if voltage
transformers are connected. Overload, under- and over-voltage/ Features
frequency and breaker-failure protection round off the functional
scope of the 7SD610.
• Browser-based commissioning tool 14
• Direct connection to digital communication networks
15
Application
6 Fig. 7/2
Application ANSI Protection functions

ΔI for lines / cables
7 The 7SD610 relay is a differential protection relay suitable for
all types of applications and incorporating all those functions
87L
87T ΔI for lines / cables with transformers

required for differential protection of lines, cables and trans-
87N Restricted ground-fault protection
formers.
8 Transformers and compensation coils within the differential
protection zone are protected by means of integrated functions,
85 Phase-selective intertrip, remote trip
which were previously to be found only in transformer differ- 86 Lockout function

ential protection. It is also well-suited for complex applications
50/50N Overcurrent protection
such as series and parallel compensation of lines and cables.
9 It is designed to provide protection for all voltage levels and
51/51N/67/67N
with directional elements
types of networks; two line ends may lie within the protection 50HS Instantaneous high-current tripping
zone. The relay features very high-speed and phase-selective (switch-onto-fault)
10 short-circuit measurement. The unit is thus suitable for single

and three-phase fault clearance. The necessary restraint current
79 Single or three-pole auto-reclosure
with new adaptive technology
for secure operation is calculated from the current transformer 49 Overload protection
data by the differential protection unit itself.
50BF Breaker-failure protection
11 Digital data communication for differential current measure-

ment is effected via fiber-optic cables, digital communication 59/27 Overvoltage / undervoltage protection
networks or pilot wires, so that the line ends can be quite far Overfrequency / underfrequency protection
81O/U
apart. Thanks to special product characteristics, the relay is
Trip circuit supervision
12 particularly suitable for use in conjunction with digital com-
munication networks.
74TC
The units measure the delay time in the communication network

and adaptively match their measurements accordingly. The units
13 can be operated through pilot wires or twisted telephone pairs
at typical distances of 8 km by means of special converters.
The serial communication interfaces for data transmission
between the ends are replaceable by virtue of plug-in modules
14 and can easily be adapted to multi-mode and mono-mode
fiber-optic cables and to leased lines within the communication
networks. Secure, selective and sensitive protection of two-end
lines can now be provided by means of these relays.
15
Application
Typical applications employing fiber-

optic cables or communication net-
works 1
Five applications are shown in Fig. 7/3.
The 7SD610 differential protection relay
is connected to the current transformers
and to the voltage transformers at one
end of the cable, although only the
2
currents are required for the differential
protection function. The voltage connec-
tion improves, among other things, the
frequency measurement and allows the
3
measured values and the fault records
to be extended. Direct connection to the
other units is effected via mono-mode
fiber-optic cables and is thus immune to 4
interference.
Five different modules are available.
In the case of direct connection via
fiber-optic cables, data communication is
5
effected at 512 kbit/s and the command
time of the protection unit is reduced to
15 ms. Parallel compensation (for the
load currents) is provided within the 6
protection zone of the cable. By means
of the integrated inrush restraint, the
differential protection relay can tolerate
the surge on switching-on of the cable
and the compensation reactors, and thus
7
allows sensitive settings to be used under
load conditions.
7SD610 offers many features to reliably 8
and safely handle data exchange via com-
munication networks.
Depending on the bandwidth available a
communication converter for G703- 9
64 kbit/s or X21-64/128/512 kbit/s can max. 1.5 km with max. 1.5 km with
be selected. For higher communication 62.5 μm/125 μm 62.5 μm/125 μm
speed a communication converter with multi-mode fiber multi-mode fiber
10
SIPV6.010en.eps
MUX Communication MUX
G703-E1 (2,048 kbit/s) or G703-T1 network
IEEE C37.94 IEEE C37.94
(1,554 kbit/s) is available. Furthermore
the 7SD610 supports the IEEE C37.94
interface with 1/2/4 and 8 timeslots. FO30 with ST connectors FO30 with ST connectors
The connection to the communication 11

converter is effected via a cost-effective
820 nm interface with multi-mode fiber.
This communication converter converts
the optical input to electrical signals in
accordance to the specified telecommuni-
12
cation interface.
The fourth example shows the relays
being connected via a twisted pilot 13
pair. Data exchange and transmission is
effected via pilot wires of a typical length
of 15 km. Here a transformer is in the pro-
tected zone. In this application, 7SD610
is set like a transformer differential
14
relay. Vector group matching and inrush
restraint is provided by the relay.
Fig. 7/3 Typical applications 15

• A special feature of the unit is parameterization of the current

transformer data. The unit automatically calculates the
1 necessary restraint current by means of the previously entered
current transformer error. The unit thus adaptively matches
the working point on the tripping characteristic so that it is no
longer necessary for the user to enter characteristic settings.
2 • Different current-transformer ratios may be employed at the
ends of the line. A mismatch of 1: 8 is permissible.
• Differential protection tripping can be guarded with overcur-
rent pickup. In this case, pickup of the protection relay is
3
LSP2236-afpen.tif
initiated only on simultaneous presence of differential current
and overcurrent.
• Easy to set tripping characteristic. Because the relay works
adaptively, only the set-point IDiff> (sensitive stage) and IDiff>>
4 (high-set current differential stage) must be set according to
the charge current of the line/cable.
• Differential and restraint current are monitored continuously
during normal operation and are displayed as operational
Fig. 7/4
5 measured values.
• High stability during external faults even with different current
Construction transformers saturation level. For an external fault, only 5 ms
of saturation-free time are necessary to guarantee the stability
6 The 7SD610 is available in a housing width of 1/3, referred to a
19” module frame system. The height is a uniform 245 mm for
of the differential protection.
• Single-phase short-circuits within the protection zone can be
flush-mounting housings and 266 mm for surface-mounting cleared using a time delay, whereas multi-phase faults are
housings. cleared instantaneously. Because of this function, the unit is
7 All cables can be connected with or without cable ring lugs.
Plug-in terminals are available as an option, it is thus possible
optimally suited for applications in inductively compensated
networks, where differential current can occur as a result of
charge transfer phenomena on occurrence of a single-phase
to employ prefabricated cable harnesses. In the case of surface
ground fault within the protection zone, thus resulting in
mounting on a panel, the connection terminals are located
undesired tripping by the differential protection relay. Unde-
8 above and below in the form of screw-type terminals. The
communication interfaces are located on the same sides of the
sired tripping of the differential protection can be suppressed
by making use of the provision for introduction of a time delay
housing. For dimensions, please refer to “Dimension drawings”.
on occurrence of single-phase faults.
• With transformers or compensation coils in the protection
9 Protection functions
zone, the sensitive response threshold IDiff> can be blocked by
an inrush detection function. Like in transformer differential
protection, it works with the second harmonic of the measured
Differential protection (ANSI 87L, 87T, 87N) current compared with the fundamental component. Blocking
10 The differential protection function has the following features: is cancelled when an adjustable threshold value of the short-
circuit current is reached, so that very high current faults are
• Measurements are performed separately for each phase; thus
switched off instantaneously.
the trip sensitivity is independent of the fault type.
• In the case of transformers within the protection zone, vector
• An adaptive measurement method with high sensitivity for
11 differential fault currents below the rated current offers the
group adaptation and matching of different current trans-
former ratios is carried out within the unit. The interference
detection of highly resistive faults. This trip element uses
zero current, which flows through the grounded winding, is
special filters, which offer high security even with high level
eliminated from the differential current measurement. The
DC components in the short-circuit current. The trip time of
12 this stage is about 35 ms, the pickup value is about 10 % of
the rated current.
7SD610 thus behaves like a transformer differential relay
whose ends, however, can be quite far apart.
• A more sensitive protection for transformers within the protec-
• A high-set differential trip stage which clears differential fault
tion zone is given by measurement of the star-point current on
currents higher than the rated current within 15 ms offers
13 fast tripping time and high-speed fault clearance time. A
high-speed charging comparison method is employed for this
an grounded winding. Therefore the IE current measurement
input has to be used.
If the sum of the phase currents of a winding is compared with
function.
the measured star-point current, a sensitive ground-current
• When a long line or cable is switched on at one end, transient differential protection (REF) can be implemented. This function
14 peaks of the charge current load the line. To avoid a higher
setting of the sensitive differential trip stage, this setpoint may
is substantially more sensitive than the differential protection
during faults to ground in a winding, detecting fault currents
be increased for a settable time. This offers greater sensitivity as small as 10 % of the transformer rated current.
under normal load conditions.
15
Characteristics of differential protection communciation through

the remote relay interfaces
The 7SD610 is ideally adapted for application in communication 1
networks.
The data required for measurement of differential currents and
numerous other variables are exchanged between the protection
units in the form of synchronous serial telegrams employing
2
the full duplex mode. The telegrams are secured using 32-bit
check-sums so that transmission errors in a communication
network are detected immediately. Moreover, each telegram
carries a time stamp accurate to a microsecond, thus allowing 3
measurement and monitoring of the continuous transmission
delay times.
• Data communication is immune to electromagnetic interfer-
ence, since fiber-optic cables are employed in the critical 4
region, e.g. in the relay house or relay room. Fig. 7/5 Tripping characteristic
• Monitoring of each individual incoming telegram and of
overall communication between the units, no need of
supplementary equipment. The check sum (correctness of the
• In addition, four high-speed remote commands are available,
which can be introduced either via a binary input or by means
5
telegram contents), the address of the neighboring unit and
of an internal event and then rapidly communicated to the
the transmission delay time of the telegram are monitored.
other end.
• Unambiguous identification of each unit is ensured by assign-
ment of a settable communication address within a differential
• Provided that the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts are wired
to binary inputs at the line ends, the switching status of the
6
protection topology. Only those units mutually known to each
circuit-breakers is indicated and evaluated at the remote ends
other can cooperate. Incorrect interconnection of the com-
of the line. Otherwise the switching status is derived from the
munication links results in blocking of the protection system.
measured current.
• Detection of telegrams, which are reflected back to the trans-
Possible modes of operation of the differential protection section
7
mitting unit within the communication network.
• Detection of path switching in a communication network. Special modes of operation such as the “Commissioning mode”
Automatic restraint of the protection function until measure- and “Test operation” are advantageous for commissioning and
ment of the parameters of the new communication link has
been completed.
servicing the units. 8
• In general, an alarm indication is generated on interruption
• Continuous measurement of the transmission delay time to of the communication links and an attempt is made to
the remote line end. Taking into account the delay time in re-establish the communication link. The units operate in the
differential current measurement and compensation thereof,
including monitoring of a settable maximum permissible delay
emergency mode, provided that these have been parameter-
ized.
9
time of 30 ms. • The complete configuration can also be used in a testing
• Generation of alarm signals on disturbed communication mode. The local end is in an operating mode, which, for
links. Statistical values for the percentage availability of the
communication links per minute and per hour are available as
example, allows the pickup values to be tested. The current
values received from the remote end of the line are set to
10
operational measured values. zero, so as to achieve defined test conditions. The remote-end
• With a GPS high-precision 1-s pulse from a GPS receiver the unit ignores the differential currents, which occur as a result
relays can be syncronized with an absolute, exact time at each
line end. In this way, the delay in the receive and transmit path
of testing, and blocks differential protection and breaker
intertripping. It may optionally operate in the backup protec-
11
can be measured exactly. With this optional feature the relay tion mode.
can used in communication networks where this delay times • Differential protection is activated in the commissioning mode.
are quite different. However, test currents injected at one end of the line and
which generate a differential current do not lead to output of
12
Phase-selective intertrip and remote trip/indications
a TRIP command by the differential protection or to breaker
Normally the differential current is calculated for each line end intertripping. All those indications that would actually occur
in conjunction with a genuine short-circuit are generated
nearly at the same time. This leads to fast and uniform tripping
times. Under weak infeed conditions, especially when the and displayed. TRIP commands can be issued by the backup 13
differential function is combined with an overcurrent pickup, a protection.
phase-selective intertrip offers a tripping of both line ends.
• 7SD610 has 4 intertrip signals which are transmitted in high-
speed mode (20 ms) to the other terminals. These intertrip 14
signals can also be initiated and transmitted by an external
relay via binary inputs. In cases where these signals are not
employed for breaker intertripping, other alternative informa-
tion can be rapidly transmitted to the remote end of the line. 15
1 A built-in overload protection with a current and thermal alarm

stage is provided for thermal protection of cables and transf-
ormers.
The trip time characteristics are exponential functions according
2 to IEC 60255-8. The preload is considered in the trip times for
overloads.
An adjustable alarm stage can initiate an alarm before tripping is
initiated.
3 Overcurrent protection
(ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51N, 67, 67N)
The 7SD610 provides a three-stage overcurrent protection.
4 Two definite-time stages and one inverse-time stage (IDMT) are
available, separately for phase currents and for the ground cur-
rent. Two operating modes (backup, emergency) are selectable.
Two stages e.g. can run in backup mode, whereas the third stage
5 is configured for emergency operation, e.g. during interruption
of the protection communication and/or failure of the voltage in
t=
0,14
(I / I )
p
0,02
−1
Tp
the VT secondary circuit. The secondary voltage failure can be

detected by the integrated fuse failure monitor or via a binary
Fig. 7/6 Inverse
input from a VT miniature circuit-breaker (VT m.c.b. trip).
6 The following ANSI/IEC inverse-time characteristics are available:
• Inverse Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79)
• Short inverse The 7SD610 relay is equipped with an auto-reclose function
7 • Long inverse (AR). The function includes several operating modes:
• Moderately inverse • 3-pole auto-reclosure for all types of faults; different dead
times are available depending the type of fault
• Very inverse
8 • Extremely inverse
• Definite inverse
phase faults
If VTs are connected, separate stages with directional measure- without ground, no reclosing for multi-phase faults
ment are available, two definite-time and two inverse-time
9 stages (each for phase and ground). Using the forward pickup
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase and 3-pole auto-reclosing for
multi-phase faults
indication as a signal to the remote end, a 100 % protection cov-
erage of the line can be operated in parallel to the differential
without ground and 3-pole auto-reclosure for other faults
protection.
10 Instantaneous high-speed switch-onto-fault overcurrent
• Multiple-shot auto-reclosure
protection (ANSI 50HS) binary inputs and outputs
Instantaneous tripping is possible when energizing a faulty • Control of the integrated AR function by external protection
11 line. On large fault currents, the high-speed switch-onto-fault
overcurrent stage can initiate very fast three-pole tripping.
• Adaptive auto-reclosure. Only one line end is closed after the
dead time. If the fault persists this line end is switched off.
Circuit-breaker closure onto a faulty line is also possible provided Otherwise the other line ends are closed via a command over
that the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts of the remote end are the communication links. This avoids stress when heavy fault
12 connected and monitored. If an overcurrent arises on closing currents are fed from all line ends again.
of the circuit-breaker at one end of a line (while the other • Interaction with an external synchro-check
end is energized) the measured current can only be due to a • Monitoring of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
short-circuit. In this case, the energizing line end is tripped
13 instantaneously.
In the case of circuit-breaker closure, the auto-reclosure is
blocked at both ends of the line to prevent a further unsuccess-
ful closure onto a short-circuit. If circuit-breaker intertripping to
14 the remote end is activated, intertripping is also blocked.
15
In addition to the above-mentioned operating modes, several The 7SD610 is fitted, in addition, with three two-stage under-
other operating principles can be employed by means of the voltage measuring elements:
integrated programmable logic (CFC). • Phase-to-ground undervoltage 1
Integration of auto-reclosure in the feeder protection allows • Phase-to-phase undervoltage
evaluation of the line-side voltages. A number of voltage- • Positive-sequence undervoltage
dependent supplementary functions are thus available:
• DLC
of a minimum current criterion and by means of binary inputs.
2
By means of dead-line check, reclosure is effected only when
the line is deenergized (prevention of asynchronous breaker Frequency protection (ANSI 81O/U)
closure).
• ADT Frequency protection can be used for overfrequency and
underfrequency protection. Unwanted frequency changes in
3
The adaptive dead time is employed only if auto-reclosure
at the remote station was successful (reduction of stress on the network can be detected and the load can be removed at a
equipment). specified frequency setting. Frequency protection can be used
• RDT
four elements (selectable as overfrequency or underfrequency)
4
Reduced dead time is employed in conjunction with auto- and each element can be delayed separately.
reclosure where no tele-protection method is employed:
When faults within the zone extension, but external to the
protected line, are switched off for rapid auto-reclosure (RAR),
the RDT function decides on the basis of measurement of the
5
return voltage from the remote station which has not tripped
whether or not to reduce the dead time.
Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF) 6

The 7SD610 relay incorporates a two-stage breaker failure
protection to detect the failure of tripping command execution,
for example, due to a defective circuit-breaker. The current
detection logic is phase-segregated and can therefore also be
7
used in single-pole tripping schemes. If the fault current is
not interrupted after a settable time delay has expired, a retrip
command or a busbar trip command is generated. The breaker
failure protection can be initiated by all integrated protection 8
functions as well as by external devices via binary input signals.

(ANSI 59, 27) 9
load or are only lightly loaded. The 7SD610 contains a number
of overvoltage measuring elements. Each measuring element
is of two-stage design. The following measuring elements are
available:
10
• Zero-sequence overvoltage 11
• The zero-sequence voltage can be connected to the 4th voltage
input or be derived from the phase voltages.
• Positive-sequence overvoltage of the local end or calculated
for the remote end of the line (compounding).
12
either at the local circuit-breaker or at the remote station by 13
14
15
Monitoring and supervision functions Lockout (ANSI 86)
1 The 7SD610 relay provides comprehensive monitoring functions

covering both hardware and software. Furthermore, the mea-
All binary outputs can be stored like LEDs and reset using the
LED reset key. The lockout state is also stored in the event of
sured values are continuously checked for plausibility. Therefore supply voltage failure. Reclosure can only be issued after the
the current and voltage transformers are also included in this lockout state is reset.
monitoring system.
2 Current transformer / Monitoring functions
Local measured values
The measured values are calculated from the measured current
A broken wire between the CTs and relay inputs under load may and voltage signals along with the power factor (cos φ), the
lead to maloperation of a differential relay if the load current frequency, the active and reactive power. Measured values are
3 exceeds the differential setpoint. The 7SD610 provides fast bro- displayed as primary or secondary values or in percent of the
ken wire supervision which immediatelly blocks all line ends if specific line rated current and voltage. The relay uses a 20 bit
a broken wire condition is measured by a local relay. This avoids high-resolution AD converter and the analog inputs are factory-
maloperation due to broken wire condition. Only the phase calibrated, so a high accuracy is reached.
4 where the broken wire is detected is blocked. The other phases
remain under differential operation.
The following values are available for measured-value
processing:
Fuse failure monitoring • Currents 3 x IPhase, 3I0, IE, IE sensitive
5 If any measured voltage is not present due to short-circuit or

open circuit in the voltage transformer secondary circuit this can
• Voltages 3 x VPhase-Ground, 3 x VPhase-Phase,
• 3V0,Ven,
lead to a failure or a being missing measuring of the directional • Symmetrical components I1, I2, V1, V2
overcurrent protection. This secondary voltage interruption can
• Real power P (Watt), reactive power
6 be detected by means of the integrated fuse failure monitor.
Immediate blocking of the directional steps of the overcurrent • Q (Var), apparent power S (VA)
protection is started automatically. • Power factor PF (= cos φ)
Additional measurement supervision functions are • Frequency f
7 • Symmetry of voltages and currents • Differential and restraint current per phase
• Availability of the data connection to the remote line ends per
minute and per hour
Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC) • Regarding delay time measuring with the GPS-version the
8 One or two binary inputs for each circuit- breaker pole can be absolute time for transmit and receive path is displayed
separately.
used for monitoring the circuit-breaker trip coils including the
connecting cables. An alarm signal is issued whenever the circuit Limit value monitoring: Limit values are monitored by means
is interrupted. of the CFC. Commands can be derived from these limit value
9 indications.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Measured values at remote line ends

Every two seconds the currents and volt-
ages are freezed at the same time at all 1
line ends and transmitted via the commu-
nication link. At a local line end, currents
and voltages are thus available with their
amount and phases (angle) locally and
remotely. This allows checking the whole
2
configuration under load conditions. In
addition, the differential and restraint
currents are also displayed. Important
communication measurements, such as
3
delay time or faulty telegrams per minute/
hour are also available as measurements.
These measured values can be processed
with the help of the CFC logic editor. 4
Commissioning
Special attention has been paid to
commissioning. All binary inputs and 5
outputs can be displayed and activated
directly. This can simplify the wiring check
LSP2845.tif
and fault events and the fault records are 6
clearly arranged.
Furthermore, all currents and optional Fig. 7/7 Browser-aided commissioning: Phasor diagram
voltages and phases are available via
communication link at the local relay and 7
are displayed in the relay, with DIGSI 4 or
with the Web Monitor.
The operational and fault events and
fault records from all line ends share a
8
common time tagging which allows to
compare events registered in the different
line ends on a common time base.
9
operating program, the relay contains 10
11
infrastructure. This program shows the
protection topology and comprehensive
measurements from local and remote line
12
LSP2846.tif
ends. Local and remote measurements

are shown as phasors and the breaker
positions of each line end are depicted. It
is possible to check the correct connection Fig. 7/8 Browser-aided commissioning: Differential protection tripping characteristic
13
of the current transformers or the correct
vector group of a transformer.
Stability can be checked by using the operating characteristic
as well as the calculated differential and restraint values in the
14
browser windows.
Event log and trip log messages are also available. Remote
control can be used, if the local front panel cannot be accessed. 15
Functions
Functions Assignment of feedback to command
1 Control and automation functions

inputs are logically assigned to the corresponding command
Control outputs. The unit can therefore distinguish whether the indica-
In addition to the protection functions, the SIPROTEC 4 units also tion change is a consequence of switching operation or whether
2 support all control and monitoring functions that are required it is a spontaneous change of state (intermediate position).
Chatter disable
The chatter disable feature evaluates whether, in a configured
3 processes.
period of time, the number of status changes of indication input
obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated via binary blocked for a certain period, so that the event list will not record
inputs. Therefore it is possible to detect and indicate both the excessive operations.
4 OPEN and CLOSED position or a fault or intermediate circuit-
breaker or auxiliary contact position. Filter time
The switchgear or circuit-breaker can be controlled via: All binary indications can be subjected to a filter time (indication
– integrated operator panel suppression).
5 – binary inputs
– substation control and protection system Indication filtering and delay
– DIGSI 4 Indications can be filtered or delayed.
6 Command processing
indication input. The indication is passed on only if the indica-
tion voltage is still present after a set period of time. In the
event of indication delay, there is a wait for a preset time. The
information is passed on only if the indication voltage is still
7 hardware and software, checking of the external process,
automatic command termination after output. Here are some Indication derivation
8 • Single and double commands using 1, 1 plus 1 common or 2
trip contacts
existing indication. Group indications can also be formed. The
• User-definable bay interlocks reduced and restricted to the most important signals.
• Operating sequences combining several switching operations
9 such as control of circuit-breakers, disconnectors and ground-
ing switches
Transmission lockout
A data transmission lockout can be activated, so as to prevent
• Triggering of switching operations, indications or alarm by transfer of information to the control center during work on a
combination with existing information circuit bay.
10 Automation / user-defined logic Test operation
With integrated logic, the user can set, via a graphic interface During commissioning, all indications can be passed to an
(CFC), specific functions for the automation of switchgear or automatic control system for test purposes.
11 substation. Functions are activated via function keys, binary
Switching authority
12 Switching authority is determined according to parameters,

communication or by key-operated switch (when available).
13 down: “LOCAL”; DIGSI PC program, “REMOTE”
Every switching operation and change of breaker position is kept
in the status indication memory. The switch command source,
switching device, cause (i.e. spontaneous change or command)
14 and result of a switching operation are retained.
15
Functions
With respect to communication, particular emphasis has been

placed on high flexibility, data security and use of customary
standards in the field of energy automation. The concept of the
communication modules allows interchangeability on the one
1
hand, and, on the other hand, is open for future standards.
Local PC interface
The PC interface provided on the front panel on the unit allows
2
the parameters, status and fault event data to be rapidly accessed
by means of the DIGSI 4 operating program. Use of this program
is particularly advantageous during testing and commissioning.
3
Rear-mounted interfaces
The service and system communication interfaces are located at
the rear of the unit. In addition, the 7SD610 is provided with a
protection interface. The interface complement is variable and
4
retrofitting is possible without any difficulty. These interfaces Fig. 7/9 IEC 60870-5-103 star-type RS232 copper conductor
ensure that the requirements for different communication connection or fiber-optic connection
interfaces (electrical and optical) and protocols can be met.
The interfaces are designed for the following applications:
5
Service / modem interface
By means of the RS485 interface, it is possible to efficiently oper-
ate a number of protection units centrally via DIGSI 4. Remote
6
operation is possible on connection of a modem. This offers the
advantage of rapid fault clarification, especially in the case of
unmanned power plants.
In the case of the 7SD610, a PC with a standard browser can
7
be connected to the service interface (refer to “Commissioning
program”).
System interface
8
This interface is used to carry out communication with a control
or protection and control system and supports a variety of com-
munication protocols and interface designs, depending on the
module connected.
9
Commissioning aid via a standard Web browser Fig. 7/10 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and IEC 61850
In the case of the 7SD610, a PC with a standard browser can be
connected to the local PC interface or to the service interface
10
(refer to “Commissioning program”). The relays include a small Safe bus architecture
Web server and sends its HTML pages to the browser via an • RS485 bus
established dial-up network connection. With this data transmission via copper conductors, electro-
magnetic fault influences are largely eliminated by the use of 11
Retrofitting: Modules for every type of communication twisted-pair conductor. Upon failure of a unit, the remaining
system continues to operate without any disturbances.
entire SIPROTEC 4 unit range. These ensure that, where different
communication interfaces (electrical or optical) and protocols
• Fiber-optic double ring circuit
The fiber-optic double ring circuit is immune to electromag- 12
(IEC 61850 Ethernet, IEC 60870-5-103, PROFIBUS DP, DNP 3.0, netic interference. Upon failure of a section between two
MODBUS, DIGSI, etc.) are required, such demands can be met. units, the communication system continues to operate without
disturbance.
It is generally impossible to communicate with a unit that has
13
failed. If a unit were to fail, there is no effect on the communica-
tion with the rest of the system.
14
15
Communication
Communication
LSP2163-afpen.tif
1 IEC 61850 Ethernet
LSP2164-afp.tif
The Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol
is the worldwide standard for protection
2 and control systems used by power supply

corporations. Siemens was the first
manufacturer to support this standard.
By means of this protocol, information
can also be exchanged directly between
3 bay units so as to set up simple masterless
systems for bay ans system interlocking.
Access to the units via the Ethernet bus is
Fig. 7/11 RS232/RS485 electrical Fig. 7/12 PROFIBUS fiber-optic double ring
also possible with DIGSI. communication module communication module
4 IEC 60870-5-103
standardized protocol for the efficient
LSP2162-afpen.tif
5 communication in the protected area.
ers and is used worldwide.
LSP3.01-0021.tif
6 PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS DP is an industry-recognized
standard for communications and is
7 supported by a number of PLC and protec-
tion device manufacturers.
MODBUS RTU
Fig. 7/13 820 nm fiber-optic communication Fig. 7/14 Fiber-optic Ethernet communication
8 MODBUS RTU is an industry-recognized

standard for communications and is
integrated Ethernet switch
supported by a number of PLC and protec-
tion device manufacturers.
9 DNP 3.0
DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol
Version 3) is a messaging-based commu-
10 nication protocol. The SIPROTEC 4 units

are fully Level 1 and Level 2 compliant
with DNP 3.0. DNP 3.0 is supported by
a number of protection device manufac-
turers.
11
12
13
14
Fig. 7/15 System solution: Communications
15
Communication
System solutions for protection and station control New fiber-optic interfaces, series FO1x
FO171):
Together with the SICAM power automation system, SIPROTEC 4
can be used with PROFIBUS DP. Over the low-cost electrical For direct connection up to 24 km3), 1300 nm, for mono-mode 1
RS485 bus, or interference-free via the optical double ring, the fiber 9/125 μm, LC-Duplex connector
units exchange information with the control system.
FO181):
Units featuring IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces can be connected to
For direct connection up to 60 km3), 1300 nm, for mono-mode
fiber 9/125 μm, LC-Duplex connector
2
Through this interface, the system is open for the connection of
FO191):
units of other manufacturers (see Fig. 7/9).
For direct connection up to 100 km3), 1550 nm, for mono-mode
fiber 9/125 μm, LC-Duplex connector 3
FO30:
820 nm fiber-optic interface/ST connectors for direct connection
up to 1.5 km and for connections to a IEEE C37.94 multiplexer
interface. 4
master can be established. The link to a multiplexed communication network is made by
a fiber-optic interface with 820 nm and 2 ST connectors to
the protection relay. The link to the communication network 5
is optionally an electrical X21/G703-64 kbit/s or G703-E1/-T1
is standardized, thus also enabling direct connection of units
interface. Furthermore the IEEE C37.94 interface is supported by
the FO30 module.
however, the units can also be used in other manufacturers'
systems (see Fig. 7/10). For operation via copper wire communication (pilot wires or 6
twisted telephone pair), a modern communication converter
Via modem and service interface, the protection engineer has
for copper cables is available. This operates with both the
access to the protection devices at all times. This permits remote
two-wire and three-wire copper connections which were used
maintenance and diagnosis (cyclic testing).
by conventional differential protection systems before. The 7
Parallel to this, local communication is possible, for example, communication converter for copper cables is designed for 5 kV
during a major inspection. insulation voltage. An additional 20 kV isolation transformer
can extend the field of applications of this technique into ranges
Serial protection interface (R2R interface) with higher insulation voltage requirements. The connection
via FO cable to the relay is interference-free. With SIPROTEC 4
8
The 7SD610 provides one protection interface to cover two line
end applications. and the communication converter for copper cables a digital
follow-up technique is available for two-wire protection systems
In addition to the differential protection function, other protec-
tion functions can use this interface to increase selectivity and
(up to 8 km) and all three-wire protection systems using existing
copper communication links.
9
sensitivity as well as covering advanced applications.
Different communication converters are listed under
• Fast phase-selective teleprotection signaling using the "Accessories".
directional stages of the overcurrent protection with POTT or
PUTT schemes Communication data: 10
• Two terminal line applications can be implemented without • 32-bit CRC-check according to CCITT and ITU
additional logic • Each protection relay possesses a unique relay address
dead time” (ADT) mode
• Continuous communication link supervision: Individual faulty
data telegrams do not constitute an immediate danger, if they
11
• 4 remote signals for fast transfer of binary signals occur only sporadically. The statistical availability, per minute
• Flexible utilization of the communication channels by means and hour, of the serial protection interface can be displayed.
of the programmable CFC logic • Supported network interfaces X21/RS422 with 64 or 128 or
512 kbit/s; or G703-64 kbit/s and G703-E1 (2,048 kbit/s) or
12
The protection interfaces have different options to cover new G703-T1 (1,554 kbit/s) or IEEE C37.94.
and existing communication infrastructures.
• Max. channel delay time 0.1 ms to 30 ms (in steps of 0.1 ms)
• FO51), OMA12) module:
820 nm fiber-optic interface with clock recovery/ST connectors • Protocol HDLC 13
for direct connection with multi-mode FO cable up to 1.5 km
for the connection to a communication converter.
820 nm fiber-optic interface/ST connectors for direct connec- 14
tion up to 3.5 km with multi-mode FO cable. 1) For flush-mounting housing.
3) For surface-mounting housing the internal FO module
OMA1 will be delivered together with an external repeater. 15
Communication
Communication possibilities between relays
3
Fig. 7/16 Direct optical link up to 1.5 km/3.5 km, 820nm Fig. 7/17 Direct optical link up to 25/60 km with 1300 nm
or up to 100 km with 1550 nm
4
7
Fig. 7/18 Connection to a communication network CC-XG Fig. 7/19 Connection to a communication network CC-2M
9
max. 1.5 km with
62.5 μm/125 μm
7SD52/53 multi-mode fiber
10 7SD610
FO30 IEEE C37.94
MUX Communication
network
SIPV6.011en.eps
FO30 with ST connectors
11 Fig. 7/20 Connection to a communication network via IEEE C37.94 Fig. 7/21 Connection to a pilot wire
12
13
14
15
Typical connection
Typical connection
A typical connection is to the phase CT. The residual cur-
rent at the IE input is formed by summation of the phase
currents. This ensures optimum supervision functions for 2
the current.
Optionally, voltages are measured by means of voltage
transformers and are fed to the unit as a phase-to-ground
voltage. The zero voltage is derived from the summation
3
voltage by calculation performed in the unit.
As a matter of fact, the 7SD610 unit does not require
any voltage transformers for operation of the differential
protection.
Fig. 7/22 Typical connection to current transformers 4
3 phase current transformers with neutral point in the
line direction, I4 connected to a current transformer in
5
the neutral point of a grounded (earthed) transformer
for restricted ground-fault protection (REF) or directional
ground (earth)-fault protection.
6
9
Fig. 7/23 Typical connection to current transformers with optional
voltage inputs
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 7/24 Connection for transformer with restricted ground- Fig. 7/25 Alternative connection of current transformers for
fault protection (REF) measuring neutral current of a grounded (earthed)
power transformer
15
Technical data
General unit data Unit design
1 Analog inputs
Housing 7XP20 For dimensions refer to dimension
drawings, part 14
Rated current IN 1 or 5 A (selectable) Degree of protection

acc. to EN 60529
Rated voltage VN 80 to 125 V (selectable) Surface-mounting housing IP 51
2 Power consumption
in CT circuits with IN = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA
front IP 51
with IN = 5 A Approx. 0.3 VA rear IP 50
in VT circuits Approx. 0.1 VA for the terminals IP 20 with terminal cover put on
Thermal overload capacity IN Weight
3 in CT circuits (for IN = 5 A) 100 A for 1 s
30 IN for 10 s
1/3 x 19" 4 kg
4 IN continuous Surface-mounting housing
Dynamic (peak value) 250 IN (half sine) 1/3 x 19" 6 kg
In VT circuits for highly sensitive
4 ground-fault protection 300 A for 1 s
100 A for 10 s
Electrical tests
Specification
15 A continuous Standards EC 60255 (product standards)
in VT circuits 230 V per phase continuous ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2
5 Auxiliary voltage
Rated voltages DC 24 to 48 V
UL 508
For further standards see
“Individual functions”
Ranges are settable by DC 60 to 125 V 1)
means of jumpers DC 110 to 250 V 1) Insulation tests
and AC 115 V (50/60 Hz)1) Standards IEC 60255-5
6 Permissible tolerance -20 % to +20 % Voltage test (100 % test)
All circuits except for auxiliary 2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50 / 60 Hz
Superimposed AC voltage ≤ 15 %
(peak-to-peak) supply, binary inputs and
communication interfaces
Power consumption
7 Under normal operating conditions Approx. 8 W
During pickup with all Approx. 18 W
Auxiliary voltage and binary
inputs (100 % test)
DC 3.5 kV
inputs and outputs activated RS485/RS232 rear side commu- 500 V (r.m.s.), 50 / 60 Hz
Bridging time during failure of the nication interfaces and time
auxiliary voltage synchronization interface
8 Vaux ≥ 110 V ≥ 50 ms (100 % test)
Impulse voltage test (type test)
Binary inputs
All circuits except for communi- 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 ms; 0.5 J
Number 7 (marshallable) cation interfaces and time 3 positive and 3 negative impulses
Rated voltage range 24 to 250 V, bipolar synchronization interface, at intervals of 5 s
9 Pickup threshold 17 or 73 V (selectable) class III
Functions are freely assignable EMC tests for noise immunity; type tests
Minimum pickup threshold Standards IEC 60255-6, IEC 60255-22
Ranges are settable by means of DC 17 or 73 V, bipolar (product standards) (type tests)
EN 50082-2 (generic standard)
DIN 57435 part 303
Current consumption, energized Approx. 1.8 mA High frequency test 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; τ = 15 ms;
IEC 60255-22-1, class III and 400 surges per s;
Output relay
VDE 0435 part 303, class III test duration 2 s
11 Command / indication relay
Number 5 (marshallable) IEC 60255-22-2, class IV discharge; both polarities; 150 pF;
1 alarm contact (not marshallable) EN 61000-4-2, class IV Ri = 330 Ω
Irradiation with RF field, 10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
12 Switching capacity
Make
1000 W/VA
30 VA
non-modulated
IEC 60255-22-3 (report), class III
Break 40 W
Irradiation with RF field, 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz;
Break (with resistive load) 25 W
amplitude-modulated 80 % AM; 1 kHz
Break (with L/R ≤ 50 ms) 250 V IEC 61000-4-3, class III
13 Switching voltage
Permissible total current
30 A for 0.5 seconds
5 A continuous
LEDs
Number
14 RUN (green)
ERROR (red)
1
1
LED (red), function can be 7 1) For flush-mounting housing.
assigned
15 3) For surface-mounting housing the internal FO module OMA1
will be delivered together with an external repeater.

Technical data
Irradiation with RF field, 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition Mechanical dynamic tests
pulse-modulated IEC 61000-4-3/ frequency 200 Hz; duty cycle 50 %
ENV 50204, class III
Fast transients, bursts 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
During operation 1
IEC 60255-22-4 and burst length = 15 ms; Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
IEC 61000-4-4, class IV repetition rate 300 ms; Vibration Sinusoidal
both polarities; Ri = 50 Ω;
test duration 1 min
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2
IEC 60068-2-6
2
High-energy surge voltages Impulse: 1.2/50 μs
(SURGE), 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
IEC 61000-4-5 installation, class Shock Half-sinusoidal
III
Auxiliary supply
Common (longitudinal) mode:
2 kV; 12 Ω; 9 μF
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
IEC 60068-2-27
3 shocks on each of the 3 axes in 3
Differential (transversal) mode: both directions
1 kV; 2 Ω; 18 μF Seismic vibration Sinusoidal
Common (longitudinal) mode: IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 1 to 8 Hz: ± 3.5 mm amplitude
Measurement inputs, binary
inputs,
2 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 μF
Differential (transversal) mode:
IEC 60068-3-3 (horizontal axis),
4
binary output relays 1 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 μF (vertical axis),
10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; 8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
(horizontal axis),
Line-conducted HF, amplitude-
modulated
1 kHz
(vertical axis),
5
30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for frequency sweep 1 octave/min
IEC 61000-4-6, class III 3 s; 50 Hz 0.5 mT; 50 Hz 1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
Magnetic field with power
During transport
frequency
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV; 2.5 to 3 kV (peak); 1 to 1.5 MHz Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2 6
IEC 60255-6 damped wave; Vibration Sinusoidal
Oscillatory surge withstand 50 surges per second, duration 2 s, Ri IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 5 to 8 Hz: ± 7.5 mm amplitude;
capability = 150 to 200 Ω IEC 60068-2-6 8 to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration,
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns;
50 impulses per second;
7
Fast transient surge withstand both polarities; duration 2 s; Shock Half-sinusoidal
capability Ri = 80 Ω IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms,
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks on each of the 3 axes in
35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz
both directions 8
Radiated electromagnetic Continuous shock Half-sinusoidal
interference 2.5 kV (peak value); polarity alterna- IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms,
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 ting 100 kHz; 1 MHz; 10 and 50 MHz; IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks on each of the 3 axes
Damped oscillation
IEC 60694, IEC 61000-4-12
Ri = 200 Ω
Climatic stress test
in both directions
9
Temperatures
EMC tests for interference emission; type tests Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 –25 °C to +85 °C / –13 °F to +185 °F
Standard EN 50081-1 (generic standard)
Temporarily permissible operating –20 °C to +70 °C / –4 °F to +158 °F
10
Conducted interference voltage 150 kHz to 30 MHz
on lines, only auxiliary voltage
IEC-CISPR 22 Recommended permanent –5 °C to +55 °C / +25 °F to +131 °F
Radio interference field strength
IEC-CISPR 22
Limit class B
30 to 1000 MHz
IEC 60255-6
11
Limit class B
impaired above +55 °C / +131 °C)
– Limiting temperature during –25 °C to +55 °C / –13 °F to +131 °F
permanent storage
– Limiting temperature during –25 °C to +70 °C / –13 °F to +158 °F 12
transport
Humidity
Permissible humidity stress; It
is recommended to arrange the
Annual average ≤ 75 % relative
humidity; on 56 days in the year up
to 93 % relative humidity; moisture
13
not exposed to direct sunlight or condensation during operation is not
pronounced temperature changes permitted
14

15
Description Order No. Short code
1 7SD61 numerical line differential protection 87L SIPROTEC 4 for two-line ends,
allows transformers in the protection zone
7SD610 - - -
Current transformer
Iph = 1 A1), Ie = 1 A1) 1 see next page
2 Iph = 1 A1), Ie = 5 A1) 5
Auxiliary voltage
(Power supply, BI operating voltage) DC 24 to 48 V, trigger level binary input 19 V3) 2
DC 60 to 125 V 2), trigger level binary input 19 V3)
3 DC 110 to 250 V 2), AC 115 to 230 V, trigger level binary input 88 V3)
4
5
DC 110 to 250 V 2), AC 115 to 230 V, trigger level binary input 176 V3) 6
Housing, number of binary inputs/outputs

4 Flush-mounting housing with screw-type terminals ⅓ 19", 7 BI, 5 BO, 1 live-status contact
Surface-mounting housing with screw-type terminals ⅓ 19", 7 BI, 5 BO, 1 live-status contact
B
F
Flush-mounting housing with plug-in terminals, ⅓ 19", 7 BI, 5 BO , 1 live-status contact K
5 Region-specific default settings / function versions and language settings

Region DE, German language (language changeable) A
Region world, English language (language changeable) B
Region US, US-English language (language changeable) C
6 Region world, French language (language changeable)

Region world, Spanish language (language changeable)
D
E
Region world, Italian language (language changeable) F
System interfaces, functions and hardware

7 Without system interface 0
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electric RS232 1
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electric RS485 2
8 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector

Further protocols see supplement L
3
9 L 0
PROFIBUS DP slave, RS485 A

PROFIBUS DP slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector4)
9 MODBUS, RS485
B
D
MODBUS, optical 820 nm, ST connector4) E
DNP 3.0, RS485 G
10 DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector4)

IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet electrical, double, RJ45 connector (EN 100)
H
R
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, with integrated switch optical, double, LC connector5) S
11
12
13
BI = Binary input
BO = Binary output
14 1) Rated current 1/5 A can be selected by means of jumpers.

4) Not possible for surface mounting housing (Order No. pos. 9 = F).
For the surface mounted version, please order a device with the
2) Transition between the two auxiliary voltage ranges can be selected appropriate electrical RS485 interface and an external FO-converter
by means of jumpers. 5) Not possible for surface mounting housing (Order No. pos. 9 = F)
15 3) Setting of the BI thresholds can be made for each binary input via
jumpers in 3 steps.
please order the relay with electrical interface and use a separate
fiber-optic switch


7SD61 numerical line differential protection 87L SIPROTEC 4
(continued)
7SD610 - - -
1
DIGSI/Modem interface (on rear of device) and protection interface 1 9 M
DIGSI/Modem interface (on rear of device)
DIGSI 4, electrical RS232
DIGSI 4, electrical RS485
1
2
2
Protection data interface 1
FO5: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST-plugs, line length up to 1.5 km via multimode FO cable
for communication converter or direct FO connection 1)
A 3
for direct FO connection B
FO17: Optical 1300 nm, LC-Duplex-plugs, line length up to 24 km 2) via monomode FO cable
for direct FO connection 2)
FO18: Optical 1300 nm, LC-Duplex-plugs, line length up to 60 km via monomode FO cable
G
4
for direct FO connection 2)3) H
FO19: Optical 1550 nm, LC-Duplex-plugs, line length up to 100 km via monomode FO cable
for direct FO connection 2)4) J
for communication networks with IEEE C37.94 interface or direct FO connection 5)
5
S
Functions 1
Trip mode 3-pole only without auto reclosure
Trip mode 3-pole only with auto reclosure
0
1
6
Trip mode 1- and 3-pole without auto reclosure 2
Trip mode 1- and 3-pole with auto reclosure 3
Back-up functions 7
with emergency or back-up overcurrent protection B
with emergency or back-up overcurrent and breaker failure protection C
with directional – emergency or back-up overcurrent protection
with directional – emergency or back-up overcurrent and breaker failure protection
R
S 8
Additional functions 1
4 Remote commands/
24 Remote indications
Transformer
expansions
Voltage-/frequence
protection
Restricted earth fault
(low impedance) 9
A
B
E 10
F
J
K 11
N
P
S 12
T
without external GPS synchronisation of differential protection 0
with external GPS synchronisation of differential protection 1
13
1) Communication converter 7XV5662, see Accessories.
2) Device for surface-mounting housing (Order No. pos. 9 = F) will be
4) For distances less than 50 km a set of optical attenuators
7XV5107-0AA00 must be installed to avoid saturation of the 14
delivered with external repeater 7XV5461-0Bx00. receiver element.
3) For distances less than 25 km a set of optical attenuators 5) Only available in flush-mounting housing (Order No. pos. 9 = B, K).
7XV5107-0AA00 must be installed to avoid saturation of the
receiver element. 15
Accessories
1 Opto-electric communication converter CC-XG (connection to

communication network)
Converter to interface to X21 or RS422 or G703-64 kbit/s synchronous
Connection via FO cable for 62.5 / 125 μm or 50 / 120 μm and
2 820 nm wavelength (multi-mode FO cable) with ST connector,
max. distance 1.5 km
Electrical connection via X21/RS422 or G703-64 kbit/s interface 7XV5662-0AA00
Opto-electric communication converter CC-2M to G703-E1/-T1

3 communication networks with 2,048 / 1,554 kbit/s
Converter to interface between optical 820 nm interface and
G703-E1/-T1 interface of a communication network
Connection via FO cable for 62.5/125 μm or 50/120 μm and
4 820 nm wavelength (multi-mode FO cable) with ST connector,

max. distance 1.5 km
Electrical connection via G703-E1/-T1 interface 7XV5662-0AD00
Opto-electric communication converter (connection to pilot wire)
5 Converter to interface to a pilot wire or twisted telephone pair

(typical 15 km length)
Connection via FO cable for 62.5/125 μmor 50/120 μm and
820 nm wavelength (multi-mode FO cable) with ST connector;
max. distance 1.5 km, screw-type terminals to pilot wire 7XV5662-0AC00
6 Additional interface modules

Protection interface module, optical 820 nm,
multi-mode FO cable, ST connector, 1.5 km C53207-A351-D651-1
7 multi-mode FO cable, ST connector, 3.5 km C53207-A351-D652-1
Further modules
mono-mode FO cable, LC-Duplex connector, 24 km C53207-A351-D655-1
8 Protection interface module, optical 1300 nm,
9 Protection interface module, optical 820 nm,

multi-mode FO cable, ST connector, 1.5 km support of IEEE C37.94 C53207-A351-D658-1
Optical repeaters
Serial repeater (2-channel), optical 1300 nm,mono-mode FO cable,
10 LC-Duplex connector, 24 km
7XV5461-0BG00

11 LC-Duplex connector, 100 km 7XV5461-0BJ00
Time synchronizing unit with GPS output

GPS 1 sec pulse and time telegram IRIG B/DCF 77 7XV5664-0AA00
12 Isolation transformer (20 kV) for pilot wire communication 7XR9516
Voltage transformer miniature circuit-breaker

13
14
15
Connecting cable (copper)

Cable between PC/notebook (9-pin connector)
1
and protection unit (9-pin connector)
(contained in DIGSI 4, but can be ordered additionally) 7XV5100-4
Manual for 7SD61 V4.6 2

English C53000-G1176-C145-4
Accessories Description Order No. Size of

package
Supplier Fig. 9
LSP2289-afp.eps
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1 1 Siemens 7/28
Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 1)

10
for 19" rack CI2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0-827040-1 4000 1)
1)
0-827397-1
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163083-7
1
4000 1)
1)
11
0-163084-2 1
LSP2090-afp.eps
LSP2091-afp.eps
For CI2
and matching female
0-734372-1
1-734387-1
1 1)
1)
12
Short-circuit
links
For other terminals
C73334-A1-C33-1
C73334-A1-C34-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens
7/29
7/30 13
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps
Safety cover large C73334-A1-C31-1 1 Siemens

for terminals small C73334-A1-C32-1 1 Siemens

14
Fig. 7/29 Fig. 7/30
15
Connection diagram
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
Line Differential Protection / 7SD52/53
SIPROTEC 7SD52/53 multi-end differential and distance protection in one relay
– Fault locator for one and two terminal measurement for high
accuracy on long lines with high load and high fault resistance.
– Capacitive charge current compensation increases the sensitivity
of the differential protection on cables and long lines.
1
Function overview
2
LSP2173f.eps
• Differential protection with phase-segregated measurement
LSP2314-afp.eps
(87L, 87T)
• Restricted ground-fault protection (87N) if a transformer is
within the protection zone
3
• Sensitive meas. stage f. high-resist. faults
• Non-switched distance protection with 7 measuring systems
(21/21N)
• High resistance ground (earth)-fault protection for single and
4
three-pole tripping (50N/51N/67N)
Fig. 7/33 SIPROTEC 7SD52/53 differential protection relay
• Phase-selective intertripping (85)
Description
• Ground-fault detection in isolated and resonant-grounded
networks
5
• Tele (pilot) protection (85/21, 85/67N)
The 7SD52/53 relay provides full scheme differential protection
• Weak-infeed protection (27WI)
and incorporates all functions usually required for the protection
of power lines. It is designed for all power and distribution • Fault locator (FL) 6
levels and protects lines with two up to six line ends. The relay is • Power swing detection/tripping (68/68T)
designed to provide high-speed and phase-selective fault clear- • 3-stage overcurrent protection (50, 50N, 51, 51N)
ance. The relay uses fiber-optic cables or digital communication • STUB bus protection (50 STUB)
networks to exchange telegrams and includes special features
for the use in multiplexed communication networks. Also pilot
• Switch-onto-fault protection (50HS) 7
wires connections can be used with an external converter. This
• Over/underfrequency protection (81O/U)
contributes toward improved reliability and availability of the
• Auto-reclosure (79), Synchro-check (25)
electrical power system.
• Breaker failure protection (50BF) 8
The relay is suitable for single and three-phase tripping applica-
• Overload protection (49)
tions for two up to six line ends. Also, transformers and compen-
• Lockout function (86)
sation coils within the differential protection zone are protected
as are serial and parallel-compensated lines and cables. The
relays may be employed with any type of system grounding.
Control functions
• Commands for control of CB and isolators
9
The relay also provides a full-scheme and non-switched distance Monitoring functions
protection as an optional main 2 protection. Several teleprotec- • Self-supervision of relay and protection data (R2R)
tion schemes ensure maximum selectivity and high-speed
tripping time.
communication 10
The units measure the delay time in the communication net- • Measured-value supervision
works and adaptively match their measurements accordingly. • Oscillographic fault recording
A special GPS-option allows the use of the relays in communica- • Event logging/fault logging 11
tion networks, where the delay time in the transmit and receive • Switching statistics
path may be quite different.
Front design
The 7SD52/53 has the following features:
– 2 full-scheme main protections in one unit (differential and
• User-friendly local operation
• PC front port for relay setting
12
distance protection) • Function keys and 14 LEDs f. local alarm
– High-speed tripping 10 – 15 ms
– The serial protection interfaces (R2R interfaces) of the relays can
flexibly be adapted to the requirements of all communication • 2 serial protection data (R2R) interfaces for ring and chain 13
media available. topology
– If the communication method is changed, flexible retrofitting • Front interface for connecting a PC
of communication modules to the existing configuration is • System interface for connection to a control system via various
possible. protocols 14
– Tolerates loss of one data connection in a ring topology (routing – IEC 61850 Ethernet
in 120 ms). The differential protection scheme is fully available – IEC 60870-5-103
in a chain topology. – PROFIBUS DP and DNP 3
– Browser-based commissioning tool. • Rear-side service/modem interface 15
• Time synchronization via IRIG-B or DCF77 or system interface

Application
Application
1 ANSI Protection functions ANSI Protection functions
87L ΔI for lines / cables 85/67N Teleprotection for earth(ground)-fault protection
ΔI for lines / cables with transformers Overcurrent protection

2 87T
87N Low impedance restricted ground-fault protection for

50/50N/51/51N
50HS Instantaneous high-current tripping (switch-onto-fault)

transformers
Phase-selective intertrip, remote trip 59/27 Overvoltage/undervoltage protection
85
3 86 Lockout function 81O/U Over/underfrequency protection
25 Synchro-check
21/21N Distance protection
79 Single or three-pole auto-reclosure with new adaptive

Fault locator
4 FL
Power swing detection/tripping 49
technology
Overload protection
68/68T
Teleprotection for distance protection 50BF Breaker-failure protection
85/21
5 27WI Weak-infeed protection 74TC Trip circuit supervision
Directional earth(ground)-fault protection 50 STUB STUB-bus overcurrent stage

50N/51N/67N
10
11
12
*) Option
13 Fig. 7/34
14
15
Application
Fig. 7/35 Application for three line ends (Ring topology) 6

Typical applications Depending on the bandwidth available in the communication
SIPROTEC 7SD52/53 is a full-scheme differential protection
relay for two up to six line ends, incorporating all the additional
system, 64, 128 or 512 kbits/s can be selected for the X21
(RS422) interface; the G703 interface with 64 kbit/s, and
7
G703-E1 (2,048 kbit/s) or G703-T1 (1,554 kbit/s). Furthermore
functions for protection of overhead lines and cables at all
the 7SD610 supports the IEEE C37.94 interface with 1/ 2 / 4 and
voltage levels. Also transformers and compensation coils within
8 timeslots.
the protection zone are protected. The 7SD52/53 is suitable
for single-pole and three-pole tripping. The power system The connection to the communication device is effected via
8
star point can be solid or impedance-grounded (earthed), cost-effective 820 nm interface with multi-mode FO cables.
resonant-grounded via Peterson coil or isolated. On the TAP-line, A communication converter converts the optical to electrical
the 7SD52/53 differential relay is connected to current (CT)
and optionally voltage (VT) transformers. For the differential
signals. This offers an interference-free and isolated connection
between the relay and the communication device. 9
functions, only CTs are necessary. By connecting the relay to
VTs, the integrated "main 2" distance protection can be applied Cost-effective power system management
(full-scheme, nonswitched). Therefore, no separate distance
protection relay is required.
The SIPROTEC 4 units are numerical relays which also provide
control and monitoring functions and therefore support the 10
The link to the other relays is made by multi-mode or user in view of a cost-effective power system management. The
mono-mode FO cables. There are 5 options available, which security and reliability of power supply is increased as a result of
minimizing the use of hardware.
correspondingly cover:
• 820 nm, up to 1.5 km, multi-mode The local operation has been designed according to ergonomic
11
• 820 nm, up to 3.5 km, multi-mode criteria. Large, easy-to-read backlit displays are provided.
• 1300 nm, up to 24 km, mono-mode The SIPROTEC 4 units have a uniform design and a degree
• 820 nm support of the IEEE C37.94 interface of functionality which represents a benchmark-level of
performance in protection and control. If the requirements
12
• 1300 nm, up to 60 km, mono-mode
for protection, control or interlocking change, it is possible in
• 1550 nm, up to 100 km, mono-mode the majority of cases to implement such changes by means of
Direct fiber-optic connection offers high-speed data exchange
with 512 kbit/s and improves the speed for remote signaling.
parameterization using DIGSI 4 without having to change the
hardware.
13
At the main line two differential relays are connected to CTs. The use of powerful microcontrollers and the application of
The communication is made via a multiplexed communication digital measured-value conditioning and processing largely sup-
network. presses the influence of higher-frequency transients, harmonics
and DC components.
14
The 7SD52/53 offers many features to reliably and safely handle
data exchange via communication networks.
15
Construction
Construction

⅓, ½, ²⁄₃, and -rack sizes:
2 These are the available housing widths of

the 7SD52/53 relays, referred to a
19" module frame system. This means
LSP2174-afp.tif
replaced. The height is a uniform 245 mm
3 for flush-mounting housings and 266 mm
LSP2166-afp.tif
nected with or without ring lugs. Plug-in
4 terminals are available as an option. It
is thus possible to employ prefabricated
cable harnesses. In the case of surface
mounting on a panel, the connection Fig. 7/36 Flush-mounting housing with Fig. 7/37 Rear view with screw-type terminals
screw-type terminals and serial interfaces
5 terminals are located above and below
communication interfaces are located in a
housing.
6
7
LSP2219-afp.eps
LSP2237-afp.tif
9
screw-type terminals sloped case in a surfacemounting
10 housing
11
12
13
14
15
Differential protection (ANSI 87L, 87T, 87N) 1

The differential protection function has the following features:
• It is possible to select the operating mode as "main" or as
"main 1", if the back-up distance protection is activated as
"main 2".
2
• Measurements are performed separately for each phase; thus
the trip sensitivity is independent of the fault type.
• An adaptive, sensitive measurement method with high sen-
sitivity for differential fault currents below the rated current
3
offers the detection of highly resistive faults. This trip element
uses special filters, which offers high security even with high
level DC-components in the short-circuit current. The trip time
of this stage is about 30 ms.
4
• A high-set differential trip stage which clears differential fault
currents higher than the rated current within 10 – 15 ms
offers fast tripping time and high-speed fault clearence time.
• When a long line or cable is switched on, transient charge
Fig. 7/40 Tripping characteristic
5
currents load the line. To avoid a higher setting of the sensitive
differential trip stage, this setpoint may be increased for a • A more sensitive protection for transformers within the protec-
settable time. This offers greater sensitivity under normal load
conditions.
tion zone is given by measurement of the star-point current
on an grounded winding. Therefore the IE current measuring
6
• With the setting of the CT-errors the relay automatically input has to be used.
calculates the restraint/stabilization current and adapts its If the sum of the phase currents of winding is compared with
the measured star-point current, a sensitive ground-current
permissible sensitivity according to the CT’s data in the dif-
ferential configuration, optimizing sensitivity. differential protection (REF) can be implemented. 7
This function is substantially more sensitive than the dif-
• Different CT ratios at the line ends are handled inside the relay.
ferential protection during faults to ground in a winding,
The mismatch of 1 to 6 is allowed.
detecting fault currents as small as 10 % of the transformer
• The differential protection trip can be guarded with an overcur-
rent pickup. Thus differential current and overcurrent lead to a
rated current. 8
final trip decision. Enhanced communication features for communication networks
• Easy to set tripping characteristic. Because the relay works The data required for the differential calculations are cyclically
adaptively, only the setpoint IDiff> (sensitive stage) and IDiff>>
(high-set current differential stage) must be set according to
exchanged in full-duplex mode in form of synchronous, serial
telegrams between the protection units. The telegrams are
9
the charge current of the line/cable. secured with CRC check sums, so that transmission errors in a
• With an optional capacitive charge current compensation, the communication network are immediately detected.
sensitivity can be increased to 40 % of the normal setting of
IDiff>. This function is recommended for long cables and long
• Data communication is immune to electromagnetic interfer-
ence because fiber-optic cables are employed in the critical
10
lines. region
• Differential and restraint currents are monitored continuously • Supervision of each individual incoming telegram and of
during normal operation and are displayed as operational
measurements.
the entire communication path between the units without
additional equipment.
11
• High stability during external faults even with different current • Unambiguous identification of each unit is ensured by assign-
transformers saturation level. For an external fault, only 5 ms ment of a settable communication address within a differential
saturation-free time are necessary to guarantee the stability of
the differential configuration.
protection topology. Only those units mutually known to each
other can cooperate. Incorrect interconnection of the com- 12
• With transformers or compensation coils in the protection munication links results in blocking of the protection system.
zone, the sensitive trip stage can be blocked by an inrush • Detection of reflected telegrams in the communication system.
detection function. It works with the second harmonic of the
measured current which is compared with the fundamental
• Detection of delay time changes in communication networks.
• Measurement of the delay time to the remote line ends
13
component.
with dynamic compensation of the delay in the differential
• With transformers in the protection zone, vector group adapta- measurement. Supervision of the maximum permissible delay
tion and matching of different CT ratios are carried out in the
relay. Additionally, the zero-sequence current flowing through
time is included.
• Generation of alarms on heavily disturbed communication
14
an grounded neutral is eliminated from the differential mea-
links. Faulty telegram counters are available as operational
surement. The 7SD52/53 therefore works like a transformer
measurement.
differential relay, whereas the line ends may be far away.
(continued on next page)
15
• With a GPS high-precision 1-s pulse

from a GPS receiver the relays can be
1 synchronized with an absolute, exact
time at each line end. In this way, the
delay in the receive and transmit path
can be measured exactly. With this
2 optional feature the relay can be used
in communication networks where this
delay times are quite different.
Phase-selective intertrip and remote trip/
3 indications
Normally the differential fault current is
calculated for each line end nearly at the
same time. This leads to fast and uniform
4 tripping times. Under weak infeed condi-
tions, especially when the differential
function is combined with an overcurrent
pickup a phase-selective intertrip offers a
5 tripping of all line ends.
• 7SD52/53 has 4 intertrip signals which Fig. 7/41 Differential protection in ring or chain topology
are transmitted in high-speed (< 20 ms)
to the other line ends. These intertrip
6 signals can also be initiated by an external relay via binary
inputs and therefore be used to indicate, for example, a
• The two-end line is a special case, because when the main
connection is interrupted, the communication switches over
directional decision of the backup distance relay. from a main path to a secondary path. This hot standby trans-
• In addition, 4 high-speed remote trip signals are available, mission function ensures a high availability of the system and
protects differential protection against communication route
7 which may be initiated by an external or internal event.
• 24 remote signals can be freely assigned to inputs and outputs
failure on important lines.
at each line end and are circulating between the different • In a ring topology, one line end can be logged out from the
devices. differential protection topology for service or maintenance
reasons by a signal via binary input. Checks for the breaker
8 Communication topologies / modes of operation position and load current are made before this logout is initi-
The differential relays may work in a ring or daisy chain line ated. In a chain topology, the relays at the end of the line can
topology. Use of a test mode offer advantages under commis- be logged out from the differential protection topology.
sioning and service conditions. • The whole configuration can be set up into a test mode. All
9 • The system tolerates the loss of one data connection in a ring functions and indications are available except the breakers
topology. The ring topology is rerouted within 20 ms forming are not tripped. The local relay can be tested and no trip or
then a chain topology, while the differential protection func- intertrip reaction is effected by the other relays.
tion is immediately reactivated.
10 • When the communication connections need to be reduced
or when these are not available, the whole system is able to
function without interruption as chain topology. At the line
ends, only cost-effective 7SD52/53 relays with one protection
11 interface are necessary for this application.
12
13
14
15
Distance protection (ANSI 21, 21N)

7SD52/53 provides a non-switched distance protection featuring
all well-proven algogrithms of 7SA522 and 7SA6. It is possible 1
to select the operating mode "main" or "main 2", if the back-up
differential is activated as "main 1". By parallel calculation
and monitoring of all six impedance loops, a high degree of
sensitivity and selectivity is achieved for all types of faults. The
shortest tripping time is less than one cycle. All methods of
2
neutral-point connection (resonant grounding, isolated, solid
or low-resistance grounding) are reliably dealt with. Single and
three-pole tripping is possible. Overhead lines can be equipped
with or without series capacitor compensation.
3
Quadrilateral and mho characteristics
The 7SD52/53 relay provides quadrilateral as well as mho zone
characteristics. Both characteristics can be used separately for 4
phase and ground (earth) faults. Resistance ground (earth)
faults can, for instance, be covered with the quadrilateral
characteristic and phase faults with the mho characteristic.
Alternatively, the quadrilateral characteristic is available with Fig. 7/42 Distance protection: quadrilateral characteristic
5
4 different pickup methods:
• Overcurrent pickup I>>
• Voltage-dependent overcurrent pickup V/I 6
• Voltage-dependent and phase angle-dependent overcurrent
pickup V/I/φ
• Impedance pickup Z<
Load zone
7
In order to guarantee a reliable discrimination between load
operation and short-circuit – especially on long high loaded
lines – the relay is equipped with a selectable load encroach-
ment characteristic. Impedances within this load encroachment
8
characteristic prevent the distance zones from unwanted
tripping.
Absolute phase-selectivity 9
The distance protection incorporates a well-proven highly
sophisticated phase selection algorithm. The pickup of unfaulted
loops is reliably eliminated to prevent the adverse influence of
currents and voltages in the fault-free loops. This phase selec- 10
tion algorithm achieves single-pole tripping and correct distance
measurement in a wide application range. Fig. 7/43 Distance protection: mho characteristic

in case of faults with fault resistance. The distance zones can be 11
The influence of wrong distance measurement due to parallel set forward, reverse or non-directional. Sound phase polariza-
lines can be compensated by feeding the neutral current of the tion and voltage memory provides a dynamically unlimited
parallel line to the relay. Parallel line compensation can be used directional sensitivity.
for distance protection as well as for fault locating.
Mho 12
7 distance zones
The mho tripping characteristic provides sound phase respec-
6 independent distance zones and one separate overreach zone tively memory polarization for all distance zones. The diagram
are available. Each distance zone has dedicated time stages,
partly separate for single-phase or multi-phase faults. Ground
shows characteristic without the expansion due to polarizing.
During a forward fault the polarizing expands the mho circle
13
(earth) faults are detected by monitoring the neutral current 3I0 towards the source so that the origin is included. This mho circle
and the zero-sequence voltage 3V0. expansion guarantees safe and selective operation for all types
of faults, even for close-in faults.
The quadrilateral tripping characteristic permits separate setting
of the reactance X and the resistance R. The resistance section R
14
can be set separately for faults with and without ground involve-
ment. This characteristic has therefore an optimal performance
15
Elimination of interference signals
1 Digital filters render the unit immune to

interference signals contained in the mea-
sured values. In particular, the influence
of DC components, capacitive voltage
transformers and frequency changes is
2 considerably reduced. A special measur-
ing method is employed in order to assure
protection selectivity during saturation of
the current transformers.
3 Measuring voltage monitoring
Tripping of the distance protection is
blocked automatically in the event of
4
LSP2311-afp.tif
failure of the measuring voltage, thus
preventing spurious tripping.
The measuring voltage is monitored
by the integrated fuse failure monitor.
5 Distance protection is blocked if either
the fuse failure monitor or the auxiliary
Fig. 7/44 Power swing current and voltage wave forms
contact of the voltage transformer protec-

tion switch operates and, in this case, the
6 EMERGENCY definite-time overcurrent

protection can be activated.
Power swing detection (ANSI 68, 68T)
7 Dynamic transient reactions, for instance

short-circuits, load fluctuations, auto-
reclosures or switching operations can
cause power swings in the transmission
network. During power swings, large
8 currents along with small voltages can
cause unwanted tripping of distance
protection relays. To avoid uncontrolled
tripping of the distance protection and to
LSP2312-afp.tif
9 achieve controlled tripping in the event
of loss of synchronism, the 7SD52/53
relay is equipped with an efficient power
swing detection function. Power swings
10 can be detected under symmetrical load

conditions as well as during single-pole
Fig. 7/45 Power swing circle diagram
auto-reclosures.
Tele (pilot) protection for distance protection (ANSI 85-21) Common transmission channels are power-line carrier, micro-
11 A teleprotection function is available for fast clearance of faults
wave radio and fiber-optic links. The serial protection interface
can be used for direct connection to a digital communication
up to 100 % of the line length. The following operating modes network, fiber-optic or pilot-wire link as well.
may be selected:
7SD52/53 also permits the transfer of phase-selective signals.
12 • PUTT, permissive underreaching zone transfer trip
• POTT, permissive overreaching zone transfer trip
This feature is particularly advantageous as it ensures reliable
single-pole tripping, if two single-pole faults occur on different
• UNBLOCKING lines. The transmission methods are suitable also for lines with
• BLOCKING three ends (three-terminal lines).
13 • Directional comparison pickup Phase-selective transmission is also possible with multi-end
• Pilot-wire comparison applications, if some user-specific linkages are implemented
by way of the integrated CFC logic. During disturbances in the
• Reverse interlocking
transmission receiver or on the transmission circuit, the tele-
14 • DUTT, direct underreaching zone transfer trip (together with
Direct Transfer Trip function)
protection function can be blocked by a binary input signal with-
out losing the zone selectivity. The control of the overreach zone
The carrier send and receive signals are available as binary Z1B (zone extension) can be switched over to the auto-reclosure
inputs and outputs and can be freely assigned to each physical function. A transient blocking function (Current reversal guard)
15 relay input or output. At least one channel is required for each
direction.
is provided in order to suppress interference signals during trip-
ping of parallel lines.


Under certain conditions on the power system it is necessary
to execute remote tripping of the circuit-breaker. The 7SD52/53 1
relay is equipped with phase-selective “external trip inputs” that
can be assigned to the received inter-trip signal for this purpose.
Weak-infeed protection: echo and/or trip (ANSI 27 WI) 2

To prevent delayed tripping of permissive schemes during weak
fault detector is picked up at the weak-infeed end of the line,
the signal received here is returned as echo to allow accelerated 3
tripping at the strong infeed end of the line. It is also possible
to initiate tripping at the weak-infeed end. A phase-selective
1-pole or 3-pole trip is issued if a permissive trip signal (POTT or
Unblocking) is received and if the phase-ground voltage drops
correspondingly. As an option, the weak-infeed logic can be
4
equipped according to a French specification.
Directional ground(earth)-fault protection for high-

resistance faults (ANSI 50N, 51N, 67N) 0,14
5
t= 0,02 Tp
In grounded (earthed) networks, it may happen that the (I / I )
p −1
distance protection sensitivity is not sufficient to detect high-
resistance ground (earth) faults. The 7SD52/53 protection relay
has therefore protection functions for faults of this nature.
Fig. 7/46 Normal inverse 6
The ground (earth)-fault overcurrent protection can be used with Tele (pilot) protection for directional ground(earth)-fault
3 definite-time stages and one inverse-time stage (IDMT). A 4th protection (ANSI 85-67N)
definite-time stage can be applied instead of the 1st inverse-time
stage.
The directional ground(earth)-fault overcurrent protection can 7
be combined with one of the following teleprotection schemes:
Inverse-time characteristics according to IEC 60255-3 and ANSI/ • Directional comparison
IEEE are provided (see “Technical data”). An additional logarith-
mic inverse-time characteristic is also available.
• BLOCKING
• UNBLOCKING 8
The direction decision can be determined by the neutral current
The transient blocking function (current reversal guard) is also
provided in order to suppress interference signals during tripping
components V2 and I2. In addition or as an alternative to the
directional determination with zero-sequence voltage, the star-
of parallel lines.
9
point current of a grounded (earthed) power transformer may The pilot functions for distance protection and for
also be used for polarization. Dual polarization applications can ground(earth)-fault protection can use the same signaling
therefore be fulfilled. channel or two separate and redundant channels.
Alternatively, the direction can be determined by evaluation of Overcurrent protection (ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51N)
10
zero-sequence power. Each overcurrent stage can be set in for-
ward or reverse direction or for both directions (non-directional). The 7SD52/53 provides a backup over-current protection. Two
As an option the 7SD52/53 relay can be provided with a sensitive definite-time stages and one inverse-time stage (IDMTL) are
neutral (residual) current transformer. This feature provides a
measuring range for the neutral (residual) current from 5 mA
available, separately for phase currents and for the neutral
(residual) current. Two operating modes are selectable. The
11
to 100 A with a nominal relay current of 1 A and from 5 mA function can run in parallel to the differential protection and the
to 500 A with a nominal relay current of 5 A. Thus the ground distance protection or only during interruption of the protection
(earth)-fault overcurrent protection can be applied with extreme
sensitivity.
communication and/or failure of the voltage in the VT secondary
circuit (emergency operation). The secondary voltage failure can 12
be detected by the integrated fuse failure monitor or via a binary
The function is equipped with special digital filter algorithms, input from a VT miniature circuit-breaker (VT m.c.b. trip).
providing the elimination of higher harmonics. This feature
is particularly important for low zero-sequence fault currents
which usually have a high content of 3rd and 5th harmonics.
The following inverse-time characteristics according to
IEC 60255-3 and ANSI/IEEE are provided:
13
Inrush stabilization and instantaneous switch-onto-fault trip can • Inverse
be activated separately for each stage as well. • Short inverse
Different operating modes can be selected. The ground(earth)- • Long inverse
• Moderately inverse
14
fault protection is suitable for three-phase and, optionally, for
single-phase tripping by means of a sophisticated phase selector. • Very inverse
It may be blocked during the dead time of single-pole auto- • Extremely inverse
reclose cycles or during pickup of the distance protection. • Definite inverse 15
STUB bus overcurrent protection (ANSI 50(N)-STUB) Frequency protection (ANSI 81O/U)
1 The STUB bus overcurrent protection is a separate definite-time

overcurrent stage. It can be activated from a binary input signal-
Frequency protection can be used for overfrequency and
underfrequency protection. Unwanted frequency changes in
ing the line isolator (disconnector) is open. Settings are available the network can be detected and the load can be removed at a
for phase and ground (earth)-faults. specified frequency setting. Frequency protection can be used
2 Instantaneous high-speed switch-onto-fault overcurrent
protection (ANSI 50HS)
four elements (selectable as overfrequency or underfrequency)
and each element can be delayed separately.
Instantaneous tripping is possible when energizing a faulty line.
In the event of large fault currents, the high-speed switch-onto-
3 fault overcurrent stage can initiate very fast 3-pole tripping. The 7SD52/53 relay incorporates a two-stage breaker failure
protection to detect the failure of tripping command execution,
With lower fault currents, instantaneous tripping after switch-
for example due to a defective ciruit-breaker. The current detec-
onto-fault is also possible
tion logic is phase-segregated and can therefore also be used
4 – if the breaker positions at the line ends are monitored and
connected to the relays. This breaker position monitor offers a
in single-pole tripping schemes. If the fault current is not inter-
high-speed trip during switch-onto-fault conditions. or a busbar trip command is generated. The breaker failure
–with the overreach distance zone Z1B or just with pickup in any protection can be initiated by all integrated protection functions
5 zone. as well as by external devices via binary input signals.
The switch-onto-fault initiation can be detected via the binary Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79)
input "manual close" or automatically via measurement.
The 7SD52/53 relay is equipped with an auto-reclose function
6 Fault locator (AR). The function includes several operating modes:

• 3-pole auto-reclosure for all types of faults; different dead
the distance-to-fault. The result is displayed in ohms, miles, times are available depending the type of fault
kilometers or in percent of the line length. Parallel line and load • 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults, no reclosing for multi-
7 current compensation is also available. phase faults
As an option for a line with two ends, a fault locator function
with measurement at both ends of the line is available.Thanks without ground, no reclosing for multi-phase faults
to this feature, accuracy of measurement on long lines under • 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase and 3-pole auto-reclosing for
8 high load conditions and high fault resistances is considerably
increased.
multi-phase faults
without ground and 3-pole auto-reclosure for other faults
• Multiple-shot auto-reclosure
9 (ANSI 59, 27)
binary inputs and outputs
load or are only lightly loaded. The 7SD52/53 contains a number
of overvoltage measuring elements. Each measuring element • Control of the integrated AR function by external protection
10 is of two-stage design. The following measuring elements are

available:
• Adaptive auto-reclosure. Only one line end is closed after the
dead time. If the fault persists this line end is switched off.
• Phase-to-ground overvoltage Otherwise the other line ends are closed via a command over
the communication links. This avoids stress when heavy fault
11 • Zero-sequence overvoltage
The zero-sequence voltage can be connected to the 4th voltage
currents are fed from all line ends again.
• Interaction with the internal or an external synchro-check
input or be derived from the phase voltages. • Monitoring of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
• Positive-sequence overvoltage of the local end or calculated In addition to the above-mentioned operating modes, several
12 for the remote end of the line (compounding). other operating principles can be employed by means of the
• Negative-sequence overvoltage integrated programmable logic (CFC).
Tripping by the overvoltage measuring elements can be effected Integration of auto-reclosure in the feeder protection allows
13 either at the local circuit-breaker or at the remote station by

evaluation of the line-side voltages. A number of voltage-
dependent supplementary functions are thus available:
The 7SD52/53 is fitted, in addition, with three two-stage under- • DLC

voltage measuring elements: By means of dead-line check, reclosure is effected only when
the line is deenergized (prevention of asynchronous breaker
14 • Phase-to-ground undervoltage
• Phase-to-phase undervoltage
closure).
15 of a minimum current criterion and by means of binary inputs.

• ADT Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC)

at the remote station was successful (reduction of stress on
equipment).
One or two binary inputs for each circuit- breaker pole can be
used for monitoring the circuit-breaker trip coils including the 1
connecting cables. An alarm signal is issued whenever the circuit
• RDT is interrupted.
Reduced dead time is employed in conjunction with auto-
reclosure where no tele-protection method is employed:
When faults within the zone extension, but external to the
Lockout (ANSI 86) 2
protected line, are switched off for rapid auto-reclosure (RAR), All binary outputs can be stored like LEDs and reset using the
the RDT function decides on the basis of measurement of the LED reset key. The lockout state is also stored in the event of
supply voltage failure. Reclosure can only be issued after the
return voltage from the remote station which has not tripped
whether or not to reduce the dead time. lockout state is reset. 3
Synchronism check (ANSI 25) Local measured values
The measured values are calculated from the measured current
Where two network sections are switched in by control com-
mand or following a 3-pole auto-reclosure, it must be ensured and voltage signals along with the power factor (cos φ), the 4
that both network sections are mutually synchronous. For frequency, the active and reactive power. Measured values are
this purpose, a synchronism-check function is provided. After displayed as primary or secondary values or in percent of the
verification of the network synchronism the function releases specific line rated current and voltage. The relay uses a 20 bit
the CLOSE command. Alternatively, reclosing can be enabled high-resolution AD converter and the analog inputs are factory-
calibrated, so a high accuracy is reached.
5
for different criteria, e.g., checking that the busbar or line is not
carrying a voltage (dead line or dead bus). The following values are available for measured-value
processing:
• Currents 3 x IPhase, 3I0, IE, IE sensitive 6
A built-in overload protection with a current and thermal alarm • Voltages 3 x VPhase-Ground, 3 x VPhase-Phase, 3V0, Ven, VSYNC,
stage is provided for the thermal protection of cables and trans- VCOMP
formers. The trip time characteristics are exponential functions
according to IEC 60255-8. The preload is thus considered in the
trip times for overloads. An adjustable alarm stage can initiate
• Symmetrical components I1, I2, V1, V2
• Real power P (Watt), reactive power Q (Var),
7
an alarm before tripping is initiated. apparent power S (VA)
• Power factor PF (= cos φ)
Monitoring and supervision functions
The 7SD52/53 relay provides comprehensive monitoring
• Frequency f 8
• Differential and restraint current per phase
functions covering both hardware and software. Furthermore,
the measured values are continuously checked for plausibility. • Load impedances with directional indication
3 x RPhase-Ground, XPhase-Ground
Therefore the current and voltage transformers are also included
in this monitoring system. 3 x RPhase-Phase, XPhase-Phase 9
• Long term mean values
Current transformer / Monitoring functions 3 x IPhase; I1; P; P+; P-; Q; Q+; Q-; S
A broken wire between the CTs and relay inputs under load may
lead to maloperation of a differential relay if the load current
• Minimum/maximum memory
3 x IPhase; I1; 3 x VPhase-Ground 10
exceeds the differential setpoint. The 7SD52/53 provides fast 3 x VPhase-Phase, 3V0; V1; P+; P-; Q+; Q-; S; f;
broken wire supervision which immediatelly blocks all line ends power factor (+); power factor (-);
from mean values 3 x IPhase; I1; P; Q; S
if a broken wire condition is measured by a local relay. This
avoids mal-operation due to broken wire condition. Only the • Energy meters Wp+; Wp-; WQ+; WQ- 11
phase where the broken wire is detected is blocked. The other • Availability of the data connection to the remote line ends per
phases remain under differential operation. minute and per hour Regarding delay time measuring with the
Fuse failure monitoring
GPS-version the absolute time for transmit and receive path is
displayed separately. 12
Limit value monitoring: Limit values are monitored by means
open circuit in the voltage transformer secondary circuit the
of the CFC. Commands can be derived from these limit value
distance protection would respond with an unwanted trip due
to this loss of voltage. This secondary voltage interruption can
be detected by means of the integrated fuse failure monitor.
indications.
13
Immediate blocking of distance protection is provided for all
types of secondary voltage failures.
Additional measurement supervision functions are 14
• Symmetry of voltages and currents
15
Measured values at remote line ends
1 Every two seconds the currents and volt-

ages are freezed at the same time at all
line ends and transmitted via the commu-
nication link. At a local line end, currents
and voltages are thus available with their
2 amount and phases (angle) locally and
remotely. This allows checking the whole
configuration under load conditions. In
addition, the differential and restraint
3 currents are also displayed. Important
communication measurements, such as
delay time or faulty telegrams per minute/
hour are also available as measurements.
4 These measured values can be processed

with the help of the CFC logic editor.
Commissioning
5 Special attention has been paid to

commissioning. All binary inputs and
outputs can be displayed and activated
directly. This can simplify the wiring check
LSP2845.tif
6 and fault events and the fault records are
clearly arranged.
Furthermore, all currents and optional Fig. 7/47 Browser-aided commissioning: Phasor diagram
7 voltages and phases are available via

communication link at the local relay and
are displayed in the relay, with DIGSI 4 or
with the Web Monitor.
8 The operational and fault events and

fault records from all line ends share a
common time tagging which allows to
compare events registered in the different
line ends on a common time base.
9
10 operating program, the relay contains
11 this solution is to operate the unit with
infrastructure. This program shows the
12 protection topology and comprehensive
measurements from local and remote line
LSP2846.tif
ends. Local and remote measurements

are shown as phasors and the breaker
13 positions of each line end are depicted. It

is possible to check the correct connection Fig. 7/48 Browser-aided commissioning: Differential protection tripping characteristic
of the current transformers or the correct
vector group of a transformer.
14 Stability can be checked by using the operating characteristic

as well as the calculated differential and restraint values in the
If the distance protection is active, then the valid zone character-
istic (quadrilateral/mho) is displayed.
browser windows.
Event log and trip log messages are also available. Remote
control can be used, if the local front panel cannot be accessed.
15
Control and automation functions Assignment of feedback to command
Control The positions of the circuit-breaker or switching devices and

transformer taps are acquired by feedback. These indication 1
In addition to the protection functions, the SIPROTEC 4 units also inputs are logically assigned to the corresponding command
support all control and monitoring functions that are required outputs. The unit can therefore distinguish whether the indica-
for operating medium-voltage or high-voltage substations. tion change is a consequence of switching operation or whether
The main application is reliable control of switching and other it is a spontaneous change of state (intermediate position). 2
processes.
Chatter disable
obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated via binary
inputs. Therefore it is possible to detect and indicate both the
period of time, the number of status changes of indication input 3
OPEN and CLOSED position or a fault or intermediate circuit-
breaker or auxiliary contact position.
– integrated operator panel Filter time
4
– binary inputs All binary indications can be subjected to a filter time (indication
– substation control and protection system suppression).
– DIGSI 4
5
Command processing
Indications can be filtered or delayed.
indication input. The indication is passed on only if the indica- 6
hardware and software, checking of the external process, tion voltage is still present after a set period of time. In the
control actions using functions such as runtime monitoring and event of indication delay, there is a wait for a preset time. The
automatic command termination after output. Here are some information is passed on only if the indication voltage is still
typical applications: present after this time. 7
• Single and double commands using 1, 1 plus 1 common or Indication derivation
2 trip contacts
existing indication. Group indications can also be formed. The 8
such as control of circuit-breakers, disconnectors and ground- reduced and restricted to the most important signals.
ing switches
9
A data transmission lockout can be activated, so as to prevent
Automation/user-defined logic transfer of information to the control center during work on a
circuit bay.
(CFC), specific functions for the automation of switchgear or Test operation
10
Switching authority 11
Switching authority is determined according to parameters,
communication or by key-operated switch (when available).
12
down: “LOCAL”; DIGSI PC program, “REMOTE”
Every switching operation and change of breaker position is kept
in the status indication memory. The switch command source, 13
and result of a switching operation are retained.
14
15
Communication
Communication
1 With respect to communication, particular emphasis has been

placed on high levels of flexibility, data integrity and utilization of
standards common in energy automation. The design of the com-
munication modules permits interchangeability on the one hand,
2 and on the other hand provides openness for future standards
(for example, Industrial Ethernet).
Local PC interface
3 The PC interface accessible from the front of the unit permits

quick access to all parameters and fault event data. Of particular
commissioning.
4 Rear-mounted interfaces
Two communication modules located on the rear of the unit Fig. 7/49 IEC 60870-5-103 star-type RS232 copper conductor
incorporate optional equipment complements and readily permit connection or fiber-optic connection
5 retrofitting. They assure the ability to comply with the require-

ments of different communication interfaces.
The interfaces make provision for the following applications:
• Service /modem interface
6 By means of the RS232/RS485 or optical interface, it is possible
to efficiently operate a number of protection units centrally
via DIGSI 4 or standard browser. Remote operation is possible
on connection of a modem. This offers the advantage of rapid
7 fault clarification, especially in the case of unmanned power
plants.
With the optical version, centralized operation can be imple-
mented by means of a star coupler.
8 • System interface
This interface is used to carry out communication with a
control or protection and control system and supports a variety
of communication protocols and interface designs, depending
9 on the module connected.
Commissioning aid via a standard Web browser

In the case of the 7SD52/53, a PC with a standard browser can Fig. 7/50 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and IEC 61850
10 be connected to the local PC interface or to the service interface

(refer to “Commissioning program”). The relays include a small
Web server that sends its HTML pages to the browser via an Safe bus architecture
established dial-up network connection. • RS485 bus
11 Retrofitting: Modules for every type of communication

With this data transmission via copper conductors electro-
Communication modules for retrofitting are available for the twisted-pair conductors. Upon failure of a unit, the remaining
entire SIPROTEC 4 unit range. These ensure that, where different system continues to operate without any disturbances.
12 (IEC 61850 Ethernet, IEC 60870-5-103, PROFIBUS DP,
The fiber-optic double ring circuit is immune to electromag-
DNP 3, DIGSI, etc.) are required, such demands can be met. netic interference. Upon failure of a section between two
units, the communication system continues to operate without
disturbance.
13 It is generally impossible to communicate with a unit that has
14
15
Communication
IEC 61850 Ethernet
LSP2163-afpen.tif
The Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol
is the worldwide standard for protection 1
LSP2164-afp.tif
and control systems used by power supply
corporations. Siemens was the first
manufacturer to support this standard. By
means of this protocol, information can
also be exchanged directly between bay
2
units so as to set up simple masterless
systems for bay and system interlocking.
Access to the units via the Ethernet bus is
also possible with DIGSI.
3
IEC 60870-5-103 Fig. 7/51 RS232/RS485 electrical Fig. 7/52 PROFIBUS communication module,
communication module optical double-ring
standardized protocol for the efficient
4
communication in the protected area. IEC
60870-5-103 is supported by a number
LSP2162-afpen.tif
of protection device manufacturers and is
used worldwide. 5
PROFIBUS DP
LSP3.01-0021.tif
PROFIBUS DP is an industry-recognized
standard for communications and is sup- 6
ported by a number of PLC and protection
device manufacturers.
DNP 3.0 7
DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol
Version 3) is a messaging-based commu- Fig. 7/53 820 nm fiber-optic communication Fig. 7/54 Fiber-optic Ethernet communication
nication protocol. The SIPROTEC 4 units
are fully Level 1 and Level 2 compliant
with DNP 3.0. DNP 3.0 is supported by a
ers.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Communication
System solutions for protection and station control • FO61), OMA22) module:
820 nm fiber-optic interface/ST connectors for direct connec-
1 Together with the SICAM power automation system, SIPROTEC 4
can be used with PROFIBUS DP. Over the low-cost electrical
tion up to 3.5 km with multi-mode FO cable.
RS485 bus, or interference-free via the optical double ring, the New fiber-optic interfaces, series FO1x
units exchange information with the control system. • FO171): For direct connection up to 24 km3), 1300 nm, for
2 Units featuring IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces can be connected to

• FO181): For direct connection up to 60 km3), 1300 nm, for
Through this interface, the system is open for the connection of mono-mode fiber 9/125 μm, LC-Duplex connector
units of other manufacturers (see Fig. 7/49). • FO191): For direct connection up to 100 km3), 1550 nm, for
3 Because of the standardized interfaces, SIPROTEC units can also
• FO30: 820 nm fiber-optic interface/ST connectors for direct
Electrical RS485 or optical interfaces are available. The optimum connection up to 1.5 km and for connections to a IEEE C37.94
physical data transfer medium can be chosen thanks to opto- multiplexer interface.
4 electrical converters. Thus, the RS485 bus allows low-cost wiring
a fiber-optic interface with 820 nm and 2 ST connectors to
For IEC 61850, an interoperable system solution is offered with the protection relay. The link to the communication network
5 SICAM PAS. Via the 100 Mbits/s Ethernet bus, the units are linked
is optionally an electrical X21 or a G703/-E1/-T1 interface.
Furthermore the IEEE C37.94 interface is supported by the FO30
is standardized, thus also enabling direct connection of units module.
For operation via copper wire communication (pilot wires or
6 however, the units can also be used in other manufacturers'
systems (see Fig. 7/50).
twisted telephone pair), a modern communication converter for
copper cables is available. This operates with both the two-wire
Via modem and service interface, the protection engineer and three-wire copper connections which were used by conven-
has access to the protection devices at all times. This permits tional differential protection systems before. The communication
7 remote maintenance and diagnosis (cyclic testing). converter for copper cables is designed for 5 kV insulation
voltage. An additional 20 kV isolation transformer can extend
Parallel to this, local communication is possible, for example,
the field of applications of this technique into ranges with
during a major inspection.
higher insulation voltage requirements. The connection via FO
8 Serial protection interface (R2R interface) cable to the relay is interference-free. With SIPROTEC 4 and the
communication converter for copper cables a digital follow-up
As an option, the 7SD52/53 provides one or two protection technique is available for two-wire protection systems (typical 8
interfaces to cover two up to six line end applications in ring or km) and all three-wire protection systems using existing copper
chain topology and hot standby communication between two communication links.
9 line ends.
Different communication converters are listed under
In addition to the differential protection function, other protec- "Accessories".
tion functions can use this interface to increase selectivity and
sensitivity as well as covering advanced applications. Communication data:
10 • Fast phase-selective teleprotection signaling for distance • 32-bit CRC-check according to CCITT and ITU
protection, optionally with POTT or PUTT schemes • Each protection relay possesses a unique relay address
• Two and three-terminal line applications can be implemented • Continuous communication link supervision: Individual faulty
data telegrams do not constitute an immediate danger, if they
11 without additional logic
• Signaling for directional ground(earth)- fault protection – occur only sporadically. The statistical availability, per minute
directional comparison for high-resistance faults in solidly and hour, of the serial protection interface can be displayed.
grounded systems • Supported network interfaces X21/RS422 with 64 or 128 or
512 kbit/s; or G703-64 kbit/s and G703-E1 (2,048 kbit/s) or
12 • Echo function
G703-T1 (1,554 kbit/s).
dead time” (ADT) mode • Max. channel delay time 0.1 ms to 30 ms (in steps of 0.1 ms)
or IEEE C37.94.
• 28 remote signals for fast transfer of binary signals
13 Flexible utilization of the communication channels by means of
• Protocol HDLC
the programmable CFC logic

The protection interfaces have different options to cover new
14 and existing communication infrastructures.
820 nm fiber-optic interface with clock recovery/ST connectors
for direct connection with multi-mode FO cable up to 1.5 km
15 for the connection to a communication converter.
3) For surface-mounting housing the internal fiber-optic module
(OMA1) will be delivered together with an external repeater.

Communication
Communication possibilities between relays
3
Fig. 7/56 Direct optical link up to 1.5 km/3.5 km, 820nm Fig. 7/57 Direct optical link up to 25/60 km with 1300 nm
or up to 100 km with 1550 nm
4
7
Fig. 7/58 Connection to a communication network CC-XG Fig. 7/60 Connection to a communication network CC-2M
9
max. 1.5 km with
62.5 μm/125 μm
7SD52/53 multi-mode fiber
Communication
7SD610
FO30 IEEE C37.94
MUX
network 10
SIPV6.011en.eps
FO30 with ST connectors
Fig. 7/59 Connection to a communication network via IEEE C37.94 Fig. 7/61 Connection to a pilot wire 11
12
13
14
15
Typical connection
Typical connection
1 Typical connection for current and volt-

age transformers
2 point in the line direction, I4 connected as

summation current transformer (= 3I0):
Holmgreen circuit
3 of the broken (open) delta winding on
internally.
Note:
4 Voltage inputs are always available in the
relay. But there is no need to connect it to
voltage transformers for the differential
protection function.
5 Fig. 7/62 Example of connection for current and voltage transformers

6 The 3 phase current transformers are
7 permitting a high sensitive 3I0 measure-
ment.
Note:
Terminal Q7 of the I4 transformer must
8 be connected to the terminal of the core-
balance CT pointing in the same direction
as the neutral point of the phase current
transformers (in this case in line direction).
9 The voltage connection is effected in
10 Fig. 7/63 Alternative connection of current transformers for sensitive

ground(earth)-current measuring with core-balance current transformers
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connection

point in the line direction, I4 connected to 1
of a grounded (earthed) transformer for
directional ground(earth)-fault protection.
The voltage connection is effected in
2
4
Fig. 7/64 Alternative connection of current transformers for measuring
neutral current of a grounded (earthed) power transformer 5
6
the summation current of the parallel line
for parallel line compensation on overhead
lines. The voltage connection is effected in
7
9
Fig. 7/65 Alternative connection of current transformers for measuring
the ground (earth) current of a parallel line 10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 7/66 Connection of current transformer with restricted ground-fault
protection (REF)
15
Typical connection
1 3 phase voltage transformers, V4 con-

nected to broken (open) delta winding
monitoring and ground(earth)-fault direc-
tional protection. The current connection is
2 effected in accordance with Fig. 7/62, 7/63,
7/64 and 7/65.
5 Fig. 6/67 Alternative connection of voltage transformers for measuring

the displacement voltage (e-n voltage)
6 Alternative voltage connection

synchrocheck.
7 Note:
Any phase-to-phase or phase-toground
(earth) voltage may be employed as the
busbar voltage. Parameterization is carried
8 out on the unit. The current connection is
effected in accordance with Fig. 7/62, 7/63,
7/64 and 7/65.
10 Fig. 6/68 Alternative connection of voltage transformers for measuring

the busbar voltage
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data

Analog inputs
Housing 7XP20
1/2 x 19" or 1/1 x 19"
See dimension drawings, part 14
1
Rated current IN 1 or 5 A (selectable, controlled by Degree of protection acc. to
firmware) EN 60529
Rated voltage
Power consumption
80 to 125 V (selectable) Flush-mounting housing
Rear IP 50 2
In CT circuits with IN = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA Front IP 51
In CT circuits with IN = 5 A Approx. 0.30 VA For the terminals IP 2x with cover cap
In VT circuits Approx. 0.10 VA
Weight
Thermal overload capacity
In CT circuits 500 A for 1 s
1/2 x 19" 6 kg
3
150 A for 10 s 1/1 x 19" 10 kg
4 x IN continuous
In VT circuits 230 V, continuous per phase
Dynamic overload capacity
1/2 x 19"
1/1 x 19"
11 kg
19 kg 4
In CT circuits 1250 A (half cycle) Electrical tests
In the CT circuit for high sensitive
ground-fault protection Specifications
(refer to ordering code)
Auxiliary voltage
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2 5
UL 508
Rated voltage DC 24 to 48 V For further standards see
DC 60 to 125 V 1) “Individual functions”
DC 110 to 250 V 1)
and AC 115 V with 50/60 Hz1) Insulation tests
Standards IEC 60255-5
6
Permissible tolerance -20 % to +20 %
Max. superimposed AC voltage ≤ 15 % Voltage test (100 % test)
(peak-to-peak) All circuits except for auxiliary 2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50/60 Hz
Power consumption
During normal operation Approx. 8 W
supply, binary inputs and
communication interfaces 7
During pickup with all inputs Approx. 18 W Auxiliary voltage and binary DC 3.5 kV
and outputs activated inputs (100 % test)
RS485/RS232 rear side commu- 500 V (r.m.s.), 50/60 Hz
voltage failure Vaux AC/DC 110 V
≥ 50 ms
nication interfaces and time
synchronization interface
8
Binary inputs
(100 % test)
Quantity 8 or 16 or 24 Impulse voltage test (type test)
Minimum permissible voltage DC 19 or 88 or 176 V, bipolar
All circuits except for commu-
nication interfaces and time
5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 μs; 0.5 J
3 positive and 3 negative impulses 9
Range is selectable with jumpers (3 operating ranges) synchronization interface, at intervals of 5 s
for each binary input class III
Maximum permissible voltage DC 300 V EMC tests for noise immunity; type tests
Current consumption, energized Approx. 1.8 mA Standards IEC 60255-6, IEC 60255-22
(product standards) (type tests)
10
Output relays
Quantity 16 or 24 or 32
DIN 57435 part 303
Switching capacity
Make 1000 W /VA
High frequency test
IEC 60255-22-1, class III and
2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; τ = 15 ms;
400 surges per s; 11
VDE 0435 part 303, class III test duration 2 s
Break 30 VA
Break (for resistive load) 40 W Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air
Break (for τ = L/R ≤ 50 ms) 25 VA IEC 60255-22-2, class IV discharge; both polarities; 150 pF;
Switching voltage 250 V
EN 61000-4-2, class IV
Irradiation with RF field, non-
Ri = 330 Ω
10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
12
Permissible current 30 A for 0.5 s
modulated
5 A continuous
LEDs
Quantity
Irradiation with RF field,
amplitude-modulated
10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz;
80 % AM; 1 kHz 13
RUN (green) 1 IEC 61000-4-3, class III
ERROR (red) 1
Indication (red), function can be
assigned
14
14
1) Ranges are settable by means of jumpers.

3) For surface-mounting housing the internal FO module OMA1
will be delivered together with an external repeater.
15
Technical data
Irradiation with RF field, pulse- 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition During transport
modulated IEC 61000-4-3/ frequency 200 Hz; duty cycle 50 %
1 ENV 50204, class III
Fast transients, bursts 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
Standards
Vibration
IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-22-4 and burst length = 15 ms; IEC 60255-2-6 8 to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
IEC 61000-4-4, class IV repetition rate 300 ms; frequency sweep 1 octave/min
both polarities; Ri = 50 Ω;
2 test duration 1 min
Shock
Half-sinusoidal
High-energy surge voltages IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms,
(SURGE) IEC 61000-4-5, installati- IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks each in both directions
on class III Auxiliary supply Common mode: 2 kV, 12 Ω, 9 µF of the 3 axes
3 Measurements inputs, binary
Differential mode: 1 kV; 2 Ω, 18 µF
Common mode: 2 kV, 42 Ω, 0.5 µF
Continuous shock
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
Half-sinusoidal
inputs, binary outputs Differential mode: 1 kV; 42 Ω, 0.5 µF IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks each in both directions
Line-conducted HF, amplitude- 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; of the 3 axes
modulated, IEC 61000-4-6, class III 1 kHz
4 Magnetic field with power
frequency
30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for 3 s;
50 Hz; 0.5 mT; 50 MHz
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV; Temperatures
IEC 60255-6 Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 -25 °C to +85 °C / -13 °F to +185 °F
5 Oscillatory surge withstand
capability
2.5 to 3 kV (peak); 1 to 1.5 MHz
Damped wave; 50 surges per second;
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 Duration 2 s; Ri = 150 Ω to 200 Ω temperature, tested for 96 h
Fast transient surge withstand 4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges Recommended permanent -5 °C to +55 °C / +25 °F to +131 °F
capability, ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 per second; both polarities;
6 duration 2 s; Ri = 80 Ω
Radiated electromagnetic interfe- 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz
IEC 60255-6
rence, IEEE C37.90.2 amplitude and pulse-modulated impaired above +55 °C / +131 °F)
Damped oscillations IEC 60894, 2.5 kV (peak value), polarity – Limiting temperature during -25 °C to +55 °C / -13 °F to 131 °F
7 IEC 61000-4-12 alternating 100 kHz

1, 10 and 50 MHz, Ri = 200 Ω
permanent storage
EMC tests for interference emission; type tests transport
Standard EN 50081-* (generic standard) Humidity
8 Conducted interference voltage

on lines, only auxiliary supply,
150 kHz to 30 MHz
Limit class B
Permissible humidity stress
Yearly average ≤ 75 % relative humi-
dity; on 56 days in the year up to
IEC-CISPR 22 units in such a way, that they are 93 % relative humidity; condensation
Radio interference field strength 30 to 1000 MHz not exposed to direct sunlight or is not permitted
IEC-CISPR 22 Limit class B pronounced temperature changes
9 that could cause condensation.
Mechanical dynamic tests

10 During operation
11 frequency sweep 1 octave/min
20 cycles in 3 othogonal axes
Shock Half-sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms,
12 IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks each in both directions

of the 3 axes
IEC 60068-3-3 (horizontal axis),
13 1 to 8 Hz: ± 1.5 mm amplitude
(vertical axis),
(horizontal axis),
14 (vertical axis),
15 1) Ordering option with high-speed contacts required.



7SD5 combined multi-end line differential protection with distance protection
Device type1)
7SD5 - - -
1
Two-terminal differential relay with 4-line display 2 2
Two-terminal differential relay with grapical display 3 2
Multi-terminal differential relay with 4-line display
Multi-terminal differential relay with graphical display
2 3
see next page
2
3 3
Measurement input
Iph = 1 A2), Ie = 1 A2)
Iph = 1 A2), Ie = high (min. = 0.005 A)
1
2
3
Iph = 5 A2), Ie = 5 A2) 5
Iph = 5 A2), Ie = sensitive (min. = 0.005 A) 6
Auxiliary voltage (Power supply, BI trigger level) 4

24 to 48 V DC, trigger level binary input 19 V4) 2
60 to 125 V DC3), trigger level binary input 19 V4) 4
110 to 250 V DC3), 115 V AC, trigger level binary input 88 V4)
220 to 250 V DC3), 115 V AC, trigger level binary input 176 V4)
5
6
5
Binary/ Signal/ Fast High- Housing Flush- Flush- Surface-
indication command relay5) speed width mounting mounting mounting
inputs outputs incl.
live status
trip
output6)
referred
to 19”
housing/
screw-type
housing/
plug-in
housing/
screw-type 6
contact terminals terminals terminals
8 4 12 – ½ A
8
8
4
4
12
12
–
–
½
½
E
J
7
16 12 12 – C
16 12 12 – G
16 12 12 – L 8
16 4 15 5 N
16 4 15 5 Q
16 4 15 5 S
24 20 12 – D 9
24 20 12 – H
24 20 12 – M

24
24
12
12
15
15
5
5

P
R 10
24 12 15 5 T
24 4 18 10 W
Region-specific default / language settings and function versions 11

Region GE, German language (can be changed) A
Region world, English language (can be changed) B
Region US, US-English language (can be changed) C
Region world, French language (can be changed) D 12
Region world, Spanish language (can be changed) E
Region world, Italian language (can be changed) F
13
1) Redundant prot. data interface for Hot-Standby-service is possible 4) The binary input thresholds are selectable in three steps by means
with a two terminal differential relay (second prot. data interface is
needed)
of jumpers.
5) Fast relays are indentified in the terminal diagram. The time
14
2) Rated current 1/5 A can be selected by the means of jumpers. advantage compared to signal/command outputs is approx. 3 ms,
3) Transition between three auxiliary voltage ranges can be selected mainly for protection commands
by means of jumpers. 6) High-speed trip outputs are identified in the in the terminal dia-
gram. The time advantage compared to fast relays is approx. 5 ms 15
1 7SD5 combined multi-end line differential protection with distance protection
System interfaces
7SD52 - - -
IEC protocol, electrical RS232 1
2 IEC protocol, electrical RS485
IEC protocol, optical 820 nm, ST-plug
2
see next
page
3
Further protocols see supplement L 9 L 0
3 PROFIBUS DP slave, RS485 A

PROFIBUS DP slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector 1) B
DNP 3.0, RS485 G
4 DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector 1)

IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Etherrnet, electrical, double, RJ45 connector (EN100)
H
R
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, with integrated switch, optical, double, LC-connector (EN100) 2) S
DIGSI / Modem interface (on rear of device) and protection interface 1

5 See additional indication M 9 M
DIGSI / Modem interface (on rear of device)

Without DIGSI-interface on rear 0
6 DIGSI 4, electric RS232
DIGSI 4, electric RS485
1
2
DIGSI 4, optical 820 nm, ST plug 3
7 Protection data interface 1

FO5: Optical 820 nm, 2 ST-plugs, line length up to 1.5 km
via multimode FO cable for communication converter or direct FO connection 3) A
via multimode FO cable for direct FO connection
8 FO17: Optical 1300 nm, LC-Duplex-plugs, line length up to 24 km
B
via monomode FO cable for direct FO connection 4) G

FO18: Optical 1300 nm, LC-Duplex-plugs, line length up to 60 km
via monomode FO cable for direct FO connection 4) 5) H
9 FO19: Optical 1550 nm, LC-Duplex-plugs, line length up to 100 km
via monomode FO cable for direct FO connection 4) 6) J
via multimode FO cable for communication networks with
IEEE C37.94 interface or direct FO connection 7)
10 S
11
12
13 1) Not possible for surface mounting housing (Order No. pos. 5) For distances less than 25 km a set of optical attenuators
9 = E/G/H/Q/R). For the surface mounted version, please order 7XV5107-0AA00 must be installed to avoid saturation of the
a device with the appropriate electrical RS485 interface and an receiver element
external FO-converter 6) For distances less than 50 km a set of optical attenuators
14 2) Not possible for surface mounting housing (Order No. pos.
9 = E/G/H/Q/R) please order the relay with electrical interface and
7XV5107-0AA00 must be installed to avoid saturation of the
receiver element
use a separate fiber-optic switch. 7) Only available in flush-mounting housing (Order No. pos.
3) Communication converter 7XV5662, see Accessories. 9 ≠ E/G/H/Q/R).
15 4) Device for surface mounting housing (Order No. pos. 9 = E/G/H/Q/R)

will be delivered with external repeater 7XV5461-0Bx00.


7SD5 combined multi-end line differential protection with distance protection
Functions 1 / Protection interface 2

7SD52 - - -
1
Trip mode Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79) Synchro-check (ANSI 25)
3-pole without without
3-pole with without
0 see next
1 page 2
1-/3-pole without without 2
1-/3-pole with without 3
3-pole
3-pole
without
with
with
with
4
5
3
1-/3-pole without with 6
1-/3-pole with with 7
Functions 1 and Protection interface 2 6) 9 N 4

Functions 1
Trip mode Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79) Synchro-check (ANSI 25)
3-pole
3-pole
without
with
without
without
0
1
5
1-/3-pole without without 2
1-/3-pole with without 3
3-pole without with 4 6
3-pole with with 5
1-/3-pole without with 6
1-/3-pole with with 7
Protection interface 2
7
via multimode FO cable for communication converter or direct FO connection 1) A
via multimode FO cable for direct FO connection B 8
via monomode FO cable for direct FO connection 2) G
via monomode FO cable for direct FO connection 2) 3) H 9
via monomode FO cable for direct FO connection 2) 4) J
via multimode FO cable for communication networks with
IEEE C37.94 interface or direct FO connection 5) S
10
11
12
13
1) Communication converter 7XV5662, see Accessories. 4) For distances less than 50 km a set of optical attenuators
2) Device for surface mounting housing (Order No. pos. 9 = E/G/H/Q/R) 7XV5107-0AA00 must be installed to avoid saturation of the
receiver element.
14
will be delivered with external repeater 7XV5461-0Bx00.
3) For distances less than 25 km a set of optical attenuators 5) Only available in flush-mounting housing (Order No. pos. 9 ≠
7XV5107-0AA00 must be installed to avoid saturation of the E/G/H/Q/R).
receiver element. 6) In a two terminal differential relay the protection interface 2 can
be used as redundant protection interface (Hot Standby). 15
1 7SD5 combined multi-end line differential protection with distance protection
Functions
7SD52 - - -
Time overcurrent pro- Ground fault Distance protection Distance protection (Ipick- Ground fault
tection/ Breaker failure protection (Pickup Z<, polygon, upI>,-VI/φ, -Z<), polygon, detection
2 protection (ANSI 50,
50N, 51, 51N, 50BF)
(ANSI 67N) MHO, parallel line
comp.) Power swing
parallel line comp. 2),
power swing det. (ANSI
for isolated/
compensated
detection (ANSI 21, 21, 21N, 68, 68T) networks 1)
21N, 68, 68T)
with without without without without
3 with without without with without
C
D
with without with without without E
with with without without without F
4 with
with
with
with
without
with
with
without
without
without
G
H
with without without without with J
with without without with with K
5 with
with
with
with
without
without
without
with
with
with
L
M
Additional functions 1
6 4 Remote commands/
24 Remote indications
Transformer
expansions
Fault locator Voltage protection,
frequence protection
Restricted ground
fault low impedance
(ANSI 27, 50) (ANSI 87N) 2)
with without 1-side measuring without without J
7 with
with
without
without
1-side measuring
2-side measuring
with
without
without
without
K
L
with without 2-side measuring with without M
with with 1-side measuring without without N
8 with with 1-side measuring with without P
with with 2-side measuring without without Q
with with 2-side measuring with without R
with with 1-side measuring without with S
9 with with 1-side measuring with with T
with with 2-side measuring without with U
with with 2-side measuring with with V
10 Additional functions 2
Measured values, External GPS Capacitive current
extended, synchronization load compensation
11 Min/Max values
without without without 0
without with without 1
with without without 2
12 with
without
with
without
without
with
3
4
without with with 5
with without with 6
13 with with with 7
14
15 1) Only available with Order No. Pos. 7 = 2 or 6

2) Only available with Order No. Pos. 7 = 1 or 5

Opto-electric communication converter CC-XG (connection to

communication network)
1
Converter to interface to X21 or RS422 or G703-64 kbit/s synchronous
Connection via FO cable for 62.5 /125 μm or 50 /120 μm and
820 nm wavelength (multi-mode FO cable) with ST connector, max.
distance 1.5 km
2
Electrical connection via X21/RS422 or G703-64 kbit/s interface 7XV5662-0AA00
Opto-electric communication converter CC-2M to G703-E1 / -T1

communication networks with 2,048 /1,554 kbit/s
Converter to interface between optical 820 nm interface and
3
G703-E1 /-T1 interface of a communication network
820 nm wavelength (multi-mode FO cable) with ST connector,max.
distance 1.5 km
Electrical connection via G703-E1/-T1 interface 7XV5662-0AD00
4
Opto-electric communication converter (connection to pilot wire)
Converter to interface to a pilot wire or twisted telephone pair
(typical 15 km length) 5
820 nm wavelength (multi-mode FO cable) with ST connector;
max. distance 1.5 km, screw-type terminals to pilot wire 7XV5662-0AC00
Additional interface modules 6

Protection interface mod. opt. 820 nm, multi-mode FO cable,
Protection interface mod. opt. 820 nm, multi-mode FO cable,
7
Further modules
Protection interface mod. opt. 1300 nm, mono-mode FO cable,
LC-Duplex connector, 24 km C53207-A351-D655-1
8
Optical repeaters 9
LC-Duplex connector, 24 km 7XV5461-0BG00
LC-Duplex connector, 60 km
7XV5461-0BH00 10
LC-Duplex connector, 100 km 7XV5461-0BJ00
Time synchronizing unit with GPS output

GPS 1 sec pulse and time telegram IRIG B / DCF 77 7XV5664-0AA00 11
Isolation transformer (20 kV) for pilot wire communication 7XR9516

Rated current 1.6 A; thermal overload release 1.6 A; 12
13
14
15
1 Connecting cable
Cable between PC / notebook (9-pin connector)
2 Manual for 7SD522/523 V4.6

English C53000-G1176-C169
9 Description Order No. Size of

package
Supplier Fig.

LSP2289-afp.eps
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1 1 Siemens 7/71

10 Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 1)
connector 0-827396-1 1 1)
for 19" rack CI2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0-827040-1 4000 1)
1)
11 0-827397-1
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163083-7
1
4000 1)
1)
0-163084-2 1
LSP2090-afp.eps
LSP2091-afp.eps
12 For CI2
and matching female
0-734372-1
1-734387-1
1 1)
1)

13 Short-circuit
links
For other terminals
C73334-A1-C33-1
C73334-A1-C34-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens
7/72
7/73
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps

Fig. 7/72 Fig. 7/73



Connection diagram
4
Fig. 7/76
5
X80, X81, X82. Switching of
BO14, BO15 as NO contact
or NC contact with jumpers
X41, X42, X43.
6
9
1) Configuration of binary outputs
until Hardware-version /EE.
For advanced flexibility see 10
Fig. 7/76.
Fig. 7/74 Basic version in housing

½ x 19” with 8 binary inputs
11
and 16 binary outputs
12
13
14

15
Connection diagram
4
Fig. 7/78
BO14, BO15 as NO contact or
6 NC contact with jumpers X41,
X42, X43.
10
11
12
13
14 *) For unit version 7SD52xx-xN/S/Q high-speed contacts

1) Configuration of binary outputs until Hardware-version /EE.
For advanced flexibility see Fig. 7/78.
15 Fig. 7/77 Medium version in housing x 19”

Connection diagram
4
Fig. 7/80
5
BO14, BO15 as NO contact or
NC contact with jumpers X41,
X42, X43.
6
10
11
12
13
*) For unit version 7SD52xx-xR/P/T high-speed contacts
1) Configuration of binary outputs until Hardware-version /EE.
14
For advanced flexibility see Fig. 7/80.
Fig. 7/79 Medium version in housing x 19”

15
10
11
12
13
14
15
Transformer Differential Protection
Page
SIPROTEC 7UT6 differential protection relay

for transformers, generators, motors and busbars 8/3
8
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Transformer Differential Protection / 7UT6
SIPROTEC 4 7UT6 differential protection relay for transformers, generators, motors and busbars
Function overview
• Differential protection for 2- up to 5-winding transformers

(3-/1-phase)
1
• Differential protection for motors and generators
• Differential protection for short 2 up to 5 terminal lines
• Differential protection for busbars up to 12 feeders 2
(phase-segregated or with summation CT)
LSP2456-afpen.tif
• Differential protection with phase-segregated measurement 3
• Sensitive measuring for low-fault currents
• Fast tripping for high-fault currents
• Restraint against inrush of transformer
• Phase /ground overcurrent protection
4
Fig. 8/1 SIPROTEC 7UT6 differential protection relay for ransformers,
• Overload protection with or without temperature
generators, motors and busbar
measurement
• Negative-sequence protection 5
Description • Breaker failure protection
• Low/high-impedance restricted ground fault (REF)
The SIPROTEC 7UT6 differential protection relays are used for
fast and selective fault clearing of short-circuits in transformers
• Voltage protection functions (7UT613/633)
6
of all voltage levels and also in rotating electric machines like Control functions
motors and generators, for short lines and busbars. • Commands for control of circuit-breakers and isolators
The protection relay can be parameterized for use with three-
phase and single-phase transformers.
• 7UT63x: Graphic display shows position of switching elements,
local/remote switching by key-operated switch
7
The specific application can be chosen by parameterization. • Control via keyboard, binary inputs, DIGSI 4 or SCADA system
In this way an optimal adaptation of the relay to the protected • User-defined logic with CFC
object can be achieved.
8
In addition to the differential function, a backup overcurrent pro-
tection for 1 winding/star point is integrated in the relay. Option-
ally, a low or high-impedance restricted ground-fault protection, • Trip circuit supervision
a negative-sequence protection and a breaker failure protection • Oscillographic fault recording 9
can be used. 7UT613 and 7UT633 feature 4 voltage inputs. With • Permanent differential and restraint current measurement,
this option an overvoltage and undervoltage protection is avail- extensive scope of operational values
able as well as frequency protection, reverse / forward power
protection, fuse failure monitor and overexcitation protection.
With external temperature monitoring boxes (thermo-boxes)
Communication interfaces 10
• PC front port for setting with DIGSI 4
temperatures can be measured and monitored in the relay.
Therefore, complete thermal monitoring of a transformer is • System interface
IEC 61850 Ethernet
possible, e.g. hot-spot calculation of the oil temperature.
7UT613 and 7UT63x only feature full coverage of applications
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, 11
PROFIBUS DP,
without external relays by the option of multiple protection MODBUS or DNP 3
functions e.g. overcurrent protection is available for each wind-
• Service interface for DIGSI 4 (modem)/ temperature
ing or measurement location of a transformer. Other functions
are available twice: ground-fault differential protection, breaker
monitoring (thermo-box) 12
failure protection and overload protection. Furthermore, up to • Time synchronization via IRIG-B/DCF 77
12 user-defined (flexible) protection functions may be activated
by the customer with the choice of measured voltages, currents,
power and frequency as input variables. 13
The relays provide easy-to-use local control and automation
functions. The integrated programmable logic (CFC) allows the
users to implement their own functions, e.g. for the automation
of switchgear (interlocking). User-defined messages can be gen-
14
erated as well. The flexible communication interfaces are open
for modem communication architectures with control system.
15
Application
Application
1 The numerical protection relays 7UT6 are

primarily applied as differential protection
on
2 – transformers
7UT612: 2 windings
7UT613/633: 2 up to 3 windings
7UT635: 2 up to 5 windings,
– generators
3 – motors
– short line sections
– small busbars
– parallel and series reactors.
4 The user selects the type of object that
is to be protected by setting during
configuration of the relay. Subsequently,
only those parameters that are relevant
5 for this particular protected object need
to be set. This concept, whereby only
those parameters relevant to a particular
protected object need to be set, substan-
6 tially contributed to a simplification of the
setting procedure. Only a few parameters
must be set. Therefore the new 7UT6
relays also make use of and extend this
7 concept. Apart from the protected plant

objects defined in the 7UT6, a further
differential protection function allows the
protection of
8 – single busbars with up to 12 feeders.

The well-proven differential measuring
algorithm of the 7UT51 relay is also
used in the new relays, so that a similar
9 response with regard to short-circuit
detection, tripping time saturation detec-
tion and inrush restraint is achieved.
10
11
13
14
15
Application
Protection functions ANSI No. Three-phase Single-phase Auto- Generator/ Busbar, Busbar,
1
7UT613/33
transformer transformer trans- Motor 3-phase 1-phase
7UT612
7UT635
former
Differential protection
Ground-fault differential protection
87T/G/M/L
87 N
1
1
1
2
1
2

*)

–

–
2
Overcurrent-time protection, phases 50/51 1 3 3 –
Overcurrent-time protection 3I0 50/51N 1 3 3 – –
Overcurrent-time protection, ground 50/51G 1 2 2 3
Overcurrent-time protection, 1 1 1
single-phase
Negative-sequence protection 46 1 1 1 – –
Overload protection IEC 60255-8 49 1 2 2 – 4
Overload protection IEC 60354 49 1 2 2 –
Overexcitation protection *) V/Hz 24 – 1 –
Overvoltage protection *) V> 59 – 1 – – –
Undervoltage protection *) V< 27 – 1 – – – 5
Frequency protection *) f>, f< 81 – 1 – – –
Reverse power protection *) -P 32R – 1 – – –
Forward power protection*) P>, P< 32F – 1 – – –
Fuse failure protection 60FL – 1 – – – 6
Breaker failure protection 50 BF 1 2 2 –
External temperature monitoring 38
(thermo-box)
Lockout 86 7
Measured-value supervision
Trip circuit supervision 74 TC

Direct coupling 1
Direct coupling 2 8
Operational measured values
Flexible protection functions 27, 32, 47, – 12 12
Function applicable
50, 55, 59, 81
9
– Function not applicable in this application
*) Only 7UT613/63x
10
Construction
The 7UT6 is available in three housing widths referred to a

11
19" module frame system. The height is 243 mm.
– ⅓ (7UT612),
– ½ (7UT613), 12
– (7UT633/635) of 19”
All cables can be connected with or without cable ring lugs.
Plug-in terminals are available as an option, it is thus possible
to employ prefabricated cable harnesses. In the case of surface 13
mounting on a panel, the connection terminals are located
LSP2236F.tif
above and below in the form of screw-type terminals. The

communication interfaces are located on the same sides of the
housing. For dimensions please refer to the dimension drawings
(part 14).
14
Fig. 8/3 Rear view flush-mountig housing 15

1 Differential protection for transformers

(ANSI 87T)
When the 7UT6 is employed as fast and
2 selective short-circuit protection for trans-

formers the following properties apply:
• Tripping characteristic according to
Fig. 8/4 with normal sensitive IDIFF> and
3 high-set trip stage IDIFF>>

• Vector group and ratio adaptation
• Depending on the treatment of the
transformer neutral point, zero-
4 sequence current conditioning can be
set with or without consideration of
the neutral current. With the 7UT6, the
star-point current at the star-point CT
5 can be measured and considered in the

vector group treatment, which increases
sensitivity by one third for single-phase
faults.
Fig. 8/4 Tripping characteristic with preset transformer parameters for three-phase faults
• Fast clearance of heavy internal trans-
6 former faults with high-set differential
element IDIFF>>.
• Restrain of inrush current with 2nd
harmonic. Cross-block function that can
7 be limited in time or switched off.
• Restrain against overfluxing with a
choice of 3rd or 5th harmonic stabiliza-
tion is only active up to a settable value
8 for the fundamental component of the
differential current.
• Additional restrain for an external fault
with current transformer saturation
9 (patented CT-saturation detector from
Fig. 8/5 3-winding transformers (1 or 3-phase)
7UT51).
• Insensitivity to DC current and current
transformer errors due to the freely
10 programmable tripping characteristic
and fundamental filtering.
• The differential protection function can
be blocked externally by means of a
11 binary input.
12
13
14
15
Sensitive protection by measurement of star-point current

(see Fig. 8/6) (ANSI 87N/87GD)
Apart from the current inputs for detection of the phase 1
currents on the sides of the protected object, the 7UT6 also
contains normal sensitivity IE and high sensitivity IEE current
measuring inputs. Measurement of the star-point current of an
grounded winding via the normal sensitivity measuring input,
and consideration of this current by the differential protection,
2
increases the sensitivity during internal single-phase faults by
33 %. If the sum of the phase currents of a winding is compared
with the star-point current measured with the normal sensitivity
input IE, a sensitive ground current differential protection can be
3
implemented (REF).
This function is substantially more sensitive than the differential
protection during faults to ground in a winding, detecting fault
currents as small as 10 % of the transformer rated current.
4
Furthermore, this relay contains a high-impedance differential Fig. 8/6 High-impedance differential protection
protection input. The sum of the phase currents is compared
with the star-point current. A voltage-dependent resistor (varis- 5
tor) is applied in shunt (see Fig. 8/6). Via the sensitive current
measuring input IEE, the voltage across the varistor is measured;
in the milli-amp range via the external resistor. The varistor and
the resistor are mounted externally. An ground fault results in a
voltage across the varistor that is larger than the voltage result-
6
ing from normal current transformer errors. A prerequisite is the
application of accurate current transformers of the class 5P (TPY)
which exhibit a small measuring error in the operational and
overcurrent range. These current transformers may not be the
7
same as used for the differential protection, as the varistor may
cause rapid saturation of this current transformers.
Both high-impedance and low-impedance REF are each available
twice (option) for transformers with two grounded windings.
8
Thus separate REF relays are not required.
Differential protection for single-phase busbars (see Fig. 8/7)

(ANSI 87L) 9
The short-circuit protection is characterized by the large number Fig. 8/7 Simple busbar protection with phase-selective configuration
of current measuring inputs. The scope of busbar protection 7UT612: 7 feeders; 7UT613/633: 9 feeders;
ranges from a few bays e.g. in conjunction with one and a half
circuit-breaker applications, to large stations having up to more
7UT635: 12 feeders
10
than 50 feeders. In particular in smaller stations, the busbar
protection arrangements are too expensive. With the 7UT6 relays
the current inputs may also be used to achieve a cost-effective
busbar protection system for up to 12 feeders (Fig. 8/7). This 11
busbar protection functions as a phase-selective protection with
1 or 5 A current transformers, whereby the protected phase
is connected. All three phases can therefore be protected by
applying three relays. Furthermore a single-phase protection can
be implemented by connecting the three-phase currents via a
12
Fig. 8/8 Generator/motor differential protection
summation transformer. The summation transformer connection
has a rated current of 100 mA.
The selectivity of the protection can be improved by monitoring
the current magnitude in all feeders, and only releasing the
After expiry of the time delay the circuit-breakers of the infeeds
to the busbar may be tripped.
13
differential protection trip command when the overcurrent Differential protection for generators and motors
condition is also met. The security measures to prevent (see Fig. 8/8) (ANSI 87G/M)
maloperation resulting from failures in the current transformer
secondary circuits can be improved in this manner. This overcur- Equal conditions apply for generators, motors and series
14
rent release may also be used to implement a breaker failure reactors. The protected zone is limited by the sets of current
protection. Should the release signal not reset within a settable transfomers at each side of the protected object.
time, this indicates that a breaker failure condition is present, as
the short-circuit was not switched off by the bay circuit-breaker. 15
Backup protection functions Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC)
1 Overcurrent-time protection (ANSI 50, 50N, 51, 51N) One or two binary inputs can be used for monitoring the circuit-
breaker trip coil including its incoming cables. An alarm signal
Backup protection on the transformer is achieved with a two- occurs whenever the circuit is interrupted.
stage overcurrent protection for the phase currents and 3I0 for
the calculated neutral current. This function may be configured Lockout (ANSI 86)
2 for one of the sides or measurement locations of the protected
object. The high-set stage is implemented as a definite-time
All binary outputs (alarm or trip relays) can be stored like LEDs
and reset using the LED reset key. The lockout state is also stored
stage, whereas the normal stage may have a definite-time or
in the event of supply voltage failure. Reclosure can only occur
inverse-time characteristic. Optionally, IEC or ANSI character-
after the lockout state is reset.
3 istics may be selected for the inverse stage. The overcurrent
protection 3I0 uses the calculated zero-sequence current of the External trip coupling
configured side or measurement location.
Multiple availability: 3 times (option) For recording and processing of external trip information via
binary inputs. They are provided for information from the
4 Overcurrent-time protection for ground (ANSI 50 / 51G) Buchholz relay or specific commands and act like a protective
function. Each input initiates a fault event and can be individu-
The 7UT6 feature a separate 2-stage overcurrent-time protection
ally delayed by a timer.
for the ground. As an option, an inverse-time characteristic
according to IEC or ANSI is available. In this way, it is possible
5 to protect e.g. a resistor in the transformer star point against
Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27) (7UT613/633 only)
thermal overload, in the event of a single-phase short-circuit not The undervoltage protection evaluates the positive-sequence
being cleared within the time permitted by the thermal rating. components of the voltages and compares them with the
Multiple availability: 3 times (option) threshold values. There are two stages available.
6 Phase-balance current protection (ANSI 46) The undervoltage function is used for asynchronous motors
(Negative-sequence protection) and pumped-storage stations and prevents the voltage-related
instability of such machines.
Furthermore a negative-sequence protection may be defined for The function can also be used for monitoring purposes.
7 one of the sides or measurement locations. This provides sensi-
tive overcurrent protection in the event of asymmetrical faults in Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59) (7UT613/633 only)
the transformer. The set pickup threshold may be smaller than
This protection prevents insulation faults that result when the
the rated current.
voltage is too high.
8 Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF) Either the maximum line-to-line voltages or the phase-to-ground
If a faulted portion of the electrical circuit is not disconnected voltages (for low-voltage generators) can be evaluated. The
upon issuing of a trip command, another command can be measuring results of the line-to-line voltages are independent of
9 initiated using the breaker failure protection which operates the

circuit-breaker, e.g., of an upstream (higher-level) protection
the neutral point displacement caused by ground faults.
This function is implemented in two stages.
relay.
Frequency protection (ANSI 81) (7UT613 / 633 only)
Multiple availability: 2 times (option)
10 Overexcitation protection Volt / Hertz

The frequency protection prevents impermissible stress of the
equipment (e.g. turbine) in case of under or overfrequency.
(ANSI 24) (7UT613 / 633 only) It also serves as a monitoring and control element.
The overexcitation protection serves for detection of an unper- The function has four stages; the stages can be implemented
11 missible high induction (proportional to V/f) in generators or
transformers, which leads to a thermal overloading. This may
either as underfrequency or overfrequency protection. Each
stage can be delayed separately.
occur when starting up, shutting down under full load, with
weak systems or under isolated operation. The inverse character- Even in the event of voltage distortion, the frequency measur-
istic can be set via seven points derived from the manufacturer ing algorithm reliably identifies the fundamental waves and
12 data. determines the frequency extremely precisely. Frequency
measurement can be blocked by using an undervoltage stage.
In addition, a definite-time alarm stage and an instantaneous
stage can be used.
13
14
15
Reverse-power protection (ANSI 32R)

(7UT613/633 only)
The reverse-power protection monitors 1
the direction of active power flow and
picks up when the mechanical energy
fails. This function can be used for opera-
tional shutdown (sequential tripping) of
the generator but also prevents damage
2
to the steam turbines. The reverse power
Serial communication via RS485 bus or
is calculated from the positive-sequence fiber-optic connection (possible with external converter
systems of current and voltage. Asym-
metrical power system faults therefore do
3
not cause reduced measuring accuracy.
The position of the emergency trip
LSP2376-afp.tif
valve is injected as binary information
and is used to switch between two trip 4
command delays. When applied for motor
protection, the sign (±) of the active
power can be reversed via parameters.
Forward-power protection (ANSI 32F)

max. 6 temperatures max. 6 temperatures
5
(7UT613/633 only)
Fig. 8/9 Temperature measurement and monitoring with external thermo-boxes
Monitoring of the active power produced
by a generator can be useful for starting 6
up and shutting down generators. One stage monitors exceed- The ability of the 7UT6 to monitor the thermal condition can be
ing of a limit value, while another stage monitors falling below improved by serial connection of a temperature monitoring box
another limit value. The power is calculated using the positive- (also called thermo-box or RTD-box) (Fig. 8/9). The temperature
sequence component of current and voltage. The function can
be used to shut down idling motors.
of up to 12 measuring points (connection of 2 boxes) can be
registered. The type of sensor (Pt100, Ni100, Ni120) can be
7
selected individually for each measuring point. Two alarm stages
Flexible protection functions (7UT613/63x only) are derived for each measuring point when the corresponding
For customer-specific solutions up to 12 flexible protection
functions are available and can be parameterized. Voltages,
set threshold is exceeded.
Alternatively to the conventional overload protection, the relay
8
currents, power and frequency from all measurement locations can also provide a hot-spot calculation according to IEC 60345.
can be chosen as inputs. Each protection function has a settable The hot-spot calculation is carried out separately for each leg
threshold, delay time, blocking input and can be configured as a
1-phase or 3-phase unit.
of the transformer and takes the different cooling modes of the
transformer into consideration.
9
Monitoring functions The oil temperature must be registered via the thermo-box for
the implementation of this function. An alarm warning stage
The relay comprises high-performance monitoring for the
hardware and software.
and final alarm stage is issued when the maximum hot-spot
temperature of the three legs exceeds the threshold value.
10
The measuring circuits, analog-digital conversion, power supply For each transformer leg a relative rate of ageing, based on the
voltages, battery, memories and software sequence (watch-dog) ageing at 98 °C is indicated as a measured value. This value can
are all monitored. be used to determine the thermal condition and the current 11
The fuse failure function detects failure of the measuring voltage thermal reserve of each transformer leg. Based on this rate of
due to short-circuit or open circuit of the wiring or VT and avoids ageing, a remaining thermal reserve is indicated in % for the
overfunction of the undervoltage elements in the protection hottest spot before the alarm warning and final alarm stage is
functions. (7UT613/633 only) reached. 12
Thermal monitoring of transformers
The importance of reducing the costs of transmitting and
distributing energy by optimizing the system load has resulted in
the increased importance of monitoring the thermal condition of
13
transformers. This monitoring is one of the tasks of the monitor-
ing systems, designed for medium and large transformers.
Overload protection based on a simple thermal model, and using
only the measured current for evaluation, has been integrated in
14
differential protection systems for a number of years.
15
Measured values
1 The operational measured values and sta-

tistic value registering in the 7UT6, apart
from the registration of phase currents and
voltages (7UT613/633 only) as primary and
secondary values, comprises the following:
2 • Currents 3-phase IL1, IL2, IL3, I1, I2, 3I0
for each side and measurement location
• Currents 1-phase I1 to I12 for each feeder
and further inputs Ix1 to Ix4
3 • Voltages 3-phase VL1, VL2, VL3, VL1L2, VL2L3,
VL3L1, V1, V2, V0 and 1-phase VEN, V4
• Phase angles of all 3-phase / 1-phase
4 currents and voltages
• Power Watts, Vars, VA/P, Q, S (P, Q: total
and phase selective)
• Power factor (cos φ),
5 • Frequency
LSP2821.tif
• Energy + kWh, + kVarh, forward and
reverse power flow
• Min./max. and mean values of VPH-PH,
6 VPHE, VE, V0, V1, V2, IPH, I1, I2, 3I0, IDIFF, Fig. 8/10 Commissioning via a standard Web browser: Phasor diagram
IRESTRAINT, S, P, Q, cos φ, f
7 • Registration of the interrupted currents

and counter for protection trip com-
mands
• Mean operating temperature of over-
8 load function
• Measured temperatures of external
thermo-boxes
• Differential and restraint currents of
9 differential protection and REF
Metered values
For internal metering, the unit can
10 calculate an energy metered value from
the measured current and voltage values.
The 7UT6 relays may be integrated into
monitoring systems by means of the
11 diverse communication options available
in the relays. An example for this is the
LSP2821.tif
connection to the SITRAM transformer

monitoring system with PROFIBUS DP
12 interface.
Fig. 8/11 Commissioning via a standard Web browser:Operating characteristic
Commissioning and operating aids
Commissioning could hardly be easier and is fully supported by All measured currents and voltages (7UT613/633 only) of the
13 DIGSI 4. The status of the binary inputs can be read individually
transformer can be indicated as primary or secondary values.
The differential protection bases its pickup thresholds on the
operation of switching elements (circuit-breakers, disconnect rated currents of the transformer. The referred differential and
devices) can be checked using the switching functions of the bay stabilising (restraint) currents are available as measured values
controller. The analog measured values are represented as wide- per phase.
14 ranging operational measured values. To prevent transmission of
If a thermo-box is connected, registered temperature values
information to the control center during maintenance, the bay
may also be displayed. To check the connection of the relay to
the primary current and voltage transformers, a commissioning
15 indications with test marking for test purposes can be connected
measurement is provided.

This measurement function works with only 5 to 10 % of the Automation / user-defined logic
transformer rated current and indicates the current and the
angle between the currents and voltages (if voltages applied).
Termination errors between the primary current transfomers
(CFC), specific functions for the automation of switchgear or 1
and input transformers of the relay are easily detected in this
manner.
The operating state of the protection may therefore be checked Switching authority 2
online at any time. The fault records of the relay contain the Switching authority is determined according to parameters,
phase and ground currents as well as the calculated differential communication or by key-operated switch (when available).
and restraint currents. The fault records of the 7UT613/633
relays also contain voltages. If a source is set to “LOCAL”, only local switching operations are
3
Browser-based commissioning aid down: “LOCAL”; DIGSI PC program, “REMOTE”
The 7UT6 provides a commissioning and test program which Every switching operation and change of breaker position is kept
runs under a standard internet browser and is therefore
independent of the configuration software provided by the
in the status indication memory. The switch command source,
4
manufacturer. and result of a switching operation are retained.
For example, the correct vector group of the transformer may
be checked. These values may be displayed graphically as vector
diagrams.
Assignment of feedback to command
5
The stability check in the operating characteristic is available as inputs are logically assigned to the corresponding command
well as event log and trip log messages. Remote control can be
used if the local front panel cannot be accessed.
outputs. The unit can therefore distinguish whether the indica-
tion change is a consequence of switching operation or whether
6
it is a spontaneous change of state (intermediate position).
Control and automation functions
Chatter disable
Control
7
In addition to the protection functions, the SIPROTEC 4 units also period of time, the number of status changes of indication input
support all control and monitoring functions that are required exceeds a specified figure. If exceeded, the indication input is
for operating medium-voltage or high-voltage substations. blocked for a certain period, so that the event list will not record
excessive operations. 8
processes. Filter time
obtained from auxiliary contacts and communicated via binary
inputs. Therefore it is possible to detect and indicate both the
All binary indications can be subjected to a filter time (indication
suppression). 9
OPEN and CLOSED position or a fault or intermediate circuit- Indication filtering and delay
breaker or auxiliary contact position.
Indications can be filtered or delayed.
10
– binary inputs indication input. The indication is passed on only if the indica-
– substation control and protection system tion voltage is still present after a set period of time. In the
– DIGSI 4 event of indication delay, there is a wait for a preset time. The
information is passed on only if the indication voltage is still
11
Command processing present after this time.
All the functionality of command processing is offered. This Indication derivation

or without feedback, sophisticated monitoring of the control A further indication (or a command) can be derived from an
12
hardware and software, checking of the external process, existing indication. Group indications can also be formed. The
control actions using functions such as runtime monitoring and volume of information to the system interface can thus be
reduced and restricted to the most important signals.
automatic command termination after output. Here are some
13
trip contacts A data transmission lockout can be activated, so as to prevent
transfer of information to the control center during work on a
circuit bay. 14
such as control of circuit-breakers, disconnectors and ground- Test operation
ing switches
automatic control system for test purposes. 15

Communication
Communication
1 With respect to communication, particular emphasis has been

of standards common in energy automation. The design of
the communication modules permits interchangeability on the
2 one hand, and on the other hand provides openness for future
standards (for example, Industrial Ethernet).
Local PC interface
3 The PC interface accessible from the front of the unit permits

quick access to all parameters and fault event data. Of particular
commissioning.
4 Rear-mounted interfaces
Two communication modules located on the rear of the unit Fig. 8/12 IEC 60870-5-103 star-type RS232 copper conductor
incorporate optional equipment complements and readily permit connection or fiber-optic connection
5 retrofitting. They assure the ability to comply with the require-

ments of different communication interfaces.
• Service interface (Port C/Port D)
6 In the RS485 version, several protection units can be centrally
operated with DIGSI 4. On connection of a modem, remote
control is possible. Via this interface communication with
thermo-boxes is executed.
7 • System interface (Port B)
This interface is used to carry out communication with a
control or protection and control system and supports a variety
of communication protocols and interface designs, depending
8 on the module connected.
Commissioning aid via a standard Web browser

In the case of the 7UT6, a PC with a standard browser can be
9 connected to the local PC interface or to the service interface
(refer to “Commissioning program”). The relays include a small
Web server and send their HTML-pages to the browser via an
established dial-up network connection. Fig. 8/13 Bus structure for station buswith Ethernet
10 Retrofitting: Modules for every type of communication

und IEC 61850, fiber-optic ring
Communication modules for retrofitting are available for the Safe bus architecture
entire SIPROTEC 4 unit range. These ensure that, where different • RS485 bus
11 communication interfaces (electrical or optical) and protocols
(IEC 61850 Ethernet, IEC 60870-5-103, PROFIBUS DP, MODBUS
With this data transmission via copper conductors electro-
RTU, DNP 3, DIGSI, etc.) are required, such demands can be met. twisted-pair conductor. Upon failure of a unit, the remaining
system continues to operate without any disturbances.

netic interference. Upon failure of a section between two
13 disturbance.
It is generally impossible to communicate with a unit that has
14
15
Communication
IEC 61850 Ethernet
LSP2163-afpen.tif
The Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol is the worldwide stan-
dard for protection and control systems used by power supply 1
be exchanged directly between bay units so as to set up simple
masterless systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to
the units via the Ethernet bus is also possible with DIGSI.
2
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 60870-5-103 is an internationally standardized protocol for 3
the efficient communication in the protected area.
IEC 60870-5-103 is supported by a number of protection device
manufacturers and is used worldwide. Fig. 8/14 RS232 / RS485 electrical communication module
PROFIBUS DP
4
PROFIBUS DP is an industry-recognized standard for communica-
LSP2162-afpen.tif
tions and is supported by a number of PLC and protection device
manufacturers. 5
MODBUS RTU
MODBUS RTU is an industry-recognized standard for communica-
tions and is supported by a number of PLC and protection device
manufacturers.
6
DNP 3.0
DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol Version 3) is a messaging-
based communication protocol. The SIPROTEC 4 units are fully
7
Level 1 and Level 2 compliant with DNP 3.0. Fig. 8/15 820 nm fiber-optic communication module
DNP 3.0 is supported by a number of protection device manu-
facturers.
8
9
LSP2164-afp.tif
10
Fig. 8/16 PROFIBUS communication module, optical double-ring
11
12
LSP3.01-0021.tif
13
14
Fig. 8/17 Optical Ethernet communication module for IEC 61850 with
15
Communication

station control
1 Together with the SICAM power automa-
tion system, SIPROTEC 4 can be used
with PROFIBUS DP. Over the low-cost
electrical RS485 bus, or interference-free
2 via the optical double ring, the units
exchange information with the control
system.
Units featuring IEC 60870-5-103
3 interfaces can be connected to SICAM in
parallel via the RS485 bus or radially by
fiber-optic link. Through this interface,
the system is open for the connection
4 of units of other manufacturers
(see Fig. 8/12).
5 into systems of other manufacturers or
in SIMATIC. Electrical RS485 or optical
interfaces are available. The optimum
physical data transfer medium can be
6 chosen thanks to opto-electrical con-
verters. Thus, the RS485 bus allows
low-cost wiring in the cubicles and an
interference-free optical connection to
7 the master can be established.
8 is standardized, thus also enabling direct connection of units
systems (see Fig. 8/13).
10
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
Typical connections
Fig. 8/19 Standard connection to a transformer without neutral current measurement 5
10
Fig. 8/20 Connection to a transformer with neutral current measurement
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
7 Fig. 8/21 Connection of transformer differential protection with high impedance REF (I8)
and neutral current measurement at I7
10
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
5
Fig. 8/22 Connection example to a single-phase power transformer with current
transformer between starpoint and grounding point
10
Fig. 8/23 Connection example to a single-phase power transformer with only one
current transformer (right side)
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
5
Fig. 8/24 Connection to a three-phase auto-transformer with current transformer
between starpoint and grounding point
6
10
11 Fig. 8/25 Generator or motor protection
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
6
Fig. 8/26 Connection 7UT612 as single-phase busbar protection for 7 feeders, illustrated for phase L1
7
10
11
12
13
Fig. 8/27 Connection 7UT612 as busbar protection for feeders, connected via external summation current transformers (SCT) – 14
partial illustration for feeders 1, 2 and 7
15
Typical connections
8
Fig. 8/28 Connection example 7UT613 for a three-winding power transformer
10
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
10
11
12
Fig. 8/29 Connection example 7UT613 for a three-winding power transformer with current transformers between starpoint
and grounding point, additional connection for high-impedance protection; IX3 connected as high-sensitivity input
13
14
15
Typical connections
9 Fig. 8/30 Connection example 7UT613 for a three-phase auto-transformer

with three-winding and current transformer between starpoint and grounding point
10
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
10
Fig. 8/31 Connection example 7UT635 for a three-winding power transformer
with 5 measurement locations (3-phase) and neutral current measurement
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
3
Fig. 8/32 Voltage transformer connection to 3 star-connected voltage transformers (7UT613 and 7UT633 only)
7
Fig. 8/33 Voltage transformer connection to 3 star-connected voltage transformers with additional delta winding
8 (e-n-winding) (7UT613 and 7UT633 only)
10
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
General unit data Switching capacity

Make 1000 W / VA
Analog inputs
Break
Break (with resistive load)
30 VA
40 W
1
Rated current 0.1 or 1 or 5 A Break (with L/R w 50 ms) 25 W
(selectable by jumper, 0.1 A) Switching voltage 250 V
Power consumption
In CT circuits
7UT
612 613 633 635
Permissible total current 30 A for 0.5 seconds
5 A continuous 2
with IN = 1 A; in VA approx. 0.02 0.05 0.05 0.05 Operating time, approx.
with IN = 5 A; in VA approx. 0.2 0.3 0.3 0.3 NO contact 8 ms
with IN = 0.1 A; in VA approx. 0.001 0.001 0.001 0.001 NO/NC contact (selectable) 8 ms
sensitive input; in VA approx.
Overload capacity
0.05
IN
0.05 0.05 0.05 Fast NO contact
High-speed*) NO trip outputs
5 ms
< 1 ms
3
In CT circuits LEDs
Thermal (r.m.s.) 100 IN for 1 s
30 IN for 10 s Quantity 7UT
Dynamic (peak value)

4 IN continuous
250 IN (half cycle) RUN (green)
612
1
613
1
633
1
635
1
4
In CT circuits for ERROR (red) 1 1 1 1
highly sensitive input IEE LED (red), function can 7 14 14 14
Thermal 300 A for 1 s be assigned
100 A for 10 s
15 A continuous
Unit design 5
Housing 7XP20 For dimensions please refer
Dynamic 750 A (half cycle)
to dimension drawings part 14
Rated voltage (7UT613/633 only) 80 to 125 V
Power consumption per phase ≤ 0.1 VA
at 100 V
acc. to IEC 60529
For the device
6
Overload capacity in surface-mounting housing IP 51
Thermal (r.m.s.) 230 V continuous in flush-mounting housing
Auxiliary voltage front IP 51
Rated voltage DC 24 to 48 V
DC 60 to 125 V
rear
For personal safety
IP 50
IP 2x with closed protection cover
7
DC 110 to 250 V and Housing 7UT
AC 115 V (50/60 Hz), AC 230 V 612 613 633 635
Permissible tolerance
-20 to +20 %
≤ 15 %
Size, referred to 19” frame
Weight, in kg
1/3 1/2 1/1 1/1
8
(peak-to-peak) Flush-mounting housing 5.1 8.7 13.8 14.5
Surface-mounting housing 9.6 13.5 22.0 22.7
Power consumption (DC/AC) 7UT
612 613 633 635
Quiescent; in W approx. 5 6/12 6/12 6/12 Electrical tests 9
Energized; in W approx. 7 12/19 20/28 20/28 Specifications
depending on design
Standards IEC 60255 (Product standards)
Bridging time during ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2
failure of the auxiliary voltage
Vaux ≥ 110 V ≥ 50 ms
UL 508 10
Insulation tests
Binary inputs
Standards EC 60255-5 and 60870-2-1
Functions are freely assignable
Voltage test (100 % test)
Quantity marshallable 7UT
612 613 633 635
All circuits except for auxiliary
supply, binary inputs and
2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz / 60 Hz 11
3 5 21 29 communication interfaces
Rated voltage range 24 to 250 V, bipolar Auxiliary voltage and binary DC 3.5 kV
Minimum pickup threshold
Ranges are settable by means of
DC 19 or 88 V (bipolar) inputs (100 % test)
RS485/RS232 rear side 500 V (r.m.s.), 50 Hz / 60 Hz
12
jumpers for each binary input communication interfaces
Maximum permissible voltage DC 300 V and time synchronization
interface (100 % test)
Output relay
All circuits except for 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 ms; 0.5 J
13
Command / indication / communication interfaces 3 positive and 3 negative impulses
alarm relay and time synchronization at intervals of 5 s
interface, class III
Quantity
each with 1 NO contact
7UT
612 613 633 635 14
(marshallable) 4 8 24 24
1 alarm contact, with 1 NO or
NC contact (not marshallable)
*) With high-speed contacts all operating times are reduced by 4.5 ms.
15
Technical data
Electrical tests (cont’d) Mechanical stress tests
1 EMC tests for interference immunity

Standards IEC 60255-6, 60255-22
During operation
(product standards) Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068
EN 6100-6-2 (generic standard)
DIN 57435 / Part 303 Vibration Sinusoidal
2 High frequency test

2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; τ = 15 ms;
400 surges per s; test duration 2 s;
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2
IEC 60068-2-6
10 to 60 Hz: ± 0.075 mm amplitu-
de; 60 to 150 Hz: 1 g acceleration
frequency sweep 1 octave/min.
DIN 57435 / Part 303, class III Ri = 200 Ω 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air Shock Half-sinusoidal
IEC 60255-22-2 class IV discharge; both polarities;
3 EN 61000-4-2, class IV 150 pF; Ri = 330 Ω
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
IEC 60068-2-27
acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms,
3 shocks each in both directions of
Irradiation with RF field, 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz; the 3 axes
frequency sweep, 80 % AM; 1 kHZ Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-22-3, Seismic vibration
4 IEC 61000-4-3 class III
Irradiation with RF field, amplitude- 10 V/m; 80, 160, 450, 900 MHz,
modulated, single frequencies, 80 % AM; (vertical axis)
IEC 60255-22-3, duration > 10 s 8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
IEC 61000-4-3, class III (horizontal axis)
5 Irradiation with RF field, pulse-
modulated, single frequencies, 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition
(vertical axis)
IEC 60255-22-3, IEC 61000-4-3/ frequency 200 Hz; frequency sweep 1 octave/min
ENV 50204, class III duty cycle 50 % PM 1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
During transport
6 Fast transients interference, bursts
IEC 60255-22-4 and
4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068
repetition rate 300 ms; both
High-energy surge voltages polarities;
7 (SURGE), IEC 61000-4-5,
installation class III
Impulse: 1.2/50 ms
Auxiliary supply Shock Half-sinusoidal
Common (longitudinal) mode: IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks each in both directions of
8 Analog inputs, binary inputs,
2kV; 12 Ω, 9 μF
the 3 axes
Continuous shock Half-sinusoidal
binary outputs 1kV; 2 Ω, 18 μF
Common (longitude) mode: IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks on each of the 3 axes
2kV; 42 Ω, 0.5 μF
9 Line-conducted HF, amplitude- Differential (transversal) mode:
1kV; 42 Ω, 0.5 μF
in both directions
modulated IEC 61000-4-6, class III

10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; Climatic stress tests
1 kHz Temperatures
10 EMC tests for interference immunity (cont’d)
Magnetic field with power 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for
Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1
-25 °C to +85 °C / -13 °F to +185 °F
frequency 3 s; 50 Hz, 0.5 mT; 50 Hz Temporarily permissible operating -20 °C to +70 °C / -4 °F to +158 °F
IEC 61000-4-8, IEC 60255-6 class IV temperature, tested for 96 h

capability, ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; τ = 15 μs;
Damped wave; 400 surges per
Recommended permanent
-5 °C to +55 °C / +25 °F to +131 °F
second; duration 2 s; Ri = 200 Ω IEC 60255-6

Fast transient surge withstand 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst 15 ms; (Legibility of display may be
capability, ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 repetition rate 300 ms; impaired above +55 °C / +131 °F)
12 both polarities; duration 1 min.;

Ri = 80 Ω
permanent storage
-25 °C to +55 °C / -13 °F to +131 °F
– Limiting temperature during- -25 °C to +70 °C / -13 °F to +158 °F

Damped oscillations 2.5 kV (peak value), polarity
transport
IEC 60894, IEC 61000-4-12 alternating 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10
MHz and Humidity
13 50 MHz, Ri = 200 Ω Permissible humidity stress
Yearly average ≤ 75 % relative
humidity; on 56 days in the year
EMC tests for interference emission (type test)
units in such a way that they are up to 93 % relative humidity;
Standard EN 50081-* (generic standard)
not exposed to direct sunlight or ondensation not permitted
Conducted interference, 150 kHz to 30 MHz
14 only auxiliary supply
IEC-CISPR 22
Limit class B
Radio interference field strenght 30 to 1000 MHz

IEC-CISPR 22 Limit class B



7UT612 differential protection relay for transformers, generators, motors and busbars
Housing ⅓ x 19"; 3 BI, 4 BO, 1 live status contact, 7 I, IEE
7UT612 - - A0-
1
Rated current
IN = 1 A 1
IN = 5 A 5 see next
page 2
DC 60 to 125 V1), binary input threshold 19 V2)
DC 110 to 250 V1), AC 115/230 V, binary input threshold 88 V2)
4
5 3
DC 220 to 250 V1), AC 115/230 V, binary input threshold 176 V1,2,3) 6
Unit design
For panel surface mounting, two-tier terminals on top and bottom
For panel flush mounting, plug-in terminals (2/3-pole AMP connector)
B 4
D
For panel flush mounting, screw-type terminals, (direct wiring/ring lugs) E
Region-specific default settings/function and language settings

Region DE, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language German; selectable A
5
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language English (GB); selectable B
Region US, 60/50 Hz, ANSI/IEC, language English (US); selectable C
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language Spanish; selectable E 6
System interface (Port B ) on rear
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electrical RS232
1
2
7
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector 3
PROFIBUS DP Slave, electrical RS485 9 L 0A
PROFIBUS DP Slave, optical 820 nm, double loop, ST connector4)
MODBUS, electrical RS485
9
9
L 0 B
L 0D
8
MODBUS, optical 820 nm, ST connector4) 9 L 0 E
DNP 3.0, electrical RS485 9 L 0G
DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector4)
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connector (EN 100)
9
9
L 0H
L 0 R
9
10
11
12
13
1) With plug-in jumper one of the 2 voltage ranges can be selected 4) Not possible with surface mounting housing (position 9 = B). For the 14
2) For each binary input one of 2 pick-up threshold ranges can be surface mounted version, please order a device with the appropriate
selected with plug-in jumper electrical RS485 interface and accessories as stated in A.1under
„External converters“
3) Ordering option 6 only for V4.6 and higher
5) Cannot be delivered in connection with 9th digit = B.
15
1 7UT612 differential protection relay for transformers, generators, motors and busbars
DIGSI 4 / browser / modem interface (Port C) on rear/temperature monitoring box connection

7UT612 - - A0
No DIGSI 4 port 0
DIGSI 4 / browser, electrical RS232 1
2 DIGSI 4 / browser or temperature monitoring box, electrical RS485
DIGSI 4 / browser or temperature monitoring box, 820 nm fiber optic, ST connector
2
3
Functions
3 Measured values/monitoring functions

Basic measured values 1
Basic measured values, transformer monitoring functions
(connection to thermo-box/hot spot acc. to IEC, overload factor)1) 4
4 Differential protection + basic functions

Differential protection for transformer, generator, motor, busbar (87)
Overload protection for one winding (49), Lockout (86)
Overcurrent-time protection (50/51): I>, I>>, IP (inrush stabilization)
5 Overcurrent-time protection (50N/51N): 3I0>, 3I0>>, 3I0P (inrush stabilization)

Overcurrent-time protection ground (50G/51G): IE>, IE>>, IEP (inrush stabilization) A
Differential protection + basic functions + additional functions

Restricted ground fault protection, low impedance (87N)
6 Restricted ground fault protection, high impedance (87N without resistor and varistor), O/C 1-phase
Trip circuit supervision (74TC), breaker failure protection (50BF), unbalanced load protection (46) B
10
11
12
13
14
15 1) Only in connection with position 12 = 2 or 3


7UT613 differential protection relay for transformers, generators, motors and busbars
Housing ½ x19"; 5 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status contact, 11 I, IEE1)
7UT613 - - -
1
Rated current
IN = 1 A 1
IN = 5 A 5 see next page
2
DC 60 to 125 V1), binary input threshold 19 V2)
DC 110 to 250 V1), AC 115/230 V, binary input threshold 88 V2)
4
5 3
DC 220 to 250 V1), AC 115/230 V, binary input threshold 176 V1,2) 6
Unit design
Surface mounting housing with two-tier terminals, ½ x 19”, 5 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status contact
Flush mounting housing, ½ x 19”, with plug-in terminals, 5 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status contact
B 4
D
Flush mounting housing with screwed terminals, ½ x 19”, 5 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status contact E
Region-specific default settings/language settings

Region DE, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language German; selectable A
5
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language English (GB); selectable B
Region US, 60/50 Hz, ANSI/IEC, language English (US); selectable C
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language French; selectable
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language Spanish; selectable
D
E
6
No system interface
0
1 7
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electrical RS485 2
PROFIBUS DP Slave, electrical RS485
PROFIBUS DP Slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector3)
9
9
L 0A
L 0 B
8
MODBUS, electrical RS485 9 L 0D
DNP 3.0, electrical RS485
DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector4)
9
9
L 0G
L 0H
9
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connector 9 L 0 R
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Etherent, optical, ST-connector4) 9 L 0 S
10
11
12
13
1) One of the 2 voltage ranges can be selected with plug-in jumper 3) Not possible with surface mounting housing (position 9 = B). For the
14
2) For each binary input one of 2 pick-up threshold ranges can be surface mounted version, please order a device with the appropriate
selected with plug-in jumper. electrical RS485 interface and accessories in accordance with A.1
under „External Converters“
4) Cannot be delivered in connection with 9th digit = B. 15
1 7UT613 differential protection relay for transformers, generators, motors and busbars
Port C and Port D

7UT613 - - -
Port C: DIGSI 4 / modem, electrical RS232; Port D: empty 1

Port C: DIGSI 4 / modem/thermo-box, electrical RS485; Port D: empty 2
2 Port C and Port D installed 9 M
Port C (service interface)

3 DIGSI 4 / modem/thermo-box, electrical RS485 2
Port D (additional interface)

Thermo-box, optical 820 nm, ST connector1) A
Thermo-box, electrical RS485 F
4 Measured values /monitoring functions
Extended measured values, min./max. values, mean values 2
5 Extended measured values, min./max., mean values, transformer monitoring functions
(connection to thermo-box/hot spot, overload factor)2) 4
Differential protection + basic functions

Differential protection for transformer, generator, motor, busbar (87)
6 Overload protection according to IEC for one side (49)
Lock out (86)
Overcurrent-time protection phases (50/51): I>, I>>, IP (inrush stabilization)
Overcurrent-time protection 3I0 (50N/51N): 3I0>, 3I0>>, 3I0P (inrush stabilization)
7 Overcurrent-time protection ground (50G/51G): IE>, IE>>, IEP (inrush stabilization) A
Differential protection + basic functions + additional current functions

Restricted ground-fault protection, low impedance (87N)
8 Restricted ground-fault protection, high impedance
(87N without resistor and varistor), O/C 1-phase
Trip circuit supervision (74TC)
Unbalanced load protection (46)
9 Breaker failure protection (50BF)
High-sensitivity overcurrent-time protection/tank leakage protection (64), O/C 1-phase B
Additional voltage functions
10 Without voltage functions

With overexcitation protection and voltage/power/energy/measurement
A
B
With overexcitation protection and voltage/power/energy measurement
+ Over/undervoltage protection (59/27)
11 + Frequency protection (81)
+ Directional power protection (32R/F)
+ Fuse failure monitor (60FL) C
12 Additional functions (general)

Without 0
Multiple protection functions (50, 51, 50N/G, 87N, 50BF, 49)1) 1
Flexible protection functions 2
13 Multiple + flexible protection functions 3
14
15 1) In case of a connection to a RTD box 7XV5662-xAD10, a RS485-LWL

converter 7XV5650-0xA00 is required.
2) Only in connection with position 12 = 2 or 9 and Mxx
(supplementary)


7UT63 differential protection relay
for transformers, generators,motors and busbars, graphic display
7UT63 - - -
1
Housing, inputs and outputs
Housing x 19”, 21 BI, 24 BO, 1 live status contact, 12 current inputs (11 I, IEE);
4 voltage inputs (1 x 3-phase + 1 x 1-phase)
Housing x 19”, 29 BI, 24 BO, 1 live status contact, 16 current inputs (14 I, 2 IEE)
3
5
see next page
2
Rated current
IN = 1 A 1
IN = 5 A 5 3
DC 60 to 125 V 1), binary input threshold 19 V2)
DC 110 to 250 V 1), AC 115/230 V, binary input threshold 88 V2)
4
5
4
DC 220 to 250 V 1), AC 115/230 V, binary input threshold 176 V2) 6
Unit design
Surface-mounting with two-tier terminals B 5
Flush-mounting with plug-in terminals D
Flush-mounting with screw-type terminals E
Surface-mounting with two-tier terminals, with 5 high-speed trip contacts
Flush-mounting with plug-in terminals, with 5 high-speed trip contacts
N
P
6
Flush-mounting with screw-type terminals, with 5 high-speed trip contacts Q
Region-specific default settings/language settings

Region DE, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI language German; selectable A 7
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI language English (GB); selectable B
Region US, 60/50 Hz, ANSI/IEC language English (US); selectable C
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language French; selectable
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI language Spanish; selectable
D
E 8
1 9
2
PROFIBUS DP Slave, optical 820, double ring, ST connector3) 9 L 0 B 10
DNP 3.0, electrical RS485 9
DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector4) 9
L 0G
L 0H 11
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, LC-connector4) 9 L 0 S
12
13
1) One of the 2 voltage ranges can be selected with plug-in jumper 3) Not possible with surface mounting housing (position 9 = B).
For the surface mounted version, please order a device with the
14
2) For each binary input one of 2 pick-up threshold ranges can be
selected with plug-in jumper appropriate electrical RS485 interface and accessories in accordance
with A. under „External Converters“
4) Cannot be delivered in connection with 9th digit = B.
15
1 7UT63 differential protection relay

for transformers, generators,motors and busbars, graphic display
7UT63 - - -
Port C and Port D

Port C: DIGSI 4/modem, electrical RS232; Port D: empty 1
2 Port C: DIGSI 4/modem/thermo-box, electrical RS485; Port D: empty

Port C and Port D installed
2
9 M

DIGSI 4/modem, electrical RS232
3 DIGSI 4/modem/thermo-box, electrical RS485
1
2

Thermo-box, optical 820 nm, ST connector1) A
4 Thermo-box, electrical RS485 F
Measured values/monitoring functions

5 Extended measured values, min./max. values, mean values

Extended measured values, min./max. values, mean values,
2
transformer monitoring functions (connection to thermo-box/hot spot, overload factor)2) 4
Differential protection + basic functions

6 Differential protection for transformer, generator, motor, busbar (87)
Overload protection according to IEC for one side (49)
Lock out (86)
Overcurrent-time protection phases (50/51): I>, I>>, IP (inrush stabilization)
Overcurrent-time protection 3I0 (50N/51N): 3I0>, 3I0>>, 3I0P (inrush stabilization)
7 Overcurrent-time protection ground (50G/51G): IE>, IE>>, IEP (inrush stabilization) A
Differential protection + basic functions + additional current functions
Restricted ground-fault protection, low impedance (87N)
Restricted ground-fault protection, high impedance
8 (87N without resistor and varistor), O/C 1-phase
Trip circuit supervision (74TC)
Unbalanced load protection (46)
Breaker failure protection (50BF)
High-sensitivity overcurrent-time protection/tank leakage protection (64), O/C 1-phase
9 Additional voltage functions (only with 7UT633)
B
Without voltage functions A

With overexcitation protection and voltage/power/energy/measurement B
10 With overexcitation protection and voltage/power/energy measurement
+ Over/undervoltage protection (59/27)
+ Frequency protection (81)
+ Directional power protection (32R/F)
+ Fuse failure monitor (6FL) C
11 Additional functions (general)
Without 0
Multiple protection functions (50, 51, 50N/G, 87N, 50BF, 49)3) 1
12 Flexible protection functions

Multiple + flexible protection functions
2
3
13
14
1) In case of a connection to a RTD box 7XV5662-xAD10, a RS485-LWL 3) Available if selected on position 14.
converter 7XV5650-0xA00 is required.
15 2) Only in connection with position 12 = 2 or 9 and Mxx

(supplementary)

Connecting cable
1
and protection relay (9-pin connector)
Cable between thermo-box and relay
- length 5 m / 16.4 ft 7XV5103-7AA05 2
- length 25 m / 82 ft 7XV5103-7AA25
- length 50 m / 164 ft 7XV5103-7AA50

Rated current 1.6 A; 3
thermal overload release 1.6 A;
Temperature monitoring box with 6 thermal inputs

For SIPROTEC units
4
With 6 temperature sensors and AC/DC 24 to 60 V 7XV5662-2AD10
RS485 interface AC/DC 90 to 240 V 7XV5662-5AD10
Manual for 7UT6x

English V4.6 C53000-G1176-C230-2
5
German V4.6 C53000-G1100-C230-3
Turkey V4.6 C53000-G115A-C230-1
Manual for 7UT612 6

English C53000-G1176-C148-1
Manual for 7UT6

English V4.0
English V4.6
C53000-G1176-C160-1
C53000-G1176-C160-2
7
Accessories Description Order No. Size of Supplier Fig.

8
package

9
LSP2289-afp.eps
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1 1 Siemens 8/36
Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 1)

for 19" rack CI2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0-827040-1
0-827397-1
4000
1
1)
1) 10
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163083-7 4000 1)
0-163084-2 1 1)
LSP2090-afp.eps
LSP2091-afp.eps
1)
Crimping
tool
For type III+
and matching female
For CI2
0-539635-1
0-539668-2
0-734372-1
1
1
1)
1)
11
and matching female 1-734387-1 1)
Fig. 8/35 Fig. 8/36

19"-mounting rail C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens 8/34
Short-circuit For current terminals C73334-A1-C33-1 1 Siemens 8/37
12
links For other terminals C73334-A1-C34-1 1 Siemens 8/38
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps

for terminals small C73334-A1-C32-1 1 Siemens 13
Fig. 8/37 Fig. 8/38
Short-circuit link
for current contacts
Short-circuit link
for voltage contacts/
14
15
Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14

Connection diagram
Fig. 8/40a
7
Separation of common circuit of fast BO1 to BO5
with jumpers X80, X81, X82. Switching
of fast BO7, BO8 as NO contact or NC contact
with jumpers X41, X42, X43. 8
10
11
12
13
14
1) Configuration of binary outputs up to hardware-version .../CC
For advanced flexibility see Fig. 8/40a.
Fig. 8/40 Connection diagram 7UT613 15

Connection diagram
7 Fig. 8/41a
Separation of common circuit of
fast BO1 to BO5 with jumpers X80,
X81, X82. Switching of fast BO7,
8 BO8 as NO contact or NC contact
with jumpers X41, X42, X43
10
11
12
13
1) Configuration of binary outputs up to
14 hardware-version .../CC
For advanced flexibility see Fig. 8/41a.
2) High-speed contacts (option), NO only
3) High-speed contacts (option)
15 Fig. 8/41 Connection diagram 7UT63

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14
1) High-speed contacts (option), NO only
2) High-speed contacts (option)
Fig. 8/42 Connection diagram 7UT635 part 1; continued on following page 15

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 8/43 Connection diagram 7UT635 part 2

Busbar Differential Protection
Page
SIPROTEC 7SS52 distributed numerical busbar

and breaker failure protection 9/3
9
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Busbar Differential Protection / 7SS52
SIPROTEC 7SS52 distributed numerical busbar and breaker failure protection
Function overview
Busbar protection functions 1

• Busbar differential protection
• Selective zone tripping
• Very short tripping time (<15 ms)
• Extreme stability against external fault,
2
short saturation-free time (≥ 2 ms)
• Phase-segregated measuring systems
• Integrated check zone 3
• 48 bays can be configured
• 12 busbar sections can be protected
LSP2392-afpen.tif
• Bay-selective intertripping 4
Breaker failure protection functions
• Breaker failure protection (single-phase
with/without current)
• 5 operation modes, selectable per bay
5
• Separate parameterization possible for
busbar and line faults
Fig. 9/1 SIPROTEC 7SS52 busbar protection system
• Independently settable delay times for
all operation modes
6
• 2-stage operation bay trip repeat/trip busbar
Description
• Intertrip facility (via teleprotection interface)
The SIPROTEC 7SS52 numerical protection is a selective, reliable • “Low-current” mode using the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts 7
and fast protection for busbar faults and breaker failure in
medium, high and extra-high voltage substations with various Additional protection functions
possible busbar configurations. • End-fault protection with intertrip or bus zone trip
The protection is suitable for all switchgear types with iron-core • Backup overcurrent protection per bay unit (definite-time or 8
or linearized current transformers. The short tripping time is inverse-time)
especially advantageous for applications with high fault levels or • Independent breaker failure protection per bay unit
where fast fault clearance is required for power system stability.
The modular hardware allows the protection to be optimally
Features 9
matched to the busbar configuration. The decentralized arrange- • Distributed or centralized installation
ment allows the cabling costs in the substation to be drastically • Easy expansion capability
reduced. The 7SS52 busbar protection caters for single, double
or triple busbar systems with or without and quadruple busbar
• Integrated commissioning aids
• Centralized user-friendly configuration / parameterization
10
systems without transfer bus with up to: 48 bays,
with DIGSI
16 bus couplers, and 24 sectionalizing disconnectors and 12 • Universal hardware
busbar sections.
11
• FO interface
– IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
• Electrical interface
– IEC 61850 protocol with EN 100 module (firmware V4.6)
12
13
14
15
Application
Application
1 The 7SS52 distributed numerical busbar

and breaker failure protection system is
a selective, reliable and fast protection
for busbar faults and breaker failure in
2 medium, high and extra-high voltage
substations with various possible busbar
configurations. The protection is suitable
for all switchgear types with iron-core or
3 linearized current transformers. The short
tripping time is especially advantageous
for applications with high fault levels or
where fast fault clearance is required for
LSA2180-bgpen.eps
power system stability.
4 The modular hardware design allows
the protection system to be optimally
matched to the busbar configuration.
5 The distributed arrangement allows the
cabling costs between bay and substation
to be drastically reduced. The 7SS52 bus-
bar protection caters for single, double,
6 triple and quadruple busbar systems with
or without transfer bus with up to:
– 48 bays
– 16 bus couplers
7 – 24 sectionalizing disconnectors
– 12 busbar sections
1) Feeder currents, disconnector status trip commands
2) Disconnector status
8 Fig. 9/2 Distributed system structure
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 9/3 Protection functions of the central unit and the bay units
15
Construction
Construction
The distributed bay units measure the 1

3 phase currents in each bay. The rated
input current is 1 or 5 A and therefore
eliminates the need for interposing
current transformers. The disconnector
status, breaker failure protection trig-
2
LSP2377-afpen.tif
gering, bay out-of- service and other
bay status information is derived via
marshallable binary inputs in the bay
units. The complete information exchange
3
is conveyed to the central unit via a fiber-
optic interface. The bay unit also has an
interface on the front side for connection
to a PC for operation and diagnosis. The 4
trip and intertrip commands are issued via Fig. 9/4 7SS522 central unit – front view of SIPAC subrack version
trip contacts in the bay units. The 7XP20
standard housing is available in a flush or
surface mounting version (7SS523). 5
The central unit is connected to the bay
units via fiber-optic communication links.
The connection is built up in a star con-
figuration. The central unit also contains 6
serial ports for system configuration via
PC or communication with a substation
control system, an integrated LC Display
7
LSP2803.tif
with keypad and marshallable binary
inputs, LEDs and alarm relays. The central
unit is available in a 19" SIPAC module
rack version for either cubicle or wall
mounting.
8
Because of its modular hardware design,
it is easy to adapt the central unit to the
substation or to expand it with further Fig. 9/5 7SS522 central unit – rear view
modules each being connected with up to
8 bay units.
9
Each bay unit and the central unit has its
own internal power supply.
10
11
LSP2076-afp.tif
LSP2516.tif
12
Fig. 9/6 7SS523 bay unit – front view of

panel / flush / cubicle mounting unit
Fig. 9/7 7SS525 bay unit – front view of
panel/flush/cubicle mounting unit
13
14
15
1 Busbar protection
The main function of the 7SS52 is busbar protection, and has
the following characteristics:
2 • Evaluation of differential currents, with stabilization by

through-currents based on the proven performance of the
Siemens busbar protection 7SS1 and 7SS50/51, currently in
service worldwide
3 • Selective busbar protection for busbars with up to 12 busbar

sections and 48 bays
The pickup characteristic can be set independently for selective busbar
• Integrated “check zone” (evaluation of all busbar section cur- protection, for the “check zone” and for the breaker failure protection.
rents without use of the disconnector replica)
4 • Very short tripping time (15 ms typical)
• Selective detection of short-circuits, also for faults on the
Fig. 9/8 Standard characteristic
transfer bus, with transfer trip to the remote end.

• Detection and clearance of faults between the current trans-
5 former and the circuit-breaker via current measurement and
selective unbalancing.
• Tripping only when all three fault detection modules recognize
a busbar fault (2 measurement processors and check zone
6 processor)
• No special CT requirements (stability is guaranteed, even when
the CTs saturate after 2 ms)
• Selective output tripping relays per feeder in bay units.
7 Mode of operation
The 7SS52 protection relay offers complete numerical measured- Fig. 9/9 Ground-fault characteristic
value processing from sampling to digital conversion of the
8 measured variables through to the circuit-breaker tripping
decision. The bay units dispose of sufficient powerful contacts to Breaker failure protection
directly trip the circuit-breaker. The 7SS52 protection includes an integrated breaker failure
For each busbar section and for all three phases, two indepen- protection with the following features:
9 dent processors execute the protection algorithm on alternate • Five breaker failure protection modes that are selectable:
data samples. Based on the proven performance of the 7SS1 and
1. Following the issue of a trip signal from a feeder protection,
7SS50/51, this method of measurement ensures highest stability
the busbar protection monitors the drop-off of the trip signal.
even in case of high short-circuit currents and CT saturation.
10 In addition, an disconnector status independent check-zone
If the feeder current is not interrupted before a set time delay
the polarity of the feeder current is reversed, which results in
measurement is executed on a further processor thus increasing a differential current in the corresponding section of the bus
the protection against unwanted operation. All three processors protection. For this function, a separate parameter set is used.
must reach a trip decision independently before the trip com-
11 mand is released.
2. Following a trip signal from a feeder protection, a trip signal
will be output after a settable time delay from the 7SS52
The disconnector status is monitored using normally open and protection to the corresponding feeder circuit-breaker. If this
normally closed contacts to enable plausibility checks for both second trip signal is also unsuccessful, the unbalancing proce-
12 status and transition time. The contact monitoring voltage is

also supervised.
dure according to mode 1) as described above will take place.
3. With external stand-alone breaker failure protection, the
In case of an auxiliary voltage failure in the bay, the latest disconnector replica of the 7SS52 may be used to selectively
disconnector status is stored and a bay-selective indication of trip the busbar section with the faulty circuit-breaker.
13 the failure is issued.
4. Following a trip signal from the feeder protection, the 7SS52
The assignment of the feeder currents to the corresponding monitors the drop-off of the trip signal. If, after a settable
busbar systems is controlled by software via the disconnector time, the current does not fall below a settable limiting value,
replica. The disconnector replica is applied for both busbar busbar-selective feeder trip commands are issued with the help
14 protection and breaker failure protection. of the disconnector replica within the 7SS52.
The integrated breaker failure protection function provides 5. Following a trip signal from a feeder protection, a trip
phase-segregated two-stage operation (bay-specific trip repeat, signal will be output after a settable time delay from the
trip bus section). Alternatively, an external breaker failure 7SS52 protection to the corresponding feeder circuit-breaker.
15 protection relay can issue its trip commands via the disconnector
replica in the 7SS52.
If this second trip signal is also unsuccessful, the tripping as
described under 4) will take place.

• For single-pole or multi-pole starting,

delay times are available.
• Breaker failure detection following 1
a busbar fault by comparison of the
measured current with a set value.
• For all modes of breaker failure protec-
tion, a transfer trip command output 2
contact is provided for each feeder to
initiate remote tripping.
Sensitive tripping characteristic

3
In some applications, e.g. within resistive
grounded networks, single-phase short-
circuit currents are limited to rated
current values. In order to provide a
busbar protection for these cases, an
4
independent characteristic is available.
This characteristic presents separate
parameters for the pickup threshold, as
well as for a limitation of efficiency. The 5
activation of the characteristic takes place
LSP2516.tif
by means of a binary input in the central
unit, e.g. by recognizing a displacement
voltage. 6
End-fault protection Fig. 9/10 Fault record
The location of the current transformer
normally limits the measuring range of 7
the busbar protection. When the circuit-
breaker is open, the area located between
the current transformer and the circuit-
breaker can be optimally protected by
means of the end-fault protection. In the
8
event of a fault, depending on the mount-
ing position of the current transformer,
instantaneous and selective tripping of
the busbar section or intertripping of the
9
circuit-breaker at the opposite end occurs.
Backup protection
As an option, a two-stage backup
10
protection, independent of the busbar
protection is included in every bay unit.
This backup protection is completed by
LSP2516.tif
means of a breaker failure protection. The 11

parametrization and operation can be
carried out in the central unit or locally
in each bay unit with the DIGSI operating
program.
Fig. 9/11 DIGSI plant monitoring
12
Disconnector replica • By the assignment “NOT open = closed”, the disconnector is
taken to be CLOSED during the transition time.
The disconnector replica is used for both the busbar protection
and the breaker failure protection.
Accurate matching of the disconnector auxiliary contacts with
the main contact is not required. 13
The following features characterize the disconnector replica • Menu-guided graphic configuration with DIGSI operating
function: program.
• Includes up to 48 bays and 12 busbar sections
• Integrated bi-stable disconnector status characteristic (status
• LEDs in the bay modules indicate the actual status of the
busbar disconnector.
14
stored on loss of auxiliary power). • Dynamic visualization of the substation with DIGSI on the
• Disconnector transition time monitoring. central unit.
15
Tripping command / reset • Phase-segregated trip test including control of feeder circuit-
breaker (by central or bay unit)
1 The tripping output processing for the 7SS52 protection has the
following features: • Removal of a bay from the busbar measurement processing
during feeder service and maintenance via central or bay units
• Bay-selective tripping by bay units (bay out of service)
• Settings provided for overcurrent release of the tripping com- • Blocking of breaker failure protection or tripping command for
2 mand (to enable selective tripping of infeeding circuits only)
• Settable minimum time for the trip command.
testing purposes.
• Disconnector replica freezing (maintenance) with alarm
• Current-dependent reset of the tripping command. indication (”Disconnector switching prohibition”).
• Cyclic tests of measured-value acquisition and processing and
3 Disturbance recording
trip circuit tests including coils of the command relays.
The digitized measured values from the phase currents and the
differential and stabilizing currents of the busbar sections and Event recording
check zone are stored following a trip decision by the 7SS52 or
4 following an external initiation via a binary input. Pre-trigger
and post-fault times with regard of the trip command can be
The 7SS52 protection provides complete data for analysis of
protection performance following a trip or any other abnormal
condition and for monitoring the state of the relay during
set. Up to 8 fault recordings are stored in the 7SS52. The fault normal service.
records may be input to a PC connected to the central unit, using
5 the menu-guided DIGSI operating program. Then, the SIGRA
graphics program makes it possible to easily analyze the fault
Up to 200 operational events and 80 fault annunciations with a
resolution of one millisecond may be stored in two independent
recordings. buffers:
• Operational indications
Marshallable tripping relays, binary inputs, alarm relays and
6 LEDs
This group includes plant/substation operation events, for
example disconnector switching, disconnector status discrep-
The bay units are equipped with marshallable command relays ancies (transition time limit exceeded, loss of auxiliary voltage,
for direct circuit-breaker tripping. For each bay there are 9 etc.) or event/alarm indications
7 (7SS523) or 8 (7SS525) duty contacts available.

For user-specific output and indication of events, 16 alarm relays
• Tripping following a busbar short-circuit fault or circuit-breaker
failure.
and 32 LEDs in the central unit are freely marshallable. Settings
Several individual alarms may be grouped together.
8 The central unit has marshallable binary inputs with:
A PC can be connected to the operator interface located at the
front panel or the rear of the central unit. An operating program
is available for convenient and clear setting, fault recording
• Reset of LED display
and evaluation as well as for commissioning. All settings of
• Time synchronization the busbar or breaker failure protection, as well as settings of
9 • Blocking of protection functions additional functions such as backup protection, need only be
parameterized at the central unit. Settings at the bay units are
The bay units have marshallable binary inputs:
not necessary.
• Disconnector status closed/open With the help of the integrated keypad and display on the central
10 • Phase-segregated start of circuit-breaker failure protection unit, all setting parameters may be read out.
Keypad, display (7SS523) and the front side interface of the bay
• Release of circuit-breaker failure protection
units serve for commissioning, display of operational values and
• Release of TRIP command
diagnosis.
11 • Circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts
• Bay out of service
All parameters are written into nonvolatile memories to ensure
that they are retained even during loss of auxiliary voltage.
• Test of circuit-breaker tripping
Configuration, visualization
12 Measurement and monitoring functions

In the 7SS52 protection relay, a variety of measurement and
The configuration of the 7SS52 is effected by means of a
graphics-orientated editor included in the DIGSI operation
monitoring functions is provided for commissioning and mainte- program. For frequently used bay types, a symbol library is
nance. These functions include: available. Enhancements can be easily effected anytime.
13 • Measurement and display of the phase currents of the feeders

in the central unit and bay units.
A graphical configuration visualizes the states of the disconnec-
tor position, the circuit-breaker and measuring values.
• Measurement and display (on the integrated LCD or PC) of the
Self-monitoring
differential and stabilizing currents of all measuring systems in
14 the central unit and the bay units. Hardware and software are continuously monitored and any
irregularity is immediately detected and alarmed. The self-
• Monitoring of busbar-selective and phase-segregated differen-
tial currents with busbar-selective blocking / alarming monitoring feature improves both the reliability and the avail-
ability of the 7SS52. The following quantities are monitored:
• Monitoring of the differential currents of the check zone with
15 alarming / blocking • The current transformer circuits
• The analog-to-digital conversion

Protection functions, communication
• All internal supply voltages Communication

• The program memory
• The program running times by a watch dog function Serial communication 1
• The disconnector status With respect to communication, particular emphasis is placed on
• The three channel tripping circuit the customer requirements in energy automation:
Maximum lifetime and reliability

originates.
2
The hardware of the 7SS52 units is guaranteed by more than • Already during the process of communication, information
20 years of experience in numerical protection design at is assigned to the cause thereof (e.g. assignment of the indica-
Siemens. The number of components employed is reduced
through use of a powerful microprocessor in conjunction with
tion "circuit-breaker TRIP" to the corresponding command).
• The communication system automatically handles the transfer
3
highly-integrated components, thus enhancing the reliability. of large data blocks (e.g. fault recordings or parameter data
The experience gained by Siemens in production of over 1 files). The user has access to these features without any
million numerical protection units has been incorporated in the
software design. The most modern manufacturing methods
4
together with effective quality control ensure high reliability and Local and remote communication
a long service life.
The 7SS52 central unit provides several serial communication
Battery monitoring interfaces for various tasks:
• Front interface for connecting a PC
5
The internal battery is used to back-up the clock and memory
for storage of switching statistics, status and fault indications • Rear-side service interface (always provided) for connection to
and fault recording, in the event of a power supply failure. The a PC, either directly or via a modern
processor checks its capacity at regular intervals. If the capacity
of the battery is found to be declining, an alarm is generated.
• System interface for connecting to a control system via 6
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
Routine replacement is therefore not necessary. All setting • System interface (EN 100 module) for connecting to a control
parameters are stored in the Flash-EPROM, and therefore not lost system via IEC 61850 protocol
if the power supply or the battery fails.
• Time synchronization via IRIG-B / DCF / system interface 7
Functions for testing and commissioning
Serial front interface (central unit and bay units)
The 7SS52 offers auxiliary functions for commissioning. The
physical status of all binary inputs and output relays of the
central unit can be displayed and directly altered to facilitate
There is a serial RS232 interface on the front of all the units.
All of the unit's functions can be set on a PC by means of the 8
testing. DIGSI 4 protection operation program. Commissioning tools and
fault analysis are also built into the program and are available
All measured values can be clearly depicted by means of DIGSI through this interface.
and simultaneously displayed in different windows as primary or
percentage values. Rear-mounted interfaces (central unit only)
9
The 7SS52 units are provided with a circuit-breaker test A number of communication modules suitable for various appli-
function. Single-pole and three-pole TRIP commands can be cations can be fitted in the rear of the flush-mounting housing.
issued. The interface modules support the following applications: 10
Data transmission lockout The service interface was conceived for remote access to a
Data transmission lockout can be activated, so as to prevent number of protection units via DIGSI. It can be an electrical
transfer of information to the control center during work on a RS232/RS85 or an optical interface. 11
circuit bay. • RS485 bus
With this data transmission via copper conductors, electro-
Test mode magnetic fault influences are largely eliminated by the use of
During commissioning, a test mode can be selected; all twisted-pair conductors. Upon failure of a unit, the remaining
12
indications then have a test mode suffix for transmission to the
control system.
System interface
through this interface. Radial or ring type station bus topolo-
13
Furthermore, the units can exchange data through this interface
via Ethernet and IEC 61850 protocol and can also be operated by
DIGSI.
14
15
Communication
IEC 61850 protocol (retrofittable)
1 The Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol

is the worldwide standard for protection
and control systems used by power supply
corporations. By means of this protocol,
information can also be exchanged
2 directly between protection units so as
to set up simple masterless systems for
bay and system interlocking. Access to
the units via the Ethernet bus will also be
3 possible with DIGSI.

The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is an inter-
4 national standard for the transmission of
protective data and fault recordings. All
messages from the unit and also control
commands can be transferred by means
5 of published, Siemens-specific extensions

to the protocol.
6 The battery-backed clock of the 7SS52

central unit can be synchronized via: Fig. 9/12 Communication structure with DIGSI and IEC 60870-5-103
• DCF 77 signal via time synchronization
receiver
7 • IRIG-B satellite signal via time synchroni-

zation receiver
• Minute-pulse via binary input
• System interface by the substation
8 control, e.g. SICAM
Date and time with milliseconds resolu-
tion is assigned to every indication. The
synchronization of the 7SS52 bay units
9 is automatically effected with the central
unit.
10
11
Fig. 9/13 Communication structure for station bus with Ethernet and IEC 61850, FO ring
12
13
14
15
Technical data
General unit data LEDs

Input circuits
Rated current IN 1 or 5 A
Central unit
Operation
indication
Green 1 1
Rated frequency fN 50/60 Hz Device failure Red 1
Thermal overload Continuous 4 x IN Marshallable Red 32
capability in current 10 s
path 1s
10 x IN
100 x IN
Bay unit
Operation Green 1 2
Dynamic overload 250 x IN indication
capability Device failure Red 1
Burden of At IN = 1 A < 0.1 VA Indications Green 5 (7SS523)/– (7SS525)
current inputs
Auxiliary voltage
At IN = 5 A < 0.2 VA
Control, displays
Red 11 (7SS523)/1 (7SS525)
3
Rated auxiliary Central unit DC 48 V to 250 V Central unit
voltage Vaux LC Display 4 lines x 20 characters
Rated auxiliary
voltage Vaux
Bay unit DC 48 V to 250 V
Membrane keyboard
Bay unit (7SS523)
24 keys
4
LC Display 4 lines x 16 characters
Permissible tolerance Vaux –20 to +20 % Membrane keyboard 12 keys
Maximum ripple ≤ 15 %
Unit design (degree of protection according to EN 60529)
Power consumption
Central unit Quiescent
Configuration dependent
35 to 55 W
Central unit
Cubicle IP 54
5
Energized < 70 W Housing for wall mounting IP 55
Bay unit 7SS523 7SS525 SIPAC subrack IP 20
Quiescent
Energized
12 W
16 W
10 W
14 W
Bay unit
Housing
7SS523
IP 51
7SS525
IP 20
6
Max. bridging time during > 50 ms at Vaux ≥ 60 V Terminals IP 21
loss of voltage supply Weight at max. configuration
Central unit
Binary inputs
7SS523 7SS525
SIPAC subrack
14.3 kg
43.0 kg
7
Number of Bay unit 20 10
Bay unit 7SS523 7SS525
binary inputs Central unit 12
Flush mounting 8.1 kg 5.5 kg
Voltage range
Current consumption
DC 24 to 250 V
Approx. 1.5 mA/input
Surface mounting 11.8 kg
8
Alarm/event contacts
Central unit
Number of
relays
Marshallable
Fixed
16 (each 1 NO contact)
1 (2 NC contacts)
9
Switching capacity Make/Break 20 W/VA
Switching voltage AC/DC 250 V
Permissible current
Bay unit
1A
7SS523 7SS525
10
Number of Marshallable 1 (1 NO contact) 1 (1 NO contact)
relays Fixed 1 (2 NC contacts) 1 (1 NC contacts)
Switching capacity Make/Break
20 W/VA
AC/DC 250 V
11
Permissible current 1 A 1A
Command contacts
Number of relays (bay unit) 7SS523
4 (each 2 NO
7SS525
3 (each 2 NO
12
contacts) contacts)
1 (1 NO contact) 2 (1 NO contact)
Switching capacity Make
Break
1000 W/VA
30 W/VA 13
Permissible Continuous 5A
current 0.5 s 30 A
14
15
Technical data
Electrical tests Mechanical stress tests
1 Specification
Standards IEC 60255-5, DIN 57435 part 303
Specification
Standards IEC 60255-21-1, IEC 6068-2
High-voltage test (routine test), 2 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz Permissible mechanical stress
except DC voltage supply input During service 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm amplitude
60 to 500 Hz, 0.5 g acceleration
2 High-voltage test (routine test),
only DC voltage supply input
DC 2.8 kV
During transport 5 to 8 Hz, 7.5 mm amplitude
8 to 500 Hz, 2 g acceleration
Impulse voltage test (type test), 5 kV (peak), 1.2/50 µs, 0.5 J,
all circuits, class III 3 positive and 3 negative impulses
at intervals of 5 s Climatic stress tests
3 EMC tests for interference immunity; type test
Standards IEC 60255-6, IEC 60255-22
Temperatures
Standard IEC 60255-6
(international product standard),
Permissible ambient temperature
EN 50082-2 (European generic
– In service –10 °C to +55 °C (bay unit)
4 standard for industrial environ-
ment),
VDE 0435 part 303
– For storage
– 5 °C to +55 °C (central unit)
–25 °C to +70 °C
– During transport –25 °C to +70 °C
(German product standard)
– During start-up –10 °C to +55 °C (bay unit)
High-frequency test with 1 MHz 2.5 kV (peak), 1 MHz, τ = 15 µs, 0 °C to +55 °C (central unit)
5 interference
400 surges/s, duration 2 s
Humidity
VDE 0435 part 303, class III Standards IEC 60068-2-3
Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge, It is recommended to arrange the Annual average 75 % relative
IEC 60255-22-2, class IV and 15 kV air discharge, both polarities, units in such a way that they are humidity; on 56 days a year up to
6 IEC 61000-4-2, class IV
150 pF, Ri = 330 Ω
10 V/m, 27 to 500 MHz
condensation not permissible!
field, non-modulated that could cause condensation.
7 Irradiation with radio-frequency

10 V/m, 80 to 1000 MHz,
AM 80 %, 1 kHz
Irradiation with radio-frequency 10 V/m, 900 MHz, repetition
field, pulse-modulated rate 200 Hz, duty cycle 50 %
8 ENV 50204, class III
Fast transients interference/bursts 4 kV, 5/50 ns, 5 kHz,
IEC 60255-22-4, class IV; burst length = 15 ms,
IEC 61000-4-4, class IV; repetition rate 300 ms, both polari-
IEC 60801-4 ties, Ri = 50 Ω, duration 1 min
9 Line-conducted disturbances
induced by radio-frequency fields,
10 V, 150 kHz to 80 MHz,
AM 80 %, 1 kHz
amplitude-modulated
10 Power frequency magnetic field

IEC 61000-4-8, class IV;
30 A/m continuous,
300 A/m for 3 s, 50 Hz
IEC 60255-6 0.5 mT; 50 Hz
EMC tests for interference emission; type test
11 Standard EN 50081-2
(European generic standard for
industrial environment)
Conducted interference voltage, 150 kHz to 30 MHz, limit class B
auxiliary voltage
12 CISPR 11, EN 55011
and VDE 0875 part 11
Radio interference field strength 30 to 1000 MHz, limit class B
CISPR 11, EN 55011
and VDE 0875 part 11
13
14



7SS522 distributed busbar/breaker failure protection
Central unit
7SS52 0- - A0-
1
Central unit 50/60 Hz 2
Rated auxiliary voltage
DC 48 to 250 V 6 2
Unit design
In subrack ES902C A
Regional presettings/regional functions and languages 3
Region DE, language German (language can be selected) A
Region World, language English (UK) (language can be selected) B
Region US, language English (US) (language can be selected)
Region FR, language French (language can be selected)
C
D
4
Region World, language Spanish (language can be selected) E
Region World, language Italian (language can be selected) F
Region World, language Russian (language can be selected)
System interface
G
5
Without 0
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connector
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, with integrated switch optical, double
9 L 0 R
L 0 S
6
9
Service interface (on rear of relay)
DIGSI 4 / modem, electrical RS232
1
2
7
DIGSI 4 / modem, optical 820 nm, ST connector 3
Additional functions
without 1
with cross stabilisation
1 8
2
Equipped for
8 bays
16 bays
A
B
9
24 bays C
32 bays D
40 bays
48 bays
E
F
10
7SS523 distributed busbar / breaker failure protection 7SS52 - A01- AA1
Bay unit, frequency, housing, binary inputs and outputs
Bay unit, 50/60 Hz, housing ½ x 19", 20 BI, 6 BO, 2 live status contacts 3 11
Rated current
1A 1
5A
Rated auxiliary voltage

5
12
DC 48 to 250 V 5
Unit design
7XP2040-2 for flush mounting or cubicle mounting C
13
7XP2040-1 for surface mounting D
7XP2040-2 for flush mounting without glass cover E
Without additional functions
14
0
With overcurrent-time protection 1
15
1 7SS523 distributed busbar/breaker failure protection

Bay unit, frequency 50/60 Hz;
Housing 1/3 x 19"; 10 BI, 6 BO, 1 live status contact
7SS525 - A 01- AA1
Rated current
2 1A
5A
1
5
Rated auxiliary voltage at converter
DC 48 to 250 V 5
3 Unit design
7XP2040-2 for panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting without glass cover F
4 Without additional functions

With overcurrent-time protection
0
1
5
6 Connection cable
Cable between PC/notebook (9-pin connector) and protection relay
(9-pin connector)
7 Manual 7SS52 V4.7/V3.3

English C53000-G1176-C182-5
10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 9/14 Connection diagram 7SS522

15
Connection diagram
5 Live
contact
10
LSA2949-bgpen.eps
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 9/15 Connection diagram 7SS523

Connection diagram
4
Live
contact
5
8
LSA4164-ben.eps
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 9/16 Connection diagram 7SS525

15
10
11
12
13
14
15
Relays for Various
Protection Applications Page
SIPROTEC 7VK61 breaker management relay 10/3
10
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Relays for Various Protection Applications / 7VK61
SIPROTEC 7VK61 breaker management relay
Function overview
25
79
50BF
• Single and/or three-pole auto-reclosure
59 • Synchro-check with live/dead line/bus measurement
27 • Closing under asynchronous conditions
(consideration of CB operating time)
2
86 74TC • Circuit-breaker failure protection with two stages
(single and three-pole with/without current)
• End-fault protection 3
• Pole-discrepancy protection
LSP2458-afp.tif
• Overvoltage/undervoltage protection
Control function 4
• Commands for control of CB and isolators
• Operational measured values 5
Fig. 10/1 SIPROTEC 7VK61 breaker management relay
• Event buffer and fault protocols
• Oscillographic fault recording
• Monitoring of CB auxiliary contacts
6
Description • Switching statistics
The SIPROTEC 4 breaker management relay 7VK61 is a highly

flexible auto-reclosure, synchro-check and circuit-breaker failure
Features
• All functions can be used separately
7
protection unit. • Initiation/start by phase-segregated or 3-pole trip commands
This unit is used for the single and three-pole auto-reclosure of • Auto-reclosure for max. 8 reclose cycles
a circuit-breaker, after this circuit-breaker has tripped due to a
fault. The synchro-check function ensures that the two circuits
• Evolving/sequential trip recognition 8
• Auto-reclosure with ADT, DLC, RDT
being reconnected by closing the circuit-breaker are within
a defined safe operating state before the CLOSE command is • Synchro-check with ∆V, ∆φ, ∆f measurement
issued. • Breaker failure protection with highly secure 2-out-of-4 current
check detectors
9
The 7VK61 is also applicable as circuit-breaker failure protec-
tion. A breaker failure occurs when the circuit-breaker fails to • Breaker failure protection with short reset time and negligible
correctly open and clear the fault after single or three-pole overshoot time
trip commands have been issued by the protection. It is then
necessary to trip the relevant busbar zone (section) to ensure
CommunicatIon interfaces 10
fault clearance. Together with the above-mentioned protection • Front interface for connecting a PC
functions, the following additional functions of the 7VK61 can • System interface for connecting to a control system via various
be applied: end-fault protection, pole-discrepancy protection,
overvoltage protection and undervoltage protection. As a mem-
protocols
11
ber of the numerical SIPROTEC 4 relay family, it also provides – IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
control and monitoring functions and therefore supports the – PROFIBUS DP
user with regard to a cost-effective power system management. – DNP 3
• Rear-side service/modem interface
12
• Time synchronization via
– IRIG-B or DCF77 or system interface
13
14
15
Application
Application
1 The 7VK61 provides highly flexible

breaker management. It applies to single-
breaker, ring-bus, and 1½ breaker instal-
lations. The auto-reclosure, synchronism-
2 check, breaker failure protection and
voltage protection functions can be used
separately or combined. Therefore the
current and voltage transformer con-
3 nection can be selected according to the
required application.
The auto-reclosure function closes the
circuit-breaker after this circuit-breaker
4 has tripped due to a fault. The check-
synchronism function ensures that the
two circuits being reconnected by closing
the circuit-breaker are within a defined
5 safe operating state before the CLOSE
command is issued.
The numerical 7VK61 relay provides
rapid backup fault clearance in case the
6 circuit-breaker nearest to the fault fails to
respond to a TRIP command. It is suitable
for power systems of all voltage levels Fig. 10/2 Application and function diagram
with single and/or three-pole circuit-
7 breaker operation. The initiation signal

can be issued from any protection or supervision equipment. If the requirements for protection, control and interlocking
change, it is possible in the majority of cases to implement such
Information from the circuit-breaker auxiliary contact is only
required for the breaker failure protection during faults which changes by means of parameterization using DIGSI 4 without
produce little or no fault current flow, for instance due to a trip having to change the hardware.
8 from the power transformer Buchholz protection. The use of powerful microcontrollers and the application of
digital measured-value conditioning and processing largely sup-
Cost-effective power system management presses the influence of higher-frequency transients, harmonics
and DC components.
The SIPROTEC 4 units are numerical relays which also provide
9 control and monitoring functions and therefore support the
ANSI Protection functions
user with regard to a cost-effective power system management.
The security and reliability of the power supply is increased as a 50BF Breaker-failure protection
result of minimizing the use of hardware.
10 The local operation has been designed according to ergonomic
59/27 Overvoltage/undervoltage protection
criteria. Large, easy-to-read backlit displays are provided. 25 Synchro-check
The SIPROTEC 4 units have a uniform design and a degree of 79 Auto-reclosure
11 functionality which represents a benchmark-level of perfor-

mance in protection and control. 74TC Trip circuit supervision
86 Lockout (CLOSE command interlocking)
12
13
14
15
Construction
Construction
Connection technique and housing 1

⅓ and ½-rack sizes are available as hous-
ing widths of the SIPROTEC 7VK61 relays,
referred to a 19" modular frame system. 2
This means that previous models can
always be replaced. The height is a uni-
form 255 mm for flush-mounting hous-
LSP2174-afp.tif
3
LSP2166-afp.tif
ings and 266 mm for surface-mounting
housings for all housing widths. All cables
can be connected with or without ring
lugs.
In the case of surface mounting on a 4
panel, the connection terminals are
located above and below the housing in Fig. 10/3 Flush-mounting housing with Fig. 10/4 Rear view of flush-mounting
the form of screw-type terminals. The screw-type terminals housing with covered connection
communication interfaces are located in a
terminals andwirings 5
housing.
7
LSP2219-afp.eps
LSP2237-afp.tif
9
screw-type terminals, example
7SA63
sloped case in a surface-mounting
housing 10
11
12
13
14
15
1 Auto-reclosure (ANSI 79)

The 7VK61 relay is equipped with an
auto-reclose function (AR). Usually the
2 auto-reclosure interacts with the feeder

protection via binary inputs and outputs.
The function includes several operating
modes:
3 • 3-pole auto-reclosure for all types of
faults; different dead times are available
depending on the type of fault
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults,
4 no reclosing for multi-phase faults
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase and
3-pole auto-reclosing for multi-phase
faults
5 • Multiple-shot auto-reclosure
• Interaction with the internal or an Fig. 10/7 Auto-reclosure and synchro-check with voltage measurement
external synchro-check across a power transformer
6 • Monitoring of the circuit-breaker

auxiliary contacts. Synchro-check (ANSI 25)
In addition to the above-mentioned operating modes, several Where two network sections are switched in by control com-
other operating principles can be employed by means of the mand or following a 3-pole auto-reclosure, it must be ensured
7 integrated programmable logic (CFC). that both network sections are mutually synchronous. For
this purpose, a synchronism-check function is provided. After
The 7VK61 allows the line-side voltages to be evaluated.
A number of voltage-dependent supplementary functions are verification of the network synchronism, the function releases
thus available: the CLOSE command. Consideration of the duration of the CB
8 • ADT
operating time before issuing the CLOSE command (especially
important under asynchronous conditions and when several
circuit-breakers with different operating times are to be oper-
at the remote station was successful (reduction of stress on ated by one single relay).
equipment).
9 • DLC
By means of dead-line check, reclosure is effected only when
In addition, reclosing can be enabled for different criteria, e.g.,
when the busbar or line are not carrying a voltage (dead line or
the line is deenergized (prevention of asynchronous breaker dead bus).
closure in case that the synchronism check can not be used).
10 • RDT
Reduced dead time is employed in conjunction with auto- The 7VK61 relay incorporates a two-stage circuit-breaker failure
reclosure where no teleprotection method is employed: protection to detect failures of tripping command execution, for
when faults within the zone extension of a distance feeder example due to a defective circuit-breaker. The current detection
11 protection but external to the protected line, are switched off

for rapid auto-reclosure (RAR), the RDT function decides on the
logic is phase-segregated and can therefore also be used in
single-pole tripping schemes.
basis of measurement of the return voltage from the remote If the fault current is not interrupted after a settable time delay
station which has not tripped, that the fault has been cleared has expired, a retrip command or the busbar trip command will
12 by the protection on the faulted downstream feeder and that
reclosure with reduced dead time may take place.
be generated. The breaker failure protection will usually be initi-
ated by external feeder protection relays via binary input signals.
Trip signals from the internal auto-reclosure logic or from the
voltage protection can start the breaker failure protection as
well.
13
14
15

(ANSI 59, 27)
The 7VK61 contains a number of overvoltage measuring 1
elements. Each measuring element is of two-stage design.
The following measuring elements are available:
2
• Zero-sequence overvoltage
The zero-sequence voltage can be connected to the 4th voltage
input (not in conjunction with syncho-check) or be derived
from the phase voltages.
3
Fig. 10/8 End-fault between circuit-breaker and current transformer
either at the local circuit-breaker or at the remote station by
means of a transmitted signal. Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC)
4
The 7VK61 is fitted, in addition, with three two-stage undervolt- One or two binary inputs for each circuit-breaker pole can be
age measuring elements: used for monitoring the circuit-breaker trip coils including the
• Phase-to-ground undervoltage connecting cables. An alarm signal is issued whenever the circuit 5
is interrupted. The trip circuit supervision function requires one
• Phase-to-phase undervoltage
or two independent potential-free binary inputs per trip circuit.
• Positive-sequence undervoltage To make existing (non potential-free) binary inputs potential-
The undervoltage measuring elements can be blocked by means free, external optocoupler modules can be applied. 6
of a minimum current criterion and by means of binary inputs.
Lockout (ANSI 86)
End-fault protection Under certain operating conditions, it is advisable to block
When the circuit-breaker is open, the area located between the CLOSE commands after a final TRIP command of the relay has
been issued. Only a manual ‘Reset’ command unblocks the
7
current transformer and the circuit-breaker can be optimally
protected by means of the end-fault protection. In the event CLOSE command. The 7VK61 is equipped with such an interlock-
of a fault, an independently settable time delay is started after ing logic.
a valid initiation has been received and the circuit-breaker
auxiliary contacts indicate an open circuit-breaker position, with
current still flowing (see Fig. 10/8). Depending on the mounting The 7VK61 relay provides comprehensive monitoring functions
position of the current transformer, instantaneous tripping of covering both hardware and software. Furthermore, the mea-
the busbar section or intertripping of the circuit-breaker at the
opposite end occurs.
sured values are continuously checked for plausibility. Therefore
the current and voltage transformers are also included in this
9
monitoring system.
Pole-discrepancy protection
If all voltages are connected, the relay will detect secondary
This function ensures that any one or two poles of a circuit-
breaker do not remain open for longer than an independently
voltage interruptions by means of the integrated fuse failure
monitor. Immediate alarm and blocking of the synchronism
10
settable time (i.e. unsymmetrical conditions). This time stage check and dead line check is provided for all types of secondary
is initiated when current (above the set value) is flowing in any voltage failures. Additional measurement supervision functions
1 or 2 phases, but not in all 3 phases. Additionally, the circuit-
breaker auxiliary contacts (if connected) are interrogated and
are
• Symmetry of voltages and currents (in case of appropriate
11
must show the same condition as the current measurement.
transformer connection)
Should this time delay expire, then a three-pole trip command
is issued. This function is normally used when single-pole auto- • Broken-conductor supervision (if current transformers are
reclosing is applied. connected) 12
• Summation of currents and voltages (in case of appropriate
transformer connection)
• Phase-sequence supervision (if three voltage transformers are
connected) 13
14
15
Communication
Communication

originates.
2 • Already during the process of communication, information is
assigned to the cause thereof (e.g. assignment of the indica-
tion “circuit-breaker TRIP” to the corresponding command).


ing data telegram is initially acknowledged by the unit which
will execute the command. After the release and execution of Fig. 10/9 IEC 60870-5-103 star-type RS232 copper conductor
the command a feedback signal is generated. At every stage connection or fiber-optic connection
of the control command execution particular conditions are
5 checked. If these are not satisfied, command execution may be
terminated in a controlled manner.
The units offer a high degree of flexibility by supporting differ-
ent standards for connection to industrial and power automation
6 systems. By means of the communication modules, on which
the protocols run, exchange and retrofit is possible. Therefore,
the units will also in future allow for optimal adaptation to
changing communication infrastructure such as the application
7 of Ethernet networks (which will also be used increasingly in the
power supply sector in the years to come).
Local PC interface
8 The serial RS232 PC interface accessible from the front of the

geous during commissioning.
9 Service/modem interface
Fig. 10/10 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and IEC 61850
7VK61 units are always fitted with a rear-side hardwired service with fiber-optic ring
interface, optionally as RS232 or RS485. In addition to the
10 front-side operator interface, a PC can be connected here either
directly or via a modem.
Time synchronization interface entire SIPROTEC 4 unit range. These ensure that, where different
communication protocols (IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103, PROFIBUS,
DNP, etc.) are required, such demands can be met. For fiber-optic
communication, no external converter is required for SIPROTEC 4.
Reliable bus architecture IEC 61850 protocol
12 • RS485 bus
With this data transmission via copper conductors, electro-
dard for protection and control systems used by power supply
this Standard. By means of this protocol, information can also
The fiber-optic double ring circuit is immune to electromag- the units via the Ethernet bus is also be possible with DIGSI.
units, the communication system continues to operate without IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
14 disturbance. It is usually impossible to communicate with a
IEC 60870-5-103 is an internationally standardized protocol for
unit that has failed. Should a unit fail, there is no effect on the
communication with the rest of the system. efficient communication with protection relays. IEC 60870-5-103
is supported by a number of protection device manufacturers
15 and is used worldwide. Supplements for the control function are

defined in the manufacturer-specific part of this standard.

Communication
PROFIBUS DP
LSP2163-afpen.tif
LSP2162-afpen.tif
PROFIBUS DP is an industrial communica-
tions standard and is supported by a 1
number of PLC and protection device
manufacturers.
DNP 3.0 2
protocol. SIPROTEC 4 units are Level 1 and 3
Level 2 compatible.
System solutions for protection and Fig. 10/11 820 nm fiber-optic communication Fig. 10/12 RS232/RS485 electrical
module communication module
station control
4
Together with the SICAM power automa-
tion system, SIPROTEC 4 can be used with
RS485 bus, or interference-free via the
5
LSP3.01-0021.tif
Units equipped with IEC 60870-5-103
interfaces can be connected to SICAM in
parallel via the RS485 bus or connected 6
in star by fiber- optic link. Through this
interface, the system is open for the con-
nection of units of other manufacturers
(see Fig. 10/14). 7
into systems of other manufacturers or in
SIMATIC. Electrical RS485 or optical inter-
Fig. 10/13 Fiber-optic Ethernet communication module for IEC 61850
with integrated Ethernet switch 8
faces are available. The optimum physical
data transfer medium can be chosen
thanks to opto-electrical converters. Thus,
the RS485 bus allows low-cost wiring 9
in the cubicles and an interference-free
optical connection to the master can be
established.
For IEC 61850, an interoperable system 10
solution is offered with SICAM PAS.
Via the 100 Mbits/s Ethernet bus, the
units are linked with PAS electrically or
optically to the station PC. The interface
is standardized, thus also enabling direct
11
connection of units of other manufactur-
ers to the Ethernet bus.
With IEC 61850, however, the units can 12
also be used in other manufacturers’
systems. Units with an IEC 60870-5-103
interface are connected with PAS via the
Ethernet station bus by means of serial/
Ethernet converters. DIGSI can also be
13
used via the same station bus.
14
15
Typical connection
Typical connection
1 Connection for current and voltage

transformers
With the transformer connection as shown
2 in Fig. 10/15, it is possible to use the

complete scope of functions of 7VK61, i.e.
breaker failure protection, synchronism-
check with 3-phase dead line check (with
or without auto-reclosure), complete mea-
3 sured value monitoring, voltage protection,
and the complete range of operational
measured values.
5
Fig. 10/15 Complete connection of all current and voltage transformers
6
Alternative: Connection for current
7 transformers only
The connection for current transformers
only provides breaker failure protection and
current operational measured values.
8
10
11 Fig. 10/16 Typical current transformer connection for breaker failure protection
12
13
14
15
Typical connection
Alternative: Connection for two voltage

transformers
In case of a connection for two voltage 1
transformers, synchro-check and two
operational measured voltages, and addi-
tionally synchro-check measured values are
applicable. Dead line check is performed
for the connected line voltage only.
2
Note: Please connect the two voltages
always to the terminals R15/R16 and R13/
R14 with the appropriate polarity. The 3
setting address 106 “Voltage transformer”
must then be set to “single-phase”. The
terminals R17 and R18 must not be con-
nected. 4
The connection of the voltage VL1-L2 as Fig. 10/17 Typical voltage transformer connection for synchro-check
shown in Fig. 10/17 is just an example: with single voltage dead line check
any other of the shown combinations is
possible for synchronization. 5
The two voltage transformer connection
can also be combined with the current
transformer connection according to
Fig. 10/16. 6
10
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data

1 NC/NO contact1)
1 Analog inputs
“Unit ready” contact
(live status contact)
Rated current Inom 1 or 5 A (selectable) Command/indication relay
Rated voltage Vnom 80 to 125 V (selectable) Quantity

7VK610 5 NO contacts,
2 Power consumption
7VK611
NO/NC contact
14 NO contacts, 4 NC/NO contacts1)

Voltage inputs ≤ 0.10 VA Switching capacity
Overload capacity of current circuit Make 1000 W/VA
3 Thermal (r.m.s.) 500 A for 1 s
150 A for 10 s
Break, contacts
Break, contacts
30 VA
40 W
20 A continuous (for resistive load)
Dynamic (peak value) 1250 A (half cycle) Break, contacts
(for τ = L/R ≤ 50 ms) 25 VA
Thermal overload capacity of 230 V continuous
4 voltage circuit Switching voltage
Permissible total current
250 V
Auxiliary voltage
5 A continuous
Rated voltages DC 24, 48 V
DC 60, 125 V Operating time, approx.
5 DC 110, 250 V
and AC 115, 230 V (50/60 Hz)
NO contact
8 ms
8 ms
Fast NO contact 5 ms
Permissible tolerance -20 % to +20 %
LEDs
Superimposed AC voltage ≤ 15 %
6 (peak-to-peak)
Power consumption
Quantity
RUN (green)
ERROR (red)
1
1
Quiescent Approx. 5 W
LED (red),
Energized Approx. 8 W to 14 W, depending
on design
7VK610 7
7 Bridging time during failure of the
auxiliary voltage
7VK611 14
Unit design
For Vaux = 48 V and Vaux ≥ 110 V ≥ 50 ms
For Vaux = 24 V and Vaux = 60 V ≥ 20 ms Housing 7XP20
8 Binary inputs
Quantity
Dimensions Refer to part 14 for dimension
drawings
7VK610 7 Degree of protection acc. to
7VK611 20 EN 60529
Rated voltage range 24 to 250 V, bipolar
9 Pickup threshold DC 19 or 88 V or 176 V, bipolar
Front IP 51
Functions are freely assignable Rear IP 50
Minimum pickup voltage DC 19 or 88 V or 176 V, bipolar For the terminals IP 20 with terminal cover put on
Ranges are settable by means of (3 operating ranges) Weight
⅓ x 19" 5 kg
½ x 19" 6 kg
Input impulse suppression 220 nF coupling capacitance at
⅓ x 19"
11 220 V with a recovery time >60 ms
½ x 19"
9.5 kg
11 kg
12
13
14
15 1) Can be set via jumpers.

Technical data
Electrical tests EMC tests for noise immunity; type tests

Specifications
(SURGE),
Impulse: 1.2/50 µs
1
IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2
VDE 0435 Auxiliary supply Common (longitudinal) mode:
For further standards see 2 kV; 12 Ω; 9 µF
Insulation tests
“Individual tests”
1 kV; 2 Ω; 18 µF 2
Measurement inputs, binary inputs, Common (longitudinal) mode:
Standards IEC 60255-5 and 60870-2-1 2 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF
Voltage test (100 % test) binary output relays Differential (transversal) mode:
2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz
Line-conducted HF, amplitude-
1 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF
10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM;
3
communication and time modulated, IEC 61000-4-6, class III 1 kHz
synchronization interfaces Magnetic field with power frequen- 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for
cy IEC 61000-4-8, class IV; 3 s; 50 Hz
inputs (100 % test)
DC 3.5 kV
IEC 60255-6 0.5 mT; 50 Hz 4
RS485/RS232 rear side 500 V (r.m.s.), 50 Hz Oscillatory surge withstand 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; τ = 50 µs;
communication interfaces capability, IEEE C37.90.1 400 surges per second,
and time synchronization duration 2 s, Ri = 200 Ω
interface (100 % test)
Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 µs; 0.5 J,
Fast transient surge withstand
capability, IEEE C37.90.1
4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz
burst length = 15 ms; repetition
5
All circuits except for communi- 3 positive and 3 negative impulses in rate 300 ms; both polarities;
cation interfaces and time intervals of 5 s Ri = 50 Ω; duration 1 min
synchronization interface, Radiated electromagnetic inter- 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz,
class III
ference IEEE C37.90.2
Damped oscillation 2.5 kV (peak value); polarity
6
Standards IEC 60255-6; IEC 60255-22 IEC 60694, IEC 61000-4-12 alternating 100 kHz; 1 MHz; 10 and
(product standard) 50 MHz; Ri = 200 Ω
VDE 0435 Part 301,
EMC tests for interference emission; type tests
Standard EN 61000-6-3 (generic standard)
7
DIN VDE 0435-110
Conducted interference voltage on 150 kHz to 30 MHz
High-frequency test 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz; τ = 15 µs;
lines, only auxiliary voltage Limit class B
IEC 60255-22-1 class III and 400 surges per s; test duration 2 s;
VDE 0435 Part 303, class III
Ri = 200 Ω
IEC-CISPR 22
Radio interference field strength 30 to 1000 MHz 8
and EN 61000-4-2, class IV Ri = 330 Ω Harmonic currents on the network Class A limits are observed
lead at AC 230 V, IEC 61000-3-2
Irradiation with HF field,
IEC 60255-22-3 class III
10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz; 80 % AM;
1 kHz Voltage fluctuations and flicker
on the network incoming feeder at
Limits are observed 9
IEC 61000-4-3, class III 10 V/m; 1.4 to 2 GHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz
AC 230 V, IEC 61000-3-3
Irradiation with HF field, Class III, 10 V/m
IEC 60255-22-31, IEC 61000-4-3
Amplitude-modulated 80; 160; 450; 900 MHz; 80 % AM
1kHz; duration >10 s
Mechanical stress test 10
Pulse-modulated 900 MHz, 50 % PM, Vibration, shock stress and seismic vibration
repetition frequency 200 Hz During operation
Fast transient disturbance/bursts 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
IEC 60255-22-4 and
repetition rate 300 ms; both polari-
Vibration Sinusoidal 11
ties; Ri = 50 Ω; test duration 1 min
IEC 60068-2-6 60 to 150 Hz: 1 g acceleration,
Shock
Half-sinusoidal
12
both directions
13
14
1) Conversion with external OLM
Fiber-optic interface please complete order number at 11th position
with 9 and Order Code L0A (DP RS485) or 9 and
Order Code L0G (DNP 3.0) and additionally a suitable external repeater. 15
Technical data
Vibration, shock stress and seismic vibration (continued)
1 Seismic vibration
IEC 60255-21-3, class 1
IEC 60068-3-3
Sinusoidal
(horizontal axis)
(vertical axis)
2 8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
(horizontal axis)
(vertical axis)
3 During transport

4 IEC 60255-21-1, class 2

IEC 60068-2-6
8 to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration,
5 IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
IEC 60068-2-27
3 shocks on each of the 3 axes in
both directions
6 IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks on each of the 3 axes
in both directions

7 Standard IEC 60255-6
Temperatures
8 Temporarily permissible operating
-20 °C to +70 °C / -4 °F to +158 °F

9 Recommended permanent opera-

ting temperature acc. to
-5 °C to +55 °C / +23 °F to +131 °F
IEC 60255-6
permanent storage
transport
-25 °C to +70 °C / -13 °F to +158 °F
Humidity
Permissible humidity stress: Annual average on ≤ 75 % relative
11 It is recommended to arrange the

humidity; on 56 days per year up t
o 93 % relative humidity;
not exposed to direct sunlight or condensation is not permitted.
proounced temperature changes
12
13
14



7VK61 breaker management relay 7VK61 - - 4Y 0- 1
Housing, binary inputs (BI) and outputs (BO)
Housing ⅓ 19”, 7 BI, 6 BO incl. 1 live-status contact, 0
Housing ½ 19”, 20 BI, 19 BO incl. 1 live-status contact
Measuring inputs (4 x V, 4 x I)
1
2
Iph = 1 A, Ie = 1 A (min. = 0.05 A)1) 1
Iph = 5 A, Ie = 5 A (min. = 0.25 A)1) 5
Rated auxiliary voltage (power supply, threshold of binary inputs)
DC 24 to 48 V, binary input threshold 19 V3)
3
2
DC 60 to 125 V 2), binary input threshold 19 V3) 4
DC 220 to 250 V 2), AC 115 to 230 V, binary input threshold 176 V3) 6 4
Unit version
For panel flush mounting A
For panel surface mounting
Region-specific default settings / language settings and functions versions
E
5
Region DE, language: German, selectable A
Region World, language: English, selectable B
Region US, language:US-English, selectable
Region FR, language: French, selectable
C 6
D
Region World, language: Spanish, selectable E
Region World, language: Italian, selectable F
Port B system interface 7
Empty 0
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector
2
3
8
PROFIBUS DP Slave, RS485 9 L 0A
PROFIBUS DP Slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector 4) 9 L 0 B
DNP 3.0, RS485
DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector 4)
9
9
L 0G
L 0H
9
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector 5) 9 L 0 S
Port C service interface
10
1
Functions
Breaker failure protection Auto-reclosure Over/Undervoltage 11
1-/3-pole or 3-pole only 1-/3-pole or 3-pole only protection
and synchro-check
C
D 12
N
P
Q
R 13
1) Rated current can be selected by means of jumpers. 4) Optical interfaces are not available with surface mounting housings
14
2) Transition between the 3 auxiliary ranges can be selected by means (position 9 = E). Please order the version with RS485 interface and a
of jumpers. separate electrical/optical converter.
5) For surface-mounting housing applications please order the relay
3) The binary input thresholds are selectable in 3 steps by means of
jumpers. with electrical Ethernet interface and use a separate fiber-optic
switch.
15
1 Connecting cable (copper)

2 Voltage transformer miniature circuit-breaker

3 Manual for 7VK61

For the latest version please visit www.siemens.com/siprotec

package
Supplier Fig.

LSP2289-afp.eps
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1 1 Siemens 10/20

10 Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 1)
Fig. 10/18 Mounting rail 1)
connector 0-827396-1 1
for 19" rack
CI2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0-827040-1 4000 1)
1)
11 0-827397-1
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163084-7
1
4000 1)
1)
0-163083-2 1
LSP2090-afp.eps

LSP2091-afp.eps
12 for CI2
and matching female
0-734372-1
1-734387-1
1 1)
1)

13 Short-circuit
links
For other terminals
C73334-A1-C33-1
C73334-A1-C34-1
1
1
Siemens
Siemens
10/21
10/22
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps

14
Fig. 10/21 Fig. 10/22


Connection diagrams
9
Fig. 10/23 Connection diagram 7VK610, ⅓ x 19” housing
10
11
12
13
14
15

Connection diagrams
10
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 10/25 Connection diagram 7VK611, ½ x 19” housing

Generator Protection
Page
SIPROTEC 7UM61 multifunction generator

and motor protection relay 11/3
SIPROTEC 7UM62 multifunction generator,

motor and transformer protection relay 11/27
SIPROTEC 7VE6 multifunction paralleling device 11/57
SIPROTEC 7VU683 high speed busbar transfer 11/77
11
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Generator Protection / 7UM61
SIPROTEC 7UM61 multifunction generator and motor protection relay
Function overview
Basic version 1
• Stator ground-fault protection
• Sensitive ground-fault protection
• Stator overload protection
• Overcurrent-time protection
2
(either definite-time or inverse-time)
• Definite-time overcurrent-time protection, directional
• Undervoltage and overvoltage protection 3
• Underfrequency and overfrequency protection
LSP2176-afpen.tif
• Reverse power protection
• Overexcitation protection
• External trip coupling
4
Standard version
Scope of basic version plus: 5
• Forward-power protection
• Underexcitation protection
Fig. 11/1 SIPROTEC 7UM61
multifunction generator and motor protection relay
6
Full version
Description
The SIPROTEC 7UM61 protection relays can do more than just

Scope of standard version plus:
• Inadverdent energization protection
7
protect. They also offer numerous additional functions. Be it • 100 %-stator ground-fault protection with 3rd harmonic
ground faults, short-circuits, overloads, overvoltage, overfre-
• Impedance protection
quency or underfrequency, protection relays assure continued
operation of power stations. The SIPROTEC 7UM61 protection Asynchronous motor
8
relay is a compact unit which has been specially developed and
designed for the protection of small and medium-sized genera- Scope of standard version plus
tors. They integrate all the necessary protection functions and
are particularly suited for the protection of:
• Motor starting time supervision
• Restart inhibit (without underexcitation protection)
9
– Hydro and pumped-storage generators
– Co-generation stations
– Private power stations using regenerative energy sources such
10
as wind or biogases
– Diesel generator stations • Operational measured values V, I, f, …
• Every metering value Wp, Wq
– Gas-turbine power stations
– Industrial power stations • Time metering of operation hours 11
– Conventional steam power stations. • Self-supervision of relay
The device can also be used for protecting synchronous and
asynchronous motors. Communication interfaces 12
The integrated programmable logic functions (continuous func- • System interface
tion chart CFC) offer the user high flexibility so that adjustments – IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
can easily be made to the varying power station requirements,
on the basis of special system conditions.
– PROFIBUS DP
– Modbus RTU 13
– DNP 3
communication architectures with the control system.
14
15
Application
Application Protection functions Abbreviation ANSI No. Generator

Basic Stan- Full Motor
1 The 7UM6 protection relays of the dard async.
SIPROTEC 4 family are compact multifunc- Stator ground-fault protection non- V0>, 3I0> 59N, 64G,
tion units which have been developed for directional, directional \(V0, 3I0) 67G
small to medium-sized power generation Sensitive ground-fault protection IEE> 50/51GN
2 plants. They incorporate all the necessary
protective functions and are especially
(also rotor ground-fault protection)
Stator overload protection I 2t
(64R)
49
suitable for the protection of: Definite-time overcurrent protection I> +V< 51
with undervoltage seal-in
–Hydro and pumped-storage generators
3 –Co-generation stations
Definite-time overcurrent protection,
directional
I>>, Direc. 50/51/67
–Private power stations using regen- Inverse-time overcurrent protection t = f (I)+V< 51V
erative energy sources such as wind or Overvoltage protection V> 59
biogases Undervoltage protection V< 27
4 –Power generation with diesel generators Frequency protection f<, f> 81
–Gas turbine power stations Reverse-power protection –P 32R
Overexcitation protection (Volt/Hertz) V/f 24
–Industrial power stations

5 –Conventional steam power stations.
Fuse failure monitor
External trip coupling (7UM611/612)
V2/V1, I1/I2
Incoup.
60FL
2/4 2/4 2/4 2/4
They can also be employed for protection Trip circuit supervision (7UM612) T.C.S. 74TC
of motors and transformers. Forward-power protection P>, P< 32F

6 The numerous other additional functions
assist the user in ensuring cost-effective
Underexcitation protection
Negative-sequence protection
1/xd
I2>, t =f(I2)
40
46
system management and reliable power Breaker failure protection Imin> 50BF
supply. Measured values display current Inadvertent energization protection I>, V< 50/27
7 operating conditions. Stored status

indications and fault recording provide
100 %-stator-ground-fault protection
with 3rd harmonics
V0(3rd harm) 59TN 27TN
(3rd harm)

assistance in fault diagnosis not only in Impedance protection with Z< 21

the event of a disturbance in generator (I>+V<)-pickup
operation. Motor starting time supervision Ian2t 48
8 Combination of the units makes it pos-
Restart inhibit for motors I 2t 49 Rotor
External temperature monitoring ϑ 38
sible to implement effective redundancy
through serial interface (Thermo-box)
concepts.
Rate-of-frequency-change protection1) df/dt > 81R
9 Protection functions Vector jump supervision (voltage)1) ∆φ >
1) Available as an option (please refer to Order No., position 15).
Numerous protection functions are neces-
sary for reliable protection of electrical Table 11/1 Scope of functions of the 7UM61
machines. Their extent and combination
10 are determined by a variety of factors,
such as machine size, mode of operation,
plant configuration, availability require-
ments, experience and design philosophy.
11 This results in multifunctionality, which is
implemented in outstanding fashion by
numerical technology.
12 In order to satisfy differing requirements,

the combination of functions is scalable
(see Table 11/1). Selection is facilitated by
division into groups.
13
14
15
Fig. 11/2 Overview

Generator Basic Construction

One application is concentrated on small generators or as
backup protection for larger generators. The function mix is also The SIPROTEC 4 units have a uniform design and a degree of 1
an effective addition to transformer differential protection with functionality which represents a whole new quality in protection
parallel-connected transformers. The functions are also suitable and control. Local operation has been designed according to
for system disconnection. ergonomic criteria. Large, easy-to-read displays were a major
Generator Standard
design aim. The DIGSI 4 operating program considerably
simplifies planning and engineering and reduces commissioning
2
times.
This function mix is recommended for generator outputs exceed-
ing 1 MVA. It is also suitable for protection of synchronous The 7UM611 is configured in ⅓ 19 inch, and the 7UM612 in
motors. Another application is as backup protection for the ½ 19 inch width. This means that the units of previous models 3
larger block units. can be replaced. The height throughout all housing width incre-
ments is 243 mm.
Generator Full
Here, all protection functions are available and are recom-
All wires are connected directly or by means of ring-type cable
lugs. 4
mended from generator outputs exceeding 5 MVA. Backup
protection for the larger block units is also a recommended Alternatively, versions with plug-in terminals are also available.
application. These permit the use of prefabricated cable harnesses.
Asynchronous motor
In the case of panel surface mounting, the connecting terminals 5
are in the form of screw-type terminals at top and bottom. The
This protection function mix is recommended for motors up to communication interfaces are also arranged on the same sides.
1 – 2 MW. It offers a wide frequency operating range from 11 Hz
to 69 Hz. When an infeed is switched, the protection adapts to
the changed voltage and frequency.
6
LSP2166-afp.tif
9
Fig. 11/3 Rear view with wiring terminal safety cover and
serial interface
10
11
12
13
14
15
1 Definite-time overcurrent protection I>, I>> (ANSI 50, 51, 67)

This protection function comprises the short-circuit protection
for the generator and also the backup protection for upstream
2 devices such as transformers or power system protection.

An undervoltage stage at I> maintains the pickup when, during
the fault, the current falls below the threshold. In the event of
a voltage drop on the generator terminals, the static excitation
3 system can no longer be sufficiently supplied. This is one reason
for the decrease of the short-circuit current.
The I>> stage can be implemented as high-set instantaneous trip Fig. 11/4 Protection with current transformer on terminal side
stage. With the integrated directional function it can be applied
4 for generators without star point CT (see Figure 11/4).
Inverse-time overcurrent protection (ANSI 51V)

This function also comprises short-circuit and backup protection
5 and is used for power system protection with current-dependent
protection devices.
IEC and ANSI characteristics can be selected (Table 11/2).
6 The current function can be controlled by evaluating the genera-

tor terminal voltage.
The “controlled” version releases the sensitive set current stage.
7 With the “restraint” version, the pickup value of the current is

lowered linearly with decreasing voltage.
Fig. 11/5 Characteristic of negative-sequence protection
The fuse failure monitor prevents unwanted operation.
8 Stator overload protection (ANSI 49)

The task of the overload protection is to protect the stator wind-
Available inverse-time characteristics
ings of generators and motors from high, continuous overload
Inverse • •
currents. All load variations are evaluated by the mathematical
9 model used. The thermal effect of the r.m.s. current value forms
the basis of the calculation. This conforms to IEC 60255-8.
Moderately inverse
Very inverse
•
• •
In dependency of the current the cooling time constant is
automatically extended. If the ambient temperature or the tem-
Definite inverse •
10 perature of the coolant are injected via PROFIBUS DP, the model
automatically adapts to the ambient conditions; otherwise a
Table 11/2
constant ambient temperature is assumed.
Negative-sequence protection (ANSI 46)

11 Asymmetrical current loads in the three phases of a generator
cause a temperature rise in the rotor because of the negative
sequence field produced.
12 This protection detects an asymmetrical load in three-phase

generators. It functions on the basis of symmetrical components
and evaluates the negative sequence of the phase currents.
The thermal processes are taken into account in the algorithm
13 and form the inverse characteristic. In addition, the negative

sequence is evaluated by an independent stage (alarm and trip)
which is supplemented by a time-delay element (see Fig. 11/5).
14
15
Underexcitation protection (ANSI 40)

(Loss-of-field protection)
Derived from the generator terminal voltage and current, 1
the complex admittance is calculated and corresponds to the
generator diagram scaled in per unit. This protection prevents
damage due to loss of synchronism resulting from underexcita-
tion. The protection function provides three characteristics for
monitoring static and dynamic stability. In the event of exciter
2
failure, fast response of the protection can be ensured via binary
input. This input releases a timer with a short time delay.
The straight-line characteristics allow the protection of the 3
generator diagram to be optimally adapted (see Fig. 11/6). The
per-unit-presentation of the diagram allows the setting values to Fig. 11/6 Characteristic of underexcitation protection
be directly read out.
The positive-sequence systems of current and voltage are used 4
to calculate the admittance. This ensures that the protection
always operates correctly even with asymmetrical network
conditions.
If the voltage deviates from the rated voltage, the admittance
5
calculation has the advantage that the characteristics move in
the same direction as the generator diagram.
Reverse-power protection (ANSI 32R) 6

The reverse-power protection monitors the direction of active
power flow and picks up when the mechanical energy fails
because then the drive power is taken from the network. This
function can be used for operational shut-down (sequential
Fig. 11/7 Grading of impedance protection
7
tripping) of the generator but also prevents damage to the
steam turbines. The reverse power is calculated from the Undervoltage protection (ANSI 27)
positive-sequence systems of current and voltage. Asymmetrical The undervoltage protection evaluates the positive-sequence
network faults therefore do not cause reduced measuring components of the voltages and compares them with the 8
accuracy. The position of the emergency trip valve is injected threshold values. There are two stages available.
as binary information and is used to switch between two trip
command delays. When applied for motor protection, the sign The undervoltage function is used for asynchronous motors
(±) of the active power can be reversed via parameters. and pumped-storage stations and prevents the voltage-related
instability of such machines. 9
The function can also be used for monitoring purposes.
Monitoring of the active power produced by a generator can
be useful for starting up and shutting down generators. One
stage monitors threshold beyond one limit value while another
10
stage monitors threshold below another limit value. The power voltage is too high.
is calculated using the positive-sequence component of current
and voltage. Either the maximum line-to-line voltages or the phase-to-ground
voltages (for low-voltage generators) can be evaluated. The 11
Impedance protection (ANSI 21) measuring results of the line-to-line voltages are independent
of the neutral point displacement caused by ground-faults. This
This fast short-circuit protection protects the generator, the
function is implemented in two stages.
generator transformer and is a backup protection for the power
system. This protection has two settable impedance stages; in
12
addition, the first stage can be switched over via binary input.
With the circuit-breaker in “open” position (see Fig. 11/7) the
impedance measuring range can be extended. The overcurrent
pickup element with under-voltage seal-in ensures a reliable 13
pickup and the loop selection logic a reliable detection of the
faulty loop. With this logic it is possible to perform a correct
measurement via the unit transformer.
14
15
Frequency protection (ANSI 81)
1 The frequency protection prevents impermissible stress of the

equipment (e.g. turbine) in case of under or overfrequency.
It also serves as a monitoring and control element.
The function has four stages; the stages can be implemented
2 either as under-frequency or overfrequency protection. Each
Even in the event of voltage distortion, the frequency measur-
ing algorithm reliably identifies the fundamental waves and
3 determines the frequency extremely precisely. Frequency
Fig. 11/8 Logic diagram of breaker failure protection
Sensitive ground-fault protection (ANSI 50/51GN, 64R)

Overexcitation protection Volt/Hertz (ANSI 24)
The sensitive ground-current input can also be used as separate
4 The overexcitation protection serves for detection of an
unpermissible high induction (proportional to V/f) in generators
ground-fault protection. It is of two-stage form. Secondary
ground currents of 2 mA or higher can be reliably handled.
or transformers, which leads to thermal overloading. This may
occur when starting up, shutting down under full load, with Alternatively, this input is also suitable as rotor ground-fault
protection. A voltage with rated frequency (50 or 60 Hz) is
5 weak systems or under isolated operation. The inverse character-
istic can be set via seven points derived from the manufacturer connected in the rotor circuit via the interface unit 7XR61.
data. If a higher ground current is flowing, a rotor ground fault has
occurred. Measuring-circuit monitoring is provided for this
In addition, a definite-time alarm stage and an instantaneous application (see Figure 11/20).
6 stage can be used.
100 % stator ground-fault protection with 3rd harmonic
For calculation of the V/f ratio, frequency and also the highest (ANSI 59TN, 27TN (3rd H.))
of the three line-to-line voltages are used. The frequency range
that can be monitored comprises 11 to 69 Hz. Owing to the design, the generator produces a 3rd harmonic
7 Stator ground-fault protection, non-directional, directional
that forms a zero system. It is verifiable by the protection on
a broken delta winding or on the neutral transformer. The
(ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G) magnitude of the voltage amplitude depends on the generator
and its operation.
Ground faults manifest themselves in generators that are oper-
8 ated in isolation by the occurrence of a displacement voltage.
In case of unit connections, the displacement voltage is an
In the event of an ground fault in the vicinity of the neutral
point, there is a voltage displacement in the 3rd harmonic (drop-
adequate, selective criterion for protection. ping in the neutral point and rising at the terminals).
For the selective ground-fault detection, the direction of the
9 flowing ground current has to be evaluated too, if there is a
Depending on the connection, the protection must be set in
either undervoltage or overvoltage form. It can also be delayed.
direct connection between generator and busbar. So as to avoid overfunction, the active power and the positive-
sequence voltage act as enabling criteria.
The protection relay measures the displacement voltage at a
10 VT located at the transformer star point or at the broken delta-

winding of a VT. As an option, it is also possible to calculate
The final protection setting can be made only by way of a
primary test with the generator.
the zero-sequence voltage from the phase-to-ground voltages.
Depending on the load resistor selection, 90 to 95 % of the Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)
stator winding of a generator can be protected.
11 A sensitive current input is available for ground-current measure-
In the event of scheduled downtimes or a fault in the generator,
the generator can remain on line if the circuit-breaker is defec-
ment. This input should be connected to a core-balance current tive and could suffer substantial damage.
transformer. The fault direction is deduced from the displace-
Breaker failure protection evaluates a minimum current and the
12 ment voltage and ground current. The directional characteristic
(straight line) can be easily adapted to the system conditions.
circuit-breaker auxiliary contact. It can be started by internal
protective tripping or externally via binary input. Two-channel
Effective protection for direct connection of a generator to
activation avoids overfunction (see Figure 11/8).
a busbar can therefore be established. During start-up, it is
possible to switch over from the directional to the displacement
13 voltage measurement via an externally injected signal.
Depending on the protection setting, various ground-fault
protection concepts can be implemented with this function
(see Figs. 11/17 to 11/21).
14
15
Inadvertent energization protection

(ANSI 50, 27)
This protection has the function of limit- 1
ing the damage of the generator in the
event of an unintentional switch-on of
the circuit-breaker, whether the generator
is standing still or rotating without being
excited or synchronized. If the power sys-
2
tem voltage is connected, the generator
starts as an asynchronous machine with
a large slip and this leads to excessively
high currents in the rotor.
3
A logic circuit consisting of sensitive
current measurement for each phase,
measured value detector, time control
and blocking as of a minimum voltage,
4
leads to an instantaneous trip command.
If the fuse failure monitor responds, this
function is ineffective.
5
Starting time supervision
Fig. 11/9 Temperature characteristic at rotor and thermal replica of the rotor (multiple start-ups)
(motor protection only) (ANSI 48)
motor against long unwanted start-ups, which might occur as a signal with which the motor starting circuit can be blocked. The
6
result of excessive load torque or excessive voltage drops within blockage is cancelled again after cooling down and the thermal
the motor, or if the rotor is locked. value has dropped below the pickup threshold.
The tripping time is dependent on the square of the start-up cur-
rent and the set start-up time (Inverse Characteristic). It adapts
As the fan provides no forced cooling when the motor is off, it
cools down more slowly. Depending on the operating state, the
7
itself to the start-up with reduced voltage. The tripping time is protection function controls the cooling time constant. A value
determined in accordance with the following formula: below a minimum current is an effective changeover criterion.
⎛ I ⎞2
tTrip = ⎜ start ⎟ ⋅ t start max System disconnection 8
⎝ I rms ⎠
Take the case of in-plant generators feeding directly into a
tTrip Tripping time system. The incoming line is generally the legal entity boundary
Istart Permissible start-up current

between the system owner and the in-plant generator. If the
incoming line fails as the result of auto-reclosure, for instance,
9
tstart max Permissible start-up time a voltage or frequency deviation may occur depending on the
power balance at the feeding generator. Asynchronous condi-
Irms Measured r.m.s. current value tions may arise in the event of connection, which may lead to
Calculation is not started until the current Irms is higher than an
damage on the generator or the gearing between the generator 10
and the turbine. Besides the classic criteria such as voltage and
adjustable response value (e.g. 2 IN, MOTOR).
frequency, the following two criteria are also applied (vector
If the permissible locked-rotor time is less than the permissible jump, rate-of-frequency-change protection).
start-up time (motors with a thermally critical rotor), a binary
signal is set to detect a locked rotor by means of a tachometer Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81)
11
generator. This binary signal releases the set locked-rotor time, The frequency difference is determined on the basis of the
and tripping occurs after it has elapsed. calculated frequency over a time interval. It corresponds to the
Restart inhibit for motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor)
momentary rate-of-frequency change. The function is designed
so that it reacts to both positive and negative rate-of-frequency
12
When cold or at operating temperature, motors may only be changes. Exceeding of the permissible rate-of-frequency change
connected a certain number of times in succession. The start-up is monitored constantly. Release of the relevant direction
current causes heat development in the rotor which is monitored
by the restart inhibit function.
depends on whether the actual frequency is above or below the
rated frequency. In total, four stages are available, and can be
13
used optionally.
Contrary to classical counting methods, in the restart inhibit
function the heat and cooling phenomena in the rotor are simu-
lated by a thermal replica. The rotor temperature is determined
on the basis of the stator currents. Restart inhibit permits restart
14
of the motor only if the rotor has enough thermal reserve for
a completely new start. Fig. 11/9 illustrates the thermal profile
for a permissible triple start out of the cold state. If the thermal
reserve is too low, the restart inhibit function issues a blocking
15
Vector jump Lockout (ANSI 86)
1 Monitoring the phase angle in the voltage is a criterion for

identifying an interrupted infeed. If the incoming line should
All binary outputs (alarm or trip relays) can be stored like LEDs
and reset using the LED reset key. The lockout state is also stored
fail, the abrupt current discontinuity leads to a phase angle jump in the event of supply voltage failure. Reclosure can only occur
in the voltage. This is measured by means of a delta process. The after the lockout state is reset.
command for opening the generator or coupler circuit-breaker is
2 issued if the set threshold is exceeded. Fuse failure and other monitoring
External trip coupling
For recording and processing of external trip information, there
3 are 2 (for 7UM611) or 4 (for 7UM612) binary inputs. They are
The measuring circuits, analog-digital conversion, power supply
voltages, memories and software sequence (watch-dog) are all
provided for information from the Buchholz relay or generator-
monitored.
specific commands and act like a protective function. Each input
initiates a fault event and can be individually delayed by a timer. The fuse failure function detects failure of the measuring voltage
4 Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC)
due to short-circuit or open circuit of the wiring or VT and avoids
overfunction of the undervoltage elements in the protection
One or two binary inputs can be used for monitoring the circuit- functions.
breaker trip coil including its incoming cables. An alarm signal The positive and negative-sequence system (voltage and cur-
5 occurs whenever the circuit is interrupted. rent) are evaluated.
Phase rotation reversal Filter time
If the relay is used in a pumped-storage power plant, matching All binary inputs can be subjected to a filter time (indication
6 to the prevailing rotary field is possible via a binary input (gen-
erator/motor operation via phase rotation reversal).
suppression).
2 pre-definable parameter groups
7 In the protection, the setting values can be stored in two data

sets. In addition to the standard parameter group, the second
group is provided for certain operating conditions (pumped-
storage power stations). It can be activated via binary input,
8 local control or DIGSI 4.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Communication
Communication
With respect to communication, particular emphasis has been 1

one hand, and on the other hand provides openness for future
2
Local PC interface
The PC interface accessible from the front of the unit permits
quick access to all parameters and fault event data. The use
3
of the DIGSI 4 operating program during commissioning is
particularly advantageous.
Rear-mounted interfaces 4
Two communication modules on the rear of the unit incorporate Fig. 11/10 IEC 60870-5-103 star-type RS232 copper conductor
optional equipment complements and permit retrofitting. They connection or fiber-optic connection
assure the ability to comply with the requirements of different
5
(IEC 60870, PROFIBUS, DIGSI).
Service interface
6
In the RS485 version, several protection units can be centrally
operated with DIGSI 4. By using a modem, remote control is
possible. This provides advantages in fault clearance, in
particular in unmanned substations.
7
System interface
This is used to communicate with a control or protection
and control system and supports, depending on the module
8
connected, a variety of communication protocols and interface
designs.
IEC 60870-5-103 Fig. 11/11 PROFIBUS: RS485 copper conductors 9

communication with protection relays. MODBUS RTU
IEC 60870-5-103 is supported by a number of protection unit MODBUS is also a widely utilized communication standard and is 10
manufacturers and is used worldwide. used in numerous automation solutions.
The generator protection functions are stored in the manufac-
DNP 3.0
turer-specific, published part of the protocol.
DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol version 3) is a messaging- 11
PROFIBUS DP based communication protocol. The SIPROTEC 4 units are fully
PROFIBUS is an internationally standardized communication Level 1 and Level 2 compliant with DNP 3.0. DNP 3.0 is sup-
ported by a number of protection device manufacturers.
protocol (EN 50170). PROFIBUS is supported internationally
by several hundred manufacturers and has to date been used
Safe bus architecture
12
in more than 1,000,000 applications all over the world.
• RS485 bus
With the PROFIBUS DP, the protection can be directly connected With this data transmission via copper conductors, electromag-
to a SIMATIC S5/S7. The transferred data are fault data,
measured values and information from or to the logic (CFC).
netic interference influences are largely eliminated by the use
of twisted-pair conductor. Upon failure of a unit, the remaining
13
system continues to operate without any faults.
14
disturbance.
15
Communication
System solution
LSP2163-afpen.tif
LSP2162-afpen.tif
1 SIPROTEC 4 is tailor-made for use in
SIMATIC-based automation systems.
Via the PROFIBUS DP, indications (pickup
and tripping) and all relevant operational
2 measured values are transmitted from the
protection unit.
Via modem and service interface, the
protection engineer has access to the
3 protection devices at all times. This
permits remote maintenance and
diagnosis.
Fig. 11/12 RS232/RS485 Fig. 11/13 820 nm fiber-optic communication
Parallel to this, local communication is Electrical communication module module
4 possible, for example, during a major
inspection.
LSP2164-afpen.tif
6
7 Fig. 11/14 PROFIBUS communication module, optical, double-ring
10
11
12
13 Fig. 11/15 System solution: Communication
14
15
Typical connections
Typical connections
Direct generator – busbar connection 1

Fig. 11/16 illustrates the recommended
standard connection if several generators
supply one busbar. Phase-to-ground
faults are disconnected by employing the 2
directional ground-fault criterion. The
ground-fault current is driven through the
cables of the system. If this is not sufficient,
an grounding transformer connected to 3
the busbar supplies the necessary current
(maximum approximately 10 A) and per-
mits a protection range of up to 90 %. The
ground-fault current should be detected by
means of core-balance current transform-
4
ers in order to achieve the necessary
sensitivity. The displacement voltage can
be used as ground-fault criterion during
starting operations until synchronization is 5
achieved.
Fig. 11/16 7
8
Direct generator – busbar connection
with low-resistance grounding
If the generator neutral point has low-
resistance grounding, the connection
9
illustrated in Fig. 11/17 is recommended.
In the case of several generators, the
resistance must be connected to only one
generator, in order to prevent circulating 10
currents (3rd harmonic).
For selective ground-fault detection, the
ground-current input should be looped
into the common return conductor of the
11
two current transformer sets (differential
connection). The current transformers
must be grounded at only one point. The
displacement voltage VE is utilized as an 12
additional enabling criterion.
Balanced current transformers are desirable
with this form of connection. In the case
of higher generator power (for example, IN
13
approximately 2000 A), current transform-
ers with a secondary rated current of 5 A
are recommended.
14
Fig. 11/17
15
Typical connections

with high-resistance generator neutral
1 grounding
With this system configuration, selective
ground-fault detection is implemented
on the basis of the lower fault currents
2 through the differential connection of core-
balance current transformers (see Figure
11/18). Secondary-side grounding must be
effected at only one core-balance current
3 transformer. The displacement voltage is to
be utilized additionally as enable criterion.
The load resistor takes the form either
of primary or of secondary resistor with
4 neutral transformer. In the case of several
generators connected to the busbar, again
only one generator will be grounded via
the resistor.
5
8 Fig. 11/18
Unit connection with isolated star point

9 This configuration of unit connection is
a variant to be recommended (see
Figure 11/19). Ground-fault detection is
effected by means of the displacement
10 voltage. In order to prevent unwanted
operation in the event of ground faults
in the system, a load resistor must be
provided at the broken delta winding.
11 Depending on the plant (or substation), a
voltage transformer with a high power (VA)
may in fact be sufficient. If not, an ground-
ing transformer should be employed. The
12 available measuring winding can be used
for the purpose of voltage measurement.
Rotor ground-fault protection can be
implemented with the unassigned ground-
13 fault current input. The 7XR61 coupling
unit must be used for this purpose.
14
15 Fig. 11/19

Typical connections
Unit connection with neutral trans-

former
With this system configuration, disturbance 1
voltage reduction and damping in the
event of ground faults in the generator
area are effected by a load resistor con-
nected to generator neutral point. The
maximum ground-fault current is limited to
2
approximately 10 A. Configuration can take
the form of a primary or secondary resistor
with neutral transformer. In order to avoid
low secondary resistance, the transforma-
3
tion ratio of the neutral transformer should
be low. The higher secondary voltage can
be reduced by means of a voltage divider.
Electrically, the circuit is identical to the
4
configuration in Figure 11/19.
7
Fig. 11/20
8
Connection with low-voltage
generators
9
As is generally known, the low-voltage
system is solidly grounded, so that the gen-
erator neutral point is connected to ground
(see Figure 11/21). With this configuration,
there is the risk that, as a result of the 3rd
10
harmonics forming a zero phase-sequence
system, circulating currents will flow via
the N-conductor. This must be limited by
the generator or system configuration 11
(reactor).
Otherwise, connection corresponds to the
customary standard. In the case of residual
current transformer design, it has to be
12
ensured that the thermal current limit (1 s)
of the IEE input is restricted to 300 A.
13
Fig. 11/21 14
15
Typical connections
Connection of an asynchronous motor
1 The figure shows the standard connection

of motors of medium capacity
(500 kW to <(1-2) MW). In addition to the
short-circuit protection, an ground-fault
protection (VE; IE inputs) is available.
2 As the busbar voltage is being monitored,
starting of the motor is prevented if the
voltage is too low or – in case of failure
of infeed – the motor circuit-breaker is
3 opened. Here, the wide range of frequency
is advantangeous. For the detection of tem-
peratures, 2 thermo-boxes (temperature
monitoring boxes) can be connected via a
4 serial interface.
10
Fig. 11/22
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
Voltage transformer in open delta

connection (V-connection)
Protection can also be implemented on 1
voltage transformers in open delta connec-
tion. Figure 11/23 shows the connection
involved. If necessary, the operational
measured values for the phase-to-ground
voltages can be slightly asymmetrical. If
2
this is disturbing, the neutral point (R16) Fig. 11/23
can be connected to ground via a capacitor.
In the case of open delta connection, it is 3
not possible to calculate the displacement
voltage from the secondary voltages. It
must be passed to the protection relay
along a different path (for example, voltage
transformer at the generator neutral point
4
or from the grounding transformer).
Connection with two current

5
transformers
This configuration is to be found in older
systems with insulated or high-resistance 6
star point. This connection is illustrated
in Fig. 11/24. In the protection unit,
the secondary currents are represented
correctly and, in addition, the positive and
the negative-sequence system are correctly
7
Fig. 11/24
calculated. Limits of application occur
in the case of low-resistance and solid
grounding.
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
Technical data
General unit data LEDs
1 Analog inputs
Rated frequency 50 or 60 Hz
Number
RUN (green)
ERROR (red)
1
1
Rated current IN 1 or 5 A
Assignable LED (red)
Ground current, sensitive IEmax 1.6 A 7UM611 7
2 Rated voltage VN
Power consumption
100 to 125 V 7UM612
Unit design
14
With IN = 1 A Approx. 0.05 VA

7XP20 housing For dimensions see dimension
drawings, part 14
For sensitive ground current Approx. 0.05 VA
3 Voltage inputs (with 100 V)
Capability in CT circuits
Approx. 0.3 VA Degree of protection acc. to
EN 60529
For surface-mounting housing IP 51
Thermal (r.m.s. values) 100 IN for 1 s
For flush-mounting housing
30 IN for 10 s
Front IP 51
4 IN continuous
4 Dynamic (peak) 250 IN (one half cycle)
Rear
For the terminals
IP 50
IP 2x with terminal cover put on
Ground current, sensitive 300 A for 1 s
Weight
100 A for 10 s
15 A continuous
7UM611 (⅓ x 19") Approx. 5.5 kg
5 Dynamic (peak)
Capability in voltage paths
750 A (one half cycle)
230 V continuous
7UM612 (½ x 19")
Approx. 7 kg
Auxiliary voltage 7UM611 (⅓ x 19") Approx. 7.5 kg

Rated auxiliary voltage DC 24 to 48 V 7UM612 (½ x 19") Approx. 12 kg
6 DC 60 to 125 V
DC 110 to 250 V
Electrical tests
and AC 115 V / 230 V with 50/60 Hz
Specifications
Permitted tolerance –20 to +20 %
Superimposed (peak-to-peak) ≤ 15 % Standards IEC 60255 (product standards)
7 Power consumption
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2
UL 508
During normal operation DIN 57435, part 303
7UM611 Approx. 4 W For further standards see below.
7UM612 Approx. 4.5 W
Insulation tests
8 During pickup with all inputs
and outputs activated
Voltage test (100 % test) 2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50/60 Hz
Bridging time during auxiliary supply, binary inputs communi-
9 voltage failure
at Vaux = 48 V and Vaux ≥ 110 V ≥ 50 ms
cation and time synchronization
interfaces
at Vaux = 24 V and Vaux = 60 V ≥ 20 ms
Voltage test (100 % test) DC 3.5 kV
Binary inputs Auxiliary voltage and binary
inputs
10 Number
7UM611 7 Voltage test (100 % test)
RS485/RS232 rear side commu-
500 V (r.m.s. value), 50/60 Hz
7UM612 15
3 pickup thresholds DC 10 to 19 V or DC 44 to 88 V nication interfaces and time
Range is selectable with jumpers 88 to 176 V DC1) synchronization interface
11 Maximum permissible voltage

Current consumption, energized
DC 300 V
Approx. 1.8 mA
All circuits except for commu-
5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 μs; 0.5 J;
3 positive and 3 negative impulses
nication interfaces and time at intervals of 5 s
Output relays synchronization interface, class III
12 Number
7UM611 12 (1 NO, 1 optional as NC,
via jumper)
via jumper)
13 Switching capacity
Make 1000 W / VA
Break 30 VA
Break (for resistive load) 40 W
Break (for L/R ≤ 50 ms) 25 VA
14 Switching voltage
Permissible current
250 V
5 A continuous
15 1) Not valid for the CPU board.

Technical data
EMC tests for noise immunity; type test Mechanical stress tests
(product standards)
During operation 1
DIN 57435 part 303 Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068
High frequency test 2.5 kV (peak value), 1 MHz; Vibration Sinusoidal
and VDE 0435 part 303, class III
τ = 15 ms, 400 pulses per s;
duration 2 s
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2
IEC 60068-2-6
10 to 60 Hz: ± 0.075 mm ampli-
tude;
2
IEC 60255-22-2, class IV discharge; both polarities;
EN 61000-4-2, class IV 150 pF; Ri = 330 Ω
Irradiation with RF field,
non-modulated
10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
Half-sinusoidal
Acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms, 3
IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks each in both directions of
the 3 axes
Irradiation with RF field, 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz; 80 % AM;
amplitude-modulated
1 kHz
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
IEC 60068-3-3
(horizontal axis)
4
Irradiation with RF field, 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition 1 to 8 Hz: ± 1.5 mm amplitude
pulse-modulated, IEC 61000-4-3/ frequency 200 Hz; duty cycle 50 % (vertical axis)
ENV 50204, class III 8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
Fast transient interference bursts
IEC 60255-22-4, IEC 61000-4-4,
4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst length =
15 ms; repetition rate 300 ms;
(horizontal axis)
5
class IV both polarities; (vertical axis)
Ri = 50 Ω; test duration 1 min Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
During transport 6
(SURGE), IEC 61000-4-5 Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
Installation, class III Vibration Sinusoidal
Auxiliary supply Common (longitudinal) mode: IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 5 to 8 Hz: ±7.5 mm amplitude;
2 kV; 12 Ω, 9 μF
7
1 kV; 2 Ω, 18 μF 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
Measurement inputs, binary inputs Common (longitudinal) mode: Shock Half-sinusoidal
and relay outputs 2 kV; 42 Ω, 0.5 μF IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms,
1 kV; 42 Ω, 0.5 μF
IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks each in both directions
3 axes
8
Line-conducted HF, amplitude- 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; Continuous shock Half-sinusoidal
modulated 80 % AM; 1 kHz IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms,
Magnetic field with power 30 A/m continuous;
IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks in both directions of
the 3 axes 9
frequency 300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV; 0.5 mT; 50 Hz
IEC 60255-6 Climatic stress tests

capability
damped wave; 50 surges per
Temperatures
Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 –25 °C to +85 °C / –13 °F to +185 °F
10
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 second; Duration 2 s; and -2, test Bd, for 16 h
Ri = 150 to 200 Ω
Temporarily permissible operating –20 °C to +70 °C / –4 °F to +158 °F
Fast transient surge withstand 4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges per
capability
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
second; both polarities;
Duration 2 s ; Ri = 80 Ω
Recommended permanent operating –5 °C to +55 °C / +25 °F to +131 °F 11
temperature acc. to IEC 60255-6
rence
permanent storage
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2
Damped oscillations 2.5 kV (peak value), polarity
transport
–25 °C to +70 °C / –13 °F to +158 °F 12
IEC 60894, IEC 61000-4-12 alternating 100 kHz, 1 MHz,
10 and 50 MHz, Ri = 200 Ω Humidity
EMC tests for interference emission; type tests Permissible humidity stress Annual average ≤ 75 % relative
Standard EN 50 081-* (technical generic
13
standard)
not exposed to direct sunlight or condensation is not permitted
Conducted interference voltage 150 kHz to 30 MHz pronounced temperature changes
on lines only auxiliary supply Limit class B that could cause condensation
IEC-CISPR 22
30 to 1000 MHz
14
Interference field strength

15
1 7UM61multifunction generator and motor protection relay

7UM61 - - 0-
Housing ⅓ 19", 7 BI, 11 BO, 1 live status contact 1

Housing ½ 19", 15 BI, 19 BO, 1 live status contact 2
2 Current transformer IN
1 A1) 1
5 A1) 5
3 Rated auxiliary voltage (power supply, indication voltage)

DC 24 to 48 V, threshold binary input 19 V3) 2
DC 60 to 125 V2), threshold binary input 19 V3) 4
DC 110 to 220 V2), AC 115 to 230 V, threshold binary input 88 V3) 5
4 Unit version
For panel surface-mounting, 2 tier screw-type terminals top/bottom B
For panel flush-mounting, plug-in terminals (2-/3- pin connector) D
5 Flush-mounting housing, screw-type terminal (direct connection, ring-type cable lugs) E
Region-specific default setting / function and language settings

Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC characteristics, language: German, (language can be selected) A
6 Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC / ANSI characteristics, language: English (UK), (language can be selected)
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI characteristics, language: English (US), (language can be selected)
B
C
System interface (rear of units)

7 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electrical RS232 1
PROFIBUS DP slave, electrical RS485 9
8 PROFIBUS DP slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector* 9
L 0A
L 0 B
MODBUS, optical 820 nm, ST connector* 9 L 0 E
9 DNP 3.0, electrical RS485

DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector*
9
9
L 0G
L 0H
DIGSI 4 / modem interface (rear of unit)

No interface 0
10 DIGSI 4, electrical RS232 1
DIGSI 4, temperature monitoring box, electrical RS485 2
DIGSI 4, temperature monitoring box, optical 820 nm, ST connector 3
11 Measuring functions
Without 0
Min./max. values, energy metering 3
Functions4)
12 Generator Basic A
Generator Standard B
Generator Full C
13 Motor, asynchronous
Additional functions4)
F
Without A A
Network decoupling (df/dt and vector jump) E
14 1) Rated current can be selected by means of jumpers. 4) For more detailed information on the functions see Table 11/1 on
2) Transition between the two auxiliary voltage ranges can be selected page 11/4.
by means of jumpers. * Not with position 9 = B; if 9 = “B”, please order 7UM61 unit with
RS485 port and separate fiber-optic converters.
15 3) The binary input thresholds can be selected in stages by means of
jumpers.

Connecting cable 1
Cable between PC / notebook (9-pin connector)
Coupling device for rotor ground-fault protection 7XR6100-0CA00 2

Short code
Series resistor for rotor ground-fault protection
(group: 013002)
Resistor for stator ground-fault protection

3PP1336-0DZ K2Y
3
(voltage divider, 5 : 1) (group 013001) 3PP1336-1CZ K2Y
Temperature monitoring box (thermo-box)

AC/DC 24 to 60 V 7XV5662-2AD10 4
AC/DC 90 to 240 V 7XV5662-5AD10
Manual for 7UM61

English C53000-G1176-C127-2 5
6
package
Connector 2-pin C73334-A1-C35-1 1 Siemens 11/26 7

LSP2289-afp.eps
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1 1 Siemens 11/27
Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 1)

for 19" rack
connector
CI2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2
0-827396-1
0-827040-1
1
4000
1)
1)
8
0-827397-1 1 1)
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163083-7 4000 1)

0-163084-2 1 1)
9
LSP2090-afp.eps

LSP2091-afp.eps
For CI2 0-734372-1 1 1)
Fig. 11/26 Fig. 11/27 19"-mounting rail C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens 11/25 10

11
11
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps


Fig. 11/28
Short-circuit link
Fig. 11/29
Short-circuit link
12
13
14
15
9
1) NO or NC with jumper possible.
10
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 11/30 7UM611 connection diagram (IEC standard)

10
11
12
1) NO or NC with jumper possible. 13
14
Fig. 11/31 7UM612 connection diagram (IEC standard) 15

9
1) NO or NC with jumper possible.
10
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 11/32 7UM611 connection diagram (ANSI standard)

10
11
12
1) NO or NC with jumper possible. 13
14
Fig. 11/33 7UM612 connection diagram (ANSI standard) 15

10
11
12
13
14
15
SIPROTEC 7UM62 multifunction generator, motor and transformer protection relay
Function overview
Standard version 1
Scope of basic version plus:
• Inadvertent energization protection
• 100 %-stator ground-fault protection with 3rd harmonic
• Impedance protection
2
Full version
LSP2171-afpen.eps
Scope of standard version plus:
• DC voltage protection
3
• Overcurrent protection during start-ups
• Ground-current differential protection
• Out-of-step protection
4
Additional version
Available for each version:
Fig. 11/34 SIPROTEC 7UM62 multifunction protection relay for
generators, motors and transformers
• Sensitive rotor ground-fault protection (1–3 Hz method)
5
• Stator ground-fault protection with 20 Hz voltage
Description
The SIPROTEC 7UM62 protection relays can do more than just pro- • Vector jump supervision 6
tect. They also offer numerous additional functions. Be it ground
Monitoring function
faults, short-circuits, overloads, overvoltage, overfrequency or
underfrequency asynchronous conditions, protection relays assure • Trip circuit supervision
continued operation of power stations. The SIPROTEC 7UM62 pro-
tection relay is a compact unit which has been specially developed
• Fuse failure monitor 7
• Operational measured values V, I, f, …
and designed for the protection of small, medium-sized and large
generators. They integrate all the necessary protection functions • Energy metering values Wp, Wq
and are particularly suited for the protection of:
• Self-supervision of relay
8
– Private power stations using regenerative energy sources such
as wind or biogases
– Diesel generator stations
9
– Gas-turbine power stations
– IEC 61850 protocol
– Industrial power stations
– Conventional steam power stations.
The SIPROTEC 7UM62 includes all necessary protection func-
– PROFIBUS DP
– Modbus RTU
10
tions for large synchronous and asynchronous motors and for – DNP 3
transformers. – PROFINET
The integrated programmable logic functions (continuous func-
tion chart CFC) offer the user high flexibility so that adjustments
11
can easily be made to the varying power station requirements Hardware
on the basis of special system conditions.
• Analog inputs
communication architectures with the control system. • 8 current transformers 12
• 4 voltage transformers
The following basic functions are available for all versions:
• 7/15 binary inputs
Current differential protection for generators, motors and
transformers, stator ground-fault protection, sensitive ground-
• 12/20 output relays
13
fault protection, stator overload protection, overcurrent-time Front design
protection (either definite time or inverse time), definite-time
• User-friendly local operation
overcurrent protection with directionality, undervoltage and
overvoltage protection, underfrequency and overfrequency
protection, overexcitation and underexcitation protection,
• 7/14 LEDs for local alarm
• Function keys
14
external trip coupling, forward-power and reverse-power • Graphic display with 7UM623
protection, negative-sequence protection, breaker failure
protection, rotor ground-faults protection (fn, R-measuring),
motor starting time supervision and restart inhibit for motors.
15
Application generator as well as backup protection for the block transformer

including the power system. Additional functions such as protec-
1 The 7UM6 protection relays of the SIPROTEC 4 family are com- tion during start-up for generators with starting converters
are also included.The scope of functions can be used for the
pact multifunction units which have been developed for small to
medium-sized power generation plants. They incorporate all the second protection group, and functions that are not used, can be
necessary protective functions and are especially suitable for the masked out.
2 protection of:
Asynchronous motor
Besides differential protection, this function package includes
all protection functions needed to protect large asynchronous
3 – Private power stations using regenerative energy sources such
as wind or biogases
motors (more than 1 MVA). Stator and bearing temperatures are
measured by a separate thermo-box and are transmitted serially
– Power generation with diesel generators to the protection unit for evaluation.
– Gas turbine power stations
Transformer
4 – Industrial power stations
This scope of functions not only includes differential and
– Conventional steam power stations.
overcurrent protection, but also a number of protection func-
They can also be employed for protection of motors and tions that permit monitoring of voltage and frequency stress, for
instance. The reverse-power protection can be used for energy
5 transformers.
The numerous other additional functions assist the user in
recovery monitoring of parallel-connected transformers.
ensuring cost-effective system management and reliable power

supply. Measured values display current operating conditions.
6 Stored status indications and fault recording provide assistance
in fault diagnosis not only in the event of a disturbance in
Construction
generator operation. The SIPROTEC 4 units have a uniform design and a degree of
functionality which represents a whole new quality in protection
Combination of the units makes it possible to implement effec- and control.
7 tive redundancy concepts.
Local operation has been designed according to ergonomic cri-
Protection functions teria. Large, easy-to-read displays were a major design aim. The
7UM623 is equipped with a graphic display thus providing and
Numerous protection functions are necessary for reliable protec-
depicting more information especially in industrial applications.
8 tion of electrical machines. Their extent and combination are
determined by a variety of factors, such as machine size, mode
The DIGSI 4 operating program considerably simplifies planning
and engineering and reduces commissioning times.
of operation, plant configuration, availability requirements,
experience and design philosophy. The 7UM621 and 7UM623 are configured in 1/2 19 inches
9 This results in multifunctionality, which is implemented in
width. This means that the units of previous models can be
replaced. The height throughout all housing width increments
outstanding fashion by numerical technology.
is 243 mm.
In order to satisfy differing requirements, the combination of
All wires are connected directly or by means of ring-type cable
10 functions is scalable (see Table 11/3). Selection is facilitated by
division into five groups.
lugs. Alternatively, versions with plug-in terminals are also avail-
able. These permit the use of prefabricated cable harnesses.
Generator Basic In the case of panel surface mounting, the connecting terminals
are in the form of screw-type terminals at top and bottom. The
11 One application concentrates on small and medium generators
for which differential protection is required. The function mix communication interfaces are also arranged on the same sides.
is also suitable as backup protection. Protection of synchronous
motors is a further application.
12 Generator Standard
In the case of medium-size generators (10 to 100 MVA) in a unit
connection, this scope of functions offers all necessary protec-
tion functions. Besides inadvertent energization protection, it
13 also includes powerful backup protection for the transformer or
the power system. The scope of protection is also suitable for
LSP2166-afp.tif
units in the second protection group.
14 Generator Full
Here, all protection functions are available and the main applica-
tion focuses on large block units (more than 100 MVA). The
function mix includes all necessary protection functions for the Fig. 11/35 Rear view with wiring terminal safety cover and serial
15 interface

Protection functions Abbreviation ANSI No. Gene- Gene- Gene- Motor Trans-
1
rator rator rator Asyn- former
Basic Standard Full chronous
Current differential protection ∆I 87G/87T/87M
Stator ground-fault protection non-directional, V0>, 3I0> 59N, 64G
2
directional \(V0, 3I0) 67G
Sensitive ground-fault protection IEE> 50/51GN
(also rotor ground-fault protection) (64R)
Sensitive ground-fault prot. B (e.g. shaft current prot.) IEE-B> IEE-B< 51GN
3
Stator overload protection I 2t 49
Definite-time overcurrent prot. with undervolt. seal-in I> +V< 51
Definite-time overcurrent protection, directional I>>, Direc. 50/51/67 4
Inverse-time overcurrent protection t = f(I)+V< 51V
Overvoltage protection V> 59
Undervoltage protection
V<, t = f(V)
f<, f>
27
81

5
Reverse-power protection -P 32R

Overexcitation protection (Volt/Hertz)
Fuse failure monitor
V/f
V2/V1, I2/I1
24
60FL
6
External trip coupling Incoup. 4 4 4 4 4
Trip circuit supervision T.C.S. 74TC
Forward-power protection P>, P< 32F 7
Underexcitation protection (loss-of-field protection) 1/xd 40
Negative-sequence protection I2>, t = f(I2) 46
Breaker failure protection Imin> 50BF 8
Motor starting time supervision Istart2t 48
Restart inhibit for motors I 2t 66, 49 Rotor
Rotor ground-fault protection (fn, R-measuring)
Inadvertent energization protection
R, V<
64R (fn)
50/27

9
100 % stator ground-fault protection with 3rd V0 (3rd harm.) 59TN, 27TN 3rd
harmonics h
Impedance protection with (I>+V<) pickup Z< 21 10
Interturn protection UInterturn> 59N(IT)
DC voltage / DC current time protection Vdc > 59N (DC)
Idc > 51N (DC)
Overcurrent protection during startup I> 51 11
(for gas turbines)
Ground-current differential protection ∆Ie 87GN/TN 1) 1) 1) 1)
Out-of-step protection
Rotor ground-fault protection
∆Z/∆t
RREF<
78
64R (1 – 3 Hz) 1) 1)

1)
12
(1 – 3 Hz square wave voltage)
100 % stator ground-fault protection with 20 Hz voltage RSEF< 64G (100 %) 1) 1) 1)
Rate-of-frequency-change protection df/dt > 81R 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 13
Vector jump supervision (voltage) ∆φ > 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
Threshold supervision
Supervision of phase rotation
Undercurrent via CFC
A, B, C
I<
47
37

14
External temperature monitoring via serial interface ϑ (Thermo-box) 38
1) Optional for all function groups.
15
Table 11/3 Scope of functions of the 7UM62

Current differential protection

(ANSI 87G, 87M, 87T)
1 This function provides undelayed short-
circuit protection for generators, motors
and transformers, and is based on the
current differential protection principle
2 (Kirchhoff’s current law).
The differential and restraint (stabiliza-
tion) current are calculated on the basis
of the phase currents. Optimized digital
3 filters reliably attenuate disturbances such
as aperiodic component and harmonics.
The high resolution of measured quanti-
ties permits recording of low differential
4 currents (10 % of IN) and thus a very high
sensitivity.
An adjustable restraint characteristic
permits optimum adaptation to the condi-
5 tions of the protected object. Software is
Fig. 11/36 Restraint characteristic of current differential protection
used to correct the possible mismatch of
the current transformers and the phase
angle rotation through the transformer
6 (vector group). Thanks to harmonic
analysis of the differential current, inrush
(second harmonic) and overexcitation
(fifth harmonic) are reliably detected, and
7 unwanted operation of the differential
protection is prevented. The current of
internal short-circuits is reliably measured
by a fast measuring stage (IDiff>>), which
operates with two mutually complemen-
8 tary measuring processes. An external
short-circuit with transformer saturation
is picked up by a saturation detector with
time and status monitoring. It becomes
9 active when the differential current (IDiff)
moves out of the add-on restraint area.
If a motor is connected, this is detected by
monitoring the restraint current and the
10 restraint characteristic is briefly raised.
Fig. 11/37 Restraint characteristic of ground-current differential protection
This prevents false tripping in the event
of unequal current transmission by the
current transformers.
11 Figure 11/36 shows the restraint characteristic and various DC components in particular are suppressed by means of
areas. specially dimensioned filters. A number of monitoring processes
avoid unwanted operation in the event of external short-circuits.
Ground-current differential protection (ANSI 87GN, 87TN) In the case of a sensitive setting, multiple measurement ensures
12 The ground-current differential protection permits high sensitiv- the necessary reliability.
ity to single-pole faults. The zero currents are compared. On the However, attention must be drawn to the fact that the sensitivity
one hand, the zero-sequence current is calculated on the basis limits are determined by the current transformers.
of the phase currents and on the other hand, the ground current
13 is measured directly at the star-point current transformer. The protection function is only used on generators when the
neutral point is grounded with a low impedance. In the case of
The differential and restraint quantity is generated and fitted transformers, it is connected on the neutral side. Low imped-
into the restraint characteristic (see Fig. 11/37). ance or solid grounding is also required.
14
15
Definite-time overcurrent protection I>, I>> (ANSI 50, 51, 67)

This protection function comprises the short-circuit protection
for the generator and also the backup protection for upstream 1
devices such as transformers or power system protection.
An undervoltage stage at I> maintains the pickup when, during
the fault, the current drops below the threshold. In the event of
a voltage drop on the generator terminals, the static excitation
2
system can no longer be sufficiently supplied. This is one reason
for the decrease of the short-circuit current.
The I>> stage can be implemented as high-set instantaneous
trip stage. With the integrated directional function it can be used
3
as backup protection on the transformer high-voltage side. With
the information of the directional element, impedance protec-
Fig. 11/38 Characteristic of negative-sequence protection
tion can be controlled via the CFC.
4
Inverse-time overcurrent protection (ANSI 51V)
Available inverse-time characteristics
This function also comprises short-circuit and backup protection Characteristics ANSI IEC 60255-3
and is used for power system protection with current-dependent
protection devices.
Inverse • • 5
IEC and ANSI characteristics can be selected (Table 11/4).
The current function can be controlled by evaluating the genera-
tor terminal voltage.
Extremely inverse
Definite inverse
•
•
•
6
The “controlled” version releases the sensitive set current stage.
Table 11/4
With the “restraint” version, the pickup value of the current is
lowered linearly with decreasing voltage. 7
The fuse failure monitor prevents unwanted operation. Underexcitation protection (Loss-of-field protection)
(ANSI 40)
Stator overload protection (ANSI 49)
The task of the overload protection is to protect the stator
Derived from the generator terminal voltage and current,
the complex admittance is calculated and corresponds to the
8
windings of generators and motors from high, continuous generator diagram scaled in per unit. This protection prevents
overload currents. All load variations are evaluated by a damage due to loss of synchronism resulting from underexcita-
mathematical model. The thermal effect of the r.m.s. current
value forms the basis of the calculation. This conforms to
tion. The protection function provides three characteristics for
monitoring static and dynamic stability. Via a transducer, the 9
IEC 60255-8. excitation voltage (see Figure 11/52) can be injected and, in the
In dependency of the current, the cooling time constant is event of failure, a swift reaction of the protection function can
automatically extended. If the ambient temperature or the be achieved by timer changeover.
temperature of the coolant are injected via a transducer (TD2)
or PROFIBUS DP, the model automatically adapts to the The straight-line characteristics allow the protection to be opti-
10
ambient conditions; otherwise a constant ambient temperature mally adapted to the generator diagram (see Figure 11/39). The
is assumed. per-unit-presentation of the diagram allows the setting values to
Negative-sequence protection (ANSI 46)

be directly read out.
The positive-sequence systems of current and voltage are used
11
Asymmetrical current loads in the three phases of a generator to calculate the admittance. This ensures that the protection
cause a temperature rise in the rotor because of the negative- always operates correctly even with asymmetrical network
sequence field produced. conditions.
12
This protection detects an asymmetrical load in three-phase If the voltage deviates from the rated voltage, the admittance
generators. It functions on the basis of symmetrical components calculation has the advantage that the characteristics move in
and evaluates the negative sequence of the phase currents. the same direction as the generator diagram.
The thermal processes are taken into account in the algorithm
and form the inverse characteristic. In addition, the negative
13
sequence is evaluated by an independent stage (alarm and trip)
which is supplemented by a time-delay element (see Fig. 11/38).
In the case of motors, the protection function is also used to
monitor a phase failure.
14
15
Reverse-power protection (ANSI 32R)
1 The reverse-power protection monitors the direction of active

power flow and picks up when the mechanical energy fails. This
function can be used for operational shut-down (sequential
tripping) of the generator but also prevents damage to the
steam turbines. The reverse power is calculated from the
2 positive-sequence systems of current and voltage. Asymmetrical
power system faults therefore do not cause reduced measuring
accuracy. The position of the emergency trip valve is injected as
binary information and is used to switch between two trip
3 command delays. When applied for motor protection, the sign
(±) of the active power can be reversed via parameters.
Fig. 11/39 Characteristic of underexcitation protection
4 Monitoring of the active power produced by a generator can be

useful for starting up and shutting down generators. One stage
monitors exceeding of a limit value, while another stage moni-
tors falling below another limit value. The power is calculated
5 using the positive-sequence component of current and voltage.

The function can be used to shut down idling motors.
Impedance protection (ANSI 21)
6 This fast short-circuit protection protects the generator and

the unit transformer and is a backup protection for the power
system. This protection has two settable impedance stages; in
addition, the first stage can be switched over via binary input.
With the circuit-breaker in the “open” position the impedance
7 measuring range can be extended (see Figure 11/40).
Fig. 11/40 Grading of impedance protection
The overcurrent pickup element with undervoltage seal-in Frequency protection (ANSI 81)
ensures a reliable pickup and the loop selection logic ensures a
8 reliable detection of the faulty loop. With this logic it is possible

to perform correct measurement via the unit transformer.
The frequency protection prevents impermissible stress of the
equipment (e.g. turbine) in case of under or overfrequency. It
also serves as a monitoring and control element.
The function has four stages; the stages can be implemented
9 The undervoltage protection evaluates the positive-sequence
components of the voltages and compares them with the
either as underfrequency or overfrequency protection. Each
threshold values. There are two stages available.
Even in the event of voltage distortion, the frequency measur-
The undervoltage function is used for asynchronous motors ing algorithm reliably identifies the fundamental waves and
10 and pumped-storage stations and prevents the voltage-related
instability of such machines.
determines the frequency extremely precisely. Frequency
The function can also be used for monitoring purposes. Overexcitation protection Volt/Hertz (ANSI 24)
11 Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59) The overexcitation protection serves for detection of an
unpermissible high induction (proportional to V/f) in generators
or transformers, which leads to thermal overloading. This may
voltage is too high.
occur when starting up, shutting down under full load, with
12 Either the maximum line-to-line voltages or the phase-to-ground

voltages (for low-voltage generators) can be evaluated. The
weak systems or under isolated operation. The inverse character-
istic can be set via eight points derived from the manufacturer
measuring results of the line-to-line voltages are independent data.
of the neutral point displacement caused by ground faults. This
In addition, a definite-time alarm stage and an instantaneous
function is implemented in two stages.
13 stage can be used. For calculation of the V/f ratio, frequency and
also the highest of the three line-to-line voltages are used. The
frequency range that can be monitored comprises 11 to 69 Hz.
14
15
90 % stator ground-fault protection, non-directional,

directional (ANSI 59N, 64G, 67G)
Ground faults manifest themselves in generators that are oper- 1
ated in isolation by the occurence of a displacement voltage.
In case of unit connections, the displacement voltage is an
adequate, selective criterion for protection.
For the selective ground-fault detection, the direction of the
2
flowing ground current has to be evaluated too, if there is a
direct connection between generator and busbar.
The protection relay measures the displacement voltage at a
VT located at the transformer star point or at the broken delta
Fig. 11/41 Logic diagram of breaker failure protection
3
winding of a VT. As an option, it is also possible to calculate the
zero-sequence voltage from the phase-to-ground voltages. Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)
Depending on the load resistor selection, 90 to 95 % of the
stator winding of a generator can be protected.
In the event of scheduled downtimes or a fault in the generator,
the generator can remain on line if the circuit-breaker is defec-
4
tive and could suffer substantial damage.
A sensitive current input is available for ground-current measure-
ment. This input should be connected to a core-balance current Breaker failure protection evaluates a minimum current and the
transformer. The fault direction is deduced from the displace- circuit-breaker auxiliary contact. It can be started by internal 5
ment voltage and ground current. The directional characteristic protective tripping or externally via binary input. Two-channel
(straight line) can be easily adapted to the system conditions. activation avoids overfunction (see Figure 11/41).
Effective protection for direct connection of a generator to a
busbar can therefore be established. During startup, it is possible
to switch over from the directional to the displacement voltage
Inadvertent energization protection (ANSI 50, 27) 6
This protection has the function of limiting the damage of the
measurement via an externally injected signal. generator in the event of an unintentional switch-on of the
Depending on the protection setting, various ground-fault circuit-breaker, whether the generator is standing still or rotating
protection concepts can be implemented with this function without being excited or synchronized. If the power system
voltage is connected, the generator starts as an asynchronous
7
(see Figures 11/51 to 11/54).
machine with a large slip and this leads to excessively high
Sensitive ground-fault protection (ANSI 50/51GN, 64R) currents in the rotor.
The sensitive ground-current input can also be used as separate A logic circuit consisting of sensitive current measurement for 8
ground-fault protection. It is of two-stage form. Secondary each phase, measured value detector, time control and block-
ground currents of 2 mA or higher can be reliably handled. ing as of a minimum voltage, leads to an instantaneous trip
command. If the fuse failure monitor responds, this function is
Alternatively, this input is also suitable as rotor ground-fault
protection. A voltage with rated frequency (50 or 60 Hz) is
ineffective. 9
connected in the rotor circuit via the interface unit 7XR61. If Rotor ground-fault protection (ANSI 64R)
a higher ground current is flowing, a rotor ground fault has
occurred. Measuring circuit monitoring is provided for this This protection function can be realized in three ways with
application (see Figure 11/56). the 7UM62. The simplest form is the method of rotor-current
measurement (see sensitive ground-current measurement).
10
100 % stator ground-fault protection with 3rd harmonic
Resistance measurement at system-frequency voltage
(ANSI 59TN, 27TN (3rd H.))
Owing to the creative design, the generator produces a 3rd har-
The second form is rotor ground resistance measurement with
voltage at system frequency (see Fig. 11/56). This protection
11
monic that forms a zero phase-sequence system. It is verifiable
measures the voltage injected and the flowing rotor ground
by the protection on a broken delta winding or on the neutral
current. Taking into account the complex impedance from the
transformer. The magnitude of the voltage amplitude depends
on the generator and its operation.
coupling device (7XR61), the rotor ground resistance is calcu-
lated by way of a mathematical model. By means of this method, 12
In the event of an ground fault in the vicinity of the neutral the disturbing influence of the rotor ground capacitance is
point, there is a change in the amplitude of the 3rd harmonic eliminated, and sensitivity is increased. Fault resistance values
voltage (dropping in the neutral point and rising at the termi- up to 30 kΩ can be measured if the excitation voltage is without
nals). disturbances. Thus, a two-stage protection function, which
features a warning and a tripping stage, can be realized. An
13
Depending on the connection the protection must be set
additionally implemented undercurrent stage monitors the rotor
either as undervoltage or overvoltage protection. It can also be
circuit for open circuit and issues an alarm.
delayed. So as to avoid overfunction, the active power and the
positive-sequence voltage act as enabling criteria. 14
The picked-up threshold of the voltage stage is restrained by the
active power. This increases sensitivity at low load.
The final protection setting can be made only by way of a
primary test with the generator.
15
Resistance measurement with a square wave voltage of 1 to 3 Hz ⎛ I ⎞2

tTrip = ⎜ start ⎟ ⋅ t start max
⎝ I rms ⎠
1 A higher sensitivity is required for larger generators. On the one
hand, the disturbing influence of the rotor ground capacitance tTrip Tripping time
must be eliminated more effectively and, on the other hand, the Istart Permissible start-up current
noise ratio with respect to the harmonics (e.g. sixth harmonic)
tstart max Permissible start-up time
of the excitation equipment must be increased. Injecting a low-
2 frequency square wave voltage into the rotor circuit has proven Irms Measured r.m.s. current value
itself excellently here (see Figure 11/57). Calculation is not started until the current Irms is higher than an
The square wave voltage injected through the controlling unit adjustable response value (e.g. 2 IN, MOTOR).
7XT71 leads to permanent recharging of the rotor ground capac-
3 itance. By way of a shunt in the controlling unit, the flowing
If the permissible locked-rotor time is less than the permissible
start-up time (motors with a thermally critical rotor), a binary
ground current is measured and is injected into the protection signal is set to detect a locked rotor by means of a tachometer
unit (measurement input). In the absence of a fault (RE ≈ ∞), the generator. This binary signal releases the set locked-rotor time,
rotor ground current after charging of the ground capacitance is
4 close to zero. In the event of an ground fault, the fault resistance
including the coupling resistance (7XR6004), and also the
and tripping occurs after it has elapsed.
DC voltage time protection/DC current time protection

injecting voltage, defines the stationary current. The current (ANSI 59N (DC) 51N (DC))
square wave voltage and the frequency are measured via the
5 second input (control input). Fault resistance values up to 80
kΩ can be measured by this measurement principle. The rotor
Hydroelectric generators or gas turbines are started by way of
frequency starting converters. An ground fault in the intermedi-
ground circuit is monitored for discontinuities by evaluation of ate circuit of the frequency starting converter causes DC voltage
the current during the polarity reversals. displacement and thus a direct current. As the neutral or
grounding transformers have a lower ohmic resistance than the
6 100% stator ground-fault protection with 20 Hz injection voltage transformers, the largest part of the direct current flows
through them, thus posing a risk of destruction from thermal
(ANSI 64 G (100%))
overloading.
Injecting a 20 Hz voltage to detect ground faults even at the
As shown in Fig. 11/55, the direct current is measured by means
7 neutral point of generators has proven to be a safe and reliable
method. Contrary to the third harmonic criterion (see page 11/8), of a shunt transformer (measuring transducer) connected
it is independent of the generator’s characteristics and the mode directly to the shunt. Voltages or currents are fed to the 7UM62
of operation. Measurement is also possible during system standstill depending on the version of the measuring transducer. The
(Fig. 11/56). measurement algorithm filters out the DC component and takes
8 This protection function is designed so as to detect both ground
the threshold value decision. The protection function is active as
from 0 Hz.
faults in the entire generator (genuine 100 %) and all electrically
connected system components. If the measuring transducer transmits a voltage for protection,
the connection must be interference-free and must be kept short.
9 The protection unit measures the injected 20 Hz voltage and the
flowing 20 Hz current. The disturbing variables, for example sta- The implemented function can also be used for special applica-
tor ground capacitance, are eliminated by way of a mathematical tions. Thus, the r.m.s. value can be evaluated for the quantity
model, and the ohmic fault resistance is determined. applied at the input over a wide frequency range.
10 On the one hand, this ensures high sensitivity and, on the other
hand, it permits use of generators with large ground capacitance
Overcurrent protection during start-up (ANSI 51)
values, e.g. large hydroelectric generators. Phase-angle errors Gas turbines are started by means of frequency starting
through the grounding or neutral transformer are measured converters. Overcurrent protection during start-up measures
11 during commissioning and are corrected in the algorithm. short-circuits in the lower frequency level (as from about 5 Hz)
and is designed as independent overcurrent-time protection.
The protection function has a warning and tripping stage. The The pickup value is set below the rated current. The function
measurement circuit is also monitored and failure of the 20 Hz is only active during start-up. If frequencies are higher than
generator is measured. 10 Hz, sampling frequency correction takes effect and the
12 Independent of ground resistance calculation, the protection further short-circuit protection functions are active.
function additionally evaluates the amount of the r.m.s. current
Out-of-step protection (ANSI 78)
value.
This protection function serves to measure power swings in
13 Starting time supervision (motor protection only) (ANSI 48) the system. If generators feed to a system short-circuit for too
Starting time supervision protects the motor against long long, low frequency transient phenomena (active power swings)
unwanted start-ups, which might occur as a result of excessive between the system and the generator may occur after fault
load torque or excessive voltage drops within the motor, or if the clearing. If the center of power swing is in the area of the block
14 rotor is locked. unit, the “active power surges” lead to unpermissible mechanical
stressing of the generator and the turbine.
The tripping time is dependent on the square of the start-up cur-
rent and the set start-up time (Inverse Characteristic). It adapts As the currents and voltages are symmetrical, the positive-
sequence impedance is calculated on the basis of their
15 itself to the start-up with reduced voltage. The tripping time is
determined in accordance with the following formula: positive-sequence components and the impedance trajectory
is evaluated. Symmetry is also monitored by evaluation of the

between the system owner and the in-plant generator. If the

incoming line fails as the result of auto-reclosure, for instance,
a voltage or frequency deviation may occur depending on the
power balance at the feeding generator. Asynchronous condi-
1
tions may arise in the event of connection, which may lead to
damage on the generator or the gearing between the generator
and the turbine. Besides the classic criteria such as voltage and
frequency, the following two criteria are also applied: vector
2
jump, rate-of-frequency-change protection.
Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81)

The frequency difference is determined on the basis of the
3
calculated frequency over a time interval. It corresponds to the
momentary rate-of-frequency change. The function is designed
so that it reacts to both positive and negative rate-of-frequency
changes. Exceeding of the permissible rate-of-frequency change 4
is monitored constantly. Release of the relevant direction
depends on whether the actual frequency is above or below the
rated frequency. In total, four stages are available, and can be
used optionally. 5
Vector jump
Monitoring the phase angle in the voltage is a criterion for
Fig. 11/42 Ranges of the characteristic and possible oscillation profiles
identifying an interrupted infeed. If the incoming line should
fail, the abrupt current discontinuity leads to a phase angle jump
6
negative-phase-sequence current. Two characteristics in the R/X in the voltage. This is measured by means of a delta process. The
diagram describe the active range (generator, unit transformer command for opening the generator or coupler circuit-breaker is
or power system) of the out-of-step protection. The associated
counters are incremented depending on the range of the
issued if the set threshold is exceeded.
7
characteristic in which the impedance vector enters or departs. Restart inhibit for motors (ANSI 66, 49Rotor)
Tripping occurs when the set counter value is reached.
When cold or at operating temperature, motors may only be
The counters are automatically reset if power swing no longer
occurs after a set time. By means of an adjustable pulse, every
connected a certain number of times in succession. The start-up
current causes heat development in the rotor which is monitored
8
power swing can be signaled. Expansion of the characteristic by the restart inhibit function.
in the R direction defines the power swing angle that can be
Contrary to classical counting methods, in the restart inhibit
measured. An angle of 120 ° is practicable. The characteristic
can be tilted over an adjustable angle to adapt to the conditions
function the heat and cooling phenomena in the rotor are simu-
lated by a thermal replica. The rotor temperature is determined
9
prevailing when several parallel generators feed into the system.
on the basis of the stator currents. Restart inhibit permits restart
Inverse undervoltage protection (ANSI 27) of the motor only if the rotor has enough thermal reserve for a
Motors tend to fall out of step when their torque is less than
completely new start. Fig. 11/43 illustrates the thermal profile
for a permissible triple start out of the cold state. If the thermal
10
the breakdown torque. This, in turn, depends on the voltage. reserve is too low, the restart inhibit function issues a blocking
On the one hand, it is desirable to keep the motors connected signal with which the motor starting circuit can be blocked. The
to the system for as long as possible while, on the other hand, blockage is canceled again after cooling down and the thermal
the torque should not fall below the breakdown level. This
protection task is realized by inverse undervoltage protection.
value has dropped below the pickup threshold. 11
The inverse characteristic is started if the voltage is less than the As the fan provides no forced cooling when the motor is off, it
pickup threshold Vp<. The tripping time is inversely proportional cools down more slowly. Depending on the operating state, the
to the voltage dip (see equation). The protection function uses
the positive-sequence voltage, for the protection decision.
protection function controls the cooling time constant. A value
below a minimum current is an effective changeover criterion. 12
I Sensitive ground-fault protection B (ANSI 51 GN)
tTRIP = ⋅ TM
V
I−
VP
The IEE-B sensitive ground-fault protection feature of 7UM62
provides greater flexibility and can be used for the following 13
tTRIP Tripping time applications:
V Voltage • Any kind of ground-fault current supervision to detect ground
Vp
TM
Pickup value
Time multiplier
faults (fundamental and 3rd harmonics)
• Protection against load resistances
14
• Shaft current protection in order to detect shaft currents of the
System disconnection generator shaft and prevent that bearings take damage.
Take the case of in-plant generators feeding directly into a
system. The incoming line is generally the legal entity boundary
The sensitive ground-current protection IEE-B uses either the hard- 15
ware input IEE1 or IEE2. These inputs are designed in a way that

allows them to cut off currents greater than

1.6 A (thermal limit, see technical data). This
1 has to be considered for the applications or
for the selection of the current transformers.
The shaft current protection function is of
particular interest in conjunction with hydro-
2 electric generators. Due to their construction,
the hydroelectric generators have relatively
long shafts. A number of factors such as
friction, magnetic fields of the generators and
3 others can build up a voltage across the shaft
which then acts as voltage source (electro-
motive force-emf). This inducted voltage of
approx. 10 to 30 V is dependent on the load,
4 the system and the machine.

If the oil film covering a bearing is too
thin, breakdown can occur. Due to the low
resistance (shaft, bearing and grounding),
5 high currents may flow that destroy the bear-
ing. Past experience has shown that currents
greater than 1 A are critical for the bearings. Fig. 11/43 Temperature characteristic at rotor and thermal replica of the rotor
As different bearings can be affected, the cur- (multiple start-ups)
6 rent entering the shaft is detected by means

of a special transformer (folding transformer).
Phase rotation reversal
Interturn protection (ANSI 59N (IT))
If the relay is used in a pumped-storage power plant, matching
7 The interturn fault protection detects faults between turns

within a generator winding (phase). This situation may involve
to the prevailing rotary field is possible via a binary input (gen-
erator/motor operation via phase rotation reversal).
relatively high circulating currents that flow in the short-
circuited turns and damage the winding and the stator. The 2 pre-definable parameter groups
protection function is characterized by a high sensitivity.
8 The displacement voltage is measured at the open delta winding
In the protection, the setting values can be stored in two data
sets. In addition to the standard parameter group, the second
by means of 3 two-phase isolated voltage transformers. So as to group is provided for certain operating conditions (pumped-
be insensitive towards ground faults, the isolated voltage trans- storage power stations). It can be activated via binary input,
local control or DIGSI 4.
9 former star point has to be connected to the generator star point
by means of a high-voltage cable. The voltage transformer star
Lockout (ANSI 86)
point must not be grounded since this implies that the generator
star point, too, would be grounded with the consequence that All binary outputs (alarm or trip relays) can be stored like LEDs
each fault would lead to a single-pole ground fault. and reset using the LED reset key. The lockout state is also stored
10 In the event of an interturn fault, the voltage in the affected in the event of supply voltage failure. Reclosure can only occur
phase will be reduced causing a displacement voltage that is after the lockout state is reset.
detected at the broken delta winding. The sensitivity is limited
Fuse failure and other monitoring
rather by the winding asymmetries than by the protection unit.
11 An FIR filter determines the fundamental component of the
voltage based an the scanned displacement voltage. Selecting
an appropriate window function has the effect that the sensitiv- The measuring circuits, analog-digital conversion, power supply
12 ity towards higher-frequency oscillations is improved and the

disturbing influence of the third harmonic is eliminated while
voltages, memories and software sequence (watch-dog) are all
monitored.
achieving the required measurement sensitivity.
The fuse failure function detects failure of the measuring voltage
External trip coupling due to short-circuit or open circuit of the wiring or VT and avoids
13 For recording and processing of external trip information, there
overfunction of the undervoltage elements in the protection
functions.
are 4 binary inputs. They are provided for information from the
Buchholz relay or generator-specific commands and act like a The positive and negative-sequence system (voltage and cur-
protection function. Each input initiates a fault event and can be rent) are evaluated.
14 individually delayed by a timer.
Filter time
Trip circuit supervision (ANSI 74TC) All binary inputs can be subjected to a filter time (indication
One or two binary inputs can be used for monitoring the circuit- suppression).
15 breaker trip coil including its incoming cables. An alarm signal
occurs whenever the circuit is interrupted.

Communication
Communication
With respect to communication, particular emphasis has been 1

one hand, and on the other hand provides openness for future
2
Local PC interface
The PC interface accessible from the front of the unit permits
quick access to all parameters and fault event data. The use
3
of the DIGSI 4 operating program during commissioning is
particularly advantageous.
Rear-mounted interfaces 4
Two communication modules on the rear of the unit incorporate Fig. 11/44 IEC 60870-5-103 star-type RS232 copper conductor
optional equipment complements and permit retrofitting. They connection or fiber-optic connection
assure the ability to comply with the requirements of different
5
(IEC 60870, PROFIBUS, DIGSI).
Service interface (fixed)

6
In the RS485 version, several protection units can be centrally
operated with DIGSI 4. By using a modem, remote control is pos-
sible. This provides advantages in fault clearance, in particular in
unmanned substations.
7
System interface
8
designs. Furthermore, the units can exchange data through this
operated by DIGSI.
9
IEC 61850 protocol
dard for protection and control systems used by power supply
Fig. 11/45 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet
and IEC 61850, fiber-optic ring 10
corporations. Siemens is of the first manufacturer to support
dancy procedures which are available for the ethernet modules,
such as RSTP, PRP or HSR, are also available for PROFINET. 11
the units via the Ethernet bus will also be possible with DIGSI. The time synchronization is made via SNTP. The network
monitoring is possible via SNMP V2 where special MIB files exist
IEC 60870-5-103 for PROFINET. The LLDP protocol of the device also supports the
IEC 60870-5-103 is an internationally standardized protocol for monitoring of the network topology. Single-point indications, 12
communication in the protected area. double-point indications, measured and metered values can be
transmitted cyclically in the monitoring direction via the protocol
IEC 60870-5-103 is supported by a number of protection unit and can be selected by the user with DIGSI 4. Important events
manufacturers and is used worldwide. are also transmitted spontaneously via confi gurable process
alarms. Switching commands can be executed by the system
13
The generator protection functions are stored in the manufac-
turer-specific, published part of the protocol. control via the device in the controlling direction.
The PROFINET implementation is certified. The device also sup-
PROFINET ports the IEC 61850 protocol as a server on the same ethernet
module in addition to the PROFINET protocol. Client server
14
PROFINET is the ethernet-based successor of Profi bus DP and
is supported in the variant PROFINET IO. The protocol which connections are possible for the intercommunication between
is used in industry together with the SIMATIC systems control devices, e.g. for transmitting fault records and GOOSE messages.
is realized on the optical and electrical Plus ethernet modules
which are delivered since November 2012. All network redun-
15
Communication
PROFIBUS DP
LSP2163-afpen.tif
LSP2162-afpen.tif
1 PROFIBUS is an internationally standardized
communication protocol (EN 50170). PRO-
FIBUS is supported internationally by several
hundred manufacturers and has to date been
used in more than 1,000,000 applications all
2 over the world.
With the PROFIBUS DP, the protection can be
directly connected to a SIMATIC S5/S7. The
transferred data are fault data, measured
3 values and information from or to the logic
(CFC).
Fig. 11/46 RS232/RS485 Fig. 11/47 820 nm fiber-optic communication
MODBUS RTU Electrical communication module module
4 MODBUS is also a widely utilized com-

munication standard and is used in numerous
automation solutions.
5 DNP 3.0
LSP2164-afpen.tif
LSP3.01-0021.eps
DNP 3.0 (Distributed Network Protocol ver-
sion 3) is a messaging-based communication
protocol. The SIPROTEC 4 units are fully Level
6 1 and Level 2 compliant with DNP 3.0. DNP
3.0 is supported by a number of protection
device manufacturers. Fig. 11/48 PROFIBUS communication Fig. 11/49 Optical Ethernet communication
module optical, double-ring module for IEC 61850 with
7 Safe bus architecture
• RS485 bus
With this data transmission via copper

conductors, electromagnetic interference
8 influences are largely eliminated by the use

of twisted-pair conductor. Upon failure of
a unit, the remaining system continues to
operate without any faults.

The fiber-optic double ring circuit is immune
to electromagnetic interference. Upon
failure of a section between two units, the
communication system continues to operate
10 without disturbance.
System solution
SIPROTEC 4 is tailor-made for use in SIMATIC-
11 based automation systems.
Via the PROFIBUS DP, indications (pickup
and tripping) and all relevant operational
12 measured values are transmitted from the

protection unit.
Via modem and service interface, the protec-
tion engineer has access to the
13 protection devices at all times. This
permits remote maintenance and
enabling direct connection of units of other manufacturers to the Ethernet bus.
With IEC 61850, however, the units can also be used in other manufacturers'
diagnosis (cyclic testing). systems (see Fig. 11/45).
Parallel to this, local communication is pos-
14 sible, for example, during a major inspection. Analog output 0 to 20 mA
Alternatively to the serial interfaces up to two analog output modules (4 channels)
For IEC 61850, an interoperable system
solution is offered with SICAM PAS. Via the can be installed in the 7UM62.
100 Mbit/s Ethernet bus, the unit are linked Several operational measured values
15 with PAS electrically or optically to the station
PC. The interface is standardized, thus also
(I1, I2, V, P, Q, f, PF (cos φ), Θstator, Θrotor) can be selected and transmitted via the
0 to 20 mA interfaces.

Typical connections
Typical connections
Direct generator – busbar connection 1

Figure 11/51 illustrates the recommended
standard connection when several genera-
tors supply one busbar. Phase-to-ground
faults are disconnected by employing the 2
directional ground-fault criterion. The
ground-fault current is driven through the
cables of the system.
If this is not sufficient, an grounding trans- 3
former connected to the busbar supplies
the necessary current (maximum approxi-
mately 10 A) and permits a protection
range of up to 90 %. The ground-fault
current should be detected by means
4
of core-balance current transformers in
order to achieve the necessary sensitivity.
The displacement voltage can be used
as ground-fault criterion during starting 5
operations until synchronization is
achieved.
Differential protection embraces protection
of the generator and of the outgoing cable.
6
The permissible cable length and the cur-
rent transformer design (permissible load)
are mutually dependent. Recalculation is
advisable for lengths of more than 100 m. 7
10
11
12
13
Fig. 11/51
14
15
Typical connections

with low-resistance grounding
1 If the generator neutral point has low-
resistance grounding, the connection illus-
trated in Fig. 11/52 is recommended. In the
case of several generators, the resistance
2 must be connected to only one generator,
in order to prevent circulating currents
(3rd harmonic).
For selective ground-fault detection, the
3 ground-current input should be looped
into the common return conductor of the
two current transformer sets (differential
connection). The current transformers
4 must be grounded at only one point. The
displacement voltage VE is utilized as an
additional enabling criterion.
Balanced current transformers (calibration
5 of windings) are desirable with this form of
connection. In the case of higher generator
power (for example, IN approximately
2000 A), current transformers with a
6 secondary rated current of 5 A are recom-
mended.
Ground-current differential protection can
be used as an alternative (not illustrated).
7
10
Fig. 11/52
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
Unit connection with isolated star point

This configuration of unit connection is
a variant to be recommended (see Fig. 1
11/53). Ground-fault detection is effected
by means of the displacement voltage. In
order to prevent unwanted operation in the
event of ground faults in the system, a load
resistor must be provided at the broken
2
delta winding. Depending on the plant (or
substation), a voltage transformer with a
high power (VA) may in fact be sufficient.
If not, an grounding transformer should be
3
employed. The available measuring wind-
ing can be used for the purpose of voltage
measurement.
In the application example, differential
4
protection is intended for the generator.
The unit transformer is protected by its own
differential relay (e.g. 7UT612).
5
As indicated in the figure, additional pro-
tection functions are available for the other
inputs. They are used on larger generator/
transformer units (see also Figures 11/56
and 11/58).
6
10
11
12
Fig. 11/53
13
14
15
Typical connections
Unit connection with neutral

transformer
1 With this system configuration, disturbance
voltage reduction and damping in the
event of ground faults in the generator
area are effected by a load resistor con-
2 nected to the generator neutral point.
The maximum ground-fault current is lim-
ited to approximately 10 A. Configuration
can take the form of a primary or second-
3 ary resistor with neutral transformer. In
order to avoid low secondary resistance,
the transformation ratio of the neutral
transformer should be below
4 ⎛ VGen ⎞
⎜ 500 V ⎟
⎝ 3 ⎠
The higher secondary voltage can be

5 reduced by means of a voltage divider.
Electrically, the circuit is identical to the
configuration in Fig. 11/53.
6 In the application opposite, the differential

protection is designed as an overall func-
tion and embraces the generator and unit
transformer. The protection function carries
7 out vector group adaptation as well as
other adaptations.
10
11
12
13 Fig. 11/54
14
15
Typical connections
Voltage transformer in open delta

connection (V-connection)
Protection can also be implemented 1
on voltage transformers in open delta
connection (Fig. 11/55). If necessary,
the operational measured values for the
phase-to-ground voltages can be slightly
asymmetrical. If this is disturbing, the
2
neutral point (R16) can be connected to Fig. 11/55
ground via a capacitor.
In the case of open delta connection, it is 3
not possible to calculate the displacement
voltage from the secondary voltages. It
must be passed to the protection relay
along a different path (for example, voltage
transformer at the generator neutral point
4
or from the grounding transformer).
100 % stator ground-fault protection,

ground-fault protection during start-up 5
Fig. 11/56 illustrates the interfacing of
100 % stator ground-fault protection with
voltage injection of 20 Hz, as meant for the
example of the neutral transformer. The
6
same interfacing connection also applies to
the broken delta winding of the grounding
transformer.
The 20 Hz generator can be connected
7
both to the DC voltage and also to a power-
ful voltage transformer (>100 VA). The load
of the current transformer 4NC1225 should
not exceed 0.5 Ω.
8
The 7XT33, 7XT34 and load resistance
connection must be established with a
low resistance (RConnection < RL). If large
distances are covered, the devices are
9
accommodated in the grounding cubicle.
Connection of the DC voltage protection
function (TD 1) is shown for systems with
a starting converter. Depending on the
10
device selection, the 7KG6 boosts the
measured signal at the shunt to 10 V or
20 mA.
11
The TD 1 input can be jumpered to the
relevant signal.
Fig. 11/56 12
13
14
15
Typical connections
Rotor ground-fault protection with volt-

age injection at rated frequency
1 Fig. 11/57 shows the connection of rotor
ground-fault protection to a generator with
static excitation. If only the rotor current
is evaluated, there is no need for voltage
2 connection to the relay.
Ground must be connected to the ground-
ing brush. The external resistors 3PP1336
must be added to the coupling device
3 7XR61 if the circulating current can exceed
0.2 A as the result of excitation (sixth
harmonic). This is the case as from a rated
excitation voltage of >150 V, under worst-
4 case conditions.
Fig. 11/57
5 Rotor ground-fault protection with a

square wave voltage of 1 to 3 Hz
The measuring transducers TD1 and TD2
6 are used for this application. The control-
ling unit 7XT71 generates a square wave
voltage of about ± 50 V at the output. The
frequency can be jumpered and depends
7 on the rotor ground capacitance. Voltage

polarity reversal is measured via the control
input and the flowing circular current is
measured via the measurement input.
Ground must be connected to the ground-
8 ing brush.
9 Fig. 11/58
10
11
12
13
14
15
Typical connections
Protection of an asynchronous motor

Fig. 11/59 shows a typical connection
of the protection function to a large 1
asynchronous motor. Differential protection
embraces the motor including the cable.
Recalculation of the permissible current
transformer burden is advisable for lengths
of more than 100 m.
2
The voltage for voltage and displacement
voltage monitoring is generally tapped
off the busbar. If several motors are con- 3
nected to the busbar, ground faults can be
detected with the directional ground-fault
protection and selective tripping is possible.
A core balance current transformer is used
to detect the ground current. The chosen
4
pickup value must be slightly higher if
there are several cables in parallel.
The necessary shut-down of the motor in 5
the event of idling can be realized with
active power monitoring.
10
11
12
Fig. 11/59
13
14
15
Typical connections
Use of selected analog inputs IEE1 IEE2 VE
1 Several protection functions take recourse

to the same analog inputs, thus ruling
Sensitive ground-fault protection
Directional stator ground-fault protection
1) 1)

out certain functions depending on the
Rotor ground-fault protection (fn, R-measuring)
application. One input may only be used by
one protection function. A different combi- 100 % stator ground-fault protection with 20 Hz voltage
2 nation can be used by the unit belonging to
Protection Group 2, for example.
Ground-current differential protection 1) 1)
1) optional (either IEE1 or IEE2)

Multiple use refers to the sensitive ground-
current inputs and the displacement
3 voltage input (see Table 11/5).
Table 11/5 Multiple use of analog inputs
The same applies to the measuring trans- TD1 TD2 TD3

ducers (Table 11/6). Injection of excitation voltage
4 Current transformer requirements DC voltage time/DC current time protection
Injection of a temperature
The requirements imposed on the current
Rotor ground-fault protection (1 to 3 Hz)
transformer are determined by the differen-

5 tial protection function. The instantaneous
trip stage (IDiff>>) reliably masters (via the
Processing of analog values via CFC
instantaneous algorithm) any high-current Table 11/6 Multiple use of measuring transducers
internal short-circuits.
6 The external short-circuit determines

the requirements imposed on the cur-
Symmetrical short-circuit limiting factor
Required actual accuracy limiting factor Resulting rated accuracy limiting factor
rent transformer as a result of the DC IpSC Rʹ + RCT
K´SSC = Ktd Ã K SSC = b ⋅ Kʹ
component. The non-saturated period of Ipn RBN + RCT SSC
7 a flowing short-circuit current should be

at least 5 ms. Table 11/7 shows the design
recommendations. Current transformer requirements
IEC 60044-1 and 60044-6 were taken into Transformer Generator
8 account. The necessary equations are

shown for converting the requirements into
Transient dimensioning
factor Ktd
≥4
τN ≤ 100 ms
> (4 to 5)
τN > 100 ms
the knee- point voltages. The customary Symmetrical short-circuit 1 1
≈ ⋅I ≈ ⋅I
practice which presently applies should current Ipssc v sc pn, Tr x" d pn, G
9 also be used to determine the rated

primary current of the current transformer
Example vsc = 0.1
K'ssc > 40
x”d = 0.12
K'ssc > (34 to 42)
rated current. It should be greater than or
equal to the rated current of the protected Note: Rated power ≥ 10 or 15 VA Note:
Identical transformers have Example: Secondary winding resistance
object.
10 to be employed Network transformer
10P10: (10 or 15) VA
Example:
IN, G approx. 1000 to 2000 A
(Isn = 1 or 5 A) 5P15: 15 VA
(Isn = 1 or 5 A)
IN, G > 5 000 A
11 5P20: 30 VA
(Isn = 1 or 5 A)
Knee-point voltage
12 IEC British Standard ANSI
V = K SSC ( Rct + Rb ) I SN V=
(Rct + Rb )I SN ⋅ K K SSC
V = 20⋅ I SN ⋅ ( Rct + Rb )⋅
SSC
1.3 20
13 Ktd Rated transient dimensioning factor Rct
Isn = 5A (typical value)
Secondary winding resistance
Ipssc Primary symmetrical short-circuit current vsc Short-circuit voltage (impedance voltage)
Ipn Rated primary current (transformer) x”d Subtransient reactance
14 R'b
Rb
Connected burden
Rated resistive burden
Isn
tN
Rated secondary current (transformer)
Network time constant
Table 11/7 Multiple use of measuring transducers
15
Technical data
General unit data Output relays

Analog inputs
Rated frequency 50 or 60 Hz
Number
via jumper)
1
Rated current IN 1 or 5 A 7UM622 21 (1 NO, 5 optional as NC,
Ground current, sensitive IEmax 1.6 A via jumper)
Rated voltage VN
Measuring transducer
100 to 125 V
- 10 to + 10 V (Ri=1 MΩ) or
Switching capacity
Make 1000 W / VA 2
- 20 to + 20 mA (Ri = 10 Ω) Break 30 VA
Break (for resistive load) 40 W
Power consumption Break (for L/R ≤ 50 ms) 25 VA
With IN = 5 A
For sensitive ground current
Approx. 0.3 VA
Approx. 0.05 VA
Switching voltage
Permissible current
250 V
5 A continuous
3
Voltage inputs (with 100 V) Approx. 0.3 VA 30 A for 0.5 seconds
Capability in CT circuits LEDs
Thermal (r.m.s. values) 100 IN for 1 s
30 IN for 10 s
Number
RUN (green) 1
4
4 IN continuous
ERROR (red) 1
Dynamic (peak) 250 IN (one half cycle)
Assignable LED (red) 14
Ground current, sensitive 300 A for 1 s
100 A for 10 s
15 A continuous
Unit design
5
Dynamic (peak) 750 A (one half cycle) drawings, part 14
Capability in voltage paths 230 V continuous Degree of protection acc. to
Capability of measuring transducer
As voltage input 60 V continuous
EN 60529
For surface-mounting housing
IP 51 6
As current input 100 mA continuous
Front IP 51
Auxiliary voltage Rear IP 50
For the terminals IP 2x with terminal cover put on
Rated auxiliary voltage DC 24 to 48 V
DC 60 to 125 V Weight 7
DC 110 to 250 V Flush mounting housing
and AC 115 V/230 V with 50/60 Hz 7UM621 (½ x 19") Approx. 7 kg
Permitted tolerance –20 to +20 % 7UM622 ( x 19") Approx. 9.5 kg
Superimposed (peak-to-peak)
Power consumption
≤ 15 % Surface mounting housing
7UM621 (½ x 19") Approx. 12 kg
8
7UM622 ( x 19") Approx. 15 kg
During normal operation
7UM622
7UM623
During pickup with all inputs
Approx. 5.5 W
Approx. 8.1 W
Electrical tests
Specifications
9
and outputs activated Standards IEC 60255 (product standards)
7UM611 Approx. 12 W ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2
7UM612 Approx. 15 W
UL 508
DIN 57435, part 303
For further standards see below
10
voltage failure Insulation tests
at Vaux = 24 V and Vaux = 60 V
Binary inputs
≥ 20 ms
Voltage test (routine test) 2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50 Hz 11
All circuits except for auxiliary sup-
Number ply, binary inputs communication
7UM621, 7UM623 7 and time synchronization interfaces
7UM622
3 pickup thresholds
15
DC 10 to 19 V or DC 44 to 88 V
Voltage test (routine test)
Auxiliary voltage and binary inputs
3.5 kV
12
Range is selectable with jumpers DC 88 to 176 V1)
Voltage test (routine test) 500 V (r.m.s. value), 50 Hz
Maximum permissible voltage DC 300 V only isolated communication
Current consumption, energized Approx. 1.8 mA interfaces and time synchronization
interface
Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 μs; 0.5 J;
13
All circuits except for communication 3 positive and 3 negative impulses
interfaces and time synchronization at intervals of 1 s
interface, class III
14
15
Technical data
EMC tests for noise immunity; type test Mechanical stress tests
1 Standards IEC 60255-6, IEC 60255-22

(product standards)
During operation
DIN 57435 part 303 Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068
High frequency test 2.5 kV (peak value), 1 MHz; Vibration Sinusoidal
2 IEC 60255-22-1, class III

and DIN 57435 part 303, class III
τ = 15 ms
400 pulses per s; duration 2 s
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2
IEC 60068-2-6
10 to 60 Hz: ± 0.075 mm ampli-
tude;
Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge;
IEC 60255-22-2 class IV 15 kV air discharge;
EN 61000-4-2, class IV both polarities; 150 pF; Ri = 330 Ω
3 Irradiation with RF field,
non-modulated
10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
Half-sinusoidal
IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks each in both directions of
the 3 axes
Irradiation with RF field, amplitude- 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz; 80 % AM;
4 modulated, IEC 61000-4-3, class III 1 kHz
Irradiation with RF field, 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
IEC 60068-3-3
(horizontal axis)
pulse-modulated frequency 200 Hz; duty cycle 50 % 1 to 8 Hz: ± 1.5 mm amplitude
IEC 61000-4-3/ ENV 50204, class III (vertical axis)
Fast transient interference bursts 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; 8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
5 IEC 60255-22-4,
burst length = 15 ms; repetition
rate 300 ms; both polarities;
(horizontal axis)
Ri = 50 Ω; test duration 1 min (vertical axis)
6 (SURGE),
IEC 61000-4-5 installation, class III
Auxiliary supply Common (longitudinal) mode:
During transport
2 kV; 12 Ω, 9 μF
Differential (transversal) mode: Vibration Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 5 to 8 Hz: ±7.5 mm amplitude;
7 1 kV; 2 Ω, 18 μF
Measurement inputs, binary inputs Common (longitudinal) mode:
and relay outputs 2 kV; 42 Ω, 0.5 μF 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
1 kV; 42 Ω, 0.5 μF Shock Half-sinusoidal
8 Line-conducted HF,
amplitude-modulated
10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM;
1 kHz
IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks each in both directions
3 axes
Magnetic field with power 30 A/m continuous; IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms,
frequency 300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz
9 IEC 61000-4-8, class IV; IEC
60255-6
0.5 mT; 50 Hz
IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks in both directions of
the 3 axes
Oscillatory surge withstand 2.5 to 3 kV (peak); 1 to 1.5 MHz

capability damped wave; 50 surges per Climatic stress test
10 ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 second; duration 2 s;

Ri = 150 to 200 Ω
Temperatures
Type-tested acc. to IEC 60068-2-1 –25 °C to +85 °C / –13 °F to +185 °F
Fast transient surge withstand 4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges and -2, test Bd, for 16 h
capability per second; both polarities;
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 duration 2 s; Temporarily permissible operating –20 °C to +70 °C / –4 °F to +158 °F
11 Radiated electromagnetic interfe-

Ri = 80 Ω
35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz
Recommended permanent opera- –5 °C to +55 °C / +25 °F to +131 °F
rence ting temperature acc. to
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 IEC 60255-6
12 Damped oscillations
IEC 60894, IEC 61000-4-12
2.5 kV (peak value), polarity
alternating 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 and
50 MHz, Ri = 200 Ω
permanent storage
EMC tests for interference emission; type tests – Limiting temperature during –25 °C to +70 °C / –13 °F to +158 °F
Standard EN 50081-x (generic standard) transport
13 Conducted interference voltage
on lines
150 kHz to 30 MHz
Limit class B
Humidity
Permissible humidity stress Annual average ≤ 75 % relative
only auxiliary supply IEC-CISPR 22 It is recommended to arrange the humidity; on 56 days a year up to
Interference field strength 30 to 1000 MHz units in such a way that they are 93 % relative humidity; condensa-
14 IEC-CISPR 22 Limit class B not exposed to direct sunlight or
tion is
1) Conversion with external OLM that could cause condensation

For fiber-optic interface please complete order number at 11th
position with 4 (FMS RS485) or 9 and Order code L0A (DP RS485)
15 and additionally order:

For single ring: SIEMENS OLM 6GK1502-3AB10 Futher information can be found in the current manual at:
For double ring: SIEMENS OLM 6GK1502-4AB10 www.siemens.com/siprotec


7UM62 multifunction generator, motor and transformer protection relay

7UM62 - - 0-
1
Housing ½ 19", 7 BI, 12 BO, 1 live status contact 1 Continued
Housing 19", 15 BI, 20 BO, 1 live status contact on next
2
Graphic display, ½ 19'', 7 BI, 12 BO, 1 live status contact 3
page
2
Current transformer IN
1 A1), IEE (sensitive) 1
5 A1), IEE (sensitive)

5
3
DC 60 to 125 V2), threshold binary input 19 V3) 4
DC 110 to 220 V2), AC 115 V/230 V, threshold binary input 88 V3) 5 4
DC 220 to 250 V, AC 115 V/230 V, threshold binary input 176 V 6
Unit version
For panel surface-mounting, 2 tier screw-type terminals top/bottom
For panel flush-mounting, plug-in terminals (2-/3- pin connector)
B
D
5
Flush-mounting housing, screw-type terminal (direct connection, ring-type cable lugs) E
Region-specific default setting / function and language settings

Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC characteristics, language: German, (language can be selected) A 6
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI characteristics, language: English (UK), (language can be selected) B
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI characteristics, language: English (US), (language can be selected) C
Port B (System interface)

7
Analog output 2 x 0 to 20 mA
3 8
7
PROFIBUS DP slave, electrical RS485 9 L 0A
PROFIBUS DP slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector* 9 L 0 B
MODBUS, electrical RS485 9 L 0D 9
MODBUS, optical 820 nm, ST connector* 9 L 0 E
DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector* 9 L 0H
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connectors 9 L 0 R 10
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector4) 9 L 0 S
PROFINET I/O, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45-plug 9 L 3 R
PROFINET I/O, 100 Mbit Ethernet, with integrated switch, optical, double, LC connectors3)
Only Port C (Service interface)

9 L 3 S
11
DIGSI 4 /modem, electrical RS232 1
DIGSI 4 /modem, temperature monitoring box, electrical RS485 2
Port C (Service interface) and Port D (Additional interface) 9 M 12
Port C (Service interface)
DIGSI 4 /modem, electrical RS232 1
DIGSI 4 /modem, temperature monitoring box, electrical RS485
Port D (Additional interface)

2
13
Temperature monitoring box, optical 820 nm, ST connector A
Temperature monitoring box, electrical RS485 F
Analog outputs 2 x 0 to 20 mA K 14
1) Rated current can be selected by means of jumpers. 4) Not available with position 9 = “B”
2) Transition between the two auxiliary voltage ranges can be selected * Not with position 9 = B; if 9 = “B”, please order 7UM62 unit with
by means of jumpers. RS485 port and separate fiber-optic converters.
3) The binary input thresholds can be selected in stages by means of
jumpers.
15
1 7UM62 multifunction generator, motor and transformer protection relay
Measuring functions
7UM62 - - 0
Without extended measuring functions 0

Min./max. values, energy metering 3
2 Function
Generator Basic A
Generator Standard B
3 Generator Full
Asynchronous Motor
C
F
Transformer H
Functions (additional functions)

4 Without A
Sensitive rotor ground-fault protection and 100 % stator ground-fault protection B
Restricted ground-fault protection C
5 Network decoupling (df/dt and vector jump)

All additional functions
E
G
6 1) For more detailed information on the functions see Table 11/3.
7 Accessories Description Order No.
Connecting cable
8 and protection unit (9-pin connector)

Cable between thermo-box and relay
– length 5 m / 5.5 yd 7XV5103-7AA05
– length 25 m / 27.3 yd 7XV5103-7AA25
9 – length 50 m / 54.7 yd 7XV5103-7AA50
Coupling device for rotor ground-fault protection 7XR6100-0CA00
Short code
10 Series resistor for rotor ground-fault protection
(group: 013002) 3PP1336-0DZ K2Y
Resistor for underexcitation protection

(voltage divider, 20:1) (group: 012009) 3PP1326-0BZ K2Y
11 Resistor for stator ground-fault protection
(voltage divider, 5:1) (group 013001) 3PP1336-1CZ K2Y
20 Hz generator 7XT3300-0CA00
12 20 Hz band pass filter 7XT3400-0CA00
Current transformer (400 A / 5 A, 5 VA) 4NC5225-2CE20
13 Controlling unit f. rotor ground-fault protection (0.5 to 4Hz) 7XT7100-0EA00
Resistor for 1 to 3 Hz rotor ground-fault protection 7XR6004-0CA00
Temperature monitoring box (thermo-box)
14 AC/DC 24 to 60 V
AC/DC 90 to 240 V
7XV5662-2AD10
7XV5662-5AD10
15

package
1
LSP2289-afp.eps
3-pin C73334-A1-C36-1 1 Siemens 11/62
Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 1)

for 19" rack
connector
CI2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2
0-827396-1
0-827040-1
1
4000
1)
1)
2
0-827397-1 1 1)
LSP2090-afp.eps
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 0-163083-7 4000 1)

0-163084-2 1 1)
3
LSP2091-afp.eps
For CI2 0-734372-1 1 1)

4
5
LSP2093-afp.eps
LSP2092-afp.eps

Fig. 11/63 Fig. 11/64

6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
10
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 11/65 7UM621 and 7UM623 connection diagram (IEC standard)

10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 11/66 7UM622 connection diagram (IEC standard) 15

10
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 11/67 7UM621 and 7UM623 connection diagram (ANSI standard)

10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 11/68 7UM622 connection diagram (ANSI standard) 15

10
11
12
13
14
15
Generator Protection / 7VE6
SIPROTEC 7VE6 multifunction paralleling device
Voltage and frequency functions (V>, V<, f>, f< df/dt) including
voltage vector jump (∆φ) are optionally available for protection
or network decoupling applications. 1
The integrated programmable logic functions (continuous
function chart CFC) offer the user a high flexibility so that
adjustments can easily be made to the varying requirements on
the basis of special system conditions. 2
The flexible communication interfaces are open to modern com-
munication architectures with control systems.
LSP2483-afpen.tif
Function overview
Basic functions
• High reliability with a two-out-of-two design (1½ channels in
4
7VE61 and 2 channels in 7VE63)
• Paralleling of asynchronous voltage sources
• Balancing commands for voltage and speed (frequency) 5
• Paralleling of synchronous voltage sources
• Synchro-check function for manual synchronization
Fig. 11/69 SIPROTEC 7VE6 multifunction paralleling device • Parameter blocks for use on several synchronizing points
(7VE61 max. 4 and 7VE63 max. 8) 6
Description Additional functions
• Consideration of transformer vector group and tap changer
The 7VE61 and 7VE63 paralleling devices of the SIPROTEC 4 fam-
ily are multifunctional compact units used for paralleling power • Synchronization record (instantaneous or r.m.s. record) 7
systems and generators. • Commissioning support (CB-time measurement, test
synchronization)
Their technical design ensures highly reliable paralleling due to
their 1½-channel or 2-channel measurement method and their
hardware design. This is supported by numerous monitoring
• Browser operation
• Full control functionality of SIPROTEC 4
8
functions. The units automatically detect the operating condi- • Analog outputs of operational measured values
tions. The response to these conditions depends on settings.
• Functions for protection or network decoupling tasks
In “synchronous network switching” mode, the frequency
difference is measured with great accuracy. If the frequency dif- Protection functions (option)
9
ference is almost zero for a long enough time, the networks are
• Undervoltage protection(27)
already synchronous and a larger making angle is permissible.
• Overvoltage protection (59)
If the conditions are asynchronous, as is the case when synchro-
nizing generators, the generator speed is automatically matched
• Frequency protection (81) 10
to the system frequency and the generator voltage to the system • Rate-of-frequency-change protection ( 81R)
voltage. The connection is then made at the synchronous point, • Jump of voltage vector monitoring
allowing for circuit-breaker make-time.
The 7VE61 paralleling device is a 1½-channel unit (paralleling
function + synchro-check) for use with small to medium-size • Self-supervision of paralleling function
generators and power systems. It is more reliable than 1-channel • Operational measured values
paralleling devices. It can also be used for synchro-check, with
parallel operation of three synchronization points.
• 8 oscillographic fault records 12
For larger generators and power systems with high reliability
requirements, the 2-channel 7VE63 is recommended. Two • System interface
independent methods decide on the connection conditions. The
unit also has the full control functions of the SIPROTEC 4 family.
– IEC 60870-5-103
– IEC 61850 protocol
13
– PROFIBUS DP
– Modbus RTU and DNP 3
14
15
Application
Application Programmable logic
1 The 7VE61 and 7VE63 paralleling devices of the SIPROTEC 4

The integrated programmable logic function allows the user
to implement his own functions for automation of switchgear
family are multifunctional compact units used for paralleling (interlocking) via a graphic user interface. The user can also
power systems and generators. generate user-defined messages.
2 Their technical design ensures highly reliable paralleling due to

their 1½-channel or 2-channel measurement method and their
Adjustments can easily be made to the varying power station
requirements.
hardware design. This is supported by numerous monitoring
functions. Measurement method
3 The units automatically detect the operating conditions.

The response to these conditions depends on settings.
Powerful and successful algorithms based on years of experience
have been incorporated. They ensure both a high level of mea-
surement accuracy and effective noise signal suppression. That
In “synchronous network switching” mode, the frequency
makes for reliable paralleling even in networks with harmonics.
difference is measured with great accuracy. If the frequency
4 difference is almost zero for a long enough time, the
networks are already synchronous and a larger making angle
Complementary measurement methods avoid unwanted opera-
tion.
is permissible. Design
If the conditions are asynchronous, as is the case when synchro-
5 nizing generators, the generator speed is automatically matched
The units are available in two designs: the ½ 19" wide 7VE61
and the ½ 19" wide 7VE63. The 7VE61 features a four-line
to the system frequency and the generator voltage to the system display. The 7VE63 is equipped with a graphic display for visual-
voltage. The connection is then made at the synchronous point, ization of switching states. It also has a larger number of binary
allowing for circuit-breaker make-time. inputs and outputs than the 7VE61.
6 The 7VE61 paralleling device is a 1½-channel unit (paralleling
Communication
function + synchro-check) for use with small to medium-size
generators and power systems. It is more reliable than 1-channel Flexible and powerful communication is paramount. That is
paralleling devices. It can also be used for synchro-check, with why the paralleling devices have up to five serial interfaces (for
7 parallel operation of three synchronization points. details see chapter 4 "Communication"):
For larger generators and power systems with high reliability – Front interface for connecting a PC
requirements, the 2-channel 7VE63 is recommended. Two – Service interface for connecting a PC (e.g. via a modem)
independent methods decide on the connection conditions. The
8 unit also has the full control functions of the SIPROTEC 4 family.
– System interface for connecting to a control system via
IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 61850, PROFIBUS DP, MODBUS RTU or
Voltage and frequency functions (V>, V<, f>, f< df/dt) including DNP 3.0
voltage vector jump (∆φ) are optionally available for protection – Interface for an analog output module (2 – 20 mA) and an
9 or network decoupling applications. input
– For time synchronization via DCF77 or IRIG B.
Uniform design
The SIPROTEC 4 units have a uniform design and a degree of Operational measured values
10 functionality which represents a whole new quality in protection

and control and automation.
In order to assist system management and for commissioning
purposes, relevant measured values are displayed as primary and
Local operation has been designed according to ergonomic crite- secondary values with unit and values relating to the object to
ria. Large, easy-to-read displays (graphic display for 7VE63) were be protected.
11 a major design aim. The DIGSI 4 operating program considerably

simplifies planning and engineering and reduces commissioning
The measured values can also be transferred via the serial
interfaces.
times.
In addition, the programmable logic permits limit value scans
Highly reliable and status indications derived therefrom.
12 The 7VE6 hardware is based on 20 years of Siemens experience Metered values are available in the form of energy metered
with numerical protection equipment. State-of-the-art technol- values for the active and reactive energy supplied and are also
ogy and a high-efficiency, 32-bit microprocessor are employed. provided by an elapsed-hour meter.
13 Production is subject to exacting quality standards.

Special attention has been paid to electromagnetic compatibility,
and the number of electronic modules has been drastically
reduced by the use of highly integrated circuits.
14 The software design incorporates accumulated experience and
the latest technical knowledge. Object orientation and high-level
language programming, combined with the continuous quality
assurance system, ensure maximized software reliability.
15
Application, functions
Indications Continuous self-monitoring

The SIPROTEC 4 units provide detailed data for analysis of syn-
chronization (fault events from activated protection functions)
The hardware and software are continuously monitored. If
abnormal conditions are detected, the unit signals immediately. 1
and for checking states during operation. All indications are In this way, a great degree of safety, reliability and availability is
protected against power supply failure. achieved.
• Synchronization indications
(Fault indications)
Reliable battery monitoring 2
The last eight synchronizations (faults) are stored in the unit at The battery buffers the indications and fault recordings in the
all times. A fresh synchronization (fault) will erase the oldest event of power supply voltage failure. Its function is checked at
one. The fault indications have a time resolution of 1 ms. They regular intervals by the processor. If the capacity of the battery is
provide detailed information on history. The buffer memory is
designed for a total of 600 indications.
found to be declining, an alarm indication is generated. 3
All setting parameters are stored in the Flash-EPROM which are
• Operational indications not lost if the power supply or battery fails. The SIPROTEC 4 unit
All indications that are not directly associated with the
synchronization (fault) (e.g. operating or switching actions)
are stored in the status indication buffer. The time resolution is
remains fully functional.
4
1 ms, buffer size: 200 indications.
Functions
Fault recording at up to 10 or 100 seconds
An instantaneous value or r.m.s. value recorder is provided. The Functional scope of the paralleling function
5
firmware permits storage of 8 fault recordings. Triggering can The units contain numerous individually settable functions
be effected by the synchronization function (starting or closing for different applications. They cover the following operating
command), protection function (pickup or tripping), binary
input, the DIGSI 4 operating program or by the control system.
modes: 6
Synchro-check
The instantaneous value recording stores the voltage input
values (va, vb, vc, vd, ve, vf), voltage differences (va-vd, vb-ve, In this mode, the variables ∆V, ∆f, ∆α are checked. If they reach
vc-vf), and calculated r.m.s. values ∆V, ∆f, ∆α at 1-ms intervals
(or 0.83-ms intervals for 60 Hz). The r.m.s. values are calculated
set values, a release command is issued for as long as all three
conditions are met, but at least for a settable time.
7
every half cycle. The total duration of the fault recording is
10 seconds. If the time is exceeded, the oldest recording is Switching synchronous networks
overwritten. The characteristic of synchronous networks is their identical
frequency (∆f≈0). This state is detected, and fulfillment of the
8
If you want to record for a longer period for commissioning
purposes (for example, to show the effect of balancing ∆V and ∆α conditions is checked. If the conditions remain met
commands), r.m.s. value recording is advisable. The relevant for a set time, the CLOSE command is issued.
calculated values (V1,V2, f1, f2, ∆V, ∆f, ∆α ) are recorded at
half-cycle intervals. The total duration is 100 seconds. Switching asynchronous networks 9
This state occurs in the power system and generator (open
Time synchronization generator circuit-breaker). A check is made for fulfillment of ∆V
A battery-backed clock is a standard component and can be
synchronized via a synchronization signal (DCF77; IRIG B via
and ∆f conditions and the connection time is calculated, taking
account of ∆α, and the circuit-breaker making time. By means of
10
satellite receiver), binary input, system interface or SCADA balancing commands (for voltage and frequency), the generator
(e.g. SICAM). A date and time are assigned to every indication. can automatically be put into a synchronous condition.
Freely assignable binary inputs and outputs Switching onto dead busbars 11
Binary inputs, output relays, and LEDs can each be given The voltage inputs are checked here. The CLOSE command is
separate user-specific assignments. Assignment is effected using issued depending on the set program and the result of measure-
a software matrix, which greatly simplifies the allocation of
individual signals.
ment. A three-phase connection increases reliability because
several voltages must fulfill the conditions (see Fig. 11/84). 12
To ensure dual-channel redundancy, control of the CLOSE relay The following operating states are possible:
(relay R1 and R2) is prioritized and should not be altered. These – V1< V2 >
two relays have a special, highly reliable control and monitoring
logic (see Fig. 11/89).
(connection to dead busbar (side 1)) 13
– V1> V2 <
(connection to dead line (side 2))
– V1< V2 <
(forced closing) 14
15
Functions
Voltage and frequency band query
1 Synchronization is not activated until the

set limits are reached. Then the remaining
parameters (see above) are checked.
Vector group adaptation

2 If synchronization is effected using a
transformer, the unit will take account of
the phase-angle rotation of the voltage
phasor in accordance with the vector
3 group entry for the transformer. On
transformers with a tap changer, the tap
setting can be communicated to the unit,
for example, as BCD code (implemented
4 in the 7VE63). When using the IEC 61850
communication standard, it is possible
to detect tap position indications with
LSP2480fen.tif
a bay control unit (e.g. 6MD66) and to
5 transmit these indications via GOOSE to

the 7VE6 paralleling device. Deviations
from the rated transformation ratio result
in the appropriate voltage amplitude
adaptation. Fig. 11/70 SIGRA 4, synchronization record with balancing commands
6 Voltage and frequency balancing
If the synchronization conditions are not fulfilled, the unit will Commissioning aids
automatically issue balancing signals. These are the appropriate
7 up or down commands to the voltage or speed controller (fre-
The paralleling device is designed to be commissioned without
an external tester/recorder (see Fig. 11/84). For that purpose,
quency controller). The balancing signals are proportional to the
it contains a codeword-protected commissioning section. This
voltage or frequency difference, which means that if the voltage
can be used to measure the make time automatically with the
or frequency difference is substantial, longer balancing com-
unit (internal command issue until the CB poles are closed). This
8 mands will be output. A set pause is allowed to elapse between
balancing commands to allow the state change to settle. This
process is logged by the fault recording function.
method ensures rapid balancing of the generator voltage or The operational measured values also include all measured
frequency to the target conditions. values required for commissioning. The behavior of the paral-
9 If identical frequency is detected during generator-network
leling function or the unit is also documented in detail in the
operational annunciation and synchronization annunciation
synchronization (“motionless synchronization phasor”), a kick
buffer. The connection conditions are documented in the
pulse will put the generator out of this state.
synchronization record. Test synchronization is also permitted.
For example, if the voltage is to be adjusted using the trans- All actions inside the synchronizer are taken but the two CLOSE
10 former tap changer, a defined control pulse will be issued. relays are not operated (R1 and R2). This state can also be initi-
ated via a binary input.
Several synchronizing points
11 Depending on the ordered scope, several synchronization

points can be operated. The data for synchronization of each
circuit-breaker (synchronization function group) are stored
individually. In the maximum version, the 7VE63 operates up to
8 synchronization points. Selection is made either via the binary
12 input or the serial interface. With the CFC, it is also possible to
control the connection of the measured variables or commands
via a master relay.
13
14
15
Functions
Fig. 11/71 Two-channel redundancy

5
Great safety and reliability due to multi-channel redundancy
Generator synchronization especially requires units in which 6
unwanted operation can be ruled out. The paralleling device
achieves this multi-channel redundancy with a two-out-of-two
decision. That means that two conditions for the CLOSE com-
mand must be fulfilled. Fig. 11/85 shows the structure of the
1 ½-channel version (7VE61)
7
two designs.
In the 1½-channel version (7VE61), the paralleling function is
the function that gives the CLOSE command. The synchro-check
function acts as a release criterion with rougher monitoring limit 8
settings. Other monitoring functions are also active at the same
time (see below).
In the two-channel version (7VE63), two independent methods
work in parallel. The CLOSE command is given when the two
2-channel version (7VE63) 9
methods simultaneously decide on CLOSE. Fig. 11/86 shows the
consistent implementation of dual-channel redundancy. Fig. 11/72 Design of multi-channel redundancy
The measured quantities are fed to two ADCs. The second

ADC processes the values rotated through 180° (e.g. V1). The Moreover, coil operation is monitored in the background. For
10
monitoring methods test all the transformer circuits including this purpose, transistors are activated individually and the
internal data acquisition for plausibility and they block measure- response is fed back. Both interruptions and transistor break-
ment if deviations are found. The phase-sequence test detects
connection errors. The measuring methods 1 and 2 include the
down are detected. When faults are found, the unit is blocked
immediately. 11
measurement algorithms and logic functions.
The plausibility monitoring of set values (valid limits) and
In keeping with the two-channel redundancy principle, differing selection of the synchronization function groups (only one can
measurement methods are used to prevent unwanted operation
due to systematic errors.
be selected) are also supported. In the event of any deviations,
messages are output and the paralleling function is blocked.
12
In addition, numerous methods are also active, such as closure
monitoring (synchronism monitoring of both methods).
Unwanted relay operation is avoided by two-channel operation
of both CLOSE relays. The two measurement methods operate
13
the transistors crossed over.
14
15
Functions
Internet technology simplifies

commissioning
1 In addition to the universal DIGSI 4 oper-
ating program, the synchronizer contains
a Web server that can be accessed via a
telecommunications link using a browser
2 (e.g. Internet Explorer). The advantage of
this solution is that it is both possible to
operate the unit with standard software
tools and to make use of the Intranet/
3 Internet infrastructure. Moreover, infor-
mation can be stored in the unit without
any problems. In addition to numeric
values, visualizations facilitate work with
4 the unit. In particular, graphical displays
LSP2481fen.tif
provide clear information and a high
degree of operating reliability. Fig. 11/88
shows an example of an overview that is
familiar from conventional synchronizers.
5 The current status of synchronization Fig. 11/73 Browser-based operation
conditions is clearly visible. Of course, it
is possible to call up further measured
value displays and annunciation buffers.
6 By emulation of integrated unit opera-
tion, it is also possible to adjust selected
settings for commissioning purposes,
(see Fig. 11/87).
LSP2482fen.tif
10 Fig. 11/74 Overview display of the synchronization function
11
12
13
14
15
Functions
Protection and automation functions Jump of voltage vector monitoring
Basic concept Smaller generating plants frequently require the vector jump
function. With this criterion it is possible to detect a discon- 1
The paralleling function is not performed constantly. Therefore nected supply (e.g. due to the dead time during an automatic
the measured quantities provided at the analog inputs are reclosure) and initiate generator disconnection. This avoids
available for other functions. Voltage and frequency protection impermissible loads on the generating plant, especially the drive
or limit value monitoring of these quantities are typical applica-
tions. Another possible application is network decoupling. After
gearing, if reconnection to the network is asynchronous. 2
network disconnection, automatic resynchronization using the The vector jump function monitors the phase angle change in
CFC is possible on request. To allow for great flexibility, these the voltage.
functions can be assigned to the analog inputs. This is defined
for the specific application.
If the incoming line should fail, the abrupt current discontinuity
leads to a phase angle jump in the voltage. This is measured
3
by means of a delta process. The command for opening the
generator or coupler circuit- breaker is issued if the set threshold
The protection function is implemented on two stages and
evaluates the voltage at an input assigned to it. Analysis of a
is exceeded.
Vector jump monitoring is performed again for the assigned
4
phase-to-phase voltage is beneficial as it avoids starting in the
voltage input. This function is blocked during synchronization.
event of ground faults. The protection function can be used
for monitoring and decoupling purposes or to prevent voltage-
induced instability of generators by disconnection.
Threshold monitoring
5
The threshold function is provided for fast monitoring and
Overvoltage protection (ANSI 59) further processing in the CFC. Optional monitoring of the
calculated voltage (for violation of an upper or lower threshold)
The protection function is implemented on two stages and
evaluates the voltage at an input assigned to it.
at the six voltage inputs is possible. A total of three greater-than
and three less-than thresholds are available. The check is made
6
The overvoltage protection prevents impermissible stress on
once per cycle, resulting in a minimum operating time of about
equipment due to excessive voltages.
30 ms for the voltage. The times can be extended by the internal
Frequency protection (ANSI 81) check time, if necessary (about 1 cycle).
7
The protection function is implemented on four stages and
evaluates the frequency of an input assigned to it. Depending on
the frequency threshold setting, the function can provide over-
frequency protection (setting > fn) or underfrequency protection
(setting < fn). Each stage can be delayed separately. Stage 4 can
8
be configured either as an overfrequency or underfrequency
stage.
The application consists of frequency monitoring usually causing 9
network disconnection in the event of any deviations. The func-
tion is suitable as a load shedding criterion.
Rate-of-frequency-change protection (ANSI 81R) 10

This function can also be assigned to an input. The frequency
difference is determined on the basis of the calculated frequency
over a time interval. It corresponds to the momentary rate-of-
frequency change. The function is designed to react to both
positive and negative rate-of-frequency changes. Exceeding
11
of the permissible rate-of-frequency change is monitored con-
stantly. Release of the relevant direction depends on whether
the actual frequency is above or below the rated frequency.
In total, four stages are available, and can be used optionally.
12
This function is used for fast load shedding or for network
decoupling.
13
14
15
1 Connection to three-phase voltage

transformer
If three-phase voltage transformers are
2 available, connection as shown in

Fig. 11/89 is recommended. This is the
standard circuit because it provides a
high level of reliability for the paralleling
function. The phase-sequence test is
3 additionally active, and several voltages are
checked on connection to a dead busbar.
Interruption in the voltage connection does
not lead to unwanted operation. Please
4 note that side 1 (that is, V1) is always the
feed side. That is important for thedirection
of balancing commands.
6
Fig. 11/75
7
Connection to open delta connection
(V-connection) voltage transformer
8 Fig. 11/90 shows an alternative to

Fig. 11/89 for substations in which the volt-
age transformers have to be V-connected.
For the paralleling device, this connection
9 is the electrical equivalent of the connec-
tion described above. It is also possible to
combine the two: three one-pole isolated
voltage transformers on one side and the
10 V-connection on the other. If, additionally,

a synchroscope is connected, it must
be electrically isolated by means of an
interposing transformer.
11
12
13 Fig. 11/76
14
15
Connection to floating voltage

transformer
To save costs for the voltage transformer, 1
two-phase isolated voltage transformers
are used that are connected to the phase-
to-phase voltage (see Fig. 11/91). In that
case, the phase-rotation supervision is
inactive and reliability restrictions when
2
connecting to the dead busbarmust be
accepted.
Full two-channel redundancy is ensured. 3
6
Fig. 11/77
7
Connection to single-phase isolated
voltage transformer
As an alternative to Fig. 11/91, some
substations use single-phase isolated
8
voltage transformers (see Fig. 11/92). In
this case, only a phase-to-ground voltage
is available. This connection should be
avoided if possible. Especially in isolated
9
or resonant-(star point) neutral-grounded
networks, an ground fault would lead to a
voltage value of zero. That does not permit
synchronization and the busbar is detected 10
as dead.
If V1< and V2 > connection is permitted,
there is a high risk of incorrect synchroniza-
tion. Furthermore, an ground fault in phase
11
L2 leads to an angle rotation of – for
instance – 30° in phase L1. This means that
the device switches at a large fault angle.
12
Fig. 11/78 13
14
15
Switching in 16.7 Hz networks for

application in traction systems
1 The unit can also be used for synchronizing
railway networks or generators. The
connection has to be executed according
to Fig. 11/93. No phase sequence test is
2 available here. Two-channel redundancy is
ensured.
The voltage inputs permit the application
of the 16.7 Hz frequency without any
3 difficulties.
On connection to a dead busbar, a broken
wire in the external voltage transformer
4 circuit is not detected. It is recommended
to make another interrogation of a second
voltage transformer.
6
Fig. 11/79
10
11
12
13
14
15
Synchro-check for several synchroniz-

ing points
To avoid unwanted operation during 1
manual synchronization or during con-
nection of circuit-breakers in the network,
the synchro-check function is used as an
enabling criterion. It is fully compatible
with all of the connections described
2
above (see Figs. 11/89 to 11/93). With
the “synchro-check” ordering option, the
paralleling device also allows up to three
circuit-breakers to bemonitored in parallel.
3
That saves wiring, switching and testing.
In particular, that is an application for the
1½ circuit-breaker method. Moreover, on
smaller generating plants one unit can 4
be used for up to three generators, which
helps reduce costs.
The connection shown in Fig. 11/94 is a
single-pole version, which is acceptable for
5
the synchro-check function.
An alternative is the connection for two
switching devices (see Fig. 11/95). 6
The two free voltage inputs can be used for
monitoring purposes.
7
Fig. 11/80
10
11
12
13
Fig. 11/81
14
15
8
DIGSI: BI "L" active
9 Fig. 11/82
Synchronization of a generator
10 Fig. 11/96 shows an example of the 7VE61 paralleling device
connected to a medium-power generator.Where three-phase volt-
age transformers are available, direct connection is recommended.
11 The synchronization point and start of synchronization is selected

via the binary inputs. If cancellation is necessary, the stop input
must be used.
If synchronization onto a dead busbar is permitted, the alarm
12 contact of the voltage transformer miniature circuit-breakers
(m.c.b.) must be connected to the unit.
Relays R1 and R2 are used for a CLOSE command. The other relays
are used for selected indications and for the balancing commands.
13 The live status contact operated by the unit self-supervision
function must also be wired.
14
15
Technical data

Analog inputs
Rated frequency 50, 60 or 16.7 Hz
drawings part 14 1
Rated voltage VN 100 to 125 V Degree of protection acc. to
EN 60529
Power consumption For surface-mounting housing IP 51
Voltage inputs (at 100 V)
Capability in voltage paths
Approx. 0.3 VA
230 V continuous
Front IP 51 2
Rear IP 50
Auxiliary voltage
For the terminals IP 2x with terminal cover put on
Rated auxiliary voltage DC 24 to 48 V
Weight
DC 60 to 125 V
DC 110 to 250 V
DC 220 to 250 V
7VE61 (½ x 19“) Approx. 5.2 kg
3
7VE63 (½ x 19“) Approx. 7 kg
AC 115 and 230 V (50/60 Hz)
Permitted tolerance -20 to +20 %
7VE61 (½ x 19”) Approx. 9.2 kg
(peak-to-peak)
≤ 15 % 7VE63 (½ x 19”) Approx. 12 4
Power consumption
Quiescent Electrical tests
7VE61 Approx. 4 W
7VE63 Approx. 5.5 W
Specifications
Standards IEC 60255 (product standards) 5
Energized ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2
7VE61 Approx. 9.5 W UL 508
7VE63 Approx. 12 W DIN 57435, part 303
voltage failure Insulating tests
For further standards see below
6
at Vaux = 24 V and Vaux = 60 V ≥ 20 ms Standards IEC 60255-5
Voltage test (100 % test) 2.5 kV (r.m.s.), 50/60 Hz
Binary inputs
Quantity
All circuits except for auxiliary sup-
ply, binary inputs, communication
7
7VE61 6 and time synchronization interfaces
7VE63 14
Voltage test (100 % test) DC 3.5 kV
3 pickup thresholds DC 14 to 19 V, DC 66 to 88 V; Auxiliary voltage and binary inputs
Range is settable with jumpers
Maximum permissible voltage
DC 117 to 176 V
DC 300 V
Voltage test (100 % test) only
isolated communication interfaces
500 V (r.m.s. value), 50/60 Hz 8
Current consumption, energized Approx. 1.8 mA and time synchronization interface
Output relays Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 μs; 0.5 J;
Quantity
7VE61 9 (each with 1 NO; 1 optional as
All circuits except for communica- 3 positive and 3 negative impulses
tion interfaces and time synchroni- at intervals of 5 s 9
zation interface, class III
NC, via jumper)
7VE62 17 (each with 1 NO; 2 optional as EMC tests for noise immunity (type test)
NC, via jumper)
7VE61+7VE63 1 live status contact
(NC, NO via jumper)
(product standards)
10
Switching capacity DIN 57435 part 303
Make 1000 W / VA High frequency test 2.5 kV (peak value), 1 MHz;
Break
Break (for resistive load)
30 VA
40 W
τ = 15 ms
400 pulses per s; duration 2 s 11
Break (for L/R ≤ 50 ms) 25 W
Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge;
Switching voltage 250 V IEC 60255-22-2, class IV 15 kV air discharge;
Permissible current 5 A continuous EN 61000-4-2, class IV both polarities; 150 pF; Ri = 330 Ω
30 A for 0.5 seconds Irradiation with RF field,
non-modulated
10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz 12
LEDs
Quantity
RUN (green) 1 Irradiation with RF field, 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz; 80 % AM;
ERROR (red)
Assignable LED (red)
1 amplitude-modulated,
1 kHz
13
7VE61 7
7VE63 14
14
15
Technical data
Irradiation with RF field, 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition Seismic vibration Sinusoidal
pulse-modulated frequency 200 Hz; duty cycle 50 % IEC 60255-21-2, class I 1 to 8 Hz: ± 3.5 mm amplitude
1 IEC 61000-4-3/ ENV 50204, class III
Fast transient interference bursts 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
IEC 60255-22-4, burst length = 15 ms; repetition (vertical axis)
IEC 61000-4-4, class IV rate 300 ms; both polarities; 8 to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
Ri = 50 Ω; test duration 1 min (horizontal axis)
2 High-energy surge voltages Impulse: 1.2/50 μs
(vertical axis)
(SURGE), Frequency sweep 1 octave/min
IEC 61000-4-5 installation, class III 1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
Auxiliary supply Common (longitudinal) mode:
During transport
3 2 kV; 12 Ω, 9 μF
Differential (transversal) mode: Standards IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2
1 kV; 2 Ω, 18 μF
Measurement inputs, binary inputs IEC 60255-21-1, class II 5 to 8 Hz: ±7.5 mm amplitude;
and relay outputs Common (longitudinal) mode: IEC 60068-2-6 8 to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
4 2 kV; 42 Ω, 0.5 μF
1 kV; 42 Ω, 0.5 μF
Line-conducted HF, 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; IEC 60255-21-2, class I Acceleration 15 g, duration 11 ms,
amplitude-modulated 1 kHz IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks each in both directions
5 IEC 61000-4-6, class III
Magnetic field with power frequency 30 A/m continuous;
3 axes
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV; IEC 60255-6 300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz IEC 60255-21-2, class I Acceleration 10 g, duration 16 ms,
0.5 mT; 50 Hz IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks in both directions of

capability
damped wave; 50 surges
the 3 axes
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 per second;

Duration 2 s; Ri = 150 to 200 Ω Climatic stress test
Fast transient surge withstand 4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges per Temperatures
7 capability ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 second; both polarities;

duration 2 s ; Ri = 80 Ω
Standards
Recommended operating limiting
IEC 60068-2-1, IEC 60068-2-2
–5 °C to +55 °C / +25 °F to +131 °F
Radiated electromagnetic 35 V/m; 25 to 1000 MHz temperature
interference
Temporarily permissible operating -20 to +70 °C
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2
8 Damped oscillations 2.5 kV (peak value), polarity
temperature (Legibility of display may be
IEC 60894, IEC 61000-4-12 alternating 100 kHz, 1 MHz,
Limiting temperature during –25 °C to +55 °C / –13 °F to +131 °F
10 and 50 MHz, Ri = 200 Ω
permanent storage (with supplied
EMC tests for interference emission (type test) packing)
9 Standard EN 50081-x (generic standard) Limiting temperature during
transport (with supplied packing)
–25 °C to +70 °C / –13 °F to +158 °F
Conducted interference voltage 150 kHz to 30 MHz
on lines only auxiliary supply Limit class B Humidity
IEC-CISPR 22
Standards IEC 60068-2-3
10 Interference field strength
IEC-CISPR 22
30 to 1000 MHz
Limit class B
Permissible humidity stress Annual average ≤ 75 % relative
units in such a way that they are 93 % relative humidity; conden-
Mechanical stress tests not exposed to direct sunlight or sation is not permit

During operation
that could cause condensation
Standards EC 60255-21 and IEC 60068

12 IEC 60255-21-1, class II
IEC 60068-2-6
13 Shock
IEC 60255-21-2, class I
IEC 60068-2-27
Half-sinusoidal
the 3 axes
14



7VE61multifunction paralleling unit
Housing ⅓ 19”, 6 BI, 9 BO, 1 live status contact
7VE6110 - -0 -
1
Auxiliary voltage (power supply, indication voltage)
24 to 48 V DC , threshold binary input 19 V 2
60 to 125 V DC, threshold binary input 19 V
110 to 250 V DC, 115 to 230 V AC, threshold binary input 88 V DC
4
5
2
220 to 250 V DC, 115 to 230 V AC, threshold binary input 176 V DC 6
Unit design
Surface-mounting housing, 2-tier screw-type terminals at top/bottom
Flush-mounting housing, screw-type terminals (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs)
B 3
E
Region-specific default setting/function and language settings
Region DE, 50 Hz, language German (language selectable)
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language English (GB) (language selectable)
A
B 4
Region US, 60 Hz, language English (US) (language selectable) C
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language Spanish (language selectable) E
Port B (system interface)
5
IEC 60870-5-103-protocol, electrical RS232 1
IEC 60870-5-103-protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector
Analog outputs 2 x 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
3
7
6
PROFIBUS DP Slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector1) 9 L 0 B
MODBUS RTU, electrical RS485
MODBUS RTU, optical 820 nm, ST connector1)
9 L 0D 7
9 L 0 E
DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector1) 9 L 0H
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connectors 9 L 0 R 8
1
2
9
Port C (service interface) and Port D (additional interface)
9
9
M 1
M 2
10
Analog outputs 2 x 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA K
Scope of functions of the unit
Synchro-check for up to 3 synchronizing points (with dead bus / line monitoring)
11
A
Paralleling function for 2 synchronizing points without balancing commands, 1½-channel,
synchro-check in 2nd channel B
Paralleling function for 2 synchronizing points with balancing commands, 1½-channel,
synchro-check in 2nd channel C
12
Paralleling function for 4 synchronizing points with balancing commands, 1½-channel,
synchro-check in 2nd channel D
Without A A
13
Protection and network decoupling function
(voltage, frequency and rate-of-frequency-change protection, vector jump) B
Additional applications
Without 0
14
Application for traction systems (fn = 16.7Hz) 1
1) With position 9 = B (surface-mounting housing) the unit must be

ordered with RS485 interface and a separate FO converter.
2) Not available with position 9 = "B"
15
1 7VE63multifunction paralleling unit

7VE61multifunction
Housing
Housing½⅓ 19”,
19”, 14
6 BI,
BI,917
BO,
BO,1
1 live
livestatus
statuscontact
contact
7VE6320
7VE6110 - -0 -
Auxiliary voltage (power supply, indication voltage)

DC 24 to 48 V, hreshold
thresholdbinary
binaryinput
input19
19VV 2
2 DC 60 to 125 V, threshold binary input 19 V

DC 110 to 250 V, AC 115 to 230 V, threshold binary input DC
88 V
88 V
4
5
220220
DC to 250
to 250
V DC,
V, AC
115115
to 230
to 230
V AC,
V, threshold
threshold binary
binary input
input DC
176176
V DC
V 6
Unit design
3 Surface-mounting housing, 2-tier screw-type terminals at top/bottom
Flush-mounting housing, screw-type terminals (direct connection/ring-type cable lugs)
B
E
Region-specific default setting
setting/function
/ functionand
andlanguage
languagesettings
settings
Region DE, 50
50Hz,
Hz,language
languageGerman
German(language
(languageselectable)
selectable)
4 Region World, 50/60 Hz, language English (GB) (language selectable)
A
B
Region US, 60
60Hz,
Hz,language
languageEnglish
English(US)
(US)(language
(languageselectable)
selectable) C
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language Spanish (language selectable) E
5 Port B (system
(systeminterface)
interface)
6 IEC 60870-5-103-protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector
Analog outputs 2 x 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA
3
7
PROFIBUS DP Slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector1) 9 L 0 B
7 MODBUS RTU, electrical RS485
MODBUS RTU, optical 820 nm, ST connector1)
9 L 0D
9 L 0 E
DNP 3.0, optical 820 nm, ST connector1) 9 L 0H
8 IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connectors 9 L 0 R
9 DIGSI 4/modem, electrical RS232

1
2
Port C (service interface) and Port D
D((additional
additional interface)
10 DIGSI 4
4/modem,
DIGSI 4
/ modem,electrical
4/modem,
electricalRS232
/ modem,electrical
RS232
electricalRS485
RS485
9
9
M 1
M 2
Analog outputs 2 x 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA K
11 Scope of functions of the unit
Synchro-check for up to 3 synchronizing points (with dead bus
bus/linemonitoring)
/ line monitoring) A
Paralleling function for 2 synchronizing points without balancing commands, 2-channel,
1½-channel,
independent in 2nd channel
synchro-checkmeasuring procedures B
12 Paralleling function for 2 synchronizing points with balancing commands, 1½-channel,
synchro-check in 2nd channel
independent measuring procedures
2-channel,
C
Paralleling function for 4
8 synchronizing points with balancing commands, 1½-channel,
2-channel,
synchro-check in 2nd channel
independent measuring procedures D
13 Additional functions
Without A A
Protection and network decoupling function
(voltage, frequency and rate-of-frequency-change protection, vector jump) B
14 Additional applications
Without 0
Application for traction systems (fn = 16.7Hz) 1
15 1) With position 9 = B (surface-mounting housing) the unit must be

ordered with RS485 interface and a separate FO converter.
2) Not available with position 9 = "B"

Copper connecting cable

1
Manual 2
7VE61 and 7VE63 Multifunction Paralleling Device C53000-G1176-C163-1

3
package
Crimp CI2 0.5 to 1 mm2 0-827039-1 4000 1)
4
LSP2092-afp.eps
connector 0-827396-1 1 1)
CI2 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 0-827040-1 4000 1)

0-827397-1 1 1)
Type III+ 0.75 to 1.5 0-163083-7 4000 1)
Fig. 11/83 Short-circuit link

mm2 0-163084-2
0-539635-1
1
1
1)
1)
5
for voltage contacts
Crimping For type III+ 0-539668-2 1)
tool and matching female 0-734372-1 1 1)

LSP2289-afp.eps
For CI2 1-734387-1 1)
and matching female 6

19"-mounting rail C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens
Fig. 11/84 Mounting rail for 19" rack Short-circuit links For voltage terminals C73334-A1-C34-1 1 Siemens

7

8
10
11
12
13
14
15
Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 11/86 Connection diagram 15

1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Generator Protection / 7VU683
High Speed Busbar Transfer
Function overview
High speed busbar transfer function 1

• Starting conditions
- NORMAL condition
- FAULT condition
- Inadmissible under-voltage 2
- Inadmissible under-frequency
- Inadvertent CB open
• Switching sequences
- PARALLEL Auto switching sequence 3
LSP2187-afp.tif
- PARALLEL Half-Auto switching sequence
- SIMULTANEOUS switching sequence
- SEQUENTIAL sequence
• Transfer modes
- FAST transfer mode
4
- REAL-TIME FAST transfer mode
- IN-PHASE transfer mode
- RES-VOLT transfer mode
- LONG-TIME transfer mode
5
• Single busbar and segmented single busbar supported
Fig. 11/87 • High speed contact with approx.1ms for closing
SIPROTEC 7VU683 high speed busbar transfer device
• Permission of bi-direction switching settable 6
• Low voltage load-shedding settable
• CB de-coupling when OPEN failed
Description
Permanent availability of electricity is essential for reliable

• NORMAL start locally or remotely
• Manual CB closing to block HSBT
7
production of a great number of processes in power stations and • ON/OFF set locally or remotely
industrial plants where lots of inductive motor are installed. To
• HSBT test mode supported
achieve this, a busbar is normally equipped with two or more
independent in-coming power sources to provide the possibility
8
to switch to standby source in case of main source interruption Protection functions for tie-CB
or failure. • Overcurrent protection
The power supply interruption with tens of millisecond has small
impact to rotating loads. Thus, the High Speed Busbar Transfer
• Ground overcurrent protection 9
• Overcurrent protection for busbar energization
(HSBT) device helps to control and monitor the progress to
• Ground overcurrent protection for busbar energization
ensure the fast but reliable switching-over. It can be initiated
manually or automatically.
10
Based on the existing world-wide used SIPROTEC 4 platform,
the reliability, stability and efficiency of HSBT 7VU683 are guar- • Self-supervision of the device
anteed. Thanks to its powerful and flexible performance, multi • Oscillographic fault recording
functions are integrated into one system, e.g, power supply
transfer, relay protection and supervision.
• Phase sequence of busbar voltage 11
• Voltage circuit of busbar and line
The compact solution HSBT 7VU683 is designed to fit for the
primary diagrams of single busbar (2 CBs) and segmented single
busbar (3 CBs). It has incorporated the traditional HSBT philoso- Communication interfaces
• PC front port for setting with DIGSI 4
12
phy. Additionally, the unique Real Time Fast Transfer mode helps
to improve the efficiency. • System interface
- IEC 60870-5-103, redundant optional
The integrated protective functions are to protect the tie-CB
in segmented single busbar diagram against short-circuit and - IEC 61850, Ethernet
- PROFIBUS DP or Modbus RTU
13
ground fault. The integrated supervision functions are to moni-
tor the voltage phase sequence and voltage secondary circuit , • Service interface for DIGSI 4 (modem)
then gives out alarm in case of failure. • Time synchronization via IRIG B/DCF 77
The integrated programmable logic (CFC) allows the users to
14
implement their own functions. The flexible communication
interfaces are open for modern communication architectures
with control system.
15
Application
Application HSBT function

In station service system of thermal power station and some
The 7VU683 high speed busbar transfer (HBST) device of industrial plants, a lot of asynchronous motor are connected.
SIPROTEC 4 family is compact multifunction unit which has been The restarting motors after some seconds power loss will cause
developed for very fast power supply transfer of busbar which is heavy starting current and system voltage drop. On the other
installed with big rotating loads. It accommodates the primary hand, the incorrect reconnecting to stand-by power source will
diagram of both single busbar and segmented single busbar. It even damage the winding of rotor.
incorporates all the necessary HSBT conditions and even some
protection functions. It is specially suitable for the power supply The version HSBT 7VU683 is designed for this case. It will
transfer of: evaluate the necessary switching conditions to ensure the fast
but secure transfer. Some improvements like as REAL-TIME FAST
• Coal-fired power station transfer mode, additional line current criteria will significantly
• Gas-fired power station help to the efficiency and safety.
• Combined cycle power station Protection functions for tie-CB
• Integrated gasification combined cycle (IGCC) power station
The integrated protections are intend to protect the tie-CB in
• Nuclear power station segmented single busbar diagram against short-circuit or ground
• Chemical plant fault.
• Petrochemical plant Some special concerning is done to the busbar switch-onto-fault.
• Refinery plant Protection functions will only be active for a settable time.
• Iron and steel plant Programmable logic
• Cement plant
The numerous other additional functions assist the user in implement their own functions and generate user-defined
ensuring the cost effective system management and reliable messages.
power supply. Local operation has been designed according to
Measuring values
economic criteria. A large, easy-to-use graphic display is a major
design aim. The measuring values like as U, I, f, dV, df, dj, 3I0, 3V0 and CB
closing time can be recorded and displayed.
11

Construction
Function Abbreviation ANSI C o d e 2 Line-CBs 2 Line-CBs

+ 1 Tie-CB
HSBT
Line1->Line2 X X
Line2->Line1 X X
Busbar1->Busbar2 X
Busbar2->Busbar1 X
Busbar1->Line1 X
Busbar2->Line2 X
Protection
Definite overcurrent protection I>+V< 50 X
Ground-overcurrent protection 3I0>+3V0> 50N X
Overcurrent protection for busbar energization I>+V< 50.en X
Ground-overcurrent protection for busbar energization 3I0>+3V0> 50N.en X
Supervision
Phase sequence 47 X X
Voltage circuit X X
Table 11/8 Functional scope of HSBT 7VU683
Construction
The SIPROTEC 4 units have a uniform design and a degree of

functionality which represents a whole new quality. Local opera-
tion has been designed according to ergonomic criteria. Large,
easy-to read displays were a major design aim. The device HSBT
7VU683 is equipped with a graphic display thus providing and
depicting more information especially in industrial applications.
The DIGSI 4 operating program considerably simplifies planning
and engineering and reduces commissioning times.
1/1-rack size is the available housing width of the device HSBT
7VU683, referred to a 19" module frame system. The height is
a uniform 245 mm. Only flush-mounting housing with screw
type terminals is available. All cables can be connected with or
without ring lugs.
Fig. 11/89 Rear view with wiring terminal safety cover and
serial interface
11

HSBT functions
HSBT functions Switching sequences

The category HSBT 7VU683 is designed to serve for the follow-
Starting conditions ing switching sequences according to CBs’ operating behavior,
The device HSBT 7VU683 is designed to support the following – PARALLEL switching sequence
staring conditions,
– SIMULTANEOUS switching sequence
– NORMAL condition – SEQUENTIAL switching sequence
– FAULT condition
PARALLEL and SIMULATEOUS switching sequences can exclu-
– Inadmissible Under-voltage condition sively support the starting condition NORMAL while SEQUENTIAL
– Inadmissible Under-frequency condition can support all starting conditions.
– Inadvertent CB Open condition • PARALLEL switching sequence
The above conditions can be freely combined together, i.e, one If the two sources are allowed to work on busbar in parallel for
of them can be individually switched “OFF”. a short time, the PARALLEL sequence can be used for power
• NORMAL condition supply transfer.
Under the NORMAL condition, the power system is fault free and Under PARALLEL sequence, HSBT 7VU683 will firstly issue a
the starting command must be manually issued. This command CLOSE command to the to-be-closed CB after the device get the
can come from remote control center and/or local controller via starting command. When the closure is successful, the device
wiring connection or communication over protocol, e.g, will trip the to-be-opened CB. The tripping command can be
automatically generated by device or derived from manual
– DCS of power station operation which are dependent on setting,
– Turbine control system – PARALLEL Auto sequence
– Local panel – PARALLEL Half-Auto sequence
The switching of remote and local starting authority is done Under PARALLEL Auto sequence, the device will automatically
by internal CFC logic and controlled by device switching key issue an OPEN command after a settable time delay when the
“Remote/Local”. The starting command can only be remotely closure is successful. Under PARALLE Half-Auto sequence, the
executed over communication when the switching key is at device will not issue the OPEN command until the Manual Open
position “Remote”, vice versa. command arrived. The criterions are as below,
• FAULT condition – df < 8851 “PARAL. Delta f”
Under the FAULT condition, power system fault must be there on – |dU| < 8852 “PARAL. Delta U”
the in-feeder line and the starting command must be externally – dj < 8853 “PARAL. Delta PHI”
issued by other device, e.g, protection device.
If the to-be-opened CB failed to open, the device will automati-
• Abnormal condition cally de-couple the to-be-closed CB.
Under the abnormal condition, voltage disturbance must be The time sequence under PARALLEL can be understandable via
there on the busbar due to any causes. The starting command Fig. 11/104 (assumed switching of closing CB2 and opening
can be internally issued by device HSBT 7VU683 according to the CB1).
following abnormal conditions
– Inadmissible Under-voltage
– Inadmissible Under-frequency
11 – Inadvertent CB Open
To secure the starting reliability, line current is used as the
additional criterion to the above conditions.
In case the operating CB is manually tripped, transfer must
not be started. This can be recognized via indication 17864
“>NonManu.Op.CB1” and 17865 “>NonManu.Op.CB2” in
configuration matrix.

HSBT functions
Starting Starting
Command Command
t action CLOSE t action tBB-dead

Command
“1 ” “1 ”
OPEN
“0 ” tCB2-closing toverlapping “0 ” tCB1-opening Command
“1 ” “1 ”
CB2 Status CB1 Status
“0 ” tCB1-opening “0 ”
tCB2 Close Delay
“1 ” “1 ”
CB1 Status CLOSE
“0 ” tCB1 Open Delay “0 ” Command
“1 ” OPEN “1 ” CB2 Status tCB2-closing

Command
“0 ” “0 ”
Fig. 11/90 Time sequence of PARALLEL Fig. 11/91 Time sequence of SIMULTANEOUS
The advantage of PARALLEL sequence is to avoid any interrup- Due to the different operating time of the CB (a CB normally
tion of busbar power supply. PARALLEL Auto sequence should be opens faster than it close), the power supply of busbar will
preferred to reduce the overlapping time of two sources. be interrupted for a few milliseconds. The length of this dead
interval depends on the difference of CB operating time.
• SIMULTANEOUS switching sequence
• SEQUENTIAL switching sequence
If the two sources are not allowed to work on busbar in parallel,
the SIMULTANEOUS sequence can be used for power supply Under SEQUENTIAL sequence, HSBT 7VU683 will firstly issue a
transfer.Under SIMULTANEOUS sequence, HSBT 7VU683 will OPEN command to the to-be-opened CB after the device get the
firstly issue a OPEN command to the to-be-opened CB after the starting command. Differentiate from PARALLEL and SIMULTANE-
device gets the starting command. Meanwhile, the device will OUS switching sequences, SEQUENTIAL sequence can only issue
issue a CLOSE command to the to-be-closed CB if other criterions CLOSE command after the opening succeeded.
are met. The overlapping can be avoided via the settable CB
The time sequence under SEQUENTIAL can be understandable
close time delay if CB making time is small than breaking time.
via Fig. 11/106 (assumed switching of closing CB2 and opening
The criterions are as below,
CB1).
– df < 8855 “SIMUL. Delta f”
– dj< 8856 “SIMUL. Delta PHI” Starting
Command
If the to-be-opened CB failed to open, the device will automati-
taction tBB-dead
cally de-couple the to-be-closed CB.
“1 ”
The time sequence under SIMULTANEOUS can be understand-
OPEN
able via Fig. 11/105 (assumed switching of closing CB2 and “0 ” tCB1-opening Command
opening CB1).
“1 ”
CB2 Status
“0 ”
“ 1 ” CLOSE
Command
11
“0 ”
t operating
“1 ” tCB1-closing
CB1 Status
“0 ”
Fig. 11/92 Time sequence of SEQUENTIAL

HSBT functions
Transfer modes The equivalent circuit of residual voltage Ures and referred volt-
age Uref is shown in Fig. 11/109.
In the station service system of power station and industrial
plants, lots of asynchronous motors are connected. In case of The voltage drop on motor Um at instant of CB closing is
the main source interruption, the residual voltage of busbar calculated by following,
will be induced by connected asynchronous motors. Fig.11/107
Um = dU · xm /(xm +xs) = k · dU (Equa.-1)
shows the well-known typical diagram of vector trajectory of
residual voltage. Here, xm and xs are respectively the equivalent reactance of
busbar loading and referred system.
Un-safe Area Safe Area

RE
AL
-T
Tr IM
dU
270°
as E
nf FA
er S
T
°
24
0
30
0°
C
B
21
0°
33
0° Xs CB Xm
0.4s
IV
0.6s
IN-PHASE
III V
Transfer
Uref
180°
0.7s
s
0.8
0.3s
dU
s
0.1
0.5s I
es
~ Uref Ures ~
Ur
0° 30
15 A II °
T r AST
0.2s
r
sfe
an
F
0°
60
12
90°
ST
E FA
L-TIM r
REA Transfe
Fig. 11/93 Vector trajectory of residual voltage Fig. 11/95 Equivalent circuit of dU
Some notes are there regarding curve A according to Fig. For safety reason, the value |Um| must not exceed the permis-
11/110. The amplitude and frequency of residual voltage will sible voltage ko/v · |Un.|, Then, the maximum of permissible
decrease regarding time, while the delta phase angle against differential voltage |dU|max will be,
referred voltage will increase. Fig. 11/108 gives more messages |dU|max = ko/v /k · |Un| (Equa.-2)
to differential voltage.
In case ko/v = 1.1 and k = 0.67, the calculated |dU|max should
be less than 1.64 · |Un| (refer to curve B in Fig. 11/107).
In case ko/v = 1.1 and k = 0.95, the calculated |dU|max should
be less than 1.15 · |Un| (refer to curve C in Fig. 11/107). This
calculation result would be the base for setting.
The plane is divided into two parts by curve B (or curve C). The
left is defined as un-safe area because the value |dU| is bigger
than the up-limit |dU|max which could damage the winding of
stator. Vice versa, the right is safe area.
Based on the above principles, the category HSBT 7VU683 is
designed to have the following modes (refer to Fig. 11/107) to
11 fit for the safe transfer,
– FAST transfer mode (area I)
– REAL-TIME FAST transfer mode (area II and IV)
– IN-PHASE transfer mode (area V)
– RES-VOLT transfer mode
Fig. 11/94 Vector trajectory of residual voltage
– LONG-TIME transfer mode

HSBT functions
All of above modes can be freely combined together, i.e, one of • IN-PHASE transfer mode
them can be individually switched “ON” or “OFF” remotely via
When the residual voltage comes close to the referred voltage,
communication or locally at device panel.
it comes to transfer mode IN-PHASE. It’s good for safe transfer if
To be noted that the original dj and |dU| between busbar voltage the CB closes at the instant the value dj is zero.
and standby voltage due to wiring can be automatically compen-
The intelligent device 7VU683 estimates the delta phase angle
sated by device during configuration.
dj at the instant the CB closes. based on real-time slipping rate
• FAST transfer mode and the settable “CBx Closing Time”. If If all the quantity of
predicted dj, the real-time df and |Ures| meet the defined crite-
The study and testing results show, in most cases the typical
rions,, the device will immediately issue the CLOSE command to
values of df, dj and |dU| are smaller enough within the first
the to-be-closed CB. The criterions are as below,
tens of millisecond from the instant the CB opens. It’s good to
safe and fast transfer due to the slight shock to motors. If the – df < 8868 ”IN-PHA Delta f”
real-time measured df, dj and |Ures| meet the defined criterions, – dj < 8869 “IN-PHA Delta PHI“
the device will immediately issue the CLOSE command to the – |Ures| > 8870 “IN-PHA U/V BLK“
to-be-closed CB. The criterions are as below,
• RES-VOLT transfer mode
– df < 8858 ”FT Delta f”
If the above mentioned transfer modes failed, the transfer can
– dj < 8859 “FT Delta PHI“
still go on with mode RES-VOLT.
– |Ures| > 8860 “FT U/V BLK“
When the residual voltage |Ures| under-shots the settable
The typical operating time of 7VU683 in this case is approx. parameter 8871 “RES-VOLT Threshold”, the RES-VOLT transfer
20ms. As modern vacuum breaker has less making time, e.g, mode will perform and the device will immediately issue the
60ms, the dead time of busbar will be as short as approx. 80ms. CLOSE command to the to-be-closed CB. The typical setting
could be 30%Un.
• REAL-TIME FAST transfer mode
To reduce the shock under low voltage restarting of motors,
When FAST transfer chance is missed, the device will automati- two stages of Low Voltage Load-Shedding (LVLSH) function are
cally, if activated, turn to next transfer mode REAL-TIME FAST. integrated in the device. LVLSH will pickup before the RES-VOLT
This mode has more concerning on the permissible motor volt- transfer mode. This function can be activated or de-activated
age, i.e, the differential voltage |dU| across the opened CB must manually on site.
not exceed the value |dU|max. The intelligent device 7VU683
• LONG-TIME transfer mode
then estimates the delta phase angle dj and differential voltage
dU at the instant the CB closes based on real-time slipping The last criterion to start the transfer is LONG-TIME mode if all
rate and the settable “CBx Closing Time”. If all the quantity of above mentioned modes failed.
predicted dj and dU, the real-time df and |Ures| meet the defined When the transfer time is more than the settable parameter
criterions, the device will immediately issue the CLOSE command 8872 “LONG-TIME Threshold”, the LONG-TIME transfer mode will
to the to-be-closed CB. The criterions are as below, perform and the device will immediately issue the CLOSE com-
– df < 8861 ”RTFT Delta f” mand to the to-be-closed CB. The typical setting could be 3s.
– |dU| < 8862 “RTFT Delta U“
– dj< 8863 “RTFT Delta PHI“
– |Ures| > 8864 “RTFT U/V BLK“
11

HSBT functions
Switching directions To be noted that power supply 1 is exclusively defined as main

source while power supply 2 defined as standby source. Then,
The device support bi-direction power transfer under NORMAL
if mono-direction against NORMAL condition is required, power
condition, i.e, the device can transfer the main source of busbar
supply 1 in Fig. 11/121 to Fig. 11/128 should be identified as
to standby depending on the actual CBs’ status, vice versa.
main source.
In most cases, the switching is limited from main source to
The transfer permission under various starting conditions and
standby source under starting conditions of FAULT, Inadmissible
switching directions can be referred to below two tables.
Under-voltage, Inadmissible Under-frequency and Inadvertent
CB Open. The requirement can be met by set the parameter
8831 “Mono-direction against NORMAL condition” = “YES”.
The default setting “YES” can be changed to “NO” if bi-direction
transfer is always required in any conditions.
CB1 CB2 Switching-over Voltage Busbar Transfer Permitted?

Status Status Comparison
From To NORMAL FAULT Inadmissible Inadmissible Un- Inadvertent CB
Undervoltage derfrequency Open
Closed Open L1 L2 U_B U_L2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Open Closed L2 L1 U_B U_L1 Yes No1) No1) No1) No1)
1) If parameter 8831 "Mono-direction against NORMAL" = "YES", this cell says No. Otherwise, this cell says Yes.
Table 11/9 Transfer permission under default setting, single busbar
CB1 CB3 CB2 Switching- Voltage Busbar Transfer Permitted?

Status Status Status over Comparison
From To NORMAL FAULT Inadmissible Inadmissible Un- Inadvertent CB
Undervoltage derfrequency Open
Closed Closed Open L1 L2 U_B2 U_L2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B2 L2 U_B2 U_L2 Yes / 2) / 2) / 2) / 2)
Closed Open Closed B1 B2 U_B1 U_B2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B2 B1 U_B2 U_B1 Yes No1) No1) No1) No1)
Open Closed Closed L2 L1 U_B1 U_L1 Yes No1) No1) No1) No1)
B1 L1 U_B1 U_L1 Yes / 2) / 2) / 2) / 2)
1) If parameter 8831 "Mono-direction against NORMAL" = "YES", this cell says No. Otherwise, this cell says Yes.
11
2) Not applicable for this cell
Table 11/10 Transfer permission under default setting, segmented single busbar

HSBT functions
HSBT test mode Sample of oscillographic FAST transfer

To facilitate the functional testing and site commissioning, the
Test Mode is specially designed for this purpose. This function
can be activated on site by parameter setting 8820 “HSBT Test
Mode” = “Yes” or by indication 18020 “>HSBT Test Mode” via
binary input.
If the function HSBT goes into Test Mode, the transfer process
is the same except that the CLOSE command will be blocked.
Instead, CLOSE command with test mark will be issued for
indicating.
HSBT Test Mode could be helpful before the device is put into
service. When CB is manually tripped, HSBT 7VU683 picks up
and goes into transfer process. Under the assistance of inte-
grated Fault Recorder and Event Log, the operating consequence
and settings can be assessed. Optimization to parameter settings
Fig. 11/97 Oscillographic FAST transfer at segmented single busbar
can be done based on the assessment.
8819 HSBT Test Mode

17767
21 OR AND CommandCloseCB1
“1”
17768
2))
CommandCloseCB2
18020 17769
CommandCloseCB3
>HSBT Test Mode
18021
AND Cnd.Cl.CB1.Test
CLOSE
18022
Cnd.Cl.CB2.Test
18023
CB1 Cnd.Cl.CB3.Test
CB2
CB3
Fig. 11/96 Logic diagram of test mode
Fig. 11/98 Trip log of FAST transfer at segmented single busbar

Reset of transfer
The default setting is to block the device after once transfer Some notes to the two figures,
is executed, i.e, either failure or success, the device goes into – Primary connection of segmented single busbar
blocking status till to the reset indication via binary input or
– Line1 in operating while Line2 in standby, CB3 serve as tie-CB
LED button on device panel. This can be changed by setting the
which is in closed status
parameter 8817 ”Manual Restart HSBT” = “NO”. Then, after
once successful transfer, the device will automatically execute – Fault is there in Line1 and cleared by protection relay. Mean-
a new transfer request before the reset indication arrives. But, while, HSBT is started
after once failed transfer, the device will go into blocking status – Switching-over between Line1 and Line2 are defined
till to the reset indication. – Instant 0ms, device picked up, CommandOpenCB1 issued
– Instant 12ms, CB1 opened
– Instant 26ms, CommandCloseCB2 issued
– Instant 62ms, CB2 closed
– FAST transfer succeeded, approx. 50ms dead time interval of
11
busbar

Protection functions Phase-overcurrent protection

This function is designed to detect any short-circuit faults in MV
The Power Supply Transfer device 7VU68 integrates protection system. The device will evaluate all current inputs at channel I_B
functions for tie-CB in primary connection of Segmented Single and will pickup immediately if one of phase current over-shots
Busbar. This function can be set “Enabled” or “Disabled” during the settable threshold.
configuration.
The function has two stages, one time delay for each stage.
The protection include the following functions,
The voltage element can be activated or de-activated under
– Phase overcurrent protection
parameter 9001 “Compound Voltage Control”.
– Ground overcurrent protection
Ground-overcurrent protection
– Phase overcurrent protection for Busbar Energization
– Ground overcurrent protection for Busbar Energization This function is designed to detect ground fault in MV system.
The device will evaluate zero sequence current and will pickup
To secure the reliability and sensitivity, the voltage element is immediately if it over-shots the settable threshold.
additionally introduced to current criterion to release trip com-
mand. The quantity of zero sequence current is derived from calculated
3I0 or measured ground current Ie. This can be set under param-
For functions of Phase-overcurrent protection and Phase overcur- eter 9018 “3I0/Ie Assignment”.
rent for Busbar Energization, compound voltage element is used.
The criterion of compound voltage element is illustrated in Fig. The function has two stages, one time delay for each stage.
11/113. The voltage element can be activated or de-activated under
parameter 9011 “3U0 Control”.
9003 U2 Over-voltage Phase-overcurrent protection for busbar energization
Busbar1 U2 To avoid any switch-onto-fault, the function phase-over-current
protection can be activated for some time after the busbar
9002 Ph-ph Under-voltage
is energized when tie-CB is closed. An individual function
OR Compound Voltage
Busbar1 Uab phase-overcurrent protection for busbar energization is specially
Busbar1 Ubc OR designed for this utilization.
Busbar1 Uca
The function has the same criterion and stages to phase- over-
current protection. The function will not be activated until the
tie-CB is closed.
Fig. 11/99 Logic of compound voltage element
Ground-overcurrent protection for busbar energization
For functions of ground overcurrent protection and ground To avoid any switch-onto-fault, the function ground-over-current
overcurrent protection for Busbar Energization, the element of protection can be activated for some time after the busbar is
zero sequence over-voltage is used. The quantity is derived from energized when tie-CB is closed. An individual function ground-
calculated 3U0 based on measured busbar1 voltage. overcurrent protection for busbar energization is specially
The validity of protections in case of busbar energization can be esigned for this utilization.
set under parameter 9019A “Active Time for Busbar Energiza- The function has the same criterion and stages to ground- over-
tion”. current protection. The function will not be activated until the
Each of above functions can be separately switched “ON” or tie-CB is closed.
“OFF” remotely via communication or locally at device panel.
11

Communication
Communication IEC 60870-5-103

With respect to communication, particular emphasis has been communication in the protected area. IEC 60870-5-103 is sup-
placed on high levels of flexibility, data integrity and utilization ported by a numerous of manufacturers and is used worldwide.
the communication modules permits interchangeability on the PROFIBUS DP
one hand, and on the other hand provides openness for future PROFIBUS is an internationally standardized communication
standards (for example, Industrial Ethernet). system (EN 50170). PROFIBUS is supported internationally by
Local PC interface several hundred manufacturers and has to date been used in
more than 1,000,000 applications all over the world. With the
The PC interface from the front of the unit permits quick access PROFIBUS DP, the device can be directly connected to a SIMATIC
to all parameters and fault event data. The use of the DIGSI S5/S7. The transferred data are fault data, measured values and
4 operating program during commissioning is particularly information from or to the logic (CFC).
advantageous.
MODBUS RTU
Rear mounted interface
MODBUS is also a widely utilized communication standard and is
At the rear of the unit there is one fixed interface and two used in numerous automation solutions.
communication modules which incorporate optional equipment
complements and permit retrofitting. They assure the ability Safe bus architecture
to comply with the requirements of different communication • RS485 bus
interfaces (electrical or optical) and protocols (IEC 60870, PRO-
FIBUS, DIGSI). The interfaces make provision for the following With this data transmission via copper conductors, electromag-
applications: netic interference influences are largely eliminated by the use
of twisted-pair conductor. Upon failure of a unit, the remaining
Service interface (fixed) system continues to operate without any faults.
In the RS485 version, several protection units can be centrally • Fiber-optic double ring circuit
operated with DIGSI 4. By using a modem, remote control is pos-
sible. This provides advantages in fault clearance, in particular in The fiber-optic double ring circuit is immune to electromagnetic
unmanned substations. interference. Upon failure of a section between two units, the
communication system continues to operate without distur-
System interface bance.
designs. Furthermore, the units can exchange data through this Substation
interface via Ethernet and IEC 61850 protocol and can also be controller
operated by DIGSI.
IEC 61850 protocol
As of mid-2004, the Ethernet-based IEC 61850 protocol is the
worldwide standard for protection and control systems used by
power supply corporations. Siemens is of the first manufacturer
to support this standard and has 200.000 IEC61850 devices in
operation. By means of this protocol, information can also be S SIPROTEC S SIPROTEC S SIPROTEC
exchanged directly between bay units so as to set up simple

masterless systems for bay and system interlocking. Access to 11
the units via the Ethernet bus will also be possible with DIGSI.
Fig. 11/100 IEC 60870-5-103: Radial electrical or fiber-optic

connection

High Speed Busbar Transfer – Communication
Option: Control
SICAM center
',*6, PAS
6ZLWFK
S SIPROTEC S SIPROTEC S SIPROTEC
Fig. 11/101 Bus structure for station bus with Ethernet and IEC 61850, Fig. 11/102 Optical Ethernet communication module for IEC 61850
fiber-optic ring with integrated Ethernet-switch
Fig. 11/103 PROFIBUS communication module, optical, double ring Fig. 11/104 Fiber-optic communication module
11
Fig. 11/105 RS232/RS485 electrical communication module

High Speed Busbar Transfer – Communication
System solution Parallel to this, local communication is possible, for example,

during a major inspection. For IEC 61850, an interoperable
SIPROTEC 4 is tailor-made for use in SIMATIC-based automation
system solution is offered with SICAM PAS. Via the 100 Mbit/s
systems.
Ethernet bus, the unit are linked with PAS electrically or opti-
Via the PROFIBUS DP, indications (pickup and tripping) and all cally to the station PC. The interface is standardized, thus also
relevant operational measured values are transmitted from the enabling direct connection of units of other manufacturers to
HSBT device. the Ethernet bus. With IEC 61850, however, the units can also
be used in other manufacturers' systems.
Via modem and service interface, the electric engineer has
access to the protection devices at all times. This permits remote
maintenance and diagnosis (cyclic testing).
2SHUDWLRQDQG
PRQLWRULQJ
$XWRPDWLRQV\VWHPV
HJ6,0$7,&
352),%86'3
56
RSWLFDOFRQYHUWHU
SS SIPROTEC SS SIPROTEC SS SIPROTEC SS SIPROTEC
56
RSWLFDOFRQYHUWHU
&RPP
QHWZRUN
0RGHP 0RGHP
7VU68 7VU68 7VU68 7VU68
',*6,
5HPRWHFRQWURO
',*6, YLDPRGHP
/RFDOIRUFRPPLVVLRQLQJ
Fig. 11/106 System solution: communication
11

High Speed Busbar Transfer – Typical applications
Primary connection of single busbar

The device HSBT 7VU683 will automatically determine the Each switching-over can be individually switched “ON” or “OFF”
switching direction based on the actual CBs’ status. remotely via communication or locally at device panel.
Main Stand-by
Source Source
Switching Direction
L1->L2
R13
R14
K14
K13
PT1 PT2
Ux_L1
Ux_L2
HSBT 7VU683
BO11
Ua_B
Ub_B
Ix_L1
Ix_L2
Uc_B
BO6
Line1/L1 Line2/L2
CT1
CT2
R15
R17
R18
R16
J1
J2
J6
J5
Close
Open
CB1 CB2
Busbar
Fig. 11/107 Switching-over L1->L2, single busbar
Main Stand-by
Source Source
Switching Direction
L2->L1
R13
R14
K14
K13
PT1 PT2
11
Ux_L1
Ux_L2
HSBT 7VU683
BO10
BO13
Ua_B
Ub_B
Ix_L1
Ix_L2
Uc_B
Line1/L1 Line2/L2
CT1
CT2
R15
R17
R18
R16
J1
J2
J6
J5
Close
Open
CB1 CB2
Busbar
Fig. 11/108 Switching-over L2->L1, single busbar

Primary connection of segmented single busbar: CB1 and The device will properly execute the switching direction based
CB3 are closed, CB2 is opened on the command input under this case.
In case of these CBs’ status, two possible switching directions are Each switching-over can be individually switched “ON” or “OFF”
there. Then, the starting command of two switching directions remotely via communication or locally at device panel.
must be externally separately routed to device’s binary inputs,
e.g, starting command L1->L2 routed to BI13, B2->L2 to BI12.
Main Stand-by
Source Source
Switching Direction
L1->L2
R13
R14
K14
K13
PT1 PT2
Ux_L1
Ux_L2
HSBT 7VU683
Ua_B1
Ub_B1
Ub_B2
Ua_B2
Uc_B1
Uc_B2
BO11
Ix_L1
Ix_L2
Ie_B
Ib_B
Ia_B
Ic_B
BO6
Line1/L1 Line2/L2
CT1
CT2
R15
R17
R18
R16
K16
K18
K17
K15
Q8
Q7
Q5 Q6
Q3 Q4
Q1 Q2
J1
J2
J6
J5
Close
Open
CT3
CB1 CB2
Busbar1/B1 CB3 Busbar2/B2
Fig. 11/109 Switching-over L1->L2, segmented single busbar
Main Stand-by
Source Source
Switching Direction
B2->L2
R13
R14
K14
K13
PT1 PT2
11
Ux_L1
Ux_L2
HSBT 7VU683
Ua_B1
Ub_B1
Ub_B2
Ua_B2
Uc_B1
Uc_B2
BO11
Ix_L1
Ix_L2
Ie_B
Ib_B
Ia_B
Ic_B
BO5
Line1/L1 Line2/L2
CT1
CT2
R15
R17
R18
R16
K16
K18
K17
K15
Q8
Q7
Q5 Q6
Q3 Q4
Q1 Q2
J1
J2
J6
J5
Close
Open
CT3
CB1 CB2
Fig. 11/110 Switching-over B2->L2, segmented single busbar

Primary connection of segmented single busbar: CB2 and Starting command B1->L1 can be designated to BI13 too even if
CB3 are closed, CB1 is opened starting command L1->L2 is already there, the reason is only one
of these two switching directions will be automatically executed
In case of these CBs’ status, two possible switching directions are
by device based on the actual CBs’ status. The same situation
there. Then, the starting command of two switching directions
applies to L2->L1.
e.g, starting command B1->L1 routed to BI13, L2->L1 to BI12. The above switching-overs can be individually switched “ON” or
The device will properly execute the switching direction based “OFF” remotely via communication or locally at device panel.
on the command input under this case.
Main Stand-by
Source Source
Switching Direction
L2->L1
R13
R14
K14
K13
PT1 PT2
Ux_L1
Ux_L2
HSBT 7VU683
Ua_B1
Ub_B1
Ub_B2
Ua_B2
Uc_B1
Uc_B2
BO13
BO10
Ix_L1
Ix_L2
Ie_B
Ib_B
Ia_B
Ic_B
Line1/L1 Line2/L2
CT1
CT2
R15
R17
R18
R16
K16
K18
K17
K15
Q8
Q7
Q5 Q6
Q3 Q4
Q1 Q2
J1
J2
J6
J5
Close
Open
CT3
CB1 CB2
Fig. 11/111 Switching-over L2->L1, segmented single busbar
Main Stand-by
Source Source
Switching Direction
B1->L1
R13
R14
K14
K13
PT1 PT2
11
Ux_L1
Ux_L2
HSBT 7VU683
Ua_B1
Ub_B1
Ub_B2
Ua_B2
Uc_B1
Uc_B2
BO10
Ix_L1
Ix_L2
Ie_B
Ib_B
Ia_B
Ic_B
BO5
Line1/L1 Line2/L2
CT1
CT2
R15
R17
R18
R16
K16
K18
K17
K15
Q8
Q7
Q5 Q6
Q3 Q4
Q1 Q2
J1
J2
J6
J5
Close
Open
CT3
CB1 CB2
Fig. 11/112 Switching-over B1->L1, segmented single busbar

Primary connection of segmented single busbar: CB1 and Starting command B1->B2 can be designated to BI13 too even
CB2 are closed, CB3 is opened if starting command L1->L2 and B1->L1 are already there, the
reason is only one of these three switching directions will be
In case of these CBs’ status, two possible switching directions are
automatically executed by device based on the actual CBs’
there. Then, the starting command of two switching directions
status. The same situation applies to B2->B1.
e.g, starting command B1->B2 routed to BI13, B2->B1 to BI12. The above switching-overs can be individually switched “ON” or
The device will properly execute the switching direction based “OFF” remotely via communication or locally at device panel.
on the command input under this case.
Main Stand-by
Source Source
Switching Direction
B1->B2
R13
R14
K14
K13
PT1 PT2
Ux_L1
Ux_L2
HSBT 7VU683
Ua_B1
Ub_B1
Ub_B2
Ua_B2
Uc_B1
Uc_B2
BO12
Ix_L1
Ix_L2
Ie_B
Ib_B
Ia_B
Ic_B
BO6
Line1/L1 Line2/L2
CT1
CT2
R15
R17
R18
R16
K16
K18
K17
K15
Q8
Q7
Q5 Q6
Q3 Q4
Q1 Q2
J1
J2
J6
J5
Close
Open
CT3
CB1 CB2
Fig. 11/113 Switching-over B1->B2, segmented single busbar
Main Stand-by
Source Source
Switching Direction
B2->B1
R13
R14
K14
K13
PT1 PT2
11
Ux_L1
Ux_L2
HSBT 7VU683
Ua_B1
Ub_B1
Ub_B2
Ua_B2
Uc_B1
Uc_B2
BO13
BO12
Ix_L1
Ix_L2
Ie_B
Ib_B
Ia_B
Ic_B
Line1/L1 Line2/L2
CT1
CT2
R15
R17
R18
R16
K16
K18
K17
K15
Q8
Q7
Q5 Q6
Q3 Q4
Q1 Q2
J1
J2
J6
J5
Close
Open
CT3
CB1 CB2
Fig. 11/114 Switching-over B2->B1, segmented single busbar

High Speed Busbar Transfer – Selection and ordering data
7VU683 - E -1A A 0–
7VU683 high speed busbar transfer device

Housing binary inputs and outputs
Housing 1/1 19'', 17 BI, 18 BO (incl.5 High Speed), 1 live-status contact
Current transformer: In
IN=1A1) 1
IN=5A1) 5
Auxiliary Voltage
DC 24 to 48 V, binary input threshold DC 19 V3) 2
DC 60 to 125 V2), binary input threshold DC 19 V3)
4
DC 110 to 250 V2), AC 115/230 V, binary input threshold DC 88 V3)
5
DC 220 to 250 V2), AC 115/230 V, binary input threshold DC 176 V3) 6
Construction
Flush-mounting housing, screw-type terminals E
Region-specific default settings/ language Settings

Region World, English4), 50/60Hz B
Region China, Chinese4), 50/60Hz W
Port B: (System port on rear of device)

No system port 0
IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol, electrical RS232 1
IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol, electrical RS485 2
IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol, 820 nm fibre, ST-connector 3
L 0
Profibus DP Slave, RS485 9 A
Profibus DP Slave, 820 nm fibre, double ring, ST-connector 9 B
Modbus, RS485 9 D
Modbus, 820 nm fibre, ST-connector 9 E
IEC 60870-5-103 Protocol, redundant RS485 9 P
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45-connector 9 R
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, with integrated switch optical, double, LC-connector 9 S
11 Port C (Service)
Port C: DIGSI 4/Modem, electrical RS232; 1
Port C: DIGSI 4/Modem/ RTD-box, electrical RS485;
2
Measuring/ fault recording

Basic measured Values
1
Functions A
High Speed Busbar Transfer (HSBT) (2 or 3 circuit breakers)
Protection functions (Overcurrent phase/ground (50, 50N);
Overcurrent phase/ground for busbar energization
Supervision functions
1) Rated current 1/5 A can be selected by means of jumpers.

2) Transition between the three auxiliary voltage can be selected by mean of jumpers.
3) The threshold of each binary input can be set via jumpers.
4) Device language can be selected via DIGSI.

High Speed Busbar Transfer – Accessories
Connecting cable
Cable between PC/notebook (9-pin connector) 7XV5100-4
(contained in DIGSI 4, but can be ordered additionally)
Description Order No. Size of Supplier Fig.

package
Mounting rail C73165-A63-D200-1 1 Siemens 11/129
Short-circuit link For current terminals C73334-A1-C34-1 1 Siemens 11/130

For other terminals C73334-A1-C34-1 1 Siemens 11/131
Safety cover for Large C73334-A1-C31-1 1 Siemens

terminals Small C73334-A1-C32-1 1 Siemens
11
Fig. 11/115 Mounting rail for 19" rack Fig. 11/116 Short-circuit link for Fig. 11/117 Short-circuit link for
current terminals voltage terminals/
indications terminals

High Speed Busbar Transfer – Connection diagram
Q1 Ia_B HSBT 7VU683 BI 1 F5

Q2 BI 2 F6
Q3 Ib_B BI 3 F7
Q4 BI 4 F8
Q5 Ic_B BI 5 F9
Q6 F10
Q7 Ie_B
BO 1 R1
Q8
BO 2 R2
J1 Ix_L1 BO 3 R3
J2 R4
J3 N/A BO 4 R5
J4 R6
J5 Ix_L2 BO 5 R7
J6 R8
J7 N/A
BO 62) P3
J8
P4
R15 Ua_B1 / Ua_B BO 71) P6
R17 Ub_B1 / Ub_B BO 81) P7
R18 Uc_B1 / Uc_B BO 91) P8
R16 P5
R13 Ux_L1 BO 102) P9
R14 P10
BO 112) P11
K15 Ua_B2
P12
K17 Ub_B2
BO 122) P13
K18 Uc_B2
P14
K16
BO 132) P15
K13 Ux_L2
P16
K14
BO 14 K1
R9 BI 6
BO 15 K2
R10
BO 16 K3
R11 BI 7
K4
R12
BO 17 K5
P17 BI 8 K6
P18 BO 18 K7
N1 BI 9 K8
N2 Life Status 1 2
F3
N3 BI 10 Contact 3 2
11 N4 BI 11
F4
N6 BI 12
N5 Power = +
F1
(~)
N7 BI 13 Supply
=
- F2
N8
N9 BI 14 Service Port C
N10
System Port B
N11 BI 15
N12 Time Synchronization A
K9 BI 16 Front Operator
K10
K11 BI 17 1) Fast speed contact Ground at rear
2) High speed contact of housing
K12
Fig. 11/118 7VU683 connection diagram

Substation Automation
Page
SIPROTEC 6MD61 IO-Box 12/3
SIPROTEC 6MD63 bay control unit 12/11
SIPROTEC 6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit 12/13
12
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Substation Automation / 6MD61
SIPROTEC 6MD61 IO-Box
2
LSP2795-afp.tif
LSP2797.eps
4
5
Fig. 12/1 SIPROTEC 6MD61 IO-Box
Description Function overview

6
The SIPROTEC 4 6MD61 IO-Box enables in a simple, easy way Application
to enhance the number of binary inputs and outputs in the
switchgear. It can be used directly in the bay together with other
• Extension of number of inputs and outputs of bay controller 7
• Extension of number of inputs and outputs of protection unit
SIPROTEC 4 units and also together with SICAM PAS to serve as a
central process connection. • Central process connection for SICAM PAS
The IO-Box is based on the SIPROTEC 6MD63 and 6MD66 series,

so it can be easily integrated in systems with other SIPROTEC 4
Features 8
• Standard SIPROTEC hardware for easy configuration with DIGSI
units.
• Full EMC compliance like all other SIPROTEC devices
The IO-Box supports a wide range of demand for additional
binary inputs (BI) and binary outputs (BO), starting from
• Housing can be used for surface mounting or flush mounting
(units are always delivered with two mounting rails for surface
9
20 BI+10 BO and going up to 80 BI+53 BO. All important mounting. These rails can be dismounted for flush mounting)
standard communication protocols are supported.
With IEC 61850-GOOSE communication, a direct information • Three types with different amount of inputs and outputs
interchange with other SIPROTEC units is possible. For simplifi-
cation and cost reduction, the IO-Box is available only without
available
10
automation (CFC), without keypad and without display.
• Operational measured values (only 6MD612)
.
• Energy metering values (only 6MD612)
11
• Self supervision of relay
• IEC 61850 Ethernet
12
• IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
• PROFIBUS DP
• Service interface for DIGSI 4 (modem) 13
• Front interface for DIGSI4
• Time synchronization via IRIG B / DCF77
14
15
Application
Application
1 The following figures show the most

SICAM PAS substation
controller
important applications of the SIPROTEC electrical
IO-Box 6MD61. optical Switch
2 The configuration shown in Fig. 12/2

allows direct GOOSE communication
between the SIPROTEC 4 units (6MD66,
7SJ63) and the IO-Boxes, independent
of the substation controller. Of course,
3 this configuration is also possible without
Bay 1 Bay 2
substation controller. The IO-Box is

used as additional digital inputs and
measurements (measurements only with
4
SIPV6.022en.eps
6MD612), and serves as an additional
command output. 6MD66 IO-Box 6MD61 7SJ63 IO-Box 6MD61
The communication between IO-Box and
the substation controller is established by
5 using the IEC 61850 standard protocol. Fig. 12/2 Configuration with IO-Box in IEC 61850 substation
Fig. 12/3 shows a configuration in which
the IO-Box is used as a central process
connection in the cubicle of the substa-
6 tion controller. For example, cubicle
SICAM PAS substation
controller
signaling lamps or a signaling horn are electrical
controlled by the command relays of the optical Switch IO-Box 6MD61
IO-Box.
7 Fig. 12/4 shows the communication for
substations with no Ethernet protocol
used. In this case, all communication lines
go directly to the substation controller.
8 If information from the IO-Box is used for Bay 1 Bay 2
switchgear interlocking, the interlocking
logic must be part of the substation
controller.
9
SIPV6.023en.eps
6MD66 7SA63 6MD66 7SA63
10
Fig. 12/3 IO-Box as central input/output for SICAM PAS substation controller
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 12/4 Direct connection of IO-Boxes and protection relays to substation controller via
standard protocol


6MD61 IO-Box
20 binary inputs, 6 command relays, 4 (2) power relays, 1 live status contact (similar to 6MD634)
6MD61 - - 0AA0 -
1
in ½ 19'' housing 1
33 binary inputs, 14 command relays, 8 (4) power relays, 1 live status contact, 2 x 20 mA, 3 x V, 4 x I,
(similar to 6MD636) in 19'' housing
80 binary inputs, 53 command relays, 1 live status contact
2
2
in 19'' housing 3
Current transformer: rated current In

No analog measured variables
1 A2)
0 3
1
5 A2) 5

24 to 48 V DC, threshold binary input 19 V 2
4
60 V DC, threshold binary input 19 V2) 3
110 V DC, threshold binary input 88 V2) 4
220 to 250 V DC, 115 to 230 V AC, threshold binary input 176 V for input No. 8-80
for 6MD613 (C-I/O 4), otherwise threshold 88 V2) 5
5
Unit version
Surface-mounting case, without HMI, mounting in low voltage compartment,
screw-type terminals (direct wiring / ring lugs), also usable as flush-mounting case F 6
Region DE, 50 Hz, language: German, changeable A
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language: English (GB), changeable
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, language: English (US), changeable
B
C
7
Region FR, language: French, changeable D
Region World, language: Spanish, changeable E
System interface (on rear of unit, port B) 8

No system port 0
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, optical 820 nm, ST connector 3 9
PROFIBUS DP Slave, 820 nm fiber, double ring, ST connectors 9 L 0 B
IEC 61850, 100 BaseT (100 Mbit Ethernet electric, double, RJ45 connector)
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, fiber optic, double, LC connectors
9
9
L 0 R
L 0 S
10
Function interface (on rear of unit, port C)
No function port 0
DIGSI 4, RS232
DIGSI 4, RS485
1 11
2
DIGSI 4, 820 nm fiber, ST connector 3
12
13
14
1) Only for position 6 = 2
2) Thresholds can be changed (jumper) for each binary input between
19 V and 88 V, for 6MD613 BI No. 8-80 also to 176 V.
15
Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14

15
Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14
15 Fig. 12/7 Connection diagram, part 1; continued on the following page

Connection diagram
10
11
12
13
14
Fig. 12/8 Connection diagram part 2

15
10
11
12
13
14
15
SIPROTEC 6MD63 bay control unit
Function overview
Application
1
• Optimized for connection to three-position disconnectors
• Switchgear interlocking interface
• Suitable for redundant master station 2
• Automation can be configured easily by graphic means
with CFC
Control functions 3
• Number of switching devices only limited by number of
LSP2314-afp.tif
available inputs and outputs
• Local/remote switching via key switch 4
• Command derivation from an indication
• 4 freely assignable function keys to speed up frequently
recurring operator actions
• Switchgear interlocking isolator/c.-b.
5
Fig. 12/9 SIPROTEC 6MD63 bay control unit • Key-operated switching authority
• Feeder control diagram
• Measured-value acquisition 6
Description • Signal and command indications
• P, Q, cos φ (power factor) and meter-reading calculation
The 6MD63 bay control unit is a flexible, easy-to-use control
unit. It is optimally tailored for medium-voltage applications but • Event logging 7
can also be used in high-voltage substations. • Switching statistics
The 6MD63 bay control unit has the same design (look and feel) Monitoring functions
as the other protection and combined units of the SIPROTEC 4
relay series. Configuration is also performed in a standardized
• Operational measured values 8
way with the easy-to-use DIGSI 4 configuration tool . • Energy metering values
For operation, a large graphic display with a keyboard is avail-
able. The important operating actions are performed in a simple
and intuitive way, e.g. alarm list display or switchgear control.
• Slave pointer
• Self-supervision of relay
9
The operator panel can be mounted separately from the relay,
if required. Thus, flexibility with regard to the mounting position Communication interfaces
of the unit is ensured.
Integrated key-operated switches control the switching authority
– IEC 61850 Ethernet 10
and authorization for switching without interlocking.
– DNP 3
– PROFIBUS DP
– MODBUS 11
– Service interface for DIGSI 4 (modem)/temperature
detection (thermo-box)
– Front interface for DIGSI 4
– Time synchronization via IRIG-B/DCF 77 12
13
14
15
1 6MD63 bay control unit with local control
Housing, binary inputs (BI) and outputs (BO), measuring transducer

6MD63 - - AA0 -
Housing ½19”, 11 BI, 8 BO, 1 live status contact 1

Housing ½19”, 24 BI, 11 BO, 4 power relays, 1 live status contact 2
2 Housing ½19”, 20 BI, 11 BO, 2 measuring transducer inputs, 4 power relays, 1 live status contact
Housing ½19”, 20 BI, 6 BO, 4 power relays, 1 live status contact1)
3
4
Housing 19”, 37 BI, 14 BO, 8 power relays, 1 live status contact 5
Housing 19”, 33 BI, 14 BO, 2 measuring transducer inputs, 8 power relays, 1 live status contact 6
Housing ½ 19”, 33 BI, 9 BO, 8 power relays, 1 live status contact1)
3 Current transformer In
7
No analog measured variables 0

1 A2) 1
5 A2)
4 Rated auxiliary voltage (power supply, indication voltage)
5
24 to 48 V DC, threshold binary input 19 V3) 2

60 to 125 V DC4), threshold binary input 19 V3) 4
110 to 250 V DC4), 115 to 230 V AC, threshold binary input 88 V3)
5 Unit version
5
For panel surface mounting, plug-in terminal, detached operator panel A

For panel surface mounting, 2-tier terminal, top/bottom B
For panel surface mounting, screw-type terminal, detached operator panel
6 For panel flush mounting, plug-in terminal (2/3 pin AMP connector)
C
D
For panel flush mounting, screw-type terminal (direct connection / ring-type cable lugs) E
For panel surface mounting, screw-type terminal (direct connection / ring-type cable lugs), without HMI F
For panel surface mounting, plug-in terminal without HMI G
7 Region-specific default settings/function versions and language settings
Region DE, 50 Hz, IEC, language: German, changeable A
Region World, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, language: English (GB), changeable B
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, language: English (US), changeable C
8 Region FR, IEC/ANSI, language: French, changeable
Region World, IEC/ANSI, language: Spanish, changeable
D
E
System interface (on rear of unit/Port B)
No system port 0
9 IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, electrical RS232
1
2
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, 820 nm fiber optic, ST connector 3
10 PROFIBUS DP Slave, 820 nm fiber optic, double ring, ST connector5)

MODBUS, RS485
9
9
L
L
0
0
B
D
MODBUS, 820 nm fiber optic, ST connector5) 9 L 0 E
DNP 3.0, RS485 9 L 0 G
DNP 3.0, 820 nm fiber optic, ST connector5)
11 IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, electrical, double, RJ45 connector
9
9
L
L
0
0
H
R
DIGSI 4 / modem interface (on rear of unit/Port C)
No port on rear side
12 DIGSI 4, electrical RS232
0
1
DIGSI 4, electrical RS485 2
DIGSI 4, optical 820 nm, ST connector 3
Measuring
13 Basic metering (current, voltage) 0
Slave pointer, mean values, min/max values only for position 7 = 1 and 5 2
14
1) Only for position 7 = 0 4) Transition between the two auxiliary voltage ranges can be selected
2) Rated current can be selected by means of jumpers. by means of jumpers.
15 3) The binary input thresholds can be selected in two stages by means

of jumpers.
5) Not with position 9 = “B”; if 9 = “B”; please order 6MD6 unit with
RS485 port and separate fiber-optic converter.

SIPROTEC 6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit
Function overview
Application 1
• Integrated synchro-check for synchro-
nized closing of the circuit-breaker
• Breaker-related protection functions
(Breaker Failure 50BF, Auto-reclosure 2
79)
• Automation can be configured easily by
graphic means with CFC
3
LSP2187-afp.eps
• Flexible, powerful measured-value
LSP2187-afp.eps
processing
• Connection for 4 voltage transformers,
3 current transformers, two 20 mA
transducers
4
• Volume of signals for high voltage
• Up to 14 1 ½-pole circuit-breakers can
be operated 5
• Up to 11 2-pole switching devices can
Fig. 12/10 SIPROTEC 6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit
be operated
• Up to 65 indication inputs,
Description up to 45 command relays 6
• Can be supplied with 3 volumes of signals as 6MD662
The 6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit is the control unit for (35 indications, 25 commands), 6MD663 (50 indications,
high voltage bays from the SIPROTEC 4 relay series. Because of 35 commands) or 6MD664 (65 indications, 45 commands);
its integrated functions, it is an optimum, low-cost solution for number of measured values is the same 7
high-voltage switchbays. • Switchgear interlocking
The 6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit also has the same • Inter-relay communication with other devices of the 6MD66
series, even without a master station interface with higher
design (look and feel) as the other protection and combined
units of the SIPROTEC 4 relay series. Configuration is performed level control and protection 8
in a standardized way with the easy-to-use DIGSI 4 configuration • Suitable for redundant master station
tool.
• Display of operational measured values V, I, P, Q, S, f, cos φ
For operation, a large graphic display with a keyboard is avail-
able. The important operating actions are performed in a simple
(power factor) (single and three-phase measurement)
• Limit values for measured values
9
and intuitive way, e.g. alarm list display or switchgear control.
• Can be supplied in a standard housing for cubicle mounting
The operator panel can be mounted separately from the unit, if
or with a separate display for free location of the operator
required. Thus, flexibility with regard to the mounting position
of the unit is ensured. Integrated key-operated switches control
elements
• 4 freely assignable function keys to speed up frequently
10
the switching authority and authorization for switching without
interlocking. High-accuracy measurement (± 0.5 %) for voltage, recurring operator actions
current and calculated values P and Q are another feature of the
unit.
11
– PROFIBUS DP
– Service interface for DIGSI 4 (modem) 12
– Front interface for DIGSI 4
– Time synchronization via IRIG B/DCF 77
13
14
15
Application
Application
1 Communication
With regard to communication between
components, particular emphasis is
2 placed on the SIPROTEC 4 functions

required for energy automation.
• Every data item is time-stamped at its
source, i.e. where it originates.
3 • Information is marked according to

where it originates from (e.g. if a com-
mand originates “local” or “remote”)
• The feedback to switching processes is
4 allocated to the commands.
• Communication processes the transfer
of large data blocks, e.g. file transfers,
independently.
5 • For the reliable execution of a
command, the relevant signal is first
Fig. 12/11 Connection diagram of the switching devices (circuit-breaker 2 poles closed,
1 pole open; disconnector/grounding switch 1½ pole)
acknowledged in the unit executing
the command. A check-back indication
6 is issued after the command has been
enabled (i.e. interlocking check, target
= actual check) and executed.
In addition to the communication inter-
7 faces on the rear of the unit, which are
equipped to suit the customer’s require-
ments, the front includes an RS232 inter-
face for connection of DIGSI. This is used
8 for quick diagnostics as well as for the

loading of parameters. DIGSI 4 can read
out and represent the entire status of the
unit online, thus making diagnostics and
documentation more convenient.
9 Control
The bay control units of the 6MD66 series
have command outputs and indication
10 inputs that are particularly suited to the Fig. 12/12 2-pole connection diagram of circuit-breakers and disconnectors
requirements of high-voltage technology.
As an example, the 2-pole control of a
switching device is illustrated (see Fig. 12/11). In this example,
11 two poles of the circuit-breaker are closed and 1 pole is open. All
other switching devices (disconnectors, grounding switches) are
closed and open in 1½-pole control. A maximum of 14 switching
devices can be controlled in this manner.
12 A complete 2-pole control of all switching devices (see
Fig. 12/12) is likewise possible. However more contacts are
required for this. A maximum of 11 switching devices can be
controlled in this manner.
13 A possible method to connect the switching devices to the bay
control unit 6MD66 is shown in Fig. 12/13. There it is shown
how three switching devices Q0, Q1, and Q2 are connected
using 1½ pole control.
14
15
Functions
Functions
Switchgear interlockings 1
Using the CFC (Continuous Function Chart) available in all
SIPROTEC 4 units, the bay interlock conditions can, among other
things, be conveniently configured graphically in the 6MD66 bay
control unit. The inter-bay interlock conditions can be checked 2
via the “inter-relay communication” (see next section) to other
6MD66 devices. With the introduction of IEC 61850 communica-
tion, the exchange of information for interlocking purposes
is also possible via Ethernet. This is handled via the GOOSE 3
message method. Possible partners are all other bay devices or
protection devices which support
IEC 61850- GOOSE message.
In the tests prior to command output, the positions of both 4
key-operated switches are also taken into consideration. The
upper key-operated switch corresponds to the S5 function (local/
remote switch), which is already familiar from the 8TK switch-
gear interlock system. The lower key-operated switch effects the
changeover to non-interlocked command output (S1 function).
5
In the position ”Interlocking Off” the key cannot be withdrawn,
with the result that non-operation of the configured interlocks is
immediately evident. 6
The precise action of the key-operated switch can be set using
the parameter “switching authority”.
With the integrated function ”switchgear interlocking” there is
no need for an external switchgear interlock device. Fig. 12/13 Typical connection for 1½-pole control
7
Furthermore, the following tests are implemented (parameteriz-
able) before the output of a command:
• Target = Actual, i.e. is the switching device already in the
desired position?
8
• Double command lockout, i.e. is another command already
running?
• Individual commands, e.g. grounding control can additionally 9
be secured using a code.
10
11
12
13
14
15
Functions
Synchronization
1 The bay control unit can, upon closing

of the circuit-breaker, check whether the
synchronization conditions of both partial
networks are met (synchro-check). Thus
an additional, external synchronization
2 device is not required. The synchroniza-
tion conditions can be easily specified
using the configuration system DIGSI 4.
The unit differentiates between synchro-
3 nous and asynchronous networks and
reacts differently upon connection:
In synchronous networks there are
minor differences with regard to phase
4 angle and voltage moduli and so the
circuit-breaker response time does not
need to be taken into consideration. For
asynchronous networks however, the
5 differences are larger and the range of the
connection window is traversed at a faster
Fig. 12/14 Connection of the measured values for synchronization
rate. Therefore it is wise here to take the

circuit-breaker response time into consid-
6 eration. The command is automatically

dated in advance of this time so that the
circuit-breaker contacts close at precisely
the right time.
7 Fig. 12/14 illustrates the connection of

the voltages.
As is evident from Fig. 12/14, the syn-
chronization conditions are tested for one
8 phase. The important parameters for
synchronization are:
|Umin| < |U| < |Umax|
(Voltage modulus)
9 ∆φ < ∆φmax
(Angle difference)
∆f < ∆fmax
10 (Frequency difference) Fig. 12/15 Voltage selection for synchronization with duplicate busbar system
Using the automation functions available

in the bay control unit, it is possible
to connect various reference voltages
11 depending on the setting of a disconnec-
tor. Thus in the case of a double busbar
system, the reference voltage of the
active busbar can be automatically used
12 for synchronization (see Fig. 12/15).
Alternatively the selection of the refer-
ence voltage can also take place via relay
switching, if the measurement inputs are
13 already being used for other purposes.
14
Fig. 12/16 Simultaneous connection of measured values according to a two-wattmeter circuit
15 and synchronization

Functions
Synchronization
The bay control unit offers the option
of storing various parameter sets (up 1
to eight) for the synchronization func-
tion and of selecting one of these for
operation. Thus the different properties
of several circuit- breakers can be taken
into consideration. These are then used
2
at the appropriate time. This is relevant if
several circuit-breakers with e.g. different
LSP2493en.tif
response times are to be served by one
bay control unit.
3
The measured values can be connected
to the bay control unit in accordance with
Fig. 12/14 (single-phase system) or
Fig. 12/16 (two-wattmeter circuit).
Fig. 12/17 “Power System Data”, sheet for parameters of the synchronization function
4
The synchronization function can be
parameterized via four tabs in DIGSI.
5
LSP2496en.tif
8
Fig. 12/18 General parameters of the synchronization function
10
LSP2494en.tif
11
Fig. 12/19 Parameter page for asynchronous networks
12
13
14
LSP2495en.tif
Fig. 12/20 Parameter page for asynchronous networks

15
Communication
Communication
1 The device is not only able to communicate

to the substation control level via standard
protocol like IEC 61850, IEC 60870-5-103
or others. It is also possible to communi-
2 cate with other bay devices or protection
devices. Two possibilities are available.
Inter-relay-communication
3 The function “inter-relay-communication”

enables the exchange of information
directly between 6MD66 bay controller
devices. The communication is realized
4 via Port “C” of the devices, so it is inde-

pendent from the substation communica-
tion port “B”. Port “C” is equipped with a
RS485 interface. For communication over
longer distances, an external converter to
5 fiber-optic cable can be used.
Fig. 12/21 Typical application: 1½ circuit-breaker method
(disconnector and grounding switch not shown)
An application example for inter-relay-
communication is shown in Fig. 12/22.
Three 6MD66 devices are used for control
6 of a 1½ circuit-breaker bay. One device
is assigned to each of the three circuit-
breakers. By this means, the redundancy
of the primary equipment is also available
7
LSP2227f.tif
on the secondary side. Even if one
circuit-breaker fails, both feeders can be
supplied. Control over the entire bay is
retained, even if one bay control unit fails.
8 The three bay control units use the inter-
relay-communication for interchange of
Fig. 12/22 Connection matrix of inter-relay communication in DIGSI 4
switchgear interlocking conditions. So
the interlocking is working completely
9 independent from the substation control

level.
IEC 61850-GOOSE
With the communication standard
10 IEC 61850, a similar function like inter-
relay-communication is provided with
the “GOOSE” communication to other
IEC 61850-devices. Since the standard
11 IEC 61850 is used by nearly all SIPROTEC
devices and many devices from other
suppliers, the number of possible
communication partners is large.
12 The applications for IEC 61850-GOOSE are

quite the same as for inter-relay-commu-
nication. The most used application is the
interchange of switchgear interlocking
13 information between bay devices. GOOSE
uses the IEC 61850 substation Ethernet,
Fig. 12/23 Connection for IEC 61850-GOOSE communication
so no separate communication port is needed.The configuration

Like inter-relay-communication, GOOSE also supplies a status
is shown in Fig. 12/23. The SIPROTEC devices are connected
information for supervision of the communication. In case of
14 via optical Ethernet and grouped by voltage levels (110 kV and
20 kV). The devices in the same voltage level can interchange
interruption, the respective information is marked as “invalid”.
the substation-wide interlocking information. GOOSE uses the Therefore, non-affected information still can be used for inter-
substation Ethernet. locking, and a maximum functional availability is guaranteed.
15
Functions
Measured-value processing
Measured-value processing is imple-
mented by predefined function modules, 1
which are likewise configured using
DIGSI 4.
The transducer modules are assigned in
the DIGSI 4 assignment matrix to current
2
and voltage channels of the bay control
unit. From these input variables, they
LSP2228f.tif
form various computation variables (see
Table 12/1). 3
Fig. 12/24 DIGSI 4 Parameter view – transducer packets
The individual transducer modules can be Name of the Max. availability of Required input Calculated variables
4
activated in the functional scope of the transducer module transducers on the channels (= output variables)
unit and will then appear in the DIGSI 4 unit (can be set via
the functional scope)
assignment matrix with the input chan-
nels and output variables from Table 1.
Transducer V x1 V V, f
5
The output variables can then be assigned
to the system interface or represented Transducer I x1 I I, f
in the measured value window in the
display. Transducer packet
1 phase
x3 V, I V, I, P, Q, S, φ,
cos φ (PF), sin φ, f
6
Transducer packet x1 V1, V2, V3, I1, I2, I3 V0, V1, V2, V3, V12,
3 phase V23, V31, I0, I1, I2, I3,
P, Q, S, φ, cos φ (PF),
sin φ, f 7
Transducer packet x1 V1, V2, I1, I2 V12, V13, I2, I3, P, Q, S,
two-wattmeter circuit φ, cos φ (PF), sin φ, f
Table 12/1 Properties of measured-value processing

8
Sample presentation of the measured
value display. 9
10
11
12
13
LSP2189f.tif
Fig. 12/25
14
15
Functions
The connection of the input channels can

be chosen without restriction. For the
1 two-wattmeter circuit, the interface con-
nection should be selected in accordance
with Fig. 12/26. The two-wattmeter circuit
enables the complete calculation of a
2 three-phase system with only two voltage
and two current transformers.
Metered values
3 For internal metering, the unit can

calculate an energy metered value from
the measured current and voltage values.
If an external meter with a metering pulse
output is available, the bay control unit
4 can obtain and process metering pulses
via an indication input.
The metered values can be displayed and
5 passed on to a master unit. A distinction

is made between forward, reverse, active
Fig. 12/26 Two-wattmeter circuit (connection to bay control unit)
and reactive power (± kWh, ± kvarh).
Automation Indication / measured value blocking

6 With integrated logic, the user can set, via a graphic interface To avoid the transmission of information to the master unit dur-
(CFC, Continuous Function Chart), specific functions for the ing works on the bay, a transmission blocking can be activated.
automation of switchgear or substation. Functions are activated
via function keys, binary input or via communication interface. Indication filtering
7 Processing of internal indications or measured values is also Indications can be filtered and delayed.
possible.
Switching authorization / key-operated switch indication input. The indication is passed on only if the indica-
8 The switching authorization (control authorization) (interlocked/
tion voltage is still present after a set period of time.
The filter time can be set from 0 to 24 hours in 1 ms steps. It is
non-interlocked, corresponds to key-operated S1 in the 8TK
also possible to set the filter time so that it can, if desired, be
interlock system) and the switching authority (local/remote,
retriggered.
corresponds to key-operated S5 for 8TK) can be preset for the
9 SIPROTEC 4 bay control unit using key-operated switches. The
position of both keys is automatically evaluated by command
Furthermore, the hardware filter time can be taken into consid-
eration in the time stamp; i.e. the time stamp of a message that
processing. The key for operation without interlocks cannot be is detected as arriving will be predated by the known, constant
removed when in the position “non-interlocked”, such that this hardware filter time. This can be set individually for every binary
10 mode of operation is immediately recognizable (see also page
12/15, Section “Switchgear interlockings”).
input in a 6MD66 bay control unit.
Every change in the key-operated switch positions is logged.
11 Chatter blocking
Chatter blocking feature evaluates whether, in a configured
period of time, the number of status changes of indication input
12 blocked for a certain period, so that the communication line to
the master unit will not be overloaded by disturbed inputs.
For every binary input, it is possible to set separately whether
the chatter blocking should be active or not. The parameters
13 (number of status changes, test time, etc.) can be set once per
unit.
14
15
Functions

The 6MD66 is equipped with an auto-
reclosure function (AR). The function 1
includes several operating modes:
• Interaction with an external device
for auto-reclosure via binary inputs
and binary outputs; also possible with 2
interaction via IEC 61850-GOOSE
• Control of the internal AR function by
external protection
• 3-pole auto-reclosure for all types of
3
faults; different dead times are available
depending on the type of the fault
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults,
4
LSP2229f.tif
no reclosing for multi-phase faults
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults
and 2-phase faults, no reclosing for
multi-phase faults.
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase and
Fig. 12/27 Parameterization of time management 5
3-pole auto-reclosure for multi-phase
faults Breaker failure protection (ANSI 50BF)
• 1-pole auto-reclosure for 1-phase faults and 2-phase faults and
3-phase auto-reclosure for multi-phase faults
The 6MD66 incorporates a two-stage circuit-breaker failure
protection to detect failures of tripping command execution,
6
• Multiple-shot auto-reclosure for example, due to a defective circuit breaker. The current
• Interaction with the internal synchro-check detection logic is phase-selective and can therefore also be used
in single-pole tripping schemes. lf the fault current is not inter-
7
In addition to the above-mentioned operating modes, several or a busbar trip command will be generated. The breaker failure
other operating principles can be employed by means of the protection can be initiated by external devices via binary input
integrated programmable logic (CFC). Integration of auto-
reclosure in the feeder protection allows the line-side voltages
signals or IEC 61850 GOOSE messages.
8
to be evaluated. A number of voltage-dependent supplementary Time management
functions are thus available: The 6MD66 bay control units can, like the other units in the
• DLC
By means of dead-line-check (DLC), reclosure is effected only
SIPROTEC 4 range, be provided with the current time by a
number of different methods: 9
when the line is deenergized (prevention of asynchronous • Via the interface to the higher-level system control
breaker closure) (PROFIBUS DP or IEC 61850)
• ADT
The adaptive dead time (ADT) is employed only if auto-
• Via the external time synchronization interface on the rear
of the unit (various protocols such as IRIG B and DCF77 are
10
reclosure at the remote station was successful (reduction of possible)
stress on equipment).
• Via external minute impulse, assigned to a binary input
• RDT
Reduced dead time (RDT) is employed in conjunction with • From another bay control unit by means of inter-relay
communication
11
auto-reclosure where no teleprotection method is employed:
When faults within the zone extension but external to the pro- • Via the internal unit clock.
tected line of a distance protection are switched off for rapid
auto-reclosure (RAR), the RDT function decides on the basis of
measurement of the return voltage from the remote station
Fig. 12/27 illustrates the settings that are possible on the DIGSI
interface. 12
which has not tripped whether or not to reduce the dead time.
13
14
15
Technical data
General unit data Output relay
1 Analog inputs
Rated frequency 50 or 60 Hz (adjustable, depending
Live contact 1 NC/NO (can be set via jumper:
Factory setting is ”Break contact”,
i.e. the contact is normally open but
on the order number)
then closes in the event of an error)
Rated current IN 1 or 5 A (can be changed via plug-
in jumper) Number of command relays,
2 Rated voltage VN 100 V, 110 V, 125 V, 100 V√3,

110 V√3 can be adjusted using
single pole
6MD662 25, grouping in 2 groups of 4,
1 group of 3, 6 groups of 2 and two
parameters ungrouped relays
Power consumption 6MD663 35, grouping in 3 groups of 4,
3 at IN = 1 A
at IN = 5 A
< 0.1 VA
< 0.5 VA
1 group of 3, 9 groups of 2 and two
ungrouped relays
Voltage inputs < 0.3 VA with 100 V
6MD664 45, grouping 4 groups of 4,
Measurement range current I Up to 1.2 times the rated current 1 group of 3, 12 groups of 2 plus two
Thermal loading capacity 12 A continuous, 15 A for 10 s, ungrouped relays
4 200 A for 1 s Switching capacity, command
Measurement range voltage V Up to 170 V (rms value) relay
Max. permitted voltage 170 V (rms value) continuous Make max. 1000 W/ VA
Break max. 30 VA
Transducer inputs
5 Measurement range ± DC 24 mA
Max. permitted continuous current ± DC 250 mA
Break (at L/R ≤ 50 ms)
Max. switching voltage
Max. contact continuous current
25 VA
250 V
5A
Input resistance, 10 Ω ± 1 % Max. (short-duration) current 15 A
recorded power loss at 24 mA 5.76 mW for 4 s
6 Power supply
Rated auxiliary voltages DC 24 to 48 V, DC 60 to 125 V,
Switching capacity,
live contact ON and OFF 20 W/VA
Max. switching voltage 250 V
DC 110 to 250 V
Max. contact continuous current 1 A
Permitted tolerance -20 % to +20 %
Max. make-time 8 ms
7 Permitted ripple of the rated
auxiliary voltage
15 %
Max. chatter time 2.5 ms
Max. break time 2 ms
Power consumption
Max. at DC 60 to 250 V 20 W LED
Max. at DC 24 to 48 V 21.5 W
8 Typical at DC 60 to 250 V
Typical at DC 24 to 48 V
17.5 W
18.5 W
Number
RUN (green)
ERROR (red)
1
1
(typical = 5 relays picked up + Display (red), function can be 14
live contact active + allocated
LCD display illuminated +
9 2 interface cards plugged in)
Bridging time
Unit design
Housing 7XP20 For dimensions drawings,
at DC 24 and 60 V ≥ 20 ms see part 14
at DC 48 and ≥ 110 V ≥ 50 ms Type of protection acc. to
10 Binary inputs
Number
EN60529
in the surface-mounting
housing
IP20
6MD662 35 in the flush-mounting housing
6MD663 50 front IP51
6MD664 65
11 Rated voltage range DC 24 to 250 V (selectable)
rear
Weight
IP20
Pick-up value (range can be set DC 17, 73 or 154 V Flush-mounting housing,

using jumpers for every binary integrated local control
input) 6MD663 approx. 10.5 kg
12 Function (allocation)
Minimum voltage threshold
Can be assigned freely 6MD664
Surface-mounting housing,
approx. 11 kg
(presetting) without local control,

for rated voltage 24, 48, 60 V DC 17 V with assembly angle
for rated voltage 110 V DC 73 V 6MD663 approx. 12.5 kg
13 for rated voltage 220, 250 V DC 154 V 6MD664 approx. 13 kg
Maximum permitted voltage DC 300 V Detached local control approx. 2.5 kg
Current consumption, excited approx. 1.5 mA
for 3 ms approx. 50 mA to increase pickup
14 Permitted capacitive coupling of
time
220 nF
the indication inputs
Minimum impulse duration for 4.3 ms
15 message

Technical data
Electrical tests Oscillatory surge withstand 2.5 to 3 kV (peak); 1 to 1.5 MHz

capability
Specifications
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 damped wave; 50 surges per second;
duration 2 s; Ri = 150 to 200 Ω
1
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2
Fast transient surge withstand 4 to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 impulses
DIN 57435 Part 303
capability per second;
For further standards see specific ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 both polarities; duration 2 s ;
Insulation tests
tests Ri = 80 Ω 2
Standards IEC 60255-5 and IEC 60870-2-1 rence ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2
Voltage test (100 % test) 2.5 kV (rms), 50 Hz Damped oscillations 2.5 kV (peak value), 100 kHz
IEC 60894, IEC 61000-4-12 polarity alternating, 1 MHz, 10 and
50 MHz, Ri = 200 Ω
3
communication and time synchro- EMC tests for interference emission; type tests
nization interfaces
Standard EN 50081-1 (Basic specification)
Voltage test (100 % test)
inputs
DC 3.5 kV
Radio interference voltage on lines 150 kHz to 30 MHz
only auxiliary supply class B
4
IEC-CISPR 22
Voltage test (100 % test) 500 V (rms value), 50 Hz
Interference field strength 30 to 1000 MHz
only isolated communication
IEC-CISPR 22 class B
interfaces 5
Surge voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 μs; 0.5 J;
All circuits except for communi- 3 positive and 3 negative surges
cation and time synchronization at intervals of 5 s
interfaces, class III
EMC tests for noise immunity; type test
6
Standards IEC 60255-6, IEC 60255-22 (product
standards)
DIN 57 435 Part 303 7
High frequency test 2.5 kV (peak value), 1 MHz; τ = 15 ms
IEC 60255-22-1, class III 400 pulses per s; duration 2 s
Discharge of static electricity
IEC 60255-22-2 class IV
discharge; both polarities; 150 pF;
8
EN 61000-4-2, class IV Ri = 330 Ω
Exposure to RF field, non- 10 V/m; 27 to 500 MHz
modulated IEC 60255-22-3
(report), class III 9
Exposure to RF field, amplitude- 10 V/m; 80 to 1000 MHz; 80 % AM;
modulated IEC 61000-4-3, class III 1 kHz
Exposure to RF field, pulse- 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition frequen-
modulated
IEC 61000-4-3/ ENV 50204, class III
cy 200 Hz; duty cycle 50 % 10
Fast transient interference bursts 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst length =
IEC 60255-22-4, IEC 61000-4-4, 15 ms; repetition frequency 300 ms;
class IV both polarities; Ri = 50 Ω;
test duration 1 min 11
(SURGE),
Auxiliary supply common mode: 2 kV; 12 Ω, 9 μF 12
differential mode:1 kV; 2 Ω, 18 μF
Measurement inputs, binary common mode: 2 kV; 42 Ω, 0.5 μF
inputs differential mode: 1 kV; 42 Ω, 0.5 μF
and relay outputs
Conducted RF, amplitude-
10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM;
1 kHz
13
modulated IEC 61000-4-6, class III 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for
Magnetic field with power 3 s; 50 Hz
frequency
IEC 61000-4-8, class IV;
0.5 mT; 50 Hz
14
IEC 60255-6
15
Technical data
Mechanical dynamic tests

During operation
2 IEC 60255-21-1, class 2

IEC 60068-2-6
3 IEC 60255-21-2, class 1
IEC 60068-2-27
the 3 axes
Vibration during earthquake Sinusoidal
IEC 60255-21-2, class 1 1 to 8 Hz: ± 4 mm amplitude
1 to 8 Hz: ± 2 mm amplitude
(vertical axis)
(horizontal axis)
5 8 to 35 Hz: 0,5 g acceleration
(vertical axis)
During transport
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 5 to 8 Hz: ±7.5 mm amplitude;
IEC 60068-2-27 3 shocks
8 each in both directions 3 axes
IEC 60068-2-29 1000 shocks in both directions of the
9 3 axes

Temperatures
10 Standards
Recommended temperature
IEC 60255-6
-5 to +55 °C 25 to 131 °F
during operation
Temporary permissible tempera- -20 to +70 °C -4 to 158 °F
11 ture limit during operation
(The legibility of the display may
be impaired above 55 °C/131 °F)
Limit temperature during storage -25 to +55 °C -13 to 131 °F
Limit temperature during -25 to +70 °C -13 to 158 °F
12 transport
Storage and transport with
standard factory packaging
Humidity
13 Permissible humidity stress

We recommend arranging the
Annual average ≤ 75 % relative
units in such a way that they are 93 % relative humidity; condensation
not exposed to direct sunlight or during operation is not permitted
14 that could cause condensation



6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit
Processor module with power supply, input/output modules with a total of:
6MD662 - -0 -
1
Number of inputs and outputs see
next
35 single-point indications, 22 1-pole single commands, page
3 single commands to common potential, 1 live contact, 3 x current
4 x voltage via direct CT inputs, 2 measuring transducer inputs
2
1A
1 A / 150 % IN
1
2
3
1 A / 200 % IN 3
5A 5
5 A / 150 % IN
5 A / 200 % IN
6
7
4
DC 24 to 48 V, threshold binary input 19 V2)
DC 60 V, threshold binary input 19 V2)
2
3
5
DC 110 V, threshold binary input 88 V2) 4
Unit version
For panel flush mounting, with integr. local operation, HMI, plug-in terminal (2/3-pole AMP socket)
6
D
For panel flush mounting, with integr. local operation, graphic display,
keyboard, screw-type terminals (direct connec./ring-type cable lugs) E
Region-specific default settings / function and language settings 7

Region DE, 50Hz, language: German, changeable A
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language: English (GB), changeable B
Region US, ANSI, language: English (US), changeable
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language: French, changeable
C
D
8
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language: Spanish, changeable E
System interface (on rear of unit, port B)

No system interface 0 9
PROFIBUS DP Slave, electrical RS485 9
PROFIBUS DP Slave, 820 nm fiber, double ring, ST plugs 9
L 0A
L 0 B 10
PROFIBUS DP Slave, double electrical RS485 (second module on port D) 9 L 1A
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector
Function interface (on rear of unit, port C andD)

9 L 0 S
11
No function interface 0
DIGSI 4, electrical RS232, port C 1
DIGSI 4, electrical RS485, port C 2 12
DIGSI 4, optical 820 nm, ST connector, port D 3
With RS485 interface for inter-relay communication, port C and DIGSI 4 4
With RS485 interface for inter-relay communication, port C and DIGSI 4,
with optical 820 nm, ST connector, port D 5 13
14
1) The binary input thresholds can be selected in two stages by means
of jumpers. 15
1 6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit
6MD662 - -0 -
Full measured-value processing and display A

No measured-value processing and no display F
2 Synchronization
With synchronization A
Without synchronization F
3 Protection function
Without protection functions 0
With auto-reclosure (AR) 1
With circuit-breaker failure protection 2
4 With auto-reclosure and circuit-breaker failure protection 3
With fault recording 4
10
11
12
13
14
15

6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit
Processor module with power supply, input/output modules with a total of:
6MD66 - -0 -
1
Number of inputs and outputs see next page
50 single-point indications, 32 1-pole single commands,
3 single commands to common potential, 1 live contact,
3 x current, 4 x voltage via direct CT inputs
2
2 measuring transducer inputs 3 3
65 single-point indications, 42 1-pole single commands,
3 single commands to common potential, 1 live contact,
3 x current, 4 x voltage via direct CT inputs
2 measuring transducer inputs 4
3
1A
1 A / 150 % IN
1
2 4
1 A / 200 % IN 3
5A 5
5 A / 150 % IN
5 A / 200 % IN (for 6MD664)
6
7
5
DC 60 V, threshold binary input 19 V1) 3 6
DC 110 V, threshold binary input 88 V1) 4
Unit version
For panel surface mounting, detached operator panel, for mounting in low-voltage case,
7
screw-type terminals (direct connec./ring-type cable lugs) C
For panel flush mounting, with integr. local operation, graphic display, keyboard,
screw-type terminals (direct connec./ring-type cable lugs)
For panel surface mounting, w /o operator unit, for mounting in low-voltage case,
E
8
screw-type terminals (direct connec./ring-type cable lugs) F
Region-specific default settings / function and language settings

Region DE, 50 Hz, language: German, changeable
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language: English (GB), changeable
A
B
9
Region US, ANSI, language: English (US), changeable C
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language: French, changeable D
Region World, 50/60 Hz, language: Spanish, changeable E 10
System interface (on rear of unit, port B)
2
3
11
PROFIBUS DP Slave, optical 820 nm, double ring, ST connector 9 L 0 B
PROFIBUS DP Slave, double electrical RS485 (second module on port D)
PROFIBUS DP Slave, double optical double ring ST (second module on port D)
9
9
L 1A
L 1 B
12
IEC 61850, 100 Mbit Ethernet, optical, double, LC connector 9 L 0 S
13
14
1) The binary input thresholds can be selected in two stages by means
of jumpers. 15
1 6MD66 high-voltage bay control unit
Function interface (on rear of unit, port C and D)

6MD66 - -0
No function interface 0
DIGSI 4, electrical RS232, port C 1
2 DIGSI 4, electrical RS485, port C
DIGSI 4, optical 820 nm, ST connector, port D1)
2
3
With RS485 interface for inter-relay communication, port C and DIGSI 4 4
With RS485 interface for inter-relay communication, port C and DIGSI 4,
3 with optical 820 nm, ST connector, port D1) 5
Full measured-value processing and display A
4 No measured-value processing and no display2)
Synchronization
F
With synchronization A
Without synchronization F
5 Protection function
Without protection functions 0
With auto-reclosure (AR) incl. fault recording 1
6 With circuit-breaker failure protection (BF) incl. fault recording

With auto-reclosure (AR) and circuit-breaker failure protection (BF) incl. fault recording
2
3
Fault recording 4
7 1) Not for double PROFIBUS DP (position 11 = 9-L1A or 9-L1B).

2) Only for position 16 = 0 (without protection functions).
10
11
12
13
14
15
Connection diagrams
Bay unit 6MD662
Fig. 12/28 Module 1, indications, commands Fig. 12/29 Module 2, indications, commands 6
10
11
12
Fig. 12/30 Module 4, measuring values commands
13
14
15
Connection diagrams
Bay unit 6MD662
1 or or
6 Fig. 12/31 CPU, C-CPU 2

For unit 6MD662*-****1-0AA0 and
Fig. 12/32 CPU, C-CPU 2
For unit 6MD662*-****3-0AA0
6MD662*-****2-0AA0 (DIGSI interface, optical,
(DIGSI interface, electrical, system interface optical or electrical)
7 system interface optical or electrical)
or
10
11
12
Fig. 12/33 CPU, C-CPU 2 Fig. 12/34 CPU, C-CPU 2
For unit 6MD662*-****4-0AA0 For unit 6MD662*-****5-0AA0
(Inter-relay communication interface electrical, (DIGSI interface, optical,
13 system interface optical or electrical) Inter-relay communication
interface electrical,
system interface optical or electrical)
14
15
Connection diagrams
Bay unit 6MD664
Fig. 12/35 Module 1,

indications, commands
6
10
11
12
Fig. 12/37 Module 4, Fig. 12/38 Module 5,
indications, commands measuring values, commands
13
14
15
Connection diagrams
Bay unit 6MD664
1 or or or
6 Fig. 12/40 CPU, C-CPU 2

Fig. 12/41 CPU, C-CPU 2
and 6MD664*-****2-0AA0 (DIGSI interface optical,
(DIGSI interface electric, system interface optical optical or electric)
7 system interface optical optical or electric)
or
10
11
12
Fig. 12/42 CPU, C-CPU 2 Fig. 12/43 CPU, C-CPU 2
For unit 6MD664*-****4-0AA0 For unit 6MD664*-****5-0AA0
(Inter-relay communication (DIGSI interface optical,
13 interface electric,
system interface optical or electric)
(Inter-relay communication electric,
system interface optical or electric)
14
15
Appendix
Page
Relay characteristics 13/2
Dimension drawings 13/7
Assignment for products 13/19
Order No. index 13/20
Training 13/21
13
Appendix
Relay characteristics
Inverse-time characteristics of TOC relays
1 IEC 60255-3
Normal Very Extremely Long
ANSI/IEEE
Inverse Short Long Definite Moderately Very Extremely
inverse inverse inverse inverse inverse inverse inverse inverse inverse inverse
Fig. 13/1 13/2 13/3 13/4 13/5 13/6 13/7 13/8 13/9 13/11 13/13
2 Relay
7SD5
7SD610
7SJ61
3 7SJ62
7SJ63
7SJ64

4 7UM61
7UM62
7UT612
7UT613
5 7UT63
10
11
12
13
15

Appendix
Inverse-time overcurrent protection

characteristics according to IEC 60255 and BS142.
0.14 1.35
t= 0.02 ⋅ Tp t= ⋅ Tp
(I I )
p −1 (I I ) −1
p
Fig. 13/1 Inverse Fig. 13/2 Very inverse
80 120
t= 2 ⋅ Tp t= ⋅ Tp
(I I )
p −1 (I I ) −1
p
Fig. 13/3 Extremely inverse Fig. 13/4 Long inverse

13
I = current
t = tripping time
Ip = pickup setting
Tp = time multiplier setting

Appendix
Inverse-time overcurrent protection characteristics

according to ANSI (IEEE) C37.112
1
6
⎛ 8.9341 ⎞ ⎛ 0.2663 ⎞
t = ⎜ 2.0938 + 0.17966⎟⋅ TD t = ⎜ 1.2969 + 0.03393⎟⋅ TD
⎝M −1 ⎠ ⎝M −1 ⎠
7
Fig. 13/5 Inverse Fig. 13/6 Short inverse
10
11
12
13
⎛ 5.6143 ⎞ ⎛ 0.4797 ⎞
t =⎜ + 2.18592⎟⋅ TD t = ⎜ 1.5625 + 0.21359⎟⋅ TD
⎝ M −1 ⎠ ⎝M −1 ⎠
15
Fig. 13/7 Long inverse Fig. 13/8 Definite inverse
t = tripping time in seconds

M = current in multiples of pickup setting (I/Ip) range 0.1 to 4
TD = time dial

Appendix

⎛ 0.0103 ⎞
t = ⎜ 0.02 + 0.0228⎟⋅ TD 0.97⋅ TD
⎝M −1 ⎠ treset =
M 2 −1
Fig. 13/9 Moderately inverse Fig. 13/10 Reset moderately inverse
⎛ 3.922 ⎞
13
t = ⎜ 2 + 0.0982⎟⋅ TD 4.32⋅ TD
⎝ M -1 ⎠ treset =
M 2 −1
Fig. 13/11 Very inverse Fig. 13/12 Reset very inverse
t = tripping time in seconds

TD = time dial

Appendix
Relay characteristics, pinout of communication port

1
6
⎛ 5.64 ⎞ 5.82⋅ TD
t =⎜ 2 + 0.0243⎟⋅ TD treset =
⎝ M −1 ⎠ M 2 −1
7
Fig. 13/13 Extremely inverse Fig. 13/14 Reset extremely inverse
8 t = tripping time in seconds

TD = time dial
9 Pinout of communication port
Port A: Port B: Port C/D

10 Time synchro-
nization
System interface Rear service interface or
protection data interface
Pin no. PC interface RS232 RS485 RS485 RS485 RS232 RS485
at front IEC 60870- IEC 60870-5-10 PROFIBUS DP Slave Modbus,
5-103 DNP 3.0
11
12 1
2
–
RxD
P24 input 24 V
P5 input 5 V
Shield (with shield ends electrically connected)
RxD – – – RxD –
3 TxD common return TxD A/A' (RxD/TxD-N) B/B' (RxD/TxD-P) A TxD A
4 – – – – CNTR-A (TTL) RTS (TTL level) – –
13 5
6
GND
–
Shield
–
GND
–
C/C' (GND)
–
C/C' (GND)
+ 5 V voltage supply
GND1
VCC1
GND
–
C (GND)
–
(max. Load < 100 mA)
7 RTS P12 input 12 V RTS –*) –*) – RTS (RTS RS232 used)
15 8
9
CTS
–
–
Shield
CTS
–
B/B' (RxD/TxD-P)
–
A/A' (RxD/TxD-N)
–
B
–
CTS
–
B
–
*) Pin 7 also can carry the RS232 RTS signal to an RS485 interface.
Pin 7 must therefore not be connected

Appendix
Dimension drawings, reference table
Relay Flush/cubicle-mounting version Surface-mounting version Detached HMI

Page Fig. Page Fig. Page Fig.
6MD61 13/14 13/24 - - - -
6MD63 13/10, 13/12 13/19, 13/22 13/13 13/23 13/14 13/24
6MD66 13/12 13/22 13/13 13/23 13/14 13/24
7SA522 13/10, 13/12 13/19, 13/22 13/13 13/23 - -
7SA61 13/9, 13/10, 13/11, 13/18, 13/19, 13/20, 13/22 13/11, 13/13 13/21, 13/23 - -
13/12
7SA63 13/9, 13/10, 13/12 13/18, 13/19, 13/22 13/11, 13/13 13/21, 13/23 - -
7SA64 - - - 13/14 13/24
7SD5 13/10, 13/12 13/19, 13/22 13/13 13/23 - -
7SD600 13/8 13/15 13/8, 13/9 13/16, 13/17 - -
7SD610 13/9 13/18 13/11 13/21 - -
7SJ61 13/9 13/18 13/11 13/21 - -
7SJ62 13/9 13/18 13/11 13/21 - -
7SJ63 13/10, 13/12 13/19, 13/22 13/13 13/22 13/14 13/24
7SJ64 13/9, 13/10, 13/12 13/18, 13/19, 13/22 13/11, 13/13 13/21, 13/23 13/14 13/24
7SJ66 13/15, 13/16 13/25, 13/26 - - - -
7SS522 central unit 13/18 13/29 13/18 13/29 - -
7SS523 bay unit 13/17 13/27 13/17 13/27 - -
7SS525 13/18 13/29 - - -
7UM61 13/9, 13/10 13/18, 13/19 13/11, 13/13 13/21, 13/23 - -
7UM62 13/10, 13/12 13/19, 13/22 13/13 13/23 - -
7UT6 13/9, 13/10, 13/12 13/18, 13/19, 13/22 13/11, 13/13 13/21, 13/22 - -
7VE61 13/9 13/18 13/11 13/21 - -
7VE63 13/10 13/19 13/13 13/23 - -
7VK610/7VK611 13/9, 13/10 13/18, 13/19 13/11, 13/13 13/21, 13/23 - -
7VU683 13/12 13/22 - - - -
13

Appendix
Dimension drawings in mm / inch
Dimension drawings for ¹⁄₆ × 19" housing (7XP20)
4
Side view View from the rear Panel cutout
5
Fig. 13/15 Housing for panel flush mounting/cubicle mounting, terminals at rear (¹⁄₆ × 19")
10
11
12 Front view Side view
Fig. 13/16 Housing for surface mounting, terminals at top and bottom (¹⁄₆ × 19")
13
15

Appendix
Dimension drawings for ¹⁄₆ × 19" housing (7XP20)
Front view Side view
Fig. 13/17 Housing for panel surface mounting, terminals on the side (¹⁄₆ × 19")
Dimension drawings for SIPROTEC 4 ⅓ x 19" housing (7XP20)
Side view Rear view Rear view Panel cutout

7SA610, 7SD61, 7SJ64 7SJ61, 7SJ62, 7UT612, 7UM611
Fig. 13/18 Housing for panel flush mounting / cubicle mounting (⅓ × 19")
13

Appendix
Dimension drawings for SIPROTEC 4

½ × 19" flush-mounting housings (7XP20)
1
5
Side view 1 Side view 2 Panel cutout
9
Rear view 1 Rear view 2 Rear view 3 Rear view 4
10 7SA61/63, 7UM621, 7UM623,
7SJ64
7SJ63, 7UM612, 6MD63 7SA522, 7SD52/53 7UT613
Fig. 13/19 ½ × 19" flush-mounting housing
11
12
13
15

Appendix

²⁄₃ × 19" flush-mounting housings (7XP20)
Sied view Rear view Panel cutout
Fig. 13/20 ²⁄₃ × 19" flush-mounting housing for 7SA613
Rear view Panel cutout
Front view Sied view

13
Fig. 13/21 ⅓ × 19" surface-mounting housing, terminals at top and bottom

Appendix

× 19" flush-mounting housings (7XP20)
1
4
Side view 1 Side view 2 Panel cutout
5
8
* Terminals M and L additionally for 7UT635 and 7SJ647 only
9 Rear view 2
7SJ63, 6MD63
** Terminals H and G not for 7SJ645 and 7SJ647
Rear view 1
7SA6, 7UM622, 7SJ64, 7UT633, 7UT635
10
11
12
13
15 Rear view 3 Rear view 4

7SA522, 7SD52/53 7VU683
Fig. 13/22 × 19" flush-mounting housing

Appendix

½ and × 19" surface-mounting housing (7XP20)
Front view Side view

½ × 19" surface-mounting,
terminals at top and bottom housing 7XP20
Front view
x 19" surface-mounting housing 7XP20
(without sloped FO case)
13
Fig. 13/23 ½ and × 19" surface-mounting housing

Appendix

½ and × 19" housings with detached operator panel
1
5
Detached operator panel (side view) Rear view Panel cutout
10
11
12
13
15
Fig. 13/24 Housing with detached or no operator panel

Appendix
29.5 172 20
225
Dimensions in mm
Mounting Plate 220
`
266
244
Side View Rear View
221
7.3 206.5
180
Ø6
255.8
245
Ø5 or M4
5.4
13.2
Dimensional Drawing
(Front View)
13
Fig. 13/25 Dimensional Drawing of a 7SJ66 for Panel Flush and Cubicle Mounting (Housing Size ½)

Appendix
2 20
150
29.5 172
145
Mounting Plate
3
R P J F
4
244
266
Q N K
5
A
B
C
6 D
7 Side View Rear View
8 146+2
9
Ø6
255.8 ± 0.3
10
245 +1
11
Ø5
12
5.4
13.2 105 ±0.3
13 7.3 131.5 ±0.3
Dimensional Drawing
(Front View)
15
Fig. 13/26 Dimensional Drawing of a 7SJ66 for Panel Flush and Cubicle Mounting (Housing Size ⅓)

Appendix
Front view Side view Panel cutout
Fig. 13/27 7SS523 bay unit in 7XP2040-2 housing for panel flush mounting/cubicle mounting
Front view Side view View from below
Fig. 13/28 7SS523 bay unit in 7XP2040-1 housing for panel surface mounting
13

Appendix
4
Front view Side view Rear view Panel cutout
5 Fig. 13/29 7SS525 busbar and breaker failure protection unit for panel flush mounting/cubicle mounting with housing for wall mounting
9 Front view Top view
Fig. 13/30 7SS522 central unit in SIPAC subrack
10
11
12
13
15

Appendix
Assignment for products
Products applied until now Function Recommended new products

7RP72 Frequency relay 7RW80 (SIPROTEC Compact)
7SD24 Line differential relay 7SD600

7SD510/511 Line differential relay via FO 7SD610
7SD512 Line differential relay via FO 7SD5
7SA500 Distance protection 7SA6, 7SA522

7SJ41 Overcurrent relay 7SR45 (Reyrolle)

7SJ50 Overcurrent relay 7SJ80
7SJ600, 7SJ601, 7SJ602 Overcurrent relay 7SJ80
7SK52 Motor protection 7SK80 (SIPROTEC Compact)
7UT512 Transformer differential relay 7UT612

7UT513 Transformer differential relay 7UT613/7UT63
7UM51 Machine protection 7UM61/62
7SS51 Busbar protection 7SS52

7RW600 Voltage and frequency protection 7RW80
7VH80/83, 7VH60 High-impedance diff. protection 7SR23 (Reyrolle)
7SN60 Transient ground-fault relay SIPROTEC 5

7SV512 Breaker failure relay 7VK61
7VK512 Auto-reclosure and 7VK61
synchronism check relay
7XV72 Test switch 7XV75
7XS50 DIGSI operating program 7XS54

13

Appendix
Order No. index
Order No. Page
1 3PP1326
3PP1336
11/50
11/21, 11/50
4NC5225 11/50
6MD61 12/5
2 6MD63 12/12
6MD66 12/26
7SA522 6/59
3 7SA61 6/23
7SA63 6/24
7SA64 6/25
4 7SD5 7/47
7SD610 7/20
7SJ61 5/17
5 7SJ62 5/43
7SJ63 5/73
7SJ64 5/107
6 7SJ66
7SS52
5/135
9/13
7UM61 11/20
7 7UM62
7UT612
11/49
8/35
7UT613 8/37
7UT63 8/39
8 7VE6110 11/71
7VE6320 11/72
7VK61 10/15
9 7VU683 11/94
7XR6004 11/50
7XR6100 11/21, 11/50
10 7XR9516 7/22, 7/51

7XS5400 3/4
7XS5401 3/4
11 7XS5402 3/4
7XS5403 3/4
7XS5407 3/4
12 7XS5408
7XS5410
3/4
3/8
7XS5411 3/8
13 7XS5416
7XS5460
3/8
3/4
7XS5461 3/6
7XS5490 3/4
15 7XT3300 11/50
7XT3400 11/50
7XT7100 11/50
7XV5100 5/20, 5/48, 5/77

Appendix
Training
Equipment reliability and availability are essential for all owners

and users. At the same time, maintenance costs need to be kept
to a minimum. The liberalization of energy markets presents
new challenges to all; maintaining and enhancing competitive
strength are among today’s most important business goals.
Investment in technical plants and human resources enables
these goals to be realized. Innovations in the technical field
confront the users with the need of establishing, maintaining
and extending their qualification and know-how. Our training
programs are tailored to meet your specific needs. With our
know-how, we can help you to keep ahead.
Our training centers offer training programs comprising an
extensive range of courses covering all the important aspects of
numerical protective relaying. Choosing our courses will simplify
your planning and ensure you of high-quality professional
instruction at a reasonable cost. It is also possible to arrange
training on your own premises thereby reducing costs for group
participation. We will jointly plan a complete training program
that matches your business goals and your particular working
context.
Each course and the corresponding training documents
are available in many languages. On the Internet at
www.siemens.com/power-academy you will find our complete
training program with details of contents, dates, costs and
contacts.
13

Legal notice
Indication of conformity Copyright
1 This product complies with the directive of

the Council of the European Communities on
Copyright © Siemens AG 2017. All rights reserved.
The disclosure, duplication, distribution and editing of this
the approximation of the laws of the Member
document, or utilization and communication of the content are
States relating to electromagnetic compatibility
not permitted, unless authorized in writing. All rights, including
(EMC Council Directive 2004/108/EC) and
2 concerning electrical equipment for use within specified voltage
limits (Low-voltage Directive 2006/95/EC).
rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model
or a design, are reserved.
This conformity has been established by means of tests con- Registered trademarks
ducted by Siemens AG in accordance of the Council Directive
3 in agreement with the generic standards EN 61000-6-2 and
SIPROTEC®, DIGSI®, SIGUARD®,SIMEAS®, and SICAM® are regis-
tered trademarks of Siemens AG. Any unauthorized use is illegal.
EN 61000-6-4 for the EMC directives, and with the standard All other designations in this document can be trademarks
EN 60255-5 for the low-voltage directive. whose use by third parties for their own purposes can infringe
4 The product is conforming to the international standards of

the series IEC 60255 and the German regulation of DIN 57435
the rights of the owner.
part 303 (VDE 0435 part 303). Further standards are ANSI/IEEE
C37.90.0 and C37.90.1.
5 The device has been designed and produced for industrial use.
Disclaimer of liability
The content of this document has been compiled for information
6 purposes only. Although Siemens AG has made best efforts to
keep the document as precise and up-to-date as possible, Sie-
mens AG shall not assume any liability for defects and damage
which result through use of the information contained herein.
7 This content does not form part of a contract or of business

relations; nor does it change these. All obligations of
Siemens AG are stated in the relevant contractual agreements.
Siemens AG reserves the right to revise this document from time
8 to time.
Document version: 08
Release status: 03.2017
10
11
12
13
15

Published by
Siemens AG 2017
Energy Management Division
Digital Grid
Automation Products
Humboldtstr. 59
90459 Nuremberg, germany
www.siemens.com/protection
For more information,

please contact our
Customer Support Center.
Tel.: +49 180 524 7000
Fax: +49 180 524 2471
(Charges depending on provider)
E-mail: support.energy@siemens.com
© 2016 Siemens. Subject to changes and errors. For all products using security features of OpenSSL, the
The information given in this document only contains following shall apply:
general descriptions and/or performance features which
may not always specifically reflect those described, or This product includes software developed by the
which may undergo modification in the course of further OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
development of the products. The requested performance (http://www.openssl.org/). This product includes
features are binding only when they are expressly agreed cryptographic software written by Eric Young
upon in the concluded contract. (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software
written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). This product
Article No. IC1000-K4400-A101-A8 includes software developed by Bodo Moeller.
Not printed, only pdf
siemens.com/protection
KG 0317

SIP4 E8 2017 en PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIP4 E8 2017 en PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Protection, control, measurement, and automation functions

Catalog SIP · Edition No. 8

Selection guide SIPROTEC

Manuals Manuals Manuals Manuals Manuals

Overview of the Documentation

SIPROTEC 4 Catalog: Accessories Catalog:

Selection guide for SIPROTEC and Reyrolle: Reyrolle Catalogs:

SIPROTEC Compact Catalog: Manuals:

SIPROTEC 4 1. Product Selection

Siemens SIP · Edition No. 8 1

Type Description Page

DIGSI 4 Operating software for SIPROTEC devices 3/3

IEC 61850 System Conﬁgurator 3/5

SIGRA 4 Evaluation software for fault records 3/7

6MD63 Bay control unit 12/11

6MD66 High-voltage bay control unit 12/13

7SA522 Distance protection relay for transmission lines 6/39

7SA6 Distance protection relay for all voltage levels 6/3

7SD52/53 Multi-end differential and distance protection in one relay 7/25

7SD61 Differential protection relay for 2 line ends 7/3

7SJ61 Multifunction protection relay 5/3

7SJ62 Multifunction protection relay 5/25

7SJ63 Multifunction protection relay 5/53

7SJ64 Multifunction protection relay with synchronization 5/85

7SJ66 Multifunction protection relay with local control 5/119

7SS52 Distributed busbar and breaker failure protection 9/3

7UM61 Multifunction generator and motor protection relay 11/3

7UM62 Multifunction generator, motor and transformer protection relay 11/27

7VE6 Multifunction paralleling device 11/57

7VK61 Breaker management relay 10/3

7VU683 High Speed Busbar Transfer 11/77

2 Siemens SIP · Edition No. 8

Device application Distance Line

59 Overvoltage protection V>

= basic = optional (additional price) – = not available

Device application Distance Line

67Ns Directional intermittent ground fault protection Iie dir> – – – – – –

11 Circuit breaker test

= basic = optional (additional price) – = not available

SIPROTEC Device Series 2/3

Typical protection schemes 2/16

Solutions for today’s and future power supply systems –

Fig. 2/2 SIPROTEC – Pioneer over generations

SIPROTEC Compact – Maximum protection-minimum space

1 Perfect protection, smallest space reliable and ﬂexible protection

4 The SIPROTEC Compact series is based on millions of operational

6 and reliable recording of input signals)

9 electrical Ethernet rings

15 Fig. 2/5 Feeder protection relay SIPROTEC with HMI

2/4 Siemens SIP · Edition No. 8

SIPROTEC 5 – the new benchmark for protection,

Fig. 2/8 Application in the high-voltage system

SIPROTEC 4 – the proven, reliable and future-proof

9 and integrated CFC.

15 Fig. 2/11 SIPROTEC 4 in power plant application

2/6 Siemens SIP · Edition No. 8

To fulﬁll vital protection redundancy requirements, only those Measuring included

Serial link to station – or personal computer 11

. 3900 Breaker failure

7 may cause relay operation

8 SIPROTEC relays are available with a variety of protective

9 The question as to whether separate or combined relays should

for protection, monitoring and control is becoming more com-

I>>, I >, t > I2 >, t